Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit M03-158 - UNISYSUNYSIS 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S M03 -158 Ste: iX w' QQ 2, JU U O' N 0' vow: W = J W• o LL Q' co a. Z p o. z� U O; ,O N; '0 H. V' LL 0; Z, U 4> O. City of Tukwila Department of Community Development / 6300 Southcenter BL, Suite 100 / Tukwila, WA 98188 / (206) 431 -3670 Parcel No.: 1023049044 Address: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S TUKW Suite No: Tenant: Name: Address: Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: Contractor doc: Mech MECHANICAL PERMIT UNISYS 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S, TUKWILA, WA CHATHAM CO LLC Phone: C/0 RJ HALLISSEY CO -R KOLPA, 12720 GATEWAY DR STE# 105 TERRI IVERSON /ED HANBICKI Phone: 206 264 -9195 IA - PIER 56, 1201 ALASKAN WAY, #201 ACCO ENGINEERED SYSTEMSINC 6265 SAN FERNANDO RD, GLENDALE CA License No: ACCOESI971DU DESCRIPTION OF WORK: INSTALLING NEW HVAC SYSTEM INTO EXISTING WAREHOUSE TURNED OFFICE BUILDING. Value of Construction: $900,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLER /AFA Fees Collected: $264.19 Uniform Mechnical Code Edition: 1997 M03 -158 Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: Phone: Expiration Date:10 /13/2005 M03 -158 12/23/2003 06/20/2004 Permit Center Authorized Signature: r��L lr/iY li �� Date: / 2 -3-e3 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this mechanical permit. Date: 12 /2 5 This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. Printed: 12 -23 -2003 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development / 6300 Southcenter BL, Suite 100 / Tukwila, WA 98188 / (206) 431 -3670 PERMIT CONDITIONS Parcel No.: 1023049044 Permit Number: M03-158 Address: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S TUKW Status: ISSUED Suite No: Applied Date: 10/01/2003 Tenant: UNISYS Issue Date: 12/23/2003 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 2: No changes will be made to the plans unless approved by the Engineer and the Tukwila Building Division. 3: Plumbing permits shall be obtained through the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health. Plumbing will be inspected by that agency, including all gas piping (296- 4722). 4: Electrical permits shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industries and all electrical work will be inspected by that agency (206- 835 - 1111). 5: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be available at the job site prior to the start of any construction. These documents are to be maintained and available until final inspection approval is granted. 6: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 7: All construction to be done in conformance with approved plans and requirements of the Uniform Building Code (1997 Edition) as amended, Uniform Mechanical Code (1997 Edition), and Washington State Energy Code (1997 Edition). 8: Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications, and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. 9: Manufacturers installation instructions required on site for the building inspectors review. 10: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 11: The attached set of plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 12: H.V.A.C. units rated at greater than 2,000 cfm require auto - shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1900) 13: H.V.A.C. systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 cubic feet per minute to enclosed spaces within buildings shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall be accomplished by interrupting the power source of the air - moving equipment upon detection of smoke in the main supply -air duct served by such equipment. Smoke detectors shall be labeled by an approved agency for air -duct installation and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. (UMC 608) 14: Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #1900) 15: Dedicated fire alarm system circuit breaker(s) shall be equipped with a mechanical lockout device. (NFPA 72 (1- 5.2.8.2)) doc: Conditions M03 -158 Printed: 12 -23 -2003 16: Duct detectors shall send a supervisory signal only upon activation. 17: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #1900) (UFC 1001.3) 18: Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 575 -4407 for approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name and Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shut down approval. (City Ordinance #1900) 19: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of The National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 20: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. 21: Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 22: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 512. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. Signature: City of Tukwila doc: Conditions Department of Community Development / 6300 Southcenter BL, Suite 100 / Tukwila, WA 98188 / (206) 431 -3670 Print Name: ('P✓vt y / ( C d 7 M03 -158 Date: / /o Printed: 12 -23 -2003 ..» u... in sir ittv;. .: _ t..: e.... .;.;. — ....�.._.. S. z Z re m 00 w o J = t'— co w g a CO = I— al Z ,- F- 0 Z LLI w O � W H-- u_ ui = O 1— z CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. yt ' Z:�;; .4 j?:"'F. �; ��.' IJI� •13eT ±v'1 v� S i ,;•:,- ^r:::., City 9t King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Site Address: t c4 -1 tsetknq 1 '' ' Au h,\"1, 5 - Suite Number: Tenant Name: (. j •2 S New Tenant: .r... Yes f ..No Property Owners Name: S , 3, .-4iIJL V E ( Co, I Mailing Address: (Z] (2 G � 4 ' T � L ? � ` \ � ' t ) f 2-4 7 1 ICAi<W &. A 1 \) A C 9B1 State Zip Floor: ) 1∎1: . RS 11 t• Name: � . C (G .i Day Telephone: Mailing Address: IA "' p(c SCe 1 STE 2o () 12D1 /$51,e1- ()Q tr t 51 - Ce . (�- •9€ t O! City State Zip E -Mail Address: / (N e S D h C ( * 4 ( x( c acc [ A t ">Z C f ax Number: C2 2 tC • GE IY�EL2AL' HIT Company Name: Mailing Address: Company Name: RAGTOR IIFORNI FAIL ' I p TZ rn c . j►? l ch {t ect.o • City 961 Company Name: 2,ii•St `3 .. IN t Pt.k.E T Mailing Address: 0 J C3 •_ T . �lr -�� ` C O 3 City State Zip Contact Person: --Na t.5 - r 0 F i Day Telephone ZOQ 4--7 . - 7 SSS Tp 1,A Fax Number: ' oC, '-4 7727 E -Mail Address: r f S 5 W cc . C O Contractor Registration Number: ikOWARW o 2 • Expiration Date: **An original or notarized copy of current Washington State Contractor License must be presented at the time of permit issuance** 1 KYT—t c R p"0-(I ACTS Pep. o cp - 5u 1T E, 2 I - j O I S Ni u41-Y - 5e \W\ 910 State Zip Contact Person: et) • H4 N C f<-( Day Telephone: (2Lxv 4 ' 9 (9 s E -Mail Address: Q.. . � j u . t ' O eiAr - kC f S 1 6-01V1 1 Fax Number: ( G z4 15 2S ENGINEEI :0ERECORD - 'AU;pans p yst ti wet` taim e 6 J Mailing Address: �' I t� U a. .EVE SU t Contact Person: f� N MLIVTFC CL(C (` . =` E -Mail Address: Fax Number: C'�D �P 34 99CS City \ State Zip Day Telephone:,( 1 X42 °) '1".!7Yfi Y: i�rwpeR•x;«.:. c -ry , 2 ZCgo • Unit : Type . Qty' ;: Unit Type: , : Qty :' : Type , . Qty ; ;Boiler /Coln ressor: Fumace<100K BTU Air Handling Unit x-10,000 CFM Other Mechanical Equipment 0 -3 HP /100,000 BTU Fumace>100K BTU Evaporator Cooler 3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU Floor Furnace Ventilation Fan 15 -30 HP/I,000,000 BTU SuspendedlWall/Floor Mounted Heater Ventilation System 30 -50 HP /1,750,000 BTU Appliance Vent Hood 50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU Heat/Refrig/Cooling System Incinerator - Domestic Air Handling Unit < =10,000 CFM Incinerator— Comm/Ind .n.r. t. tt` iE tug TnN Z ' «36 0: F' „.. , _;'.f . `.� . z; : + ,x .•i. vyy : : `w '.r, e. ; —irx$ ^� ,? +e +i�s2•tr:r - w .�lr. AS� tlt f�t:•�r'ij.�i. � ^ •.�.: :.9 J t . l�r•"�t3”. � .1 . , .} ....f �iFS.n r •% i'...r k r:7.< .l..t"`:k., ,d......... , r ,.;... .. f . .. ... MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Mailing Address: City Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: I Date Application Accepted: 4 State 042 i' '� � tit Zip Day Telephone: Fax Number: Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date: **An original or notarized copy of current Washington State Contractor License must be presented at the time of permit issuance** Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): S fog Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): ` • Geji/ .44Y4 C xrP,,.st,.r Use: Residential: New .... d Replacement .... ❑ Commercial: New .... Replacement ....❑ Fuel Type: Electric ❑ Gas... Other: P ltiNir `1 Ly � ID� ApP• 40-441 . i o�•0 p mitt lik this i� ?f . F-tt ,�y >�,j - 4 , -,_e �� tu4„ ... '1 J ^,r.! • 1�: fi r . 9= .' , 4 X •'• ! : A .� ' ' ? }:'i.. ?drs�``'iw� 'ti ' .. t"c �l;e,.,;,r }> >.l = .tr1L. �'' ? `7 r- < rv.'$ 'F • . Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWN R OR AUT . ORIZED AGENT: ii Signature: - ►� � ` - —�,�� Date: 1b ` X Print Name: Day Telephone: � e 9 Mailing Address: 'leR 5Cp S r *2OI • AL 5?AN b. 4-4' - 5eA-r't�1E W N - 9 t city sate Zip Date Application Expires: Staff Initials: 1 doc: Receipt City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter BL, Suite 100 / Tukwila, WA 98188 / (206) 431 -3670 Parcel No.: 1023049044 Permit Number: M03 -158 Address: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 10/01/2003 Applicant: UNISYS Issue Date: Receipt No.: R03 -01542 Payment Amount: 264.19 Initials: SKS Payment Date: 12/23/2003 10:57 AM User ID: 1165 Balance: $0.00 Payee: AIR CONDITIONING CO. INC TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 5649 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description MECHANICAL - NONRES PLAN CHECK - NONRES RECEIPT 264.19 Account Code Current Pmts 000/322.100 211.35 000/345.830 52.84 Total: 264.19 26 12/23 971.6 TOTAL 264.19 Printed: 12 -23 -2003 RECEIPT 1 W it 2 Parcel No.: 1023049044 Permit Number: M03 -1 58 Address: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S TUKW Status: ISSUED o 0 Suite No: Applied Date: 10/01/2003 co w . Applicant: UNISYS Issue Date: 12123/2003 .J H co u_ uWO Receipt No.: R04 -00035 Payment Amount: 49.50 g Q D Initials: BLH Payment Date: 01/15/2004 12:17 PM z w User ID: ADMIN Balance: $0.00 Z H I- 0 zi` w W Payee: AIR CONDITIONING CO INC v p ; 0 zz, 01- w ui Type Method Description Amount H U. LL. H Payment Check 5663 49.50 Z 111 Z U =. z TRANSACTION LIST: ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description doc: Receipt City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter BL, Suite 100 / Tukwila, WA 98188 / (206) 431 -3670 MECHANICAL - NONRES Account Code Current Pmts 000/322.100 49.50 Total: 49.50 6 X30 01/16 97i6 TOTAL. 49.50 Printed: 01 -15 -2004 Project: r Cj - Type of Inspection: ›. -fiefs Addres : r � Date Called: SpeciaInstructions: ' Date Wanted: m, Requester' Phone No: INSPECTIO INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Nfd3 - I YI 1 Approved per applicable codes. 1 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: /e),/_ /, 6(1,0 ;92-) 0 Date: Ac,2,, 79(7 El ;47.b04EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: � ed l / Type of Insp ion: • / Address. / //''� (. Date Ca led. Specia I stru ions: t../ e Wanted /0 , 4.rn. � Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 4/42 --i S`io Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: OP )I Date: $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE «SQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: 'Date: Project; i Type of Inspection: • Addr 41 7'/ -- ei- 1 Date Called: nstructions: Specia Instructions: Date Wanted . Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit i lNEcr4ioN CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 (206)431-3670 l Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: / 0 b t.o.e cr. 5-7 d a Inspector: El Approved per applicable codes. Date: $47.OREINSPECTIOf FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: !Date: • Project: i Type of Ins ection: • Address: f ( 1 J 62-1 ! ,I . / , 7" Date Called: i ,i . , ...,' r' ''4 Special Instructions: 1 Date Wafted . Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspect Date: $47.00 REINSPECTIO& REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee m st be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: 'Date: Z IY 00 to o . W = J 1- U) u- 'L i O d = W Z ZO W O co 0 I- 111 uj H U L I O .. W co O ~ z TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Fire Department Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief FINALAPP.FRM City of Tukwila Project Name 641/;c5/ Address. 1 f / /1�( -t� �' Suite # - current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Sprinklers: // Fire Alarm: l•! (.'i_G - 'I Hood & Duct: /' Halon: / \.' Monitor: / i , - -L 4 Pre -Fire: I"/ Permits: f Permit No. /� �} '��` Approved with correction notice issued F/�) 572 ---- Authorized Date Steven M. Mullet, Mayor ?/(6 /a/ Rev. 2/19/98 T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 g S Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 -575 -4404 • Fax: 206 - 575 -4439 Project: L' •. S Type of Ins ection: Zile (2 ..�..v/ lr Address: Date d: Special Instructions: /e. 67 Date Wanted a. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. • r /wa3-45 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 ( 06)43 -3670 orrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: i� A ..1_09 � i 4 t ,�, C. C U 74 :� z � /-cD� Inspector: C / Date: JO' 9-0 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee tust be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project:N /S �.�,�' GUS /�' Type of Inection: 1 i ..I1) Address: / /C.-, / 94si 11442aJ4 f12. Date Called: .v 7- .15 -bq Special Instructions: .._ ///.P/ /---;;" -e T ft /...-/-1 Date Wanted g . 3 - 41/ La.m, p.m. Requester: /2v„6,-.r71- Pone No: _ e06) 3t / — (50745 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PER (206)431 -3670 J Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS/ c 2;) $47. REINSPECT! FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee rrfust be paid at 6300 Southc ter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Receipt No.: COMMENTS: Typ , f Inspection: n ' 1.} C Pa' A0 Ct�6� 6ft4(4- moon — i�"' Date Called* / 11�/ l / Specia Instructions: Date Wnted: l , a,ny, Requester: !1? ttt JJJ Phone — ? q9 1 /VC}\-p • : -c. ���.. —‘ r Pr.,r rOver OL j�SS 1 Proje;ct:/ Typ , f Inspection: n ' `(\ " —yvt Address: <, I ( �a — i�"' Date Called* / 11�/ l / Specia Instructions: Date Wnted: l , a,ny, Requester: !1? ttt JJJ Phone — ? q9 1 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERM! NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION i fr 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Cti` Approved per applicable codes. lEICorrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Va„Jio- Date: .2` t9 El $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Pr ec: A/ < Type Inspection: bt ..- !Yl Adaress: Date Called: t-10' Special Instructions: Date Wanted: / 10 a, Requester: / J v r 1 i Phone No: ( __ (j9 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Inspector: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMI (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: . )3� I L1 ) S Date: Q - 0ZI $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: Date: Project: , Type o7r ,. — I n s: re Specia I 2 r - • fri ciA9 , Called: Date Callec LI A () v, C . 3D Instructions: — TT\ 10-4100 Date anted: a.m. 1-( 2-1 04 CrErtr, Requestery) . Pho; , 1 vr•N Le77 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Rir01 0 6 7 /5- /2 , 8 1 I /) f 1 \,... 1 i J 1 .. ' , .„., . 5 A— j"k1.: ..-, / //' INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206 431-3670 Inspector: Date: Date: in^ El $47.00 REINSPECTIoN FEE RE UIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. r eceipt No.: • II SUMO BAN2111111311181MIIIIIIMINIM, < • u•d 6 0 U)0 WI uj 0 g 5 u_ Z I— 0 z 1— 0. uj 2 0 (0 — 0 1— u j I 0 r _- z W 0 — I= 0 1-- z COMMENTS: S 5/,c_ . Ty. • of Inspection: ' a -i$' 7 0,e-- r., 1 ,/« ,e1/ 0 Adxlr��e s QQ � �� J E. �� /� c/1 e cc v 4- ...2r r- (1 S 9 1-- • � U Spe / 6) `"'r ' f2\ d L.-• z I 44 4 , .4 /./..7....e . Date anted: i x!30 l ( � t, p.m. - 2 . .) S ,-.0 4477 Y4-1Gf-- G! 11 ?, Phone No: 351)\-V, 7 is __ _.,',P . F �. ✓�' - Z-./ h r s^! `r' & M 7/r,..l.Tii14, - ki.1,,C J h t 1I .7L(3-' (% t/A l.r A /Gj f3 I.J. -..4- J -1-01 A l Pr.je t: Ty. • of Inspection: ' a Jn Adxlr��e s QQ � �� J E. �� /� D CalCed: � � • � U Spe / 6) `"'r ' f2\ ( l I �'" Date anted: i x!30 l ( � t, p.m. Requester: 1 ; t'Q ,( /{, p■ir44-110( Phone No: 351)\-V, 7 INSPECT • N NO. El Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PER (206)431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. Date: El $47.00 REINSPECT! N FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project Type o s ction: Address: Date a Speci Instructions: Date Wanted Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION INSPECTION RECORD AO Retain a copy with permit /�°'l PERMI .' 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 OMMENTS: 2 '5 vHt `proved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. ( � n U ✓a � J ;47. REINSPECTIO FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: Date: COMMENTS: / t 1264 A - ;,J Jo >,.Jsu /41'P - A �e1�/ '/ a,aL4- k',,r/s En/1, 9 /►')sli,J ire q - Type of Inspection: R �c� In — 1,� r z r„ -•,ti - rare „/ C s 4 ,a -1,- ".4,‘„L - 2,r-t 0 54Y4- rte- ez..a -z 1 S- en is 5 It ,i ✓r�s / 14r Date Call Z-Z- —09 Special Instruct' ns: l:, / Date Wanted: � ~ '�Z — b Project: l )1/4,1 , �t e Type of Inspection: R �c� In — 1,� r Address: 11 (_,Z , t(r/ 14r Date Call Z-Z- —09 Special Instruct' ns: l:, / Date Wanted: � ~ '�Z — b a.m. P.m. Requester: C Phone No: ) , -)p 1--P, 77 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INS CTION NO. PERMI CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 proved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Date: / — 0i- r: 47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQU)ED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid 'at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Proj t: x Type of t ,spection: 4 Address: , =, AA . / n all) teA1, 5 Date Called: j )5 1 104 Special instructions: 1 C t A ISO -- IC/5 Date Wanted: / its u I 1 (1 P.m. RequesterC ("-/ Pho31611 . • • • •..• • ' , • ' 114,0302 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 (206)4 1- 6 pproved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 4, 7, 1 5,V6 r 0s . REINSPECTIO FEE REQUI • ED. Prior to inspection, fee m St be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt,No.: IDate: 00 IL Qo < 1 ILI Z I- 0 Z F-' LU uj u) 0 — 111 u i t j L I 0 Z w c.) 0 COMMENTS: a P ; �, f fee/ / � E-e AA y � / s 7 r , 1 r a- -ara7- Address: E. � , 1 A 'S UIT 44 / C 9t.- j / 4 /-'^ / rs 4 - . ,s,o %r. S)--- )---"A-til t 4 e4 , G ( 6. ` � l /1..� (...6.',...-.,_,...( 4) ��(1 a r_ae /? / -/ 4' 7-, 6 ,�,-�,, ; ‹ c% ( iE�;i�' 11 4 #6 cs i 4, 17 l!�r _, .), Date Wanted: + / o y ((..m) Requester. ff si C �^ Pr ect: Type Inspectio (: ".1- ft-` • Address: E. � , 1 Date Called: �Q S" O dt I Tfi ?bl Sp ial s ns: —�' . St � P Date Wanted: + / o y ((..m) Requester. ff si C �^ Phon o: -" ti INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION PE 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 I ! 006)431 -3670 VI Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date: 11 $47 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee rhust be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: Date: • COMMENTS: 0 ... Yv4 I � itAA A fl (.. ins) i �r,.� _ 5� � �- V r al 6) Yr.)J - eci T 11% C., 1 ri„,, ) r I A . I !0) 1AI -,..\00 t I «A 4) 1 r --I 6,1 \ . �rnrP ,or,( u. 1; A-t, 1r\Sc1 t4t►Nt SpeSpecial Instructions:` ej ( /4 (l !upon f/j 1\(irr'` rli�( 4 (71-1 0t.,r1,-, P�/ 1 S i os r 1 l -}° `^ Cl 1 ,.-, t r• ,, ( vri, /cA 1 Requester: Phond {V i Ct7 -, La 77 Pr tfa Type of i spection: / v Ad \t � 1 111 ka Date C (led: ( , /..?/D3 SpeSpecial Instructions:` ej ( /4 (l !upon f/j Date Wanted: DI R1/03 m. Requester: Phond {V i Ct7 -, La 77 INSPECTION NO. rnspector: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (20 O Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. (Date f) 2. El S47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: Date: 670 z ~ W r 6 (.) 00 N 0 W = ALL w 2 U. _ . N O ▪ W z � o W I— w 0 O N 0 I_ W w W Z o H O z Sound Power (dB) Octave Band Center Frequency (Hertz) Lw 5 ft 83 ' — N CO *1010 h r 81Q• $ t°. l o`� 125 A-wgtd 250 67 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Top Lp Sound Pressure (dB) OctYe Distance Band 5 ft 50 ft — N CO *1010 h r 81Q• $ t°. l o`� tO tO 8 1p tO III A-wgtd 62 67 End Lp Sound Pressure (dB) °dive Distance Band 5 ft 50 ft �NMe►In tD 1. CO 77 f. tD tD To Mlfl ^^?:1 A-w id 74 64 75 78 78 76 74 69 A -elgtd 63 68 Back Lp Sound Pressure (dB) OctYe Distance Band 5ft SOft �NMe►In tD 1. CO N mtp 4'J tq f. tD tD To Mlfl ^^?:1 A-w id 71 64 Fan Side Lp Sound Pressure (dB) octave Distance Band 5 ft 50 ft N M < 10 tO P. 00 CO 10 CO N �t� Itot`noi; S I A-wgtd 60 - 6s End Lp Sound Pressure (dB) Octave Distance Band 5 R 50 ft x-01 MQ1010 f. co r- N- - - �t� Itot`noi; S A*gtd 83 85 B 1LL)ERS COP Baltimore Aircoil Company Sound Rating Program, 00/1412003 Release, 10102/2000 Data Series V VFL Model : VFL-048 -32M Total Fan Motor Horse Power : 20 HP Octave band and A- weighted sound pressure levels (Lp) are expressed in decibels (dB) reference 0.0002 mlcrobar. Sound power levels (LW) are expressed In decibels (dB) reference one picowett. Octave band 1 has a center frequency of 63 Hertz. CO d CC :6 CODZ Bl daS CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED DEC 2 2 2003 AS NO ED UILDING DIVISION 6 31N30liV i3d OOOZ .T 0 130 V1IMNf 1130 AUIJ O2AI 3 J M 02'-ISB EZ15Z955ZV :Xe3 Sd38 UIY NO19NIHSdi1 BUIL9ERS CO For By October 2003 CITY of TUKWILA OCT 1 4 2003 PERMIT CENTER Structural Engineering Calculations UNISYS 11621 East Marginal Way South Tukwila, WA CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED DEC 222003 A5 NUfL IVI BUILDING D S Seattle Structural Inc 1411 Fourth Avenue Suite 760 Seattle, Washington 98101 -2231 (206)343 -3000 fax (206)343 -3013 INCOMPLETE LTR# EXPIRES 8/07/ 04. 1 fl�.3./58 • ii Seattle Structural Engineer: JKY Location: Seattle, WA ROOF TOP AHUs Weight = 4500 lb Existing roof loads LL = 25 psf snow load DL = 12 psf UNISYS Structural calculations P3006.01 Existing Column Assume one existing column takes the entire AHU weight TS6x6x1 /4 H = 24' Pa = 55 kips Tributary area = 24' x 40' = 960 sf Existing roof load: P1 = 34 psf • 960 sf = 33 kips Additional load from new AHU = 4.5 kips = 14 % increase Total applied load = 37.5 kips < Pa = 55 kips, OK No reinforcing required 10/09/03 page 2 section 1 P: \UNISYS \Calc UNISYS.doc , 51/8x31 YZGLBat grid 3 &7 Va = 140 psi Duration factor = 0.9 A = 158.1 in2 L =40' Tributary width = 24' End shear: V = 37 psf• 40'•24'/2= 18kips 75% of weight goes to column directly or within beam depth from the column. Therefore, only 25% of the weight is added to the beam shear Additional shear: V1 = 4.5 kips ' 0.25 = 1.1 kips = 6 % increase Total shear = 19.1 kips Va = 0.9 ' 140 psi • 158.1 in2 = 20 kips > 19.1 kips, OK 2%x16Y %GLB L =24' Tributary width = 8' End shear: V = 37 psf • 8' • 24' / 2 = 3.6 kips Additional shear: V1 = 4.5 kips / 4 = 1.1 kips = 31 % increase Total shear = 4.7 kips Since the joist is not identified, provide reinforcing for shear Add C10x15.3 w/ Y2 dia A307 bolts @12" oc Support beam at supply and return air shaft L =8' W =4500 lb /4/8'= 141 plf M = 141 '8 ^2/8 =1128 lb -ft V =141 plf •8'/2 =5641b Provide C10x15.3 Seismic analysis UBC1997, Zone 3, Soil type Sp, Ca = 0.36, Ip = 1.0 Maximum Fp = 4 Ca 1p Wp = 4 . 0.36 Wp = 1.44 Wp = 1.44 . 4.5 = 6.5 kips at 3' high AHU installer to provide bolts to take 6.5 kips horizontal force. M = 6.5 kips' 3'= 19.5 k-ft E / 1.4 = T = C = 19.5 k-ft / 8' / 1.4 = 1.74 kips « Snow loads Earthquake loads do not control - w; 6 F v 0` CO o W i ' J i Nu. w o 2 g J. u. O. H = • F O w 2 p ,O 3 E- I .1- . LL' O tii z; t= _' • • • Figure DD-1 — 271/2 - 35 Tons (TC, TE, YC Low Heat) 34 7 1/16" -•I ,,,• 51 1/7 26 3/9' 7 /8' 75 13/Ir SEE ROOFCURB DRAWING FOR DETAILS ON FIELD DUCT nTUP AND CONNECTIONS 2 1/2' NPS CONNECTOR 2 5 /0' (THRU -BASE ELECTRICAL OPTION) 163 15/T6 TOP VIEW SHOWING DUCT OPENINGS IN BASE FOR DOWNFLOW CONFIGURATION 71 1 /4" r 1 1/16" 3 PLACES 80 1/2' 76 13 /116' REAR VIEW DUCT OPENINGS FOR HORIZONTAL UNIT 1 7/8' Dimensional Data 5 /B 3 3/4' BC 1116 5/8' 3 PLACES 1/2' NPS CONNECTOR (THRU -BASE ELECTRICAL OPTION) 8' /8' /16' 5 3/8' 90 5/8' 12 15/16' 167 3/4' 28 13/16' Y 1 5/16' 6 13/16 3 /A' NPT GAS INLET 2 1/2' ELECTRICAL 179 3/4• ACCESS 7/8' CONVENIENCE OUTLET NOTES: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS INCHES. 2. THRU•BASE ELECTRICAL LOCATIONS ARE PRESENT ONLY WHEN OPTION IS ORDERED. 180 5/16' SIDE VIEW SHOWING FRESH AIR AND POWER EXHAUST HOODS FOR DOWNFLOW CONFIGURATION SIDE VIEW SHOWING POWER EXHAUST HOODS FOR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION 1 7/8' Power Exhaust Hoods NOTE: The Two Horizontal Power Exhaust Hoods and the three Horizontal Fresh Air Hoods are located side by side. The Fresh Air Hoods (not shown) extend only 23 15/16" from the end of the unit. 3 3/16' 6 7 /B' 9 3/8' 90 1/16' 14 5/16' 70 7/16' 40 1/8' RT PRC007 -EN QQ � J U . 00 IU N 0 J V) u W J < H =. Z I . 0 Z 1— uj 0 P- U� W W 0 w Z U O~ z SUPPLY OPENING RETURN OPENING 63 5 27 3 /4" H51 1/8 "-1-28 1/2'— r In N Figure DD-1 — 271/2 - 35 Tons (TC, TE, YC Low Heat) 34 7 1/16" -•I ,,,• 51 1/7 26 3/9' 7 /8' 75 13/Ir SEE ROOFCURB DRAWING FOR DETAILS ON FIELD DUCT nTUP AND CONNECTIONS 2 1/2' NPS CONNECTOR 2 5 /0' (THRU -BASE ELECTRICAL OPTION) 163 15/T6 TOP VIEW SHOWING DUCT OPENINGS IN BASE FOR DOWNFLOW CONFIGURATION 71 1 /4" r 1 1/16" 3 PLACES 80 1/2' 76 13 /116' REAR VIEW DUCT OPENINGS FOR HORIZONTAL UNIT 1 7/8' Dimensional Data 5 /B 3 3/4' BC 1116 5/8' 3 PLACES 1/2' NPS CONNECTOR (THRU -BASE ELECTRICAL OPTION) 8' /8' /16' 5 3/8' 90 5/8' 12 15/16' 167 3/4' 28 13/16' Y 1 5/16' 6 13/16 3 /A' NPT GAS INLET 2 1/2' ELECTRICAL 179 3/4• ACCESS 7/8' CONVENIENCE OUTLET NOTES: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS INCHES. 2. THRU•BASE ELECTRICAL LOCATIONS ARE PRESENT ONLY WHEN OPTION IS ORDERED. 180 5/16' SIDE VIEW SHOWING FRESH AIR AND POWER EXHAUST HOODS FOR DOWNFLOW CONFIGURATION SIDE VIEW SHOWING POWER EXHAUST HOODS FOR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION 1 7/8' Power Exhaust Hoods NOTE: The Two Horizontal Power Exhaust Hoods and the three Horizontal Fresh Air Hoods are located side by side. The Fresh Air Hoods (not shown) extend only 23 15/16" from the end of the unit. 3 3/16' 6 7 /B' 9 3/8' 90 1/16' 14 5/16' 70 7/16' 40 1/8' RT PRC007 -EN QQ � J U . 00 IU N 0 J V) u W J < H =. Z I . 0 Z 1— uj 0 P- U� W W 0 w Z U O~ z SUGGESTED AHU ANCHOR BOLT LOCATIONS COORD W/ YEa TYP; SEE B /A8.3 (E) 51031h GIB (E) TS COL BELOW 1. ALL DIMENSIONS AND DCISS11NC AMER SIZES SHALL BE FEW VERFIED. 2. COORDINATE WI MECH ENGINEER FOR NEW CIO LOCATION AND AHU ANCHOR LOCATION. n 5 2*161i GLB, TW 79' l �) t► S AO PARTIAL ROOF PLAN - STRUCTURAL FRAMING FOR NEW AHU C10x15.3, TYP 16' -O' LONG AHU PER TECH i Seattle Structural Engineer: JKY Location: Seattle, WA Rail post Steel landing and exit stair UNISYS Structural calculations P3006.01 Loading per IBC2000 DL = 30 psf including self weight of frame, grating and guard rail LL = 100 psf for stair and exit Hand rails per IBC2000. 1607.7.1 50 plf, or 200 lb 1/3 stress increase CO 0 J CO LL: w 0: *7-1 ; N O � w ~ uj U .w w; E V Oi ul Z UJ c: Anchor bolts for C8 0 V = 11 kips Z ._ 18' span girder L = 18', Trib = 4.33' DL = 30 psf including self weight LL = 100 psf w= 130 psf• 4.33'= 563 plf W= 563 plf • 18' /1000 =10 kips C10x15.3 Wa = 11 kips = 0.72" • 10 / 11 = 0.65" = U332, OK 9' span interior beam L = 9', Trib = 18' DL = 30 psf including self weight LL = 100 psf w = 130 psf • 18' = 2340 plf W = 2340 plf • 9' / 1000 = 21 kips C8x18.75 (Fy = 50 ksi) Wa = 24 kips A= 0.31 "•21/24= 0.27,OK Post M = 11 •2.5 "= 27.5k -in T = 27.5 k -in / 7" = 3.9 kips for (2) top DICA Use (2) 5/8" diameter x 4" embedment DICA Ta = 2. 3.29 kips = 6.58 kips > 3.9 kips, OK Va = 3.84 kips • 4 = 15.36 kips > 11 kips, OK H=4',W= 130 psf Tributary area = 18' • 8.67' / 2 = 78 sf P = 130 psf 78' / 1000 = 10.1 kips HSS4x4x3 /16 Pa = 69 kips 200 lb at 3' high M= 600 lb -ft Sregd =0.6. 12/(0.66.35)= 0.312in3 Use 1, standard pipe S = 0.326 in3, OK Welding Pipe thickness = 0.145" Fb = 0.66 • 35 = 23.1 ksi D = 23.1 •0.145/0.928 =3.61 Use'/;' fillet weld all around 10/09/03 page 3 section 1 P: \UNISYS \Calc UNISYS.doc Sound Power dB Octave Canter Frequency Band Band (Hertz) Lw N- NCO V i[)[O P 0 (00_a - I A•wgtd End Lp Sound Pressure (dB) Od Distance Band 5 ft 50 ft 41-NCO 77 (00_a - I A•wgtd 74 8T 75 78 78 76 74 69 A eytd 63 _ 68 Top Lp Sound Pressure (dB) octave Distance Band 5ft 50ft 41-NCO hrTm8SIn (00_a - I A•wgtd 82 8T Back Lp Sound Pressure (dB) octa Distance Band 5ft 50ft � N(Or IS1m P CO hrTm8SIn N ( f A-wgld 71 _ 84 Fan Side Lp Sound Pressure (dB) octave Distance Band 5ft 50ft .- W et U) (O P CD Q to 10 CO N A•wgtd 80 as End Lp Sound Pressure (dB) OctaVe Distance Band 511 50 ft .- N O) V' U) U) N. n tir-n ti I AiNgtd 83 88 Model : VFL.04842M Total Fan Motor Horse Power : 20 HP Octave band and /*weighted sound pressure levels (Lp) are expressed in decibels (dB) reference 0.0002 mlcrobar. Sound power levels (Lw) are expressed in decibels (dB) reference one plcowett.. Octave band 1 has a center frequency of 63 Hertz CO 'd FILE COPY Baltimore Aircoil Company • Sound Rating Program, 08/14/2003 Release, 10102/2000 Data Series V VFL SC:6 COOZ 61. doS CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED DEC 2 2 2003 AS WOOED BUILDING DIVI ON RECEIVED CITY OF TIIKWILA OCT 0 1 2003 PERMIT CENTER CZLSZ95SZ>: :Xe. Sd38 8IY NOIONIHSV FILE Structural Engineering Calculatio ns For UNISYS 11621 East Marginal Way South Tukwila, WA By Seattle Structural Inc 1411 Fourth Avenue Suite 760 Seattle, Washington 98101 -2231 (206)343 -3000 fax (206)343 -3013 October 2003 INCOMPLETE LTR# _ - CITY ILA ROVED P DEC ?2ZOO AS fitU BUI DING DIVISION W _Oa UO U 0, W : W O N d W F- O z �: uj 2 U � 0 S cl W U 6 O . li l Z ' U= O H RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 4 2003 PERMIT CENTER MO 3 /0 Z Seattle Structural Engineer: JKY Location: Seattle, WA ROOF TOP AHUs Weight = 4500 lb Existing roof loads LL = 25 psf snow load DL = 12 psf UNISYS Structural calculations P3006.01 Existing Column Assume one existing column takes the entire AHU weight TS6x6x1 /4 H = 24' Pa = 55 kips Tributary area = 24' x 40' = 960 sf Existing roof load: P1 = 34 psf • 960 sf = 33 kips Additional load from new AHU = 4.5 kips = 14 % increase Total applied load = 37.5 kips < Pa = 55 kips, OK No reinforcing required 10/09/03 page 2 section 1 P:IUNISYS\Calc UNISYS.doc 51/8x31 %2GLBat grid 3&7 Va = 140 psi Duration factor = 0.9 A =158.1 in2 L = 40' Tributary width = 24' End shear: V = 37 psf • 40' • 24' / 2 = 18 kips 75% of weight goes to column directly or within beam depth from the column. Therefore, only 25% of the weight is added to the beam shear Additional shear: V1 = 4.5 kips • 0.25 = 1.1 kips = 6 % increase Total shear = 19.1 kips Va = 0.9 • 140 psi • 158.1 in2 = 20 kips > 19.1 kips, OK 2'/2 x 16'/2 GLB L = 24' Tributary width = 8' End shear: V = 37 psf 8' • 24' / 2 = 3.6 kips Additional shear: V1 = 4.5 kips / 4 = 1.1 kips = 31 % increase Total shear = 4.7 kips Since the joist is not identified, provide reinforcing for shear Add C10x15.3 w /' /Z' dia A307 bolts @12" oc Support beam at supply and return air shaft L = 8' W = 45001b/4/8'= 141 plf M = 141 • 8A2/8= 1128 lb -ft V =141 plf •8'/2 =5641b Provide C10x15.3 Seismic analysis UBC1997, Zone 3, Soil type S0, Ca = 0.36, Ip = 1.0 Maximum Fp= 4CalpWp= 4.0.36Wp= 1.44Wp= 1.44.4.5 =6.5 kips at 3' high AHU installer to provide bolts to take 6.5 kips horizontal force. M= 6.5 kips 3'= 19.5 k-ft E / 1.4 = T = C = 19.5 k-ft / 8' / 1.4 = 1.74 kips «Snow loads Earthquake loads do not control I s. 1 1 SUPPLY R 0 O ^ RETURN 63 5, . t 27 3/4' I_ --_51 1/8 -28 1/2 r` N Figure DD-1 — 271/2 - 35 Tons (TC, TE, YC Low Heat) 7 1 /1d" -f -, , � St 1/2' 26 3/8' 34 7 /6' 75 13/16' TOP VIEW SHOWING DUCT OPENINGS IN BASE FOR DOWNFLOW CONFIGURATION I 1/4" 1 1/16" 3 PLACES SEC ROOFCURB DRAWING FOR DETAILS ON FIELD DUCT MVP AND CONNECTIONS 2 1/2' NPS CONNECTOR 2 5/8' (THRU -BASE ELECTRICAL OPTION) 163 15/16' REAR VIEW DUCT OPENINGS FOR HORIZONTAL UNIT 1 7/8' Dimensional Data 2 5/6' 3 3/4' 8C 1/16 5/ 3 PLACES 1/2' NPS CONNECTOR (THRU -BASE ELECTRICAL OPTION) /8' /16' NOTES: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS INCHES. 2. THRU.BASE ELECTRICAL LOCATIONS ARE PRESENT ONLY WHEN OPTION IS ORDERED. 5 3/8' 15/16' 167 3/4' 28 13/16' 1 5/16' 90 5/8' 6 13/16 3/4' NPT GAS INLET 2 1/2' ELECTRICAL ACCESS 179 3/4' 7/8' CONVENIENCE OUTLET 180 5/16' 3 3/16' 6 7/8' 9 3/8' 90 1/16' SIDE VIEW SHOWING FRESH AIR AND POWER EXHAUST HOODS FOR DOWNFLOW CONFIGURATION 14 5/16' SIDE VIEW SHOWING POWER EXHAUST HOODS FOR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION 1 7/8' 4 11 Power Exhaust Hoods NOTE: The Two Horizontal Power Exhaust Hoods and the three Horizontal Fresh Air Hoods are located side by side. The Fresh Air Hoods (not shown) extend only 23 15/16" from the end of the unit. Power Exhoust Hood d b-- 32 1/ 6" 37 3/4' 32 I /16' 70 7/16' End of Unit End of Unit RT= PRC007 -EN z ~ W re 5 JU U o o co w W Imo W 0 2 J 11. GC" to F W Z HO Z I' Ili W. O . -. 0 $- W W F 2 u_ ' . O .2E z SUGGESTED Attu ANCHOR BOLT LOCATIONS CHORD N/ AECH TYP; SEE 8/A8.3 (E) 56x394 GIB (E) TS COL BELOW - 1. ALL DIIMNSONS AND COSTING MEIIBER SIZES SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED. 2. COORDINATE W/ MECH ENGINEER FOR NEN C10 LOCATION AND AHU ANCHOR LOCA1C 2xx16>4 GIB, TIP 79.1 [' IN 1 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN - STRUCTURAL FRAMING FOR NEW AHU 16' -O' LONG MU PER MECH 1 /4" = 1' -0" re W -I C.) U O N o, w J U. W O' U a: rn a = W . z � H O; Z W uj C.) O W I- 0 lL : O : O Z Seattle Structural Engineer: JKY Location: Seattle, WA Rail post Steel landing and exit stair Loading per IBC2000 DL = 30 psf including self weight of frame, grating and guard rail LL = 100 psf for stair and exit Hand rails per IBC2000. 1607.7.1 50 plf, or 200 lb 1/3 stress increase UNISYS Structural calculations P3006.01 18' span girder L = 18', Trib = 4.33' DL = 30 psf including self weight LL = 100 psf w= 130 psf • 4.33' = 563 plf W= 563 plf • 18' /1000 =10 kips C10x15.3 Wa = 11 kips A= 0.72 "• 10/11 = 0.65" = U332, OK 9' span interior beam L = 9', Trib = 18' DL = 30 psf including self weight LL = 100 psf w = 130 psf • 18' = 2340 plf W = 2340 plf • 9' / 1000 = 21 kips C8x18.75 (Fy = 50 ksi) Wa = 24 kips A =0.31" • 21 /24 =0.27, OK Anchor bolts for C8 V = 11 kips M = 11 •2.5 "= 27.5k -in T = 27.5 k -in / 7" = 3.9 kips for (2) top DICA Use (2) 5/8" diameter x 4" embedment DICA Ta = 2. 3.29 kips = 6.58 kips > 3.9 kips, OK Va = 3.84 kips • 4 = 15.36 kips > 11 kips, OK Post H= 4', W = 130 psf Tributary area = 18' • 8.67' / 2 = 78 sf P = 130 psf 78' / 1000 = 10.1 kips HSS4x4x3 /16 Pa = 69 kips 200 lb at 3' high M = 600 lb -ft Sreqd = 0.6 • 12 / (0.66 • 35) = 0.312 in3 Use 1,%' standard pipe S = 0.326 in3, OK Welding Pipe thickness = 0.145" Fb = 0.66 • 35 = 23.1 ksi D = 23.1 •0.145/0.928 =3.61 Use 1 /;' fillet weld all around 10/09/03 page 3 section 1 P: \UNISYS \Calc UNISYS.doc UNISYS Tukwila Check Processing Center Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 Mechanical and Electrical Specifications Permit Set September 30, 2003 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 01 2003 PERMIT CENTER 140b -158 Section No. Title Last Revision Date 15010 Mechanical General Provisions September 30, 2003 15060 Piping and Accessories September 30, 2003 15100 Valves September 30, 2003 15120 Expansion Compensation September 30, 2003 15130 Meters, Gauges and Thermometers September 30, 2003 15140 Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves September 30, 2003 15160. Pumps September 30, 2003 15170 Electric Motors September 30, 2003 15171 Variable Frequency Drives September 30, 2003 15190 Systems Identification September 30, 2003 15240 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints September 30, 2003 15241 Acoustics September 30, 2003 15250 Insulation September 30, 2003 15515 Hydronic Systems Specialties September 30, 2003 15708 Closed Circuit Cooling Towers September 30, 2003 15731 Computer Room Air Conditioning Units September 30, 2003 15734 Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems September 30, 2003 15771 Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units September 30, 2003 15786 Water Filter and Cyclone Separator September 30, 2003 15800 Ductwork September 30, 2003 15860 Fans September 30, 2003 15880 Air Filters and Cleaners September 30, 2003 15890 Water Treatment September 30, 2003 15900 Building Management System (BMS) September 30, 2003 15910 Dampers September 30, 2003 15930 Air Terminal Units September 30, 2003 15940 Air Outlets and Inlets September 30, 2003 15985 Automatic Control Sequences September 30, 2003 15990 Mechanical Systems Balancing . September 30, 2003 15991 General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements September 30, 2003 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS UNISYS - Tukwila Page 1 Section No. Title Last Revision Date 15992 Mechanical Equipment - Equipment Starting and Testing September 30, 2003 15993 Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing September 30, 2003 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS UNISYS — Tukwila Page 2 r i z: • .4 rcl t ww� rnd • • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 are a part of the requirements for the work under this Division of the Specification. A. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation the heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection systems as called for in the Contract Documents and according to applicable codes and regulations. • B. Provide labor, materials and accessories required to provide complete operating mechanical systems as described or which may be reasonably implied as essential for a complete operating system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE • SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Comply with current governing codes, ordinances and regulations of the authority or authorities having jurisdiction over any part of the work and secure all necessary permits. Comply with the regulations and requirements of the Owner's insurance underwriter. B. Where codes or standards are referenced, the applicable portions apply. C. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where requirements differ, apply the more stringent. D. Should a ny c hange i n d rawings or specifications be required to comply with governing regulations, notify the Architect prior to submitting bid. E. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of t he t rades in a t horough, substantial, skillful and well- executed manner by competent workers. Provide a competent, experienced full -time Superintendent who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. F. The Architect or Architect's Representative may conduct unannounced field reviews of any work completed or in progress during the Contractor's working hours. A report will be issued to the Contractor if the field review of the mechanical, plumbing and fire protection systems construction has revealed elements of the work, which are inconsistent with the Contract Documents. All items in the report shall be addressed in writing by the Contractor within two (2) weeks and corrections in the field shall be made as directed. September 30, 2003 Mechanical General Provisions Permit Issue 15010 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: AABC American Association of Balancing Contractors ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ADC Air Diffusion Council AFBMA Anti- Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association AGA American Gas Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association CTI Cooling Tower Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association U.L. Underwriters Laboratories B. Definitions: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Where it is stated in the specifications to submit to Architect or Engineer for review, refer to Architectural General and Special Conditions for proper procedures. 2. "PROVIDE" means to "Furnish" and "install ". 3. "INSTALL" means to join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. 4. "FURNISH" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. 5. "AS DIRECTED" means as directed by the Architect, or the Architect's Representative. 6. "CONCEALED" means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or within double partitions, or installed within hung ceilings. 7. "SUBMIT" means submit to the Architect for review. Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -2 unvrl z ;t- Z w 6 J 0 � o • J = • H • N O w gj H= z �. I-0. Z ~ • uj 2 o 0 E9-• of- ur w U �' O • w z: 0 N. 0 H z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that the work is in accordance with Contract Documents. Guarantee work against faulty and improper material, fabrication, installation, start-up and commissioning for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, the longer term shall apply. Correct any deficiencies, which occur during the guarantee period, within 24 hours of notification, at no additional cost to the Owner, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Obtain similar guarantees from subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and sub -trade specialists. 1.06 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and /or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the A rchitect a nd E ngineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media files. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects and free of damage and corrosion. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB's or any other material which is considered hazardous by the Environmental Protection Agency or any other authority having jurisdiction. C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as directed by the Architect. D. Statically and dynamically balance rotating equipment for minimum vibration and lowest operating noise level. E. Provide name /data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous place. F. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people. G. Maintain uniformity of manufacture for equipment used in similar applications and sizes. H. Applicable equipment and materials to be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and manufactured in accordance with ASME, AWWA, or ANSI standards, and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. The energy -using products shall be certified for use in State of Washington and meet State energy efficient standards. Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila I. Fully lubricate equipment when installed. J. Do not operate air systems until ductwork is complete, temporary filters are in place and construction debris is removed. Provide 1 -inch thick fiberglass filter media across the face of F-. Z each return air opening prior to start of each air system during temporary system operation W and system clean out. 6 D J U K. Do not operate water systems until piping has been cleaned and startup strainers are in u) o place. w w J = L. Install floor mounted equipment on a 4 -inch high concrete pad. Concrete work shall be co w provided by another trade. Coordinate size and location with actual equipment used and w O accepted layout shop drawings. g LLa M. Secure equipment with bolts, washers and locknuts of ample size to support equipment. to Embedded anchor bolts to have bottom plate and pipe sleeves. Grout machinery set in H w concrete under entire bearing surface. After grout has set, remove wedges, shims and jack Z = bolts and fill space with grout. H 0 Z I- N. Locate valves, traps, damper operators, dielectric unions, access doors, etc. to be easily . 2 D accessible, either in mechanical spaces or through access panels specified. Obtain v o Architect's approval of access panel locations. o H O. Follow manufacturers' recommendations and instructions for installing, connecting, and w w adjusting equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation. o P. Pressure vessels and relief valves shall be selected, built and labeled in accordance with iu Z ASME. P I O Q. Equipment capabilities, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site operating conditions. Z Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be de -rated with the method of de- rating identified on shop drawings. 2.02 ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Contract Documents are based on materials specified and on equipment manufacturers indicated. Acceptance of alternative equipment manufacturers does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to provide equipment and materials which meet the quality and performance as stated or implied in the Contract Documents. B. Equipment manufacturers listed in individual sections are acceptable for this project, subject to requirements of contract documents. C. Submit proposals to supply alternate materials or equipment, in writing, with sufficient lead time for review prior to the date equipment must be ordered to maintain project schedule. Reimburse Owner for costs associated with the review of the proposed alternative whether alternative is accepted or rejected. D. Include revisions required to adapt alternatives in such proposals, including revisions by other trades. No increase in the contract price will be considered to accommodate the use of alternative equipment. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -4 E. Wherever quality standards (such as serviceability, energy efficiency, longevity or durability), operating results (such as noise levels, quantity delivered or pressure obtained) are specified z — or scheduled, or when the manufacturer and size of equipment, for which such operating results are published or determinable, is specified, the substitution being proposed must 1 z conform substantially to the quality and quantities specified or implied. The substitution must w fit into available space conditions and must function properly in coordination with the rest of 6 v the. system. U 0 No F. Proposed changes and substitutions of systems, equipment and manufacturers shall be w m - submitted and include the following information with the proposal: uj O 1. A description of the difference,between the existing contract requirements and that 2 proposed, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end g result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and _. acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to other trades. N d 2. Schematic drawings and details to supplement the description. H w 3. A list of the contract requirements that must be revised if the change is accepted, z = H including any specification revisions. 1— O 4. Complete list of materials and equipment proposed for use in the change. w I- 5. Include a description and estimate of costs the Owner may incur in implementing the 2 m . change, such as additional space requirements, permits, architectural and aesthetic U o impact, design.costs, tests, permits evaluation, operating and support costs. 0 6. A projection of any effects the proposed change would have on collateral costs to the in H Owner. i w 7. A statement of the time by which a contract modification accepting the change must c— H be issued, noting any effect on the contract completion time or the delivery schedule. u' O 8. A statement indicating the reduction to the contract price if the Owner accepts the w z change. Be responsible for appropriate modifications to all trades. 0 O MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 FEES A. Pay all required fees and obtain required permits related to the mechanical installation. B. Pay royalties or fees in connection with the use of patented devices and systems. C. Provide controlled or witnessed inspection where required by authorities having jurisdiction or by these specifications. 3.02 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's data, samples and test reports as specified. B. Within two (2) weeks after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or after execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, submit a complete typed list of all mechanical equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for the equipment proposed to be provided on this project as well as names of all subcontractors. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -5 • z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. A minimum period of ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Architect/Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data and /or samples are submitted for review. This time period must be considered by the Contractor in the scheduling of the work. H. Submit four (4) bond prints of all items requiring shop drawings. Submit four (4) copies of manufacturers product submittals. Two (2) copies of submittals will be returned. Additional copies are the responsibility of the Contractor. Electronic media will not be reviewed. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -6 C. Within two (2) weeks after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative or after - . execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, prepare an index of all submittals for the project. f' Include a submittal identification number, a cross - reference to the specification sections or `� w drawing number, and an item description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the 5 specification sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal _1 v identification number in addition to the other data specified. All subcontractors shall utilize 0 cri o the assigned submittal identification number. w w I ,.u„ , J H D. After the Contract is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data and samples co u. from the manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, and all subcontractors, for all materials and w 0 equipment as specified. Submit data and details of such materials and equipment for review. 2 Prior to submission certify that the shop drawings, product data and samples are in `` °' compliance with the Contract Documents. Check all materials and equipment upon their F ; N m arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any = 'work which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop drawings as required to comply with H" _ the Contract Documents and the shop drawings. ? F- z O. E. Review of submittals is for general compliance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Comments or absence of comments does not relieve the Contractor from D p compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains solely responsible for U E details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for p H selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing the work in a = w safe manner, and for coordinating the work with that of other trades. F.. .. - _ - � u - F. No part of the work shall be ordered, procured, started in the shop or in the field until the Cu z shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work have been submitted, reviewed and U N returned with either "No Exceptions Noted" or "Exceptions Noted" marked on the submission. ~O H e. z Stamp Interpretation No Exceptions Noted Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents. Exceptions Noted: [ ] Resubmit for Record [ ] No Resubmission Required Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents and Engineer's notations are complied with. . Within this category are two options. A resubmission for our records is required when corrections are necessary. A resubmission is not required if there are only minor comments. Revise and Resubmit The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents; do not proceed with fabrication, manufacture, or construction. The work and shop drawings are not permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate shop drawings. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS I. Submissions will be stamped as follows: UNISYS - Tukwila J. Submit materials and equipment by manufacturer, trade name and model number. Include clear, legible copies of applicable brochure or catalog material. Maintenance and operating manuals are not suitable substitutes for shop drawings. K. Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed. Cross out non - applicable information. Note specified features such as voltages, motor efficiencies, special tank linings, pump seals, materials or paint finishes. Cross out all references to "options ". Cross out statements such as "subject to change without notice" or "not for construction ". Anything not specifically excluded is assumed to be included. L. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, technical data sufficient to verify that equipment meets requirements of the Contract Documents. Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with voltage ratings and schedules. M. Maintain a complete set of the most current reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data on site. N. Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for ductwork, piping work and other distribution services in minimum 1 /4 inch = 1 foot scale, including elevations and locations and sizes of openings in floor decks, walls and roofs. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -7 1 _� MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila O. The work described in shop drawing and product data submittals shall be carefully checked by all trades for clearances (including those required for code compliance, maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and proper coordination with other trades on the job. Each submitted shop drawing to include a certification that related field conditions and requirements have been checked by all Contractors and Subcontractors and that conflicts do not exist. P. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained on submissions or for deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents. The noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, product data and samples, the Contract Documents govern the work and are neither waived nor superseded in any way by the review of shop drawings, product data and samples. Q. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings; product data and /or samples will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. R. Indicate the following in the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing, and on the front cover of each product data brochure. The submittal identification number; title of the sheet or brochure; name and location of the Project; names of the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, and Vendor; the date of submittal; and the date of each correction, version and revision. Number all pages and drawings in product data brochures, test reports or submittals consecutively from beginning to end. Unless the above information is included, the submittal will be returned for resubmission. Resubmittals of shop drawings or product data or brochures shall include a cover letter summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments. 3.03. COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contract Documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation instructions. Drawings are diagrammatic. B. The Contract Documents show the general arrangement of equipment, ductwork, piping and accessories. Follow these drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other trades will permit. Provide offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings. Investigate the site and review drawings of other trades to determine conditions affecting the work and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such conditions. C. Certain products will be provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain the requirements for installation of these products. D. Carefully check space requirements with other trades to insure that material can be installed in the spaces allotted. E. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that they have the information necessary so that they may properly install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items (valves, dampers, coils, etc.) requiring access in order than the ceiling and partition contractors can install access doors and panels in the correct locations. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Consult with other trades regarding equipment so that, wherever possible, motors, motor controls, pumps and valves are of the same manufacturer. z G. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of pipes, ducts and conduits through structural masonry H Z • and concrete walls, roofs and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper re W protection of each pipe and duct passing through building surfaces. 6 m J U H Install firestopping around all pipes, conduits, etc. which pass through rated walls, partitions N o and floors in strict accordance with the manufacturers published approval listing and rating. w = J !— I. Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in structural elements and N e- precast panels or components for mechanical work. w 0 J. Provide required structural or architectural supports and hangers for ductwork, piping and u. -' ? equipment, designed so as not to exceed allowable loadings of structures. co • 0 K. Examine and compare the Contract Drawings and Specifications with the drawings and Z H • specifications of other trades, report any discrepancies between them to the Architect and 1- O obtain written instructions for changes necessary in the work. Install and coordinate the work z F- in cooperation with other related trades. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid ILJ w interferences. v o O P- L . Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to 0 coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on = w the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Architect for i- review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record drawings. u_ O iii M. Adjust location of pipes, ducts, panels, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work to prevent 0 interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of ~ O l- each pipe and duct prior to fabrication. z 1. Right -of -Way: Lines which pitch have right -of -way over those which do not pitch. For example: condensate, steam, and plumbing drains normally have right -of -way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right -of -way over lines whose elevations can be changed. _ 2. Provide offsets, transitions and changes in direction of pipes and ducts as required to maintain proper head room and pitch on sloping lines. Provide traps, air vents, drains, etc., as required to effect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. N. Install mechanical work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of hydronic coils, controls, fan shafts and wheels, smoke detectors, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and any other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, and control components, and to clear the openings of swinging doors and access panels. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -9 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila O. Changes in the cross - sectional dimensions of ductwork are permissible when required to meet job conditions. Maintain at least the same equivalent cross - sectional duct area in accordance with the I atest edition o f the A SHRAE G uide. S ecure the a pproval oft he Architect prior to fabrication of ductwork requiring these changes. P. Provide access panels in equipment, ducts, etc., as required for inspection and maintenance of concealed or internal equipment, dampers, plenums, smoke detectors, humidifiers, controls, etc. Q. In cases of doubt as to the Work intended, or in the event of need for explanation thereof, request supplementary instructions from the Architect. 3.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of the subsoils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or below ground, or other sub - surface conditions which may be encountered during the work. B. Evaluate existing conditions which may affect methods or cost of performing the work, based on examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the Drawings or other information does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactory completion of the work. 3.05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide excavation for the work of this Division. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Remove excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill from the site. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water which accumulates. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95 percent of standard proctor density or 75 percent relative density or as specified by the Architect. W henever u nstable s oil t hat i s i ncapable o f p roperly s upporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. C. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the required minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -10 • -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z D. Trenches shall not be placed within ten (10) feet of foundation or soil surfaces which must = • resist horizontal forces. 1- w ce E. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests have been performed and the installation J v observed by the Architect. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the U O specifications. Backfill shall consist of non - expansive material with limited porosity. Deposit co 0 backfill in 6 -inch thick layers and tamp carefully until the mechanical work is covered by not J = l than 12 inches of material. Backfill and tamp remainder of trench at 1 foot intervals until F- complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface. N w 0 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING g L A. Where cutting, channeling, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces are d necessary from the proper installation, support or anchorage of ductwork, piping or H w equipment, layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, z F equipment or finishes using skilled tradesmen for all required work. z O w B. Do not cut, channel or drill unfinished masonry, tile, etc. unless written permission is obtained ? m from the Architect. Perform this work in a manner acceptable to the Architect. U ON C . Where ductwork, piping or equipment is mounted on a painted finished surface, or a surface . o u to be painted, paint to match the surface. Cold galvanize bare metal whenever support z v channels are cut. 0 D. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as v required. Where these openings are not provided provide cutting and patching to H Z accommodate penetrations at no additional cost to the Owner. 0 I- 3.07 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS A. Prohibited Markings: In all public areas, tenant areas, storage areas and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or installation of any equipment, fixture or assembly which bears on any exposed surface any name, trademark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such object has been obtained, is prohibited. 1 B. Exception: Required Underwriters Laboratories labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed. 3.08 EQUIPMENT PAD AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide concrete pads under all floor mounted mechanical equipment. This includes electrical components, equipment mounted on legs and pipe support stands. Equipment pads shall conform to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 2 -inch margin around the equipment and supports. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and made of a minimum 28 day, 2500 psi concrete reinforced with 6 -inch x 6 -inch 6/6 -gauge welded wire mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors, with all external corners bulinosed to a 3 /4-inch radius. Use shop drawings stamped September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED" or "EXCEPTIONS NOTED" for dimensional guidance in sizing pads. B. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Verify bolts size, number and embed depth recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment with seismic calculations as specified, and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment installed on vibration isolators shall be secured. Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support as recommended by the vibration isolation and seismic restraint manufacturer. C. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws will pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to the partition studs. As an alternative, the mounting screws may pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to 6 inch square, 18 -gauge galvanized metal backplates, which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved non - flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not acceptable. 3.09 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING A. Include all drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and introduction of equipment to the project as required by the construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time it is required, be responsible for its proper storage and protection until the time it is required. Pay for all costs of demurrage or storage. B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by the project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be responsible for disassembly, re- assembly, manufacturer's supervision, shoring, general construction modification, delays, overtime costs, etc., at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION A. Protect the work equipment and material of other trades from damage by work or workers of this trade, and correct damage caused without additional cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work, materials and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site, which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of dust, dirt, water or other obstructing material. Cover and protect equipment and materials from damage due to water, moisture, humidity, paint, spray -on fireproofing, construction debris, etc. Store equipment subject to moisture damage, such as insulation or electrical components in dry heated spaces. C. Provide adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of the materials and equipment against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work until final acceptance. Protect materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred, and moving parts are kept clean and dry. Do not install damaged items; take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair. Replace all wet or damp insulation or acoustic lining. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -12 "•1 3.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ELECTRICAL ROOM PRECAUTIONS A. Do not install piping, equipment or ductwork for heating, ventilation, air conditioning, plumbing or any piping systems not included as part of the electrical work, in the following rooms: switchgear, transformer, generator, elevator equipment, telephone, fire command, security, dimmer or electrical equipment rooms. 3.13 LUBRICATION MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Do not install piping, equipment or ductwork above switchboards, disconnects, panelboards, dimmers, control panels, VFD's, motor control centers, individual motor controllers, electronics, etc or the code required service space for these electrical devices. 3.12 EQUIPMENT GUARDS A. Provide easily (without tools) removable expanded metal guards for all hot surfaces, belts, couplings, exposed fan inlets and outlets, and other moving parts of machinery. Provide tachometer openings in the guards at least 2 inches in diameter, for all belt- driven, gear - driven or variable speed machinery. Comply with OSHA requirements for all equipment guards. - A. Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. If a part requiring lubrication is concealed or inaccessible, extend.a metallic lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and identify it with permanent laminated plastic nameplates. Identify this location in the maintenance manual. B. After installation, properly lubricate all parts requiring lubrication and keep them adequately lubricated with a lubricant recommended by the equipment manufacturer until Owner acceptance. 3.14 DATE OF COMPLETION AND TESTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and acceptance testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and the Contract closeout. Complete any adjustments and /or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date. See individual sections for extent of testing required. i B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed I and outlining when tests will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review within three (3) months after the notice to proceed by Owner or Owner's Representative has been ,given. Update this schedule periodically as the project progresses. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -13 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND OPERATOR TRAINING A. Provide the services of factory trained specialists to supervise the operation of all equipment and systems specified and train the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel for a ten (10) day operating /instruction period. Operating instruction time is defined as straight time working hours and not including nights, weekends or travel time to and from the project. Refer to individual sections for additional training and instruction by manufacturer's trained specialists. . B. Notify the Owner in writing at least three (3) weeks before the operating /instruction period begins. Do not commence until the Owner has issued written acceptance of the starting time and schedule. C. In addition to the operating /instruction period, organize and conduct a seminar to instruct the Owner's representatives in the operation and general preventative maintenance of equipment and systems provided at the completion of the project. D. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper starting sequences, operation, shutdown, and maintenance procedures, including normal and emergency procedures. E. Make arrangements to give instructions by system and not by building areas. F. Provide services of qualified personnel, including each sub - trade, each major equipment supplier to attend seminar and instruct on respective equipment or systems. Seminar shall be conducted by the Contractor and may be video taped and attended by the Architect or Architect's representative. G. Submit seminar agenda, schedule and list of representatives to the Owner for review thirty (30) days prior to seminar. Confirm attendance at seminar by written notification to participants. At seminar, submit final copies of record drawings and operating and maintenance manuals to Owner. I. Submit a written record of the seminar, complete with an attendance list to the Owner. 3.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide operating instructions and maintenance manuals for all equipment and materials furnished under this Division. B. Submit three (3) final copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least ten (10) weeks before the completion date. Provide 8 -inch x 11 -inch, expanding spine catalog binders bound with heavy red fabric, hot stamp lettering on front and spine identifying project name and owner's name. Assemble data in a completely indexed volume or volumes and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -14 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Index the maintenance manual according to the following system: 1. Tab —1.0 Mechanical Systems: Title page identifying project, Owner, Contractor and Engineer with clear plastic protection cover. 2. Tab —1.1 List of HVAC. Plumbing and Fire Protection Drawings. 3. Tab — 1.2 Description of Systems: Provide complete descriptions of the operating sequence for each system. Include detailed system description, with individual components described, and description of how components interface with others and to the complete system. 4. . Tab —1.3 Operating Division: Provide information on locations of components, how to energize switches and controls, how components interface with other components, operation of controls including operational sequence, operational changes for cooling, heating or changeover, how to accomplish the changeover, complete troubleshooting sequence, and failure and safeguards to indicate if equipment goes off -line. 5. Tab —1.4 Maintenance and Lubrication Division: Provide general maintenance and lubrication schedule for major components and include daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual and yearly checks and tasks. Explain how to execute maintenance tasks required for typical equipment such as bearings, drives, motors and filters. Compile this information for equipment separate from shop drawings. 6. Tab — 1.5 List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide list of equipment suppliers and contractors, including street addresses, web site addresses, fax and toll -free telephone numbers. 7. Tab — Certification (2.0, 2.1, etc.): Include copy of test data on degreasing and flushing of hydronic systems, analysis of system water taken at time system was put into operation, hydrostatic or air tests performed on piping systems, equipment alignment certifications, copy of balancing data for air and water systems, copy of valve and damper identification and pipe color code and inspection approval certificates from authorities having jurisdiction. Tab — Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins (3.0, 3.1, 3.2, etc.): Provide material received in compliance with clause "Submittals and Reviews ". D. The manual divider and tabs shall be laminated mylar plastic and colored as follows: Mechanical Systems 1.0 — 1.5 Orange Certification 2.0 — 2.4 Green Shop Drawings & Maintenance - 3.0 — 3.17 Yellow E. Plastic tabs with typewritten card insertions will not be accepted. F. Maintenance information shall include complete lubrication, cleaning, and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable format. Show model and serial number of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, capacity ratings, and actual loads. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -15 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Provide the following equipment maintenance information where applicable: 1. Identifying name and number 2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list) 3. Complete nameplate data 4. Parts list 5. Performance curves and data 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Lubrication charts 8. Manufacturers' recommended operating and maintenance instructions with all non - applicable information deleted 9. List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements 10. Assembly and disassembly instructions with exploded view Drawings where necessary 11. Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable 3.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain on a daily basis at the Project site a complete set of Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall initially consist of a set of blueline prints or AutoCAD files of the Contractor's Coordination Drawings. The prints shall be marked or the AutoCAD files electronically updated to show the precise location of all buried or concealed work and equipment, including embedded piping and valves, and all changes and deviations in the Mechanical work from that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without definite written instructions from the Architect or Engineer. The updated Coordination Drawings shall be used to produce the final Record Drawings that shall be delivered to the Owner in AutoCAD electronic format media upon Project completion. B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed. Suitably identify locations of all equipment by at least two (2) dimensions to permanent structures. C. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall mark all in- progress Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue RECORD DRAWING (3/8 -inch high letters) To be used for recording Field Deviations and Dimensional Data Only (5/16 -inch high letters) Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -16 RECORD DRAWING CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8 -inch high letters) (Printed Name of General Contractor) (5/16 -inch high letters) Date: (Printed Name of Subcontractor) (5/16 -inch high letters) Date: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor and subcontractors shall certify all Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner adjacent to the above marking with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: E. Prior to final acceptance of the Work of this Division, the Contractor shall submit properly certified Record Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review and shall make changes, corrections, or additions as the Architect and /or Engineer may require to the Record Drawings. After the Architect's and Engineer's review, and any required Contractor revisions, the Record Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner on electronic media in AutoCAD format. The Architect and Engineer do not assume any responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the Record Drawings. 3.18 CERTIFICATION A. Any certifications required by the Specifications, in addition to t hose required for s hop drawings, product data, equipment and other items, are to be so certified in writing by the Owner, a Partner, or a Corporate Officer of the firm required to provide the Certification, or by another person duly authorized to sign binding agreements for and on behalf of the Owner, Partner or Corporation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -17 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.19 FINAL REVIEW A. At a time designated by the Owner, the entire system shall be reviewed for compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Be available at all times during this review. B. Demonstrate to the Owner and/or the Architect's personnel prior to the Final Review that systems and equipment have been properly balanced and adjusted and are in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. After these demonstration tests are satisfactorily completed, but prior to the Final Review, submit a written certification that: 1) attests to the Contract Document compliance for this Project; and 2) certifies that the equipment and materials installed in this project contain no lead, asbestos or PCB. Prior to the final review the Contractor shall confirm the following items regarding the status of key elements of the work. Negative responses to any of the items indicate that the construction is not substantially complete, and the building is not ready for a final review. The Contractor shall confirm the following in writing: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Building air systems (fans, air handling units, etc.) are completely installed, commissioned and operating. 2 Building hydronic systems are completely installed, commissioned; operating and pressure tested. 3. Building management system is installed, commissioned and operating. • 4. Building has normal electrical power. 5. The emergency or stand -by power system has been started -up, commissioned, and is standing by. 6. Building systems have been cleaned. 7. Seismic restraints have been inspected as specified. Any required special inspections have been completed. 8. - Building systems have been balanced and copy of balance report submitted to the Architect. 9. Building fire and life safety systems have been tested and accepted by the local authorities. Any required special inspections have been completed. 10. All final wiring connections have been rechecked. 11. All base building lighting systems are completely installed and operating. .12. The domestic cold water system has been installed, flushed, disinfected, tested and operating. 13. The domestic hot water systems are completely installed, flushed, disinfected, tested and operating. 14. The sanitary sewer and storm sewer systems are completely installed, operating, connected to the required city, public or private utilities and pressure tested. 15. The fire protection systems are completely installed, operating, connected to the required city, public or private utilities and pressure tested. 16. There is no deviations or non - compliance with the Contract Documents, or provide a detailed account of any and all deviations or non - compliance. 17. All items on field review reports have been responded to in writing and are resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. 18. All outstanding items on submittals and shop drawings have been addressed in writing and are resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. 19. Schedule the final review only after providing written confirmation of all items above. Provide a minimum of ten (10) days notice. Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -18 h ..J _J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Operate the entire system properly with all systems balanced and all controls adjusted. D. Certificates and Documents required by the Contract shall be presented to the Architect at least two (2) weeks prior to the Final Review. re L E. After the Final Review, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the work to comply v p with the Contract Documents shall be accomplished without delay in order to secure final to 0 acceptance of the work. 3.20 EARLY OCCUPANCY N LL I11 O, 2 A. Be responsible for completing those systems which are necessary to allow partial occupancy of the building even if systems in the unoccupied areas are incomplete. u < N d B. Verify and comply with requirements for temporary occupancy with the local Building p_. _ Department. Z I— O END OF SECTION w D0 c.) O N_: 0 I— w W H U . g w 0 - F 0 Z September 30, 2003 Permit issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -19 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15060 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Piping. 2. Fittings. 3. Jointing Materials. 4. Unions and Couplings. 5. Mechanically Coupled Pipe. 6. Heat Tracing. 7. Welding and Jointing Procedures. 8. Cleaning of Piping Systems. 9. Testing of Piping Systems. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. Section 15100: Valves. Section 15120: Expansion Compensation. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. Section 15240: Vibration isolation and Seismic Restraints. Section 15250: Insulation. Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems. Section 15410: Drainage Systems. . I. Section 15420: Natural Gas Systems. J. Section 15470: Fire Protection Systems. K. • Section 15480: Domestic Water Heating Systems. L. Section 15515: Hydronic Systems Specialties. M. Section 15890: Water Treatment. N. Section 15900: Building Management System. Piping and Accessories 15060 -1 w u6 D VO CO ILI = ' uj 'D 2 ca _ ° . w Z � I- O Z 2 uj U � O N . o 1 w i ' S" U N O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS z A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). ~ w y B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). 6 j JU C. American Water Works Association (AW W A). U co o co D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). H CO u. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ; w O . A. Welding materials and labor to conform to ASME Code and applicable state Labor u- Regulations. Cl) 1 0 B. Each length of pipe, fitting, trap, fixture or device used in any piping system shall be stamped 1... H or indelibly marked with type, weight, quality and manufacturer's name or mark. O zF- w D o . A. Submit the following for review: 0 to 0 H 1. Schedule indicating the ASTM specification number of the pipe being proposed ti Ili w along with its type and grade and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating I- v of fittings for each service. u _ - p 2. Submit shop drawings indicating anchoring details, anchor points, guide details, etc. i Z 3. Submit manufacturer's data for strainers and fittings. , I c N 4. Submit dimensioned drawings locating pipe penetrations through walls, slabs and H other structural elements, anchor and guide locations, etc. z 5. Submit pipe expansion and flexibility calculations. 6. Submit test reports on all systems tested. Tests required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work shall be submitted on appropriate forms to the satisfaction ...i of such authorities. 1.05 SUBMITTALS B. Heat Tracing: Equipment sizes, locations, performance data, installation details, wiring diagrams and controls. Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Strainers: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Y -type and Basket: Mueller Steam Specialty, Spirax - Sarco, Bailey Div. Of CMB Industries, Zurn Industries, Victaulic Co. of America. 2. Handwheel Operated Type: Hellan Fluid Strainer, Eaton, Yale- Towne. 3. Tee Type Grooved End: Victaulic Co. of America. 4. Basket Type: Viking. Piping and Accessories 15060 -2 1 Service Material Type Weight Condenser water, engine exhaust Steel Black Schedule 40, 0.375 -inch wall for 12 -inch and larger Condenser water runouts Copper Type L Hard Type K (buried) Soft Equipment drains and overflows, condensate drains, atmospheric vents, make -up water Steel Galvanized Schedule 40 Copper Type L Hard • . Refer to specific Division 15 sections for services not listed above, e.g., domestic water - refer to Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems. ' MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS B. Welding Fittings: Hackney, Bonney Forge Foundry, (weld -o- lets), Weldbend. C. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings: Victaulic, Grinnell Gruvlok. D. Dielectric Fittings: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Unions: Watts, Perfection, Central Plastics, EPCO, Zurn, Hart. 2. Flanges: Watts, Capital, Central Plastics, EPCO. 3. Flange Kits: Calpico, Central Plastics, Advanced Plastics. 4. Couplings: Calpico, Lochinvar. 5. Nipples: Perfection, Sioux Chief, Victaulic. UNISYS - Tukwila Flange Gaskets: John Crane, Garlock, Manville. Heat Tracing: Raychem Type XL, Thermon Type FLX, Nelson Electric Type LT. G. Cleaning of Piping Systems: Use chemicals as recommended by the water treatment specialist engaged under Section 15890: Water Treatment. H. Testing of Piping Systems: American Gas and Chemicals "Leak -Tee ", Cosgille Scientific "Sho Gas ", Flamort Chemical "Detect -A- Leak ", Highside Chemicals "Leak Finder Foam ". I. Plastic Pipe Fittings: J -M Ring Tight. 2.02 SCHEDULE OF PIPING SYSTEMS Piping and Accessories 15060 -3 z Z � z rt U0 co o CO Ill _1I CO u_ W 2 u. d . W z� I- 0 W 0 • O 0 N W W 9- W z 0 O F. z Service Size Material Type Weight Condenser water Up to 2 -inch Cast iron Threaded 250 pound Wrought copper Solder Standard 21/2-inch to 10- inch Steel Welded, mechanical coupling Standard Coil condensate drains All Wrought copper Solder Standard Drains, vent and relief All Steel, galvanized Threaded Standard Diesel engine exhaust pipe All Steel, black Welded Standard Cooling tower filter piping All PVC with ultra violet light resistant paint Solvent weld Schedule 80 Refer to specific Division 15 sections for services not listed above, e.g: domestic water - refer to Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.03 SCHEDULE OF PIPING FITTINGS 2.04 PRESSURE PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Black Steel, Threaded, 2 inches and smaller.: Schedule 40, ASTM A -120 or A -53: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Cast iron banded fittings, ANSI B16.4, 125 pound class. 2. Malleable iron, ANSI B16.3, 150 pound class. B. Black Steel, Welded, 21/2 inches and larger.: Schedule 40, ASTM A -53: 1. Steel welding -neck fittings, ANSI 816.9. 2. Steel welding -neck flanges and flanged fittings, ANSI B16.5, 150 pound. C. Black Steel, Grooved End: ASTM A -120 or A -53: 1. Rolled groove — Schedule 10 to Schedule 40. 2. Machined groove — Schedule 40. 3. Fusion epoxy factory coating where indicated. 4. Fittings as herein after specified. UNISYS - Tukwila Piping and Accessories 15060 -4 z � r w QQ � J U 0 Ili u- w J L Q 0 d. I--w z � I- 0 Z F- w 0 o � O O H w uj LL s- w Z 0 - H = 0 F .. . z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS D. Copper Tubing, ANSI H23.1: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Plastic pipe and fittings shall carry the National Sanitation Foundation Seal: UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Wrought copper, solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.22, in sizes available with AI4SI /AWS z A5.8 or ASTM B 32 filler metals per Article 2.4, C. _ 2. Cast bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.18, only in sizes not available in wrought f.. z copper. re 2 - ' 3. Cast bronze, threaded, ground joint unions, ANSI B16.18, 2 inches and smaller. 6 D 4. Cast bronze, flanged unions, ANSI 816.24, 150 pounds per square inch class, 21/2 U O inches and larger. N 0 5. Copper tubing flared fittings: bronze castings for flared type joints, ANSI B- 15.26. 1 co ±11 w 6. Victaulic grooved end copper fittings and couplings conforming to ASTM A- 536 /ASTM A-47. co u.. w Brass: �Q 1. Standard weight and red brass pipe, 85 percent copper, 15 percent zinc, ANSI to d H27.1. = w 2. 125 pounds per square inch threaded brass fittings, ANSI B16.15. - Z H F. Cast Iron, Mechanical - Joints: w O Lu -i 1. ANSI A21.6 (AWWA C106), ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104). D o . "' 2. 150 pounds per square inch class. p N . 3. Centrifugally cast, coated, cement lined. 0 H -1 4. Mechanical joints, ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111 -53). = v 1- r` G. Cast Iron, Flanged, ANSI A21.6 (AWWA C106), ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104), 150 psi class: "- z ti i 1. Centrifugally cast, coated, cement lined. U 2. Cast iron flanges and flanged fittings, ANSI B16.1, 125 pounds per square inch ~O H class. z 3. Flanges integrally cast for long straight pipe runs. 4. Flanges may be threaded in areas requiring many fittings. Where field joints require close dimensional tolerance for make -up length of piping. 1. Threaded: Schedule 80. 2. Non- threaded except as noted: Schedule 40. - 3. Unplasticized chlorinated polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (CPVC): ASTM D -2846. 4. Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (PVC) bell -end, AWWA C -900. 5. Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (PVC) Schedule 40 and 80: ASTM D -1785. 6. Polyethylene (PE) Schedule 40: ASTM D -2104. 7. Fittings: a. Unplasticized Polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (PVC) pressure type: (1) Socket type: (a) ASTM D -2466, Schedule 40. (b) ASTM D -2467, Schedule 80. (2) Threaded type: ASTM D -2464, Schedule 80. (3) With National Sanitation Foundation Seal. Piping and Accessories 15060 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Polyethylene (PE): (1) Insert type: ASTM D -2609. (2) Butt fusion type: ASTM D -3261, ASTM D -2610, Schedule 40. z 2.05 JOINING MATERIALS: w ft 2 A. Gaskets shall be rated ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free full faced or flat ring 6 o type to suit flange facings. Selected from one of the following materials: o ID 1. General service, water, air, natural gas: 1/16 -inch thick, non - asbestos. Crane Style J H 333 or approved equal. co u • 2. PVC piping applications: 1/8 -inch thick, Durometer 65 to 75; Goodrich "Koroseal ", w 0 Grade 116 polyvinyl chloride or approved equal. 2 3. Hot water: Red rubber, ASTM D1330, 1/16 -inch thick; Crane Style 555 or approved g Q equal. N 4. Gaskets shall be coated with thread lubricant when being installed. = d I- w B. Pipe threads shall be ANSI B2.1. z H I- O Z I- C . Flange bolts and nuts shall be rated ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel. D. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping 8 c system manufacturer. 0 E- _ w - E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to F v ASTM B813. u_ c z 1. 100% lead free, silver bearing solders equivalent to: v D a. "Silverflo" by Canfield. H H b. "Stay -Safe Bridget" by J.W. Harris. z 2. 95% tin and 5% antimony composition. A. Steel Piping 2 inches and smaller: ASTM A197 /ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use unions of a pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but less than 250 pounds square inch, ground joint. Brazing Filler Metals: 1. General Duty: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys, unless otherwise indicated equivalent to: a. "Stay- Silv 15" by J.W. Harris. b. "Sil Can 15" by Canfield. 2. Refrigerant Piping: AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated equivalent to: a. "Safety- Silv45" by J.W. Harris. b. "Sil Can 45" by Canfield. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.06 UNIONS: 'September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Piping and Accessories 15060 -6 ■AI aaq MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Steel Piping 2 inches and larger: ASTM A181 or A105, Grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding neck, or slip -on pattern and of a pressure class compatible with that Specified for valves, piping specialties and fi ttings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller than 21/2 inches may be used as required for connecting to equipment and piping specialties. Use raised face flanges ANSI 816.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI 816.1 flat face flanges with full face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. Gasket material to be non - asbestos and suitable for pressures and temperatures of the piping system. C. Copper Piping: Nibco No. 633. 2.07 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS: A. Unions: 1. 11/4 inches and smaller: EPCO Model FX or approved equal: a. 250 pounds per square inch WOG. b. Provide standard gaskets for plumbing, high temperature gaskets for heating. _c. Female pipe thread by solder end connections, non - asbestos gaskets, having a minimum pressure rating of 250 psig at not less than the design operating temperature of the fluid conveyed. d. Clearflow dielectric waterways. 2. 1% inches and larger: EPCO Model X or approved equal: a. Brass half- union, ANSI B16.1, 175 pounds per square inch WOG. b. Clearflow dielectric waterways. c. Steel weld neck by copper solder joint end connections, non - asbestos gaskets, having a minimum pressure rating of 125 psig at not less than the design operating temperature of the fluid being conveyed. B. Insulating Flanges: 1. Dielectric - Flange Kits: Provide companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full -face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 2. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts, 150 or 300 psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. 3. 2 inches and smaller: Walter Vallett Company, V line or approved equal. 4. 2% inches and larger: Brass half- union, ANSI 816.1, 175 pounds per square inch WOG, EPCO Model X or approved equal. C. Couplings: Provide galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, threaded ends and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225° F. D. Nipples: Provide electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225° F. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Piping and Accessories 15060 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.08 MECHANICALLY COUPLED GROOVED END PIPING SYSTEM: A. Provide mechanically coupled grooved end fittings and pipe similar to Victaulic roll grooved products manufactured under ISO 9001 certification. B. The following services may use mechanical grooved pipe connections within the building in mechanical spaces and above accessible ceilings. Mechanical shafts and chases are not considered accessible. C. Piping Components: 2.09 STRAINERS A. Provide screwed ends up to 2 -inch size, flanged 2Y2 -inch and larger. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Grooved couplings shall consist of two or more pieces of ductile or malleable iron. Coupling gaskets shall be a synthetic rubber gasket with a central cavity pressure responsive design. Coupling bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel, trackhead conforming to physical properties of ASTM A -183. Use Style 77 couplings for all joints within 10 feet of riser connections. Grooved fittings, couplings, valves and gaskets must be manufactured under ISO 9001. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. 2. Make full size branch connections for piping 2 inches and larger with manufactured grooved end tees. Branch connections for less than full size shall be made with hole cut products. Style 920 or Style 921 branch connections with locating collar engaging into hole or Style 72 outlet coupling used to joint grooved pipe and to create a branch connection. Provide gaskets for branch connection using Grade "E" EPDM Compound with working temperature of minus 30 to 230 degrees F. Gaskets must be ISO 9001 certified. Gaskets shall be provided by the same manufacturer that provides the coupling housing. 3. Provide flanges for all connections to flanged components as follows: a. Style 741 (2 inches or larger) for connection to ANSI class 125 and 150 flanged components. b. Style 743 (2 through 12 inches) for connection to Class 300 flanged components. 4. Provide full -flow cast fittings, manufactured under ISO 9001 with grooves to accept grooved end couplings as recommended by the manufacturer: a. Standard Fittings: Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A -536 (Grade 65- 45 -12), painted with a rust inhibiting modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot - dip galvanized to ASTM A -153 or zinc electroplated to ASTM B-633, as required. b. Standard Steel Elbow Fittings (14 -24 inches): Forged steel conforming to ASTM A -106, Grade B (0.375 inch wall) painted with rust inhibiting modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot -dip galvanized to ASTM A -153. c. Mechanical -Tee: Style 920 fittings with malleable iron housings may be used for up to 2 -inch outlet size. Piping and Accessories 15060 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Body: z 1. Up to 150 pounds per square inch: Y -type; cast iron body; bolted or threaded screen retainer tapped for a blowoff valve; threaded body in sizes through 2 -inch and rated re � at not less than 175 psi WOG; flanged body in sizes over 2 -inch and rated at not less than 125 psi WOG at 240 degrees F. Cast iron body with clamped cover, tapped for -J v a blowoff valve; 125 psig flanged body for 2% -inch and larger. co p 2. Up to 150 pounds square inch, basket type: Cast iron body with clamped cover; co w body tapped for a blowoff valve; 125 psig flanged body for 2% -inch and larger. _i H u) u_ C. Strainer screen shall be 316 stainless steel or monel, reinforced, with free area not less than w 0 2% times inlet area. J 1: Perforations: N D a. Water: (1) Up to 2 -inch: 1/32 inches. I' _ (2) 2% -inch to 8 inch: 1/8 inches. Z E' F- O z t- D. - Y -Type: D in 1. Screwed: Faced cap, straight thread and gasket, Muessco No. 11M or approved 0 cF2 . equal p F.. 2. Ranged: Bolted cover, Muessco No. 751 or No. 752 or approved equal. = w F - U E. Grooved End Type: Tee pattern grooved joint for vertical or horizontal installation. ~ u- O w U O A. Heat tracing cable shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG tinned copper bus wires, embedded in z parallel, in a self - regulating semi - conductive core that varies its power output to respond to temperature along its length. 2.10 HEAT TRACING B. Heater to be capable of being crossed over itself without overheating and of being cut to length in the field. C. Cover cable with a cross - linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. Protect cable with a tinned copper braid. Cable shall be approved for use without ground fault protection of the electric branch circuit. D. Heat tracing cable shall operate on line voltage of 120 volts without the use of transformers. E. Manufacturer shall provide power connection, end seals, splice and tee kits for a complete Underwriters' ' Laboratories listed system. Heat tracing cable shall be sized using manufacturer's standard procedure and shall maintain fluid within pipe at 40° F when outside temperature is minus .10° F. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Piping and Accessories 15060 -9 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila CO ill J = I. Required output rating is in watts per foot at 50° F, based on 1 -inch fiberglass insulation on co u_ metal piping. Minimum Ambient minus 10° F. U 0 1. 4 -inch pipe or less: 5 watts per foot. • --, g Q ca P PART 3 — EXECUTION H w z� 1- O Z I- A. In addition to applicable portions of the Part 3, refer to the following sections for installation, w testing and cleaning requirements for specific piping systems. v p O ( L 1. Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems; Domestic Cold, Hot Water, Hot Water 01— Circulating Piping Systems. = w 2. Section 15410: Drainage Systems; Waste, Vent and Storm Water. i— i= 3. Section 15420: Natural Gas Systems; Natural Gas. L I O 4. Section 15470: Fire Protection Systems. tii z V N 3.02 INSTALLATION ~ 1 z 3.01 F. Provide a line voltage thermostat for on -off control of heat tracing cable by sensing ambient temperature at the traced pipe and turn heat tracing on when outside temperature is below z 35° F and turn the heat tracing off when outside temperature is above 35° F. _ G. Provide and install manufacturer's recommended glass cloth adhesive tape and "Electrically c Heat - Traced Pipe" labels at maximum of 30 -foot centers. J v 00 H. Each circuit shall be protected with a 30 milliamp ground -fault protection device. 0 APPLICATION A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Except as otherwise indicated protect piping as specified below: a. Allowance for thermal expansion and contraction shall be provided for piping passing through a wall, floor, ceiling or partition by wrapping with an approved tape or pipe insulation, or by installing through an appropriately sized sleeve to allow for thermal movement. b. Protection against abrasion shall be provided where piping comes in contact with other building members by wrapping with an approved tape, pipe insulation or otherwise suitable method of isolation. c. No ashes, cinders, refuse, stones, boulders or other materials that can damage or break the piping or promote corrosive action shall be used in backfilling any trench or excavation in which piping is installed. 2. Install piping at indicated slope free of sags, bends, and kinks. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Support all piping per Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. 3. Brace all piping per Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. 4. Clean off scale, rust and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping. 5. Install (at traps, humidifiers, instruments, etc., and wherever else directed) approved unions, to permit easy connection and disconnection. Piping and Accessories 15060 -10 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 6. Make riser branches and other offsets with 4 -elbow swings including copper risers and branches. 7. After systems are in operation, if coils do not circulate quickly and noiselessly (due to trapped or airbound connections), make all necessary corrections to the work including altering finished construction and refinishing without additional cost. 8. Make piping connections to coils, and equipment with offsets provided with screwed or flanged unions so arranged that the equipment can be serviced or removed without dismantling the piping. Do not screw unions directly to coil header piping connections. 9. Use main sized saddle type branch connections for directly connecting branch lines to main piping lines in steel piping if main is at least one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6 -inch main and if main is at least two pipe sizes larger than branch for 8 -inch and larger main. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. 10. Cap all openings in pipes during progress of the work. 11. Correct leaks in piping immediately using new materials. Leak - sealing compounds or peening is not permitted. 12. Install drains throughout the systems to permit complete drainage. 13. Not acceptable: mitered ells, bullhead tees, notched tees, bushings on threaded piping. 14. Do not allow any other subcontractor (electrical, telephone company, BMS, elevator, etc.) to electrically ground to any mechanical system. 15. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Encase underground piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. Arrangement: 1. Except for large scale details, piping is diagrammatically indicated. Install generally as shown. 2. Do not scale Drawings for exact location of piping. 3. Install piping to best suit field conditions and coordinate.with other trades. 4. Piping arrangement: Arrange piping along walls in horizontal groups in an organized, orderly, well executed mariner. Each group shall be in one plane if possible. Maintain required slope. 5. Do not sleeve structural members without consent of Architect. 6. Maintain 1 -inch clearance from adjacent work, including insulation, except as noted or approved. 7. Install piping concealed above as high as possible above ceilings or in walls unless otherwise indicated. install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights that do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. Expansion, Contraction and Bending: 1. Install piping with provisions for expansion and contraction. Provide expansion loops, swing joints, anchors and /or expansion joints where indicated or otherwise required so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. 2. Do not spring or force piping during installation. Piping and Accessories 15060 -11 Service Inclination In Direction of Flow Slope Condenser Water Up 1 inch per 40 feet Condensate Drain Down 1/8 inch per foot MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3. Do not bend piping without use of pipe bending machine. 4. Refer to Section 15120: Expansion Compensation. D. Sloping, Air Venting and Draining: September 30, 2003 1. Slope piping as indicated, true to line and grade, and free of traps and air pockets. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, slope piping in direction of flow as follows: 3 Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90° F. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 4. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. 5. Reducers: a. Eccentric: (1) Condenser water piping, top side flat. (2) Between water piping and pump suction, top side flat. b. Concentric: (1) In vertical piping. (2) May be used as increasers in horizontal piping. 6. Connect condenser water branch piping to bottom of mains. 7. Provide drain valves and hose adapters at all low points in piping. 8. Provide drain valves for float type controllers. 9. Provide manual air vents at all high points in condenser water piping: a. '/. -inch copper tube. b. Discharge vented water into nearest janitor's sink or floor drain. c. If no fixture is near provide 180° bend to discharge into portable container. Strainers: UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Install at following locations: a. Ahead of pump suctions. b. Ahead of control and regulating valves. c. • Elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. 2. In water service, up to 250° F maximum: a. Install globe valve for -off with full outlet size and same pressure rating as piping system. b. Hose -end fittings are acceptable for water service only. Piping and Accessories Permit Issue 15060 -12 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Piping Specialties: G. Copper: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Locate thermometers and gauges to permit observation by personnel standing on floor. 2. Provide instrument cocks at pressure gauges. 3. Provide continuous lengths of straight runs of piping upstream and downstream from balancing devices as recommended by manufacturer. No joints, welds, fittings or taps are permitted in the straight runs. z _ ,- 6 00 w 0 CD ILI J 1- rn w w ° 1. Crimping of copper tubing prohibited. ga 2. Isolate copper pipe and tubing from contact with ferrous materials. 3. For branch drops and rises to plumbing fixtures, anchor branch to wall with drop -ear w ell or tee. 4. Remove all slivers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reaming and - ? filing both pipe surfaces. Clean fitting and tube with emery cloth or sandpaper. z O - Remove residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux, and assemble joint. Use 95- Ill j 5 solder or brazing to secure joint as specified for the specific piping service. 0 0 U O N 0 1— w 1. Do not set pipe vises or threading machines on unprotected concrete floors. 10 2. Cover floor when making plumbing connections to avoid staining floors with oil, white u_- ~ O or red lead or other substances. Bear cost of removing any stains. . Lb to 0 O )- z 1. Provide heat trace cable for piping systems, where indicated on drawings. 2. Install cable and components per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Apply "Electric Traced" labels to heat trace cables covered in insulation. H. Care of Floors: Heat Trace Cable: 3.03 SYSTEMS INSTALLATION A. Heat Trace Cable: 1. Cable shall be secured to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape. 2. Install heater cable linearly along the pipe's lower quadrants after pipe has been successfully pressure tested. 3. Wrap extra cable around fittings and valves as required to offset heat loss at these areas. Piping and Accessories 15060 -13 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 PIPE JOINTING A. Fittings: z 1. Provide standard, manufactured fittings in all cases. w 2. Prohibited fittings: 6 a. Field fabricated. � o b. Bushings on pressure piping. o co c. Clamp -on branch connections. co w 3. Dielectric separation: Ill z a. Provide insulating couplings or dielectric fittings at all connections or metal - Co u. to -metal contact of ferrous materials to non - ferrous materials. w O . b. Locations shall be accessible. Coordinate with General Contractor. 2 4. Branch connections, steel piping: ga Q a. Equal to main and to two pipe sizes smaller: weld tees, same weight as piping. = a b. Three or more pipe sizes smaller than main, but 2% inches and larger: H = Bonney Weld -o -lets. z 1.- c. To two inches and smaller: Bonney Weld -o -lets, Thread -o -lets, threaded z O 0 Nip-o -lets, or steel couplings. w w B. Unions: Provide unions or flanges to render all items in systems easily removable, including: N O - 0H 1. Valves. w 2. Piping specialties. = v 3. Both sides of pumps and equipment. u 4. Where indicated on the Drawings. .. z U co C. Pipe Ends: Perform pipe cutting and end preparation to result in clean ends with full inside H _. diameter. Grind and ream ends of pipe and tube and remove burrs to restore full inside Z '— diameter. D. Nipples: Provide extra heavy pipe for nipples where unthreaded portion is less than 1% inches long. Close nipples not permitted. E. Threaded Joints: Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dryseal threading is specified). 3. Align threads at point of assembly. 4. Tighten joint with wrench and backup wrench as required. 5. Damaged threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. 6. Sealed with sealant compounds or teflon tape. Hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking shall not be allowed. 7. Sealant compounds: John Crane or Rector Seal: a. General service: John Crane JC-40. b. Refrigerant: John Crane No. 2 Plastic Lead Seal. c. Chemicals and corrosive service piping: John Crane JC -30. Piping and Accessories 15060 -14 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Flanged joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. When required, use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. G. Mechanical joints: Grooved copper tube and grooved -tube fitting joints shall be assembled with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts per coupling and fitting manufacturer's standard written procedure. Grooved ends on copper and copper alloy tube shall be roll- formed only using the appropriate roll- groove tool to construct a groove meeting the coupling and fitting manufacturer's written specifications. Cut grooving methods shall not be used on copper and copper alloy tube. H. Flared tube joints: Flared copper tube joints shall be made by the appropriate use of cast copper alloy fittings conforming to ASME 816.26. Flared ends of copper tube shall be of the 45° flare type and shall only be made with a flaring tool designed specifically for that purpose. Copper alloy tube shall be reamed to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter prior to forming the flared end. I. Welded Joints: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Where required, peen and wheel -grind welds. 2. Ends of pipe may be burned for welding: a. Grind, bevel and remove scale between welding joint. b. Ragged edges with metal beads, poor alignment or other inferior work shall be rejected. c. Preparation of pipe ends: For wall thickness up to 3/16 -inch, ends shall be finished square or with 37.5° bevel with a 1/16 inch band; for wall thickness 3/16 -inch to 3 A -inch inclusive, ends shall be machined or ground to have a 37.5° bevel with a 1/16 -inch band per latest edition of ASTM B31.1. 3. Perform welding with oxyacetylene or electric arc process. 4. Welding shall be from outside only on pipe configurations. 5. Tack welds shall be of same quality as required in the completed weld and shall be visually examined for defects before applying any complete passes. The ends (starts and stops) of the tacks shall blend in smoothly with the base metal so that subsequent passes can be applied without interruption. 6. Inspection: Visual inspection shall be done by the welder after each pass. 7. Inspection Criteria: Cracks, cold laps, open porosity and tungsten inclusions shall not be allowed. If the above occurs, the weldment shall be removed and rewelded per this specification. Weld beads shall be applied in such a manner that they are smooth into adjacent beads and the base metal with no areas, such as crevices, undercuts, or overlaps, that would weaken the structure or prevent adequate penetration of subsequent weld passes. Undercut of the final pass, which reduces the initial material thickness, shall be repaired by additional welding. 8. Repair: All materials welded using this procedure or which fall within the requirements of this procedure may also be repair welded using this procedure. Piping and Accessories 15060 -15 z • w a e a 1 J U U O u)o • W J H uJO 2 = w z � HO Z F- W uj 2p U O N a !- w W H H L -!- - O w v = O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Grooved End Joints: K. Soldered and Brazed Joints: Construct soldered joints per ASTM B 828. Construct brazed joints per ANSI /AWS C3.4. L. Plastic Piping, General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pipe Preparation: The pipe ends must be clean from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. The dimensions must be according to the standard roll groove specifications as recommended by the manufacturer. Cut grooves are not acceptable. 2. Pipe Preparation Plain End: Black pipe must be thoroughly cleaned down to bare metal for one -inch from the pipe end to receive mechanically coupled fittings; removed pipe coatings, mill scale, rust and raised weld beads. 3. Tighten all nuts to assure firm metal contact of the coupling pads. 4. Groove width depth and outside diameter must conform to the standard groove specifications in the latest "Field Assembly and Installation Instruction Pocket Handbook ". 5. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gasket with cup grease or graphite paste to facilitate installation. 6. Support branch pipes independently to eliminate stress on coupled joint. 7. Determine that gasket material and lubricant are compatible with service of pipe. 1. Install solder -joint to male- thread adapters, or solder joint to male- thread unions meeting the requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, adjacent to each threaded valve and threaded equipment connection in a copper tube system. 2. Install ASME B16.24 cast copper alloy pipe flanges adjacent to each flanged valve and flanged equipment connection in a copper tube system. 3. Provide brazing for refrigerant piping system using AWS A5.8, BAg1 with 15% silver, 80% copper and 5% phosphorous. 4. Provide solder joint for building heating hot water supply and return systems, chilled water systems, and condenser water piping. 5. Clean surfaces to be jointed of oil, grease, rusts and oxides. a. Remove grease from fittings by washing in solution of 1/16 sodium carbonate and three gallons hot water (except as otherwise specified for refrigerant piping). b. Clean socket of fitting and end of pipe thoroughly with emery cloth to remove rust and oxides. After cleaning and before assembly or heating, apply Handy or Aircosil flux to joint surface and spread evenly. 6. Any joints showing evidence of overheating, cracking, poor penetration, or other defects of fit -up or workmanship shall be replaced as directed by the Architect at the Contractor's expense. 1. Threaded joints only at terminal connections or when specifically approved 2. Threaded joints only on Schedule 80 pipe or with socket - threaded adapters 3. Teflon joint thread tape 4. Approved adapters for connections to metallic piping 5. Heat - Fusion Joints: Make polyolefin pressure - piping joints according to ASTM D 2657. 6. Plastic- Piping Electrofusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage - piping joints according to ASTM F 1290. 7. Fiberglass Piping Joints: Make joints with piping manufacturer's bonded adhesive. Piping and Accessories 15060 -16 woxi 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 8. Dissimilar - Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both system materials. 3.05. CHEMICAL CLEANING z A. General: - •1--- z � w 1: • During construction: 6 v a. Keep openings in piping closed to prevent entrance of foreign matter. c) 0 b. Clean pipe, fittings and valves internally. c. Hammer welds to remove slag and weld beads. � z 2 After completion of pressure testing, chemically clean internally each cooling piping co 1... system. w 0 3. Proceed with chemical cleanout within 4 hours of completion of pressure testing. 2 B. . Water Systems: u_ 1. Upon start-up flush and then fill with clean water, and vent as required. H w 2. Install temporary filter bags in hydronic system strainers at all pumps or cooling z H towers during start -up. Replace as often as necessary until they are relatively clean Z O after 48 hours of service from last change. w w C Add chemical cleaning compound: Supplied and supervised by water treatment company. v Refer to Section 15890: Water Treatment. D . 0 F- 1. Circulate water of each system at respective design flow rates. H v a Three (3) 8 hour days. u_ ~O b. At end of each 8 hour period remove and clean strainers and blow off low z points.. V c. After third day of pumping, completely drain out entire systems of cleaning F z solution. . Z ~ d. Clean out cooling tower basins and hose down. • e. Refill systems immediately (within 2 hours) with clean water and circulate for additional 8 hour period at end of which interval, completely drain systems. f. Immediately (within 2 hours) refill with clear water; circulate, vent air and add chemical treatment. g. Test for alkalinity: Not more than 200 ppm in excess of alkalinity of water supply. h. Repeat circulation of water of each system at respective minimum design flow rate as described above, until 200 ppm or less, maintained for 10 days. 2. Protect against damage from freeze -up or discharge of water. 3. Provide by -pass valves to avoid flushing water coils or control valves. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Any deviation from the cleaning, installation, testing, and certification requirements herein shall be approved in writing by the Architect. 2. All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and examination by the Architect at any place where fabrication or erection occurs. September 30, 2003 Permit issue. Piping and Accessories 15060 -17 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. The Architect reserves the right to reject all or any part of the system that does not conform to the requirements herein. Rejected materials or equipment shall be returned at the Contractor's expense for re- cleaning and certification. 4. The Architect reserves the right to remove random samples of the installed work sufficient to establish the quality of materials and workmanship. If such samples indicate materials and workmanship do not meet the contract specification, the Contractor shall be required to replace or re -clean the installed work at no expense to the Owner. The Owner shall reimburse the Contractor on a time and materials basis for such work if the system proves to be installed to specification. 5. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Owner representative. 6. Upon completion of this work, all systems shall be adjusted for use. Should any piece of apparatus or any material or work fail in any of the required pressure tests, it shall be immediately removed any replaced by new materials. The defective portion of the work shall be replaced by new materials. The defective portion of the work shall be replaced by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner at no expense to the Owner. 7. Test gauges shall be installed and test medium source connections shall be made to convenient process connections. After completion of testing, the gauges and source connection shall be removed and the specified process attachments replaced. 8. Any leaks found shall be repaired in the following manner: a. Welded joint — Grind out defect and re -weld. b. Brazed joint — Cut out and re- braze. c. Plastic joint — Remove /re -weld. d. Screw joint — Taken apart and re-do (do not use compound). B. Test Preparation: 1. Clean new piping internally by flushing prior to the application of pressure tests, and before the chemical cleanout procedures specified. Provide temporary strainers at the inlet to the hot water, glycol, chilled water, and condenser water pumps before the start of cleaning procedures. 2. Block off and isolate circulating pumps, condensers and hydronic coils and heating coils during the preliminary flushing and draining process. 3. Thoroughly flush piping with water under pressure, clear of foreign matter, and then drain before proceeding with pressure testing. Blow down accumulations of grit, dirt and sediment at each strainer and each low point in the piping systems. 4. Leaks and Defects: a. Repair or replace as directed. b. Repair damage caused by test failure without additional cost. c. Retest repaired and/or damaged systems until tests are accomplished successfully. 5. Refer to other sections for tests to plumbing systems and other special piping systems. 6. Notify Architect in writing one week before test. 7. Maintain a log book of all pressure tests showing dates, personnel performing test, test observer and test results. 8. Furnish written report and certification that tests have been satisfactorily completed. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Piping and Accessories 15060 -18 ...._.,. �._......_. 1,!.. i.. � ...ss.aJ- %.:::..3.�...�.4:.wi.e «+�iwq..u. J.c.. 1 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Pressure Tests: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Less than 100 pounds per square inch operating pressure: Test hydrostatically to 150 pounds per square inch. 2. Over 100 psi operating pressure: a. Test hydrostatically to 1 times operating pressure. b. Never exceed test pressure ANSI B16.1 basis. 3. With system valves capped and pressure apparatus disconnected, a 4 hour duration pressure test shall exhibit: a. No pressure change (zero). b. Compensate for temperature change. 4. For air tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one -tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. The piping system exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing shall show no evidence of leaking. 5. Heat Tracing: After initial installation, and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heat tracing to testing using a 2500 volt DC megaohm meter (megger). Minimum insulation resistance shall be between 20 to 1000 megaohms regardless of length. Consult manufacturer if conditions test outside this range; if necessary, new heat tracing and insulation shall be installed to meet test criteria, at no cost to Owner. 6. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following: a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests. END OF SECTION Piping and Accessories 15060 -19 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following valve types: gate; globe; check; ball; butterfly; grooved end; automatic flow control valves; and self contained control valves. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves D. Section 15250: Insulation E. Section 15515: Hydronic Systems Specialties F. Section 15900: Building Management System :1.03 SUBMITTALS B. For each type of valve indicated, include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 15100 VALVES A. Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, capacity, performance intended service and installation. . A. . Valves and valve construction shall be suitable for the pressure, temperature, and fluid quality of the service in which they are to be used. B. All valves shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI, AWWA, ASTM, MSS -SP -70 & 80 (Manufacturers Standardization Society), standards and specifications. C. ASME 831.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold -water [sanitary waste, and storm drainage] piping valves unless referenced. D. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. F. Minimum test pressure for all valves shall be 1.5 times maximum system working pressure Z unless noted otherwise. ,t- W G. Butterfly valves shall be suitable for dead end service and constructed of industrial design rt quality. 6 V U O . v) O PART 2 — PRODUCTS w = J i— N 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS w O A. Check Valves: 1. Bronze: Crane, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Powel, Stockham. = ar 2. Gray -Iron Swing Check: Crane, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Powell, Stockham, - --- t— _ Victaulic. Z I-. 3. Spring- Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves: Metraflex 900 series or equal by Milwaukee, i- 0 Mueller Steam, Nibco, Val - Matic, Victaulic. LLI ? . B. Globe Valves: Cincinnati, Crane /Jenkins, Crane /Stockham, Hammond Walworth, Grinnell, v O - (12, 0H w C. Ball Valves: Apollo 70- 100/200 series, or equal by Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Stockham. H . z U = 1. Single- or no- flange: Grinnell 8000, or equal by Demco NE, Crane QuarterMaster, H I Stockham, DeZurik, Nibco, Keystone. 0 2. Flanged: Keystone Fig. 222, or equal by Grinnell, Mueller, Tyco. . Z 3. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron: Victaulic 300 and 709 series or equal by Grinnell, Nibco. 4. High- Pressure: Crane Flowseal, Jamesebury, Tyco, DeZurik. D. Milwaukee, Nibco. Butterfly Valves: E. Grooved End Valves: Victaulic, Grinnell, Gustin Bacon. F. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Griswold, Flow Design. G. Balancing Valves: Armstrong Type CBV, B &G Circuit Setter Plus, Taco Accu -Flo, Tour & Andersson STAS /STAD, Victaulic series 786/787. H. Plug Valves: 1. Lubricated: Milliken, Olson, Walworth. 2. Non - Lubricated: DeZurik, Grinnell, Mueller, Tyco. 3. Resilient- Seated, Cast -Iron, Eccentric: Milliken, DeZurik, Olson, Henry. Special -Duty Valves: 1. Plastic Valves: American, Enfield, Hayward, Jomar, Nibco, Orion, Sloane, Watts. September 30, 2003 Valves Permit Issue 15100 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Self Contained Control Valves: Bell & Gossett, Danfoss, Taco. K. Natural Gas Valves, 5 -inch and larger: DeZurik, Homestead, Rockwell, Walworth. 2.02. GENERAL A. Provide valves of same manufacturer for the same service. Valve pressure and temperature ratings shall be not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. B. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly and permanently marked on the outside of body. C. Provide valves suitable for connection to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. D. Valves shall be full pipe size unless noted otherwise. E. Provide valves identified for future connection with lockable handles. F. Valve seats shall be rated to 240° F minimum without deterioration. 2.03 GLOBE VALVES A. Provide globe valves for throttling in steam and water systems. B. 2 -inch and smaller valves shall be inside rising stem, screwed bonnet with screwed ends. C. 2% -inch and larger valves shall be rising stem, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet and flanged ends. D. Globe valves shall be suitable for repacking under pressure. Packing shall be asbestos free. E. Valve seats shall be nickel alloy or stainless steel. 2.04 CHECK VALVES A. Swing Type: Provide for water and low pressure steam services: 2 -inch and smaller with screwed bonnet, screwed end; 2% -inch and larger with bolted bonnet, flanged end. Valves shall have renewable bronze seat and disc. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Silent Type: Provide on pumps larger than 2 -inch discharge. Valves shall have cast iron body with bronze or stainless steel trim, spring loaded, and to be of the center guide type, with flanged end. Valves 15100 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Provide ball valves for isolation and as drain valves, in water systems up to 200° F and pipe sizes up to 2 inches. Provide ball valves of the bronze top -entry body type, having a straight- through full port flow passage. Design to permit disassembly without removing body from line. Provide extended neck where used on insulated piping. Provide stainless steel or chrome plated brass /bronze ball; conventional port. D. Construct s eats a nd g land p acking o f glass filled teflon with a threaded packing gland follower; blowout -proof stem rated at 600 psig WOG. E. Provide stem extensions when valves are installed in insulated pipe with vapor barrier so valve handles clear insulation. Lever handle shall be vinyl covered. F. Provide lever for quarter turn operation; lever to indicate open or closed position. G. When used as drain valves, provide with hose thread and brass cap with chain. Cap shall be rated for full system pressure. 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Provide butterfly valves for isolation in water systems up to 200° F and pipe sizes 2 -inch and larger. Provide butterfly valves for isolation in steam systems for pipe sizes 4 -inch and larger. B. Butterfly valves shall have ductile or cast iron lug body, Type 416 stainless steel stem with bronze bushings which isolate stem from body and aluminum bronze disc. C. The stem journals shall be a multiple seal design providing for completely independent seals. The stem to disc connection shall be a machined drive mated to a machined socket in the disc. Positive stem retention shall be provided to permit removal of handle or actuator while under full operating pressure. Provide extended neck where used on insulated piping. D. The valve seats shall be replaceable resilient elastomer bonded to a phenolic back. E. Valves up to size 6 -inch shall be supplied with multi - position handles; size 8 -inch and over shall be supplied with enclosed worm gear operator. F. Valve body shall be full -lug pattern to comply with MSS -SP -67 and be compatible with ANSI pattern flanges of appropriate pressure rating. G. Valve shall provide tight shutoff up to valve rating on dead -end or isolation service without the use of downstream flanges. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -4 -a -n MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.07 GROOVED END VALVES A. Valve model and series numbers listed are based on Victaulic. B. Butterfly Valves: C. Ball Valves: 2.08 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. Provide automatic pressure- compensating flow control valves with extended valve body and dual temperature /pressure test ports. Wafer type body is not acceptable for pipe sizes 3 inches and smaller. B. Automatic flow valve shall be manufactured in one piece and to consist of ground joint union, flow control and pressure /temperature test ports. C. Valves shall be factory set to control the flow rate within 5% of the selected rating over an operating pressure differential of at least 10 times the minimum required for full flow conditions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Series 700 sizes 2 -inch through 6 -inch: All valves shall be of triple seal designed for bubble- tight, shutoff service up to 200 pounds per square inch and vacuum service to 29.9 inches of mercury gauge. Disc seal (EPDM) rated for service up to 230° F. 2. Series 300 sizes 2 -inch through 12 -inch: Grooved end butterfly valve for all services up to 300 pounds per square inch. Valve body of ductile iron with grooved end designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Valves shall be bi- directional and provide bubble -tight shutoff and dead -end service at full rated working pressure. Disc seal (EPDM) rated for service up to 230° F. 3. Series 709 sizes 14 -inch through 24 -inch: Single piece ductile iron cast body, PPS coated on the inside for corrosion resistance. The ductile iron disc rides on stainless steel stems with stainless steel wetted hardware. The EPDM seal, mounted on the offset disc, seals on the PPS seal for bi- directional working pressure of 175 pounds per square inch, 230° F. 4. Provide extended neck where valve is used on insulated piping. 1. Series 721 ball valves size 2 inches and under: designed for 600 pounds per square inch bubble -tight working pressure. 2. Provide extended neck where valve is used on insulated piping. Check Valves: 1. Series 715, 716 and 711 sizes 2'/2 -inch through 12 -inch Dual Disc Check Valves: check valves with spring activated, dual disc, non - slamming design. Valves shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical installation and rated for working pressures up to 300 pounds per square inch, 230° F. 2. Series 712 Swing Check Valves sizes 2 -inch through 4 -inch: full port opening and bolted coupling closure access. Valves shall be rated for 300 pounds per square inch working pressure, 230° F, "E " EPDM Disc Seat ASTM D -2000. • Valves 15100 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self- contained, open - chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be Type 300 stainless steel. No plated materials are acceptable. E. The stainless steel cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring - loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysteresis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate for self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. Cartridge must be removable in one piece without disturbing piping connections. F. Cast iron valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet ports suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates, and shall be marked to show direction of flow. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. G. Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag shall be marked with zone identification, valve model number and rated flow in gallons per minute. H. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and consist of a pressure gauge with a 41/2-inch diameter dial, instructions, hoses, and connections; and a carrying case. Automatic flow control valves shall be furnished with fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments specified. 2.09 BALANCING VALVES A. Balancing valve for water service shall be of the calibrated balance valve type with capped pressure /temperature ports, positive shutoff angle globe type, with adjustable memory stop and indicator. B. Valves 2 inches and smaller: Bronze or copper alloy body with calibrated ball, globe or venturi /valve arrangement, integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening. Provide memory stop, drain tapping, threaded or soldered ends, with or without integral unions, PIT or Shraeder type pressure taps with integral check valves and seals and adjustable memory stop. Valves shall be suitable for 200 psig water working pressure at 250° F. C. Provide a pressure differential meter, hoses and carrying case. The kit shall include a six - inch diameter gauge with 270° arc readout. Gauge, with accuracy of plus or minus 1% of full scale, shall be suitable for the differential pressures of the valves supplied for this project, with over -range protection. Include color -coded hoses ten feet minimum in length with brass connectors suitable for connection to the low and high pressure connections on the balance valves. P rovide i nstrument valving so meter can be vented and drained. Pressure and temperature rating shall be equal to that of the valves. Provide meter and all accessories in a durable case with carrying handle. The meter is applied directly across the pressure /temperature ports on the calibrated flow control valves. P rovide a calibrated conversion calculator to convert pressure drop to flow in gallons per minute. Barton 247A, Midwest 809 or equal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.10 SELF CONTAINED CONTROL VALVES z A. Provide pressure operated non - electric valves with cast bronze or forged brass body. H W re B. Actuator shall operate using an integral temperature sensor and an adjustment- spring- 6 v balanced bellows. A stainless steel spindle riding against an 0-ring within the packing gland U O shall provide throttling service. co o co Lu C. Provide O -rin g g p y p w g packin land construction re laceabie while the s stem is in o eration with I- co standard tools and without any need for isolation valves. uj O 2 D. Valves shall be suitable for 125 psig water working pressure at 240° F. g J u_ E. Valves shall return to the open position upon failure of temperature control unit. N m H w Z I 2.11 VALVE ACTUATORS H 0 O Z H W A. Provide handwheel for valves other than quarter -turn types. M o U B. Provide lever handle for quarter -turn valves -6 -inch and smaller, except plug valves. O Ill W C. For plug valves with square heads, furnish Owner with one wrench for every 10 plug valves, i U for each size square plug head. o di — I O ''' Z PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PRE - INSTALLATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. B. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. Block check valves in either closed or open position. Maintain valve end protection. C. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew -point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. D. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. E. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -7 r MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. F. Properly align piping before installation of valves in an upright position. - z 1-Z 3.02 INSTALLATION w A. Install valves so that they are accessible for repacking. Locate valves for easy access and 0 provide separate support where necessary. co o B. Install valves with stem vertical and handle up wherever possible, never with stem below 11/ H ' horizontal position. co p w C. Install valves with operating clearance for handle and stem in position to allow full stem g movement. u_ (o D. Install isolation valves on equipment so that valve and piping do not interfere with equipment H W removal or maintenance. Install unions or flanges on equipment side of valves arranged to z H allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. F -. O z F- E. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service w but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. v o ON OH wW A. Provide valves of a design permitting packing while open and under pressure. F- u_ 0 B. Provide 1 -inch drain valves with threaded ends for hose connections at drain points, at main v z shutoff valves, low points of piping systems, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. • C.. Provide required manual or automatic vent valves at high points of piping systems to facilitate venting of air and to ensure quiet operation. Provide piping from air vents to a drain. D. Provide renewable bronze seat rings and bronze spindles for cast iron body valves. E. Provide an isolation valve in the common supply line and an individual balance valve in the return line from each hydronic coil, and all heat transfer elements. F. Provide an isolation valve in each supply riser near main and a balancing valve in each return riser near main. G. Provide pressure /temperature test port fittings at each side of globe valves. H. Use plastic and plastic -lined valves with wetted surfaces made of same material 'as or compatible with piping and compatible with system liquid. 3.03 VALVE ACCESSORIES September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Valves 15100 -8 O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila SECTION 15120 EXPANSION COMPENSATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Expansion loops and flexible expansion loops 2. Pipe alignment guides and anchors 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves D. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and design of expansion fittings and loops. 2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly. 3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage. C. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion fitting and loop. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Flexible expansion joints shall be AGA certified for use on gas piping. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Expansion Loops: MetraFlex, Hyspan. B. Pipe Alignment Guides: Pipe Shields Series E2000 for insulated pipes; B -Line, Grinnell, Hyspan Series 9500 or MetraFlex for uninsulated pipes. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Expansion Compensation 15120 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS z A. Pipe alignment guides shall be selected for both upward and downward motion. 1 w 2.03 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOPS D: m J o A. Provide flexible expansion loops of size and material noted on drawings. y o co ui B. Flexible loops shall be designed to not impart thrust loads on the anchors. The loop shall _I consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two (2) 90° elbows, and a 180° return. N wO Loops shall be installed in a neutral, pre- compressed, or pre - extended condition as required w for application. g - C. Loops installed hanging down shall have a drain plug. Loops installed straight up may be to O fitted with an automatic air release valve that purges air from the high point of the loop. Loops = w installed in any position other than hanging down must have the 180° return supported. - w Z = F— O D. Joints for copper piping and fittings with solder joint end connections: w E' w 1. 2 -inch and smaller: bronze hoses and single -braid bronze sheaths with 340 psig at v ra 450° F minimum pressure ratings. o H 2. 2 to 4 -inch: stainless -steel hoses and single- braid, stainless -steel sheaths with 225 psig at 450° F minimum pressure ratings. ill v E. Joints for steel piping and carbon -steel fittings: O ui 1. End connections shall be threaded up to 2 -inch and flanged for all other sizes. H _ 2. Joints, up to 2 -inch: stainless -steel hoses and single- braid, stainless -steel sheaths Z with 325 psig at 600° F minimum pressure ratings. 3. Joints, 2 to 6 -inch: stainless steel hoses and single- braid, stainless steel sheaths with 145 psig at 600° F minimum pressure ratings. 4. Joints up to 2 -inch: stainless steel hoses and single- braid, stainless -steel sheaths with 90 psig at 600° F minimum pressure ratings. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Guides shall be steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two- section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two- section guiding spider for bolting to pipe. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert- wedge -type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Expansion Compensation 15120 -2 I 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila z PART 3 - EXECUTION w ct 3.01 INSTALLATION U . A. Provide at least two (2) guides each side of each expansion loop. Size guide cylinder to allow co 0, , the full insulation thickness to be carried through the guide with ample clearance and without w = r estricting the free movement of the pipe. Size guide cylinder for sufficient length to contain J L' the total movement of the spider. Rigidly anchor pipe guide to building structure. w 0 B. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions in sizes matching g >- pipe size in which they are i nstalled. A Iign e xpansion f ittings t o a void e nd- loading a nd N O torsional stress. w C. Provide expansion loops as shown. z 1- t- O D. Provide minimum of three (3) elbow offsets on branch pipe connections into mains and at w w ' each riser takeoff to allow piping flexibility and expansion. 2 =; E. Install flexible loop within four (4) pipe diameters, both upstream and downstream, from a O N ' 0 w w H - . iii - - 0 H; z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue pipe guide or anchor. END OF SECTION Expansion Compensation 15120 -3 T I B. Submit manufacturer's data for instrument types, materials, accessories and installation. 4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 6 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 0 0 co A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: H 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) 1.03 SUBMITTALS tu 0 . O N 0 1- ww I IL Z A. Submit list indicating use, operating range, total range and location. ii i O z 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 15130 METERS, GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS IL 1. Pressure gauges CO O 2. Thermometers 2 3. Static pressure and filter gauges g Q 4. Pressure /temperature test ports u. Cl) O I w . z i i _ z 1- A. Instruments shall be factory calibrated for the temperature and pressure of the systems in which they are installed. B. Pressure gauges shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI Specification B-40 -1 Grade 2A. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges: Weiss, Trerice, Weskier, Taylor, Ashcroft B. Filter Gauges: Dwyer, Trerice, Orange Research C. Pressure(Temperature Test Ports: Peterson Engineering, Trerice, Weksler September 30, 2003 Meters, Gauges and Thermometers Permit Issue 15130 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Process type in an impact resistant phenolic case, 41/2-inch diameter glycerine filled phosphor bronze bourdon tube rated to 600 pounds per square inch. Brushed stainless steel movement,'/ -inch brass socket and 1 percent mid -scale accuracy, black figures on white background. Provide brass needle valve, snubber and maximum and minimum pointers. Weiss Instrument Model LF4UGYI or equal. 2.03 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS A. Provide test ports 1 /2 inch NPT made of brass with Nordel core. In addition, supply three (3) kits consisting of % inch NPT pressure gauge, gauge adapter with 1/8 -inch probe and protecting shield, bi -metal thermometer range 25° F to 125° F with 5 -inch stem and 1% -inch diameter dial, bi -metal thermometer range 20° to 240° F with 5 -inch stem and 1 -inch diameter dial. Each kit to be provided in an impact resistant carrying case. 2.04 THERMOMETERS A. Adjustable angle dial face, bi -metal thermometer, 5 -inch diameter with 2° F scale division, accurate to ±1 percent of scale range, Type 304 stainless steel case and bezel, shatterproof glass window, silicone filled. Weiss Model SF5VBM or equal. B. Thermometers shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or as specified. Pressure temperature ratings of each thermometer shall be suitable for the system in which it is installed. Thermometers shall have the following insertion lengths: 1. Up to 5 -inch Pipe: 21/2-inch C. Provide Type 304 stainless steel wells for all pipe mounted thermometers. D. Provide extended wells and stem length to accommodate insulation thickness for insulated pipe applications. 2.05 FILTER GAUGES A. Magnehelic Gauge: 4% -inch dial with frictionless magnetic movements. Gauge to operate without use of fluid. Range to be compatible with service. Accuracy ± 2% of scale. Die cast aluminum case with clear plastic face and "0" ring seal. Diaphragm to be silicone rubber with cobalt magnet and sapphire bearings. Dwyer Series 2000 or equal. B. Provide static pressure sensing tips with integral compression fittings and sufficient length of ' -inch aluminum tubing. C. Provide gauge mounting hardware. September 30, 2003 ' Permit Issue Meters, Gauges and Thermometers 15130 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide one pressure gauge per pump. Install piping from pressure gauge to taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Refer to details on Drawings. B. For pipes smaller than 2 inches, enlarge pipe for installation of thermometer wells. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Pressure Gauges: B. Thermometers: 1. Pumps 2. Expansion tanks 3. Other locations as indicated on Drawings 1. Closed circuit fluid cooler inlet and outlet 2. Other locations as indicated on Drawings } C. Pressure/Temperature Test Ports: 1. All automatic control valve's inlet and outlet J 2. AC and CRAC unit inlet and outlet 3. Pumps concealed above ceilings . 4. Other locations as indicated on Drawings D. Filter Gauges: 1. Other locations as indicated on Drawings and in equipment specifications END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Meters, Gauges and Thermometers Permit Issue 15130 -3 z re 2 W U , 00 w -J N u. w 0 g Q N d z II- O' z E- ca U O N . 0 H' w w. L I -. u z ---_; 0 II•- z -fl 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints D. Section 15250: Insulation E. Section 15800: Ductwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1. MSS SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP -69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. B. Underwriters Laboratories MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: C. American Society For Testing And Materials Standards: ASTM E 814 - 88: Standard Test Method For Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ANCHORS AND SLEEVES 1. Pipe, duct and un- isolated equipment hangers, anchors and supports. 2. Sleeves, escutcheons. 3. Through - penetration firestopping in fire -rated construction and through - penetration smoke - stopping in smoke partitions, including methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses and smoke. 1. U.L. Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through - penetration firestop devices (XHCR). b. Fire resistance ratings (BXUV). c. Through - penetration firestop systems (XHEZ). d. Fill, void, or cavity material (XHHW). 2. U.L. 1479 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops, including optional air leak test. 3. U.L. Component Listing Test Criteria. 4. Warnock Hersey. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. CIE /DIN Age Testing 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include on ductwork and piping shop drawings a layout of masonry and concrete floor and re aa 2 JU B. Submit product data on through - penetration firestop. Submittal data for firestopping systems y o shall include the UL System Numbers listed in the UL Building Materials Directory under CO al w LIJ hich the material was tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) for use in a Through- Penetration Firestop System. Where there is a firestop application that has not been u- tested by UL, obtain from the manufacturer an engineered judgment that the proposed w O application of the firestop product is suitable. Submit the engineered judgment to the authority , having jurisdiction. u_ N 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including detailed W specification of construction and fabrication, manufacturer's installation instructions Z H and details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and applicable H O UL System number or UL classified devices. z �- 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general uj construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, n hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements: 0 u- a . Manufacturer or manufacturer's representative shall provide qualified c H engineering judgments and drawings relating to non - standard applications W ui as needed. _ F-� C. Submit details of hangers, anchors and supports for each pipe size and service, ductwork Z i and individual pieces of equipment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangers and supports to be constructed and applied according to the following standards: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue wall sleeve locations for pipes and ducts. Include elevations and sleeve sizes. 1. Power Piping Code: ANSI B31. 2. Duct Hangers: Provide hangers as required per SMACNA Standards for ductwork pressure classification. 3. NFPA standards for Fire Protection System piping. 4. Firestopping materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating at least equal to that of the construction. 5. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's • identification. 6. Submit written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint adhesion, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The guarantee period shall be one year from date of substantial completion. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -2 LL - I O F- z _a .J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS Z I z rG A. Pipe Hangers: Grinnell, Fee & Mason, Elcen, Tube -Turn, F &S, Pipe Shields, B -Line Kindorf, - v Michigan Hanger, Unistrut, or approved equal. Grinnell figure numbers are listed below; U o equivalent material by specified manufacturers is acceptable. co J H u- w g • Q . v . F- • w Z = HO Z F- w w U� O SP- C3 ;— A. Provide hangers of heavy construction suitable for the size of pipe to be supported. Materials w uj shall be of steel, except pipe rolls of wrought or malleable iron. �? 1. Hangers for pipes six - inches or less shall be swivel ring, wrought pipe clamp, or ti. Z adjustable wrought clevis type. Grinnell Figure 65 or 260. v N 2. Hangers for pipes 8 inches and above shall have 2 rods and cross -rod with cast iron ~ pipe roll complete with adjustable sockets and nuts. Grinnell Figure 260, Grinnell Figure 181 for steam piping. 3. Pipe roller for all sizes of multiple horizontal steam piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze: MSS SP -58, Type 44. Multiple or trapeze pipe hangers shall be steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods if hanger load calculations are submitted. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS B. Sleeves: Pipe Shields, Insul, RK Industries C. Pipe Wrap Tape: Polycen, Nassua, 3M D. Firestop: Nelson, Dow, 3M, Hilti E. Escutcheon Plates: Beaton & Corbin Manufacturing F. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: T hunderline L inkseal, Advance Products, C alpico, M etraflex, Pipeline Seal 2.02 GENERAL C. Wall support shall be welded steel bracket with hanger. B -Line 3068 Series, Grinnell 194 Series. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide perforated epoxy painted finish, 16 - 12 -gauge minimum steel channels securely anchored to wall structure with interlocking, split type, bolt- secured, galvanized pipe /tubing clamps. B -Line type S channel with B -2000 series clamps, Grinnell type PS200 H with PS 1200 clamps or equal. 2. When copper piping is being supported, provide flexible elastomeric /thermoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal to B -Line B1999 Vibra Cushion, or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion assemblies, B -Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 Series or equal. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Support vertical piping with carbon steel double bolt riser clamps attached to the pipe. In general, use one clamp for each two floors and one clamp at each floor for copper tubing. Where pipes are in open shafts, provide forged steel bar brackets fixed to wall. Riser clamps shall be copper plated when used with copper pipe. Grinnell Figure 261 for steel pipe, Figure CT121 for copper pipe. E. Floor support for pipe: 1. Sizes up to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. F. Select hangers and supports in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended maximum loading. Hangers shall have a safety factor of 5 of 1. G. Hangers shall not be disengaged by movement of supported pipe. H. Provide copper plated or felt lined hangers for copper piping or provide 10 -mil pipe wrap tape on pipe at hangers. Tape shall extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond hanger saddle on both ends and be wrapped around pipe a minimum of 2 turns. Install vinyl- coated hangers for all plastic piping. I. Steel hanger rods shall be threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, black finish. Provide rods complete with adjusting and lock nuts. J. Pipe Support Recommendations for Rigid Grooved Joint Systems: The maximum hanger spacing in the specification to ANSI B31 or NFPA as noted and should be used only in conjunction with Victaulic 07 zero -flex rigid couplings. For flexible systems the hanger, support, spacing and location refer to the pipe support recommendations section in the Victaulic "Field Assembly and Installation Pocket Handbook" or equivalent provided b y Grooved Joint Manufacturer. K. Anchors shall be fabricated using welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure. 2.03 SLEEVES Drainage Piping: Provide MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42 riser clamps for vertical piping, and MSS Type 52, spring hangers at the base of vertical piping. A. Construct sleeves for pipes passing through walls (other than foundation walls), floors, partitions, hung or furred ceilings, etc., of minimum 18 -gauge galvanized steel, flanged on each side of wall, partition, hung or furred ceiling, etc. B. Provide standard weight galvanized steel pipe sleeves with welded anchor flanges at foundation walls and reinforced concrete or masonry walls. C. Provide 20 -gauge galvanized sheetmetal sleeves, the full depth of floor or wall, for round ductwork passing through masonry or concrete and /or steel cellular floor construction. Rectangular ductwork shall be provided with framed openings through floor and wall construction. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Provide cast iron or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide mechanical sleeve seals at exterior wall and tank wall penetrations. Seal shall be of the modular sealing element unit type, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion- resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. . F. Install escutcheons at exposed piping through floors, ceilings, walls and partitions in finished areas, within cabinets and millwork, and piping through all fire -rated separations. Provide manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an inside diameter to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an outside diameter that completely covers opening. Escutcheons shall be cast iron or cast brass, deep - pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings, sleeve hubs or firestopping projections. 2.04 PENETRATION FIRESTOP A. Fire -Rated Construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. B.. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications. Systems or devices must be asbestos -free. Mortar systems must be Warnock Hersey approved. C. Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform this function. D. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. E. Seal all pipe and duct penetrations through fire rated construction with factory built devices or with manufactured fill, void, or cavity materials "Classified" by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use as a Through- Penetration Firestop. All firestop devices and systems shall be approved for such use by the authority having jurisdiction. The firesafing system used shall maintain the fire resistance rating of the building component that is penetrated. F. All materials shall be non - hardening and non - toxic. The firesafing system used shall accommodate expansion and contraction of the floating mechanical piping systems without damaging the firestop or reducing its effectiveness as a smoke barrier or water seal. September 30, 2003 Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves Permit Issue 15140 -5 Pipe Size (Inches) Maximum hanger Spacing (feet) Hanger Rod Diameter (Inches) Steel Cast Iron - Copper Plastic Steel/ Cast Iron Copper Plastic PVC Up to' /, 7 -- 5 3 3/8 3/8 3/8 1 7 — 5 3 3/8 3/8 3/8 1% 9 -- 7 3 3/8 3/8 3/8 11/2& 2 ' /Z 9 5 8 3.5 3/8 3/8 3/8 21/2 12 5 9 3.5 1/2 1/2 1/2 3 12 5 10 3.5 1/2 1/2 1/2 31/2 — 5 11 -- 5/8 1/2 — 4 12 5 12 4 5/8 1/2 5/8 5 12 5 13 4 5/8 1/2 5/8 6 12 5 14 4 3/4 5/8 3/4 8 12 5 14 4 7/8 3/4 7/8 PVC: Polyvinyl chloride p astic MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 GROUT A. Grout shall be slow- hardening after application, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Provide ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength from a premixed and factory pre- package. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Deflection of pipes shall not exceed 1/240th (0.416 percent) of span. Support horizontal piping in accordance with the following schedule: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -6 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Provide hangers at each change in direction and both sides of valves 4 -inch and larger. Place Z a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow, valve, strainer, or similar piping specialty Q • item. H Z C. Support hangers from concrete inserts or beam clamps. Furnish, locate and set inserts. 6 D Construct inserts of malleable iron or pressed steel with space for rods of all sizes. Install u p inserts for pipes 3 inches and larger in size with a reinforcing rod 5/8 -inch in diameter run co w through a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose. w = 1I D. If piping required space i �P� 9 in is re uired in a s ace where no inserts have been provided, rill holes in the slab N LL � O (subject to structural engineer's prior approval) and provide rods and hanger attached to an 2 >_ approved fishplate or install double expansion shields connected by a 2 -inch by 2 -inch angle, from which the hanger rod is to be suspended. For pipe size 2 inches and under use single u- a shields but the hanger spacing shall be reduced to 5 feet. The carrying capacity and size of N d each shield shall be calculated on the basis of the spacing indicated above but the minimum H w size shall be 3/8 -inch. install additional shields of the same size so that the number of z F .. hangers is of adequate size to support the loads which they carry. Shields may be used in i . O concrete slabs only. Obtain from the expansion shield manufacturer an ICBO Evaluation z /- ILI Report for the product and submit to the Architect. 2 j Do E. Regardless of the type of construction (i.e., concrete, concrete -deck -steel or other variations) o - take particular care to support main lines and large and heavy pipes in an approved manner, including the provision of supplementary steel, if required. Supplementary steel shall be mill- x x r sections. Submit shop drawings, indicating support methods, point loadings to the 1-" F - building structure and hanger locations for review sufficiently in advance of concrete pouring 4 - - O schedules to permit evaluation, critique and any necessary changes to handling and support el l N methods. 0 _ F. Hangers shall be directly bolted to steel beams of building construction, where they occur if approved by the structural engineer. Smaller pipes shall be suspended from crosspieces of pipe or steel angles, which in turn, are securely fastened to building beams or hung from building concrete construction by means of rods and inserts. The intention is to provide supports which shall be amply strong and rigid for the Toad, but which will not weaken or unduly stress the building construction. G. Provide approved roller support, floor stands, wall brackets, etc., for lines running near the floor or near walls, which can be properly supported or suspended by the floors or walls. Pipelines near walls may also be hung by hangers carried from approved wall brackets at a higher level than the pipe. H. Do not hang piping or ductwork from supports for other services. Install supports shall accommodate free expansion of the piping and duct system. 1. Wherever hangers using pipe rolls are used, provide approved steel pipe covering protection saddles, spot - welded to the piping at each hanger location. J. Anchor piping where shown to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and of heavy forged or welded construction of approved design. All anchor designs, when submitted for approval, shall include piping reactions which respective anchors are capable of supporting. Provide indicated expansion loop. September 30, 2003 Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves Permit Issue 15140 -7 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila K. Install anchors where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated, - Q • install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between I Z expansion loops. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both w expansion and contraction of piping. 6 D _1 C L. Support copper tubing individually by approved hangers not more than 6 feet apart. Hangers o for u ncovered I ines s hall b e s pecially d esigned f or c opper t ubing a nd o f e xact o utside co w diameter of tubing. Hangers for covered tubing shall be broad straps fitting outside of _1 H covering. co u- w M. Hangers for insulated piping shall support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Refer to 2 "Section 15250: Insulation" for insulation protection shields and pipe inserts. u. cn N. For piping 4 inches and larger, support the elbows of the piping adjacent to pumps with steel z w supports from the concrete housekeeping pad, or from the inertia base where pump is Z x mounted to prevent loading heavy weights of piping on pump flanges or casing. Where inertia base or spring vibration isolation is not provided, base elbows shall be supported on w O concrete pad with 1 -inch neoprene pad. w mo O. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 11/2-inch minimum after piping is erected. Install 8 u2 hangers so that 1 /2 -inch minimum clearance is maintained between finished covering of pipe c l- and adjacent work. 2 v P. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. u_ z ui Q. Adjust hangers to obtain pipe slope where specified v ~O F- R. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use z standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that similar types are used and all data is submitted for prior review. S. Perform all welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint or other foreign matter and properly align before welding. Use wire brush on welds after welding. Welds shall show uniform section, smoothness of weld metal and freedom from porosity and clinkers. Where necessary to achieve smooth connections, joints shall be dressed smooth T. Factory coat supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres with hot dip galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM Al23, 1.5- ounces /square foot of surface, each side. Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 150, 2.0 mil coating. Field cuts and damaged finishes shall be field- covered with zinc rich paint of comparable thickness to factory coating. Corrosive atmospheres include the following locations: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Exterior locations. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for pipe passing through floors, walls or partitions, hung or furred ceilings, of sufficient diameter to accommodate pipe covering where such is required. Locate sleeves secure in place so that an equal space is around the pipe, after the pipe is installed. B. For exposed pipes, caulk floor sleeves with firestop material watertight and project sleeve approximately 2 inches above the finished floor. Finish sleeves with specified flanges flush with the bottom of slab and also with the finished faces of wall. NIL C. Provide sleeves with an inside diameter at least 1 /2 -inch greater than outside of pipe served, W O including pipe insulation which must be continuous through sleeve. g 5 u_a D. Where piping penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., pack cn d space between piping and sleeve with mineral wool (for depth of sleeve), or firestop material. _ E. Do not support pipes by resting clamps on sleeves. Clamps shall extend beyond sleeve and be supported outboard of sleeve in an approved manner. In no case shall sleeves be cut or slotted to accommodate pipe clamps. F. Provide escutcheon plates of the proper size for piping in sleeves passing through floors, walls, soffits, furrings, partitions, hung ceilings, etc., throughout the building where exposed. Exposed escutcheons shall be cast brass chromium plated, bell type, with setscrews of sufficient diameter to include any required pipe insulation. Attach escutcheon to building material, not to pipe .Do not penetrate vapor barriers. 1. Split- casting, deep - pattern type cast -brass type with concealed hinge and set screw with polished chrome - plated and rough brass finish. 2. Split- casting, floor -plate type cast brass with concealed hinge and setscrew. G. Exterior -wall pipe penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install aboveground steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches. 2. Install aboveground cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Where space for future ducts, pipes and conduits is required, provide sleeves and fill with lightweight concrete or firestop. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -9 Z W re 2 6 JO U O C o CO W J I- al z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Provide firestopping and grouting around pipes and ducts penetrating concrete slabs, concrete walls and masonry walls with cement grout in the sleeved opening extending full depth through w all o r floor s lab. Provide sheet metal cover over the insulation before applying grout. Around pipes and ducts through fire rated gypsum board construction, pack the annular space between the wall sleeve and the insulation sheet metal cover with noncombustible approved firestop material and finish with 20 -gauge sheet metal collar on ducts and escutcheons on pipe where duct or pipework is exposed. Attach escutcheons to wall. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. D. Environmental requirements: 1. Provide adequate ventilation if using solvent. 2. Provide forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. 3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 5. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. E. Clean surfaces that will be in contact with penetration seal materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory or Mortars per Warnock Hersey approval and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. G. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. H. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes, ducts or other items, close unused portions of opening with firestopping material t ested for the application. See U.L. Fire Resistance Directory or Warnock Hersey approvals and Section 3.06 of this document. I. Install smokestopping as specified for firestopping. 3.04 GROUTING A. Mix, install and cure grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -10 .J 7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. D. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. E. Place grout around anchors. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -11 1 •- • I MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15160 PUMPS z PART 1 — GENERAL rt 1.01 WORK INCLUDED v p co A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: J = f- . Cl) 1. End suction base mounted pumps w 0 2. Cooling coil condensate pumps 3. Manufacturer's factory representative's supervision of installation and start -up g u. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS N d 11 A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions z F- O B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories w C. Section 15170: Electric Motors v �. D. Section 15171: Variable Frequency Drives w w E. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints Po w 0- A. Alternates to scheduled pumps shall operate at or near their point of peak efficiency, allowing O ~ for operation at capacities of approximately 25% beyond design capacity. Maximum impeller Z size shall not exceed 85% of the difference between the maximum and minimum impeller diameter. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. - In order to insure stable operation and prevent any possibility of hunting, the pump curve shall be continuously rising from maximum capacity up to the shutoff point. Pumps shall be non - overloading over the full range of the pump curve. C. Furnish each pump and motor with a metal engraved nameplate giving the manufacturer's name, serial number of pump, capacity in gpm and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full Toad current. D. All pumps shall operate without excessive noise or vibration. E. Furnish one spare seal and casing gasket for each pump to Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing submittals shall include pump curves, net positive suction head requirements, and pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating points plotted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Pumps 15160 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Submit construction details, materials of construction, type of seals, pump base, and z • mounting details. _ w re C. Submit motor construction, winding type and efficiencies as specified in Section 15170: Electric Motors. 0 N D en 11J PART 2 — PRODUCTS - _J H 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS W O A. End Suction: Armstrong, Paco, B &G, Aurora, Taco B. Cooling Coil Condensate: Little Giant, March, Beckett, Hartnell H w z� 2.02 END SUCTION BASE MOUNTED PUMPS i— p z F- w al A. Pump shall be of the end suction, vertically split case centrifugal type. j m B. The casing shall be close - grained case iron free from blowholes, sand pockets and other 0 defects. Liquid passageways shall be smooth and contoured to permit maximum 0 efficiency. Casing shall be designed for working pressure as scheduled and shall be = v hydrostatically tested at 150% of the maximum working pressure. Suction and discharge ~ r~- flanges shall be drilled to ANSI standards. L I 0 ui z C. A steel drip rim base shall be furnished for each pump unit. Pump and drive unit shall be U carefully aligned and bolted in place prior to factory shipment. p I z D. The impeller supplied for the specified conditions shall be a one -piece bronze casting and balanced statically, hydraulically and dynamically. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and securely retained in an axial position by positive mechanical means. E. Pump shaft shall be carbon steel with stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, sized, and designed to limit shaft deflection at the seal to no more than 0.002 inches. F Provide mechanically sealed suction pumps with John Crane Type 1B, elastomer, non - pusher type balanced mechanical seals on pump serving system above 150 pounds per square inch gauge. Provide unbalanced mechanical seals on pumps serving system with 150 pounds per square inch gauge rating. G. Pump bearings shall be heavy -duty conrad type suitable for grease lubrication and contained in moisture and dust -proof bearing housings with a minimum B life of 20,000 hours. H. Provide flanged connections on suction and discharge sizes 2 inches and larger, drilled to ANSI standards complete with pressure gauge taps. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Provide pumps suitable for maximum system working pressure with pump seals rated to operate continuously at fluid temperature up to 250° F. Pumps 15160 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Provide bronze replaceable case wear ring. Ring shall be pinned to lock the ring in place. z K. Pump shall have EPDM flexible coupling suitable for variable speed drive operation. Motor Q • 1 and pump shall be factory aligned and mounted on a steel or cast iron drip rim base. An -- OSHA approved coupling guard shall be provided. re 2 � O PART 3 — EXECUTION 0 w w 7 3.01 INSTALLATION J N u_ w A. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for aligning in the field prior to startup of all 2 �. flexibly coupled pumps. Alignment accuracy of plus or minus 0.002 inch shall be verified with g a a dial indicator. Prior to start-up, the manufacturer shall submit a written report certifying that the alignment work has been performed and that the pumps are ready for operation. = O Z � Z O w w 0 D. 0 I- w uj i- ll. O • Z 0 F- z B. Base mounted pumps shall be leveled up on tapered steel wedges in such manner to permit a minimum of /. -inch of grout between the pump base and the top of the concrete base. C. Pump motor, suction and discharge openings shall be covered during construction period. If the motor is started, the Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the environment in which the motor is running is clean. 3.02 PIPING A. Install all pumps in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Access /service space around pumps shall not be less than minimum space recommended by pump manufacturer. B. Support piping adjacent to pump such that weight is not carried on pump casings. C. Decrease from line size at pump connections with long radius reducing elbows or concentric reducers /increasers in the vertical piping, or eccentric reducers /increasers for horizontal piping. Install eccentric reducers /increasers with the top of the pipe level. D. At all pump suctions, install a straight pipe length of 4 times the suction diameter. E. Seals for all pumps serving condenser water or open cooling towers shall be supplied with a flushing water line piped with Crane Kynar Series 100 abrasive separator and Akron ball type sight flow indicator. F. Provide needle valves and drain connection on pump casings, or at pump inlets to allow for complete drainage of pump casing. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Pumps 15160 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15170 ELECTRIC MOTORS zz Z PART 1 - GENERAL re 2 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 0 0 y 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: w � u- 1. Constant speed and two -speed squirrel cage, polyphase electric induction motors for W 0 mechanical equipment. 2. Provide electric motors designed and rated for use on Alternating Current Variable g Frequency Drives (VFD) where applicable. cn I- W Z I- O Z O N CI I- W O ..z 1.03 SUBMITTALS F—z- O A. Submit motors under the sections covering the driven equipment. B. Submit motor efficiencies at full load, 75% full load and 50% full Toad. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. E. C. Submit certified dimensions, insulation class, NEMA frame size, materials of construction, base details and mounting details. D. Include with the motor driven equipment submittal, the following motor information: manufacturer, horsepower, voltage, phase, hertz, rpm, full load efficiency. Include project specific wiring diagrams prepared by the contractor specifically for this work. E. Include manufacturer's instructions in the operating and maintenance manuals for the specific equipment. include the following information if not previously documented on shop drawings: full load power factor, service factor, NEMA design designation, insulation class, and frame type. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. Section 15171: Variable Frequency Drives. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. Section 15241: Acoustics. Division 16: Electrical. ANSI /IEEE 112: Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. B. ANSI /NEMA MG 1 -1993 - Motors and Generators. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electric Motors 15170 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. ANSI /NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC). Q I— z E. Motors intended for variable speed applications shall have U.L. approval for use on "Generic" W pulse width modulated and /or 6 -Step waveforms. Motors requiring one specific manufacturer 6 D of VFD to meet the UL criteria are not acceptable. v O N F. Motors shall conform to applicable requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and NEC standards co W and shall be listed by U.L. for the service specified. Ill _I U) w G. Furnish motors for starting i n accordance with utility requirements and compatible with w O . u- 1.05 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION co D Hw A. All starters, overload relay heater coils, disconnect switches and fuses, relays, wire, conduit, Z H pushbuttons, pilot lights, and other devices required for the control of motors or electrical H O equipment are provided as specified by Division 16. � I- B. Division 16 drawings and specifications show number and horsepower rating of all motors O � furnished by this Contractor. Should any discrepancy in size, horsepower rating, electrical p N characteristics or means of control be found for any motor or other electrical equipment after 0 H contracts are awarded, Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect of such discrepancy. = w iii Refer to Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. 1— H -O C. Furnish project specific wiring diagrams to Division 16 Contractor for all equipment and Lb' Z P. I O~ Z PART 2 — PRODUCTS starters as specified. devices furnished under this section. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Constant Speed Applications: Toshiba Model E.Q.P., Magnetek E -Plus III, Baldor Super E, Reliance XE Premium, General Electric Energy Saver, Marathon Series E. B. Variable Speed Applications: U.S. Electrical Motors "Inverter Grade " ®, Baldor "Inverter Drive" ® or approved equal. 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide electric motors for driving the mechanical equipment. Motors shall be of proper power, construction and speed to suit the specified manufacturers of equipment. If other manufacturers of equipment are accepted, the proper adjustment of motor speed, torque and power must be included without additional cost. Submit drawings for review before the equipment is purchased. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electric Motors 15170 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. One -half horsepower and larger motors shall be rated 460 Volts alternating current (VAC) Q • and suitable for operation on a 480 VAC (plus or minus 5 %t) - 3 -phase - 60 hertz nominal = I electrical supply system. iu C. Fan powered terminal unit motors shall be rated 277 VAC - single phase -60 hertz and shall v U O be provided with integral thermal overload protection. N p D. One -third horsepower and smaller motors shall be rated 120 VAC - single phase -60 hertz -J H and shall be provided with integral thermal overload protection. N u- w 0 E. Motors s hall b e g enerally constant s peed, s quirrel -cage type, o pen drip -proof or totally g enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) design. Single phase motors shall be high efficiency capacitor u_ Q start, induction run, or split phase type as approved for the service. to d F. Motor temperature rise when operating on a variable frequency drive shall not exceed Class 1-- H F insulation limits at full load, with 115° C allowable winding hot spot temperature, across its F- 0 nameplate speed and torque envelope. Sinewave temperature rise shall be Class F or w (- better. D p G. Motors shall have minimum Class B insulation for continuous full load duty at 40° C and a 0 N maximum altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Where normal operating temperatures will CD H exceed the Class B insulation rating, provide Class F insulation. For all motors driven by = 0 iii variable frequency drives, provide Class H insulation. i u_ O H. Motors shall be of quiet operating type, guaranteed to fulfill the specified requirements w z without producing any objectionable sound exceeding room NC levels as specified. All belt 0 = connected motors shall have adjustable b ases and set s crews t o m aintain p roper belt 0 (-- tension. Provide proper belt guards, in accordance with OSHA Standards. Z I. Motors and accessories shall be UL listed and comply with NEMA standards. J. Minimum Service Factor: 1. Constant speed applications: 1.15. 2. Variable speed application: Nameplate Sinewave Service factor shall be 1.15 or greater. K. Coordinate the NEMA type of each motor with the torque and inertia load of the equipment served, and the inrush current characteristics of the motor with the motor starter selection, so that all items furnished constitute a properly related package. Motor shall not operate in the 15% service factor range. L. Motors located in ducted air streams or subject to outside air elements shall be totally enclosed fan cooled; others shall be open drip -proof design. Motors 1 horsepower or larger shall have encapsulated stator windings of the epoxy or silicone type. M. Fan motors shall be capable of accelerating their respective fans from 0 revolutions per minute to design or synchronous revolutions per minute within a maximum of 10 seconds. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electric Motors 15170 -3 MOTOR EFFICIENCY BY MOTOR SIZE AND SPEED Horsepower 1200 rpm 1800 rpm 3600 rpm ODP TEFC ODP TEFC ODP TEFC '/2 and 3 /: 80.0 80.4 82.1 82.7 79.1 78.5 1 82.5 82.5 85.5 85.5 80.0 85.5 1% 86.5 87.5 86.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 2 87.5 88.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 3 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 91.0 7%2 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 89.5 91.7 15 92.4 91.7 93.0 91.7 91.0 91.7 20 92.4 92.4 93.0 92.4 92.4 92.4 25 93.0 92.4 93.6 93.0 93.0 93.0 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS N. All motors 1/2 horsepower and larger, except two -seed motors, specially wound motors and inline pump motors frame size 56 and smaller, shall be high efficiency design with full load efficiencies (in percent) which meet or exceed the values listed below when tested in accordance with NEMA MG: O. Each motor shall be factory wired to a junction box mounted on the motor or on the driven piece of equipment to facilitate single point of field power connection under Division 16. 2.03 VARIABLE SPEED APPLICATIONS A. Motors used with variable frequency drives shall be designed specifically for use on AC inverter power and adjustable speed applications, with the following requirements: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Frame materials shall be cast iron, aluminum or rolled steel. 2. Motor insulation shall be Class H and designed to meet the voltage spike limits defined by NEMA MG1, Part 31, 1993. Insulation systems shall utilize 200° C magnet wire with a Pulse Endurance Index greater than 100. Insulation systems utilizing heavy film wire are not acceptable. Complete insulation of the slot, cell and phase groups is required. The system shall be rated for Class F rise or better. 3. Stator core designs shall be of high rigidity with reinforced end turn construction to minimize mechanical fatigue of the winding, and to reduce resonant noise. Varnished materials shall be double dip, double bake using polyester phenolic Class H varnish. Single dip and bake cycles are not acceptable. Electric Motors 15170 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 4. Winding thermal protection, utilizing normally closed contacts, shall be sized to match the maximum safe operating temperature of the insulation system. Contacts shall open when winding temperature reaches 155° C. Hazardous location motors shall have winding thermal protection sized as required to meet UL or as auxiliary devices where not required by UL. 5. Low loss electrical steel shall be utilized in the stator and rotor core assemblies. 6. Maximized copper content shall be utilized to achieve high motor efficiency and thermal transfer. 7. Rotor cores and /or assemblies shall be of a low vibration design that meets one -half of the NEMA MG1 recommended levels for balance. 8. The final motor design shall be evaluated by factory test on inverter power over the full range of speeds. Variable Torque, Variable Speed Motors: 1. Motors shall meet NEMA design "B" performance levels. Design "A" motors are acceptable when higher than normal efficiencies are required. 2. Motors shall be nameplated for 6 to 60 hertz operation. Hazardous location motors may be nameplated 10 to 60 hertz. C. Constant Torque, Variable Speed Motors: 1. Motors intended for constant torque applications shall be TEFC, TENV or TEBC (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled, Totally Enclosed Non - Ventilated or Totally Enclosed Blower Cooled) construction. 2 TEFC motors rated for 3:1 constant torque on "GENERIC" inverter power shall meet NEMA design "B" levels. TENV motors and motors rated for speed ranges greater than 3:1 may be rated as NEMA design "A ". TEBC motors shall meet NEMA design "B" levels. 3. Motors shall meet NEMA criteria for mechanical construction. D. Nameplates: 1. Performance data for adjustable speed operation shall be stamped on a steel data plate and permanently attached to the motor frame. 2. The minimum amount of adjustable speed nameplate data shall include: a. Application Type — Constant Torque, Variable Torque or Constant Horsepower. b. Maximum approved continuous torque. c. Approved RPM and frequency operating range. d. Typical motor full load amps on VFD (inverter) power. Electric Motors 15170 -5 z 1 Z ~ w 00 u) 0 . W � w O LL a = z � I- 0 Z I— 111 w 0 O - 0 I- wW 2 F- O Iii Z U= O � z Open Drip -Proof TEFC Horse- power 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 1 - 85.5 80.0 - 85.5 81.5 1.5 82.5 85.5 84.0 84.0 85.5 85.5 2.0 84.0 85.5 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 3.0 84.0 89.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 90.2 5.0 87.5 89.5 88.5 88.5 90.2 90.2 7.5 87.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 10 88.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.7 91.0 15 89.5 92.4 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 ._ 20 91.0 93.0 91.7 91.0 93.0 91.7 25 91.7 94.1 93.0 91.7 93.0 92.4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION UNISYS - Tukwila E. Motors used in variable speed applications shall have the following minimum NEMA nominal efficiency levels nameplated on the motor: The above efficiency values represent motor designs rated for 230 VAC or 460 VAC at 1800 rpm nominal speed. Other base speeds and /or voltages may deviate from the above levels, but the NEMA Nominal efficiency must be provided at the time of the bid. A. When motor will be flexible coupled to the driven device, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Using a dial indicator, check angular misalignment of the two shafts; adjust motor position as necessary so that the angular misalignment of the shafts does not exceed 0.002 inches per inch diameter of the coupling hub. Again using the dial indicator, check the shaft for run -out to assure concentricity of the shafts; adjust as necessary so that run -out does not exceed 0.002 inches. Set all direct driven equipment with not more than one -half of the coupling manufacturer's recommended maximum tolerance for parallel and angular variance in alignment. B. Align all belt driven equipment to provide minimum wear on belts and drives, with belts properly tensioned. C. Mount motors on a rigid base designed to accept a motor, using shims if required under each mounting foot to get a secure installation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electric Motors 15170 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. When motor will be connected to the driven device by means of a belt drive, mount sheaves on the appropriate shafts in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Use a straight edge to check alignment of the sheaves; reposition sheaves as necessary so that the straight edge contacts both sheave faces squarely. After sheaves are aligned, loosen the adjustable motor base so that the belt(s) can be added and tighten the base so that the belt tension is in accordance with the drive manufacturer's recommendations. Frequently recheck belt tension and adjust if necessary during the first day of operation and again after 80 hours of operation. 3.02 START UP A. Coordinate overload heater requirements with motor starter provider. B. Verify the proper rotation of each three -phase motor as it is being wired or before the motor is energized for any reason. C. Lubricate all motors requiring lubrication. Record lubrication material used and the recommended frequency of lubrication. Include this information in the maintenance manuals September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Electric Motors 15170 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) for mechanical equipment where indicated 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15160: Pumps C. Section 15170: Electric Motors D. Section 15771: Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -top Units E. Section 15860: Fans F. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) G. Section 15985: Automatic Control Sequences H. Division 16: Electrical 1 :03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data as specified, including outline dimensions, weights, power and control wiring schematics, and equipment schedule. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15171 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES IEEE — Standard 519 compliance calculation and harmonic analysis for this particular installation: 1. Total harmonic voltage d istortion a nd total h armonic c urrent d istortion. P rovide calculations, specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5 percent. 2. Input line filters shall be sized and provided as required by the manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE standard 519. All VFDs shall include a minimum of a 3- percent impedance reactor. C. Start-up Service Report and guarantee. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a 2 -year unconditional parts and labor warrantee on all VFD components. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Referenced Standards: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Standard 519 -1992, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control. 2. Underwriters laboratories: UL508C. 3. National Electrical M anufacturer's A ssociation (NEMA): ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives. 4. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2. C. Qualifications: VFDs and components shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFDs that require field- supplied external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not acceptable. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Variable Frequency Drives: Toshiba, ABB, Graham /Danfoss. 2.02 AC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE A. Provide completely assembled VFD, factory- tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall operate from a line overvoltage of 30 percent over nominal. The undervoltage trip level shall be 35 percent under the nominal voltage as a minimum. B. The alternating current variable speed drive system shall include the microprocessor based variable frequency controller, the required signal logic and control. The electrical drive equipment specified including the variable frequency controller and its associated microprocessor control system, shall be of the same manufacturer. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier to ensure compatibility between drive and AC Motors. C. All equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA. The electrical equipment, as well as the design, construction, and installation thereof, shall comply with all the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and be E.T.L. or U.L. approved. The variable frequency drive shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure for drives inside the building, N EMA 12 enclosure for drives in air handling plenum spaces, and NEMA 3R enclosure for drives outside the building. The control circuitry shall be isolated from the power circuitry. E. The manufacturer shall submit calculated line distortion percentages in accordance with IEEE STD -519, based upon the total connected horsepower and source kilovolt- amperes of the utility and emergency power distribution system. Request electrical data for calculation from the Division 16 contractor. F. The speed controller shall respond to a speed adjusting potentiometer from the VFD sequence panel when in the manual mode or shall respond to a milliamp or voltage electrical signal when operating in the automatic mode. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. The cabinet shall require front access only. The unit shall be suitable for operation in ambient air at 0 to 40 degrees C and up to 95 percent RH at rated load and switching frequency. Z H. The variable frequency controller shall convert 230 or 480 volt (plus or minus 30 percent) 3- ,F z phase, 60 hertz (plus or minus 3 percent) utility supplied or standby generator supplied power 12 to variable frequency, variable voltage three -phase AC power for induction motor speed 6 v control. The controller shall be selected to have sufficient capacity to provide stepless speed c) O control of the specified horsepower motors throughout a continuous speed range under a co o variable torque load not exceeding the motor full -load rating. W = J H 2.03 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER • N w wO 2 A. The controller shall be of the pulse width modulated (PWM) type and shall have three sections including a minimum 3 percent line impedance reactor as follows: co d 1. AC -DC section (a 3- phase, full wave, half diode bridge or transistor bridge). F = .- w 2. Capacitor section. Z H 3. 3 -phase output module. F.. O Z I- B. The controller shall be capable of performing the following functions: 2 n U� 0 92 O H wW H u-O Ili u) U = O~ Z 1. Adjustable linear timed acceleration and deceleration. 2. Plus or minus 0.5 hertz frequency stability. 3. 10:1 controlled speed range. 4. Manual /automatic operation. 5. Other functions as described. C. Include the following protective devices and /or features: 1. Regulator with self- contained test module or panel. 2. Contactor shall be vacuum break design to carry specified current (OLT) on continual basis without damage (normal condition), designed to break specified locked rotor ampere current repeatedly without damage (abnormal operation). Entire VFD assembly shall be rated for minimum 60,000 amperes interrupting capacity root mean square symmetrical (AIC RMS). . 3 AC overload protection to continuously monitor peak current and shut down the DC module gate signals if the instantaneous electrical trip motor current exceeds 180 percent of the controller full load current rating. 4. Monitor lamps or LED read -out on VFD front panel to provide immediate indication of controller functions. 5. Current limit. 6. Adjustable volts /hertz. 7. Adjustable offset voltage increases starting and accelerating torque capability. 8. All output phase modules shall turn off instantly when a high DC bus occurs or when the current exceeds 150 percent of rated current. September 30, 2003 Variable Frequency Drives Permit Issue 15171 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. The following controller adjustments shall be contained on one regulator card of microprocessor control board: z 1. Minimum hertz/maximum hertz. _ 2. Acceleration rate (Adjustable 0 to 125 seconds). !— w 3. Deceleration rate (Adjustable 0 to 125 seconds). 4. Volts /hertz. r v 5. Offset voltage. 0 0 co 0 E. Provide a test panel or module to permit on -line monitoring and troubleshooting of the drive. J H Monitor the following regulator signals: u) u. WO 1. Internal power supplies. 2 2. Ramp generator output. g - 3. DC bus voltage. V- u) d 2.04 SAFETY CONTROLS & PROTECTIVE COMPONENTS H al 2 A. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and accelerate z O' or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start). The I uj VFD shall also be capable of DC injection braking at start to stop a reverse spinning motor prior to ramp. U 0 O— B. The VFD shall be equipped with an automatic extended control power loss ride - through w w circuit, which shall utilize the inertia of the load to keep the drive powered. Typical control H o power loss ride - through for a fan load shall be 2 seconds minimum. u_ { C. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110 percent of its normal duty current rating for 1 U cn minute every 10 minutes. The minimum full -load ampere rating shall meet or exceed the F= Z values in the NEC /UL table 430 -150 for 4 -pole motors. Z D. The VFD shall have an integral 3 percent impedance line reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. E. The VFD shall be capable of sensing a loss of load (broken belt / broken coupling) and signal the loss of load condition. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. Relay output shall include programmable time delays that allow for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false underload condition. F. Provide surge reduction filter for electrical circuit lengths in excess of 200 feet. G. The following shall be provided: 1. Motor thermal overload relays at the output for motor protection. 2. Enclosure door interlocked disconnect switch. 3. All coils for relays and contactor shall be suppressed. 4. Automatic Restart: Controller shall automatically attempt to restart five (5) times after a fault. After five (5) restarts, a manual start of the drive equipment is required. September 30, 2003 Variable Frequency Drives Permit Issue 15171 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 5. The following contacts shall be wired to terminal boards of users control and indication: a. Motor running speed. i- z b. Drive faults. W .c c. Remote stop- starting 6 v 6. A complete factory wired and .tested bypass system consisting of an output v O contactor and bypass contactor. Overload protection and single phase protection co 0 shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes. Include door mounted manual by- W w pass switch with bypass contactor and t, indicator light. Electronic bypasses are not N 1- acceptable. w 0 J u. < 1. Motor thermal overload. to d 2. AC input voltage dips to 60 percent or less of its nominal value. = w 3. Drive output current exceeds 110 percent of controller full load rating. Z z 4. A fault condition in any of the 3 output power module phases. i- 0 z I- w w 0 0 52 OH 1. Two (2) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from = U operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. F 2. PID Setpoint controller shall be standard in the drive, allowing a pressure or flow g_ O signal to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the ill z. closed loop control. The VFD shall have 250 milliamp of 24 volts DC auxiliary power U = . and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID setpoint ~O '- shall be adjustable from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications - z bus. 3. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept a current or voltage signal. 4. One (1) programmable analog output. 5. Two (2) programmable digital Form -C relay outputs. The relays shall include programmable on and off delay times. Default settings shall be for run and not faulted (fail safe). 6. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds. 7. Two independently adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps. H. Drive faults shall consist of the following: 2.05 ADJUSTMENTS AND CONTROLS A. All VFDs shall have the following operator adjustable components: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue All VFDs shall have the same interface, including backlit LCD digital display and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. 1. The keypad shall be used for local control, for setting all parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus. The keypad shall be removable /lockable to the cabinet, capable of remote mounting, and shall have it's own non - volatile memory. T he keypad s hall a Ilow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs. 2. The keypad shall include Hand - Off -Auto selections. When in "Hand ", the VFD shall be started and the speed will be controlled from the up /down arrows. When in "Off', the VFD shall be stopped. When in "Auto ", the VFD shall start via an external contact closure and the VFD speed shall be controlled via an external speed reference. Manual pilot devices are not acceptable. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Display shall indicate drive frequency, output voltage or output current. Provide an indication of the activation of the drive protection features and /or status in plain English without the use of code abbreviations as follows: Z a. Overcurrent. 1 H b. Overvoltage. w c. Current Limit. 6 D d. Decel Voltage Limit. v 0 0 e. Ground Fault. f. Overtemperature. Cl) w g. I Protection. -I H h. Improper Input Voltage Selected. cn u- i. Minimum /Maximum Speed Improperly Adjusted. w 0 C. Serial Communications: v Q D 1. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocol shall be = d Modbus. Optional protocols that must be available are: Johnson Controls N2 bus, t' _ Profibus and DeviceNet. Z 1.- 2. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to, run -stop Z 0 0 control; speed set adjustment, proportional /integral /derivative PID control W adjustments, current limit, and accel /decel time adjustments. A minimum of 15 field - > 0 parameters shall be capable of being monitored. The DDC system shall be able to 0 N monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or bypass mode (if bypass is p H specified) over serial communications. The drive shall have the capability of allowing _ w w the DDC to monitor feedback as a minimum, with 5 additional: H v a. Process variable feedback. u- ~O b. Output speed /frequency. z c. Current (in amps). v N d. Percent torque. o H D. The following shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer and shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue e. Power (kw). f. Kilowatt hours (resettable). g. Operating hours (resettable). h. Relay outputs. Diagnostic warning and fault information. j. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible. 3. The VFD shall allow the DDC to control the drive's digital and analog outputs via the serial interface. The serial communications interface shall allow for DO (relay) control and AO (analog) control. This control shall be independent of any VFD function. The outputs can be used for modulating chilled water valves via the analog output, actuate a damper etc. In addition, all drive digital and analog inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system. 1. Fused VFD -only disconnect (service switch). Fast acting semi - conductor fuses exclusive to the VFD to allow the VFD to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection, maintaining bypass capability. Bypass designs which do not have fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted. Three contactor bypass schemes are not acceptable. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -6 4dS.�... �... �.+.... a.. �_.... rrwi..��..w.s�4'.:.....i.'..... �....st.uLL z • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 2. The following operators shall be provided: a. Bypass Hand - Off -Auto. b. Drive mode selector. c. Bypass mode selector. d. Bypass fault reset. 3. The following indicating lights (LED type) shall be provided. A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided. a. Power -on. b. External fault. c. Drive mode selected. d. Bypass mode selected. e. Drive running. f. Bypass running. g. Drive fault. h. Bypass fault i. Bypass H -O -A mode. j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected. 4. The following relay (form C) outputs from the bypass shall be provided: a. System started. b. System running. c. Bypass override enabled. d. Drive fault. e. Bypass fault- motor overload or underload due to broken belt. f. Bypass H -O -A position. 5. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24 volt or 115 volt AC (selectable). The bypass shall incorporate internally sourced 24 volt power supply and not require an external control power source. 6. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip — provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks s hall r emain f ully f unctional w hether t he s ystem is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. 7. The VFD shall include a "run permissive circuit" that will provide a normally open contact any time a run command is provided (local or remote start command in VFD or bypass mode). The.VFD system (VFD or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it receives a dry contact closure from a damper or valve end - switch). When the VFD system safety interlock (fire detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc) opens, the motor shall coast to a stop and the run permissive contact shall open, closing the damper or valve. 8. Class 20 electronic motor overload protection shall be included. 9. There shall be an internal switch to select manual or automatic bypass. 10. There shall be an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide Toss of load indication when in the bypass mode. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall install the drive and power wiring shall be completed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual. B. Start -up Service: Provide certified factory- authorized start-up service for purposes of installation inspection, initial drive equipment setting, energization and adjustment. Start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner. Coordinate with equipment supplier to ensure compatibility between variable frequency drive and the motor supplied with the equipment. D. Division 16 shall mount and wire the drives in locations as shown on the Drawings. E. Maintain code required electrical clearance around all VFD cabinets. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -8 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15190 SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Valve and automatic damper identification. 2. Equipment identification. 3. Piping and ductwork identification. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15150: Access Doors in General Construction & Color Coded Identification Buttons. C. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. Valve and damper identification chart. 2. Lists of pipe and equipment to be labeled. 3. Color chart. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation, including samples of valve and damper tags, equipment identification and piping identification. C. Maintenance Manuals: Provide valve and damper tag schedules for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A13.1 — 1981: Scheme for identification of piping systems. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping identification shall comply with ANSI Standard A13.1. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Systems Identification 15190 -1 FZ 're aa � iO 00 W 0. w= LL w 0 g¢ = H- _ z � I- O Z H. 2 uj U� O N 0 ,— w � L W z co 0~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS z A. Brady /Seton. w 2 B. Stranco. m JU 0 2.02 VALVE AND DAMPER IDENTIFICATION co 0 W =` A. AU tagged components shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1 -1981. Cl) o w B. For valves and automatic dampers, use metal tags 2 -inch minimum diameter, fabricated of 2 brass, stainless steel or aluminum. 2.03 LABELS w u j A. Labels shall have 2 -inch high letters and integral directional flow arrows. Smaller letters may j be used only when space does not permit 2 -inch high lettering. U O� Ww H F L I O . • w Z ' U= O I— A. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently screw fastened to the equipment. Nameplates shall be black surface, white core laminated bakelite with engraved letters. Plates shall be a minimum of 3 -inch long by 1 -inch wide with white letters 3/8 -inch high. 2.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION B. Identification of Automatic Controls shall be as per Section 15900, Automatic Temperature Control, specification. C. Terminal equipment installed in ceiling spaces such as variable volume terminals, fan coil units, heat pumps, etc. shall have identifying number stenciled on bottom of unit so that it is visible from below. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 VALVE AND AUTOMATIC DAMPER IDENTIFICATION A. Do not identify valves where the use is obvious, such as equipment isolation valves. B. Provide schedules of all valves showing number, size, type and service of each valve. Provide separate list for each separate hydronic system. Incorporate in maintenance manuals. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Attach tags with jack chain s -hook or split ring of same materials. 2. For stamped tags, use 1 h -inch high letters. -~ I _ Z � I— O Z H 1. For piping up to 5 -inch diameter, use pre- formed snap -on markers Seton "Setmark" or equal. 2. Pressure sensitive tapes are unacceptable. Systems Identification 15190 -2 C. Tag automatic dampers with identical letters or numbers as shown on Drawings. 3.02 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION w . A. Identify equipment with identical letter and /or number as used on Drawings. Where space is ix a available use full name of equipment. Attach nameplates in a permanent manner in a location that will be clearly visible after installation is complete. o 0 Si • _J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Controls identification shall be specified in Section 15900, Building Management Systems. J Also identify controls not included in Section 15900 such as float switches, alarms, remote w pushbutton switches with 1 4 -inch high lettering and laminated plastic plates screwed or uJ 0 changed to equipment. 2 - g P5 ca O A. Piping identification shall be in conformance with the ANSI A13.1 -1981. H w z }— B. Identify piping systems with color coded bands, sharply contrasting with background. Locate i- O bands near strategic points, such as valves, items of equipment, changes in direction, wall w w' penetrations, capped stub out for future connection and every 40 feet of straight runs. If 2 o necessary, paint a strip background of black or white to obtain contrast. v o O -; O I- C. Apply bands where they can be easily read. Provide bands with backgrounds of different W colors. z v IL- O. 3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION D. Drain piping serving mechanical equipment items for which the drain discharge is not visible , . z from the equipment shall be marked near the point of discharge indicating the item of W N' equipment served. v OH z 3.04 ACCESS IDENTIFICATION A. Identify service, damper, duct access door, piping and equipment behind all architectural access doors. B. Removable ceiling tile shall be marked by small color markings at corner of tile or door in accordance with the following color assignments: HVAC - Blue Fire Protection - Red Plumbing - Silver END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Systems Identification Permit Issue 15190 -3 z PART 1 — GENERAL et . 1.01 WORK INCLUDED U O co o A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Vibration isolation elements for a II Division 15 piping, ductwork and all rotating 0 WO equipment. 2. Flexible connectors. 3. Seismic restraints for all equipment, piping and ductwork. u. < 4. Supervision and inspection of installed vibration isolators, seismic restraints and 52 d associated hardware. W: 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS H O z I A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. uj W V i B. Section 15241: Acoustics. 0 -. 0 I-- -� 1.03 SUBMITTALS W J A. Manufacturer's Data: O Ii z 1. Catalog cuts and data sheets on specific vibration isolators to be utilized showing v compliance with the specifications. O H 2. An itemized list showing the items of equipment and piping to be isolated, the isolator Z. type and model number selected, isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specific drawings. 3. Written approval of the base design shall be obtained from the equipment manufacturer. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS B. Shop Drawings: Concrete reinforcing details and templates for all foundations, bases, supports, inertia blocks, hanger bolts, etc.; s upport frame details, pipe s upport details; vibration isolation mountings for equipment and piping including equipment weight, center of gravity and operating speed, location and installation details. Include in the vibration isolation equipment submittal drawing the following information based on equipment submittals released for construction. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Isolation mounting deflections. 2. Spring diameters, compressed spring heights at rated load and solid spring heights where steel spring isolation mountings are used. 3. Equipment operating speed. 4. Seismic restraint calculations stamped by a Washington State licensed structural engineer. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 5. Number and location of seismic restraints and anchors for each piece of equipment including but not limited to bolted or welded connections between cooling tower and z support beams, vertical pipe risers, bolt sizing and embedment depth, and seismic Q cable strength and diameters. k- z 6. Specific details of restraints including anchor bolts for mounting and maximum w loading at each location. 7. Drawings showing methods of suspension, support guides for piping and ductwork. -J UO 8. Drawings showing methods of isolation of pipes and ductwork piercing walls and cn 0 floor slabs. U) w 9. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper -J1- i nstallation and performance. N u_ w 0 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS ga A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or to governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: H W z� 1. 1997 Washington State Building Code. 2. SMACNA — Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association: u O Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping 2 m Systems. v p 1.05 MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBILITIES o H W A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities: i v 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide control of excessive noise and vibration in the buildings due to the operation of machinery or equipment, and /or due to interconnected piping, ductwork or conduit. Install vibration isolation units and associated hangers and bases under the direct supervision of the vibration isolation manufacturer's engineer. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue O 1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. LLj 2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled �? or specified. ~ O I- 3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection. z 4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and performance. 5. Purchased and /or fabricated equipment must be designed to safely accept external lateral forces based on 1.00W where W is the equipment weight. Equipment must also accept an external vertical force equal to one third of lateral force calculated. Substitution of "Internally Isolated" mechanical equipment in lieu of the specified isolation of this Section must be accompanied by submittal details, seismic calculations and be approved for individual equipment units. Refer to Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions for Alternates. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints • 15240 -2 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or calibration markings so that after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the Toad is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided according to the design. 2. Isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Furnish Toad versus deflection curves that are linear over a deflection range of not less than 50% greater than the design deflection. 3. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall be not less than 0.9 nor greater than 1.5. 4. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon Toad per isolator and isolator stiffness shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than plus or minus 10 percent. 5. All neoprene mountings and components shall be oil resistant and have: a. Shore durometer hardness of 40 to 65, after minimum aging of 20 days or corresponding oven - aging. b. Minimum tensile strength of 2000 pounds per square inch. c. Minimum elongation of 300 %. d. Maximum compression set at 25 %. B. Adhere to SMACNA Guidelines for Restraints of Mechanical Systems. C. Design seismic restraints in accordance with Local Code Seismic Zone. D. Mounting systems or components shall not be resonant with any of the supported equipment forcing frequencies. E. Isolators shall be selected on the basis of the static and dynamic loads actually supported. Dynamic loads include those due to: wind, fluid flow, thrust and rotational inertia. Select each isolator independently for proper load distribution on each piece of equipment, duct and pipe support, or base. F. Vibration Isolation Hardware shall not be concealed until reviewed by the Architect. G. Verify specified clearances, plumb installation of hanger rods and lack of interference — no contactpermitted with gypsum board, framing, ceiling wires, Tight fixtures, conduit, ducts and piping. H. Verify proper vibration isolator loading and deflection. I. Vibration isolation field inspection engineer shall provide a punchlist report for the Architects review. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ct 6 A. Vibration Isolation: Mason Industries (MU), Vibration Mountings & Control (VMC), Amber- v U O Booth (AB), Vibration Eliminator (VEC), Vibrex Vibration Control Systems (VVC). co 0 B. Seismic Piping and Duct Supports: Kin -Line, Super Strut, Mason Industries, and per - SMACNA. W O 2.02 MATERIALS A. All vibration isolation devices shall be the products of a single manufacturer. C d I- B. Where exposed to the atmosphere all steel shall be hot dipped galvanized; hardware shall be z cadmium plated; springs shall be neoprene coated. I— O z I— w w U � A. Refer to these specifications and drawings for vibration isolator types to be used. o w I I O w U= O ~ PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Type A spring isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Minimum diameter of 0.8 of the loaded operating height and horizontal spring stiffness 1.1 times rated vertical spring stiffness. b. Reserve deflection, from loaded to solid height, of 50% of rated deflection with leveling device. c. Minimum' /2 -inch thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside, unless designated otherwise. Neoprene elements shall be as specified. d. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel. e. Tapped holes in base plate for bolting isolator to base, housekeeping pad or structural support. Type SLFH MII Type OSK VEC Type RMS VMC 2. Type B spring isolators shall be same as Type A, except: a. Provide built -in resilient vertical limit stops. b. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment. c. Capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment erection. Type SLR Series 100 MII Type KW VEC Type RMSL -EQ • VMC 3. Type C spring hanger rod isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Spring element seated on a steel washer in series with a deflected neoprene element as specified. b. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene washer. Ensure no metal to metal contact. c. Minimum 1 /2 -inch clearance between retainer box and spring hanger rod. Provide neoprene grommet. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -4 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila d. Where operating weight differs from installed weight provide built -in adjustable limit stops to prevent equipment rising when weight is removed. Stops shall not be in contact during normal operation. e. Maximum 30° allowable rod misalignment from centerline axis. Type 30N MU Type SNCR VEC Type RSH -30A VMC 4. Type D elastomer isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Bolt holes for bolting to equipment base. b. Bottom steel plates for bolting to sub -base as required. c. Molded unit type neoprene element as specified. Type BR MII Type 368 SD VEC Type FUD -EQ VMC 5. Type E elastomer hanger rod isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Molded unit type neoprene element as specified. b. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting. c. Clearance between mounting hanger rod and steel retainer box. Provide neoprene grommet. Type HD Mil Type CD VEC Type HSS VMC 6. Type F pad type elastomer mountings shall incorporate the following: a. 3 h -inch minimum thickness neoprene elements as specified. Verify thickness will not degrade or derate the isolator performance. b. Sized for 50 pounds per square inch maximum loading. Provide suitable bearing plate to distribute load. c. Ribbed or waffled design. d. 1/6 -inch deflection per pad thickness. e. 1/16 -inch galvanized steel plate between multiple layers of pad thickness. Type Super W (SW) MU Type 200N VEC Type Iso -Cube VMC 7. Type G pad type elastomer mountings shall incorporate the following: a. Laminated canvas duck material and neoprene as specified: • b. Maximum loading 1000 pounds per square inch. Provide suitable bearing plate to distribute load. c. Minimum thickness, 2 -inch. Type HL MII Type Fabriflex VMC 8. Type H: Roof spring curb with tube -steel structural members and laterally stable springs. Tate, Thy -Curb or approved equal. 2.04 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS A. Neoprene Type FC -1: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Manufactured of nylon tire cord and neoprene molded and cured with hydraulic presses. 2. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Elbow shall have single sphere forming the corner of joint. 4. Rated 150 pounds per square inch at 220° F. 5. Size 6 -inch and larger and all flexible piping connectors at pumps, and chillers shall employ control cables with end fittings isolated from anchor plates by means of /2 inch bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings. Type Safeflex SFDEJ, SFDCR MII B. Flexible Stainless Hose, Type FC -2: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Braided flexible metal hose. 2. 2 -inch pipe size and smaller with male nipple fittings. 3. 2' /-inch and larger pipe size with fixed steel flanges. 4. Suitable for operating pressure and temperature with 4:1 minimum safety factor. 5. Length as specified on Drawings. Type BSS MII Type MFP VMC 2.05 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. Provide restraints capable of safely accepting forces specified in Part 1 of this section, without failure, to maintain equipment, piping, duct, variable volume terminal units, fan coil units, fan powered terminal units in a captive position. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise. Submit calculations by Structural Engineer licensed and registered in the State of the project to verify seismic restraint and sway cable capacities. a. Spring Seismic Restraint, Type I: Comply with general characteristics of spring isolators. Incorporate snubbing restraint in all directions. Restraint shall be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection. Type SSLR MII b. Seismic Restraint, Type II: Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8 -inch thick pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made o f p late, s tructural members or square metal tubing in a welded assembly incorporating resilient pads. Type Z -1225 MII c. Seismic Restraint, Type III: Cable type with approved end fastening devices (minimum of two per end) to equipment and structure. Cable to comply with Federal Specification MIL -W -83420 military grade 7x19 galvanized steel. Type SSB MII 2. Provide diagonal thrust restraint consisting of Type C Hanger with the same deflection as specified for the spring mountings. Design the spring element so it can be preset for thrust and adjusted to allow for a maximum of 'A-inch movement at start and stop. Attach diagonal restraints at the centerline of thrust restraint. Type WV MII Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -6 e'; • PART 3 — EXECUTION fl MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions. Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping resulting in piping stresses or misalignment. B. Isolate mechanical equipment from the building structure by means of vibration isolators as specified and scheduled on the Drawings. C. Piping and ductwork to be isolated must pass freely through walls and floors without rigid connections. Maintain 3 h -inch to 1%-inch concentric clearance around outside surfaces of piping or ductwork at penetration points. Pack this clearance space tightly with fiberglass, and caulk airtight after installation of piping or ductwork, or provide resilient firestopping as required. Provide supports 6 to 8 inches from walls or partitions on both sides of penetrations. D. Do not make rigid connections between equipment and building structure that degrades or short circuits the vibration isolation system specified herein. E. Provide flexible connectors to all other connections to vibration isolated equipment such as condensate drains, make -up water, fuel, compressed air and other piping as allowed by codes and /or local authorities. F. Loop electrical circuit connections to isolated equipment to allow free motion. Include at least one slack 90° bend. G. Bring to the Architect's attention prior to installation any conflicts with other trades which will result in unavoidable rigid contact with equipment or piping as described herein, due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation will be at the Contractor's expense. H. Support vertical piping loads, including water strainers, and valves between pump base elbow supports and the suction and discharge header piping by means of the pump base spring isolators without stress or strain to the pump housing. I. Provide a flanged steel pipe spool piece between suction and discharge valves and pumps to permit future installation of flexible connectors. J. Level vibration isolated equipment under rated design operating conditions while maintaining the isolation criteria. Isolators shall be plumb and aligned during operation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 EQUIPMENT ISOLATORS .. z H A. Mount vibration isolating devices and related inertia blocks on concrete housekeeping pads. 1— w CC 2 B. Support each fan and motor assembly on a single structural steel frame. Provide flexible """ duct connections at inlet and discharge of heat pumps, air conditioning units, fan coils and N p fans, including plug fan assemblies inside factory assembled air handling units unless to w prohibited by codes or local authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Section 15800, Ductwork. .,g.a H Nu_ C. If the equipment to be mounted is not furnished with integral structural frames and external 0 mounting lugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), install approved structural sub -base in the field which will support the equipment to be hung and to which will be attached the "`' J hangers. N D. Provide cooling tower with sufficient bolted connections to structural steel support beam. Z H Verify cooling tower mounting flange thickness and bolt hole diameters with seismic calculations. Z O w W E. Additional Requirements: j p V N 1. Provide brackets to accommodate the isolator. Manufacturer shall indicate bolt hole o '— sizes and locations, welds required, and specify the vertical position and size of the = w bracket. i— H 2. Maintain a minimum operating balance between the equipment frame on rigid steel u- p base frame and the concrete housekeeping pad of 1 inch. Maintain a minimum al Z operating clearance between concrete inertia and base and concrete housekeeping U pad or floor of 2 inches. i=- f =.. 3. Temporarily s upport the structural steel or concrete inertia base with blocks or z shims, as appropriate, prior to the installation of the equipment or isolators. 4. Install the isolators without raising the equipment and frame assembly. 5. Adjust the isolators after the entire installation is complete and under full operational load so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolator. When all isolators are properly adjusted, the blocks or shims will be barely free and shall be removed. 6. Verify that all insulated isolator and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all directions. Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to flexibly limit equipment "+ start-up lateral motion to' /2 -inch. 7. Prior to start-up, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment and under inertia bases. Verify that there are no isolation short circuits in the base or isolators. 3.03 PIPING ISOLATORS A. Isolate piping as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Piping in machine rooms, fan rooms, or boiler rooms. 2. Piping where exposed on roof. 3. Piping within 50 feet (or 100 diameters if greater) from connected rotating equipment and pressure reducing stations. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -8 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Install isolators with the isolator hanger box attached to, or hung as close as possible to, the structure. Provide outrigger supports where required for clearance to equipment and to z maintain minimum clearance of equipment to structure above. 1 1. LLJ C. Suspend isolators from substantial structural members, not from slab unless specifically r4 permitted. Attachments to fireproofed structural members shall be re- fireproofed as required. _a U 0 D. Align hanger rods to clear the hanger box. Replace bent rods. co w J E. Suspend horizontal pipe 2 inches and smaller by means of Type E isolator with a minimum of co LL 0.25 inch deflation. Support pipe larger than 2 inches by isolator Type C with a minimum 11/2- w 0 inch static deflection. 2 F. Domestic water lines and HVAC piping in and above sound -rated construction shall be 3 N d • isolated using Acousto -Plumb or Trisolator series 100 or 500 resilient attachments as appropriate. ►_-- _ z1— G. Sanitary drain or storm drain piping passing above rooms or spaces requiring NC -35 or less Z O F shall be attached and supported using Trisolator series 100 isolator for horizontal piping and w ul in vertical piping Type "D" underneath the supporting clamps. Provide Type "F" resilient pads n 0 under pipe elbows supported from the floor. v w . O— c F H All other individual pipes in sound -rated construction shall be isolated with Trisolator resilient w uj attachments. For pipes less than 3 inches in diameter with resilient thermal insulation 1 _ .. U between the pipe and pipe support, resilient attachments are not required. - ~ u Z I. All other grouped pipes shall be isolated by using Type "E" vibration isolators supporting v N trapeze hangers and selected to provide a static deflection of 0.2 inches. Grouped floor- O 0 supported pipes shall be isolated using Type "D" isolators selected to p rovide a s tatic P. Z deflection of 0.15 inches. J. Mount floor supported horizontal pipe at slab using Type A isolator with a minimum static deflection of 1 -inch or same deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever is greater. K. Utilize two neoprene Type F or G isolator elements for pipe sway braces to accommodate tension and compression forces. L. Mount all isolators between building structure and supplementary steel. M. Suspend isolators from rigid and massive support points. N.' Supplementary steel to be sized for a maximum deflection of 0.08 inches at center of span. O. Support water piping riser floor supports with Type F isolators (2 layers) or Type G pad depending on piping loads and support point space conditions within shafts. Vibration isolation components shall not be used to correct misaligned sections of pipe. September 30, 2003 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints Permit Issue 15240 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Q. Pipe riser guides, anchors and supports shall be located so that there will be no direct metal Q • contact of the piping with the building structure. H Z �w 1. Weld steel guide bars to the pipe at a maximum spacing of 60 feet. The outside D diameter of the opposing guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the -J UO pipe riser clamp in accordance with standard field construction practice. Each end of N 0 the pipe riser clamp shall be rigidly attached to an all- directional pipe anchor isolation N w mounting, which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the supplementary steel framing -1 H within the shaft. N u- 2. The all- directional pipe anchor and guide isolation mountings shall consist of a w O telescoping arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of Y2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad. Provide vertical u. a restraints by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. N P The allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 pounds per square z w inch. _ 3. Mountings to be Type ADA - Mason Industries, or approved equal. Z 1.- 4. Construct piping guides for insulated piping with a 10 -gauge metal sleeve around the z O g piping. Provide the thermal insulation requirements for the piping between the piping ILI a l and the sleeve. The metal sleeve outside diameter shall be smaller than the pipe D p riser clamp inside diameter in accordance with standard field construction practice. 0 cn . The pipe riser clamp shall be rigidly attached to an all directional pipe anchor which o 1- shall be rigidly attached to the steel framing within the shaft. w w 5. Weld the pipe riser clamp at anchor points directly to the pipe and to pairs of all H 0 directional pipe anchor mountings, which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the steel u- framing in the pipe shaft. W z 6. The pipe anchor mountings shall be capable of safely supporting loads, expansion, v N and thrusts developed by the installed piping. � H R. Provide flexible piping connections for connections to rotating equipment as specified and where shown on the Drawings. S. Provide flexible piping connections and four -elbow offsets for all piping that crosses building seismic or expansion joints unless more stringent flexible all- directional joints have been specified elsewhere. 3.04 INSPECTION A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices specified herein, the local representative of the isolation manufacturer, the manufacturer's engineer shall inspect the completed system and submit a report to the Architect indicating the adequacy of the installation and listing any corrective action required. B. Replace any component found to be visibly deflected with more substantial components. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -10 z Equipment Deflection (Inches) Isolator Type Restraint Type Closed Circuit Cooling Towers 1/6 "F" - Packaged air- handling units: internal isolation 2.0 "A" I Suspended fans, air conditioning units 2.0 "A" III Base - mounted pumps 1/6 "F" - Other small pumps and motors 0.35 "D" III Wall mounted fans and exhaust fans less than '/. hp 0.25 "D" - • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Unless otherwise scheduled on the Drawings provide the following Equipment Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15241 ACOUSTICS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Sound - lining. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. C. Section 15800: Ductwork. D. Section 15940: Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Sound- lining. 2. Certification that sound - lining meets erosion test method described in U.L. Publication No. 181 erosion test method. 3. Non - hardening caulking. 4. Submit certified test data from approved laboratory for pressure drop and insertion loss ratings: a. For square or rectangular attenuators: test results for a 24 -inch x 24 -inch cross- section attenuator. b. Certification data for pressure drop and net insertion loss: based on tests of same attenuator. c. Attenuators and tests: subject to inspection upon request. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Standard 36 — Determination of Ventilating Equipment Sound Power. 2. ANSI — American National Standards Institute Standard S1.13 — Precision Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Broadband Noise Sources in Reverberant Rooms. 3. AMCA — Air Movement and Control Association Standard 300 — Determination of Sound Power Levels. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Acoustics 15241 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4. ARI — American Refrigeration Institute Standards: a. Standard 575 — Measurement of Sound in Equipment Rooms. b. Standard 885 — Sound Transmission Losses. 5. ISO — International Standards Organization 5135 and 3741 — Acoustics. 6. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials Standard E477 — Test for Duct Lining and Silencer Performance. Standard C423 — Method for Measuring Sound Absorption. Standard E90 — Method for Measuring Sound Transmission Loss. 7. Refer to Section 15940: Air Inlets and Outlet for additional reference standards. A. Acoustical Criteria: 1. Noise levels, generated by equipment and ductwork shall be attenuated to permit attainment of sound pressure levels in all 8 octave bands in occupied spaces that conform to the following Noise Criteria (NC) curves: a. Lobbies, corridors, toilets, spaces within 10 feet of equipment room walls : NC-40. b. Conference Rooms: (1) Small: NC -35 (2) Large: NC -30 c. Executive Offices: NC -30 d. All other spaces: NC -35 2. In addition to complying with the standard full octave band sound pressure levels based on maximum NC design requirements, acoustical performance of fans, air handling units, chillers, boilers, cooling towers, pumps, VFD's, terminal devices, valves, pressure regulating devices, humidifiers, etc., when operating under design conditions shall not create any objectional pure tones. A pure -tone is defined as a peak sound pressure level which, when measured in 1/3 octave band frequencies, is higher by more than 5 decibels than adjacent 1/3 octave band frequencies. 3. Comply with specified NC levels for radiated noise from terminal and pressure regulating devices and /or duct breakout noise by having full octave band sound pressure levels of at least two contiguous frequencies tangent to the NC spectrum. A single frequency controlled NC environment is considered obtrusive and unacceptable. B. Mechanical Performance: 1. Air distribution system equipment; terminal device noise: a. Maximum permissible sound -power levels in octave bands of airborne transmissions through the combination of grilles, registers, diffusers, and terminal units, or related pressure reducing devices, when operated in installed condition shall be as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Acoustics 15241 -2 Octave Band Frequency (Hertz) Octave Number Maximum PWL in Decibels Referred to 10' Watts NC -30 NC -35 NC-40 NC -45 NC -50 63 1 58 62 66 6B 70 125 2 52 56 60 63 66 250 3 45 49 54 58 62 500 4 41 46 51 56 61 1000 5 38 43 " 48 53 58 2000 6 37 42 47 52 57 4000 7 36 41 46 51 56 8000 8 37 42 47 52 57 Octave Band Frequency (Hertz) B Number Maximum PWL in Decibels Referred to 10' Watts NC -35 NC-40 NC-45 NC -50 63 1 72 76 79 82 125 2 70 74 77 80 250 3 61 65 68 71 500 4 60 64 68 72 1000 5 57 • 62 68 72 2000 6 56 60 65 70 4000 7 . 66 70 75 80 8000 8 65 70 75 80 Ise MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Pressure reducing terminal devices above ceiling; radiated noise: a. Maximum permissible radiated sound -power levels in octave bands when operated in installed condition over occupied spaces, is as follows: 3. Provide sound - lining in accordance with U.L. 181. 4. Provide all materials in accordance with NFPA, U.L. and state and local codes. Acoustics 15241 -3 z _~ w re 2 U • 0 CO W CO W W O 2 J D s a = I- W _ Z1- ZO W UC) O � 0 H W w H H O ui 0- O ~ z Lining Thickness (inches) /Density (pounds per cubic foot) Octave Band Center Frequency (Hertz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 1 / 1.5 to 3.0 .15 .50 .60 .80 .90 .90 1.5 / 1.5 to 3.0 .20 .70 .80 .95 .95 .95 2 / 1.5 to 3.0 .30 .90 .95 .95 .95 .95 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sound - Linings: Certainteed, Schuller, Owens - Corning Fiberglas. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Duct Lining: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Low pressure fiber glass duct liner downstream of terminal units shall be finished with an acrylic polymer facing, stenciled NFPA 90. 2. Medium pressure duct liner shall be finished with perforated 24 -gauge galvanized sheet metal, 28% minimum open area or foil facing equal to Owens Corning 703 FRK. 3. Thickness: a. In ductwork: minimum 1 inch matte faced unless otherwise noted on drawings or specification. b. In plenums and in supply, return or exhaust duct downstream of local floor equipment rooms: minimum 2 inches, 3 pound per cubic foot density, semi- rigid. c. For sound - lining where used in lieu of external thermal insulation minimum thickness shall conform to requirements as specified in Section 15250: Insulation. d. Linear Diffuser Supply Plenums: Minimum 'A inch, 11/2 pound per cubic foot density. 4. Minimum density, ducts: 11/2 pounds per cubic foot. 5. Minimum density, plenums: 3 pounds per cubic foot. 6. Flamespread shall be maximum 25 fuel contributed and smoke developed shall be maximum 50. 7. Suitable for duct velocity of 4000 feet per minute. Meet erosion test method described in U.L. Publication No. 181. 8. Dynamic Loss Coefficient: Maximum 1.2. 9. K Factor: Maximum 0.25 Btu /inch -hour - degree Fahrenheit - square foot. 10. Minimum sound - absorption coefficients (ASTM C423 Mounting #6 or F -25) for sound- absorbing duct lining material when tested while mounted to 24 -gauge sheet metal. Acoustics 15241 -4 - J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z z re w B. Fire Retardant Adhesive and Sealer: Benjamin Foster 85 -20 or approved equal. - 8 C. Non - Hardening Caulking shall be guaranteed to be permanently elastic. Tremco Polybutene uu) w or approved equal. .J U) 11. w 0 PART 3 — EXECUTION 2 J 3.01 INSTALLATION w A. In order to obtain satisfactory acoustical performance of the terminal devices, complete the Z I — O w ~ 1. Proper duct connections at inlet to the terminals. w 2. Proper air - balancing. D p 3. Avoid excessive dampering right at the terminals. p u) 0H ui 1- H g_ O w U = . O z B. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 11. Acceptable product for lining circular duct: Casco Circliner. 12. Where acoustically lined circular or oval duct is required, lining shall be positively retained in place. Acceptable manufacturers of pre- fabricated duct include United Sheet Metal and Sheet Metal Products. following: Sound - Linings: 1. Adhere with 6 -inch wide strips of adhesive at 12 -inch centers at all joints in lining. 2. In addition, secure with grip nail standard stamp on or weld pins and 2 -inch diameter integral or press -on head washers on maximum 16 inch centers and in compliance with SMACNA standards. 3. Coat all edges with sealer. 4. Provide continuous sheetmetal edge protection nosings at entering and leaving edges of lined duct sections and all joints. 5. Dimensions of Tined ductwork are clear inside dimensions after lining has been installed. 6. Extent of Ductwork Sound - Linings. a. Heating, Ventilating and Air - Conditioning Systems: (1) Supply: Ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms and not less than 25 feet downstream of fan room and mechanical equipment room walls and floor slabs. (2) Exhaust, Relief and Return: Ductwork in fan rooms and mechanical equipment rooms but not less than 25 feet from fan or 15 feet from room walls. b. Outside air supply systems a minimum distance of 25 feet downstream of fan. Stop lining 10 feet from outside air intake. c. Ventilation Systems: As indicated on Drawings. d. Exhaust Systems: As indicated on Drawings. e. Ductwork downstream of fan coil units, heat pumps, AC units or terminal units: Minimum 10 feet. Branch takeoffs to diffusers are not allowed in this 10 -foot lined section. f. Minimum lengths shown. Provide additional acoustical treatment as required to meet maximum permissible sound -power levels scheduled for equipment. Acoustics 15241 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 7. Sound -Lined Plenums: As specified and indicated on Drawings. 8. All transfer and jumper ducts. 9. All linear diffuser supply plenums. C. Soundproofing of Construction: 1. Required for packing between ductwork and the following construction: a. Fan room and mechanical equipment room walls. b. Floors, except in shafts. c. Sound barrier ceilings. d. Sound rated walls: Any interior wall or partition with internal insulation. Refer to Architectural drawings. 2. Soundproofing: a. Fill openings with fiber glass blanket or board for full depth of penetration. b. Caulk each side of opening with non - hardening, non -aging caulking compound. Schuller "Duxseal" or approved equal. 3 Soundproofing may be deleted when firestopping material is provided. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Acoustics 15241 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Duct insulation, jackets. 2. Piping insulation, jackets. SECTION 15250 INSULATION 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060 Piping and Accessories C. Section 15241 Acoustics 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service or equipment scheduled, locations, and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Submit details of sheet metal boxes for pieces of insulated equipment. Refer to 2.06.A.7. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions during storage and installation of all products required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Protect insulation from contact with water. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation with /without integral Jackets: Owens - Corning Fiberglass; Johns Manville; Armstrong; Certain -Teed; PPG. B. Adhesives and Sealers: Ductmate, Benjamin Foster (BF); Insul - Coustic (IC); 3M, Childers. C. Jackets: Childers; Johns Manville. D. Premolded fitting, valve, strainer and equipment insulation: Extol of Ohio Inc. 2.02 GENERAL A. Conform to application schedule for type and thickness of insulation. Insulation 15250 -1 Service Temperature Range (degrees F) Material Runouts Insulation Thickness (inches) for Pipe Sizes: 1 and less 1'/. to 2 21/2 to 4 5 to 6 Domestic hot water, domestic recirculated hot water 105 to 140 Glass fiber '/z 1 1 1'/z 11/2 Condenser water, domestic cold water 40 to 60 Glass fiber 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 Condensate drains above ceilings All Glass fiber — 1/2 '/s %s - Plumbing vents within 10 feet of atmosphere All Glass fiber — -- 1 1 1 Heat traced piping All Glass fiber — 11/2 1 1 /2 1 %z 1' /z Hot water and drain piping below lavatories All Glass fiber — 11/2 11/2 1' /z — * Runouts are up to 2 inch piping directly connected to a fan coil, heat pump, AC unit, unit heater, terminal unit or radiation and not exceeding 12 feet in length. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Insulation, jacket, facing and adhesives s hall b e n oncombustible m aterial m eeting C ode requirements and fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E -84, National Fire Protection Association 225, and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50. C. Adhesive, mastic or Insulating material shall not contain asbestos. D. Vapor jacket permeance shall be 0.02 perms or less. E. Jacket Puncture Resistance shall be 50 units (Beach) or greater. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION A. Materials: 1. Glass Fiber: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible. a. Installed 'K' Value: 0.23 BTU -inch per hr- square foot - degree F at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: White kraft paper, vinyl coated, embossed and reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 2. Field Applied Jackets. a. PVC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, gloss white. Connections shall be pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. b. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 ounce per square yard, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. c. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 -inch thick sheet, stippled finish, with longitudinal slip joints and 2 -inch laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 2.04 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES A. Insulation Schedules: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Insulation 15250 -2 Service Material Thickness (inches) Exhaust ducts within 10 feet of exterior openings Flexible glass fiber 1 Supply ducts (cooling and heating systems) Flexible glass fiber 11/2 Return ducts Flexible glass fiber 11/2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Use factory premolded fittings of the same materials and thickness as the pipe insulation for fittings, flanges and valves. 2. Where premolded insulation fittings are not manufactured, insulate fittings, flanges, strainers and valves with mitered segments of the same density as the adjoining pipe covering. Vaporseal for cold (below dew point) applications u sing a dhesive with open weave glass mesh lay in while wet. Provide a final coat of adhesive. Overlap glass mesh and outer coat adjacent covering by a minimum of 2 inches. Adhesive shall be IC 501 or BF 30 -35. 3. Provide insulation for the removable covers and flanges of pipe strainers on cold services with built -up sections o f g lass fiber p ipe covering, a rranged t o facilitate servicing of the strainer. Complete applications with vaporseals as specified above. Vapor barriers shall be sealed and continuous through guides, hangers, walls, sleeves, etc. Adhesives and coatings shall be as noted herein. 4. Insulate fittings, flanges, valves, etc. for services where calcium silicate insulation is specified with mineral wool cement of equal thickness to the pipe insulation. Apply evenly and finish with glass cloth. 2.05 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Materials: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber: ASTM C553, formaldehyde -free flexible blanket. a. Installed 'K' Value: 0.27 BTU -inch per hr- square foot - degree F at 75 degrees F. b. Density: 0.75 pounds per cubic foot. c. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire- resistant kraft paper, secured with 2 -inch wide UL listed pressure sensitive tape and outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. Maximum vapor barrier perm rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms. 2. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 ounces per square yard, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant adhesive. B. Ductwork Insulation Schedule: C. Wherever external duct insulation is specified and internal acoustic treatment of equivalent insulating effect is also required by the Drawings or Specifications for the same location, the external insulation may be omitted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Insulation 15250 -3 z ¢• ce U O wF- M LL w Y2 = w I- _ Z � ZO O I- uu H H 4- O Z w O ~ Z Service Material Thickness (inches) Condenser water expansion tanks and fill tanks, air separators, chemical bypass feeder. Flexible glass fiber 2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Materials: 1. Flexible fiberglass blanket: ASTM C612. a. Installed 'K' Value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. c. Density: 6.0 pounds per cubic foot. d. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire- resistant kraft paper, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic a s needed. Maximum vapor barrier p erm rating s hall not exceed 0.02 perms. Equipment Insulation Schedule: PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with Section 15800: Ductwork before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of dirt, duct, debris, moisture or foreign material. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes and industry standards. B. Verify piping has been pressure tested as specified in Section 15060: Piping and Accessories before applying insulation materials to pipe joints. C. Continue insulation and vapor barrier through penetrations. D. Piping, Valve and Accessories Insulation: 1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations where exposed. 2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Insulation 15250 -4 Z 6 6 00 y0 w W . J Nu_ w g Q = d I- W Z p i-0 Z H• U O. 0 E ' F.- 111 I- -- IL. O w Z' U w O Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Equipment Insulation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 3. Provide insulated pipes, fittings, valves and accessories conveying fluids below ambient temperature with continuous vapor retarder jackets with self - sealing laps. Insulate complete system and provide molded flexible polyvinyl chloride jacket for all fittings and valves. Vaporseal all jacket seams. 4. For insulated pipes, fittings, valves and accessories conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self - sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment, flanges and unions. 5. Protect pipe insulation a t h angers, guides, and rollers with 2 0 gauge galvanized metal shields, one -third the insulation circumference in width and minimum 6 inches in length up to 4 inch pipe size, 12 inches in length on pipes 5 inch and larger, on the outside of the insulation and vapor barrier or jacket. Center shield on hanger and hold shield in place by straps or by manufactured centering tabs or channels on the shield itself. Do not pierce the insulation with hangers. 6. Provide insert between support shield and piping. Fabricate of calcium silicate or other heavy density non - deforming insulating material suitable for temperature. Length of insulation inserts shall match support shield length as specified. 7. For exterior applications or locations where abrasion or damage may occur, provide weather protection jacket. Insulated pipe, fittings, accessories joints, and valves shall be covered with ultra - violet light resistant painted polyvinyl chloride or aluminum jacket. Jacket seams shall be located on bottom side of horizontal piping. 8. Apply prefabricated sectional insulation for straight pipes neatly fitted around the piping, and sealed with adhesive. Apply adhesive to only one side of each joint and not to pipe surface. 9. Seal all joints with BF 3 0 -35 f ire resistant vapor barrier m astic. 0 versized p ipe sections or board type insulation may be used to fabricate a nd install insulation around pipe specialties. All void spaces shall be firmly filled with flexible insulation to support oversized pipe insulation. 10. Secure sectional insulation with 0.02 inch thick by 1/2 inch wide aluminum bands manufactured by Childers, or Thomas & Betts "TY -RAP" nylon ties, on 24 inch centers for pipe sizes 2 inches and larger. Install at least two (2) bands per section of insulation. 11. Insulate and thoroughly vapor seal control valve bodies where the valve actuator penetrates the insulation. 12. Thoroughly vaporseal the ends of all condenser water, domestic cold water, valve and fitting insulation sections to prevent condensation from wicking between sections. 13. Replace any self - sealing insulation or lap that is found to be not sealing properly. Do not use staples to secure the insulation or coverings. 1. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if necessary. As required, secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. 2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retardant cement. 3. Provide cold equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature with vapor retardant jackets. Insulation 15250 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with /z inch thick insulating cement, or aluminum jacket. 5. Do not insulate over sight glasses, visual level or flow indicators, nameplates or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around these items. 6. When equipment with insulation requires periodic opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage to insulation or vapor barrier. 7. Cold equipment insulation shall be covered with '/2 inch thick insulating cement over vaporseal mastic and copper clad hexagonal wire. F. Ductwork Insulation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with continuous vapor retardant jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams, punctures, tears and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant adhesive. 2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without vapor retardant jacket. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. 3. Continue insulation through non -fire -rated walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. The underside of ductwork 24 inches or greater shall be secured with mechanical fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18 inches on center. The protruding ends of the fasteners shall be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when required, sealed with the same tape as specified above. 5. For exterior applications, provide internal duct insulation. END OF SECTION Insulation 15250 -6 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15515 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES z _I PART 1 - GENERAL l 1.01 WORK INCLUDED U O u) 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: w w J 1- 1. Air vents. CO w 2. Air separators. w O 3. Relief valves. . 5 4. Suction diffuser. E Q 5. Expansion tanks. cn n 6. Glycol. H w Z 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS z '- H O Z I- A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. w w O U B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. O N ; aI•- w uj 1- --- A. Product Data: Certified manufacturer's latest published data indicating performance data, u_ O catalog cuts, model numbers, materials of construction, dimensional information, and uj Z, pressure rating and pressure drops. U (n ~ O I 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. ASME Pressure Vessel Forms. C. Submit manufacturer analysis of installed glycol solution. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable requirements of ASME, ANSI, U.L., ASTM and National Electric Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Air Vents: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Sarco, Hoffman, Amtrol. B. Air Separators: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Amtrol. C. Relief Valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, McDonnell Miller, Kunkle. D. Expansion Tanks: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, Taco, Wessels. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Hydronic Systems Specialties 15515 -1 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 AIR VENTS z 4 I-: A. Provide air vents with' /. -inch IPS inlet connection and 3/8 -inch outlet, suitable for the system w and for the system working pressure and temperature. Design vents to eliminate air from the 6 m system automatically without permitting the passage of water. Construct vents of brass or U O semi -steel body, copper float and stainless steel valve parts. co p co w 2.03 AIR SEPARATORS H CO u_ A. Centrifugal Air Separator: w O 2 1. Provide as indicated on Drawings, a centrifugal type air separator. Provide with inlet - g and outlet connections tangential to the vessel shell. Vessel shell diameter to be N minimum three times the nominal inlet/outlet pipe diameter. z w 2. Provide an internal stainless steel air collector tube with 5/32 -inch diameter Z i perforations and 63% open area designed to direct accumulated air to an external air H O vent via an NPT connection at top of unit. z 1— 3. Construct the unit with a removable galvanized steel system strainer with 3/16 -inch LU Lu diameter perforations and a free area of not less than five times the cross - sectional m p area of the connecting pipe. Provide a blow down connection to facilitate routine 0 to cleaning of the strainer. 0 1- 4. Manufacturer shall provide data sheet specifying air collection efficiency and w w pressure drop at rated flow. I- 1 5. Provide a Manufacturer's Data Report for Pressure Vessels, Form U -1 as required LI O by the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for each air 1i.i Z separator. 0 co O 2.04 RELIEF VALVES z A. Provide diaphragm operated safety relief valve, ASME labeled, for relieving pressure. Refer to Drawings for pressure rating of valve and relief setting. Discharge water shall be through NPT connection. B. Provide valve with a low blow down differential constructed of bronze or iron body. The valve seat and all moving parts exposed to fluid shalt be of non - ferrous material. 2.05 EXPANSION TANKS A. Provide a replaceable bladder type hydro - pneumatic expansion tank especially designed for use on the services specified. Construct the compression tank of welded steel and equip with a heavy duty butyl rubber flexible bladder to maintain a separation between the system water and the air cushion. The system water shall be contained within the bladder. Provide with top inlet connection for all water systems. Each tank shall bear an appropriate ASME label for the following minimum working pressures and temperatures: B. The minimum total tank and bladder volume shall be as specified on the Drawings. Provide a factory initial charge of 12 pounds per square inch gauge. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Building Closed Condenser Water System: 125 pounds per square inch gauge - 100° F. Hydronic Systems Specialties 15515 -2 .a:.[..�(f....:.uu�.s,ui.K Y .' + ^'� �'Sj'��'..a.::�u� �: �. �. G., i«l.:�i11L`3�!Ywsu.`'4:rc..iY.� MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provide suitable structural and seismic support as required for each tank as indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide for each tank, lifting lugs, base ring, drains, charging connections, piping connections, and specialties as required for bladder replacement and as indicated on the Drawings. Provide one (1) bottle of nitrogen gas and manifold to be used to charge all tanks. Each tank shall have an ASME relief valve set at the appropriate pressure. E. Provide a UL listed pressure operated by a brass bourdon tube activating a mercury switch. This switch shall activate a low pressure alarm as indicated in Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). Mercoid Series DA31 -153 -7 or approved equal. F. Paint the outside of the tank with a shop coat of approved rust inhibiting primer after fabrication. 2.06 MANUAL AIR VENT A. Construct from short vertical section of 2 -inch diameter maximum or line size pipe to form air chamber. Provide 1/8 -inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide automatic air vents at high points of all piping and as required for removal of air from the system using 3 /. -inch steel pipe suitable for the pressure service between the main pipe and inlet. Provide 3/8 -inch OD hard drawn Type L copper tubing from vent outlet for overflow in case of defective action. Copper tubing shall run into a suitable drain. When vents are located above hung ceilings, connect all vent drains to a common drain main and pipe to nearest sink or floor drain. Provide 3 4 -inch valve in the inlet line for servicing of automatic air vent. Manual vents may be substituted for automatic vents, at system high points, only as directed by the Architect and where readily accessible. B. Provide at each heat transfer element supplied with water, not less than one 1/2-inch manual air vent. C. Provide manual air vent valves in the piping connections to each condenser water connection. Provide soft temper copper tube pigtail or manual vents so that vent can be discharged into a bucket. D. Provide relief valves at expansion tanks, pressure tanks and as indicated. Install relief valves in upright position with discharge piped to nearest floor drain. E. System relief valve capacity shall equal makeup valve capacity. Equipment relief valve capacity shall exceed flow rating of connected equipment. Where one pipe vents several relief valves, cross section area shall equal sum of individual vent areas. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Hydronic Systems Specialties 15515 -3 1 -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide closed circuit fluid coolers in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. C. Section 15170: Electric Motors. D. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. E. Section 15860: Fans. F. Section 15890: Water Treatment. G. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). H. Section 15985: Automatic Control Sequences. 1.03 SUBMITTALS SECTION 15708 CLOSED CIRCUIT COOLING TOWER B. In addition to the work covered under this Section, comply with description of individual systems under other Sections of the Specifications. A. Submit sound power levels for each octave band (8 total octave bands) at 5 feet and 50 feet from intake louvers and discharge for locations in front, at side, and directly above fluid cooler. Submit performance curves for the fluid coolers, showing leaving water temperatures from the cooler for the design temperature range and for temperature ranges corresponding to 80 percent, 60 %, 40% and 20% of the design temperature range for wet bulb temperatures of 78 °, 75 °, 72 °, 70 °, 65 °, 60 °, 55 °, 50 °, 40° and 30° F for design water flow and for 65% of design water flow. C. Submit seismic restraint calculations for all internally mounted components and for fluid cooler a nchoring to supports. Refer to Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. D. Submit materials of construction and certified dimensioned drawings. E. Submit fan airflow performance for the as- installed configuration. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 15708 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Submit certification that motor starter requirements have been coordinated with the Division 16 Contractor including number of speed(s), number of windings, time delay between starts, duty cycle, etc. z Z w PART 2 — PRODUCTS QQ 5 J o 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUAFACTURERS p A. Baltimore Air Coil, Evapco. - -4 H u) 2.02 CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLER — FORCED DRAFT TYPE w 0 A. Provide a forced draft, blow- through, vertical discharge, fluid coolers of sizes and capacity u.. Q indicated on the Drawings. v_) d B. Guarantee the fluid coolers to perform as per schedule requirements with the understanding z I that the building structure in relation to the fluid cooler will be as shown on the Drawings. F- O Maximum drift loss from the tower shall not exceed 0.002 %. w F- w C. The coolers shall have centrifugal fan assemblies built completely into the pan, with all U o moving parts factory mounted and aligned. Unit casing construction shall be heavy gauge O N. hot -dip galvanized steel finished with zinc - chromatized aluminum paint after assembly. Unit 0'- basin shall be heavy gauge hot -dip galvanized steel welded construction. = w D. In addition, the coolers shall be provided with electric heaters, sized to maintain basin water g_ O at 40° F minimum with ambient air temperatures at —10° F, with factory prewired control ui Z junction box for field connection of power wiring for electric water level controller, and variable U = volume capacity control dampers and controllers, electric pan thermostat and all associated , .. ~ O F- controls. Provide low water level cutout to prevent heater operation unless heater elements z are fully submerged. . , E. Pan -Fan Section, Casing: The combination pan -fan section shall consist of galvanized steel channels and sheets of welded construction. Pans shall be galvanized steel 10 -gauge angle framework and channels with galvanized 12 -gauge panels. Casings shall be galvanized steel 16- gauge. Provide water and airtight manholes in pan section for access into interior of the cooler. Anti - cavitation device and screen, shall be provided for all suction sumps. Pans shall include waste water bleed line with valve, mechanical make -up valve, ladder and handrail as required. F. Eliminators: Eliminators shall polyvinyl chloride. G. Fans: The forwardly curved centrifugal fans with V -belt drive assembly dynamically balanced. Fans and housings shall be constructed of hot -dip galvanized steel. 18 -gauge metal screens shall be provided around entire fan assembly. Provide modulating capacity control dampers with integral vane motor operator for control from a basin water thermostat. Fan motors shall be 460 volt, 60 Hz, 3- phase, totally enclosed, fan cooled. Provide control damper end switch to stop fans. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 15708 -2 J °1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Water Distribution System: Polyvinyl chloride header with removable branches and plastic self - cleaning spray nozzles. Water /glycol solution shall be distributed uniformly over the coils at a flow rate of not less than 4.5 gallons per minute per square foot of coil cross section. Z I. Provide electrical float switch water level control, low -high water level alarm systems. Electric w float switch and controls shall be guaranteed to operate properly in ambient temperatures of - 5 10° F. 0 00 N J. Coil Section: The heat transfer section(s) of the fluid cooler(s) shall be encased with hot dip CO w galvanized steel panels and the section(s) shall be removable from the pan. The cooler _1 H coil(s) shall be all prime surface steel, tested at 350 pounds per square inch air pressure N u_ under water and hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. The coil(s) shall be designed for low w 0 pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of the fluid. q� J . IL Q K. Water Recirculating Pump(s): Pumps shall be close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump N M equipped with a mechanical seal and shall be mounted on the pan and completely piped to Z W the suction strainer and water distribution system. Pumps shall be installed vertically so that Z H the pump and piping will drain freely when the pan is drained. Pumps shall be sized to meet PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORTS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue the cooler capacity as scheduled on the Drawings. Z O g D o 0 2 ,. 0 I- 11.1 u j I- H A. Steel supports as shown on architectural and structural drawings will be provided by other - O. trades, and any changes, including any engineering and /or architectural fees required for ti . Z checking of same, required in this steel work to suit the tower fumished under this Section 0 shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. p H B. Steel carrier rail supporting the tower and bearing on vibration isolators shall be provided by this Contractor. Manufacturer shall coordinate beam selection and isolator placement. END OF SECTION Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 15708 -3 z �+ PART 1 — GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following ceiling- mounted computer room air conditioning systems: 1. Water - cooled direct expansion computer room air conditioning systems, CRAC -7 and 8. B. The system shall be designed to maintain temperature and humidity conditions in the rooms containing electronic equipment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. C. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. D. Section 15170: Electric Motors. E. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. F. Section 15241: Acoustics. G. Section 15250: Insulation. H. Section 15860: Fans. Section 15880: Air Filters and Cleaners. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15731 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 1. Operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 2. Indicate published rated capacity. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Actual net sensible cooling capacity for all AC units furnished; with specified components, under scheduled conditions and in the configuration(s) shown on the drawings. B. Shop Drawings: . z ,- z 1. Details of equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required w clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring including detailed wiring co 0 0 diagrams that clearly differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field - w installed wiring. N z 3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate 0 and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. w 0 4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is 2 based and their installation requirements. � Q 5. Field quality - control test reports. co d � C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For computer -room air - conditioning units to include in w Z emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. z ~ HO zF- D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. w t il U ON 0 I- A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA = w 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and I— 52 marked for intended use. U. z B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for 0 Mechanical Refrigeration." p i- z 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE C. Coefficient of performance and energy - efficiency ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water - cooled condenser shell to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. E. System shall be supplied with ETL and NRTL listing according to UL 1995. The specified system shall be factory- tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to: Quality Control Checks, "Hi -Pot" Test (two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts, • per NRTL agency requirements), and Metering Calibration Tests. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 COORDINATION z A. Coordinate layout and installation of computer -room air - conditioning units and 1 1= suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by i" w them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition 4 2 assemblies. UO y 0 B. Coordinate locations for electrical rough -ins. co w w= 1.06 WARRANTY co u w O A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 2 or replace components of computer -room air - conditioning units that fail in materials or 4 a 5 workmanship within specified warranty period. N D O B. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years = from date of Substantial Completion. Z F' i- O z i— C. Warranty Period for Electronic Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three(3) years from date of Substantial Completion. n 0 0 O - O 1.- Ill W H� LL O li.. Z U = 0~ PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Computer room air conditioning systems: Liebert. 2.02 GENERAL A. The environmental control system shall be a factory- assembled unit. On direct expansion models, the refrigeration system shall be split, with the compressor located in a remote or close - coupled condensing unit. B. The evaporator section shall be designed for above dropped - ceiling installation. Condensing units shall be designed for above - dropped- ceiling installation. C. Evaporator Cabinet Construction: The cabinet and chassis shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel, and shall be serviceable from one side. Mounting brackets shall be factory attached to the cabinet. D. Provide packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped computer room air conditioning Unit (AC unit), as shown on the Drawings to operate on 277 volt, 1- phase, 60 Hz power. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -3 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Air Distribution: The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width, double inlet. The shaft shall be heavy -duty steel with self - aligning ball bearings with minimum life of 100,000 hours. The fan motor shall be 1750 rpm and mounted on an adjustable base. The drive package shall be equipped with an adjustable motor pulley. The fan /motor assembly shall z be mounted on vibration isolators. < i Z w F. System shall be suitable for ducted air distribution. ct JU G. Microprocessor Control: The control system shall be microprocessor based. The wall- c) 0 mounted control enclosure shall include a 2 -line by 16- character LCD display providing u) w continuous display of operating status and alarm condition. A 7 -key keypad for LLI x setpoint/program control and AC unit on /off shall be located below the display. N u_ w H. Temperature and humidity sensors shall be located in a wallbox, which shall be capable 2 of being located up to 300 feet from the evaporator unit. co _ ° I — w I z �. 1- 0 z I- w ui 2.03 CONTROL SETPOINT PARAMETERS: - 0 A. Temperature setpoint 65° - 85° F. 0 w u- 0 . 2.04 AC UNIT CONTROLS .. z co U = A. Compressor short-cycle control: The control system shall prevent compressor short- i= 0 cycling by a 10 minute timer from compressor stop to the next start. z Monitoring: The LCD display shall provide on /off indication, operating mode indication (cooling, heating, humidifying, dehumidifying) and current day, time, temperature and humidity (if applicable) indication. The monitoring system shall be capable of relaying AC unit operating parameters and alarms to a generic monitoring system. B. Temperature sensitivity 1° - 5° F. B. Common alarm and remote on /off: A common alarm relay shall be provided to provide a contact closure to a remote alarm device. Two (2) terminals shall also be provided for remote on /off control. Individual alarms shall be "enabled" or "disabled" from reporting to the common alarm. C. Setback control: The control shall be programmable on a daily basis or on a 5 day /2 day program schedule. It shall be capable of accepting 2 programs per day. D. Temperature calibration: The control shall include the capabilities to calibrate the temperature and humidity sensors and adjust the sensor response delay time from 1 to 90 seconds. The control shall be capable of displaying temperature values in degrees F or C. E. System Auto Restart: For start-up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6- second increments) time delay. Programming can be performed either at the wall- mounted controller or from the central site monitoring system. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 ALARMS z A. AC unit alarm: The control system shall monitor AC unit operation and activate an audible = • and visual alarm in the event of the following factory preset alarm conditions: ,H W --? 1. High and low temperature. V 2. High and low humidity. v 0 3. High head pressure. u) W 4. Change filter. w Z 5. Loss of air. co u . 6. Local alarm. W 0 . B. Alarm Controls: Each alarm (AC unit and custom) shall be separately enabled or g 5 disabled, selected to activate the common alarm (except for high head pressure). u_ GC C. Audible Alarm: The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the _ z1 . D. Common Alarm: A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user w w --.1 selected alarms with a remote alarm device. > ' U ._.3 E. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to the generic remote monitoring 0 H system with the following information: date and time of occurrence, AC unit number, and w 7 present temperature and humidity. H v u_ O 2.06 DIRECT EXPANSION SYSTEM EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS z iii A. The evaporator section shall include evaporator coil, thermostatic expansion valve, and H I filter drier. The evaporator coil shall have two circuits, minimum. 0 z operator. B. The evaporator coil shall be 4 rows deep, constructed of copper tubes, aluminum fins and a maximum face velocity of 500 feet per minute. An externally equalized thermostatic expansion valve shall control refrigerant flow. C. The coil shall be provided with a stainless steel drain pan, with an internally trapped drain line. The evaporator drain pan shall include a factory installed float switch to shutdown the evaporator upon high water condition. 2.07 WATER/ GLYCOL COOLED CONDENSING UNIT A. The water /glycol condensing unit shall be equipped with a coaxial condenser. Components shall include scroll compressor, high - pressure switch. The condensing unit shall be factory charged with R -22 refrigerant. B. The condenser circuit shall be pre -piped with a 3 -way regulating valve which is head - pressure actuated. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. The condenser water /glycol circuit shall be designed for a static operating pressure of 150 psig. D. A hot gas bypass circuit shall be provided to reduce compressor cycling and improve operation under low load conditions. 2.08 FACTORY INSTALLED OPTIONS A. Disconnect switch, non - locking: The non - automatic, non - locking, molded case circuit breaker shall be factory mounted in the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the front of the AC unit. B. Free - cooling /dual cooling source: A free - cooling coil shall be integral to the evaporator cabinet, and shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. Free - cooling shall be activated by a temperature stat, and shall include factory piped three -way valve and separate supply and return piping. C. Remote sensors: The AC unit shall be supplied with remote temperature and humidity sensors. The sensors shall be connected to the AC unit by a shielded cable. D. Condensate Pump: The condensate pump shall be complete with integral float switch, pump, motor assembly, and reservoir. E. The filter clog switch shall activate the audible and visual alarm on the wallbox when filter pressure drop exceeds and adjustable setpoint. F. Single Point Power Kit: A single point power kit shall be provided for a close - coupled system to allow a single electrical power feed to supply power to both the evaporator and indoor close - coupled condensing unit. G. Remote Monitoring System: Provided remote monitoring of the AC unit and monitoring of other support equipment. The remote monitoring shall have the capability to monitor and change (at the user direction) the temperature and humidity setpoints and sensitivities of each AC unit. The printer shall provide the user with chronological alarm information. It shall also be capable of being programmed to print out environmental conditions or operating modes at each AC unit. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. General: Install air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install AC unit plumb and level, firmly anchored to support the AC unit weights in location indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Electrical Wiring: Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -6 D. Supply and Drain Water Piping: Connect water supply and drains to air conditioning unit. AC unit drain shall be trapped internally, and shall not be trapped externally. E. Field Quality Control: Start up air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer's start up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Piping Connections: Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's piping connection diagram submittal to piping contractor. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following floor- mounted computer room air conditioning systems: B. The system shall be designed to maintain temperature and humidity conditions in the rooms containing electronic equipment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: B. Section 15060: C. Section 15140: D. Section 15170: E. Section 15240: F. Section 15241: G. Section 15250: H. Section 15860: I. Section 15880: J. Section 15900: K. Section 15990: 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Water cooled direct expansion computer room air conditioning systems, CRAC -1 through 6. 2. Seismic floor stand A. Product Data: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15734 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS Mechanical General Provisions Piping and Accessories Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves Electric Motors Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints Acoustics Insulation Fans Air Filters and Cleaners Building Management System (BMS) Mechanical Systems Balancing 1. Operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 2. Indicate published rated capacity Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3, Actual net sensible cooling capacity for all AC units furnished; with specified components, under scheduled conditions and in the configuration(s) shown on the drawings. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Details of equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring including detailed wiring diagrams that clearly differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field- installed wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that computer -room air - conditioning units, accessories, and components shall withstand seismic forces defined in Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the AC unit shall remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Field quality- control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data shall be included in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities haying jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Energy- Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by 2001 Washington State Energy Code. D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water - cooled condenser shell to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -2 1.05 COORDINATION PART 2 — PRODUCTS MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila A. Coordinate installation of computer -room air - conditioning units with computer room access flooring installer and with computer room equipment layout. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases, cast anchor -bolt inserts into pad, concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in other Divisions. C. Coordinate locations for condenser water, drain piping and electrical rough -ins. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of computer -room air - conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. C. Warranty Period for Humidifiers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Electronic Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 ' EXTRA MATERIALS Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion: A. Provide extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One (1) set for each belt -drive fan. 2. Filters: One (1) set of filters for each AC unit. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Computer room air conditioning systems: Liebert. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 PACKAGE WATER COOLED TYPE z A. Provide packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped computer room air 1 ~ conditioning Unit (AC unit), as shown on the Drawings to operate on 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz ,H z power. 6 j -.I C.) 1. AC units shall be configured for downfiow air discharge or top horizontal air U 0 discharge as indicated on the Drawings. co w. 2. The cooling capacity shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. H W u_ B. Each AC unit shall have the following cycle capabilities: w 0 1. 100% capacity with the use of the free - cooling coil. g Q 2. Operation of the direct expansion coil and water - cooling coil, simultaneously. During ct this mode of operation, the water - cooling coil, shall act as a pre - cooling coil, N a decreasing the load on the Direct Expansion coil, thus lowering the suction pressure H = and the kilowatt draw of the operating compressors. z F- 3. 100% capacity with mechanical refrigeration and direct expansion coil. z 0 UJ w o co Panels shall be of welded steel, suitably braced for rigidity, supporting compressors o H and other mechanical equipment and fittings, with floor stand with adjustable legs w w and vibration isolation pads. Provide minimum 14 -gauge furniture -grade steel H 0 construction with a tubular steel frame. Cabinet shall be finished in a color and u , F- ; texture matching the computer cabinets. The main front panel shall have captive %- . Z t fasteners. The exterior panels shall be powder coated. v c 2. Each AC unit shall have full front access doors and be fully serviceable from the front 1= Z allowing the AC unit to be positioned within 1 inch of rear wall. Provide side and back 0 1... access doors to match front. All doors panels shall be hinged and easily removable and shall be set on neoprene or polyurethane gaskets with recessed, self- tightened latches to prevent air leakage. AC unit shall be arranged to provide full service access to all electrical controls and complete refrigeration section without interrupting system operation. All refrigeration cycle components, including compressors condensers, refrigerant flow control valves, strainer /driers and sight glasses shall be out of the conditioned air stream and readily accessible for service. 3. Casing and panels shall be lined with thermal and acoustical insulation of minimum one -inch thick, 1%-pound density glass fiber, neoprene coated on exposed surface. 4. Air shall be discharged out of the cabinet through an internal duct, which prevents conditioned air from passing over compressors or condensers. 5. AC unit shall be sectionalized to facilitate, if required, shipping separate fan, refrigeration and air duct sections to jobsite without the need for field piping or wiring. C. Cabinet: 1. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Floor Stand E. Fan Section: F. Air Filters: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide welded tubular steel seismic floor stand. Coordinate exact height with raised floor contractor. 2. Submit seismic calculations per Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. 3. A factory- supplied and welded floor stand integral turning vane shall be provided. 1. Supply air fans shall be forward curved, double width, double inlet centrifugal type mounted on a single fan shaft. The fan shaft shall be ground - polished and coated with rust proof compound. The fan shaft shall be selected to operate at 75 percent of its first critical speed. Fan shaft bearings shall be self - aligning type, permanently lubricated and selected for minimum 200,000 -hour life span. The entire fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to a maximum tolerance of 2 mils in any plane. 2. Motor leads shall be factory wired, terminating in a convenient junction box. Adjustable, dual V -belt drive shall be sized for 200% brake horsepower, with heavy - duty cast iron sheaves, designed for continuous operation. Single belt drives are unacceptable. 1. Provide pleated, lofted; nonwoven, reinforced cotton fabric filters supported and bonded to welded -wire grid, enclosed in cardboard frame [with 2 -inch thick, disposable, glass -fiber prefilter]. a. Nominal thickness: 2 inches. b. Dust -spot efficiency: 20 %. c. Weight arrestance: 90% to 92 %. d. Initial resistance at 500 -FPM face velocity: 0.30 -inch wg. e. Recommended final resistance: 1 -inch wg. 2. For rear - return configured AC units, the filter chamber shall be located on the back of the cabinet, serviceable from the end of the unit. Free Cooling Coil: 1. The dual cooling source system shall consist of an air or water cooled compressorized system with the addition of a chilled water coil, a modulating control valve, and a comparative temperature sensor. The system shall be able to function either as a modulating chilled water system or as a compressorized system, or a combination of both. The primary mode of cooling shall be chilled water. Switchover between the two cooling modes shall be performed automatically by the microprocessor control. The microprocessor positions the valve in response to room conditions. Cooling capacity shall be controlled by bypassing chilled water around the coil. The modulating valve travel for dehumidification shall be proportional. 2. The dual - cooling source coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and aluminum fins and located in the return air, before the A -Frame evaporator coil. 3. The free - cooling coil shall be of seamless copper tube, expanded into aluminum fin construction with minimum six rows. The face area shall be equal to the area of the direct expansion coil and shall be located upstream of the direct expansion coil, in the same plane. The coil shall be rated for continuous operation at 300 psig. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. The free - cooling coil shall contain a three -way, motorized valve. The valve shall operate in conjunction with sensing controls located within the AC unit. The coil shall be complete with drain and vent connections. Coil support shall be of stainless steel. 5. Mount coil assembly over stainless -steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump -motor assembly, and condensate reservoir. I- Z H. Direct Expansion Coil: IX Q 2 J U O 0 CO CI CO ILI J • LL uU 0 2 • D co I- • al z � H Z uj U 0 C in 1- w w I- O w Z — I 0~ 1. The direct expansion evaporator coil shall be alternate -row or split into two equal circuits. 2. The evaporator coil shall be an A -Frame design. Refrigerant of each system shall be distributed throughout the entire coil face area. A stainless steel condensate drain pan shall be provided. 3. The coil shall be of seamless copper tube, expanded into aluminum fin and shall have stainless steel supports. 4. Coil shall be located downstream of the water - cooling coil and shall be in the same plane. 5. Mount coil assembly over stainless -steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump -motor assembly, and condensate reservoir. Drain Pan: A common drain pan shall be employed for both the water cooling and direct expansion coils The drain pan shall be of stainless steel construction with non - ferrous connections and shall include a factory- installed copper drain trap with removable, brass cleanout plug. J. Compressors: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Each AC unit shall have hermetic or semi - hermetic compressors with a suction gas cooled motor, anti -slug protection, complete with discharge and suction shut -off valves, each with gauge ports. Maximum operating speed shall be 1750 rpm. 2. The compressors shall be located in a separate compartment so they may be serviced during operation of the equipment and shall be capable of being demounted from the cabinet without removing other components and without cutting into piping. Compressors shall be equipped with crankcase heaters. 3. A compressor sequence switch shall be provided for changing lead -lag sequence of the compressors. 4. Provide spring vibration mounts with seismic restraints for the compressors. The switch shall be located within the electrical control panel. 5. Provide thermal overloads, oil sight glass, manual reset high pressure switch, pump down low pressure switch, suction line strainer, reversible oil pumps for forced feed lubrication. 6. Four -Step Refrigeration System: The environmental control system shall include cylinder unloaders on the semi - hermetic compressors. Solenoid valves that are controlled from the microprocessor control shall activate the unloaders. In response to the return air temperature, the microprocessor control shall activate the unloader solenoids and the liquid line solenoids such that four stages of refrigeration cooling are obtained. The stages shall be: a. One compressor, partially loaded. b. Two compressors partially loaded. c. One compressor partially loaded, one compressor fully loaded. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -6 i..' a5. 15':.. 2+ 1:.: dJ«; C SV. i :Lr';u.La.at.•.[«i.'s::bli.i::i 1.' `de7.::.:t�x::� actin... z -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila d. Two compressors fully loaded. e. On a call for dehumidification, the microprocessor control shall insure that at least one compressor is on full for proper humidity control. z K. Refrigeration Circuit: w 0 00 N J = H N w 0 gQ c � ° I- w Z = I-O Z F- W U� O - wW I- LL. Z w U= O~ 1. Provide a minimum of two refrigeration circuits complete with liquid line solenoid valve, replaceable filter drier, pressure relief valve, liquid and moisture indicator, thermal expansion valves with external equalizer and liquid line shut -off valves with charging port. Refrigeration circuits, including expansion valves, shall be serviceable and adjustable while AC unit is operating. Suction line accumulator, liquid receiver with shut -off valves, evaporator pressure regulating valve shall be installed on each refrigeration circuit. 2. Each refrigeration circuit shall be charged and ready for operation, requiring only connection of services and opening of service valves. 3. Head Pressure Control: Each refrigeration circuit shall have flooded head pressure controls. The controls shall be adjustable and set to maintain a constant condenser and receiver pressure under various fluid temperatures, eliminating the possibility of compressor short- cycling. L. Receiver: 1. Each refrigeration circuit shall have a factory- mounted liquid receiver, large enough to hold the entire floodback charge. 2. The receiver shall be located in the AC unit cabinet. Each receiver shall be fitted with all necessary line shut -off valves to permit it to be isolated from the refrigeration circuit for service. A purge valve shall be factory installed on the receiver. M. Water Cooled Condenser: N. Infrared Steam Humidifier (for CRAC — 4 to 6 only): September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The condenser shall be brazed -plate type with 100% counterflow, tube -in -tube Shell - and- tube type fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, mechanically cleanable type with removable heads and of all non - ferrous construction. 2. Condenser shall be capable of operating at system working pressure, with a minimum rating of 350 psig. 3. Provide a two -way automatic control valve for modulating water flow from head pressure control. 4. Provide liquid -line stop valve and head - pressure - actuated, two -way, water - regulating valve. 5. Terminate water connections outside cabinet. 1. AC unit shall be supplied with an infrared humidifier consisting of high - intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless -steel evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections and prepiped and using condensate water from cooling coils 2. Provide stainless -steel or brass float -valve mechanism located in bypass airstream with flush -cycle timer and solenoid drain valve humidification system. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -7 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila O. Hot gas reheat (for CRAC – 4 to 6 only): Provide a complete hot gas reheat system shall include a copper tube, aluminum fin coil, three -way solenoid valve, and refrigerant check valve. z P. Integral Electrical Controls: H w e: 1. Branch circuits shall be individually fused and shall include a 24 volt control 6 v transformer from which magnetic starters and control devices shall operate. to 0 2. Magnetic starters shall have three -line, three -coil, ambient - compensated overload u) 0 al protection, with manual reset. w z 3. Refrigeration cycle shall be fitted with a low and high pressure cutout switch, with i- manual reset on high pressure cutout. A compressor sequence switch shall be N p p for sequencing lead -lag control of the compressors. All wiring greater than 2 24 volt shall be in conduit. ga 5 4. Unit - mounted electrical enclosure with piano - hinged door, grounding lug, ii- combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover u) a interlock, and fusible control- circuit transformer. F w 5. Disconnect Switch: Non - automatic, molded -case circuit breaker with handle — z H accessible when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched to Z O off position. w w Q. AC unit Temperature and Humidity Controls: v 0 O N o 1- ww L I O w z U = O~ September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. AC unit shall be equipped with electronic control system for fully automatic operation factory piped and wired including: a. Three -way automatic free cooling water valve, condenser water valve. b. Hot water reheat valve. c. Chilled water valve. d. Reheat system. e. Thermostats and humidistat. 2. AC unit shall have four stages of cooling, two stages of heating, fluid temperature sensing control and individual high and low limit humidistat. 3. Set up control for operation with a preset deadband between humidifying and dehumidifying. Control settings and deadbands shall be field adjustable from the AC unit front control panel. 4. Control system shall provide temperature set point range 65° F to 85° F and humidity setpoint 40% to 60% RH. 5. Control system microprocessor shall provide for adaptive control of AC unit operation in response to rate of change of room loads. 6. Control system shall provide protection against compressor short cycling and shall provide for automatic lead /lag compressor sequencing. 7. Control system shall provide automatic restart of AC unit with programmed time delay. • R. Disconnect Switch: The AC unit shall be supplied with a main circuit interrupter for disconnecting electrical power to the AC unit from the exterior of the AC unit cabinet without having to open the cabinet doors. 1. Locking Type: The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage electrical components until switched to the "OFF" position. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -8 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila S. Smoke Detector: 1. AC unit shall be furnished with a factory- installed smoke detector with return air sensing element, which shall sound a local alarm and shutdown AC unit. 2. Provide contacts for remote alarm indication to the central fire alarm system provided under Division 16. T. Condensate Pump: 1. Condensate pump shall be complete with float switch, pump and motor assembly and one gallon reservoir. 2. Minimum capacity at 20 feet head: 40 gallons per hour for AC units up to 20 tons cooling capacity. 100 gallons per hour for AC units over 20 tons cooling capacity. U. Water Detectors (CRAC —1 to 3 only): Provide two solid state water detectors per AC unit for mounting under or on top of raised floor. Connect to AC unit control panel for alarm. 2.03 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL WITH GRAPHICS A. Advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor dot matrix display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu driven with on- screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user review and programming of temperature and humidity setpoints, alarm parameters, and setup selections including choice of control type. A password shall be required to make system changes. For all user selections, the range of acceptable input (temperature, humidity, or time delay) shall be displayed on the monitor screen. The system shall provide monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function, component run times, date and time, and four analog inputs from sensors provided by others. B. The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Temperature setpoint 65° to 85° F. 2. Temperature sensitivity plus 1° to 9.9° F in 0.1° F increments. 3. Humidity setpoint 20% to 80% relative humidity. 4. Humidity sensitivity plus 1% to 30% relative humidity. 5. All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel. Temperature and humidity sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and humidity sensors in the room. C. Predictive Humidity Control: The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and prevent unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to changes in dewpoint temperature. In addition, the system shall provide the following internal controls: 1. Compressor short-cycle control: The control system shall include a program to prevent compressor short- cycling. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. System auto - restart: For start-up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6- second increments) time delay. Programming shall be performed either at the unit or from the central site monitoring system. 3. Sequential load activation: During start-up, or after power failure, the microprocessor shall sequence operational load activation to minimize inrush current. Systems allowing multiple loads to start simultaneously are unacceptable. 4. Chilled water /hot water/free cooling coil flush cycles: Chilled water, hot water, and free cooling coils shall be automatically flushed to prevent the buildup of contaminants. Systems without this feature shall include the necessary devices to bypass fluid into the coil on a programmed basis. D. Front Monitor Display Panel: The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor 240 x 120 dot matrix display panel with adjustable backlighting. This display (along with five front mounted control keys) shall be the only operator interface required to obtain all available system information such as room conditions, operational status, graphical data, alarms, control and alarm setpoints, and all user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch selections, and diagnostics. All indicators shall be in language form. No symbols or codes shall be acceptable. E. The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. High and low temperature. 2. High and low humidity. 3. Short cycle. 4. Compressor overload. 5. Main fan overload. 6. Humidifier problem. 7. High head pressure. 8. Change filter. 9. Loss of airflow. 10. Low suction pressure. 11. Loss of power. 12. Provide up to four customer accessible alarm inputs to be indicated on the front panel. Custom alarms shall be identified with prepared (programmed) alarm labels for the following frequently used inputs: a. Water under floor. b. Smoke detected. c. Standby glycol pump on. d. Loss of water flow. e. Standby unit on: User customized text shall be entered for two of the four custom alarms. 13. Each alarm (unit and custom) shall be separately enabled or disabled, selected to activate the common alarm, and programmed for a time delay of 0 to 255 seconds. 14. Provide an audible alarm to annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the operator. Provide audible alarm override switch. 15. Provide a programmable common alarm to interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -10 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to a site monitoring system with the following information: date and time of occurrence, unit number, and present temperature and humidity. G. Analog Inputs: The system shall include four customer accessible analog inputs for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20- milliamp signal. The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5 volts dc or 0 to 10 volts dc if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front panel. The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front panel. H. Diagnostics: The control system and electronic circuitry shall be provided with self - diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The controller board shall be diagnosed and reported as pass /not pass. Control inputs shall be indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control outputs shall be able to be turned on or off from the front monitor panel without using jumpers or a service terminal. An LED on a circuit board shall indicate each control output. Data Collection: The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of compressor, reheat, humidifier, fan motor, and free cooling coil. The ten most recent alarms shall also be retained. J. Communications: The microprocessor shall be compatible with all generic remote monitoring and control devices. K. The control shall display the following graphical data: PART 3 — EXECUTION 1. Temperature, humidity, analog inputs. 2. Component operating status by hour. 3. Water detection floor plan. 4. Operating status. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS A. Install AC unit level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances, on a floor mounted seismic stand supplied by the AC unit manufacturer. B. CONNECTIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 2. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 3. Water and Drainage Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. Provide adequate connections for water- cooled units, condensate drain, and humidifier flushing system. 4. Condenser -Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water - cooled units. 5. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. Electrically ground equipment according to Division 16 Specifications. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 6. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field- assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. 2. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: a. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. b. After installing computer -room air - conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. c. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. STARTUP SERVICE 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. 2. Verify that computer -room air - conditioning units are installed and connected according to manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. 4. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier. E. ADJUSTING F. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer -room air - conditioning units. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Adjust initial temperature [and humidity] set points. 2. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. 2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice. END OF SECTION Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -12 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 . WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Packaged air - cooled roof -top air conditioning units. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15170: Electric Motors C. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints D. Section 15241: Acoustics E. Section 15800: Ductwork F. Section 15860: Fans G. Section 15880: Air Filters H. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing J. Division 16: Electrical 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for review: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15771 PACKAGED AIR - COOLED ROOF -TOP UNITS 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 3. Performance schedules. 4. Dimensions and weights. 5. Materials of construction. 6. Wiring diagrams, as required. 7. Fan curves. 8. Roof mounting frames and curbs. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry of governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. AMCA — Air Moving and Conditioning Association 2. ARI — Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 3. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 4. NEMA — National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 5. NFPA — National Fire Protection Association 6. OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Act 7. UL — Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 8. 1997 Washington State Energy Code 9. Local Codes A. Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bear AMCA certified rating seal. B. Scheduled equipment performance is minimum capacity required. C. Scheduled electrical capacity shall be considered as maximum available. D. Additional Guarantee: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Compressors: Five years 2. Furnace heat exchangers: Five years PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof -top air conditioning units: 1. AAON 2. Trane Co. 3. McQuay Air Conditioning 4. Carrier Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -2 _} MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 ROOF -TOP UNITS, GENERAL Z W w 1. Compressors. D 2. Air - cooled condenser. -J v 0 . 3. Direct expansion cooling coils. p 4. Gas -fired furnace. c o w 5. Supply fan. -J H 6. Return fan. N u- 7. Modulating dampers. ' LU uj 0 8. Filters. 9. Controls. g Q 10. Insulated casing. co 2 I d B. Units rated in accordance with ARI Std 360. I' w Z H C. Factory Assembly: P Ill uj 1. Completed assembled, piped and wired. m p 2. Run test at factory: O cS. :. a. Three hours minimum. p f- 3. Charge with refrigerant R -22 and compressor oil. w w 4. Ship fully assembled. H H V- iii z U N 1. One point connection. 1 H 2. Knockouts for power and control connections. Z 3. At least one 115 volt convenience outlet. A. Factory fabricated packaged units, complete with: D. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical: 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Cold rolled steel. 2. Reinforced and braced with angles. 3. Access sections with hinged door. a. Quick opening handles. 4. Insulated: minimum 3 inches thick, coated fiberglass board NFPA -90 approved, 1.0 lb. density. 5. Finish: a. Standard factory finish. (1) Galvanized and painted. b. Submit color options, if any, for approval by Architect. 6. Completely weatherproof. a. Joints sealed to prevent leakage. b. Tops crowned or sloped to drain. No pockets to retain water. 7. Gasketed access panels. a. Quick opening handles. b. Brass or stainless steel hinge. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Drain Pans: z 1. Under cooling coils and fans. 2. Insulated. w C. Unit Base: 00 1. One piece welded assembly. N w 2. 14 gauge formed bearing members. .. 11 F 3. Base to curb sealing gasketing. co u_ 4. Curb overhang. w 0 5. Lifting lugs. 2 a. Use for unit tiedown points. g Q N m D. Roof Curb: H W s 1. Galvanized steel construction with: Z ,_ a. Wood nailer strips. ,-, w O b. Base plate., W c. Insulation: m p (1) 1 inch thick. p c (2) 1 lb. density. 0 t_ (3) UL listed, fire retardant. _ w w 2. Match unit base. I- H a. Gaskets between unit and curb. u. p 3. Complete weatherproof installation. �j Z 4. Similar to Stiles Corp. Model No. SC -2AP. 0 O H 2.04 FANS A. Refer to Section 15860: Centrifugal Fans. B. AMCA certification in accordance with ARI Standards 210 and AMCA Standard 2408 for centrifugal fans. C. Performance: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. See fan schedule on Drawings. 2. Capacities: minimum as scheduled. 3. Performance based on sea level conditions. 4. Capable of accommodating static pressure variation of plus or minus 10 percent. 5. Performance with inlet vanes: manufacturer's published catalogue rating of fan with vanes. 6. High efficiency type motors. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -4 z T j MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila 2.05 COILS D. Wheels: 1. Formed steel or extruded aluminum. 2. 24 inch diameter and larger: a. Backward curved air foil blade. 3. Under 24 inch diameter: a. Backward curved blade. 4. Under 12 inch: a. Forward curved blade. 5. Factory balanced, statically and dynamically. E. Power Return: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Return 80 percent of supply air, minimum. 2. Forward curved centrifugal fan. a. Belt- driven. b. Multiple or single. c. Similar to supply fan specified above. 3. Smaller units may use propeller fan. A. Design and Construction: 1. Extended surface type coils: a. Tubes: Copper. (1) Minimum thickness: 0.020 inch. b. Plate or helical fins of copper or aluminum. (1) Plate fins: flat or conformed. (2) Helical fins to be solder dipped. (3) Minimum thickness: 0.008 inch. 2. Maximum Face Length, 12 feet per section. 3. Rows and fin spacing. a. Minimum rows and fins as scheduled. 4. Circuiting as required. 5. Tubulators permitted. 6: Headers: Copper tubing or cast iron. 7. Certified by A.R.I. per current Standard 410. 8. Pressure and leak tested at factory. B. Headers totally enclosed. C. Refrigerant Coils: 1. Serpentine type. 2. Brass or copper header arranged: a. To prevent trapping of oil. b. To distribute liquid refrigerant to circuits. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -5 z 6D VO (no` u,„; w= w ga 5 . w Z � I- 0' w D p O 0 I-. = V . O. . U = ' F.: ~: Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 GAS FURNACE C. Burner: 3. Silver soldered or brazed joints. 4. For refrigerant R -22. • . z 5. Include factory assembled multi- circuit distributor. Z F 6. One circuit per compressor. w 7. Expansion valves. QQ 2 WV 0 co 0 co w A. Completely assembled and wired gas fired heating system integral within unit. -I H • w 1. UL and FM approved specifically for outdoor applications. w O . 2. Downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. 2 �. 3. Gas supply through side or bottom of unit. g Q 4. Factory pressure and leak tested. N = w z � � Z 1-•. uj 0 �, CI H W W I U � O w O z B. Heat Exchanger: 1. Tubular two pass design. 2. 16 -gauge stainless steel primary heat exchanger surface. 3. 18 -gauge secondary heat exchanger surfaces. 4. Factory pressure and leak tested. 1. Industrial type. 2. With air proving switch. 3. Ceramic cone burner assembly. D. Combustion Blower: 1. Centrifugal type fan. 2. Fan motor with built -in thermal overload. E. Gas Safety Controls: 1. Electric flame safety controls to prove combustion air prior to ignition sequence. 2. Two stage with sixty second delay between first and second stage gas valves. 3. Continuous electronic flame supervision. 4. Air -flow proving switch. 2.07 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A. Compressors: 1. Type: Serviceable semi - hermetic or hermetic type. a. Direct driven. b. 1750 rpm. 2. Capacity unloaders. 3. Unloaded starting. 4. Vibration isolators. 5. Suction strainer. September 30, 2003 Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units Permit Issue 15771 -6 �w, • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 6. Crankcase oil level sight glass. a. Oil charging valve. 7. Forced feed lubrication with reversible rotating oil pump. 8. Magnets in oil circuit. 9. Ring valves. 10. Backseating suction and discharge service valves. 11. Suction line accumulator to prevent compressor slugging. B. Condenser: 1. Direct driven propeller type fans: a. Permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Built -in thermal overload protection. c. With safety guard. 2. Extended surface coils: a. Seamless copper tubes. b. Aluminum fins. 3. Sub - cooling circuit. 4. Accumulator. 5. Low ambient temperature control. 2.08 FILTERS A. UL Class II bag filters. 1. 30 percent minimum efficiency per ASHRAE Std. 52 -76. B. Mounted in galvanized steel frames. 1. Stainless steel clips. 2. Latching hardware. 2.09 ECONOMIZER DAMPERS. A. Fully modulating dampers: 1. Outside air. 2. Return air. 3. Exhaust air. B. Construction: 1. See Section 15910: DAMPERS. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.10 CONTROLS A. Electrical Wiring: 1. Electrical wiring and controls: Conform to requirement of NEC and State of Washington. 2. Wiring color -coded and /or numbered for easy identification. 3. Unit control panel will include: a. Integral power disconnect b. Circuit breaker type overload protection c. Starters d. Relays e. Factory wired f. Run tested prior to shipment B. Automatic temperature controls for overall operation of building systems provided under Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). C. Provide internal controls required for operation of economizer system and condensing unit operation, upon starting signal from external control interface. 1. See Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). D. Provide additional relays, internal wiring, additional facilities and terminals to make external control sequences compatible with internal control sequence. E. Provide electronic control circuit with discharge sensor to: 1. Start compressors. 2. Load and unload refrigeration with capacity changes. F. Provide time delays and hot gas bypass to prevent short cycling compressor between load stages for VAV units. Provide Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) control interface with BMS in order to adjust supply and return air for speeds, as necessary. H. Short Cycle Control: 1. Prevent compressor short cycling resulting from rapid change in thermostat setting. 2. Prevent compressor restart within five minutes after shutdown. I. Head Pressure Control: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Condenser fan control. 2. Maintenance head pressure control down to —20° F outside air temperature. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -8 rY, 1 re 2 0 ( o CO w �Q CO ▪ ° H= Z �. F- 0 Z F- • w 0 O N D I- . W W I- • U u' O • Z O~ z j ._J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Provide remote control and monitoring panel for each unit to contain: z • 1. System operating switch Q I- 2. Fan operating pilot Tight re w 3. Fan malfunction pilot light 4. Cooling malfunction pilot light v v O 5. Dirty filter pilot light co p wI J I PART 3 — EXECUTION N O w 3.01 INSTALLATION g s J A. Air Conditioners: , to d 1. Reassemble factory fabricated components in field, at no additional cost, where units z i ` are shipped in sections. • 2. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. z i- D CI U 1. Hold -down method: o H a. Two restraints on each of two long sides. 11.1 w , b. Cable loop at each restraint point as specified in Section 15240: F- t_ VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS. O ` W z H 1 1. Gas: See Section 15240: GAS SYSTEMS. z 2. Condensate drain piping: See Section 15060: PIPING AND ACCESSORIES. B. C. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Unit Mounting Bases: Piping Connections: 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND START -UP A. Start -up work shall be by service personnel employed by manufacturer. B. Test and adjust completed air handling units to insure proper operation. 1. Complete and thorough start -up of the refrigeration cycle. 2. Check that: a. All drives are aligned. b. Set screws are tightened and seated. c. All dampers fully closed on return, fully open on outside air and exhaust air. 3. Operate economizer cycle through its extremes: a. Using unit controls to check calibration and proper closure. 4. Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent until: a. Ductwork is clean. b. Filters in place. c. Bearings lubricated. d. Fan has been run under observation. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provide operational tests to demonstrate proper operation and adequate capacity at completion of balancing and adjusting. D. Supply and install sheaves as necessary for final air balancing. E. Coordinate operational tests with Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) and Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. F. Submit report certifying above work to Architect. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -10 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15786 WATER FILTER AND CYCLONE SEPARATOR z H PART 1 — GENERAL , ... re Lii 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 6 D 00 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: co w I 1. Cooling tower water cyclone separator with controls, valves and closed loop liquid co u recovery tank. ai 0 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS a . cu A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. = d I- al B. Section 15160: Pumps. z F z i— C. Section 15170: Electric Motors.. al w Dp ' D. Section 15708: Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. 0 cn. 0 F E. Section 15890: Water Treatment. w w 1.03 SUBMITTALS u O lii z A. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the pump, motor filter, separator, valves and all O ~ appurtenances. B. Submit all component sizes capacities and piping arrangements. C. Submit controls, mounting details, materials of construction. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Filters: Process Efficiency Products, Filtomat, United Industries. B. Cyclone Separators: Lakos, Griswold, Filtrite. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Water Filter and Cyclone Separator 15786 -1 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 CYCLONE SEPARATORS A. Provide a pre - engineered, factory assembled centrifugal separator system with interconnecting piping to the closed loop liquid recovery tank and cooling tower water piping as shown on the Drawings. The system shall be complete with flanged inlet and outlets, pressure gauges, automatic purge system, circulation pump, electrical control panel, automatic and hand valves, piping, 1% inch purge outlet, mounting bracket. B. Separation tank shall be constructed of 3/16 inch carbon steel with top mounted pressure gauge and auto-purge system. Provide positive sealing gasketed access to the internal components of the tank. Tank operating pressure shall be 150 pounds per square inch. Provide 150 pound A.N.S.I. raised -face flanges. C. The separator shall be designed with tangential entry into the acceptance chamber. Upon tangential entry, the liquid /solids are drawn through internal tangential slots and accelerated into the reduced diameter separation cylinder. The solids heavier than the carrying liquid are centrifugally spiraled down the perimeter of the separation cylinder past the deflector stool and allowed to accumulate into the separator's collection chamber. The liquid (free of separable solids) will follow the vortex created and centered on the deflector stool up through the interior of the separator cylinder and into the vortex finder which becomes the separator outlet. D. The separator shall incorporate a pressure relief line from the collection chamber to the venturi located in the tangential inlet to enhance separation by facilitating quiescent solids sedimentation in the collection chamber. Quiescent solids accumulation shall also be facilitated by the baffle spin arrestor below the deflector stool in the collection chamber. Separation and collection of solids shall not promote excessive wear nor require a continuous Involuntary" underflow. E. The control system shall be pre -piped and pre -wired for automatic separation and purge to clean the solids collector when the differential pressure across the tank increases to a preset point. Pipe purge line to closed loop liquid recovery tank. F. Provide shop coats of primer and finish enamel. G. Provide factory supplied wall mounting brackets or floor stands. H. Provide Lakos Model TCX- 0100 -SRV or equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 Comply with manufacturer's instruction regarding installation, particular with regard to mounting height above or below operating levels of the cooling tower sump and make -up levels. 3.02 Run drain lines to an approved indirect waste. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Water Filter and Cyclone Separator 15786 -2 z w a J0 00 N w J f- U LL w gQ _ ° I - w z � F- O z f- U O N o ww Hr- u O U - . O I z 1 1 — J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.03 Protect cyclone separators and piping exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures with factory installed electric heat tape and insulation. Protect the pre- strainer, pump, piping, valves, pressure switch tubing and filter tank. 3.04 All interconnections (piping, wiring, control), and interlocks between controls and cooling tower water pumps shall be by Division 15. Provide 2 sets of dry contacts for interface to Building Management System for the separator. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Water Filter and Cyclone Separator 15786 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15800 DUCTWORK z PART 1 — GENERAL 1 re I 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 6 = 10 00 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: co 0 1. Supply and return ductwork. w i ILI i 2. Fasteners and Sealants. 3. Duct Testing. w O 0 4. Installation of Equipment and Materials Furnished Under Other Sections. 2 5. Installation of Duct Smoke Detectors. ga Q 6. Access Doors. co 1.02 SUBMITTALS H w Z E A. Submit the following for review: Z O w w U1 O P ww I- U September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Submit ductwork shop fabrication and shop construction standards prior to submittal of ductwork shop drawings. 2. Ductwork shop fabrication and shop construction standards shall include all applicable shop details and product data. Include the following: a. Duct reinforcement tables for all pressure classes, duct materials (galvanized steel, aluminum, stainless steel, black iron) and ductwork shapes (rectangular, round, spiral, flat oval) to be used on this project. b. Duct reinforcement tables shall include material gages, transverse joint reinforcement type and standard shop joint spacing. c. Transfer duct construction detail. d. Acoustical lining, perforated metal liner, adhesive, nosing and fastening cuts and details. e. Installation details for volume dampers, single blade and multiblade type, remote and cord operated remote volume dampers, control dampers, fire damper installation detail. f. Duct access doors. g. Duct fitting construction details such as rectangular and radius elbows, turning vanes, offsets, branch connections, etc. h. Duct support and attachment details. i. Flanged duct connection details for all systems and each manufacturer used on project. Minimum duct construction gages shall be as per SMACNA duct reinforcement tables. Duct gages may not be reduced based on alterative jointing manufacturer's recommendations. j. Ductwork sealant. k. Diffuser ductwork connection details. Duct penetrating full height partition details. m. Flexible connection details. 3. Product Data including manufacturer's installation instructions, application, materials of construction, gauges, descriptive literature, and maintenance data for: a. Ductwork and fittings. b. Plenums. c. Fasteners and sealants. d. Access doors. 15800 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Prior to mounting or hanging of mechanical equipment or ductwork, obtain approval from Architect for proposed method of mounting particularly in existing buildings. Submit weights and location of all mechanical equipment and ductwork to the z Architect for approval well in advance of general construction work to allow sufficient I —' time for any structural evaluation, critique and necessary redesign to accommodate w the installation. Q J o 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS U p co co ILI A. The latest editions of specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, J H i ndustry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: co o 1. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Handbooks (Latest Editions). 2. SMACNA— Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.: Q a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, u> 1995 with Addendum 1 dated November 1997. = w w b. Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, -.• z H. Fourth Edition, 1992. ~ p c. HVAC Systems Testing Adjusting and Balancing. w I- d. Seismic Restraint Manual Addendum dated November 1993. w e. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 1 Edition. v o 3. UMC — Uniform Mechanical Code, Standard 6 -1: Standard for Metal Ducts, Latest p N . Edition. 0 1— 4. AABC — Associated Air Balance Council Manual: National Standards for Total = w System Balance. i F, 5. ANSI — American National Standard Institute. - u_ O 6. NFPA — National Fire Protection Association Standards: tii z a. NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. U 2 b. NFPA 90B, Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. ~ O F- c. NFPA 96, Exhaust Systems. z 7. UL — Underwriters' Laboratories, Standards for Safety: UL 181, UL 555 (Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers) UL 555S (Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems). 8. The State of Washington Codes. B. Where two or more references conflict, the most stringent, as determined by Architect shall take precedence. 1.04 DUCT CLASSIFICATION A. Duct classification is based on pressure classification as scheduled in Table 1 -1 and as described in the 1995 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible). Comply with NFPA 90A when ducts traverse through smoke zones. Comply with UBC /UMC when more stringent than NFPA 90A or SMACNA standards. - B. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams, Snap -lock or button punch seams are not acceptable. If SMACNA seal class A or B is specified, the longitudinal seam shall be sealed from the inside. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15800 -2 Duct System SMACNA Table No. SMACNA Pressure Classification (inches water gauge) SMACNA Seal Classification All supply ducts on variable volume systems from fan discharge to terminal units. 1 -5 +1 B All ductwork downstream of terminal units to diffusers and parts of return or exhaust ducts under positive pressure 1-4 All return, exhaust and relief ducts, where not used for smoke exhaust under negative pressure 3 -2B -2 B Flexible ducts +1 B Outside air supply systems 1 -4 +1 B MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -, A. Sheet Metal: C. Minimum pressure classification for each duct system and appropriate S MACNA t able references are as follows: B. Miscellaneous Products: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Steel Sheets: a. Cold rolled steel sheets, lock forming quality meeting ASTM A -653 and A- 653M. b. Black or galvanized as specified. c. Galvanizing: 1% ounces per square foot both sides. 1. Screws and Rivets: a. Same material as sheet, except as noted. b. Zinc or cadmium plated with neoprene grommets, permitted on galvanized sheets. c. Minimum screw size: No. 10. d. Minimum rivet size: 4 pound. 2 Duct Sealants: a. Sealing compound shall be flexible water -based adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure classes. Sealant shall be UV- resistant, conform to AST4 E84, be UL 723 listed and meet NFPA requirements for Class 1 ductwork. 15800 -3 z Q �. 2 00 0 -i N O tu gQ Z Cy. w Z = I— O Z H ll/ u j O D O C 0 1- uJw I - U �O • Z 0 O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Flexible Connections shall be used where ductwork connects to rotating, vibrating or noise producing machinery. Connectors shall be attached in such a manner to provide an airtight and waterproof seal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Flange Gasket: Provide a continuous butyl rubber gasket which complies with UL Standard 181 and 723 testing and meets MIL -C 18969B and TTS- S- 001657. This material shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type of materials that will support fungal or bacterial growth. Gasket width shall match duct flange or angel connection with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Ductmate Industries Model 440 gasket tape or approved equal. c. Liner Adhesive used to adhere insulation to metal duct shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 723 specifications. Ductmate Industries PROtack Liner adhesive or approved equal. d. Lagging Adhesive shall be applied to insulated ductwork where the insulated edge of the duct would otherwise be exposed to the airflow. Materials shall comply with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723 testing. Ductmate Industries Lag -It or approved equal. 3. Hard - setting joint tape shall be a UL listed two -part tape consisting of woven fiber tape impregnated with activator /adhesive of polyvinyl acetate type. a. Flame spread: 10 maximum; Smoke developed: 0. 4. Spring Fasteners: Self- ejecting oval head stud and receptacle with screwdriver slot. 5. Provide angles, tie rods and structural steel shapes for reinforcing ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. 6. Slide -on Transverse Joint Connectors: a. Prefabricated slide -on transverse duct connectors and components shall be accepted. Ducts constructed using prefabricated systems shall refer to the manufacturer guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper joint reinforcement. Ductmate Industries, Ward, Nexus, or approved equal. b. Formed -on flanges shall be constructed as T -25 NB flanges, of which the construction guidelines are given in Figure 1-4 of the 1995 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition. No other construction standards pertaining to formed -on flanges shall be accepted. Formed -on flanges shall include the use of corners, bolts, cleat and gasket. c. All components shall be metal unless other materials are required by code or specified. 1. Conform to UL 214, NFPA 90A and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. 2. Provide roll formed 1 long minimum or match length and width of fan, plenum or machinery connection companion flange: a. Aluminum, 1 gauge heavier than ductwork, plenum, fan or machinery connected. b. Galvanized steel, 26 gauge minimum or matching gauge of ductwork, fan, plenum or machinery connected. c. Other materials same as gauge and material as ductwork, plenum, fan or machinery connected. 3. Provide 2 -inch slack in fabric and install to allow minimum movement of 1 inch. 4. Length of fabric connections: 4 inches minimum; 10 inches maximum. 5. Materials: a. Indoor installations shall be a UL listed, fire retardant neoprene or vinyl coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 30 ounces per square yard and rated to 200° F. 15800 -4 is :..::..: —.... ....vr..5•.w ._,.+. 61'.d .r..,4...n .uh,�tl.uiLU:4',[.s.. ... _i i.:w [.•.1= ..5.:. ...r {,`_...r,..6Li.......I 42i ... rJ..`%: a+.>' 4:- �S..u.t::..1u[S:'..vli� ++.�.:. •i�.. J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Outdoor installations shall be a UL listed ultra violet light resistant Hypalon coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 24 ounces per square yard and rated to 250° F. c. Flame spread rating: 25 maximum, smoke developed rating: 50 maximum. D. Turning Vanes: E. Rectangular main duct to round duct take -off fittings shall be factory- fabricated spin -in fittings. 1. Die - formed, same material as ductwork. 2. Pressure ratings shall be equal to the duct pressure rating in which they are installed. 3. Provide balancing damper with locking regulator. 2.02 ROUND AND OVAL DUCTWORK A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Galvanized steel ductwork: galvanized steel or painted black steel, except as noted. 2. Other ductwork: same material as ductwork. 3. Construction shall meet or exceed SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards ". a. Use of single wall vanes with 3 /4 -inch trailing edge shall be limited to maximum air velocity of 2000 feet per minute and a maximum duct dimension of 18 inches. b. Double wall vanes shall be used in ducts where air velocity exceeds 2000 feet per minute or any duct dimension over 18 inches. 1. Provide factory- fabricated spiral lockseam duct, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Factory- fabricated longitudinal seams are acceptable for ducts larger than standard factory sizes and are required where branch sizes, fitting sizes, air inlet or outlet sizes exceed the seam -to -seam dimension. 3. Round and oval ducts joints shall be constructed as follows: a. Up to 20 -inch equivalent diameter: Interior slip coupling beaded at center and fastened t o the duct with screws. Seal joint with approved sealant continuously applied around joint prior to assembly and after fastening. Make certain that majority of sealant is on the interior of the joint. b. From 21 -inch to 72 -inch equivalent diameter: Use joining system as described in a. above or join using a three piece gasketed flanged joint consisting t o two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant and one external closure band which compresses the gasket between the internal flanges similar to Ductmate Industries "Spiralmate" or "Ovalmate" or approved equals. 4. Factory- fabricated fittings shall be same manufacturer as duct and the same material and construction as duct in which installed. a. Tees: 45° conical tap with center -line take -off, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuously welded seams. b. Elbows: (1) Segmented seams or standing segmented seams. (2) Continuously welded for positive or negative 2 -inch water gauge and greater: (a) 2 gores — less than 35° (b) 3 gores — 36° through 71° (c) 5 gores — over 71° to 90° maximum 15800 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Single -Wall Ducts: z z I �w C. Factory- Fabricated Accessories: 0 0 0 N0 . 1. Couplings. J = 2. Volume dampers. "°', co u_ 3. Bellmouth fittings. w 4. End caps. 2 5. Angle rings. ,„ g Q 6. Insulation ends: Connections of double to single wall ducts. 7. Access doors: Hinged, framed or pressure relief per SMACNA "HVAC Duct ' N a Construction Standards" Fig. 2 -10. H = z1 F- O Z I- w w U 1. Provide UL 181, Class I air duct with polymeric liner, labeled for compliance with O co UMC. Use only where indicated. w 2. Flexible ducts shall meet criteria as defined in Section 3 of the 1995 SMACNA H U M HVAC Duct construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition or u- ~O as specified. iii z U N . B. Static Pressure Class up to 1 -Inch Water Gauge. H H O z 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. 2.04 ACCESS DOORS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Materials of construction: a. Galvanized steel: Supply and return, general and toilet exhaust ducts. General: 1. Insulated Flexible Duct: a. Maximum working pressure 1 -inch water gauge. b. Nominal 1 inch insulation with vapor barrier. c. Maximum thermal conductivity 0.27 BTUH per square foot per degree F per inch at 75° F. 2. Similar to Wiremold Type WG. 3. Use at air inlets and air outlets. C. Provide factory fabricated collar. D. Flexible ductwork clamps shall be adjustable screw type stainless steel straps approved for use with flexible ductwork. A. Access doors shall comply with the 1995 SMACNA— Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. 15800 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Duct a ccess d oors s hall b e i nsulated o r u ninsulated, s ame as duct. Make completely accessible. PART 3 — EXECUTION 1. Minimum Size: a. 20 inches by 14 inches, 18 inches by 16 inches or larger. b. Ducts less than 16 inches: one dimension 20 inches; other dimension 2 inches less than duct width or height. c. Larger sizes where required for access. 2. Systems designed for 2 -inch water gauge and less (SMACNA Seal Class B or C) shall utilize a hinged and cam, square framed access door. 3. All other systems shall utilize a hinged access door. Construct door in accord with Figure 2 -10 of the 1995 SMACNA Manual "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" second Edition. 4. Provide in following locations: a. Coils in ducts: entering and leaving side. b. Automatic dampers: linkage side. c. Balancing dampers and backdraft dampers. d. Fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire /smoke dampers. e. Duct - mounted smoke detectors, sprinkler heads, heat detectors. f. Duct humidifiers. g. All controls, sensing, processing, transmitting and actuating devices. 5. Provide permanent label on all access doors identifying the concealed components as specified above. 3.01 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Construct with gauges, joints, bracing, reinforcing, and other details per latest UMC, SMACNA, or NFPA unless specified otherwise. Comply with most stringent. 2. Ductwork shall not exceed the deflection limits established in UMC Standard 6 -1- Standard for Metal Ducts, 1997 Edition. Maximum allowable deflection for transverse joints and intermediate reinforcements shall not exceed 0.25 -inch for duct widths up to 100 inches and shall not exceed 0.3% of the span for duct widths greater than 100 inches. 3. Construct ducts with NFPA 90A gauges when traversing smoke zones. 4. Construct of galvanized sheet metal, except where otherwise indicated or specified. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net, inside, clear, dimensions. For internally lined ducts, add lining thickness to determine metal duct dimensions. 6. At exposed duct penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings, provide sheet metal angle type escutcheons fastened to the duct only. 7. Provide minimum 26 -gauge sheet metal construction for ducts crossing fire rated corridors. Refer to Architectural drawings for wall types and ratings. 8. Install exposed ducts as high as possible but within 36 inches of the ceiling. Coordinate with other trades to maintain not less than 90 inches clearance 'above finished floor, unless indicated otherwise. September 30, 2003 15800 -7 Permit Issue MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 9. Transitions: Pitch sides of duct in "diverging" or "converging" airflow. a. Maximum of 15 °- included angle. b. Exception: Provide 7%° concentric diverging velocity cones at the discharge of vane axial fans. 10. Duct Openings: Provide openings where required to accommodate thermometers, smoke detectors, controllers, wiring, conduit, tubing etc. Insert through airtight rubber grommets. a. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems: (1) Include threaded metal cap, spring loaded cap or threaded plug to eliminate any air leakage. (2) For Pitot tube tests install Ventlock No. 699 and 699 -2 instrument test holes. (3) Coordinate locations of openings with balancing contractor. b. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork for insertion of instruments, install insulation material metal sleeve, flanged on one end for use as plug. Reseal vapor barrier. 11. Duct lining: Install lining in ducts and plenums as specified in Section 15241: Acoustics. 12. Flexible Duct Connections. a. Install: (1) At connections to fan discharge, fan coils, heat pumps, air conditioning units and all air handling equipment. (2) As indicated on Drawings or specified in other sections. 13. Refer to SMACNA duct construction standards for outdoor flexible connection details. 14. Volume dampers: a. Install damper as specified in Section 15910: Dampers and Section 15940: Air Outlets and Inlets. b. Install damper in branch duct for all air inlets and outlets at accessible location most remote from air inlet or outlet. B. Elbows: 1. Use radius elbows in rectangular ducts unless otherwise indicated. Centerline radius shall be a minimum of 150% of duct width. 2. Where space does not permit duct radius specified above, install short radius or square elbow with vanes per SMACNA duct construction standards. 3. Do not use turning vanes in the following applications: a. Grease and vapor exhausts. b. Fume hood exhaust. c. Breeching. d. Toilet exhaust ducts. e. Any gravity ductwork. f. Clothes dryer exhaust. g. Hoistway vent. 4. For 2 -inch water gauge or above pressure class ductwork, spot weld turning vanes to duct. 5. For all 2 -way splits in supply, return and exhaust systems, provide 2 elbows, proportionally sized per SMACNA Duct Standards, either radius or square. A single fitting is acceptable with turning vanes and duct openings sized as specified. 15800 -8 Duct Diameter End Lap No. of Rivets /Screws in Slip Joint 8 inches 3 /4-inch 4 9 to 16 inches 1 -inch 6 17 inches & up 1% -inch 7 plus 3 per inch of circumference MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Rectangular Duct Joints and Seams: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Provide standing, longitudinal seams, except where flush drive slip seam is specified. 2. Use grooved seam for exposed ducts except in garages, electrical or mechanical rooms, and where required for clearance. 3. "Duct Connection System" joints, may be used in lieu of standing seams. Plastic clips are only allowed for breakaway connections. 4. Fabricate ductwork and coordinate installation such that seams or joints shall not be cut or interrupted for the installation of branches, fittings, dampers, access doors, air inlets or air outlets. D. Joint Sealing: 1. Seal to SMACNA Seal Classifications previously specified by one of the following methods: a. 6 -ounce canvas strip, 6 inches wide adhered with lagging adhesive. b. Hardcast PC -S tape (Duct Tape Not Allowed) and United Hi- Velocity sealer. c. Applications as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Seal punched holes and corner cracks (Duct Tape Not Allowed). 3. After installation and testing reseal joints found to be leaking. 3.02 ROUND AND OVAL DUCTWORK A. Joints between ducts: 1. Construct with beaded sleeve joints. 2. Mechanically fasten with sheet metal screws or pop rivets except for clothes dryer ductwork. 3. Duct sealer shall be applied to male end and over all joint, screw and rivet heads. 4. Seal as specified for rectangular ductwork. B. Joints, duct and fitting: 1. Slip projecting collar of fittings into duct with a minimum insertion length of 2 inches. 2. Apply duct sealer. Seal as specified for rectangular ductwork. 3: Mechanical fastener schedule: 15800 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Junctions between ducts: 1. Branch take -off from round duct: 45 °. z D. Horizontal supports shall be one piece clamp band strap, minimum one strap per section. x Z Support fittings as required by SMACNA. w E. Use angle iron braces for duct reinforcing. Refer to the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 6 D Standards figure numbers 1 -9 thru 1 -12. 0 O F. Additional bracing: N w J H N u_ w J 3.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK • D A. Provide continuous, single pieces. H W B. Maximum Length: 6 feet. z 11.- C. End Connections: z O 1. Connect to duct collars, terminal unit connections and round air outlets per 2 D ; manufacturer's instructions. 0 2 Secure with strap clamps specified above. O S 0 1— Ill w H P. -I O Iii z U2 . O 1- z Provide additional bracing and support for ductwork as required due to the large plenum space and the requirement for all ducts and equipment to be installed within 36" of the ceiling level. D. Installation: 1. Support per SMACNA. 3.04 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Support horizontal ducts with hangers of size and spacing as indicated in SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. 2. Attachment to structure shall be as specified in Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. 3. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints for ducts shall be as specified in Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. 4. Seismic restraints shall comply with SMACNA or UMC, whichever is more stringent. B. Horizontal Duct Supports: 1. Install hangers at each change in direction of duct. 2. Strap hangers: a. Extend strap down both sides of ducts. b. Turn under bottom two inches minimum. Provide a minimum of 2 screws per side. c. Screw hangers to bottom, upper and lower sides of ducts at 12 inches on center maximum. d. Seal all screw penetrations of ductwork. 3. Angle hangers: a. Per SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints. b. Seal all penetrations of ductwork. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15800 -10 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS A. Install the following equipment and materials furnished under other sections. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions, code requirements, UL listing and the requirements of local authorities. 1. Backdraft and balancing dampers. 2. Fire, smoke, and fire /smoke dampers. 3. Control dampers, automatic louver dampers. 4. Access doors. Allow for adequate length of duct to install access door for all dampers. 5. Smoke detectors, flow switches, controls and fire alarm devices. 6. Pressure, temperature, humidity sensors /transmitters. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION 15800 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ' UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15860 FANS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15140 - Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. C. Section 15170 - Electric Motors. D. Section 15171 - Variable Frequency Drives. E. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. F. Section 15241 — Acoustics. G. Section 15771 — Packaged Air Cooled Rooftop Units. H. Section 15910 — Dampers. 1. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit construction details, gauges of fan wheels and housing components and certified dimensioned drawings. B. Submit manufacturer's latest published data for weights, materials, accessories and installation details. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Centrifugal Fans: a. Cabinet. b. Plug (Unhoused Centrifugal). 2. Axial Fans: a. Propeller. b. Mixed Flow. 3. Roof Exhaust Fans: a. Backdraft dampers for vaneaxial fans. Fans 15860 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Submit full technical rating data based on tests in accordance with current AMCA standards Z and in an AMCA approved laboratory. Fan curves shall indicate the relationship of airflow to Q static or total pressure for various fan speeds. Brake horsepower, recommended selection I- z range, and limits of operation shall also be indicated on the curves. Indicate operating point re w on the fan curves at design air quantity and indicate the manufacturer's recommended drive 6 g loss factor for the specific application. Tabular fan performance data is not acceptable. v v O cn 1. Include manufacturer's certified fan volume- pressure performance curves, from w w shutoff to free delivery. Consider drive efficiency in motor selection according to -1 H manufacturer's published recommendation or according to AMCA Publication 203, N w Appendix L. w O 2. Include certified sound power ratings based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 300. Correct all ratings and curves for altitude and temperature u. Q where applicable. co d =w ' D. Motor construction and efficiencies. Z H E. Bearing life calculations based on maximum design speed for the class of each fan w O scheduled on the drawing. 2 j . D F. Fan shaft critical speed at scheduled performance. O N ❑ 1- G. For variable air volume application, include data that indicates the effect of capacity control = v devices, such as inlet vanes, on performance. - i 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE - iii Z U A. For each fan, provide a multispeed fan performance curve with multiple horsepowers on a p /— single sheet. Computer generated single speed fan curves are not acceptable. Z B. Provide a full two -year parts and labor warrantee for all fan - mounted control air compressors. 1.05 REFERENCE 'STANDARDS A. Construct all fans, except vaneaxial adjustable blade, to comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Standards and Bulletins. Certify these fans by AMCA for performance and sound ratings and provide the AMCA Performance and Construction Seal for Air and Sound. 1. AMCA 203 - AMCA Fan Application Manual — Troubleshooting. 2. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for Rating. 3. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 4. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 5. ANSI /AFBMA 9: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 6. ANSI /AFBMA 11: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. September 30, 2003 Fans Permit Issue 15860 -2 - -a MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS z _I- 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS w A. Centrifugal Fans: Twin City, Chicago, Buffalo, Greenheck. U O B. Propeller Fans: Twin City, Greenheck, Bayley, Woods. J w I- C. Roof Exhaust Fans: Greenheck, Penn, Cook, Greenheck. CO w w 0 2.02 GENERAL — ALL FANS g u_Q A. Unless noted otherwise, provide discharge direction and drive arrangement to suit space N d conditions and conform as closely as possible to the layouts shown on the Drawings. H w Maintain clearance for service and access to all components. z H H0 B. Provide factory- fabricated, - assembled, - tested, and - finished fans consisting of housing, w t— wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. Fans shall be quiet 2 D operating and non - overloading over the entire range of operation. v 0 o1- w u w z 0 0 1- z C. Provide fan motors in accordance with Section 15170: Electric Motors. Size motor to drive its respective fan when the fan is operating at a speed 5 percent in excess of that required to meet the scheduled fan performance. Do not select motors within the service factor for this range. D. Statically and dynamically balance fan wheels /impellers at the factory and certify balance. Design all vertically mounted fans to withstand the vertical thrust loads. E. Provide precision self - aligning bearings designed to prevent leakage of oil or grease. Provide cups, oil chambers, Zerk or Alemite lubrication fittings in accessible locations for ease of lubrication. Provide heavy duty split pillow block bearings with tapered, double -row spherical roller assemblies. Provide bearings with AFBMA L service life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum published fan operating conditions for the AMCA construction class required unless noted or specified otherwise. F. Provide copper lubrication leads, for lubrication of internal motors and bearings, extending to a capped termination point external to the fan casing or air handling unit. G. Extend wire leads on fans driven by direct motor drive from the motor junction box in airtight rigid walled conduit, to a junction box mounted external to the fan casing. H. On fans driven by belt drive provide standard "V- groove" type oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic belts with cast iron or steel sheaves suitable for the service intended. Fan sheaves shall be non - adjustable type with removable machined bushings. Provide adjustable pitch type motor sheaves with double locking feature, to 10 percent above and below the rated fan speed. Dynamically balance sheaves with over three grooves. Provide at least two belts and sheaves each capable of carrying the entire load with one belt broken. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Provide pre- formed expanded metal and sheet metal belt guards at the fan and motor shafts, for all exposed sheaves and belts. Guard shall comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements; 0.1046 -inch thick, 3/4 -inch diamond -mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short- circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. J. For motors in the airstream, provide TEFC type motors, unless other types are required as specified in Section 15170: Electric Motors. K. Provide solid hot rolled steel drive shafts, accurately turned and polished to a close tolerance where in contact with bearings. Secure fan wheels /impellers to the drive shaft by a key and keyway assembly. Shafts shall be sized for first critical speed and at least 1.43 times maximum speed for AMCA fan class. L. Manufacture fans of materials and paint finishes suitable for the service intended. M. Construct wheels /impellers exposed to normal atmospheres of cast aluminum or hot dip galvanized steel and finished with two layers of factory applied non - scaling paint. N. Construct fans exposed to corrosive atmospheres using all- welded construction of corrosion resistant materials suitable for intended use, and factory finished with epoxy or other approved corrosion resistant coatings. O. Provide fans exposed to elevated temperatures with components rated for high temperature service. Do not use belt drive assembles exposed to the airstream. Use direct drive motors certified for high temperature service. P. Electrically ground all fans and drives to prevent accumulation of static charge. Indicate grounding method in fan submittals. Q. Provided threaded drain plugs at fan housing low points. R. Completely house fan assemblies exposed to weather in weatherproof enclosures including motor and drive. S. Fan wheels /impellers and housings shall be relieved of residual stresses produced in the forming process. T. Provide fans used to exhaust grease -laden vapors with motor drive and bearings completely external of air stream, and fan housings continuously welded inside and outside. U. Provide housings with integral inlet and discharge flanges, complete with bolt holes for flexible or hard duct connections. Shop fabricate any companion flanges required for connections to sound attenuators. Companion flanges shall be rolled angles matched to both fan housing and sound attenuators. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 158604 r.1.s >;. Li:.., i:.�: S......_ �. ..i...rs(n :. k,: a:;.+ �rw�t. i.. i. i.:. r..:.., a.i:;a:ti�iia:::t.:.`.�.a..cG.u. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila V. Provide variable frequency drives as specified in Section 15171: Variable Frequency Drives. W. Provide gasketed access doors to permit routine maintenance and inspection of motor and internal components. Inside surface of access door shall be flush with the inside surface of the fan housing. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Scroll Type: 1. Provide airfoil (AF), fan wheels, and single width single inlet (SWSI), as specified or indicated on the Drawings, enclosed in a scroll shaped fan housing with shaped cutoff and doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components. 2. Weld or securely rivet fan blades to the hub plate and rim. 3. Fan housings: a. Heavy gauge construction, continuously welded inside and outside. b. Housings shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration or pulsation and have spun, aerodynamically designed spun inlet cones or inlet venturis for smooth air entry into the wheels. c. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99, Class 1. All fan wheels shall have tapered spun wheel cones or shrouds providing stable flow and high rigidity. Housing with lock seam construction or partial weld shall not be acceptable unless for smaller fan sizes (12 inch wheel diameters or less) where it is standard construction for models listed on Drawings. Cabinet Type: 1. Provide scroll type centrifugal fans, factory installed within a cabinet enclosure, and comply with the requirements of Scroll Type Centrifugal Fans. 2. Internally isolate fan and motor assemblies from the cabinet. 3. Provide gasketed access doors and panels for inspection and routine maintenance of the internal components. 4. Provide solid state variable speed controllers for small ceiling mounted direct driven exhaust and transfer fans. C. Plug Type: 1. Single width, single inlet air foil type fan blades. 2. Plug fans shall have self aligning pillow block bearings with minimum AFBMA L life of 400,000 hours. 3. Plug fan plenums and inlet plenums shall be provided with an expanded metal door locked to prevent access to fan inlet, or a door switch h ardwire i nterlocked t o automatically shut down fan operation. September 30, 2003 Fans Permit Issue 15860 -5 z W . a 00 w 0 J u_ W OE u_ CD n �W Z � � Z w U O N . 0 H w H H L Z I" co 0 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 AXIAL FANS A. Propeller Type: ..... Z 1. Include propeller type impellers, complete with motors, and panel or ring mountings. `� W 2. Vary fan blades in camber and twist from base to tip. D 3. Construct impellers of die formed steel or aluminum with a welded reinforcing gusset '"" _I 0 on the backside for added rigidity, attached to a central hub mounted on the fixed co p drive shaft. Cl) w 4. Rotate fan hub on the fixed drive shaft using sealed ball bearings. _1 H 5. To eliminate overhang load on belted fans, design to apply belt load to the hub in the co u- ' same plane as the bearings. LU 0 6. Direct drive fans are only acceptable where belt driven units do not meet the performance criteria or direct drive is specified. &. i Q u. 7. Provide panels or rings with spun venturi inlets suitable f or w all mounting and D structural angle supports of welded steel construction. = d 8. Provide basket type fan guards for exposed inlets and discharges. I' _ 9. Provide TEFC motors on all fans. 10. Provide factory fabricated wall sleeves. Z 0 0 w w U� A. Provide roof exhaust fans of the centrifugal, belt- driven type. Construct fan housing of heavy p I- Ww = U I- 2.05 ROOF EXHAUST FANS gauge aluminum. B. Construct all spun parts with a rolled bead for added rigidity and spun so as to seal the pores v_ F- of the aluminum providing greater resistance against oxidation and deterioration. w Z UN C. Provide all- aluminum fan wheel of the centrifugal blower type backward inclined blades and a 0 H tapered inlet shroud. Statically and dynamically balance wheels. Z D. Provide inlet cone of aluminum centrifugal blower type. E. Enclose motor and drives in a weather -tight compartment separate from airstream and extend motor leads in metal conduit down through support base to facilitate wiring from below roof. Design to provide air for cooling the motor to the motor compartment by way of an air passage from an area free of contaminated exhaust fumes. F. Provide motors of the heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing type. Size drives for 200 percent of motor horsepower capabilities and of the cast iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts. Provide variable pitch drives. G. Construct fan shaft of steel construction, turned, ground and polished to precise tolerances in relationship to the hub and bearings. H. Provide drive belts of the oil- resistant, non - static, non - sparking type with an ABMA L life expectancy of minimum 24,000 hours. I. Provide flanged, permanently lubricated and sealed ball or roller type bearings. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -6 ._l MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. The entire drive and wheel assembly shall be removable as a complete unit from the support Z structure without disassembling the external fan housing. The assembly shall be hinged on z H one side with full length weatherproof piano hinges. Mount the complete drive assembly on ;1- w rubber vibration isolation. QQ JU K. Provide direct drive units of identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts, U p and fan shaft bearings. co w J 1 L. Construct all belt drive units interior and exterior parts, including wheel, wheel hub, supporting N u. posts, fan shaft, drive assembly, and all outside fasteners, of aluminum or non - ferrous w O material. Include a five -year warranty. g J M. Provide a sound - attenuating roof curb with backdraft damper of the same manufacture as the N 3 roof exhaust fan. H w Z1 N. Upblast units shall have motor, bearings, and drives completely enclosed and isolated from O the exhaust air stream with ventilation provided by outside air. Units handling grease laden Z 1- vapors to be U.L. listed for conveying such vapors, operating continuously at 300 degrees F. 0 O N O 1— Ill W 3.01 INSTALLATION I- H u.. O A. Install fans i n accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the IL Z Drawings. Follow SMACNA and AMCA recommended procedures for fan installations, belt U guards, duct connections, etc. p 1- PART 3 - EXECUTION B. Provide flexible connections as described in specification Section 15800: Ductwork shall provide sufficient separation of ductwork, plenum panels, or air handling unit casings from fan assembly to prevent metal -to -metal contact due to start-up torque or operating under specified isolator deflections. C. Install fans and motors with proper support and vibration isolation as specified in Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. D. Provide sufficient clearances around fans for access and servicing of components. Install fans such that tachometer openings, access doors, motors, belts, lubrication lines, electrical connections, etc. are readily accessible and not obstructed by other installations or structures. 3 :02 START UP A. Verify thermal - overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify proper motor rotation direction, fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Align and adjust belts, install belt guards and verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire /smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are fully open. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -7 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Bump start fans to check that fan wheel /impeller has maintained static and dynamic balance and the rotation corresponds to the desired direction for airflow. Correct fans found to be rotating in a direction opposite to that desired. Unbalanced wheels shall be re- balanced by an AABC — certified test and balance contractor. Z re W C. Tighten belt drives, taking into account the service factor and any other design of the drive. Exercise care not to overtension belts. O . CO 0 D. Check all bolts and fasteners to ensure proper tightness. Do not overtighten nuts and bolts. w w . J E. Check bearings and motor for proper lubrication, taking care not to overlubricate. Use only co u_ recommended by the manufacturer. 3.03 FAN ACCESSORIES "` J u- A. Provide the following accessories: H W 2 1. Support legs, hanger brackets welded to housing. z 2. OSHA approved belt guard. .. w O 3. Weatherproof motor and drive cover, as applicable. W 4. Shaft seal. D p ' 5. Threaded drain connection. 0 co , 6. Backdraft damper. 0 I- LL/ w B. Provide 22 gauge wire mesh reinforced galvanized steel inlet and discharge guard screens I � ' for all fans or sound attenuators connected to fans without inlet or discharge ductwork. u= O ... z C. Provide shaft seal to reduce leakage and protects the bearings from contaminated airstream. U Seal shall be constructed of non - asbestos woven fibrous materials (ceramic felt) compressed I between an aluminum cover plate and the fan housing. z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Fans 15860 -8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 o: w 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 6 D U O A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: co co w --) 1. Panel filters. -1 H 2. Filter frames, clips, housings and holding assemblies. N w I 3. Filter gauges. w O 2 - I 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS u.. a A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. H W Z . ) B. Section 15130: Meters, Gauges and Thermometers. ? 1.- z F- C. Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. 2 D m ca 1.03 SUBMITTALS O — co fl A. Submit manufacturer's data on Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) rating, sizes, = W pressure drops, maximum velocities and weights of complete units. t F . : u. O : B. Submit materials of construction, joining and fastening details for filters, frames and holding LL . z. I assemblies. U - O C. Submit drawings showing arrangement of multiple filter units. z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15880 AIR FILTERS AND CLEANERS z D. Filter gauges, mounting hardware and wiring diagrams. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All filter efficiencies are stated in MERV performance as described in ASHRAE Standard 52.2 -1999, except as noted. B. Filter coatings shall comply with ASTM D93. C. All filters shall comply with NFPA and U.L. standards for fuel contributed, flame spread and smoke development. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z PART 2 — PRODUCTS 1 w re 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 6 5 JU A. Flat filters, : Flanders /CSC, Cam /Farr, American Air Filter (AAF). N o u) LLI B. Filter Gauges: Dwyer, or approved equal. • —,, N I- u. 2.02 TYPE "A" — PANEL FILTERS = + w O A. Provide 2 -inch thick pleated, lofted, non - woven, reinforced fabric, supported and bonded to a tt14 u Q welded wire grid, and enclosed in cardboard frame for all panel filters with a MERV 7 rating. N d i_w B. In locations where "slide -in" side access type is required, install filters with adequate z H provisions for preventing bypassing of air around ends. . i 0 w C. Do not exceed 400 feet per minute filter bank face velocity or as scheduled on the drawings ? o for the maximum scheduled airflow. U O tn D. Frames shall be 16 -gauge galvanized steel, complete with gaskets and spring type positive n H ww E. Initial resistance shall be 0.3 -inch water gauge, 0.9- inches water gauge recommended final tL 0 Z Ili 0- 1 ~ z sealing fasteners. resistance. 2.03 FILTER HOUSINGS (Side Access) A. Housing shall be factory- fabricated of 16 -gauge galvanized steel, welded and properly braced. Provide pre - punched standing flanges shall facilitate field installation. B. Housing or holding frame shall be of the same manufacturer as filter media or provided by the air handling unit manufacturer. Coordinate media size with filter rack design. Contractor fabricated housings or filter racks shall not be accepted. Housing assembly shall be suitable for use in duct systems with 2 inches of water gauge static pressure. C. Casing and tracks shall be constructed of galvanized or enameled steel o r a luminum. Mounting tracks and access doors shall have gaskets to minimize air bypass around the filters. D. Insulate housings where adjacent duct or air handling apparatus is insulated. Insulation shall be contained within a 2 -inch t hick, double w all steel panel a nd m eet the requirements specified for adjacent duct or apparatus. E. Universal holding frames shall be constructed with U -type bearing channels, polyester gasketing and positive sealing clips. F. Extrusions of heavy gauge anodized aluminum shall be provided with a replaceable woven pile seal for sealing between extrusion and holding frame. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z 2.04 FILTER GAUGES 1 II - tu A. Provide filters with direct reading gauges, 4 -inch dial type, diaphragm actuated, in a metal case to monitor both primary and secondary filter banks. Dwyer Magnehelic Series 2000 or v approved equal. 0 O B. Provide direct reading gauges, 4 -inch dial type, diaphragm actuated, in a metal case with J H electrical control contacts to provide high pressure alarm at the BMS. Dwyer Photohelic co Series 3000 or approved equal. w O C . Lettering shall be black figures on white background. Provide front recalibration adjustment. g - u.Q D. Provide gauges with the following differential ranges in inches water gauge: = m i ._w 1. MERV 7 to 10: 0.O to 1.0. ? t I— 0 PART 3 — EXECUTION w ui 3.01 INSTALLATION 0 co 0 I- A. Reinforce all filter banks and frames by welding the frames together or with galvanized w W angles or channels, in accordance with the filter manufacturer's recommendations. The N U maximum deflection at any point shall not exceed 1 /4 -inch with the filter bank operating at a u- ~O final air pressure drop of 1.2- inches water gauge. .. z US B. Fully gasket each filter bank to prevent air bypass around the filter sections or between the 0 i filter modules. Caulk and seal between the plenum and the holding frame. z C. Provide complete sets of type 'A' filters for each air handling unit to be used during the construction phase. The initial set shall be factory installed and each subsequent construction set shall be installed at the direction of the owner or contractor, or when filters reach a maximum air pressure drop of 0.75- inches water gauge. D. Provide two (2) complete sets of filters specified for each fan powered terminal, computer room air conditioning unit, and air conditioning unit. Install one set immediately prior to the air balance and testing required by Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. The other set shall be delivered to the owner at the time of initial occupancy of the project. E. Maintain necessary clearance for changing filters. F. Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount gauge on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible location. Install tubing and gauge valves between gauge and sensor tips. Adjust and level each gauge. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Do not operate the equipment until specified filter media has been installed. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the cleanliness of air handling apparatus and air distribution systems during construction through regular inspection and changing of filter media throughout the construction period. END OF SECTION Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -4 3.02 OPERATION A. Maximum air velocity through the filter media shall not exceed 100 feet per minute for pleated • w rC type filters or a maximum face velocity of 400 feet per minute through the filter bank at the j maximum scheduled fan airflow. 00 y 0 B. Install filter assemblies according to manufacturer's instructions and accepted trade practice. c w Focus particular attention on sealing against leakage between holding frame, housing, filter headers and filters. u w w O. �.. w s. z � z I- U ON 0 I- = V I- V. O . Z: 0 - . 0 I { z I -, • 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. A. 7. 8. 9. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15890 WATER TREATMENT The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Open condenser water piping and closed circuit cooling towers 2. Closed condenser water piping 3. Chemical treatment equipment, chemicals and service 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060 - Piping and Accessories C. Section 15160 - Pumps D. Section 15708 — Closed Circuit Cooling Towers E. Section 15515 - Hydronic System Specialties 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit the following for review. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Makeup water analysis. Layouts of feeding equipment. Details of testing equipment. Description of treatment program including calculations, list of chemicals and quantities of chemicals to be used on a daily,.weekly and monthly basis. Provide system schematics showing the following: a. Condenser Water System: (1) Circulation rates. (2) Pressures. (3) Temperature differential across closed circuit cooling tower. and condenser. b. Closed Loop Condenser Water Systems: (1) Volume. (2) Circulation rates. (3) Pressures. (4) Temperature differentials. Provide written report witnessed by Contractor containing log and procedure of system cleaning, giving times, dates problems encountered and condition of water. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. Properties and product datasheets for all chemicals. Water Treatment 15890 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS z A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or :H w g5 r e overnmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1. NEMA — National Electrical Manufacturing Association. 0 0 2. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning co 0 Engineers. w I lll I 3. UL — Underwriters' Laboratories. co i.- 4. OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Act. O 5. EPA — Environmental Protection Agency. 2 6. UBC — Uniform Building Code. 7. UMC — Uniform Mechanical Code. u- j 8. U PC — Uniform Plumbing Code. N 0 9. The State of Washington Codes. H w 10. Local Codes. Z H 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE w w A. Retain a national water treatment chemical company to provide water treatment chemical c N feed equipment and chemicals for circulating water systems, steam systems and equipment 0 H as defined herein and as may be required to maintain the integrity of the piping systems and w w mechanical equipment. H V H B. The water treatment chemical and service supplier shall be a recognized specialist, active in LL z the field of industrial water treatment, whose business is in the field of water treatment, and w who has full time personnel within the trading area of the job site. Supplier shall have H z . completed five existing chemical treatment systems of equal or greater in size as this project Z ~ and these projects shall have been operating for a minimum of two years. C. Furnish and install all equipment and material on this project in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, suitable for its intended use on this project, approved by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and so certified by the manufacturer. D. Analyze water from the local water company to be used on the project before establishing treatment procedures. E. Treatment Standards Control levels are listed in ppm (parts per million) or as noted: 1. Open Condenser Water Systems: a. Non -toxic organic corrosion and scale inhibitor: Control Level: 300 ppm as total organic inhibitor. b. Molybdate Residuals: Control Level: 5 -10 ppm. c. Organic Flocculating Agent: Control Level: 1 ppm. d. Organic Growths: Control Level: None. Apply non - oxidizing EPA registered biocide when necessary. e. PH: Control Level: 8 -9. Apply acid or alkali if required. To be determined from an analysis of makeup water and local atmospheric conditions. f. Cycles of Concentration: Control Level: 6 -8. Actual cycles of concentration to be determined from an analysis of the makeup water. September 30, 2003 Water Treatment Permit Issue 15890 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Closed Recirculating Water Systems: Closed condenser water (220 °F maximum). a. Non -toxic organic corrosion and scale inhibitor: Control Level: 2000 ppm as total organic inhibitor. b. Molybdate: Control Level: 200 -300 ppm. c. Nitrate: Control Level: 300 -500 ppm Condenser Water as NO d. PH: Control Level: 7 -9. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Chemical Water Treatment Service: 1. Nalco. 2. Mogul. 3. Garret - Callahan.. 2.02 PRESTART -UP CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Furnish all required pipe cleaning chemicals, chemical feed equipment, materials, and labor necessary to clean the piping as herein specified. in addition, permanently install necessary chemical injection fittings complete with tubing, unions, sampling cocks, stop valves and coupon racks, etc. B. Provide a pre - startup, non - foaming, liquid detergent dispersant cleaner for cleaning of all water systems to remove oil and foreign material from the piping and equipment prior to the final filling of the systems. This chemical shall not be injurious to persons, piping, pipe joint compounds, packing, coils, valves, pumps and their mechanical seals, tubes, gaskets or other parts of the system. C. Furnish instructions dictating the quantities of the cleaner to use, methods and duration of the operation. Refer to Section 15060 for cleaning procedure. 2.03 WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS A. Provide a one - year's supply of necessary water treatment chemicals including the following: 1. Closed System Chemical Treatment (Closed Condenser Water): Liquid nitrate to reduce scale deposits, to adjust pH and to inhibit corrosion. Treatment shall not contain any chromates or other toxic substances. 2. Open Condenser Water Chemical Treatment System: Agent to inhibit scaling, acid or alkali to treat alkalinity and pH, corrosion inhibitor and biocides. Biocides shall be alternated periodically to prevent algae from developing immunity. Materials shall not contain any chromates, mercury, tin, arsenic or any toxic substances. Recommended biocides of an oxidizing and a non- oxidizing composition shall be registered with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and EPA registration numbers are to be clearly shown on all product literature and drum labels. September 30, 2003 Water Treatment Permit Issue 15890 -3 z l- z cc w 6 00 N 0 J 1- N u- W gQ 2.) d 1- w z � I- O Z 1- w U O - w I LL W 0 - O Z f MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 WATER TREATMENT CONTROL TESTING EQUIPMENT A. Supply one year's quantity of testing chemicals to properly analyze the treated water. Provide Z separate test kit for each chemical used. m Z re I l l B. Provide Myron L "DS" meter with a range of 0 -5000 micro -ohms per centimeter with = automatic temperature compensation from 50 to 160 degrees F with 9 -volt transistor batteries. co o co w C. Furnish a one -year supply of log sheets on which to record the test results and bound copy of _1 H full test instructions. co u_ uj g a 2.05 CONDENSER WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS m A. Provide a completely automated system for inhibitor feed and blowdown. Inhibitor application I-- 1 shall be meter activated and directly responsive to all variables that affect makeup water E- O quantities. Blowdown shall be conductivity activated, and directly responsive to variations in Z i— concentrations of recirculating water. Provide program timer treatment package for Ill w automatic feed of biocides. Treatment package shall include: timer panel, chemical metering 0 p pump, suction and discharge tubing and stainless steel injection nozzle. 0 v_) OH B. Provide a Carton, or as approved, water meter, equipped with an electric switch adapter to = w output an electric impulse for each preset number of gallons of water passing through the I— F meter. Electric switch shall be rated 10 amps, 115 to 250 volts NC. The impulse shall initiate LL O an automatic reset interval timer, the maximum setting so designed that it cannot exceed the tii z minimum interval between impulses so that signal/operation overlap is avoided. ti co C. Provide an automatic solid -state pulse timer to receive a signal from a water meter and drive z a chemical feed pump for a maximum preset time of 90 seconds. The timer shall have a momentary time activation switch, front panel dial adjustment "A-0-M" (Automatic-Off- Manual) switch. D. Provide chemical feed pumps of suitable materials of construction with adequate capacity to handle chemical inhibitors of variable pH. Pumps shall be positive displacement, diaphragm type, with adjustable volume from 0 -100 percent of capacity while in operation, with a foot valve, strainer and back -check valve assembly with 1/2 inch NPT male connection with suitable capacity and head to feed the chemical inhibitor directly from the shipping drum. Pumps shall be furnished with an anti- siphon valve suitable for 115 volts, single phase, 60- hertz power. E. Provide an electronic conductivity controller equipped with a "flow through" sensing probe and relay for operating a 110 -volt solenoid valve on the blow -down line. The conductivity controller shall feature a large linear reading dial and scale for control point setting and conductivity reading. This unit shall have plus or minus 5 percent accuracy with single scale reading. The flow through the sensing probe shall be equipped with mounting brackets and cleanout brush and shall have 3/8 inch outside diameter copper tube or PVC fittings. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Water Treatment 15890 -4 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Provide blow -down control assembly including a cast iron pipe strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel screen and solenoid valve. Where blow -down line is larger than 1 inch ID, Z furnish a solenoid operated diaphragm valve. Q �z G. Provide a corporation stop injection nozzle assembly, 'A inch CPVC injection nozzle with 3/4 ce inch NPT male connection for injecting chemical treatment into the center of flow in the 6 m condenser water recirculating line. - v U O N H. Provide a flow switch with 3/8 inch tubing connections to function as a fail -safe device, w = overriding inhibitor feed when water recirculation stops. N LL WO I. Provide a Hersey MVR total register water meter for installation on the blow -down line. 2 J. Chemical pump shall be mounted on a floor supported plastic coated steel pump rack with PVC pump shelf. N d = 2.06 CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT FOR CLOSED WATER SYSTEMS z H i— O A. Provide bypass pot feeders with 5 gallon capacity, 3/4 inch brass drain valve furnished with w H slotted lexan inlet and outlet strainers and sight flow indicator and able to withstand the 2 n maximum system working pressure. Wingert, Lakewood, Nalco or approved equal. v o . O - 2.07 CLOSED SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT ~ WW U A. Typical for: LL o 1. Condenser water piping. w N B. Provide bypass feeder: Five gallon capacity. 0 ~ C. Test kits as previously specified: Nitrite. D. Chemicals: PART 3 — EXECUTION 1. Alkaline boilout compound. 2. Nitrite corrosion inhibitor. 3.01 TECHNICAL SERVICE AND CONTROL A. . Water treatment equipment shall be located in mechanical equipment rooms or spaces when feasible to do so. B. Supervise the installation of water treatment equipment. C. Supervise the cleaning of open and closed systems and provide a written certification of cleanliness at completion of cleaning procedure. September 30, 2003 Water Treatment Permit Issue 15890 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Provide a four -hour training program to the Owner's operating personnel instructing them clearly and fully on the installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of the water treatment system. The training course shall be arranged by the mechanical contractor at the startup of the system. E. For a period of one year after completion of system commissioning, provide the services of a fully qualified field engineer for one year at no additional cost to the Owner. This field engineer must be a graduate chemist or chemical engineer and shall be active in the water treatment field in this locale. The water treatment company shall also provide laboratory and technical assistance from a fully qualified engineering staff to support the following tasks. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Chemical Feeders: Piping: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Make monthly technical service visits to the installation to perform field inspections and to make water analysis on site, with sufficient complexity as to evaluate the water systems operations. Discuss findings with the Owner's personnel in writing advising on proper practices, chemical requirements and any corrective actions needed to protect the water systems from scale, corrosion, and fouling. Copies of the field service report must be forwarded each month to the Owner, Architect and Engineer. 2. Make on -site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency outages in order to properly evaluate the success of the water treatment program and to make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections. 1. Chemical pumps shall be mounted at height suitable for pumping chemical treatment solutions directly from supply drums to condenser water system. 2. Top of reservoir tank maximum 4 feet above floor. Provide drip pan of same material as tank with drain under tank and pumps. 1. Proportioning pump piping shall include pressure gauge and relief valve on discharge line. 2. Install by -pass feeders: a. Install feeder in location convenient for filling. 3. Condenser Water Systems: a. Bleedoff: (1) Provide approved bleed manifold with: (a) Solenoid bleed valve (b) Manual by -pass valve (c) Piping to drain (2) Bleedoff rate controllable. b. Provide accessible City water hose connection at system basins for cleaning and flushing. c. Provide sample stream injection assembly: (1) 316 stainless steel injection pipe (2) All necessary compression connectors (3) Safety retaining ring (4) Threadolet Water Treatment 15890 -6 z w rt JU 00 w o Lu J = Ww w d w Z = H0 w ~ w 0 0 N . 0H wW H i L w Z U = 0 1 " z - i MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue (5) Full port gate valve 4. Drain connections at low points of piping. Z C. System connections and feeder locations shall be approved in the field by water treatment '� iii firm before installation of treatment equipment begins. 2 U0 3.03 INITIAL CLEANING OF SYSTEMS O . A. Prior to operation, clean system as specifi w w specified. F. B. Upon completion of cleaning, dose system with chemicals to obtain specified treatment w0 U) conditions. J , co LL D _° END OF SECTION I— w Z� 0. O N ww U - . LL 0" L. Z 0I- Z Water Treatment 15890 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this Section of the Specifications includes all labor, materials, equipment and services to provide a fully operational Building Management System (BMS). The work in general consists of, but is not limited to, the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15900 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) 1. The BMS shall be as specified and consist of a high- speed, peer -to -peer network of DDC controllers and an operator workstation. The operator workstation shall be a personal computer (PC) with color monitor, mouse, keyboard, and printer. The PC shall allow a user to interface with the network via dynamic color graphics. Each HVAC system, lighting system(s), building floor plan, and control device will be depicted by point- and -click graphics. 2. Remote portable operators interface computer units as specified. 3. A dedicated data communications network including electric isolation and protection from electrical interference. 4. A network of stand alone Direct Digital Control (DDC) controllers and field panels, including sensors, and control devices. 5. Complete electrical installation including wiring, raceways and power wiring, except as noted. 6. Software required to produce a complete and operational BMS as specified herein. Include a minimum of two licenses for any proprietary software being provided. 7. Complete operating and maintenance manuals and field training of operators and maintenance personnel. 8. System commissioning and acceptance tests as specified. 9. Full documentation for all software and equipment provided. 10. Project management for managing system installation including, but not limited to: Design, installation, equipment delivery, and coordination with other trades, labor management, commissioning and acceptance testing. 11. Review of fire alarm shop drawing for acceptance by BMS contractor to ensure proper coordination of scope of work, wiring and operating sequences. 12. Autodial modems for communication to the control system and to remote DDC controllers or other work stations. Autodial modem shall have remote paging for pager annunciation of alarms. 13. Miscellaneous control wiring including, but not limited to: a. Wiring of packaged air conditioning unit thermostats. b. Fuel oil control system. c. Closed Circuit Cooling tower panel interface wiring. d. Cooling tower level controls and filter /separator. e. Interlock wiring including summary alarm supervision or stand -alone systems. f. Power wiring from designated Division 16 outlets or circuits to BMS components that require power. Building Management System 15900 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 14. Provide service kit. 15. Provide spare parts as noted in this specification. 16. Warranty of system including all associated materials, labor, and services for period Z of one year from the date of final acceptance. z 17. Web -based operator access software. ui B. Qualification Proposal: — 0 0 1. Submit complete proposal for review prior to final acceptance of Division 15 bid. The N w iu following information shall be submitted: H a. Schematic of BMS configuration indicating DDC panels, locations, N u. capacity and functions. w 0 b. List of Subcontractor and supplier of components with descriptions of 2 their services or components furnished. J c. Location and qualification of primary software programming support staff. u) D d. Specific detailed list of all areas of the proposed BMS that cannot comply = v with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Reference the _ specification paragraph where compliance is not possible. Provide Z '' additional information to evaluate the impact of the deviation. z O e. Provide all required detailed information for a satisfactory evaluation of w w the bid. Failure to submit may result in rejection of proposal. m p 2. Submit written resumes of key personnel proposed on the project. 0 N . 3. The following minimum qualifications are required from the BMS contractor. p N a. Have comprehensive local service and trained support personnel capable w w of giving instruction and provide emergency maintenance on the system, H 2 including all software, firmware and hardware components. u. 0 b. Have access to local supplies of essential expendable and spare parts. Z c. Have a proven record of successful installations and maintenance of V equivalent systems for a minimum period of 5 years. d. Have installed two systems of similar size and BMS architecture. Z e. Provide all engineering, programming and support by a local office located within 75 miles of the project site. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation. C. Section 15708 — Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. D. Section 15771 — Packaged Air - Cooled Rooftop Units. E. Section 15930 - Air Terminal Units. F. Section 15985 - Automatic Control Sequences. G. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. H. Division 16 - Electrical Specifications. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -2 z A. Installation of the following items furnished under this Section but installed under other = I sections. w 1. Automatic control valves. -J 0 2 Automatic control dampers. p 3. Thermowells. co w 4. Liquid flow sensor - transmitters. -I H 5. Liquid flow switches. N w 6. Terminal unit DDC controllers. w 0 7. Packaged air handling equipment DDC controller. 2 1 g J i B. Designated circuits shall be furnished by the Division 16 Contractor from the distribution u. panelboards for BMS power. Power wiring from the designated power outlets or circuits = v shown on Division 16 drawings to BMS components shall be within the work scope of this I- w 1 section. z Z O . C. Supervise and coordinate the installation of equipment, instruments and materials fumished W under this Section but installed under other Divisions of the Specifications. All equipment and 2 p instruments shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published U _ N installation instructions. o I- w 1 1.04 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS H � ? --i SECTION u- ~ O ..z w co H F- O MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.03. PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Closed Circuit Fluid Cooler Controls. B. Variable frequency drives. C. Water treatment controls. D. Condenser water filtration controls. E. Packaged air conditioners. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Configuration: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The Building Management System (BMS) shall perform both monitoring and control of mechanical and electrical equipment for building management, energy conservation, and environmental control. 2. The BMS control philosophy shall be direct digital control and be implemented by a distributed digital system. 3. The personal computer (PC) shall provide for overall building data acquisition and transfer, report generation, historical data storage and retrieval, and operator interface. Building Management System 15900 -3 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. The PC and DDCs shall communicate through dedicated communications network(s). All communications on network shall be by digital signals only. Operator's workstation shall as a minimum support Point -to -Point (PTP) and Ethernet LAN types. Operator's terminal shall support all services necessary to provide the following functional groups: a. Clock Functional Group. b. Event Response Functional Group. c. Time Master Functional Group. d. Device Communications. 5. The Direct Digital Controllers shall perform remote data acquisition and process control. DDC panels shall be locally mounted completely self- contained, field programmable, real -time microprocessor based controllers capable of stand alone operation. 6. Each DDC shall be connected to its particular controlled environment through field input/output (I /O) instrumentation. B. Design and Performance Criteria: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Expansion Capability: a. System Point Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The PC operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system. b. System shall be modular to allow change of function and operation in the field by plug -in modules, equipment and software changes to expand system capacity without interrupting system operation. 2. System Performance: a. The system shall conform to the following minimum performance standard: (1) Graphic Display: The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 10 seconds. (2) Graphic Refresh: The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 8 seconds. (3) Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be less than 2 seconds. Analog objects should start to adjust within 2 seconds. (4) Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high -speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation has been updated within the previous 60 seconds. (5) Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds. (6) Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control. Building Management System 15900 -4 Measured Variable Reported Accuracy Space Temperature ±1 degree F Ducted Air ±1 degree F Outside Air ±2 degrees F Water Temperature ±1 degree F Delta -T ±0.25 degree F Relative Humidity ±2.5 percent RH Water Flow ±5 percent of full scale Airflow (terminal) ±10 percent of full scale (Note 1) Airflow (measuring Stations) ±5 percent of full scale Air Pressure (ducts) ±0.1 inches water gauge Air Pressure (space) ±0.01 inches water gauge Water Pressure ±2 percent of full scale (Note 2) Note 1:10 -100 percent of scale Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -5 September 30, 2003 (7) Table 1: BMS System Performance Reporting Accuracy UNISYS - Tukwila Performance: Programmable controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency of at least once per second. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency. Multiple Alarm Annunciations: All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other. Reporting Accuracy: The system shall report all values with an end - to -end accuracy as listed or better than those listed in Table 1. Stability of Control: Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point within the tolerances listed in Table 2 below. Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium Duct Air Pressure ±0.2 inches water gauge 0 -6 inches water gauge Space Differential Air Pressure ±0.01 inches water gauge -0.1 to 0.1 inches water gauge Airflow ±10 percent of full scale Space Temperature ±1.0 degrees F Duct Temperature ±2.0 degrees F Fluid Pressure ±1.5 psi 1 -150 psi ±1.0 inches water gauge 0 -50 inches water gauge differential MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table 2: BMS System Control Stability and Accuracy UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Environmental Conditions: (1) The DDCs, Field Equipment Panels, and other equipment shall operate under continuous ambient environmental conditions of 35 degrees to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 percent to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing as a minimum. Sensors and control elements shall operate under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered for the installed location. (2) Other e quipment, s uch a s v ideo s creen t erminals and printers, shall, unless designated otherwise, operate properly under continuous ambient environmental conditions of 50 degrees to 104 degrees F and a relative humidity of 20 percent to 80 percent. c. Materials and Equipment: (1) Where multiple units of the same type are required, the units shall be products of a single manufacturer, however, the component parts of the system need not be the products of a .single manufacturer. The components shall not require customizing other than setting jumpers and switches and adding firmware. Each major component of equipment shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, address, model and serial number. (2) All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. d. Total system shall be immune to internal and external generated sources of electrical noise. Building Management System 15900 -6 z w 6 0 N co J = H w J u. ¢ w z1.- F- O z F— w Lu 0 52 off w W 0 u' O W z O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: Indicate at the beginning of each submittal known substitutions and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. Refer to Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Product Data: Provide technical bulletins and catalog data for all equipment and system components. Clearly identify, by use of symbol or tag number, the service of each item. All irrelevant information shall be marked out leaving only pertinent data. C. Shop Drawings: D. Programming: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Shop drawing submittals shall include sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents. Submissions of drawings, brochures, bulletins, catalog data, and narrative descriptions shall include as a minimum: a. Symbol and abbreviation lists. b. System block diagram showing quantity and location of PC, operator console equipment, DDCs, Field Equipment Panels and Major System Components. c. Control diagrams for all systems controlled. Controls shall be shown on system flow diagrams. d. Interfaces (software and hardware) with equipment provided in other sections of specifications. • e. Narrative description of operation for each system, enumerating and describing the function of each component. include alarm and emergency sequences, and equipment interlocks. f. Description of manual override capabilities. g. Complete input and output point schedule. Identify point function, type and location. h. Spare capacity provisions. Detailed bill of materials. j. Valve and Damper Schedule: Provide identification numbers, location, system, dimensions and performance data. k. Device mounting details: Include as a minimum: (1) Sensing elements in ducts or casings. (2) Sensing elements in piping. 2. Complete full size drawings, 11 inch by 17 -inch minimum using AutoCAD 2000 Software or above. 1. Point identification code. 2. System advisory messages, printouts, logging formats. 3. Drawings of system graphics showing monitored points. 4. Software flow charts for application and DDC programs. 5. Graphic User Interface program, include commands, alarm annunciation, logs and programming capabilities. 6. Description of system operation under failure conditions. Building Management System 15900 -7 z w re 6U 0 0 co w J = w 0 u_Q CO _° w z = ZI- w w Off CA w w O ui O 1 " z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Samples: 1. Thermostat and temperature sensor covers. Z 2. All devices mounted on finished surfaces or exposed. H Z �w F. Quality Control Submittals: QQ U 5 J 1. UL, FM listing compliance certificates. U p 2. Final calibration, commissioning and testing reports. w w J H 1.07 OWNER'S MANUALS N WO W A. General: 2 J 1. Submit draft copy of Owner's manuals for review. After review by authorized N d representative, the Contractor shall incorporate review comments and submit 6 final Z W copies. I- U- 2. Update manuals with modifications made to system during guarantee period. z F' Provide replacement pages or supplements in quantity stated above. Z O- 3. Assemble Owner's manuals into multi - volume sets as necessary and required by the uJ ul Owner. D p 4. Protect each volume with a heavy duty vinyl plastic binder. Volumes to have plastic 0 52 . printed dividers between major sections and have oversized binders to c '— accommodate up to % inch thick set of additional information. W W 5. Each binder shall show the project name and volume title on front cover and spine. H 2 6. On the first page of each manual identify with project name, manual title, Owner's LL ~ O name, Engineer's name, Contractor's name, address and service phone number, Ili z and person who prepared manual. Provide a detailed table of contents for each V D volume of the manuals. F- H 7. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be z Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. B. Operating manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day -to -day operation of the system. As a minimum include the following: 1. Control flow diagram. 2. Sequence of operation for automatic and manual operating modes. The sequences shall cross reference the system point names. 3. Description of manual overrides operation of control points. 4. System manufacturer's complete operating manuals. 5. Troubleshooting sequence, flow diagram and procedures. 6. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. C. Provide maintenance manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day -to -day maintenance and major system repairs. As a minimum include the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Complete as -built installation drawings for each system including locations on plans of all control devices drawn to scale. As -built drawings shall be submitted in AutoCAD format. Building Management System 15900 -8 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Provide Programming Manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of system programming. As a minimum include the following: 1. Complete programming manuals, and reference guides. 2. Details of any special software packages and compilers supplied with system. 3. Information required for independent programming of system. 4. Documentation on application and DDC programs: Flow charts, equations, and parameters. 5. Point schedule; include all points, real and virtual. 6. Software troubleshooting procedures. 7. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. 2. Overall system electrical power supply scheme indicating source of electrical power for each system component. 3. Indicate which components are on emergency power and indicate all battery backup provisions. 4. Overall system shielding and grounding scheme indicating all major components and ground paths. 5. Photographs and drawings showing installation details and locations of equipment. 6. Charts showing normal operating conditions at significant points such as electrical test points. 7. Routine preventative maintenance procedures, corrective diagnostic troubleshooting procedures, and calibration procedures. 8. Parts lists with manufacturer's catalog numbers and ordering information. 9. Lists of ordinary and special tools, operating materials, supplies and test equipment recommended for operation and servicing. 10. Manufacturer's operating set up, maintenance and catalog literature for each piece of equipment. 11. Recommended spare parts. 12. Field test reports. 13. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall provide an experienced full -time Project Manager for this work, responsible for direct supervision of installation and startup of the system. B. Comply with all current governing codes, ordinances and regulations, as well as with requirements of NFPA, UL and all other applicable codes. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.09 MAINTENANCE Z A. Submit an alternate price to perform complete preventative and emergency maintenance I of the BMS for a period of one (1) year in accordance with the Contractor's recommended w standards and schedule. This price shall be itemized to show material costs and labor 5 costs. This price shall be based upon work being executed during normal working hours - 0 but shall include separate emergency callout provisions. Prices submitted should be N p based upon current price lists and labor rates, details of which shall be included with the u) w bid and should be broken out into three categories. -I H Nu_ 1. Computer hardware and associated equipment. w 0 2. Field equipment including DDCs, sensors and final control elements. 2 3. Software and programming. J u. ? u) B. The preventative maintenance contract may be renewed annually, at the option of the z w Owner, up to a total term of 10 years. The annual price shall be negotiated 3 months in Z x advance of annual contract expiry and shall be at the mutual agreement of both parties. f- O Variation in annual prices shall reflect only changes in material and labor costs as Z H substantiated by Federal Guideline Consumer Price Indexes. W j m 0 1.10 WARRANTY 0 tA . OH A. Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for = W a period of 12 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during I- the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction �- p in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty W Z service within 24 hours during normal business hours. 0 O B. All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the Owner has received beneficial use due to an early system startup. If the work specified is split into multi -phase contract, then each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period. C. At the end of the final startup, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Architect and Owner the date of acceptance shall be the start of pre- warranty endurance test. D. Operator workstation software, project - specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware updates which resolve known software deficiencies as identified by the Contractor shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period. E. After t he a bove a cceptance t ests a re c omplete a nd t he s ystem i s d emonstrated to be functioning as specified, a thirty -day endurance test period shall begin. If the system functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test period the system fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight hours, the Owner may request that the endurance tests be repeated after problems have been corrected. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -10 z 1 .J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS Z 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF DDC SYSTEM , 1 w e: A. Alerton Technologies. 6 g i0 B. Siemens Building Technologies. N o u) w w = C. Automated Logic. - CO 1 D. Invensys. w O 2.02 CENTRAL CONSOLE u.. ?. A. Provide a central operator's console to include as a minimum: H w Z 1.- 1. Personal computer. F- O 2. Color graphics display terminal. w F" 3. Printer (alarm and logging). 2 j U� B. Assemble console equipment in a console configuration that allows operator access to all 0 H console equipment from one position. w w 2.03 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR'S WORK STATION (PC) H � H O A. The computer shall be an IBM compatible U.S. EPA certified Energy Star PC with the ul D H H: O z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue following provided: 1. Input/output ports and expansion slots: Five PCI Slots, one 4X AGP Slot, one parallel port, two USB -2 ports, two serial ports, one video port, audio in and out, microphone in, one keyboard and one mouse port. 2. Intel Pentium — Intel Pentium® 4, 2.0 GHZ microprocessor. 3. 256MB PC600 RDRAM® of random access memory. 4. 3 inch, 1.44 megabyte diskette drives with storage bay space for front accessible removable CD /DVD drive. 5. Hard disk drive and tape backup: a. 40GB ATA- 66/100 IDE (7200 rpm) hard drive. b. 20GB, SCSI, Travan -5 tape back up. Provide two Travan tapes. 6. Logitech® First Mouse"' with 2 buttons and scroll wheel. 7. SVGA flicker -free 21 inch color display monitor with Energy Star rating, digital controls: a. Diagonal viewable area: 20 inches minimum. b. Resolution: 2048 x 1536 / 75 Hz (multiscan). c. PHILIPS 21 IN /20V 24MM Monitor or approved equal. 8. Graphics card: 64MB SDRAM NVIDIA® Quadro2 Pro® or approved equal 9. lomega Zip Drive 250 MB, provide two spare disks. Building Management System 15900 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 10. 8X /4X /32X IDE CD Read -Write CD /DVD Drive. 11. Keyboard: 101 -key typewriter -like keyboard with special function keys "F1" through Z "F12" and numeric keyboard. Keys to have tactile feedback. Include rubber wrist Q • rest pad. Microsoft or equal. 12. Color ink jet printer: 2800 x 700 dpi black and white resolution, 5 pages per minute w with a 150 sheets of 11 x 17 sheet feeder, and printer cable. All change -of -state D reporting, system Togs, information summaries, system malfunctions and alarms -J 0 shall be printed at this terminal. HP 1220 C /PS series or approved equal w p 13. Provide an internal V.90 56,600 baud fax -modem with software for remote co w communications. _... _1 H 14. Sound card /speakers: SoundBlaster Live! Value audio card, Harmon /Kardon u) u- Speakers. _ w O . 15. Software: Microsoft® Office 2000 Small Business Edition, Windows 2000®CD with 2 latest service pack. --., g 16. PC work station shall be Dell Precision ® WorkStation or Equal. co d B. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): Provide a portable UPS capable of maintaining Z = operation of the PC and all. peripherals for 30 minutes in the event of a failure of the normal power supply. UPS shall provide instantaneous backup power during blackouts and z O g brownouts, lightning and surge protection tested to UL 1449, and network -grade line conditioning and two EMI /RFI filters. -• p U N 2.04 LOCAL OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (LOT) p H ww A. Provide portable terminal(s) to allow local programming, control and monitoring at each DDC H H panel. - L O . B. Provide one (1) portable LOT which can - be connected to any DDC panel. - U = . F-� C. The portable LOT shall meet the following requirements: z 1. Portable Operator's Terminal. Furnish a LOT that shall be capable of accessing all system data. Also provide a network connection tool that shall allow technician to connect a laptop PC to any MS/TP network or at any MS/TP device and view and modify all information throughout the entire network. Laptop PC connection to tool shall be via Ethernet or PTP. The Portable Operator's Terminal shall be an IBM compatible notebook -style PC including all software and hardware required. The PC shall contain at minimum: a. Pentium® 4 Processor, 1.6 GHz with 13.3" TFT XGA Display. b. 256 MB of RAM. c. 30.0 GB hard drive d. Modem and NIC card: Ethernet 10/100 plus Modem 56. e. 1.44- megabyte floppy disk drive and CD -RW drive. f. Touch -pad or other internal pointing device. g. Two USB -2 ports, one serial port. h. Audio in and out. i. Dell Latitude or equal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -12 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 DIRECT DIGITAL BUILDING CONTROLLER A. DDC Building Controllers shall be completely self - contained, field programmable, real time 32 -bit microprocessor based controllers. z �w B. DDC application programs shall be resident in the DDC. Once downloaded, a DDC shall not 6 v require further communication with the CPU except for data base changes, operator v O commands, and requests from the CPU for DDC data. N W J = C. Provide current and voltage limiting devices at communications network cable connection. _i l- w0 D. Provide power supplies with transient power line surge protection. E. Provide floor mounted or wall mounted cabinet with full front - hinged door, locking handle with u j master key and non -glare baked enamel finish. Each DDC shall contain a clear plastic to a encased control diagram showing associated controls. H w F. Provide the manufacturer's standard enclosure except if location requires additional i— O protection due to potential vandalism, environmental conditions or any other reason. Take all w i— uj necessary precautions to protect the DDC and related components, including: ? m 0 0 F- wW I� u- w Z U 2 0 I ' Z 1. Using suitable NEMA enclosure. 2. Heavy -duty key locks. G. Capabilities: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Stand -Alone Capability: If PC or communications network malfunctions, each DDC shall continue to control, monitor and have the ability to be accessed and programmed via the LOT. 2. Degraded Mode: If failure of a sensor or system component causes information critical to a DDCs program to be lost, default values or subroutines shall automatically be used to approximate critical information to ensure continued control. 3. Networking: Each DDC shall be capable of sharing point information with other DDCs on the same data network. 4. Real time operating system shall be capable of time -of -day scheduling and other time based functions. 5. Unauthorized access to hardware or software programs shall be accomplished by a password or cabinet lock. In the locked or unauthorized position, the operating characteristics of the DDC cannot be changed, although inputs, outputs and set point values can be displayed. In the unlocked or authorized position, the ability to change the DDC program shall be unhindered. 6. Alarm processing shall include: change of state, flow proof, high and low analog limits, and setpoint deviation. Provide at least two levels of alarm priority. 7. The DDC programming language shall be designed for Building Automation and Control applications and shall be capable of performing the following control algorithms: Floating; Proportional (P) direct and reverse acting; Proportional plus Integral (PI); Proportional Integral plus Derivative (PID); Anti - integral wind up; Cascade; Programmed interlock logic; Deadband switching and control; Incremental control. Building Management System 15900 -13 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 8. Building controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3 -way router. Controller shall route messages between the high -speed LAN (Ethernet 10 /100MHz), at least 4 master slave token passing (MS/TP) LANs, a point -to -point z (PTP — RS -232) connection and an on -board modem. Z f a. Each MS/TP LAN shall be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps. u b. The RJ -45 Ethernet connection shall accept either 10Base -T or 100Base- TX over twisted pair cable (UTP). — vO c. The direct access port shall be a female DB -9 connector supporting c p temporary PTP connection of a portable operator terminal at 9.6 to 115.2 co w Kbps over RS -232 null modem cable. Ill H CO u_ H. DDC Configuration: w 0 1. Points used in the same control loop or algorithm shall be connected to the same g Q DDC. N O 2. Spare Capacity: Allow for 10 percent increase of each point type per DDC location, = w or a minimum of two of each point type per DDC location whichever is greater. i Addition of points shall require only programming, control devices and wiring. ? '" • 3. Programming shall be object- oriented using control function blocks, supporting DDC Z 0 0 functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values. All flowcharts shall be L generated and automatically downloaded to controller. Programming tool shall be , ._ D CI resident on workstation and the same tool used for all controllers. 8 4 . Building controller shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the p ~ system based on information from any objects in the system regardless if the object w W is directly monitored by the controller or by another controller. The program that H U implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. Any ~O systems utilizing factory pre - programmed global strategies that cannot be modified z by field personnel on -site or downloaded via remote communications are not U w acceptable. Changing global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable. o H 2.06 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (CAC) A. General. Provide an adequate number of Custom Application Controllers to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 of this section on system performance. Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The Custom Application Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 2. Data shall be shared between networked Custom Application Controllers. 3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communication signals to allow other distributed controllers to share real and virtual object/point information, and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real -time clock: 5. The Custom Application Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall operate under a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification to the BMS network. Building Management System 15900 -14 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Environment: z 1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Z F' 2 Controllers used outdoors and /or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within 1- w re waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 degrees F to 150 6 D degrees F. .1 3. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, co p and shall be rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F. w w J C. Keypad: A local keypad and display shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. A In V_ system security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and w 0 display. J D. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring N d connections shall be made to field- removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination = w card connected by a ribbon cable. r 2 ? F- E. Memory: The Custom Application Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming Z 0 0 information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. Ui la D CI F. Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90 percent to 110 percent 0 N of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent nominal 0'- voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hertz and from = w keyed radios up to 5 watts at 3 feet. i•-• � ? ur O 2.07 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS tt . z A. General: Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are microprocessor -based DDC controllers, F- H which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of Z equipment. ASCs shall be user - programmable, and customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate with other controllers on the internetwork. B. Each ASC shall be capable of standalone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. C. Each ASC shall contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. D. Communication: 1. The controller must reside on a network using the MS/TP Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. 2. Each controller shall have compatible connection for a LOT or a portable operator's tool. This connection shall be extended to a space temperature sensor port where shown. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -15 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Environment: 1. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Z 2. Controllers used outdoors and /or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within 1 H waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 degrees F to 150 d rL egrees F. 3. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F. N o Co w F. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring w _ c onnections shall be made to field- removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination uo card connected by a ribbon cable. uj 0 G. Memory: The Application Specific Controller shall use non - volatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss. co =0 H. Immunity to Power and Noise: Controllers shall be able to operate at 90 percent to 110 F _ percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent . ? f' Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 -120 Hertz and from keyed radios up z O to5wattsat3ft. �? D CI I. Transformer: Power supply for the ASC shall be rated at minimum of 125 percent of ASC 8 cn power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. p H w J. Hardwired inputs and outputs shall tie into the system through building, custom application, or H 0 application specific controllers. L!- p .z K. The ASC shall provide the following information either on the PC or the LOT unit. Cu U N H= O~ 1. Space temperature /humidity. 2. Space temperature set point(s) for heating and cooling. 3. Minimum primary air set point. 4. Maximum primary air set point. 5. Valve and damper positions in percent open. 6. Air volume in cubic feet per minute. 7. Fan status for fan powered terminal unit (if applicable). 8. Control parameters (deadbands, PID gains, etc.). 2.08 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE A. All input points and output points shall be protected such that short circuiting of the point to itself or to another point, or to ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. Inputs and outputs shall be arranged on interchangeable modules or circuit boards to allow the replacement of a damaged module or board without replacing the entire controller. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -16 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila B. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of On /Off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 milliamp to be compatible with commonly available control devices, and shall be protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied. C. Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: This type of object shall conform to all the requirements of binary input objects, and also accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. D. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low- voltage (0 to 10 volts DC), current (4 to 20 milliamps), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field- configurable to commonly available sensing devices. E. Binary outputs shall provide for On /Off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on Building and Custom Application Controllers shall have three - position (On /Off/Auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation. F. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 volts DC or a 4 to 20 milliamp signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on Building or Custom Application Controllers shall have status lights and a two- position (AUTO /MANUAL) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year. G. Tri -State Outputs: Provide tri -state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs) for control of three -point floating type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three -point floating devices shall be limited to zone control and terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct mounted heating coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.). Control algorithms shall run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking. H. Input/Output points shall be universal type, i.e., controller input or output may be designated (in software) as either a binary or analog type point with appropriate properties. Application Specific Controllers are exempted from this requirement. 2.09 POWER SUPPLIES A. Control transformers shall be UL fisted. Furnish Class 2 current - limiting type, or furnish over - current protection in both primary and secondary circuits f or C lass 2 s ervice p er N EC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. B. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full -wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 millivolt maximum peak -to -peak. Regulation shall be 1.0 percent line and Toad combined, with 100 microsecond response time for 50 percent Toad changes. Unit shall have built -in over - voltage and over - current protection, and shall be able to withstand a 150 percent current overload for at least 3 seconds without trip - out or failure. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -17 z i 1- I-z re W U cn o CO ILI J - N u_ w QQ � d I W Z � ZF- LU U� 0 o ►- wW 9 .. W O ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Unit shall operate between 0 and 50 degrees C. EM /RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B, and MIL -STD 810C for shock and vibration. 2.10 SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES A. General: 1. Provide sensors and control devices, as specified, indicated on mechanical plans, control f low d iagrams a nd a s required t o m eet s pecified p erformance. W here performance specifications exceed capabilities of hardware specified, performance governs. The installation of such devices, if not specifically indicated, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Equip analog sensors with industry standard 4 to 20 milliamp transmitters with built - in circuit protection against reverse polarity and supply voltage transients. The transmitters shall be matched to the sensing element and compatible with the DDC Building Management System. 3. All sensor /transmitters assemblies shall be factory calibrated. 4. All sensor wiring, analog or digital, input or output shall be capable of sharing single conduit runs without affecting signal performance. All signal wiring shall also be capable of sharing single conduit runs with switched AC of 120 or 277 volts. 5. The sensor range and type shall be suitable to the application. 6. Minimum contact rating of relays and switches shall be 10 amperes, 110 volts resistive. 7. Devices UL shall be listed for electrical safety where applicable. 8. All components of sensors exposed to process shall be rated to withstand 150 percent of maximum process temperature and pressure. B. Thermowells: Provide type 316 stainless steel thermowells for each immersion type temperature sensor and switch. Thermowells shall have extension for pipe insulation and threaded connection to pipe. Threaded connection shall be a minimum of 3 /. inch nominal pipe thread. Maximum insertion length shall be 6 inch or 75 percent of the pipe diameter whichever is smaller. C. Temperature Sensors: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Temperature sensor assemblies shall consist of a 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD sensor and a solid state, 2 -wire, 4 to 20 milliamp transmitter protected in a housing suitable for the environment in which it is installed. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler Model T4, W eiss M odel EN or a cceptable equivalent. 3. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or minus 1.0 degree F except for c hilled w ater temperature applications the accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5 degree F. 4. Sensors for mixed air and coil discharge applications and for fan discharge applications in systems over 5,000 cubic feet per minute shall be averaging type sensors. Probe lengths shall be minimum one linear foot per four square feet of duct or coil area or equal to duct, plenum or AHU casing width where installed, whichever is longer. 5. Outside air sensors shall be mounted on a northern exposure and mounted within a ventilated enclosure. Building Management System 15900 -18 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Pressure Transmitter Assembly — Air Streams: 1. The assembly shall consist of a pressure sensor and a solid - state, 2 -wire, 4 to 20 milliamp transmitter contained in a housing suitable for duct mounting. 2. The assembly shall be factory calibrated and field installed to an accuracy of plus or minus 0.05 inches water gauge over a range of 0 to 4 inches water gauge. 3. Probe: 8 -inch pitot tube, brass. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brandt, Setra, Air Monitor. E. Differential Pressure Transmitter Assembly — Water: 1. Assembly shall consist of a differential pressure sensor and an electronic 2 -wire, 4 to 20 milliamp transmitter assembly enclosed in a gasketed, dust and watertight case. All body cavities open to the process fluid shall be provided with drain ports at the cavity bottom and vent ports at the top of the cavity. Both drain and vent ports shall be minimum 1 /4 inch nominal pipe thread. 2. The transmitter shall be 24 volt DC powered and capable of sustaining up to 50 psig differential pressures in either direction, up to the body rating without damage of the instrument, Toss of accuracy, or zero shift. Minimum pressure rating: 200 psig. 3. The transmitter shall be fully compensated for both process and ambient temperature v ariations. T he t ransmitter s hall b e f urnished c omplete w ith input gauges and factory mounted 3 -valve manifold. 4. Accuracy: plus or minus 1 percent of full range. 5. Repeatability: 0.5 percent. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mamac PR -282 or acceptable equivalent. F. Watt Transducer: 1. The assembly shall consist of the hardware necessary to generate a pulsed signal indicating the total power being measured by the kilowatt-hour meter provided by others. 2. If existing meter cannot be modified to provide a pulsed output, provide a watt transducer. 3. Watt transducer shall consist of current and voltage transducers and 4 to 20 milliamp transmitters. The assembly shall have output open and short circuit protection. Total accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent of span. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Scientific Columbus, Ohio Semitronics. G. Current Sensing Switches: 1. Current switches shall produce a digital signal corresponding to the current draw of the device being monitored, and such signal shall be scaled in amperes. Current switches shall incorporate an automatic adjustment feature and be sized such that the rated current of the device to be monitored is between 20 percent and 80 percent of the maximum current transducer. Current measurement precision shall be ± 0.1 amp, and a current accuracy shall be ± 2 percent of range. Veris or equal. 2. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit issue 15900 -19 z • w • 2 O 0 N U) ILI U) LL w 0 g_ cn I=- _ z F. Z1- U • � O N W 1- u_ U 17- z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Differential Pressure Switch — Liquid: I. Differential Pressure Switch — Air: K. • Damper End Switch: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide completely enclosed contact mechanism. 2. Switch differential setpoint shall be adjustable without removing the cover. 1 ►= 3. Maximum differential pressure of 200 psig. w 4. Maximum low side pressure of 180 psig. 5. Bellows shall be stainless steel. 0 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: JCI /Penn Model P74, Barksdale EPDI or acceptable v 0 equal. w = J i_ w 1. Provide diaphragm operator to actuate a single -pole double -throw snap- acting 2 switch. Operating point shall be adjustable. Range shall suit application. 5 2. .High and low sensing ports shall be 1/8 inch nominal pipe thread connected to angle N D type tips designed to sense pressure. = Cy 3. Switches used for fan shutdown shall be manual reset type. 1 ' _ 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cleveland Controls Model AFS 3152 or acceptable z ~ equal. z O I- . Differential Pressure Switch — Filters — Indicating: j o _ U 1. Differential pressure switch shall incorporate gauge and switch setpoint indicators for 0 ' -, continuous indication of applied pressure and switch settings. Operating point shall w w ' be adjustable. Range shall suit application. H U . 2. High and low sensing ports shall be 1/8 inch nominal pipe thread connected to angle u•. ~O type tips designed to sense pressure. z 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dwyer Series 3000 or acceptable equal. v N 0 1— O z 1. Provide oil- tight, roller type, single pole double throw snap- acting switch. Mechanism to provide ample overtravel to prevent stress on damper and control equipment. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Furnas Electric, Allen Bradley, Telemechanique. Low Limit Thermostat: Shall have a 20 -foot flexible vapor charged element. When temperature sensed by any 12 inch segment of the element falls below setpoint (usually 35 degrees F), thermostat shall operate double -pole double -throw manual reset contacts. Building Management System 15900 -20 _J B. Valves 2 inch and smaller shall have bronze bodies with screwed ends. Valves 2Y2 inch and larger shall have iron bodies with flanged ends. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.11 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Z A. Provide automatic dampers as indicated on Drawings as either automatic dampers or 1 H automatic louver dampers. w re B. Dampers shall be low leakage type, with published AMCA certified leakage data. Leakage through a 48 inch by 48 inch damper at 4 inches water gauge pressure difference shall be N p less than 6.2 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper. w = J H C. Damper blades and frames shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum, reinforced for co u- rigidity. Blades shall be of airfoil design with full - length edge seals with inflatable pockets to ID 0 enable air pressure from either direction to assist in blade seal off. Edge seals shall be mechanically locked to the blades locked without the use of cement but easily replaceable in g Q the field. Edge seal material shall meet all local codes and requirements of city officials. N D Bearings shall be non - corrosive and axles shall provide positive locking connection to blades = d and linkage. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings. Jamb seals I " _ shall be aluminum, flexible compression type. z HO D. Dampers used for modulating control application shall be of opposed blade configuration and al uj dampers used for open /closed applications shall be parallel blade type. D p U N E. Dampers shall have a maximum blade length of 48 inches and a maximum blade width of 8 c ' inches. The maximum height of each damper section shall be 72 inch. Where greater length w w or height is required, provide an assembly of multiple damper sections. H 0 L I ~ O ' F. Install damper actuators of sufficient quantity and size to limit leakage to specified rate. w Z Damper assemblies consisting of multiple damper sections shall be provided with a minimum U co of one damper actuator per section or be connected with an approved jack- shafting H arrangement. Z G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ruskin, Pottorff, Air Balance, Johnson Controls. 2.12 AUTOMATIC VALVES A. Automatic control valves shall be globe type with modulating plug, throttling guides, replaceable seats and discs, and stainless steel stems. C. Valve body rating shall be equal or greater than the piping in which it is installed and the valve shall be rated for operation against the minimum system differential pressure. Rangeability shall be at least 40 to 1 or as required to provide proper control. Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 percent for single seated valves and 1 percent for double- seated valves. Building Management System 15900 -21 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Characteristics: z 2. Isolation Service: Linear flow characteristics. Single or double seated. 1- w E. Valve Action: JU 0 1. Cooling valves normally closed. co 0 2. Or as noted or specified. w H u) w F. Size valves to meet the coil Toads as specified and as follows: w O 2 1. 2- Position Valves: Line size unless noted. " "' g 5 2. Water Service: Maximum pressure drop shall be equal to the pressure drop of the u- associated coil or exchanger, or 5 pounds per square inch whichever is greater. co Car 3. Cooling Tower Bypass Valves: Sized according to pressure available. Ds , w 4. Chilled Water Service: Where load exceeds capacity of 4 -inch control valve provide z H two valves piped in parallel and operating in sequence. The larger valve shall have a 1— 0 coefficient of flow (Cv) that is between 2 and 3 times larger than the smaller valve. w w 2.13 AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC DAMPERNALVE ACTUATORS V =O ON o1.- w w 1 - H 1. Chilled Water Service: Equal percentage flow characteristics, single seated type. A. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. B. Where shown, for power - failure /safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring- return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. C. All rotary spring- return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise and counter - clockwise spring- return operation. Linear actuators shall spring- return to the retracted position. D. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 volts DC or 0 to 20 milliamp control signal and provide a 2 to 10 volts DC or 4 to 20 milliamp operating range. E. All 24 volt ACNDC actuators shall operate on NEC Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10 volt -amps for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 volts AC or 230 volts AC shall not require more than 11 volt -amps. F. All non - spring- return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring- return actuators with more than 60 inch - pounds torque capacities shall have a manual crank for this purpose. G. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built -in switch to allow the reversing of direction of rotation. H. Actuators shall be provided with a raceway fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre -wired to eliminate the necessity of opening t he a ctuator h ousing t o m ake electrical connections. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -22 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila I. Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 Listed and CSA Class 4813 02 Certified as meeting Z J. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full- stroke cycles at the actuator's rated CC torque. 6 v K. Actuators shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft and valve 0) 0 position. The actuator shall be capable of operating the valve from the fully closed to the fully w w open position and vice versa in Tess than 60 seconds. --1 H CO u. w L. Acceptable Manufacturers: Siemens, Belimo Aircontrol. 2 2.14. BUTTERFLY VALVES 0 d A. Butterfly valves are permitted for use for two- position operation on low temperature water H w applications only. Z H B. All butterfly valves shall be of the full lug body style with Tugs drilled and tapped and have drip w O tight shutoff capabilities in either direction up to and including maximum system working 2 j pressure. Butterfly valves shall be capable of closing tight after long periods of inactivity. 0 0 O s 0H C. All valves shall be suitable for use with ANSI Standards flanges. Bodies shall be semi -steel w w H U D . Valves shall provide tight shutoff up to the full valve rating on dead end or isolation service u- z co i= E. All valves shall be furnished with self - lubricated bronze bearings. Shafts seals shall be 0 provided to prevent leakage and to protect bearings from internal or external corrosion. Z F. Seats shall be of the reinforced resilient type (or retained seat on high performance valves) and shall also act as a body liner to prevent flow from contracting the body casting. Resilient seats shall have flange sealing lips to provide a positive seal without use of flange gaskets. G. Seats shall be Nordel suitable for use with HVAC water to 250 degrees F. Shafts shall be one piece, machined from type 416 stainless steel, finish ground and polished to minimize bearing and shafts seal wear. Shafts of 8 inch and larger valves shall have a non - adjustable thrust collar. H. Discs shall be semi -steel with welded nickel edge. The disc -to -shaft connections shall be type 316 stainless steel. Pins, shaft and disc of all valves shall be individually machined and completely interchangeable. Valves shall be line size unless otherwise noted on Drawings. J. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jamesbury, Keystone, Victaulic Series 300. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue correct safety requirements and recognized industry standards. or cast iron. without the use of downstream flanges. Building Management System 15900 -23 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.15 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM Z A. Optical Cable: Optical cables shall be duplex 900 millimeter tight -buffer construction H w designed for intra - building environments. The sheath shall be UL Listed OFNP in accordance with NEC Article 770. The optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI, 0 ANSI X3T9.5 PMD for 62.5/125 millimeter. _1 U co o to tu J = shall have ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies. �;., 1- CO u- 2.16 SERVICE KIT W O A. Provide three service kits for use by Owner in testing and making minor service adjustments � Q to the system. Include as a minimum: , _co O I- w . Z I- O ZI- B. Connectors: All optical fibers shall be field- terminated with ST type connectors. Connectors 2.17 SOFTWARE A. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. All specialized nonstandard tools and adapters and fittings required for operating, maintaining, testing and adjustment of the system. 2. Keys for thermostats and humidity control, two per kit. 3. Lubricant required for automatic valves and automatic dampers, one year supply. w U • � O s H W - U 1. Fully implement, optimize, and commission all software described under this - Z paragraph and required for a complete operable system. w 2. Although "Program" implies software, hardware solutions may be acceptable after v = . review and approval of authorized representative. Such differences shall be ~O'- considered deviations and presented as such. Z 3. Software programs are described as to general intent. It is recognized that BMS contractors' software differ; however, the programs that are provided shall incorporate the features described. 4. Each point shall be identified in software with a unique point name of not less than 8 alphanumeric characters. Point names shall be logically and consistently coded to allow identification of the point location (e.g., Building, MER), associated HVAC system (e.g., AHU -1, Chiller -2), and point function (e.g., supply temp, freezestat) as a minimum. General: Executive Software: 1. The executive software shall include all programs required for systems, applications, peripheral devices and communications networks. 2. Restrict user software modifications to insure system security. User access to the executive software shall be provided as follows: a. Ability to switch failing output devices to another device without loss of data or otherwise handle device failures (e.g., jammed printers). b. Ability to modify the priorities and scheduling of application programs. c. Ability to add or delete peripheral devices. Building Management System 15900 -24 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Provide diagnostic programs to report and display DDC system failures at the Operator's console both on video display and printer. Provide on -line error detection and messages for the discs, power supplies, CPUs, communications boards, and peripherals. Upon failure of a video display system, the system shall be operable using the printers and keyboard. 4. Provide a Software Time Clock which shall display date, time information where required to resolution of one second and otherwise supply data to programs at resolution of 0.1 seconds; display real time clock in 12 hours or 24 hours format and date. Time and date shall be resettable by mouse or keyboard entry. 5. Peripheral Equipment Selection: a. Provide peripheral equipment selection control to apportion data to peripheral console as required (e.g., alarms to alarm printer). b. Apportionment of data and control functions shall be a programmable function by an authorized operator at any console. Initialization of the apportionment of data shall be according to the description of the Functional Requirements stated under each Console Description. Contractor shall . provide all software and programming time required to initialize the system. Submit initial apportionment for all monitored and control functions for review prior to final programming. c. The graphics display shall allow simultaneous operator interaction and alarm indication in separate on- screen windows. 6. System Access Control: Provide a minimum of three levels of access using selectable passwords to the system software. Each higher level will increase the allowed interaction by the user. Each password must be entered by the operator to access a particular level of system operation. The password shall not be displayed or printed. Each password shall be unique for each operator. 7. The system shall observe the following command priorities (from highest to lowest): a. Smoke Control and Life Safety. b. Manual Operator Command. c. Energy Management. d. Automatic Control. C. Operator Interface Program: 1. Provide Microsoft Windows© compatible software as the operator interface with the BMS for defining and selecting points, parameters, report generation, graphics, time schedules and all functions associated with day -to -day operation of the system. 2. Provide software to notify the operator of the occurrence of an alarm condition. All alarm messages displayed on the video terminal, on the local printer, and on the remote printer shall be in simple English- language format. System shall print and sound an audible alarm at each occurrence. Operator acknowledgement shall silence the audible alarm. System shall print upon return to normal. 3. Report Generation Software shall be provided to present system information in an organized manner: a. System Point Log — A log for each system shall include all points required for operation and monitoring of the system. Do not include points used in intermediate calculations and program logic or points used for system tuning and set up. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -25 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Display for each point: Point Name, Point Description, Current Value, Engineering Units, Alarm Status and Command Priority. c. Application Program Logs — Log for each program shall include current Z • values of all points and parameters used in application program. s d. Summary Logs — Logs shall summarize system status. Include as t minimum: (1) Alarm Summary. _i 0 (2) Run Time Totalization Summary. 0 O (3) Disabled Point Summary. uu w 4. Provide fully implemented interactive graphics with latest available process data fully Ill H i ntegrated with the display. Point values shall be dynamically updated at an operator N u., selectable rate from 5 to 120 seconds. w 0 a. Provide a minimum of 32 different operator selectable colors for the 2 'various system components to facilitate rapid recognition and ease of g J¢ interaction. Colors shall be uniform on all displays, such as all master N m alarms red blinking with reverse field. = d b. Graphics generation and editing shall be via Windows© based mouse- _ I— _ operated interactive software. The graphics program shall be provided Z '' with a library of standard symbols with the capability for use to add z O custom symbols or modify library symbols using Auto Cadd© version UJ al 2000. U p c. Provide graphics for but not limited to the following: (1) Scale floor plans of each level showing status of associated points 0 '— within area including but not limited to: smoke detectors, HVAC w W equipment, controls, sensors. Indicate locations of equipment H v within area such as DDCs, FEPs, MERs, transmitters, actuators, u- ~O sensors, lighting control panels, etc. Z (2) Separate Air and Water Systems Riser Diagrams showing all Cu c systems in Block Diagram Form. System status (on, off, alarm) F = H shall be indicated. Risers shall include common sensing points Z such as outside air and supply and return temperature in main piping systems. (3) Each air and water system. 5. Provide software to output a user programmed message to the printer or video terminal in response to an alarm or change of value of any system point. Message length shall be at least 4 Jines of 80 characters each. 6. All software shall be mouse operated (point and click; drop- and -drag, etc.) with the option of using predefined keyboard commands. Application Software: 1. Time of Day and Event Scheduling: a. Software shall automatically start and stop equipment based on the time of day and day of week, including holidays and the type of event. The scheduled time -of -day program shall operate in conjunction with the Start/Stop Time Optimization program. Building Management System 15900 -26 t MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Schedule assignments shall be for individual points or group of points. For points assigned to one group, assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop command within that group if required. The system shall have the capacity to accommodate a minimum of 500 uniquely defined schedules. Each load group shall be capable of accommodating a minimum of 250 loads. Initialize the system with Owner schedules and load assignments. c. The operator shall be able to define the following information: (1) Time, day, dates. (2) Commands such as on, off, auto, etc. (3) Load or loads assigned to groups. (4) Time delays between successive commands. d. Include provisions for manually overriding each schedule. e. The following reports shall be provided: (1) Report of any and all defined time schedules. (2) Loads assigned to each time schedule. 2. Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO): a. Software shall perform optimized start -up and shutdown of selected equipment. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone conditions by occupancy time. The SSTO program shall also shutdown HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions. Initialize the system with default values used on previous projects of similar construction with similar equipment. b. The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons. It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to all individual systems. c. The SSTO program shall operate on outside weather conditions as well as inside zone conditions, and empirical factors. The empirical factors shall relate to the dynamic responsiveness of particular zones such as heat retention and transfer coefficients. The program shall be fine tuned during the warranty period using empirical data compiled during operation of the building. d. The program shall automatically adjust itself utilizing adaptive control techniques. e. The system operator shall be able to, for each system under control of the SSTO program, establish and modify the following parameters: (1) Occupancy period. (2) Desired occupancy temperature. (3) Heating /cooling transfer coefficients. (4) Heating /cooling retention coefficients. (5) Primary equipment lag time. f. A report shall be provided detailing SSTO parameters such as zone coefficients, zone occupancy time and temperature, activated /inactivated zones, etc. Building Management System 15900 -27 z w re 2 J U 00 co w ILI Wu_ u co O I- w Z �. H Z ~ w U O D- o 1 w w 0 LLO w U) O = ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 3. Demand Limiting: a. Software shall perform electrical demand limiting (EDL). The EDL program shall monitor the rate of electrical power consumption and forecast the total demand during each demand interval using a sliding window approach. b. The program shall automatically shed and restore loads to prevent the electrical demand from exceeding an operator set level. c. Kilowatt rating of each Toad shall be prioritized by the operator to ensure proper number and sequencing of Toads being shed when excessive electrical demand is predicted. For initial scheduling purposes, each load shall be assigned to five priority groups. (1) Priority Group 1, 2 and 3 — Automatically shed as required. (2) Priority Group 4 and 5 — Issue operator advisory to manually shed particular Toad by operator action at console. d. When Toad shed condition exists, program begins searching for Toads in Groups 1 and continues through Group 3 until necessary number of kilowatts have been shed. Loads within each group shall be shed on an operator selectable basis. Load restoration procedure is opposite of load shedding procedure. e. Each load shall be programmed with maximum off time, minimum on time and minimum off time. f. The operator shall be able to define the following information: (1) Load kilowatt and priority. (2) Maximum demand setpoint. g. The following information shall be available in report from: (1) Load data. (2) Maximum demand for a given period (day, week, month, etc.). (3) Current demand and Toads shed. h. When an operator - selectable percentage of maximum target is exceeded alarm shall sound, current demand in kilowatt displayed and printed out with time of occurrence on alarm printer. Degraded Mode: Loss of all or part of data trunk cable shall not cause the shed loads to restart and the electrical load to exceed setpoint. DDCs shall cycle connected loads in a stand -alone mode to eliminate or reduce potential increases in maximum demand level. 4. Automatic Restart: During a power outage the DDC operating programs and database shall be protected against loss of memory with battery backup. If length of the power outage exceeds the battery backup capacity, the programs and database shall be automatically reloaded from disk storage upon power restoration. After power has been restored, the system points shall either be returned to the state they would be in if there were no power outage or remain off as defined by equipment and operational requirements. Points to be restarted shall start over a programmed time schedule to affect soft start. 5. Automatic False Alarm Lockout: When systems are off, certain analog variables may drift past programmed alarm limits. Inhibit analog variable limit alarms until after system is restarted and stabilized. Building Management System 15900 -28 z ▪ z • w O 0 co uj J !LL w u.Q = a1 I— al Z � I— 0 Z I— w w 0 0 52 cI- ww u_ 8 Iii z = 0 ~ z 1. The system shall be capable of supporting at least 64 clients using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator . Systems requiring additional software to enable a standard web browser are not acceptable. 2. The web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the web browser. 1 3. The web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, --' schedules, calendars, Togs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. 4. The web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: �., a. User log -on identification and password shall be required. If an { unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. } b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the web browser. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the web browser interface. c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a web page. HTML editing of the web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the BMS, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the web access computer. e. Real -time values displayed on a web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual "refresh" of the web page. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 6. Historical Trending: a. Any system point either real or calculated shall be assignable to the historical trending program. All changes in point value shall be recorded for points assigned. The trend interval shall be user selectable. b. All trend information shall be recorded in non - volatile memory and graphically displayed. Display shall accommodate up to twelve different point trends simultaneously displayed in user selectable colors and dynamically updated. 7. Custom Application Program: a. Provide real -time control programming capability to allow operator to create customized control strategies based on arithmetic, logical, conditional, and time logic. E. Remote Alarm and Communication software: The BMS shall have the ability to alarm and communicate with other off site PC (LOT) by using the modem dial out/in using BACnet •Point To Point service or PC Anywhere or equal commercial software. The BMS shall have the ability to notify the owner via voice or numeric pager of serious alarms on the BMS. F. Web Access: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -29 z 1 Z w J U U co o to J = H (i) w O 2 g a. co _° w F— _ z �. O w ~ W Uc) O N o w W U O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT f. User's shall have administrator - defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: (1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner. (a) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. (b) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. (2) Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right - clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop -up menu. No entry of text shall be required. (3) View Togs and charts. (4) View and acknowledge alarms. g. Graphic screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link. A. The Drawings and Specifications describe approximate locations of the work. Verify all locations in the field. B. Locate equipment and accessories so as to provide easy access for proper service and maintenance. C. The PC and peripherals shall be located in Room No. 11, Security. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide wiring for control devices, monitoring devices, instrumentation, and interlocks as required for a complete system. Coordinate with Divisions 14, 15, 16 and 17 of the Specifications for devices requiring wiring under this Section. Run all wiring in compliance with the requirements of the Division 16 Specification and in accordance with authorities and codes having jurisdiction. Provide separate conduit for control wiring under this Section. C. Provide all BMS wiring, including power wiring to DDCs and BMS equipment. All power wiring for control system shall be from an emergency power panel. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Engineer for resolution before rough -in work is started. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -30 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT B. The Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be installed as shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Engineer for resolution before Z rough -in work is started. W c4 2 C. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work. If - o head room or space conditions appear inadequate — or if any discrepancies occur between 0 the plans and the Contractor's work, and the plans and the work of others — the Contractor W shall report these discrepancies to the Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate the Contractor's work with the work of others. Any - u_ changes in the work covered by this specification made necessary by the failure or neglect of W 0 the Contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by — and at the expense of — this 2 Contractor. g Q _° H W Z = H 1— O Z F U O N C1 ff W W - u O .Z W U= O ~ z PROTECTION A. The BMS Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by its work or employees, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. B. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for its work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open of work with temporary covers during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. A. Device and panel locations are the responsibility of the BMS Contractor. Group instrumentation on ductwork, air handling units, packaged equipment and fan casing in an organized manner. Locations shall be consistent for each type of system. Each control device, field or panel mounted, shall be identified by an engraved lamacoid nameplate permanently attached to its enclosure. Sensors mounted on air ducts having exterior insulation shall be provided with standoff spacers with insulating material firmly fitted around spacers. C. Averaging temperature and low temperature detectors shall be installed in serpentine fashion and supported by steel grid or multiple bulb holders. Minimum coverage 1 linear foot of sensor element per 4 square feet of coil face area. D. Wall mounted sensors shall be 42 inches above finished floor and consistent with ADA requirements as outlined in Division 1 of the specification. In service corridors where subject to damage, mounting height shall be 84 inches unless noted otherwise. Provide insulated base where mounting on exterior wall is required. Provide metal guards where mounted in mechanical, electrical, storage, and maintenance areas or in any area where subject to damage. E. Locate pressure transducers within 50 feet of sensing point. Connect sensors with tubing of diameter recommended by sensor manufacturer and as required to prevent signal phase lag. Provide gauge tees at transducer for connection to pressure gauge. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -31 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. DDC panels shall not be located directly underneath valves or other areas where they may be subject to water or heat damage. In addition, panels shall be mounted with the bottom no lower than 3 feet and the top no higher than 7 feet above the floor, with a minimum of 3 foot clearance at the front. 3.06 WIRING A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes and Division 16 of this specification. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence. B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL Listed in approved raceway per NEC and Division 16 requirements. C. All low- voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Low - voltage power circuits shall be sub -fused when required to meet Class 2 current - limit. D. Where NEC Class 2 (current - limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used, provided that cables are UL Listed for the intended application. For example, cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL Listed specifically for that purpose. E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms — or where subject to mechanical damage — shall be installed in raceway. F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high - voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low- voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers). G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing. H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and neatly tied at 10 -foot maximum intervals. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems. J. All wire -to- device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip. All wire -to- wire connections shall be at a terminal block. K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals. L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120 volt. If only higher voltages are available, the Contractor shall provide step -down transformers. M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -32 w re 2 J U O 0 CO J • = • u. w O 2 u.? N d O w z � � w ~ w O • - O I- w W L I O W z r = 0~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating z at all penetrations. Q • )-z • O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in c4 2 keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC requirements, except as noted 6 v elsewhere. U O co D P. Include one pull string in each raceway 1 inch or larger. w H Q. Use coded conductors throughout with different colored conductors. w O. 2 R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures g 5 include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 LL starters. co 0 ± S. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Install raceway ? H to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches from high - temperature equipment (over 104 Z O degrees F). w w T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced according to v u) code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie Oo - rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork. w w U U. Adhere to Division 16 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion joints. u ~ „ 3 ..z V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of w cn all vertical raceways. H H O W. The Contractor shall terminate all control and /or interlock wiring, and shall maintain updated (as- built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site. X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid- tight, flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 3 feet in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than 1 /2 inch electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture — including chiller and boiler rooms — liquid- tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (per code). Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed. 3.07 BMS COMMUNICATION WIRING A. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication cabling. B. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1 or other Class 2 wiring. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -33 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable installation as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during installation. D. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable. E. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed between the lines and ground. The lighting arrestor shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. F. All runs of communication wiring shall be un- spliced length when that length is commercially available. G. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data. H. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations Article on Communications Circuits, Cable and Protector Grounding. 3.08 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors to give instruction in the adjustment, o peration and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system specified. The training shall be oriented toward the system installed rather than being a general training course. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and material required for classroom training. B. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases for the time interval specified for each phase. September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. The first phase shall be given prior to the acceptance test period at a time mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Owner, and shall be at least five (5) days (8 hours /day) in length. 0 perating p ersonnel s hall b e t rained i n t he f unctional operations of the BMS installed and the procedures that the operators will employ for system operation. The training shall include but not be limited to: a. General BMS Configuration. b. Operation of Computer and Peripherals. c. Command Line Mnemonics. d. Report Generation. e. Operator Control Functions. f. Graphics Generation. g. General Equipment Layout. h. Troubleshooting Procedures i. Preventative Maintenance Procedures. j. Sensor Maintenance and Calibration. k. Proper use of service kit. Building Management System 15900 -34 2. The second phase shall be conducted after system acceptance testing for a period of eight (8) days. The training shall occur up to one year after the first phase of z training as determined by the Owner and shall include but not be limited to: Q • a. DDC Programming. ,i- z b. Data Base Generation. Ill c. Supervisory Level Operator Commands. 6 m d. Topics requested by Owner. 0 O U) 0 3.09 CALIBRATION AND COMMISSIONING J = i- A. Perform a three -phase commissioning p rocedure consisting o f f ield I /O calibration a nd w 0 commissioning, s ystem c ommissioning a nd integrated system program commissioning. 2 Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets that shall be g 5 submitted prior to acceptance testing. Notify the Owner in writing of the testing schedule so u- that operating personnel may observe calibration and commissioning. c d I- w B. Field I/O Calibration and Commissioning: z H i- O 1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been w ~ Lu installed according to the shop drawings and test, calibrate, and bring on -line each ? o " control device. Commissioning to include but not be limited to: v 0 _... a. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90 percent of range. 00 I-- b. Sensor range. c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting. m 0 d. Point value reporting. ~' u. e. Binary alarm and switch settings. — O f. Actuator spring ranges. tii W g. Failsafe position on Toss of control signal. 0 i= • 2. Record calibration and test data on commissioning data sheets and submit. Data 0 ~ sheets shall include the device designation, the date of commissioning and the name Z of person who performed commissioning. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. System Program Commissioning: After control devices have been commissioned, each DDC program shall be put on -line and commissioned. The Contractor shall confirm that the DDC program logic follows the approved software flow chart and sequence of operation. Each control loop shall be adjusted to provide stable control and control within the specified accuracies. System program test results and loop adjustments shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted. D. integrated System Commissioning: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. After all DDC programs have been commissioned, the Contractor shall verify the overall system performs as specified. Tests shall include but not be limited to: a. Data communication, both normal and failure modes. b. Fully loaded system response time. c. Impact of component failures on system operation. d. Time /date changes. e. End of month /end of year operation. f. Global application programs. Building Management System 15900 -35 Instrument Accuracy Temperature: 'A degree F or 1/2 percent of full scale, whichever is Tess Pressure: 'A pound per square inch or Y2 percent of full scale, whichever is less MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING g. System backup and reloading. h. System status displays. Diagnostics. j. Power fail /restart. k. Battery backup. A. Submit a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements at least 4 weeks before the start of testing. This procedure to be approved prior to the start of the testing. B. During acceptance testing provide services of a fully qualified building automation technician who is knowledgeable of the project. C. Using the commissioning test data the Owner shall s elect, a t random, f unctions to be demonstrated. The Contractor in accordance with the acceptance test procedure shall demonstrate these functions. At least 15 percent of the systems functions shall be demonstrated. At least 95 percent of the functions demonstrated must perform as specified and documented on commissioning data sheets or the system must be retested. D. Fumish instruments required for testing. Submit catalog data on all instruments for approval prior to performance tests. E. After the above acceptance tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning as specified, a thirty-day endurance test period shall begin. If the system functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test period the system fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight hours, the Owner may request that the endurance tests be repeated after problems have been corrected. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Building Management System 15900 -36 -- MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Z Z 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Q: 6U A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: v 0 to 1 Static and Dynamic Fire Dampers. J tu . 2. Balancing Dampers. co w 3. Backdraft Dampers. w O ? . ( 12. d I - uJ I- O Z I—. 7p O == C] I- wW I A. Manufacturer: Test and qualify with UL a complete range of damper sizes covering dampers u. ~O specified. Testing one size only is not acceptable. Z v = ' O F " Z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15910 DAMPERS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15800 — Ductwork. C. Section 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. E. Division 16 — Electrical. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Damper shall open and close under HVAC system operating conditions in accordance with UL 555S. C Pressure drop ratings of dampers shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. D. Air Flow Rating: UL approved for dual directional airflow. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. C. NFPA 92A - Smoke - Control Systems. D. UL 555 - Standard for Safety; Fire, Smoke and Fire /Smoke Dampers. E. UL 555S - Standard for Safety; Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dynamic fire damper submittal shall include performance data developed for UL 555 standard tests. Maximum allowed air flowrate and static pressure for duct and non -duct mounted installations shall be documented. Dampers 15910 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Submit construction details, hardware details, gauges and certified dimensioned shop drawings for all damper types. C. Manufacturer's product data: .H w 1. Include leakage, pressure drop, and maximum pressure data. 6 n 2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. 3. Verify conformance to NFPA 90A, NFPA 92A, UL 555, UL 555S, and applicable w 0 building code. 4. Verify damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in _I H accordance with AMCA 500. 2 w u O PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS u_ j N d A. Static and Dynamic Fire Dampers: Ruskin DIBD2 Style B, IBD2 Style B, or approved equal by H w Air Balance, AWV, Pottorff, Greenheck. z O B. Backdraft Dampers: Ruskin CBD4 counterbalanced, Ruskin BD2 non - counterbalanced or - w (- equal by Air Balance, AWV, Arrow. 2 D C. Manual Balancing Damper: Ruskin MD35, MD25, MDRS25, CDO25. U x '- 2.02 FIRE DAMPERS = W U A. Provide static and dynamic fire dampers in ducts penetrating fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings as required by NFPA, local codes and authorities regardless if shown or not shown , on the Drawings. Dampers shall be factory marked for static or dynamic use. y _ B. Provide conveniently located access doors, of ample size for resetting the dampers. Duct 0 ~ mounted grilles, registers or diffusers can be used for access as long as such access is z readily available as determined by the Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Integral sleeve frame shall be minimum 20 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Details. D. Dampers shall be spring - loaded with shutter stored out of the airstream to provide minimum 95 percent free area. E. Dynamic rated fire dampers shall be labeled in accordance with UL 555S. Static fire dampers shall be labeled in accord with UL 555. F. Dampers shall be actuated by UL approved fusible Zink. Upon operation of the link, the dampers shall close automatically and remain tightly closed. Fusible links shall operate approximately 50 degrees F above the maximum temperature the duct system will encounter under normal operation, but not less than 165 degrees F. G. Dampers shall be of types acceptable to the local authorities, Owner and Architect. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dampers 15910 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.03 BALANCING DAMPERS — SINGLE BLADE UNISYS - Tukwila Z • A. Provide volume dampers as specified or shown on the Drawings for proper balancing and = Z distribution of air, in the various branches of the ductwork for use in testing and balancing the u system. Dampers shall be installed separate and independent from the damper specified to be set behind supply, return and exhaust air grilles. Provide single blade dampers in ducts 0 24 inches in width or less, or 12 inches in height or less. Provide multiple blade dampers for N p all other duct sizes. Coordinate with the air balancing contractor and provide additional cn w dampers required for proper air balance. H u) u_ B. Provide single blade and quadrant type volume dampers of minimum 20 gauge round or 22 w 0 gauge rectangular galvanized steel construction, pivoted to turn easily. Provide operating 2 handles and Ventline 560 or equal locking devices mounted on outside of the duct in an = Q accessible location. Blade shall have 4 full length brakes for increased stiffness and rigidity. u u. d C. Damper component penetration shall be closed and sealed consistent with the specified duct h w sealing class. End bearings are required for 3 inch water gauge class. z 1 2.04 BALANCING DAMPERS — MULTIPLE BLADES u w A. Manual dampers s hall have a minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel channel frame with n p mounting flanges and axles set in molded polycarbonate or oil impregnated bronze bearings. 0 u) Axles s hall b e minimum o f Y2 inch i n diameter and s hall b e interlocked with b lades to C F- positively eliminated slippage. w w U B. Blades shall be minimum of 16 -gauge galvanized steel. Manual dampers shall have a LL ~O minimum of four breaks running the entire length of the damper to assure rigidity and tight Z close off. Blades shall be on centers no greater than 9 inches and no blade shall exceed 48 U N inches in length. All blades shall be interconnected to act in unison for opposed blade H = operation. 0 ~ z C. When installed, damper frame shall be gasketed or caulked to eliminate leakage between duct or plenum and damper frame. Head and sill shall have stops. Damper shafts shall be marked to indicate blade position. D. Dampers shall be provided with Ventline 560 or approved equal, locking quadrants of sufficient size and design to securely hold the damper sections and blade linkage hardware. 2.05 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS — COUNTERBALANCED TYPE A. Provide counterbalanced backdraft dampers as specified and where indicated on the Drawings. Each damper shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be suitable for installation in the mounting arrangement shown. B. Backdraft damper shall be the heavy duty pressure relief counter - balanced shutter type similar to Ruskin type CBD4, or approved equal. C. Damper frame shall be minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel or 16 -gauge aluminum. Damper frame shall be of channel construction for ductwork mounting or have a front flange when installed in a wall. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dampers 15910 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Damper blades shall be minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel or 16 -gauge aluminum. Provide individual adjustable counterweights on each blade. The damper shall be capable of maintaining static pressures of 0.05 to 0.20 inch water gauge. Furnish tie bars constructed of minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel or 16 -gauge aluminum on damper sections over 24 inches wide. After damper has been installed, counterweights shall be adjusted to balance the system static pressure as directed by the test and balancing contractor. E. Damper blades shall have polyurethane foam, neoprene, or vinyl gaskets glued, riveted or rolled into blade edges. F. Damper bearings shall be molded polycarbonate, bronze oilite, nylon, or cycoloy. G. Furnish counter - balanced backdraft dampers with No. 11/2 mesh aluminum bird screen for rear mounting where counter - balanced backdraft dampers are mounted in outside walls. r-+ 2.06 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Furnish and install backdraft dampers as specified and where indicated on the Drawings. Each damper shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings and shall be suitable for installation in the mounting arrangement shown. Backdraft dampers mounted in roof curbs shall be secured to galvanized steel support angles fastened to the curb. B. Backdraft dampers shall be heavy duty relief shutter type suitable for wall and duct mounting or installation at a centrifugal fan discharge. Backdraft dampers shall be similar to Ruskin Type BD2 -A1 for face velocities to 1500 feet per minute and Ruskin Type BD2 -A2 for face velocities to 2500 feet per minute or approved equal. C. Damper frame shall be constructed of minimum 0.090 -inch thick aluminum or minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Damper frame shall be of channel construction when installed in ductwork or have a front flange when installed in a wall. D. Damper blades shall be constructed of minimum 0.025 -inch thick extruded aluminum suitable for face velocities up to 1500 feet per minute and minimum 0.05 -inch thick extruded aluminum for face velocities to 2500 feet per minute. Damper blades shall have neoprene or vinyl gaskets riveted or rolled into the blade edge. Each backdraft damper section shall be furnished with tie bars constructed of minimum 16 -gauge aluminum.' Furnish two tie bars on damper sections over 40 inches wide. E. Damper bearings shall be molded polycarbonate, bronze oilite, nylon, or cycoloy. F. Furnish backdraft dampers with 1.5 inch by 1.5 -inch 22 -gauge wire mesh aluminum bird screen for rear mounting where backdraft dampers are mounted in outside walls. G. Damper leakage shall not exceed 12 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper face area at 0.5 inches water gauge differential pressure. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install dampers square and free from twist or racking with blades running horizontally. B. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dampers 15910 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS C. Provide conveniently located access doors, of ample size for resetting the dampers. Duct mounted grilles, registers or diffusers can be used for access as long as such access is readily available as determined by the Architect, Owner or Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Fire damper operation shall be tested after the installation is complete. Static fire dampers shall be tested with the system fans not operating. Dynamic fire dampers shall be tested with system fans operating at their maximum static pressure ratings. A written certificate shall be issued by the Contractor to the Owner stating: 1. Damper identification. 2. ' Damper location. 3. Date tested. 4. Names and signatures of witnesses and testing personnel. E. Provide a copy of certification to system balancing agent for inclusion in balancing report. F. Size and quantity of dynamic fire damper shall be based on the UL listing of the damper manufacturer. Provide intermediate mullions and split duct connections as required. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Provide ribbon at each manual damper handle. END OF SECTION UNISYS - Tukwila Dampers 15910 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z PART 1 — GENERAL W w 1.01 WORK INCLUDED o v0 co 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: J Fwz- wO 7 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS u. J i D N A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. H W Z� B. Section 15170 - Electric Motors. F„ O w ~ C. Section 15190 - Systems Identification. ? o, J D. Section 15241 — Acoustics. U O c 0 1- -1 {{ E. Section 15250 — Insulation. w w H F. Section 15900 - Building Management System (BMS). u_ z al we G. Section 15985 - Automatic Control Sequences. H = ..._, 0 H. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. Z Division 16 — Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's leakage rating, certified airflow performance test data, sound . performance test data and certified dimensioned drawings. B. Submit materials of construction, assembly details and mounting details. C. Submit actuators and linkages with control requirements specified. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Standard 130. B. ARI Standard 880. C. U.L. Standard 1995. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15930 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 1. Fan powered terminal units. 2. Factory mounted and calibrating control modules, actuators. Air Terminal Units 15930 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE z k-z A. Electric coils shall be given a 2000 -volt dielectric test. r4 w B. Sound ratings for all units shall not exceed valves specified in Section 15241: Acoustics at 1- "' v p inch water gauge static pressure. cn o w = C. Terminal units shall be listed as a composite assembly per U.L. 1995. ,-:., N U. W PART 2 - PRODUCTS g .- LL 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS w d = W I- _ A. Fan Powered Terminal Units: Titus, Trane, Nailor Industries. ,.�.. z H t- 2.02 FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS W W A. Furnish fan - powered terminal devices as indicated on the Drawings. Refer to equipment v 0 schedules for duct connection sizes and capacities. Provide the terminal units with a primary variable air volume damper that controls the primary air quantity in response to a control W w signal. The terminal units shall contain a fan and motor assembly, and an electric heating U coil where scheduled or indicated on the Drawings. The fan shall provide a constant volume ti.. S of discharge air at all air - blending ratios from minimum to maximum scheduled primary air quantities and zero to 100 percent return airflow rates. Review the space limitations carefully W to ensure all terminal units will fit in the space allowed including National Electric Code r_ _ clearances required in front of all panels containing electrical devices. Provide an access 0 I- door or doors to service all internal components and a removable panel to service the fan Z and electric motor. Provide cam latches for the access doors. Provide a filter rack with a 1- inch thick throwaway filter. Filter shall be replaced prior to building occupancy. The terminal units shall include all equipment and controls as required to provide a complete and operating system with the following minimum equipment and controls: 1. Single point electrical connection for the voltage /phase as scheduled. Refer to Electrical Drawings and specifications for power wiring requirements. 2. Circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch sized to protect all terminal unit electrical components. 3. Individual electrical overcurrent protection devices as required to protect individual terminal unit devices and transformers. 4. A fan speed control system shall be furnished by the terminal unit manufacturer to manually set the fan speed. Speed controller shall be continuously adjustable from maximum to minimum. Match speed control device to operate with the motor. Provide relays to start or stop the fan motor on a signal from the BMS. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Terminal Units 15930 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 5. Provide a multi -point flow sensor device that will control the maximum primary airflow for the terminal unit to that indicated on the Drawings through a transducer and a Direct Digital Control (DDC) microprocessor provided by the Control Contractor. Locate the multi -point flow sensor in the primary duct connection in a position to accurately monitor the supply airflow. Equip the primary inlet with a gradual transition (SMACNA Construction Standards) as required to connect to the primary duct size shown on the Drawings. The transition shall be provided by the terminal unit manufacturer and field installed by the Contractor. Provide a 4 -inch long minimum transition with a 118 -inch high raised bead approximately 1% inches from the inlet connection. Permanently mark the primary and fan design airflow settings on the bottom of the unit. Provide a transformer with 24 volt AC secondary to provide power for the controls. The terminal unit manufacturer and the Controls Contractor shall verify compatibility of multi -point sensor with transducer and DDC microprocessor prior to building this Project. The multi -point flow sensors and flow transducers in conjunction with the DDC control system shall be capable of controlling the terminal unit discharge air volume (CFM) t o within 5 percent o f scheduled design fan air volume (CFM). 6. Provide steel fan /motor assembly with forward curved centrifugal fan dynamically balanced wheel with a direct drive motor. Provide permanent split capacitor motor with i ntegral t hermal o verloads, a nd d esigned f or u se w ith a Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) speed controller. Provide isolation between fan motor assembly and unit casing to eliminate any vibration from unit casing. Provide anti -back rotation system or provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse rotation and not affect life expectancy. 7. Fan motor assembly shall be a forward curved centrifugal fan with a direct drive motor. Motors shall be General Electric ECM variable -speed direct current brushless motors specifically designed for use with a single phase, 277 -volt, 60 -hertz electrical input. Motor shall be complete with and operated by a single -phase integrated controller /inverter that operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to electrically commutate the stator. An integral controller furnished by the terminal unit manufacturer shall provide a signal to the "ECM" motor to maintain constant supply airflow. All motors shall be designed for synchronous rotation. Motor rotor shall be permanent magnet type with near zero rotor losses. Motor shall have built -in soft start and soft speed change ramps. Motor shall be able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or vertical orientation. Motor shall be permanently lubricated with ball bearings. Motor shall be direct coupled to the blower. Motor shall maintain a minimum of 70 percent efficiency over its entire operating range. Provide isolation between fan motor assembly and unit casing to eliminate any vibration from the fan to the terminal unit casing. Provide anti -back rotation system or provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse rotation and not affect life expectancy. Motors and inverter assemblies manufactured by Emerson, General Electric, Fasco, or A.O. Smith shall be acceptable. a. The manufacturer of the fan powered terminal units shall set the fan discharge airflow (cfm) at the factory or in the field. The factory setting for the fan cfm shall be clearly marked on each terminal identification label. If the fan cfm is set in the field by the terminal unit manufacturer the set cfm shall be written on the label in the field by the terminal unit manufacturer's technician. If the fan powered terminal unit manufacturer cannot factory set the fan cfm, factory technicians shall be sent to the field to adjust the motor and the associated controller /inverter to the discharge airflow on the drawings. Fan cfm shall be constant within ±5 percent regardless of Air Terminal Units 15930 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila changes in static upstream or downstream of the terminal unit after it is installed in the field. Fan cfm shall be set with a potentiometer and digital meter. Neither SCR's nor rheostats shall be an acceptable means of setting the fan cfm. One speed adjustment device shall be provided by the terminal unit manufacturer to the Owner for field adjustment of the fan speed should construction or design changes become necessary. b. A witnessed test shall be conducted by the fan powered terminal unit manufacturer in an independent testing laboratory to confirm that the terminal unit and the fan motor as an assembly performs in accordance with this specification. If the fan powered terminal device and dc motor as an assembly fails to perform as specified and as scheduled on the Drawings, the terminal unit manufacturer shall make adjustments and take all corrective action as necessary at t he t erminal u nit m anufacturer's s ole expense. 8. The terminal u nit s hall b e I isted i n a ccordance w ith U .L. 1 995 as a c omposite assembly consisting of the terminal unit with or without the electric or hot water heating device. B. Design the primary air damper to vary primary air supply in response to an electronic signal. Damper leakage at shutoff shall not exceed 4 percent of the scheduled maximum fan airflow at 2 inches water gauge. Provide damper connection to the operating shaft of a positive mechanical type to prevent any slippage. Provide non - lubricated delrin or mylar bearings for the damper shaft. Select the primary air damper in conjunction with the DDC microprocessor furnished under Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) to provide control at low primary air velocities. The total deviation in primary airflow shall not exceed plus or minus 5 percent of the primary airflow corresponding to a 300 feet per minute air velocity through the primary air valve at 0.2 inches water gauge inlet static pressure. The primary airflow accuracy and repeatability shall be laboratory demonstrated and proven with any inlet configuration and inlet static variation from 0.2 to 2.0 inches water gauge. Dampers shall be life cycle tested to at least 10,000 cycles. C. Sound attenuation of air stream noise and acoustical treatment of terminal unit must comply with Section 15241: Acoustics with 1 inch water gauge inlet pressure, 0.3 inch water gauge discharge pressure, and the specified design air volume scheduled on the Drawings. Record radiated noise and self - generated noise readings at 0.5, 1.0 and 1.5 inch water gauge inlet static pressures. D. Provide thermal insulation for all portions of the terminal unit in contact with primary cold or fan - powered heated air as 1 inch, 1 pound density fiberglass insulation with a minimum installed 3.5 R -valve which complies with U.L. 181 and NFPA 90A, with a continuous inner sealed liner of non - porous material. The liner shall meet the requirements of U.L. 723, U.L. 181, NFPA 90A and the bacteriological standards of ASTM C685. All cut edges of insulation and liner shall be sealed from the air streams by use of sheetmetal nosings. Exposed fiberglass shall not be accepted. E. Provide a double wall galvanized sheetmetal cabinet with minimum 20 gauge steel outer sheet and perforated 22 gauge inner sheet. Clearly identify on the cabinet mounting connections for hanging the terminal unit by sheetmetal straps. Factory install all components, including all controls and wiring, except the following field connections: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Primary duct. 2. Secondary duct. Air Terminal Units 15930 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 3. Single point electrical connection. 4. BMS electronic control signals. 5. Room sensor connection. z _~ I-- F. The terminal unit shall be designed to provide full cataloged airflow range at an inlet static rt 2 pressure or 0.25 inches water gauge or less. Downstream static pressure requirements shall tgi v be supplied by the unit internal fan. 0 O tn G. The following equipment shall be supplied by Control (BMS) Contractor and installed by the CO H ILI fan powered terminal manufacturer: CO LL w 0 u_ -..t; H. The Control Contractor shall furnish the DDC unit controller and flow transducers (if not C! integral with the unit controller) to the terminal unit manufacturer's factory. The Control H w — Contractor shall supply written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to z H enable the terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation. The terminal - O manufacturer shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the terminal unit controller and all w u associated instrumentation and final control elements based on the information provided by ? port. An averaging flow sensor of equal accuracy may be provided at the fan inlet in lieu of 0 ' - flow sensors at each induction port. U.L. listed (F -R) type tubing shall be factory installed as Z required for the flow sensors and bulkhead pressure fittings. 1. 24 volt AC transformer. 2. 24 volt AC fan start/stop relay. 3. 24 -volt AC relays for the electric heating coil control through the Division 17. 4. Manual and /or automatic fan speed adjustment device. 5. Sheet metal enclosure for the DDC controller. 6. Primary air damper and linkage. The terminal unit manufacturer shall verify the operation of each fan - powered terminal before shipment. Testing shall include at least the following: 1. Apply electric power to the unit. 2. Start the fan and verify fan rotates properly. 3. The terminal unit manufacturer shall factory or field adjust the GE ECM motor and associated controller /inverter to the discharge cfm indicated on the Drawings. 4. Energize the electric heat through the electric heating coil relay. Verify the signal with a volt meter to ensure proper heater operation. 5. De- energize the electric heating coil and verify the signal with a volt meter to ensure the heater is de- energized. Air Terminal Units 15930 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 6. Disconnect the primary air damper actuator from the DDC terminal unit controller. Provide separate power source to the actuator to verify operation and rotation of damper. Drive the damper closed and verify by feel or observation that damper is driven fully closed. Return primary air damper to the fully open position prior to shipment. 7. Provide a written inspection report for each terminal unit signed and dated by the factory test technician verifying all terminal unit wiring and testing has been performed per the manufacturer's testing and quality assurance requirements. K. The Control Contractor shall provide the terminal unit manufacturer with multi -color point to point wiring diagrams detailing the wiring of the DDC controller and other control equipment installed on the terminal device. The terminal unit manufacturer shall review and approve the wiring diagrams and coordinate any changes necessary with the Control contractor. The terminal unit manufacturer shall incorporate the final version of the wiring diagram in the terminal unit shop drawing submittals. 2.03 FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS ELECTRIC HEATING COILS A. Provide electric heater coils of open coil design constructed of the highest grade 80 percent nickel, and 20 percent chromium resistance wire or nichrome elements and insulated with ceramic, phenolic, or lava insulators in aluminized steel, galvanized steel, or stainless steel brackets, supported in heavy gauge aluminized or galvanized steel frames. Construct each unit containing an electric heating coil and install in accordance with requirements of the local authorities and shall carry U.L. or ETL approval and listing for the terminal unit device with heater. B. Refer to the Drawings for coil capacities. Coils rated to 5 kilowatts shall be 277 -volt single phase, larger capacities shall 480 volt, three phases. Coils up to 3 kilowatts shall be single step. Coils larger than 3 kilowatts shall be two -step. C. Provide terminal bolts, nuts and washers of corrosion resistant materials. Construct coils so the installation may be accomplished in accordance with the provisions of the National Electric Code, for zero clearance. Coils shall receive a 2000 -volt dielectric test at the factory. D. Provide automatic reset thermal cutouts for primary protection with manual reset limit switches in power circuits for secondary protection. Both devices must be serviceable through terminal box without removing heating element from the terminal unit. E. Construct heater with a terminal box and cover containing built -in mercury step controlled contactors for each circuit, branch circuit fusing for each 48 amp circuit per NEC, and a static pressure or airflow safety interlock switch for installation in the heater control enclosure. Use contactors mounted in ceiling above occupied tenant spaces of the mercury type. Provide a separate 120 volt fused control power transformer with primary and secondary protection and ,a disconnect. F. Bring all wiring of built -in devices to clearly marked terminal strips. Provide a complete wiring diagram permanently attached to the terminal device cover or the terminal device. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Terminal Units 15930 -6 7 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Provide electric heater coils designed for operation with the DDC controller and control Z system as specified in Section 15900: BUILDING MANAGMENET SYSTEM (BMS). , . w H. Construct duct heater coils to mount on the discharge of the terminal device. 6 = JU , co 0 PART 3 — EXECUTION W J 3.01 INSTALLATION j w 0 O . A. Maintain service clearance for terminal unit controls. g Q es : B. Stencil all terminal units with nametags on the bottom casing panel to match tags shown on d; drawings. Lettering /numbering shall be 3 inches high using red primer paint. Z = C. Terminal unit manufacturer shall provide flow curves for the primary air sensors clearly label Z O and permanently attached on the bottom or side of each terminal unit. ui 0 O • N O I— END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Air Terminal Units Permit Issue 15930 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS w 6U 00 CO 111 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Air Outlets. w O 2. Air Inlets. 2 3. Accessories for Air Inlets and Air Outlets. g Q = � A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. ?: B. Section 15241 — Acoustics. Z C. Section 15250 — Insulation. U N O o D. Section 15800 — Ductwork. W W 1- U E. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. z F. Division 16 — Electrica.I v N F. I G. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for floor, wall and ceiling construction. O z 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's performance data including air throw and drop, outlet velocities, total and velocity pressures and acoustic performance. PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Submit manufacturer's specifications of construction including materials, installation instruction and adjustment data. Include "K" factors for balancing. Submit product accessories. Submit samples, color and finish selections, schedule of sizes and model number for review by the Architect prior to fabrication. E. Schedule of air outlets and air inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. Air Outlets and Inlets 15940 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air outlets and inlets to be tested in accordance with: _ Z _� 1. ARI 885 -90: Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the w Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets. 2. ARI 880 -94: Air Terminal Test Standard. "' � 0 3. ANSI /ASHRAE 70 -91: Air Diffuser Performance Standard, Isothermal and Cooling. N p 4. ASHRAE 55 -91: Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy. co w 5: ASHRAE 113 -90: Method of Testing for Room Air Distribution. ILI I CD w B. All air inlets and outlets shall be factory painted or anodized. Paint or anodized finish shall w O pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, 2 blistering or deterioration of film. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM -870 Water -5 Immersion Test and an ASTM D -2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch -pound N n force applied. Finish (pencil) hardness shall be minimum HB to H. = O I- w F . C. For all components provided with fiberglass acoustic lining, refer to Section 15250: Insulation. Z ZO w w 0 ON 0 1- w A. Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of air inlets and air outlets and are 1- b R. ased on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products I I O with equal quality, appearance, finish and performance characteristics may be considered. iii Z Refer to Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions for alternates or substitutions. c� O Z PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS B. Air Inlets and Outlets: Titus, Krueger, Price, Nailor. C. Accessories: Dampers, equalizing grids, turning vanes, extractors, plenums, hardware and frames shall be provided by the same manufacturers as the air inlets and air outlets provided. 2.02 GENERAL A. Air distribution outlets as shown on the Drawings shall accommodate the air volume and throw indicated to maintain a maximum terminal velocity of 50 feet per minute in the occupied area. The overall noise level produced by all of the supply air outlets and exhaust or retum air inlets in various rooms shall not exceed specified limits. B. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for reflected ceiling plans, elevations, wall and ceiling types and construction. Air outlets and inlets in fire rated ceilings or walls must be all steel construction. Coordinate frame and border types to accommodate the wall or ceiling specified or shown on the Architectural Drawings. C. All dampers provided shall be operable from the face of the Air Inlet or Air Outlet. D. Model numbers noted herein are Nailor unless otherwise noted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Outlets and Inlets 15940 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 OUTLET TYPES A. Square Ceiling Diffuser, Louver Face Fixed Pattern: Z w 2 00 N o J H w • O J u- ? E B. Combination Plenum and Linear Slot: Z lil 1. Provide all steel linear slot diffuser with insulated plenums. z � . 2. Slot widths shall be 1 /2 inch. w w 3. Assembly shall include factory- fabricated plenum, slot diffuser and pattern controller. D o The maximum air leakage of the assembly shall not exceed 5 percent of the air p volume indicated on the Drawings. 0 E- 4. Number of slots, lengths, air volume border type, frame type, and fastening or = w mounting type as indicated on the Drawings. i- 5. Baked enamel finish. All visible surfaces painted flat black. O 6. Type SD -1 & 2: Nailor Model 57501 or approved equal. w z U = O F' z C. Perforated Floor Diffuser: 2.04 INLET TYPES September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide louver face supply diffusers, all steel construction with AG -75 steel opposed blade volume control damper. • 2. Diffuser shall have three one -piece precision die - stamped cones to provide uniform appearance if different neck sizes are used. The back cone shall include an integral drawn inlet. The two inner cones shall be a removable assembly with adjustable vanes to change the airflow from fully open to fully closed. 3. Sizes indicated on Drawings are neck sizes. 4. Baked white enamel finish. 5. Type CD -2: 24 inch by 24 inch face size. Nailor Model RNS or approved equal. 6. Type CD -1:12 inch by 12 inch face size. Nailor Model RNS or approved equal. 1. 24 inch square all steel construction. 2. 25% open area. 3. Capable of handling concentrated load up to 1250 lbs. 4. Galvanized slide damper mounted to underside of diffuser. 5. Covering to be equivalent of floor tiles as specified by the Architect. 6. Type FD -1: Tate Model Perf 1250 Air Flow Panel or approved equal. A. Ceiling Perforated Grille: 1. Provide all steel construction. Face area as shown on the Drawings. 2. Flush perforated face shall be an exact match in construction, mounting type and appearance to the perforated face air outlets as specified. 3. Perforated face shall be easily unlatchable from the back pan. 4. Face area as shown on the Drawings. 5. Baked white enamel finish. 6. Type CR -1: Nailor Model 4360 or approved equal. Air Outlets and Inlets 15940 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories to achieve air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Locations indicated on the Architectural drawings shall take precedence. For lay -in ceiling panels, locate in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install a ir o utlet a nd a ir i niet w ith a irtight c onnection t o d ucts a nd to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. B. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. All visible interior surfaces of air inlets shall be factory painted flat black. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Air Outlets and Inlets Permit Issue 159404 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z w J A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: u) o 1. Supply and install necessary software, programming, sensing, controlling and _I ~ controlled devices, piping, wiring and commissioning of automatic control systems, O so as to provide a complete control system, meet requirements of control sequences specified. L ? . D. 0 I-w A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. Z I- O B. Section 15900 - Building Management System (BMS). w al p U 0 I- w f- � O I1 Z U O 1- Z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS • PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL SECTION 15985 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Contractor shall provide customized control strategies and control sequences and define appropriate control loop algorithms and choose the optimum loop parameters for loop control. All control loops shall be tuned to stabilize within plus or minus 1 percent of setpoint within 5 minutes of setpoint change or startup. B. Safety devices shall be hardwire interlocked with "hand" and "automatic" positions in series with motor controller holding circuit. C. Smoke control, fire and life safety sequences shall override other automatic control sequences including hardwired safety devices. D. Reset schedules and setpoints shown in sequences are for initial programming and start up. During system commissioning the reset schedules and setpoints shall be fine tuned to obtain desired thermal comfort, energy and ventilation system results. E. The intent of the reset schedules indicated is that the range of the output be limited between the minimum and maximum values indicated in the reset schedules. F. All functions which use analog points to switch equipment on and off (e.g. fans, pumps) must be programmed with dead bands, and if necessary, time delays to prevent short cycling of equipment. September 30, 2003 Automatic Control Sequences Permit Issue 15985 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Starting of fans and pumps shall have built in time delays where a damper or valve is required to open or close prior to fan or pump pressure build up. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Modes of Operation Definition: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Occupied Mode: a. The system shall operate in occupied mode whenever the schedule indicates an occupied time period or when any zone control space temperature sensor override device is in the override position or; b. The warm -up or cool down cycle is complete but the scheduled occupancy period start time has not been reached. 2. Warm Up Mode: a. The BMS shall calculate a representative zone temperature based on the average of selected zone temperatures. b. An optimal start program shall determine the required start time to bring the building's representative space temperature to its occupied heating setpoint by the scheduled occupancy period. c. Warm -up mode shall be initiated if: (1) The optimal start program determines that morning warm -up is required and the building is in unoccupied mode at the optimal start time. d. Warm Up mode shall end when: (1) The representative zone temperature reaches setpoint, or (2) Return air temperature rises above 68 degrees F, or (3) A scheduled occupancy period has started, or (4) The building enters after -hours override occupied mode. e. Upon ending warm -up mode, the building shall enter occupied mode. 3. Cool Down Mode: a. The BMS shall calculate a representative zone temperature based on the average of selected zone temperatures. b. An optimal start program shall determine the required start time to bring the building's representative space temperature to its occupied cooling setpoint by the scheduled occupancy period. c. Cool down mode shall be initiated if: (1) The optimal start program determines that cool down is required and the building is in unoccupied mode at the optimal start time. d. Cool down mode shall end when: (1) The representative zone temperature reaches setpoint, or (2) Return air temperature drops below 76 degrees F, or (3) A scheduled occupancy period has started, or (4) The building enters after -hours override occupied mode. e. Upon ending cool down mode, the building shall enter occupied mode. 4. Unoccupied Mode: a. The building is considered to be in unoccupied operation whenever it is not in warm -up, cool down or occupied operation. b. The system shall not operate whenever the operating schedule indicates an unoccupied time period. 5. Fire Mode: a. The system shall run in this mode based on input from the fire alarm system. This mode shall have priority over all other control modes. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.03 CONSTANT VOLUME VARIABLE TEMPERATURE AIR HANDLING UNIT (WATER ECONOMIZER) zz A. General: w ct 1. CRAC -1 TO 6 c 00 B. System Off: w = J 1.- 1. Condenser water control valve closed. cn u_ 2. Mechanical cooling system off. w 0 .3. All other control loops inactive. J C. System Start: N d z 1. Operator entered command at the BMS. H w 2. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedules_ z f- 1— O zH D. System Operation: Lli w D p 1. Unit shall report status to the BMS. 0 cn 2. Occupied Mode: 0 1- a. The condenser water valve shall open. = ui w b. The mechanical cooling system shall operate to maintain space temperature 1— H setpoint. c!- O. c. When the condenser water temperature is equal to or lower than 47 °F the unit cii z shall be in full economizer mode. to co d. When the space temperature cannot be maintained through the use of the 0 H water economizer sequence, modulate the cooling system as required to z maintain space set point. , e. Control the humidifier from a humidity sensor located in the return air as follows (CRAC -4 through 6 only): (1) Upon a drop in humidity sensed, the humidifier shall be energized and cycled as required to maintain the humidity at setpoint. 3. Unoccupied Mode: The system shall be off. 4. Automatic Switchover (CRAC -1 through 6 only): On a weekly basis one unit will be selected as the lead unit with the other units selected as the lag units and staged on as appropriate to maintain space temperature. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue E. System Stop: 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically bythe BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off' state as described above. F. Setpoints: 1. Space temperature 70 degrees F heating and 75 degrees F cooling. Alarm at BMS at +1- 2 degrees F from septpoint. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Safeties: 1 A differential pressure switch with indicator gauge installed across the filter shall zz • T- H. Fire Alarm: re j J U 1. Upon signal from fire alarm system, the unit shall shut down. v 0 3.04 VARIABLE VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: - H CO w . A. General: w 0 2 1. AC -1 and AC -2. . g Q co D B. System Off: = v I- 11 1. Minimum outside air, economizer and relief air dampers closed. . 2. Return air damper open. _ z O ' 3. Supply fan off. al j 4. Cooling system off. 2 0 5. All other control loops inactive. U 0E- wW I-U 1. Operator entered command at the BMS. u- ~O 2. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. Cu Z 0 C. D. System Operation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue System Start: indicate whenever the filter is obstructed and initiate a non - critical alarm at the BMS. 1. The supply fan starts. 2. A duct static pressure sensor located two- thirds down the main duct shall, through the BMS, modulate the fan speed drive to maintain the duct system static pressure setpoint. 3. Modulate the relief air dampers in sequence to maintain space differential pressure setpoint. 4. Warm Up and Cool Down Mode: a. During the warm up mode, the outside air damper, minimum outside air damper and relief air damper shall be closed and the return damper shall be open. The gas fired heating coil shall be activated. The cooling system shall be off. b. During the cool down mode, if outside air temperature and enthalpy is greater than the return air temperature and enthalpy, the dampers shall be positioned as described under Warm Up mode, otherwise the dampers shall be controlled as described in the occupied mode. The cooling system shall be modulated to maintain a discharge temperature of 55 degrees F. 5. Occupied Mode: a. The minimum outside air damper shall modulate to minimum airflow setpoint. If damper is fully open and cannot maintain airflow setpoint modulate return air damper closed to achieve minimum outside airflow setpoint. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -4 1. A differential pressure switch with indicator gauge installed across the filter shall indicate whenever the filter is obstructed and initiate a non - critical alarm at the BMS. 2. Cooling system alarm. 3. Supply fan variable frequency drive alarm. 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. When the outside air temperature and enthalpy is lower than the return air temperature and enthalpy modulate the economizer outside air and return air dampers as required to maintain supply temperature setpoint. c. When the supply air temperature cannot be maintained through the use of air economizer sequence modulate the cooling system as required to maintain setpoint. d. When the mixed air temperature at minimum outside air falls below 55 °F, the gas fired heating coil shall modulate to maintain the 55 °F supply air temperature setpoint. e. When all fan powered terminal (FPT) primary air dampers are less than 90% of maximum scheduled CFM the AC unit shall reset the supply air temperature upwards. When a single FPT primary air damper is at maximum CFM then the AC unit shall reset the supply air temperature downwards until the primary air damper is at 90% of maximum cfm or the supply air temperature is 55 °F. 6. Unoccupied Mode: The system shall be off. E. System Stop: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on a preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off" state as described above. Setpoints: 1. Supply air temperature between 55 and 65 degrees F. Alarm at BMS at +/- 2 degrees F from setpoint extremes. 2. Space pressure differential setpoint 0.05 -inch w.g. relative to outside. Alarm at BMS at +/- .02 -inch w.g from setpoint. 3. Supply duct static pressure setpoint one inch w.g. Alarm at BMS at +/- .25 -inch w.g from setpoint. G. Safeties: H. Fire Alarm: 1. Upon signal from fire alarm system, the unit shall shut down. 3.05 FAN POWERED VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT (SERIES TYPE): A. System Off: 1. Fan off. 2. Primary air damper closed. 3. Electric heating coil de- energized. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. System Start: 1. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. Operator entered command at the BMS. 3. Automatically on low space temperature alarm. C. System Operation: 1. Fan Control: a. Occupied and Warm Up /Cool Down Mode — The fan shall run continuously. 2. Primary Air Damper Control: a. Occupied and Cool down Mode — Damper shall modulate to provide primary airflow between minimum and maximum airflow setpoint to maintain space temperature setpoint. b. Warmup Mode — Damper shall be closed. 3. Electric Resistance Coil: a. The electric step controller shall maintain space temperature at the heating setpoint. Controller shall sequence with primary airflow damper and shall be off if primary airflow is greater than the minimum primary heating airflow setpoint. 4. Unoccupied Mode: The system shall be off. D. System Stop: 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off' state as described above. E. Setpoints: 1. Occupied space temperature setpoint of 74 degrees F. Alarm at BMS at +/- 2 degrees F from setpoint F. Safeties: 1. Fan shall stop if associated primary air system is shutoff by the fire alarm system. 3.06 COOLING TOWERS /CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM: A. System Off: 1. Cooling tower fans, circulation pump and filter system pump off. 2. Cooling tower bypass valve open. 3. Control loops inactive. B. System Start: 1. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. Automatically when there is demand for condenser water from air conditioning equipment. 3. Operator entered command at the BMS. September 30, 2003 Automatic Control Sequences Permit Issue 15985 -6 D. System Stop: 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on a preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off" state as described above. _J E. Setpoints: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. System Operation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Condenser Water System Filter Pumps: The pump shall operate whenever the condenser water basin circulation pump operates. 2. Condenser Temperature Control: a. Fan and Bypass Valve Operation: The lead cooling tower fan(s) shall be staged from off /small motor /large motor with the tower isolation valve open and the tower bypass valve closed to maintain the condenser water supply temperature setpoint. If both towers are operating the fans shall be staged in the following order on a rise in condenser water supply temperature — both units off, first tower small motor, second tower small motor, first tower large motor, second tower large motor. If the fans are off, a further drop in condenser water supply temperature shall cause the tower bypass valve to modulate open to maintain condenser water setpoint. Fan cycling shall be restricted to the minimum cycle times recommended by the tower manufacturer. Include a software delay between small and large motor if not integral to the fan motor starters. b. Fan and Bypass Valve Operation: The cooling tower fans shall be staged from off to full speed in unison, with the tower isolation valve open and the tower bypass valve closed to maintain the condenser water supply setpoint. If the fans are off, a further drop in condenser water supply temperature shall cause the tower bypass valve to modulate open to maintain condenser water supply temperature setpoint. 1. Condenser Water Supply Temperature Setpoint: The setpoint shall be determined by the outside air wet bulb temperature and cooling tower approach. The setpoint shall not be less than that recommended for safe operation of the air conditioning units. Setpoint shall be set initially at 76 degrees F with alarm at + 80 degrees F. As outside air temperature drops the cooling tower leaving water temperature shall drop to a minimum of 47 °F with alarm at 43 °F. F. Safeties: 1. Cooling Tower Ice Alarm: Each cooling tower shall be supplied with a fan vibration switch. The switch shall be wired to alarm at the BMS that the possibility of ice build up on the cooling tower has occurred. 2. Condenser Water Freeze Alarm: If the condenser water sump temperature falls to 38 degrees F, an alarm at the BMS indicating low temperature shall notify the operator that the following sequence has commenced. All outside air dampers shall close at air handling units if the system is in operation. Sump heating elements shall be activated. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.07 TOILET EXHAUST LOADING DOCK AND TELECOM ROOM EXHAUST FANS 3.08 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS 2. Exhaust dampers closed. A. System Off: 1. Fan and gas heating system shall be off. System Start/Stop: 1. Automatically from internal control system. System Operation: UNISYS - Tukwila A. System Off: Z 1. Fans off Z ui e: 2 B. - System Start: c.) Q co 1. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. J H 2. Operator entered command at the BMS. `"° 3. TF -1 shall be activated to maintain a minimum space temperature of 65 °F. p 4. TF -2 shall be activated to maintain a maximum space temperature of 75 °F. 2 g 5. System Operation: u_ d 1. Dampers open. � w ' 2. Fans start after proof of damper opening. z IL _ , HO D. System Stop: w w 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on a v N preprogrammed schedule. '- O 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off" state as w H ' described above. H v u- E. Alarms: w z 1. Fan failure. H H z 1. The unit heaters shall modulate to maintain a minimum space temperature in the attic of 45 °F at all times. September 30, 2003 Automatic Control Sequences Permit Issue 15985 -8 3.10 INPUT /OUTPUT SUMMARY SHEETS 1 _J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.09 PLENUM VENTS Z w A. System Operation: 6 m JO 1 When the plenum temperature falls below 70 °F the dampers shall be closed. v O vi w 2. When the plenum temperature rises above 75 °F the dampers shall be open. H w ; wO u. A. The following pages provide a list of input/output points. .The Contractor shall provide A. necessary hardware and software including sensors and wiring. _ September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -9 1- O Z uf 0 w 2 1-U - . IL O • w Z U I.. O H Z SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT . ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H21 SET POINT ADJ. SPEED CONTROL - - - - - -- - -- STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL OFF -ON OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG AIIVNI8 HOIH LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP RESET COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME MORNING WARMUP OUTDOOR X X X 1 CCCT -1 X X X X X X X X X 2, 3 .CCCT-2 X X X X X X X X X 2, 3 CWP -1. X X X X X X X 4 CWP -2 X X X X X X X . 4 BASIN FILTRATION X X X . CT BYPASS VALVE X X CW DIFF. PRESSURE SENSOR . X X ET -1 X X X DOMESTIC WATER FILL VALVE X X X 5 GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1. Outdoor air temperatures and RH one location. 2. Supply and return condenser water temperatures. 3. Provide alarms for main motor, pony motor, low basin water temperature and high /low basin water level. 4. VFD speed control. 5. Provide alarm if fill valve remains open for longer than 2 minutes (adj). September 30, 2003 Permit Issue CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -10 z • W re 6 J U O 0 W t J = H � W W 2 ( 12 d Z I- O z I W • w U � O �. W W H u- O . W z u F- � O z SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT. OUTPUT INPUT' OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H2I SET POINT ADJ. SPEED CONTROL STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO OPEN- CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S32I COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME MORNING WARMUP AC UNIT X X X X X X X X X X SUPPLY FAN X 1 SUPPLY AIR - X X X 2 RETURN AIR FAN X 1 RETURN AIR X X SPACE X X 3 GENERAL NOTES • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 . VFD speed control. 2. Duct static pressure. 3. Space differential pressure. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue VARIABLE VOLUME AC UNITS (TYPICAL FOR 2) UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -11 z = w QQ � J U 00 co o W= H w g Q _ CO = F W I-O z �. w U O H w W � r O w U = O /- z SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE HS SET POINT ADJ. STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO-d40 OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP RESET COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME MORNING WARMUP AC UNIT X X X X X X X X X SPACE X X 1 • • GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS COMPUTER ROOM AC UNITS . RH for Statement Room only. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -12 SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES NO TES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H21 MO1I SET POINT ADJ. PRIMARY AIR VOLUME STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S321 COLOR GRAPHIC 3WLL Nf121 MORNING WARMUP FPT X X X X X X X X X ELECTRIC HEATING X SPACE X X X GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLER UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -13 Z W 6 • 2 -a 0 U 0 W = F- N u_ w 2 -71 = ▪ W Z � Z �. w w U O U , off w w • U u. Les so_ 0 ~ Z SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE 1 PRESSURE H2i SET POINT ADJ. STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S32I COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME MORNING WARMUP EF -1 X X X X X X TF -1 X X X X X X X TF -2 X X X X X X X GENERATOR X X X 1,2 UPS X X X PLENUM X X X PLENUM VENT DAMPERS X X X FIRE ALARM X • 3, 4 GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1. On /Off operation status. 2. General alarm monitoring. 3. Trouble and alarm. 4. Notification from fire alarm to reset to normal BMS operation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS END OF SECTION UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -14 7. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Z w Q : g 00 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: co O w = 1. Adjust and balance hydronic systems. 2. Adjust and balance domestic hot water systems. uj 0 3. Adjust and balance air systems. 2 4. Perform acoustic measurements to systems. aa Q d F-= Z 0 Z w U O O - : 0 I- w uj L O w z U to f- I- O Z PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. E. F. SECTION 15990 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BALANCING Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. Section 15100 - Valves. Section 15160 - Pumps. Section 15708 - Closed Circuit Cooling Tower. Section 15731 - Computer Room Air Conditioning Units. Section 157343 - Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems. G. Section 15771 - Packaged Air - Cooler Roof -Top Units. H. Section 15860 - Fans. I. Section 15910 - Dampers. J. Section 15930 - Air Terminal Units. K. Section 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets. L. Section 15985 - Automatic Control Sequences. 1.03 - QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each balancing contractor providing a bid for this work shall submit the following information with the bid, or the bid shall not be accepted by the Owner. 1. List previous projects of similar scope with dates that projects were executed. 2. Outline organization of contractor, including names of principals, years of operation, address, and phone number. September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit Issue 15990 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. The final balancing, testing, and adjustments of the complete mechanical systems shall be the direct responsibility of the balancing contractor, including all costs for doing this work and provision of the personnel, materials, tools, and instrumentation to accomplish this work. Meet standards contained in the AABC National Standard Chapter 17 through 26 and other criteria as set forth in these specifications. C. The Contractor must primarily be engaged in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. The Contractor must be AABC certified. 1.04 PROCEDURES 3. List instruments owned by contractor and procedures that will be used on this project. 4. List name of job site supervisor that will execute this work and a resume of individual's specific work experience. 5. Provide a sample of a balance report on a project of similar scope. A. General: Prior to commencement of balancing, review proposed schedule, methods and instruments to be used in balancing with the Architect. Include descriptive data, procedure data and sample forms. B. Descriptive Data: Review contract documents, shop drawings released for construction, design concepts and general function of each system including associated equipment and operation cycles. Confirm listing of flow and terminal measurements to be performed; selection points for proposed sound measurements. C. Procedure Data: Outline procedures for taking test measurements to establish compliance with requirements. Specify type of instruments to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and correction factors. Verify access to valves, dampers and equipment for test and balancing. D. Sample Forms: Submit forms showing application of procedures to typical systems. Forms shall be of AABC format. E. AABC test sheets required are as follows: 1. Air Moving Equipment Test Sheet. 2. Exhaust Fan Test Sheet (Supply, Return, Relief Fans). 3. Air Inlet and Outlet Test Sheet. 4. Water Balance Element Test Sheet. 5. Circulating Water Pump Data Sheet. 6. Duct Traverse Zone Totals Sheet. 7. Duct Traverse Readings Sheet. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit excerpts from recent previous final balancing reports. B. Submit certification of most recent calibration of all instruments to be used on this project. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -2 z � re w QQ � J 0 0 0 CO H • w w O 2 g _° � w z � � o z �- w 2 o N. o w w u. O w z U =, O ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z A. The balancing contractor shall check and report defects or deficiencies that may affect !- w re f U 1.06 CONTRACTOR COOPERATION balancing. 1. Mechanical contractor shall cooperate with the balancing contractor to: a. Provide sufficient time before final completion date and individual equipment manufacturer's start-up so that balancing can be accomplished. b. Provide immediate materials, labor and tools to make corrections without delay. c. Place heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue the operation for each working day of testing and balancing. d. Advise testing and balancing contractor of changes made to the system during construction. e. Install required test holes or wells complete with removable and replaceable plugs or caps. f. Make necessary revisions to controls, valves, dampers, fan and pump drives and consult with equipment manufacturers as required to achieve the specified system's performance. Supply and install dampers as specified and shown on drawings, and where required to obtain final system balance. h. Provide lifts, ladders, scaffolds, tools and labor to assist the work of the balancing contractor, including removing ceiling tiles, guards, adjusting pulleys, belts; replace when finished. i. Building Management System contractor shall cooperate with and work with the balancing contractor when setting damper linkages, minimum outside air dampers, and other air volume devices, and shall be available for readjusting of dampers, devices or controls that are not properly calibrated. j. Set pressure regulating and reducing valves to operating and code conditions. k. Check and set relief and safety valves to code requirements. Clean strainers. Check air filters immediately prior to air balancing. m. Open fire dampers. Provide certification of damper operation as required by Section 15910: Dampers. n Verify return air openings have been provided in full height walls as specified, shown on the Drawings or as required for proper balancing and system operation. o. Variable pitch sheaves supplied on 20 horsepower motors and larger shall be changed to fixed sheaves after the air balance is completed. Provide such sheaves. September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit Issue 15990 -3 w U� o I- . w O w z U= O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENTS A. Instruments for testing and balancing of air and hydronic systems shall have been calibrated within a period of 6 months and verified for accuracy prior to start of work. B. Submit a list of equipment, which will be used for the balancing of systems and test and calibration certification by an independent instrument calibration laboratory indicating date of test, and test results showing accuracy and repeatability are within limitations acceptable to the AABC. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURE A. Balance to maximum measured flow deviation from specified values of 10 percent at terminal device and 5 percent at equipment or mean sound level deviation of 15 decibels. B. Permanently mark settings on valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices. C. Take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Architect. E. At the completion of balancing procedures, allow for a minimum of 2 days for the Architect to witness test procedures and conduct operational tests. . 3.02 SITE VISITS A. A review of the installation shall be made prior to commencing balancing work and any additional dampers or valves required for proper balance shall be reviewed with the Architect and the Contractor. B. The Test and Balance Contractor shall visit the job site a minimum of 3 times during the ductwork, equipment and piping installations. Site Visit Reports shall be submitted to the Architect listing any deficiencies found. Identify in the report any additional balancing valves or dampers required. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A. Mechanical systems shall not be considered ready for final inspection until balancing results acceptable to the Architect are obtained. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -4 p»v z w QQ � JU U CO J w O g? N v = w 1— _ Z �. F— O ZH W w O co O — 0 F— LU i u u. O w Z U = O z - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. If it is found that the specified airflows cannot be achieved on portions of the system, the actual conditions shall be reported to the Architect for consideration of corrective action before continuing the balance procedure. C. If measured flow at final inspection shows deviation of 10 percent or more or mean sound level deviation of 10 decibels or more from the certified report listings for more than 10 percent of selected areas, the report shall be rejected. D. If report is rejected, systems shall be rebalanced and a new certified report submitted. 3.04 BALANCING REPORT A. Submit a draft copy of reports prior to final acceptance of project. Provide copies of final report for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. B. Provide reports in durable soft cover, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents, indexing tabs and cover identification at front and side. C. include types, serial number and dates of calibration of instruments. D. Record test data on a sepia made from the latest available revised set of mechanical shop drawings and submit copies upon completion of the balancing contract. E. Install at each piece of mechanical equipment a "Data Register" showing significant operating temperatures, pressures, amperes, voltage, and brake horsepower. "Data Register" shall be enclosed in a hard, clear plastic holder securely attached to the equipment or to a wall in the adjacent area. F. Submit with report, fan and pump curves with operating conditions plotted. Submit grille and diffuser shop drawings and diffusion factors. G. Report shall be indexed as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue a. Air Summary Procedure Instrumentation Drawings Equipment Summary Fan Sheets Fan Curves Fan Profile Data Static Data Air Monitoring Station Data Traverse Data and Schedule Terminal Unit Summary Outlet Data Summary and Schematics (per system) Building Pressurization Data Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -5 �� . QQ 2 J U 00 CO 0 w= J 1-- w O u. c.9..d � z I— O w ~ D o 0 c - 1 2 U 1— w uj • O. ui U= O ff - z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Water Summary Procedure Instrumentation Pump Data Pump Curves Flow Stations Coils Equipment Data Element Data Summary and Schematics (per system) c. Sound Summary Procedure Instrumentation Drawings Profile - Scale Readings d. Fire Damper Certification e. Copy of Contractor's Certification 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Execute air systems balancing for each air system in accordance with AABC specifications and as described herein. B. Make tests with supply, return and exhaust systems operating and doors, windows, closed or in their normal operation condition. C. Test and adjust fan or blower speed to design requirements. D. Test and record motor full Toad amps. Record each installed motor manufacturer and motor efficiency. E. Traverse main supply air ducts, using a pitot tube and manometer. Calibrate the manometer to read two significant figures in velocity pressure ranges. Take a minimum 16 readings per traverse. The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse the total air quantity supplied by the fan and to verify the distribution of air to zones. A main duct is defined as any of the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. A duct serving 5 or more outlets. 2. A duct serving 3 or more branch ducts. 3. A duct serving a hydronic coil. 4. A zone duct from a fan powered VAV terminal unit. 5. A duct emanating from a fan discharge or plenum and terminating at one or more outlets. Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -6 • I MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Submit data in support of supply fans deliveries by the following four methods. For return, relief and exhaust fans, methods 1 and 4 are sufficient: 1. By summation of the air quantity readings at inlets or outlets. 2. By duct traverses of main supply ducts. 3. By rotating vane traverse across the filter bank or coil bank. 4. By plotting revolutions per minute and static pressure readings on the fan curve. Air density corrections must be indicated. G. Test and record required and measured system static pressures; filter differential, coil differential and fan total static pressure. H. Test and adjust systems for design recirculated airflow rates. I. Test and adjust system for design outside airflow rates. J. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures. K. Install one -inch roll media filters upstream of air filters to impose 90 percent of the manufacturer's recommended final filter air pressure drop. L. Adjust main supply and return ducts to proper design flow rates. M. Inspect and confirm all fire dampers are open, all duct access doors are closed and fire damper fusible finks are accessible. N. Adjust zones to proper design, supply and return flow rates. O. Test and adjust each air inlet and air outlet and transfer duct to within 10 percent of design requirements. P. Identify each air inlet, air outlet, transfer duct and transfer wall opening as to location and area. Q. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and testing equipment. Use manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations. R. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, report the required face and neck -J velocity, test face and neck velocity, and required air pressure drop and flow rate. Test after adjustments. S. Building Management System contractor shall set adjustments of automatically operated inlet vanes, cones, plugs and all dampers to operate as indicated in cooperation with balancing contractor. T. Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts, dumping, and to prevent "short circuiting" between supply and return outlets. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -7 z w re 2 J U U O N J CO w J u. N d H Z = i- 0 Z 1- al w 0 0- 0H w w I- - U O w Z 0 O F- z 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS U. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. Remove air slots on return air troffers to achieve adequate relief and minimize pressure drop into the ceiling plenum. V. Vary total system airflow rates by adjustment of fan speeds or fan volume- varying devices. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. Record installed fan drive assemblies; fan sheaves, motor sheaves, belts and motors. X. The final balanced condition of each area shall include testing and adjusting of pressure conditions. Test and record building pressurization levels in variable volume systems throughout full range of fan delivery rates, under both heating and cooling conditions. Document abnormal building leakage conditions noted.. Y. Complete balancing to achieve positive building pressure unless otherwise instructed. A positive pressure relative to outside of 0.05 -inch water gauge minimum and 0.10 -inch water gauge maximum shall be achieved, measure with negligible, outside wind velocity. 3.06 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS PROCEDURE UNISYS - Tukwila A. Preparation of System — Phase I: The hydronic system shall be prepared for balancing in the following manner: 1. Open valves to full position including coil stop valves; close bypass valves; and return line balance valves. 2. Examine water in system to determine if it has been treated and is clean. 3. Check pump rotation. 4. Check expansion tanks to ensure that they are not air bound and that the system is full of water. 5. Check air separators and air vents at hydronic coils and high points of water systems to ensure that they are installed properly and are operating freely. Make certain all air is removed from circulating system. 6. Set temperature controls to close all automatic bypass valves and provide full flow through coils. 7. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 8. Check and set operating temperature of closed circuit cooling tower at design requirements. 9. Execute air balance before water balance is initiated. B. Test and Balance Procedure — Phase II: 1. Check operation of variable speed pump and record pump data at varying percentages of full flow. 2. Set pumps to deliver approximately 10 percent excess flow volume if possible. Do not overload motors. September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit Issue 15990 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Adjust flow through cooling tower. 4. Check and record entering and leaving water temperatures and pressure drop through closed circuit cooling tower. Reset to design temperatures. 5. Check and record water temperature at inlet side of coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures from source. 6. Where automatic flow control valves are installed verify that the operating pressure differential across the valve taps is within the range indicated on the submittal data sheet for that model number. 7. Position and mark/lock manual calibrated balance valves for design flow through coils, AC units, heat pumps, convectors and all other items in system requiring circulation of condenser water. 8. Upon completion of flow readings and coil adjustments, mark settings and record data. 9. Ensure bypass valves are tightly closed. C. Test and Balance Procedure — Phase 111: 3.07 BALANCING DATA 1. After making adjustments to coils, recheck settings at pumps. Readjust if required. 2. Install pressure gauges on each coil then read pressure drop through coil and set flow rate on call for full flow through coil. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure drop. 3. Balance flow through equipment and coils by means of pressure drop. Obtain curves from the various manufacturers indicating the relationship between flow and pressure drop through the coils and equipment. Take readings on calibrated test gauges. 4. Upon completion of the water balance, reconcile the total heat transfer through coils by recording the entering and leaving water temperatures and the entering and leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures. 5. Upon completion of balancing, adjust differential bypasses for the same pressure drop on full bypass as on full flow. A. Air Handling Equipment Installation Data: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Manufacturer, model and size Arrangement, discharge and class Motor type, horsepower, speed, efficiency, voltage, phase, cycles and full Toad amperes Location and final identification B. Air Handling Equipment Design Data: Total airflow rate Static pressure across coil, filter, damper, mixing box sections and total Motor horsepower, speed, efficiency, voltage and amperes Fan speed and brake horsepower Hydronic coil inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures Initial filter air pressure drop Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -9 z • z 6 J U O 0 CO 0 CO UJ J CO W w 0 ga = �. z � I- O w ~ w 2 0 U C1 I- wW F O w 0 0 f- z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Air Handling Equipment Recorded Data: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Total airflow rate Static pressure across coil, filter, damper, mixing box sections and total Fan speed and brake horsepower Motor operating amperes Inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures Filter air pressure drop D. Duct Air Quantities: Mains, Branches, Outside Air and Exhausts (Maximum and Minimum): Duct sizes Number of pressure readings Sum of velocity measurements Average velocity Duct recorded airflow rate Duct design airflow rates Air Inlets and Outlets: Inlet/outlet identification location and designation Manufacturer's catalogue identification and type Application factors Design and recorded velocities Design and recorded airflow rates Deflector vane or diffuser cone settings F. Building Pressurization Data: Outside air temperatures and humidities Outside wind velocity Building pressures plotted with respect to systems Supply air, return air and exhaust airflow rates for varying damper positions Locations of pressure measuring points, inside and outside building • G. Pump Installation Data: Manufacturer, model and size Impeller diameter Drive type Motor type, horsepower, efficiency, speed, voltage, phase, cycles and full load motor amperes H. Pump Design Data: Flow rate and head pressure Pump speed and horsepower Pump efficiency Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -10 _J J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila I. Pump Recorded Data: Discharge and suction pressures (full flow and no flow) Operating pressure and total dynamic head }' w Operating rate (from pump curves if metering not provided or from variable speed controller) � w 2 Motor operating amperes -i v Balancing valve setting (full open, 60 percent open etc.) V O or) J. Expansion Tank Installation Data: w z f- Manufacturer, size, capacity w O, Pressure reducing valve setting 2 Pressure relief valve setting g Q D K. Heating Equipment Recorded Data: = v . 1 ._w Element type and identification (location and designation) z H : Entering and leaving temperatures z O0; Flow rates and pressure drops w w L. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Design Data: U N O 0 1— Heat transfer rate w w . Water pressure drop across coil H U Air static pressure drop u. 0 Entering and leaving water temperatures z Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures v So—: M. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Recorded Data: O z September 30, 2003 Permit issue Element type and identification Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures Entering and leaving water temperatures Water pressure drop across coil Water pressure drop across bypass valve Air static pressure drop Air and water flow rates Adjusted temperature rise or drop Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. Sound Level Data: Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument Overall decibels (A) level Reading at each octave band frequency from 31.5 Hz to 16 kilohertz Noise criteria (NC) curves plotted and compared to those recommended by ASHRAE or AABC publications O. Sound Level Recorded Data: Air Inlets and Outlets Fan Powered Terminal Units Air Handling Units Closed Circuit Cooling Towers VFD's Fans AC Units END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit issue 15990 -12 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 0 O J A. Mechanical Equipment Starting and Testing - Section 15992 co B. Mechanical System Starting and Testing - Section 15993 w 0 1.02 GENERAL g v_ � 0 A. Prior to starting, testing, balancing, adjusting and cleaning processes, verify with Architect = any tests required to be witnessed. Provide sufficient notice to Architect prior to H W w commencement of procedures. ? F- O B. Architect shall be allowed to witness all testing, adjusting, starting, balancing and cleaning w U � C. Assume all costs associated with starting, testing, balancing and adjusting, including the p 1-- supply of testing or cleaning medium. = w w z A. Prior to starting equipment or systems, obtain and review manufacturer's installation, v operation and starting instructions. Read in conjunction with procedures specified herein. z B. Use manufacturer's and supplier's starting personnel where required to maintain validity of manufacturer's warranty. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS C. Compare installation to manufacturer's published data. Record discrepancies. Correct deviations detrimental to equipment performance prior to starting equipment. 1.04 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION A. Several processes involved in starting procedures defined in this section may be duplications of authorities verification. To facilitate expedient turnover of building, arrange for authorities to witness these procedures. B. Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and comply with rules and regulations of authorities have jurisdiction. Include copies of certificates with starting reports. 1.05 USE OF INSTRUMENTS SUPPLIED UNDER CONTRACT A. Use equipment supplied for this project testing, balancing and adjusting. Ensure equipment is properly calibrated and is proven to be in good working condition. September 30, 2003 SECTION 15991 GENERAL MECHANICAL STARTING AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS procedures. General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements Permit Issue 15991 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. After proper calibration: 1. Use probe type flow meter and fittings supplied for this project to verify flows and volumes. 2. Use thermometers and pressure gauges supplied for this project to verify temperatures and pressures. 3. Use the airflow measuring stations to verify airflows. C Provide calibration histories for each instrument. Recalibration of use of other instruments will be required if accuracy of readings is questioned by Architect. 1.06 CONTRACTOR TESTING INSTRUMENTS A. Provide two -way radios and ladders as required to complete the program as outlined in this specification. Provide all safety equipment required for personnel involved in the starting, testing, balancing and adjusting program. Provide listing of equipment and instruments, which will be used in starting, testing, balancing and adjusting mechanical equipment for approval and review by Architect. B. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements 15991 -2 _ z r PART 1 — GENERAL c 1.01 WORK INCLUDED v 0 CO CI A. Check, start and test each piece of mechanical equipment. Verify that the equipment has t LLI 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS wO MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 FIELD REPORTS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15992 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT — EQUIPMENT STARTING AND TESTING been properly installed and is operating at a level, which meets the specified requirements. A. Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions. N d B. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. H Ili C. Section 15991 -.General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements. Z O LIJ w - D. Section 15993 - Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing. v o 1 . 0 3 FACTORY TRAINED REPRESENTATIVES 0 H . 7 - A. Use factory trained representatives and submit manufacturer's check sheets for starting the H LIJ U . ; following specialty equipment: u_ w Z N O z 1. Closed Circuit Cooling towers. 2. Variable speed drives. 3. Building Management System. 4. Chemical cleaning and treatment. 5. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units. B. Use manufacturer's factory trained personnel where required to maintain manufacturer's warranties. A. Submit field reports documenting the starting and testing procedures performed, observations and tests results obtained. B. Submit field reports in accordance with Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 FLUID HANDLING EQUIPMENT A. Pumps: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data, including: (1) Make /model /size. (2) Impeller size. (3) Seal type. (4) Lubrication fittings. (5) Motor size, speed, efficiency, and voltage. (6) Flow gallons per minute (gallons per minute). (7) Head feet of water column (feet water column). b. Ensure pump installation is as specified and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Fill out manufacturer's check sheet including: (1) Pump is level. (2) Isolation valves, strainers, check valves are installed properly. (3) Pump suction has sufficient length of straight run. (4) Air is completely bled off piping system. (5) Expansion tank is charged and on -line. (6) Ensure strainers have screens in place and are clean. (7) Ensure electrical connections are properly made. (8) Ensure nameplate is readily visible. (9) Check clearance space adequately permits removal or servicing. (10) Check voltage to pump motor. c. Ensure chemical cleaning of piping system is completed. d. Check and adjust oil levels bearing lubrication. 2. Starting: a. Start pumps as per manufacturer's recommendations. b. Ensure impeller and motor are rotating in the correct direction. 3. Post Starting: a. Check chemical treatment status. b. Run -in pumps for minimum 12 continuous hours. . c. Ensure flows through parallel pumps are equally balanced. d. Record motor power consumption. e. Ensure mechanical seals do not leak. Ensure packing gland type seals are wetted. f. Calculate overall pump efficiency. g. Calculate /check Net Positive Suction Head. h. Verify the motor has sufficient airflow around to allow cooling. i. Plot operating point at time of starting on pump curve. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Pre - Interim Acceptance: a. Change pump seals. b. Clean strainers. c. Trim pump impeller at the factory and verify flows, based upon information .F- z recorded and documented during balancing and adjusting. g 6 B. Closed Circuit Cooling Towers: 0 0 co o co w W _ w w u. ? N jw z � 1-- w ~ 0 O N o w W I- LL Z W U = 0 C. Miscellaneous Fluid Handling Equipment: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to the installed data including: (1) Make /model /size (2) Fan motor size, efficiency and speed options, electrical consumption (3) Accessories including access ladder (4) Control sequences (5) Construction b. Prior to starting, perform the following: (1) Clean entire unit and wash down basins. (2) Ensure all accessories are properly installed. (3) Check motor at all stages of capacity overloads on all 3 leads. (4) Lubricate motor bearings and check motor insulation. (5) Check fan for freely rotating wheel and for blade tip clearance. (6) Check water make -up float and level controls. (7) Check for clearance of airflow and service. (8) Check oil level in gear reducer. (9) Check for isolation and structural support. (10) Ensure chemical treatment is properly working. (11) Ensure water meters are properly working. (12) Verify water level in multiple cell cooling towers are equalized. 2. Starting: a. Start as per the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Fill out manufacturer's check sheets. c. Post - Starting: (1) Check fan is rotating in correct direction. (2) Check water level. (3) Check for chemical treatment levels. (4) With unit running on low speed and on high speed, provide radiated acoustical measurements on both faces, space directly beneath unit, and from 50 feet away on all four sides. d. Pre - Interim Acceptance: (1) Check tower for proper basin water level. (2) Check and document chemical treatment level. 1. Confirm all gauges and thermometers can be read from the floor level and they are installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Verify the following equipment is installed and calibrated as per manufacturer's recommendations. Fill out manufacturer's start -up sheets: a. PRV's b. Air eliminator c. Strainers Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -3 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z A. Air Handling Units: 6 0 0 N O un w w = J 1— 3.02 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT September 30, 2003 Permit Issue d. Check valves e. Balancing valves 1. Pre- Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawings data to installed data including: (1) Make /model /size (2) Fan wheel size (3) Nameplate flow, static pressure (4) Motor size, speed, efficiency, type, and voltage (5) Heating coil, cooling coil (6) Humidifier (7) Mixing baffles (8) Retum, exhaust and outside air motorized dampers, operation and size. (9) Filters. (10) Vibration isolation, flexible connections and seismic restraints (internal and extemal). (11) Special features — access doors, liners, inlet vanes, labels. (12) Ensure variable speed drive is operational. (13) Ensure silencers are installed. b. Lubricate bearings on fans as per manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure fan wheel rotates smoothly without binding. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension. c. Vacuum out air system plenums and ductwork. d. Ensure temporary filters are installed. Under no circumstances run systems without filters installed. e. Ensure all balancing dampers are open and ductwork is complete. For VAV systems, ensure that at least 60 percent of terminal units are open. f. Ensure minimum position specified for terminal units are properly set. g. Ensure all coils are in operation. h. On parallel fan systems, ensure backdraft dampers are installed. Ensure electrical connections are completed and system disconnects are within visual access of unit. j. Ensure controls are operational. k. Ensure inlet and discharge duct geometry are properly installed. 2. Starting: a. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. b. Check fan and motor for correct rotation. 3. Post - Starting: a. Check vibration isolation and seismic restraints. b. Check radiated and discharge acoustics at design conditions. c. Run for one hour and check filters, coils, and humidifier bypass. Seal as required. d. Determine fan speed, airflow rates, static pressure and record on fan curve. e. Effectiveness of mixing chamber. Measure temperature profile. Adjust mixing baffles. f. Balance water flow across humidifier and ensure water treatment is operational. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -4 z J -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Pre - Interim Acceptance: a. Replace temporary filters with permanent filters. z b. Vacuum heating coil and cooling coil. c. Re- lubricate all bearings. F- z d. Perform acoustical measurements of discharge plus radiated levels at re ec operating conditions after entire system is operational. 6 c e. Check belt for tension and wear. U O N ❑ B. Fans: J H 1. Pre - Starting: Lu p a. Check the specified data and the shop drawing data against the installed 2 data including: (1) Make /model /size. u- ¢. (2) Fan wheel size. N C=! (3) Nameplate airflow, static pressure. H w (4) Motor size, speed, and efficiency. Z z (5) Backdraft dampers. f- O ' (6) Accessories. w I— (7) Special features. 2 m .. b. Lubricate bearings on fans as per manufacturer's recommendations. m 0 Ensure wheels rotate freely without binding. 0 92 .. c. Ensure ductwork and fan casing is free of dirt or foreign material. 0 H- d. Ensure electrical connections are properly made and fan disconnects are = W properly located. H H e. Ensure inlet and discharge duct geometry is properly installed. u' O'. 2. Starting: ui Z co a. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. U b. Check fan and motor for correct rotation. ~ O F- 3. Post - Starting: z a. Check isolation and flexible connections. b. Check radiated and discharge sound power levels. c. Determine speed, airflow rates, static pressure and record on fan curve. d: Pre - Interim Acceptance: (1) Re- lubricate all bearings. (2) Perform measurements of discharge, inlet and radiated sound power levels after entire system is balanced and adjusted. C. Fan Powered Terminal Units: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including the following: (1) Make /model /size. (2) Maximum airflow (cfm) (3) Minimum airflow (cfm) (4) Direct or reverse acting controls. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Miscellaneous Air Handling Devices: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Check the following: (1) Inlet duct connection: (a) Must have 4 duct diameters to box inlet. (b) Must not have more than 12 inches flexible duct. (c) Must not have flow straightening vanes. (2) Access to controls. (3) Completeness of control documents. (4) Silencer /acoustic duct. (5) Exterior casing or controls are not damaged. (6) Support. 2. Starting: a. Follow manufacturer's starting procedures. 3. Post- Starting: a. Measure airflow and inlet static at full flow. b. Set maximum airflows. c. Set minimum airflows. d. Determine minimum static pressure necessary to provide design airflow. e. Measure radiated sound power levels at 2 inches inlet static. f. Measure discharge sound power levels at 10 feet downstream. g. Check damper stroke over full range, minimum to maximum. h. Measure inlet air temperature. 4. Pre- Interim Acceptance: Not applicable. 1. Motorized Dampers: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including: (1) Make /model. (2) Size — minimum, maximum. (3) Operator. b. Review the installation to ensure: (1) No cracks around damper frame. (2) Blades close and seals engage completely. (3) Damper strokes fully open to fully closed. (4) Suitable access and identification. 2. Gravity/Barometric Dampers: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including: (1) Make /model. (2) Size. (3) Throat and hood size. (4) Blade construction. (5) Blade seals. b. Review the installations to ensure: (1) Damper fully closes — adjust weights. (2) No cracks or air leakage around frame. 3. Air Outlets: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data; to installed data including: (1) Make /model. (2) Throat size. (3) Accessories. (4) Construction. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -6 A. Variable Speed Drive Units: 1. These starting procedures shall only be performed by qualified and factory trained technicians. 2. Visually inspect for the following items prior to commencing manufacturer's recommended starting procedures: a. Voltage of unit and motor are same. J b. Transformer is properly installed. c. Unit has U.L. labels. B. Tanks: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Review the installation to ensure: (1) Air outlet is clean. (2) Air outlet is centered in space within the constraints of room layout. c. Balance air outlet to specified value. d. Take acoustical measurement on each outlet at specified airflows and compare to published data. 4. Balancing Dampers: a. Check installation to ensure: (1) Damper can open and close fully. (2) Access is clearly marked. (3) Damper is not located in a turbulent air stream. 3.03 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 1. Pre - Starting: a. Check the specified and shop drawing data against the installed data including: (1) Make /model /size /volume. (2) Pressure rating. (3) Labels ASME. b. Visually inspect to ensure no damage to: (1) Access ports /manholes. (2) • Piping sizes — inlet/outlet are correct. (3) Lining is intact and not damaged. (4) Piping is accessible to tank removal. c. Ensure adequate access to manholes. 2. Starting: Not applicable. 3. Post - Starting: a. Verify operation of: (1) Drain line (2) Make -up line if applicable (3) Gauge glass (4) Diaphragm if applicable 4. Pre - Interim Acceptable: Not applicable. September 30, 2003 Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing Permit Issue 15992 -7 z z . re 6 00 o O W = J I- u- WO u_ Q = d. F- W z � I- 0 Z ~ uj U .O 52 :. C3 H UU =U H m. = iii U - O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. DX Computer Room Air Conditioning Units: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including: (1) Make /model /size. (2) Electrical characteristics. (3) Cooling output. (4) Accessories: temperature controller, filters, leak detection, condensate pump. (5) Condenser water flow. (6) Airflow, external static pressure. (7) Discharge air temperature: dry bulb /wet bulb. (8) Entering air temperature: dry bulb /wet bulb. b. After installation, check the following: (1) Drain pan and drain line installed correctly. (2) Unit is level and seismically restrained. (3) Internal isolators installed. (4) Condenser water complete. (5) Bearings greased. (6) Filters installed and are clean. 2. Starting: a. Start unit as per manufacturer's recommendations. b. Fill out manufacturer's check sheets. c. Post- Starting: (1) Verify the following: (a) Airflow. (b) Static pressure. (c) Entering dry bulb /wet bulb. (d) Leaving dry bulb /wet bulb. (e) Entering water temperature. (f) Leaving water temperature. (g) Water flow rates. (h) Perform acoustical measurements. d. Pre - Interim Acceptance: (1) Change filters. END OF SECTION Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -8 -a MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z � w QQ 2 J U U A. Check, start and test each system, verify that each system is operational and will operate to w H . meet the specified operating criteria. N w w O u . = d I— w Z �. I—O Z p co U O — O I— W • W LL , O . Cu co O F- z PART 1 — GENERAL ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15993 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS STARTING AND TESTING 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Mechanical General Provisions - Section 15010. B. Mechanical Systems Balancing - Section 15990. C. General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements - Section 15991. D. Mechanical Equipment Starting and Testing - Section 15992. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEM A. Ensure piping in system is completed prior to performing cleaning, testing and starting operations. B. Ensure all valves are accessible. . C. Ensure all major pieces of equipment are serviceable and complete with unions, isolating valves, etc. Test piping as follows: 1. Condenser water —1.5 times maximum working pressure or 150 pounds per square inch. E. During system full operational tests, check and document linear expansion at elbows, U- bends, expansion joints and offsets to ensure adequate clearance. F. Provide detailed written report defining outline of the entire proposed chemical cleaning procedure at least two weeks prior to cleaning including times, system status, problems encountered and the condition of the water. Procedure shall be approved by Architect prior to commencement of cleaning process. September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing Permit Issue 15993 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Perform a complete water analysis of all water being used prior to commencing operation. Include copy in report defined in 3.01.F. above. Ensure water being used will not damage systems being tested. z 4-- z H. Use water meter and record to ±/2 percent the volume of water in each system for each fill w cycle. The cleaning solution for condenser water systems shall be the following mass of 6 5 chemicals per 400 gallons of water in the system: J v O Tri Sodium Phosphate 1 pound W Sodium Carbonate 1 pound � H Low Foaming Detergent . 0.02 pound u) LL wO I. Ensure system is free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material. g u. Q J. Remove, inspect and replace strainers on all systems prior to initial fill. Provide temporary D strainers on pumps that do not have permanent strainers. Provide pressure circulating z w gauges on the strainers to detect plugging. Remove, clean and replace the strainers after Z m the cleaning process is complete. I— O zH K. Ensure all control valves are operational and fully open to ensure terminal units can be Ill 2 w 0 O L. System pumps may be used for cleaning provided a new set of seals is installed and pumps 0 H are dismantled and inspected. Replace worn parts, install new gaskets and tum over used = w seals. i - 11 O M. The system shall be completely operational, all safety devices functional and any hydraulic ui z tests completed before cleaning. properly cleaned. N. Add chemical solution to system. O. For water systems, establish circulation and apply heat to raise temperature slowly to maximum design temperature of system or 180 degrees F minimum. Circulate for 12 hours and ensure flow in all circuits. Remove heat and continue to circulate while the temperature is 100 degrees F or less. Drain system as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water; circulate for 6 hours at design temperature. Drain and repeat procedures defined above. Refill with clean water and add sodium sulfite. Test for residual sulfite. P. For condenser water systems circulate cleaning solution for 24 hours at maximum velocity at ambient temperature ensuring flow in all circuits. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water; circulate for 24 hours, drain. Refill with clean water and add sodium sulfite. Test for residual sulfite. Q. For cooling tower systems, fill with clean water; circulate for one hour minimum at maximum flow. Drain and clean basin and screens. Refill, add chemicals and circulate. Test for residual chemicals. R. When cleaning is completed and system filled, establish circulation, expansion tank level and set pressure control. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -2 U O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila S. Check to ensure all insulation is properly installed. Do not proceed with installation until all tests are completed to the satisfaction of the Architect. z T. Submit with report certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component H Z supplier. w re 2 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 6 U U O A. Ensure piping in system is completed p rior t o performing flushing, testing and starting w w o J H u) 'L., B. Test to 150 pounds per square inch water pressure measured at system low point. w 0 C. Flush entire system for eight hours. Ensure full two hours of flushing through each outlet. g a Let stand for 24 hours and draw one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to m verify system is clean. Let system flush for two more hours and draw off sample for testing. D. a �w D. Shock treat entire system with liquid sodium hypochlorite to 5 percent concentration at end of z' line. Hold for 24 hours and flush systems for additional one hour. Z O w • D 3.03 DUCTED SYSTEMS 8 y 0 I- A . Power vacuum all ducts 36 inches and larger. 11.1 W I- • U B. Ensure exhaust, supply and return fans are all operational, and proper starting procedures LL p completed as defined in Section 15992 executed. iii z c.) c ° C. Blow air through ductwork at 2 inch water gauge above system operating pressures to clean V- • H ducts and air outlets. Use system balancing dampers to assist in creating sufficient z velocities. D. Test ductwork as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Low pressure — test for tightness such that leakage is inaudible and not detectable by feel. 2. Medium and high pressure — test for tightness as specified by SMACNA manuals with maximum leakage of 1 /2 percent at any branch or main duct at design static pressure. Ensure system is free of audible leaks. 3. High pressure fume extraction — test for leakage of 0 percent at 3 inches water gauge static pressure on discharge side of fans and % percent leakage at 3 inches water gauge on suction side of fan. 4. Dust extraction — test for maximum leakage at 1 /2 percent at 3 inches water gauge static pressure. 5. Kitchen Exhaust Ducts — test as defined in NFPA 96. 6. Low Pressure Fume Extraction — test for leakage of 1 /2 percent at 3 inches water gauge on suction side of fan and 0 percent leakage at 3 inches water gauge on discharge side of fan. Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 PLUMBING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS (SANITARY) A. Test by filling with water to produce water pressure of 5 pounds per square inch minimum and 10 pounds per square inch maximum. B. For buried systems perform all tests prior to backfilling. Retest for proper grade and obstruction with hydraulic test. C. Ensure all traps are fully primed. D. Ensure all fixtures are properly anchored and connected to the system. E. Flush each valve, drain each sink and operate each fixture to ensure drainage. F. Open each cleanout, cover with linseed oil and reseal each cleanout. Ensure each cleanout is fully accessible and access doors are properly installed. • • 3.05 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Ensure installation of piping system is completed prior to performing starting and testing procedures. Ensure all equipment used has U.L. labels visible. B. Fill system with water. Record pressure of water supply. C. Pressure test piping system as per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Ensure all valves in the sprinkler system are monitored and are clearly visible. E. Ensure all flow switches are installed and are operational. F. Flush systems as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Filled with water, let stand at full operating pressure for one week. Drain the system. 2. Repeat above procedure three times. G. Flow tests shall be performed as required by: 1. Authorities having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 13. 3. NFPA 14. 4. NFPA 20. H. Record incoming water pressure to building once a day for ten days prior to activating system. Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -4 1. Test and place sprinkler valve into operation. Adjust pressure switches. Q HZ J. Coordinate sequencing of fire alarm with Division 16. w 3:06 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS U O y0 . A. Test the following system as follows: W w J H N LL wO 3.07 CONTROLS u. _. O . w 1. Provide complete system documentation before start of testing: H p : a. System manuals including hardware, software, maintenance and W operations. 2 j b. Interlock and control diagrams for all systems controlled. v 0 c. Shop drawings and calibration procedures. o H d. Written description of control strategy for each system. w - 1 e. Table of operating setpoints and alarm limits for control strategies. = w f. Listing of actual data file for each point and for control strategies. v g. Certification of operation and list of calibration requirements of all hardware — u. z components. Cu O Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Gas piping: Test as required by authorities having jurisdiction. A. General: B. Hardware Starting: 1. Ensure each hardware component is properly installed as per manufacturer's recommendations and functioning properly. 2. Hardware Setting: a. This testing must be completed and verified before any software logic and control is added to the system. b. Calibrate the following components as per manufacturer's recommendations: 1. Thermostats and temperature sensors 2. Damper motor operators and positioners 3. Valves operators and positioners 4. Transmitters 5. Humidistats and humidity sensors 6. Pressure reducing /relief valves 7. Clocks 8. Gauges, thermometers, etc. 9. Pressure /electric switches 10. Static sensors and transmitters 11. Flow switches 12. Alarm settings 13. Fire alarm and security system interface 14. Interposing relays 15. Current sensitive relays September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing Permit Issue 15993 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Software Starting: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue c. Gauge all wiring used to ensure conformance to UL specifications. Ensure all circuits are complete and all terminal wiring connections are tight. d. Adjust c ontrol d ampers. E nsure u niform m ixing. E nsure tight shut -off closure and measure leakage. Configure for fail -safe operation. e. Put - all electronic hardware into operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace all defective components. Prove proper operation with software starting and printout. f. Test and ensure all interface with Division 16 is complete. Test and ensure ' all interface with other "package control" is complete. g. Ensure point identification is completed and all wire labeling is completed. As a minimum standard, the point tag should contain the following information: (1) Logical Point Name (2) Point Multiplexer (3) Address (4) Associated System Identification (5) Point Description h. If dynamic graphics are included, ensure the proper operation of: (1) Dynamic values displayed on screen. (2) Update period. (3) Color change or status change. (4) Proper identification of system and points on screen. (5) Reaction to alarms. Check out each point through the terminal device end -to -end. This checkout to include tests for range, reliability and repeatability. j. Calibrate all control valves: (1) Ensure no overlap of control ranges. (2) No leakage when valves are closed, particularly steam. (3) Failsafe operation. k. Check all interface cabinetry to ensure compliance with the specifications and applicable codes. 1. Ensure all hardware is completely installed and started and fully operational before software start-up. 2. Compare shop drawings and specifications to final software and check: a. Flow charts. b. Hardcopy printouts. c. Control flow logic diagrams. 3. Enter software and operating setpoints and schedules into terminal device. 4. Check out each system through the terminal by: a. Simulation of system start/stop functions. b. Simulation of systems operation including: 1. High limit functions. 2. Low limit functions. 3. Safety features (override values). 4. Operation sequences specified. c. Verification of system component hardwired interlocks. Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 5. Verify operation of specific routines such as: a. Optimization. b. Demand limiting. c. Peak shaving. d. Night setback, morning warm -up. e. Building dynamic control. f. Variable volume air systems supply /return fan tracking control. g. Power failure recovery. 6. Simulate alarm conditions and verify alarm printouts. 7. Check out reports generation. 8. Check out communication network, input and output. 9. Check operation of system under failure modes. a. Component failure. b. Smart remote failure. c. Communication failure. d. Host failure. e. Outside air sensor failure. END OF SECTION Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing Permit Issue 15993 -7 Section No. Title I 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16020 Equipment Connections and Coordination 16030 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 16110 Raceways and Boxes 16120 600 Volt Wire and Cable 16140 Wiring Devices 16200 Engine Generator System 16425 Switchboards 16440 Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16460 Dry Type Transformers 16470 Panelboards 16475 600 Volt Fuses 16500 Luminaires and Accessories 16680 Grounding System 16720 Fire Alarm and Detection System 16740 Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories -_J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC UNISYS — Tulwila Page 1 - "1 _J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1.02 WORK INCLUDED 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The General and Supplementary Conditions are a part of the requirements for the work under this Division of the Specifications. A. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation the electrical systems as called for in the Contract Documents, and in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. B. Provide labor, materials, and accessories required to provide complete, operating electrical systems. Labor, materials or accessories not specifically called for in the Contract Documents, but required to provide complete, operating electrical systems shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility companies serving the project and the Owner's insurance underwriter. B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where requirements differ, the most stringent apply. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Should a ny c hange i n d rawings or specifications be required to comply with governing regulations, notify the Architect prior to submitting bid. D. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of ADA, ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, IES, NEC, NEMA, NETA, NFPA, OSHA, SMACNA, UL, and the State Fire Marshal. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of t he t rades in a t horough, substantial, workpersonlike manner by competent workpeople. Provide a competent, experienced, full -time Superintendent who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. F. Equipment shall be certified for use in the State of the project and shall meet the State energy code. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: ADA ANSI ASA ASTM BIL CBM EIA ETL FM IEEE IES IPCEA. LED NEC NEMA NETA NFPA OEM OSHA SMACNA UL B. Definitions: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Americans with Disabilities Act American National Standards Institute Acoustical Society of America American Society for Testing and Materials Basic Impulse Level Certified Ballast Manufacturers Electronic Industries Association Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. Factory Mutual Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society International Power Cable Engineers Association Light Emitting Diode National Electric Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Electrical Testing Association National Fire Protection Association Original Equipment Manufacturer Occupational Safety and Health Administration Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Underwriters Laboratories 1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to Engineer for review, refer to Architectural General and Supplementary Conditions for proper procedures. 2. FURNISH means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. 3. INSTALL means to join, unit, fasten, Zink, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. 4. PROVIDE means to FURNISH and INSTALL. 5. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Architect, or the Architect's representative. )6. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or within drywall partitions, or installed within hung ceilings. 7. SUBMIT means submit to Architect for review. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Guarantee work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are provided or specified herein, the longer term shall apply. Correct any deficiencies, which occur during the guarantee period, within 24 hours of notification, without additional cost to the Owner, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Obtain similar guarantees from subcontractors, manufacturers,. suppliers and subtrade specialists. 1.06 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCad or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and /or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the A rchitect a nd E ngineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion. B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, or any other material that is considered hazardous by the Environmental Protection Agency or any other authority having jurisdiction. C. Replace materials of Tess than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide name /data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous place. E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people. F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar applications and sizes. G. Fully lubricate equipment where required. H. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -3 z • z' 6 • 2 U0 No U) H wO u_ ? cn O = w Z � F- O w ~ uj U� O o E- w LL- O w Z CO P. Z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila I. Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance, and attendance by the Owner's representative is required to witness such tests, associated travel costs and subsistence shall be paid for by the Contractor. Z J. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site operating W conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of derating identified on the submittals. 0 00 O K. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be NEMA v w type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed outdoors shall be NEMA type -J H 3R. N O w L. Energy consuming equipment shall be certified for use in the State of the project and shall 2 meet the State Energy Code and local energy ordinances. g 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS H W zI- A. Contract Documents are based on equipment manufacturers as called out in the F- O Specifications and indicated on the Drawings. Acceptance of substitute equipment z I-- manufacturers does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to provide equipment and Ili uj materials, which meet the performance as, stated or implied in the Contract Documents. m p D B. Submit proposals to provide substitute materials or equipment, in writing, with sufficient lead 0 '- time for review prior to the date equipment must be ordered to maintain project schedule. = w Reimburse Owner for costs associated with the review of the proposed substitution whether H substitution is accepted or rejected. �!- p .z C. Indicate revisions required to adapt substitutions including revisions by other trades. U Substitutions that increase the cost of the work and related trades are not permitted. ~ O f- z D. The proposed substitution shall conform to the size, ratings, and operating characteristics of the equipment or systems as specified and shown on the Drawings. E. Proposals for substitutions shall include the following information: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. A description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. 2. Schematic drawings and details. 3. List of revisions to the Contract Documents that must be made if the substitution is accepted. 4. Estimate of costs the Owner may incur in implementing the substitution, such as test, evaluation, operating and support costs. 5. Statement of the time by which a Contract modification accepting the substitution must be issued, noting any effect on the Contract completion time or the delivery schedule. 6. A statement indicating the reduction to the Contract price if the Owner accepts the substitution. Include required modifications to all related trades. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -4 - .: t :Ja:.:.ei.'+udCvi.'xl(1.a +::i.l mS:l,;: SA.`u:FailvvYsvrYL': ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION z =Z 3.01 FEES AND PERMITS w D A. Pay all required fees and obtain all required permits related to the electrical installation. c.) - 0 B. Pay royalties or fees in connection with the use of patented devices and systems. w = ul - I— u) w C. Provide controlled inspection where required by authorities having jurisdiction or by these w O specifications. 2 3.02 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS u - wd A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's product data sheets, samples, and test reports as H w specified. z H I— O B. Within one month after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or after - w ~ execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, submit a complete typed list of all electrical 2 D equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for the equipment proposed to be provided U on this project, as well as names of all subcontractors. o H C. Within two months after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or after H V execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, prepare an index of all submittals for the project. w ~O Include a submittal identification number, a cross - reference to the Specification sections or - Z Drawing number, and an item description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the w y Specification sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal H = identification number in addition to the other data specified. All subcontractors shall utilize Z the assigned submittal identification number. D. After the Contract is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data and samples from the manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, and all subcontractors, for all materials and equipment as specified. Submit data and details of such materials and equipment for review. Prior to submission, certify that the shop drawings, product data and samples are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Check all materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any work, which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop drawings as required to comply with the Contract Documents and the shop drawings. E. Review of submittals is for general compliance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Comments or absence of comments shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing the work in a safe manner, and for coordinating the work with that of other trades. September 30, 2003 Electrical General Provisions Permit Issue 16010 -5 Stamp Interpretation No Exceptions Noted Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents. Exceptions Noted [ j Resubmit for Record [ j No Resubmission Required Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents and the Engineer's notations are complied with. Revise and Resubmit The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents; do not proceed with fabrication, manufacture, or construction. The work and shop drawings are not permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate shop drawings. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work have been submitted and accepted. G. A minimum period of ten working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data and /or samples are submitted for review. This time period must be considered by the Contractor in the scheduling of the work. H. Submit two bond prints of all items requiring shop drawings. Submit six copies of manufacturer's product submittals. 1. Submittals will be stamped as follows: J. Submit materials and equipment by manufacturer, trade name, and model number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalog material. Maintenance and operating manuals are not acceptable substitutes for shop drawings. K. Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed. Cross out non - applicable information. Note specified features such as materials or paint finishes. L. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation and technical data sufficient to verify that equipment meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. Include wiring, piping and service connection data. M. Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data on site. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -6 w., ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. For each room or area of the building containing electrical equipment, submit the following: 1. Floor Plans: Plan and elevation layout drawings indicating the equipment in the exact location in which it is intended to be installed. These plans shall be of a scale not less than 1 /4 inch = 1' -0 ". They shall be prepared in the following manner: a. Indicate the physical boundaries of the space including door swings and ceiling heights and ceiling types (as applicable). b. Illustrate all electrical equipment proposed to be contained therein. Include top and bottom elevations of all electrical equipment. The Drawings shall be prepared u tilizing t he dimensions contained in the individual equipment submittals. Indicate code and manufacturer's required clearances. c. Illustrate all other equipment therein such as conduits, detectors, luminaries, ducts, registers, pull boxes, wireways, structural elements, etc. d. Indicate the operating weight of each piece of equipment. e. Indicate the heat release from each piece of electrical equipment in terms of BTU p er h our. T his i nformation s hall b e that which is supplied by the respective manufacturers. f. Illustrate concrete pads, curbs, etc. g. Indicate dimensions to confirm compliance with code - required clearances. h. Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for each piece of equipment (as per each respective manufacturer's recommendation). Equipment removal routes. 0. The work described in shop drawing submissions shall be carefully checked by all trades for clearances (including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and coordination with other trades on the job. Each submitted shop drawing shall include a certification that related job conditions have been checked by the Contractor and each Subcontractor and that conflicts do not exist. P. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained on submissions, or for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, product data and samples, the Contract Documents govern the work and are neither waived nor superceded in any way by the review of shop drawings, product data and samples. Q. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data and /or samples will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. R. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing and on the front cover of each product data brochure cover: The submittal identification number; title of the sheet or brochure; name and location of the project; names of the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, and vendor; the date of submittal; and the date of each correction, version and revision. Number all pages and drawings in product data brochures consecutively from beginning to end. U nless t he a bove i nformation i s included, the submittal will be returned for resubmission. Resubmittals of product data or brochures shall include a cover letter summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments. September 30, 2003 Permit lssue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila S. The distribution equipment, short circuit and coordination study, and room layout submittals shall be submitted concurrently. Failure to submit concurrently may result in the immediate return of the submittal marked REVISE AND RESUBMIT. 3.03 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contract Documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation instructions. Drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit the work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible conflict or delay. C. The electrical drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other trades will permit. Provide offsets, fittings, and accessories, which may be required but not shown on the Drawings. Investigate the site, and review drawings of other trades to determine conditions affecting the work, and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such conditions. D. The I ocations o f I ighting fixtures, outlets, panels and other equipment indicated on the Drawings are approximately correct, but they are understood to be subject to such revision as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed in consequence of increase or reduction of the number of outlets, or in order to meet field conditions, or to coordinate with modular requirements of ceilings, or to simplify the work, or for other legitimate causes. E. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, outlets, switches, etc., and have precise and definite locations accepted by the Architect before proceeding with the installation. F. The Drawings show only the general run of raceways and approximate locations of outlets. Any significant changes in location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect for review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Verify with the Architect the exact location and mounting height of outlets and equipment not dimensionally located on the Drawings. H. Circuit tags in the form of numbers are used where shown to indicate the circuit designation numbers in electrical panels. Show the actual circuit numbers on the a s -built R ecord Drawings and on the associated typed panelboard directory card. Where circuiting is not indicated, provide required circuiting in accordance with the loading indicated on the Drawings and /or as directed. The Drawings generally do not indicate the number of wires in conduit for the branch circuit wiring of fixtures and outlets, or the actual circuiting. Provide the correct wire size and quantity as required by the indicated circuiting and /or circuit numbers indicated, the control intent,' referenced wiring diagrams (if any), the specified voltage drop or maximum distance limitations, and the applicable requirements of the NEC. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -8 yr ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Carefully c heck s pace requirements with other trades to insure that equipment can be installed in the spaces allotted. K. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that they have the information necessary so that they may properly install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items (remote ballast, pull boxes, etc.) requiring access in order that the ceiling trade will know where to install access doors and panels. L. Consult with other trades regarding equipment so that, wherever possible, motor controls and distribution equipment are of the same manufacturer. M. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of electrical risers through structural masonry and concrete walls a nd f loors a nd e lsewhere a s r equired f or t he p roper p rotection o f e ach electrical riser passing through building surfaces. N. Provide firestopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc. which pass through rated walls, partitions and floors. O. Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in precast members for electrical work. P. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit and equipment, designed so as not to exceed allowable loadings of structures. Q. Examine and compare the Contract Documents with the drawings and specifications of other trades, a nd r eport a ny d iscrepancies b etween t hem t o t he A rchitect and obtain written instructions for changes necessary in the work. Install and coordinate the work in cooperation with other related trades. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences. R. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Architect for review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of Record Drawings. S. Furnish services of an experienced Superintendent, who shall be in constant charge of all work, and who shall coordinate work with the work of other trades. No work shall be installed before coordinating with other trades. T. Coordinate with the local electric utility company and the local telephone company as to their requirements for service connections and provide all necessary metering provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labor, testing, and appurtenances. U. Before commencing work, examine adjoining work on which this work is in any way affected and report conditions, which prevent performance of the work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila V. Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work to prevent Q interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of H z • each conduit prior to fabrication. re w 2 1. Right -of -Way: Lines which pitch have the right -of -way over those which do not pitch. — p For example: condensate, steam, and plumbing drains normally have right -of -way. u) 0 Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right -of -way over lines whose w m elevations can be changed. -' 1- 2. Provide offsets, transitions and changes in direction of conduit as required to w O , maintain proper headroom and pitch on sloping lines. 2 W. In cases of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of need for explanation, request u. Q supplementary instructions from the Architect. cn d 3.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE z H F- O A. Prior to the submitting of bids, visit the project site and become familiar with all conditions w (- affecting the proposed installation and make provisions as to the cost thereof. g n U CI B. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of 0 - th e sub - soils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or below ground, or other sub - surface conditions which may be encountered during the work. = U Evaluate existing conditions, which may affect methods or cost of performing the work, based u H on examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the Drawings or other u. z information does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the satisfactory completion of w u the work. H 0 3.05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide excavation for the work of this Division. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as required. Remove from the site excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water, which accumulates. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative density or as specified by the Architect. Whenever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -10 Z A. Mounting heights shall conform to ADA requirements. B. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Architect before installation. C. Electrical and telecommunications outlets shall be mounted not lower than 15 inches above finished floor to bottom of outlet and not higher than 48 inches above finished floor to top of device. D. Electrical switches shall be mounted not lower than 36 inches above finished floor to center of switch and not higher than 48 inches above finished floor to center of switch. E. Fire alarm manual pull stations shall be mounted 48 inches above finished floor to center of manual pull station. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -11 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Outlets for public and other wall mounted type telephones shall be installed so that the particular telephone installed conforms to ADA mounting height requirements. G. Visual Alarms: Mount not less than 80 inches to the bottom or 96 inches to the top of the device. H. Wall Mounted Exit Signs: 2 inches above top of door to bottom of sign. Low Level Exit Signs: 6 inches to bottom of sign. J. Stairwell and utility corridor wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted 8 feet 6 inches above finished floor or 1 foot below ceiling or structure above, whichever is lower. 3.08 CONTINUANCE OF EXISTING SERVICES A. Existing electrical services not specifically indicated to be removed or altered shall remain as they presently exist. B. Where existing services interfere with new construction, alter or reroute such existing equipment to facilitate new construction after obtaining written permission from the Architect. Notification in writing giving two weeks advance notice of planned alteration is required. C. Preserve continuity of service of existing facilities (related to damage or alteration due to new construction). U nauthorized alteration to existing equipment shad be corrected without additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 CLEANING UP A. Avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, loose materials, crates, etc., resulting from the installation of this work. Remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and keep the premises clean and free of dust and debris. B. Clean all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project. Wipe clean exposed lighting fixture reflectors and trim pieces with a non - abrasive cloth just prior to occupancy. C. All electrical equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed and wiped clean prior to energization and at the completion of the project. Equipment shall be opened for observation by the Architect as required. 3.10 WATERPROOFING A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, make penetration prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch - pockets required. Advise the Architect and obtain written permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown on the Drawings. B. Restore waterproofing integrity of walls or surfaces after they have been penetrated without additional cost to the Owner. September 30, 2003 Electrical General Provisions Permit Issue 16010 -12 t 1 4 Z � 00 to N w J � LL, w 0 u- < N d = W Z F - 0 w ~ ON 0H wW O w O t " z Dar ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.11 SUPPORTS A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers, auxiliary structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work. B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment, which i s i nstalled in a freestanding position. D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment mounted on them. E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall not depend on electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support. F. Electrical equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). Provide independent support of electrical equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for ductwork, piping or work of other trades. G. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, equipment, etc., so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Electrical equipment and supports shall not come in contact with work of other trades. 3.12 FASTENINGS A. Fasten equipment to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice. B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 pounds or I ess, conform t o the following as a minimum: C. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 100 pounds, but is 300 pounds or Tess, conform to the following as a minimum: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Concrete and solid masonry: Bolts and expansion shields. 3. Hollow construction: Toggle bolts. 4. Solid metal: Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs. 5. Steel decking or sub - floor: Fastenings as specified' below for applied weights in excess of 100 pounds. 1. At concrete slabs provide 24 inch x 24 inch x Y2 inch steel fishplates on top with through bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top of slab screed line, where no fill is to be applied. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -13 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 300 pounds, coordinate with and obtain the approval of Architect and conform to the following as a minimum: F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars. Prefabricated steel channels as manufactured by Kindorf or Unistrut are acceptable. 3.13 IDENTIFICATION 2. At steel decking or sub -floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts or threaded rods. The tops of bolts or rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or sub -floor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with their decking or sub -floor such hangers shall be provided. 1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably welded or clamped to building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members. For items, which are shown, as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements. A. Identify electrical equipment with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates with Y2 inch high white engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or load served as appropriate. Nameplates for equipment connected to the emergency power system shall be red with white lettering. Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated screws; peel and stick tape or glue on type nameplates are not allowed. B. Cable tags shall be flameproof secured with flameproof non - metallic cord. C. Provide an engraved nameplate for each switch controlling loads, which are not local to the switch. D. See individual sections for additional identification requirements. 3.14 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or installation of any equipment or assembly which bears on any exposed surface any name, trademark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such object has been obtained, is prohibited. B. Required UL labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -14 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.15 EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide concrete pads under all floor mounted electrical equipment. Equipment pads shall conform to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 1 inch margin around the equipment and supports. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and made of a minimum 28 day, 2500psi concrete reinforced with 6 inch x 6 inch 6/6 gauge welded wire mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors, with all external corners bullnosed to a 3 /a inch radius. Shop drawings stamped NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED shall be used for dimensional guidance in sizing pads. B. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment installed on vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer. C. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall pass through the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. As an alternative, the mounting screws may pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to 6 inches square, 18 gauge galvanized metal backplates, which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved non - flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not allowed. 3.16 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING A. Provide drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and installation of equipment as required by the construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time that it is required, the Contractor shall be responsible for its proper storage and protection until the time it is required. Pay for all costs of drayage or storage. B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by the project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be responsible for resulting disassembly, re- assembly, manufacturer's supervision, shoring, general construction modification, delays, overtime costs, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.17 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION A. Protect the work, equipment, and material of other trades from damage by work or workmen of this trade, and correct damaged caused without additional cost to the Owner. B. Take responsibility for work, materials, and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage, and carefully store material and equipment received on site, which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. Cover and protect equipment and materials from damage due to water, spray -on fireproofing, construction debris, etc. Store equipment to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces. September 30, 2003 Electrical General Provisions Permit Issue 16010 -15 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provided adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of materials and equipment ..... z against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work until final acceptance. Protect materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no W finished surfaces will be damaged or marred, and moving parts are kept clean and dry. Do D not install damaged items; take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair. _i 0 0 D. Lighting fixture troffers with parabolic reflectors shall be installed with factory mounted plastic N w protective bags around parabolic reflector assembly. Remove protective bag just prior to , , � H occupancy. IL wO 3.18 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS g u_Q A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and v d acceptance testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion H w date to permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and Contract closeout. z F Complete any adjustments and /or alterations, which the final acceptance tests indicate as i— O necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date. See z H individual sections for extent of testing required. ? o • B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed 0 N and outlining when field testing will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review o H within six months after the notice to proceed by Owner's Representative has been given. = w Update this schedule periodically as the project progresses. 1- L I O .. U 0 A. Provide the services of factory trained specialists to provide an operating instructions seminar ~O H for equipment and systems. The seminar shall be conducted over a five day (consecutive) z period. Instruction time is defined as straight time working hours and does not include nights, weekends, or travel time to and from the project. 3.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS B. Submit seminar agenda, schedule and list of representatives to the Owner for approval thirty days prior to suggested date of seminar. Do not commence seminar until the Owner has issued a written acceptance of the starting time and attendees. Confirm attendance of seminar by written notification to participants. C. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper starting sequences, operation, shutdown, general maintenance and preventative maintenance procedures, including normal and emergency procedures. D. Submit final copies of Record Drawings and Operating and Maintenance Manuals to Owner at seminar. E. Submit a written record of minutes and attendees of the seminar to the Owner. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -16 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and materials furnished under this Division. B. Submit three final copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for review at least ten weeks before the completion date. Assemble data in a completely indexed volume or volumes in three -ring binders and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. Print the project name on the outside of the binders. C. Maintenance manuals shall include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in a clear and e asily u nderstandable format. Show model numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, capacity ratings, and actual loads. D. Provide the following information where applicable: 1. Identifying name and mark number. 2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list). 3. Complete nameplate data. 4. Certified Record Drawings and Final Reviewed submittals. 5. Parts list. 6. Performance curves and data. i 7. Wiring diagrams. 8. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions with all non - applicable information deleted. 9. List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements. __ I 10. Assembly and disassembly instructions with exploded view drawings where necessary. 11. Test reports. 12. Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable. 3.21 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain on a daily basis at the Project site a complete set of Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall initially consist of a set of blueline prints or AutoCAD files of the Contractor's Coordination Drawings. The prints shall be marked or the AutoCAD files electronically updated to show the precise location of all buried or concealed work and equipment, including embedded conduit, raceways and boxes, and all changes and deviations in the Electrical work from that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without definite written instructions from the Architect or Engineer. The updated Coordination Drawings shall be used to produce the final Record Drawings that shall be delivered to the Owner in AutoCAD electronic format media upon Project completion. B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed. Suitably identify locations of all equipment by at least two dimensions to permanent structures. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -17 z w r4 2 J U 0 0 CO CO ILI J N w wO 2 g Q CO = 0 w z = H H O z H w w U O O N w w u_ O .. U w ~ z RECORD DRAWING CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8 inch high letters) (Printed Name of General Contractor) (5/16 inch high letters) Date: (Printed Name of Subcontractor) (5/16 inch high letters) Date: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue RECORD DRAWING (3/8 inch high letters) To be used for recording Field Deviations and Dimensional Data Only (5/16 inch high letters) UNISYS - Tukwila C. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall mark all in- progress Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor and subcontractors shall certify all Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner adjacent to the above marking with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: Electrical General Provisions 16010 -18 z w cc 2 00 cn w 3.22 FINAL PUNCHLIST CO w : w O B. During t he F inal P unchlist, p rovide p ersonnel w ith a ccess k eys, h and h eld radios, and N d necessary "expertise to operate each system and piece of equipment to demonstrate 0 w operational compliance with the Contract Documents. z I H O C. Any deficiencies noted on the Final Punchlist shall be expeditiously corrected and certified in z . Ill al D p . 3.23" EARLY OCCUPANCY 'p N: A. Complete those systems which are necessary to allow partial early occupancy of the building. = V B. Verify and comply with requirements for temporary occupancy with the local Building and Fire u- Z ` ui U= O I-". ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Prior to final acceptance of the Work of this Division, the Contractor shall submit properly certified Record Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review and shall make changes, corrections, or additions as the Architect and /or Engineer may require to the Record Drawings. After the Architect's and Engineer's review, and any required Contractor revisions, the Record Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner on electronic media in AutoCAD format. The Architect and Engineer do not assume any responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the Record Drawings. A. Prior to the Final Punchlist, certify that systems and equipment are complete, operational, and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. writing. Departments. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Electrical General Provisions Permit Issue 16010 -19 J ELECTRICAL. SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z re w PART 1 — GENERAL 6 J0 1.01 DESCRIPTION N o co ILI A. Provide equipment connections and coordination in accordance with the Contract co Documents. w0 ga u. A. No requirements. N d � I- o Z I- 1.02 SUBMITTALS PART 2 — PRODUCTS uj o CI I- w W H- IL O . Z ' A. Provide equipment connections and coordination in accordance with manufacturer's 0 cn 0 H Z 2.01 Not applicable. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL SECTION 16020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION recommendations and product submittals. B. Provide disconnect switches for equipment. Where equipment requires fuse protection, provide fusible type disconnect switches with fuses rated in accordance with equipment manufacturer's requirements. Disconnect switches for single -phase equipment shall be thermal overload type. Locate disconnect switches in coordination with the layout of equipment. Provide supports for a free standing installation if required to allow access to disconnect switch and /or proximity to equipment served. C. Provide final connections to hard -wired equipment with a minimum of two feet of liquid tight flexible metal conduit. D. Verify the requirements of cord and plug equipment and provide receptacles, branch circuiting and branch circuit overcurrent protection to match. Receptacle types shown on the 1 Drawings are for bidding purposes only. E. Where equipment is supplied from conduit run under or within the floor slab, extend conduit to a junction box mounted on a two -foot stub up of rigid steel conduit. Provide suitable bracing on conduit stub up. F. Where equipment is fed from overhead, support conduit on flanged floor type fitting. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Equipment Connections and Coordination 16020 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION TYPES A. Provide equipment connection types as indicated on the equipment connection schedule. B. Equipment Connection Types: 1. Type DP: Duplex pump system with controller provided under Division 15. Provide connection to controller and connections from controller to pumps in accordance with the controller manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide connections for local controls and alarms in accordance with the controller manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Type FR: Fractional horsepower single phase motor. Provide thermal overload /disconnect switch and motor connection. 3. Type FWS: Equipment furnished with starter. Install starter and provide connection t� starter and connection from starter to equipment. 4. Type M: Motor with starter provided under Division 16. Provide disconnect switch and motor connection. 5. Type SPC: Single point connection. Provide single point connection to equipment provided with factory mounted starter /controller listed for single point power connection. Provide fusible disconnect switch with fuses sized in accordance with equipment nameplate requirements. 6. Type VFD: Variable frequency drive furnished under Division 15. Install VFD and provide connection to VFD and connection from VFD to equipment. 3.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. B. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and Toad side of controllers. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed, duplex, triplex, lead -lag, pony motor or other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. 3.04 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary fora complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Equipment Connections and Coordination 16020 -2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16030 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Provide isolation for engine generator set, dry type transformers, and at electrical connections to rotating or vibrating equipment. C. Provide seismic restraints for all electrical equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Vibration isolators and seismic restraints shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.03. STANDARDS A. SMACNA Guidelines for Restraint of Mechanical Equipment. B. Requirements for UBC seismic zone 3. Manufacturer's product data sheets and installation instructions for each vibration isolator and seismic restraint. B. Plan and elevation diagrams showing equipment, points of attachment, vibration isolators, seismic restraints, mounting methods, and hardware types and sizes. C. Seismic restraint calculations. Seismic restraint calculations shall be certified by a Professional Structural or Civil Engineer registered in the State of the project. D. Field inspection report. 1.05 FIELD INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's local representative shall field inspect the installation and submit a report verifying the completeness and performance of the installation. September 30, 2003 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints Permit Issue 16030 -1 a;• ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber - Booth, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co., Vibration Mounting & Controls Inc., or Vibrex Vibration Control Systems. 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. Devices installed outdoors shall be weatherproof; steel components shall be hot dipped galvanized, hardware shall be cadmium plated, and springs shall be neoprene coated. 2. Spring diameters shall be no Tess than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated Toad. 3. Springs shall have an additional minimum travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. B. Mounting Method Type A: 1. Floor mounted spring isolators for seismic and restrained service. ' 2. Built in resilient limit stops shall limit upward, downward, and horizontal travel to a maximum of 1/4 inch. 3. Trapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment. 4. Mounting holes in bottom plate for bolting to concrete housekeeping pad. 5. Neoprene pad between bottom plate of isolator housing and bottom of spring isolator. 6. Mason Industries type SLR. C. Mounting Method Type B: 1. Hanger rod neoprene isolators. 2. 45° slack seismic restraint cables. 3. Neoprene element with a projecting bushing to prevent steel to steel contact. 4. Steel retainer box encasing the neoprene element. 5. Rod shall be able to swing 15° before contacting resilient bushing. 6. Mason Industries type HD neoprene hanger and type SCB seismic cable brace. D. Mounting Method Type C: 1. Floor mounted bridge bearing neoprene mounts with all directional seismic capability. 2. Two separated and opposing molded bridge bearing neoprene elements contained in a ductile iron casting. 3. Mounting holes in bottom plate for bolting to concrete housekeeping pad. 4. Mason Industries type BR. September 30, 2003 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints Permit Issue 16030 -2 k +M Equipment Mounting Method Static Deflection Engine Generator Set A 1 inch Dry Type Transformers - Suspended B 0.2 inch Dry Type Transformers -Floor Mounted C 0.2 inch ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Installation shall be in accordance with seismic restraint calculations and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Verify that mounting methods provide the required vibration isolation and seismic restraint and that there are no vibration short circuits. C. Conduit connected to rotating or vibrating equipment shall be flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible conduit. 3.02 MOUNTING SCHEDULE September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 16030 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES ~w JU 1.01 DESCRIPTION v 0 N cnw: A. Provide raceways and boxes in accordance with the Contract Documents. -I1 '. 1.02 SUBMITTALS W O: A. Conduit, Boxes, Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: u. N d . 1. No requirements. H _ Z Modular Wiring Systems: Z O 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets of system components. 2 al 2. 1/8 inch scale plans showing layout of lighting fixtures and modular wiring system. v O N 0 H zuj '. A. Mark junction box covers with permanent stencil identification of panelboard and circuit LL numbers of wiring contained within. O z B. Paint fire alarm and fire pump system boxes red. v i tt O~ Z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.03 IDENTIFICATION PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Conduit and Boxes: 1. UL listed and labeled products of any manufacturer meeting the specified performance requirements are acceptable. B. Modular Wiring System: 1. Reloc, Dual -Lite, or equal. C. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Square D or equal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Raceways and Boxes 16110 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS z A. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1 Z u) 1. Rigid conduit, heavy wall, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, threaded ends. 2. Threaded type fittings. 3 0 0 co 0 B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: w w I 1. Rigid conduit, heavy wall, threaded ends. w u.. 2. Threaded type fittings. W 0 C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: LL Q N om . 1. Continuous, seamless steel tubing galvanized or sherardized on exterior, coated on z w interior with smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel. _. ~ m 2. Steel, set screw or compression type fittings. Provide concrete type fittings where z required. w O. 2 j U 1. Galvanized steel armor, copper conductors, insulated copper equipment grounding 0 H. conductor, and internal marker tape. -_ = uj . 2. Screw in grounding type insulated throat type fitting with die cast steel Iocknut. t- 0 fit O w z Hm O H z E. Metal Clad Cable Flexible Steel Conduit: 1. Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double - wrapped steel, hot dip galvanized inside and out forming smooth internal wiring channel. 2. Steel, compression type fittings. F. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: 1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, inert, watertight plastic outer jacket. 2. Fittings shall be cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one - piece brass grounding bushings threaded to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated throat. G. Rigid Non - metallic Conduit: 1. Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride suitable for 90 °C. 2. Solvent cemented type fittings. September 30, 2003 Raceways and Boxes Permit Issue 16110 -2 r-� ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM A. Factory pre - assembled connectors and pre -wired cable assemblies to interface with lighting fixtures and lighting switches. UL 498 overload test for connecting or disconnecting under load. UL listed for use in air handling plenums. B. Components shall be color coded for voltage class, function keyed, and dead fronted to avoid the possibility of electrical shock. Cables shall be capable of connecting to any fixture connector on respective switching function. C. Connectors shall be made of injection molded polyester thermoset compound with up to four copper alloyed spade pins or taps for positive contact, two positive locking latches and rated for 20 amps. Provide one multipurpose flexible connector with two power out (one un- switched and one switched) and one switchleg connection faces at each lighting fixture female receptacle to allow for switched o r u n- switched f unctions. P rovide o ne female receptacle for each lighting fixture. Receptacle shall be capable of rotating 270° to reduce excessive stress that may be caused by the cable assemblies. Receptacles shall be recessed or capable of being mounted in a standard 1 /2 inch knockout allowing for end mount conversions in the field where necessary. D. Cable assemblies shall be constructed using a flexible armor jacket with insulated solid 12 gauge copper conductors. Provide a full size insulated grounding conductor in each cable assembly. Each cable assembly shall be supplied with a minimum of two feet of cable more than what is required to connect from fixture to fixture. Quantity of conductors in each cable assembly shall be as required. E. Distribution j unction b oxes s hall c ontain up to f our r eceptacles m ounted i n a UL listed enclosure. Provide with external flanges for mounting to building structure. 2.04 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Sizes and shapes as indicated and /or as required. B. Provide necessary elbows, tees, connectors, adapters, etc. C. Continuous removable cover secured with screws and keyhole slots. Hinged cover where installed above suspended ceiling. D. Provide wire retainers at not greater than 12 inches on center. 2.05 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES A. Cast Type Boxes: 1. Ferrous alloy box with inside threaded hubs for rigid steel conduit. 2. Aluminum box with threaded hubs for rigid aluminum conduit. 3. Ferrous alloy box with compression or inside threaded hubs with adapter for electrical metallic tubing. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Raceways and Boxes 16110 -3 Z ~ w 1 00 N w w u. _° _ Z F. O ZF- W U � O N D I- ww H- U_ O Z 0 - O~ z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 4. Cast raised cover, size matched to contour of box. 5. Tapered threads for hubs. B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes: 1. General: a. Pressed steel, galvanized or cadmium - plated, 4 inches minimum octagonal or square with galvanized cover or extension ring as required. 2. Concrete Box: a. 4 inches minimum octagonal with removable backplate. Depth of box shall allow for minimum of 1 inch of concrete to be poured around the backplate. 3. Lighting Fixture Box: a. 4 inches minimum octagon. b. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling and a modular wiring system is not used, provide a junction box and extend flexible steel conduit to each fixture. 4. Provide 3/8 inch no bolt fixture studs where required. C. Sheet Steel Boxes: 1. No. 12 gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side Tess than 40 inches, and maximum area not exceeding 1,000 square inches; riveted or welded 3/ inch flanges at exterior corners. 2. No. 10 gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side 40 to 60 inches, and maximum area 1,000 to 1,500 square inches; riveted or welded 3 /4 inch flanges at exterior corners. 3. No. 10 gauge sheet steel riveted or welded to 11/2 inch by 1 inch by % inch welded angle iron framework for boxes with maximum side exceeding.60 inches and more than 1,500 square inches in area. 4. Covers: a. Same gauge steel as box. b. Subdivided single covers so no section of cover exceeds 50 pounds. c. Machine bolts or machine screws threaded into tapped holes. 5. Paint: a. Rust inhibiting primer, ANSI 61 grey enamel finish coat. A. Provide raceways for all systems. 277/480V wiring shall be kept independent of 120/208V wiring. Emergency system wiring shall be kept independent of other wiring systems. Provide insulated grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. Wiring of each type and system shall be installed in separate raceways. Protect metallic raceway in earth or fill from corrosion with two coats of corrosion resistant paint or tape wrap. September 30, 2003 Raceways and Boxes Permit Issue 16110 -4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Elbows for conduit installed below grade or embedded within floor slabs shall be rigid steel Z conduit with two coats of corrosion resistant paint or tape wrap. , Z �w D. Tie embedded raceways securely in place prior to concrete placement. Raceways installed 6 v below or within floor slabs shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished slab or v O housekeeping pad to the first connector. Install capped bushings on conduit stub ups. u) o w = E. Locate raceways so that the integrity of structural members is not affected and they do not N conflict with the services of other trades. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight. Protect O threads from corrosion after installation with zinc chromate or equivalent protection. F. Conceal raceways except at surface mounted cabinets and freestanding equipment. Install g minimum of 6 inches from flues, steam pipes, or other heated lines. Provide flashing and cn d counter- flashing f or w aterproofing o f r aceways w hich p enetrate t he r oof. I nstall p ower = W raceways a minimum of 24 inches from telecommunications raceways, cross at 90° angle. Z = Route exposed raceways and raceways above suspended ceilings parallel or perpendicular 0 — O to building lines with right angle turns and symmetrical bends. Provide sleeves in concrete a ►— walls, floor slabs and partitions. Waterproof sleeved raceways where required. 2 n Uo G. Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways at expansion joints p o H and between structures to compensate for differential movement. Provide bonding conductor. w w H� H. Provide one empty 3 /4 inch raceway for each three spare unused poles or spaces of flush- . u. z mounted panelboards. Terminate conduit in an accessible location for future extension. w U = I. Provide raceways with appropriate seal -offs, explosion -proof fittings, etc. in special p (- occupancy areas as required. Provide conduit seal -offs where portions of an interior raceway Z system pass through walls, ceilings or floors which separate adjacent rooms having substantially different maintained temperatures, refrigeration, or cold storage rooms. J. Provide pull cord in empty raceways. Tag both ends noting destination. K. Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. Use ball mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit insider diameter) followed by close fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This assembly may be pulled with, but ahead of cable being installed. Clean empty raceways similarly. Clear or replace any raceway which rejects ball mandrel. L. Install exterior underground conduits 24 inches minimum below finished grade. Do not penetrate waterproof membranes unless proper seal is provided. M. Secure raceways clamps or supports to masonry materials with toggle bolts, expansion bolts, or steel inserts. Install raceway on steel construction with approved clamps which do not depend on friction or set -screw pressure alone. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Raceways and Boxes 16110 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. Raceways Embedded in Floor Slabs: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Raceways shall not be installed in slab without the approval of the Structural Engineer. 2. Raceways shall not interfere with placement of floor slab reinforcement components. 3. Install raceways between the upper and the lower layers of reinforcing steel. 4. Space raceways not less than 8 inches on centers except where they converge at • panels or junction boxes. 5. Raceways running parallel to slabs supports, such as beams, columns and structural walls, shall be installed not less than 12 inches from such supporting elements. 0. Non Metallic Raceway Installations: 1. Joints shall be made using the material recommended by the raceway manufacturer. Components shall be cleaned prior to assembly. 2. Raceway cutoffs shall be square and shall not deform conduit. Ream rough surfaces. 3. Provide male box adapters to terminate raceways. 4. Where separable terminations are required, provide PVC threaded adapters with Iocknuts or bushings. Provide "0" rings for watertight installations. 5. Bends shall be made by methods that do not deform or damage the conduit. 6. Provide expansion fittings where required. 7. Raceway supports shall be installed to allow the non - metallic conduit to slide through the supports. 8. Non - metallic raceway is not permitted within the building. Raceways Above Suspended Ceilings: 1. Single runs of 1/2 inch or 3 /, inch raceways may be supported from ceiling support wires where permitted by the rating of the ceiling system. 2. Provide independent support of raceways larger than 3 /, inch. Provide independent support of multiple raceways (more than one). Provide unistrut support and threaded rod to structure. above.. Attachment to ceiling support wires is not permitted. 3. Provide independent support of raceways installed above fire rated ceilings. Attachment to ceiling support wires is not permitted. 4. Install conduit 1 foot -0 inch minimum above top of ceiling. Q. Underground Duct Banks: 1. Provide underground duct banks as indicated. Provide concrete encasement of power systems duct banks except where duct banks run beneath building slab on grade. Provide concrete encasement of duct bank elbows for all systems. Provide steel reinforcing bars foi concrete encased duct banks. Provide spacers to permit concrete to completely surround and encase each conduit. Concrete strength shall be 3,000 pounds per square inch minimum. Provide red dye inhibiting agent in concrete mix. Raceways and Boxes 16110 -6 a• 3 aux ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Pitch conduit down and away where duct bank enters the building or equipment. 3. Support raceways installed in duct banks every 5 feet to assure correct alignment prior to placing concrete. 4. Terminate raceways with flared end bells. Clear raceway terminations of burrs and rough edges. z JU U R. Conduit connected to rotating or vibrating equipment shall be flexible metal conduit or liquid co 0 tight flexible conduit. w _ H S. Raceways and fittings installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall conform to NEC p Article 500 requirements for the associated Class and Division. g a d A. Provide distribution boxes where transitions are made from fixed raceways to the modular wiring system. Label distribution junction box with panelboard and circuit numbers. z O Z I— uj U � ON 0 I- W ui U A. Install wireways above suspended ceilings such that cover will hinge upward from side. w U O F ' z 3.02 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM B. Cable assemblies shall be connected horizontally to multi - purpose connectors. Support cable assemblies at intervals not to exceed 4 feet -6 inches on center or closer if required. Provide dust caps on unused connector faces. 3.03 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS B. Provide 12 inches clear from wireway cover when in open position. 3.04 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES A. Provide outlet, junction, and pull boxes as indicated and as required for a complete installation and to facilitate proper pulling of wires and cables. Boxes shall be sized per electrical code as minimum. Plug open knock outs. B. The exact location of outlets and equipment is governed by field conditions. Where necessary, relocate outlets so that fixtures and equipment are symmetrically located in accordance with the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment. Verify final location of outlets, fixtures, and equipment with Architect. C. Back -to -back outlets in the same wall, or "through -wall" type boxes are not permitted. Provided 12 inch minimum spacing for outlets shown on opposite side of a common wall. Provide acoustical potting compound on outlet boxes installed in private offices and conference rooms. D. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceilings or wall with appropriate covers, set flush with the finished surface. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use multiple gang boxes and covers. Provide tile box or a 4 inch square box with tile ring in masonry walls not plastered or furred. Where drywall material is utilized, provide plaster ring. Provide outlet boxes of type and size suitable for the specific application. Provide barriers where required for voltage or systems separation. September 30, 2003 Raceways and Boxes Permit Issue 16110 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Provide pull boxes so that an individual run of conduit does not contain more than the equivalent of 4 ninety degree bends (360 degrees total). 3.05 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Where exposed to physical damage. 2. Indoors where exposed to moisture. 3. Where required by code. 4. Exposed indoor installations within 10 feet above finished floor. 5. Exposed outdoor installations. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing: 1. General purpose feeders and branch circuits, except where another conduit type is specifically required. C. Metal Clad Cable: 1. Use i n dry locations only concealed above suspended ceilings or within hollow partitions for lighting and receptacle branch circuits (not permitted for circuit home runs). D. Flexible Steel Conduit: 1. Dry locations only. 2. Connections to lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings. 3. Connections to equipment installed suspended ceilings. 4. Transformer connections. 5. Connections to equipment where vibration isolation is needed. 6. Maximum length shall be 6 feet. E. Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit: 1. Same as flexible steel conduit in damp or wet locations. 2. Motor connections. F. Rigid Non - metallic Conduit: 1. Underground duct banks. 2. Below slab on grade. 3. Embedded in floor slabs. G. Modular Wiring System: 1. Non - emergency lighting system connection in accessible ceiling locations. September 30, 2003 Raceways and Boxes Permit Issue 16110 -8 /+ a z U O. N0 w J w 0: • w H= z � Zo w U� • • N` 0 I- X w w` w Z: • US O F " Z • ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: z 1. Where indicated. H w 2. Above and below panelboards, lighting relay cabinets, and terminal cabinets to ct 2 accommodate large concentrations of wires. J v o o 3.06 APPLICATION OF BOXES OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES N W J : A. Cast Type Boxes: W O 1. • Where connected to rigid steel, intermediate metal, rigid aluminum conduit and liquid 2 tight flexible conduit, 1 inches and smaller. ga n 2. Exposed conduit installations within 10 feet above finished floor. u_ < ' 3. Where exposed to moisture and outdoors. Si d B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes: ? z', F- O 1. Where connected to electrical metallic tubing and flexible steel conduit, 1 inches Z ILI H: and smaller. ? o' 2. Dry locations. 0 N 3. Where concealed in walls and above suspended ceilings. , 0 —` Ill ui H V ui Z END OF SECTION - H' z C. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Sheet Steel Boxes: 1. Where connected to conduit larger than 1'/, inches. Raceways and Boxes 16110 -9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 16120 600V WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide 600V wire and cable in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Rubber Insulated Wire and Cables: ICEA S- 19 -81, NEMA WC 3, and UL 44. B. Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables: ICEA S -61 -402, NEMA WC 3, and UL 83. C. Cross Linked Thermosetting Polythylene Insulated Wire and Cables: ICEA S -66 -524, NEMA WC 7, and UL 44. Service Entrance Cable: UL 854. E. Annealed Copper Wire for Conductors: ASTM B -3. F. Terminal Blocks: UL 1059. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wire and cable shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Field test reports. 1.05. FIELD TESTING A. Inspect splices and terminations and make mechanically and electrically tight during the fifteen day period immediately prior to final acceptance of the work. B. Feeder insulation shall be tested after installation, and before final connection. --1 1. Tests shall be performed with a 500 volt megger, and conductors shall test free from ��. short circuits and grounds. 2. Conductors shall be tested phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground. 3. Furnish the instruments, materials, and labor required. C. Demonstration: Subsequent to wire and cable installation and connection, energize circuits and demonstrate functioning in accordance with contract requirements. Correct deficiencies and retest to demonstrate compliance. 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Wire and Cable September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Anaconda, Brand -Rex, Collyer, Cyprus, General Cable, Hatfield, Houston, Kaiser, Kerite, National, Okonite, Rome, Simplex, or Triangle. B. Connectors 1. Wire size number 14 through number 6: a. Hand applied: Piggy (Thomas & Betts), Scotchlock (3M), (Ideal). b. Tool applied: Burndy HYDENT or Thomas & Betts Stakon. Wire size number 4 through number 1: a. Tool applied: One hole compression type, Burndy HYLUG Betts 54000 Series. 3. Wire size number 1/0 through 1000 MCM: a. Tool applied: Two hole compression type, Burndy HYLUG Betts 54000 series. C. Electrical Tape: 1. Insulating type, Johns - Manville or 3M. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE A. General 1. 600V minimum insulating rating. B. Conductor C. Stranding and Number of Conductors or Wing Nut or Thomas & or Thomas & 1. Electrical grade, annealed copper, tinned if rubber insulated, and fabricated in accordance with ASTM and ICEA standards. Minimum size number 12 for branch circuits; number 14 for control wiring. 2. Aluminum conductors are not permitted. 1. Number 12 and number 10 solid. 2. Larger than number 10, stranded ASTM Class B. 3. Control wires stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding designations. 4. Cables for low voltage systems shall be multi conductor type unless otherwise noted. 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -2 z re I JU U O O 0 w= D ' u. w g Q = a _ z ~. H O. w ~ 2 D. 0 0 N: 0 w w' IU uJ z. U_ O z . Conductor 120/208V System 277/480V System Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Grey Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Green/Yellow Stripe Green/Yellow Stripe ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS D. Insulation PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Maximum of three branch circuits in one conduit unless otherwise indicated. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila 1. 600 volts, PVC insulation, nylon jacket, surface printed identification, listed as type THHN or THWN per UL 83. E. Color Coding 1. Wiring shall be color coded as follows: 2. Wire number 8 and smaller shall be factory color -coded the entire length. Wire number 6 and larger shall be color coded by color taping entire length of exposed conductor at all accessible locations. 3. Control wiring shall be color coded in accordance with manufacturer's . recommendations. B. Provide minimum number 10 wiring for 120 volt branch circuits exceeding 150 feet in length from panelboard to furthest outlet. Provide minimum number 10 wiring for 277 volt branch circuits exceeding 250 feet in length from panelboard to furthest outlet. C. Do not install wire until raceway systems are complete. D. Provide cable supports for vertical risers. E. Wire size shall be uniform for the entire length of the circuit unless noted otherwise. F. Do not splice feeders or dedicated branch circuits unless otherwise indicated. G. Make connections, splices, taps, and joints with solderiess devices, mechanically and electrically secure. 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -3 z 1 r w QQ � J U 0 • O WI 1 H N W O gQ _ ° 1— w Z F- 0 Z 1— w w U � O - H . W W 0 r- u. O .. z. v _ - = o � z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Lubricate cables to facilitate pulling. Lubrication material shall be inert to cable insulation and raceways. I. Install compression connectors with hydraulic die, embossing die code into connector. Connect to bus with Bellville type washers for positive pressure over complete contact area. Insulate with heat shrink tubing. J. Provide a separate neutral for dimmer branch circuits, ground fault interrupter branch circuits, and branch circuits serving isolated ground and isolated ground surge suppressor type receptacles. Conductors in underfloor electrical systems shall be number 10 AWG minimum. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 600V Wire and Cable Permit Issue 16120 -4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide wiring devices in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer. i 1.04 SUBMITTALS SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES B. Occupancy sensors shall be certified for operation with specific ballasts utilized in controlled lighting fixtures. C. Occupancy sensors shall have a minimum three year warranty. D. Equipment shall be certified for use in the State of Washington and shall meet the State Energy Code and local energy ordinances. E. Coordinate service fittings with electrified furniture system supplier. F. Floor boxes shall comply with UL scrub water tests for carpet, wood and tile floors. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Switches: Federal Specifications WS -896E. B. Receptacles: Federal Specification WC596 -D, NEMA WD -1, and UL 498. C. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles: UL 943 Class A. D. Wall Dimmers: ANSI C62.41, UL 20. E. Electrified furniture system supplier's requirements. A. Manufacturer's product data sheets. B. Occupancy sensor layout drawings, 1/16 inch scale, including interwiring of switchpacks and control devices. September 30, 2003 Wiring Devices Permit Issue 16140 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.05 COLORS z Z ce w B. Switches and receptacles connected to the emergency power system shall be red. 6 v 00 CO CI W = J � W O u- a B. Switches and Receptacles: Arrow Hart, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, or Slater. Z �. C. Wall Dimmers: Lightolier or Lutron. Z O 2 j ; D. Occupancy Sensors: Mytech, Novitas, or Watt Stopper. v p O N Floor Boxes and Fittings: o H h = W g type: Walker RCI. t— � ? 1. Poke through Recessed flush floor box type: Steel City or Walker. L I p w z UN O t- z A. Device and coverplate colors shall be as selected by Architect. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Catalog numbers shall not be used to determine colors of devices and coverplates. Catalog numbers are used to establish minimum acceptable standard. E. F. Plugstrip: Wiremold or Mono - systems, Inc. 2.02 SWITCHES A. General: B. Lighting Switches: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Switches shall be of the type indicated on the Drawings. 2. Switches shall be commercial specification grade, 20A, 120/277V, 1 HP rated at 120V, 2HP rated at 240V, back and side wired, silent handle operation. 1. Rocker handle type: a. Single pole: Leviton Decora 5621. b. Double pole: Leviton Decora 5622 -2. c. 3 way: Leviton Decora 5623. d. 4 way: Leviton Decora 5624 -2. Wiring Devices 16140 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Illuminated Handle Switches: 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Rocker handle type: a. Single pole: Leviton Decora 5631. b. 3 way: Leviton Decora 5633. D. Transfer Fan Switches: Cl) 0 w J I-- 1. Toggle handle type, single pole: Leviton 1221 -2, coverplate engraved FAN. 2. Rocker handle type, single pole: Leviton Decora 5601 -2 engraved FAN. w O E. Weatherproof Switches: J u. ? 1. Weatherproof handle / coverplate. = a ` I- w F. Electronic Timer Switch z H I- O Z F- 1. Five button time interval: 5, 10, 15 and 30 minutes plus OFF button. 2. Ratings: a. 1000W, 120VAC, incandescent. b. 20A, 120VAC, inductive. c. 1 HP, 120VAC, motor. 3. Leviton Decora 6230M. 1. Receptacles shall be of the type indicated on the Drawings. 2. Receptacles shall be commercial specification grade, 125V, grounding type, back and side wired. • B. Receptacles: 1. Designer style single, 15A: Leviton Decora 16251. 2. Designer style duplex, 15A: Leviton Decora 16252. 3. Designer style duplex, 20A: Leviton Decora 16352. C. Isolated Ground Receptacles: 1. Designer style duplex, 15A: Leviton Decora 16262 -IG. 2. Designer style duplex, 20A: Leviton Decora 16362 -IG. D. Isolated Ground Surge Suppressor Receptacles: 1. Duplex, 15A: Leviton 5280 -IG. 2. Duplex, 20A: Leviton 5380 -IG. Wiring Devices 16140 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila E. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles: 1. Duplex, 15A: Leviton 6598. — 1 ~ 2. Duplex, 20A: Leviton 6898 -HGR. w F Special purpose receptacles: Rating as indicated on the Drawings. 0 G. Weatherproof Receptacles: w la J F- t Duplex, weatherproof coverplate with hinged door. N u w H. Power Connection to Electrified Furniture System: 2 J 1. Single gang stainless steel coverplate with factory cut hole suitable for connection or N D electrified furniture system wiring whip. = w F- _ 2.04 WALL DIMMERS ? 1... F- O zH A. Wall dimmers shall be suitable for control of the load type (incandescent, low voltage, or ILI i fluorescent), load capacity, and branch circuit voltage of the lighting fixtures controlled. v p D B. Thin profile, linear slide to off control, power failure memory, front accessible service switch. 0 1.-- w w C. Lightolier Sunrise /Momentum series or Lutron Nova T -Star thin profile series. H r u. 2.05 OCCUPANCY SENSORS i z o A. Occupancy sensors shall be suitable for control of the load type (incandescent, low voltage, H= O f- or fluorescent), load capacity, and branch circuit voltage of the lighting fixtures controlled. z B. - Ultrasonic, passive infrared, or dual technology type, user adjustable time delay and sensitivity settings. ti C. Wall Switch: D. Ceiling Mounted: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Manual ON, manual OFF control switches. 2. Bypass override ON switch in the event of product failure. 3. 120/277V operation. 4. Mytech LP -2, Novitas Model 01 -211, or Watt Stopper WA -100. 1. One way type: M ytech ONMI -US series, Novitas Model 01 -100 series, or Watt Stopper WT -605. 2. Two way types: Mytech ONMI -US series, Novitas Model 01 -110 series, or Watt Stopper WT -1105. 3. Corridor type: Mytech ONMI -US 2000, Novitas Model 01 -180 (one way) and 01 -190 (two way) series, or Watt Stopper WT -2255. Wiring Devices 16140 -4 --, ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Switchpacks: 1. Provide switchpacks as required for circuiting and control as shown. 2. 120/277V operation. 3. Isolated 20A contacts. ce w 4. Novitas Model 13 -031 series, Mytech MP series, or Watt Stopper B120/277E -P. 6 = -1 C.) 2.06 COVERPLATES co 0 co w A. Provide coverplates for wiring devices. Provide multiple gang coverplates where multiple -J H devices are installed in a common location. N w w 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES g u. Q A. Pushbutton: Glowing button, Leviton 9702. co O B. Buzzer: Leviton 602, provide transformer. Z H C. Bell: Leviton 601, provide transformer. w O D p 0 O N 0 H w h � u_ O fa H = O H PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. General: 1. Verify the exact location of wiring devices with Architect. 2. Devices mounted above counters shall be 2 inches above the top of the backsplash to the bottom of the coverplate. 3. Provide a number 12 grounding conductor from the device grounding terminal to the panelboard ground bus. Bond wiring device to outlet box. 4. Switches that control devices that are connected to the emergency power system shall be the illuminated handle type. 5. Connect electrified furniture system wiring whip to power outlet. B. Switches: 1. Mount switches vertically with the ON position on top. 2. Mount switches on the strike side of doors. 3. Provide rocker handle type lighting switches in all areas. C. Receptacles: 1. Mount receptacles vertically with the grounding pin on bottom. 2. Provide designer style type duplex receptacles to match rocker handle type lighting switches in all areas. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Wiring Devices 16140 -5 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Occupancy Sensors: 1. Range and coverage of occupancy sensors may vary from one manufacturer to another. Occupancy sensors on drawings show general placement and zoning intent only.. Provide additional occupancy sensors to ensure complete room coverage in accordance with manufacturer's coverage and orientation requirements. Where two or more occupancy sensors are indicated within a room or space, they shall be arranged so that the coverage overlaps an adjacent sensor's coverage by not Tess than 25 %. 2 Provide occupancy sensors with minimum and maximum load specifications appropriate to the Toad controlled. • E. Coverplates: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Install device plates in full contact with wall surface. Plates shall not project out from the wall. 2. Coverplates for multiple gang wall dimmers shall be continuous flush type tailored to match wall dimmer physical dimensions. 3. Provide thermoplastic, smooth face coverplates in all areas. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices 16140 -6 j ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 16200 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM u,w H w O; 2. Fuel oil pumping and transfer pump system. < Ia = w z � A. Provide engine generator system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related work specified in other divisions of these specifications: 1. Main fuel oil tank and fuel oil day tank(s). A. Equipment supplier shall have local representation and shall have been actively engaged in installation and service of generator sets and automatic transfer switches for a period of not Tess than 10 years. B. Equipment suppliers shall have full parts backup and 24 hour per day service availability for this equipment. z _ 6 '~ w U O' CO C Z O 2 U 0 w = U C. The generator set supplier shall review the fuel system design and certify that the installation 0, meets the engine manufacturer's requirements and will allow for proper operation of the generator set at full rated Toad. ui N r-- O I- 1.03 STANDARDS A. Alternator: 1. ASTM D396. 2. NEMA MG -1 -22. Battery Charger: 1. UL 1236. Transfer Switches: 1. UL 508 and 1008. 2. • NFPA 101. Engine Generator: 1. Local Air Quality Management District. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila E. General System Design Installation and Testing: z 1. NFPA 110. z r w F. Testing: QQ g J 1. NETA. N p 1.04 LOCATION CRITERIA -J H 0 w 1. Altitude: 500 feet above sea level. w 0 2. Seismic: UBC Zone 3. 2 � a 1.05 SUBMITTALS rn O A. Detailed drawing of the engine generator set with dimensioned locations of components and ~ z external connections and attachments. Indicate position of radiator and direction of air ? 1.- movement. z ww B. Engine manufacturer's specifications, performance data, certified power outlet curves, and 2 p certified fuel consumption curves. 0 cn 0 1— C. Calculations c ertifying t hat t he n et e ngine h orsepower i s e qual t o o r g reater t han 1.45 Ill w horsepower per kilowatt Tess parasitic loads at specified ambient conditions with engine F- H manufacturer's supporting data. g_ 0 w z D. Exhaust system back pressure calculations certifying that the engine exhaust system with U = proposed silencer and piping as indicated on the mechanical drawings for this installation is i within the manufacturer's criteria. z E. Starting battery sizing calculations showing compliance with specifications at ambient conditions. F. Drawing showing battery cell and jar connections. G. Certified vibration isolation details and product data showing the number and location of each support and the exact number, size, and type of each anchor. Submit for engine generator set, exhaust silencer, day tank, and battery rack. H. Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and wiring diagrams for each engine generator system component. I. Detailed point -to -point wiring diagrams. J. Manufacturer's statement that the overall system design and specification has been reviewed and is satisfactory for system performance or list of exceptions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila K. After the engine generator system is accepted, submit a completed permit application for the Z local Air Quality Management District, ready for submission by the Owner. i z �w L. Manufacturer's product data sheets, performance data, detailed layout drawings, and control 0 _1 and wiring diagrams for the automatic transfer switches. 0 0 M. Name and location of factory authorized service agency to approve and start up installation. w = J N. Name and location of factory authorized service agency to perform warranty and service co � work. w 0 2 O. Name and location of certified testing agency to perform field- testing. g Q co m P. Certified prototype, factory, and field test reports. = a I- w Z� 1.06 SYSTEM TESTING ZI- Ill uj np 1. Factory tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer. 0 D. 2. Owner's representatives may elect to witness factory testing. Provide 14 day o H advance notification. w w 3. Test alarm points. i— i= 4. Test shut -down points. 9- 0 5. 4 hour, 100% resistive and reactive Toad test at full rated load and power factor. w Z a. Monitor voltage stability. U b. Monitor frequency stability. F= H c. Apply and remove Toad in 25% increments. Z 6. Oscillograph chart recordings of voltage and frequency of generator set transient performance for 100% step Toad addition and subtraction indicatirig compliance with specifications. 7. Equipment shall be Prototype Test Supported certified. A. Factory Tests: B. Field Tests: 1. Field tests shall be conducted by factory certified technicians. 2. Field inspection and testing shall occur after installation is complete and the room is secure. 3. Test transfer switches, engine start circuits, time delay circuits, status points, and system control points. 4. Perform 4 hour 100% full resistive Toad test using a temporary Toad bank. Unsuccessful tests shall be fully documented, submitted, and re- tested until successful. 1.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The engine generator set supplier shall provide a m inimum o f f our h ours o f o perating instructions on maintenance and operation of the emergency power system. Classes shall be open up to three representatives of the Owner's maintenance staff. Instructions shall be administered by a full time employee of the supplier. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -3 a,.,;i...:.i;'aw_.�:.u.J..... ... .�...; a ...a.... ir. , �irt.:i,.MU.nv.H ., at ,vw.• a.u..�...— . -..-. _.. _�...t ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS z A. Diesel Engine: Caterpillar, Onan, Detroit Diesel, Kohler . z w B. Radiator: Modine, Perfex, or Young. "" J v O 0 C. Exhaust Silencer: Cowl, Maxim, or Nelson. co w I D. Vibration Isolators: Mason Industries or Vibration Eliminator. co u_ uWO E. Batteries: C & D, Exide, or Nife. 2 J F. Battery Charger: LaMarche, Onan, or Sens. • m Z C7 G. Generator: Caterpillar, Kato, Marathon, or Onan. �- _ zF- H. Govemor: Woodward. Z 0 w al I. Voltage Regulator: Basler or Stanford - Newage. 2 p U N J. Circuit Breakers: Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D /Groupe Schneider. 0 1- w w K. Load Bank: Avtron, Loadtec, or Simplex. I = - H IL 2.02 ENGINE .i.i z U N A. The engine shall run on number 2 diesel fuel, 1800 RPM, compression ignition type, four ~O H stroke - cycle, water cooled, solid injection, either vertical in -line or vee configuration. z B. The net brake horsepower of the engine at rated operating speed shall be not less than 1.45 times the rated standby electric kilowatt rating of the engine generator. Net brake horsepower is defined as the horsepower that the fully derated bare engine can deliver less all parasitic loads. C. Fuel consumption of the engine generator shall be substantiated by means of manufacturer's certified curves. D. The engine shall be equipped with an electronic govemor to maintain engine speed within specified limits. Governor s hall b e adjustable from i sochronous t o five p ercent d roop. Frequency shall be factory set at rated' frequency. E. Engine safety devices, including high water temperature switch, overspeed sensing switch, low oil pressure switch, low water temperature switch, and other required devices, shall be mounted on the engine and connected to the control and status panel instruments and alarms as specified herein. F. Engine wiring shall be industrial quality, heat resistant, insulated, copper conductors. Wiring shall be protected and shall be isolated from high temperature engine parts. Wiring for alternating current power circuits shall installed in conduit. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM A. Provide an engine mounted electric starting motor with solenoid and over - running clutch drive. The starting motor shall be of the required voltage and ampere rating. B. Provide a system of lead calcium batteries sized such that the engine generator set may complete four, sixty- second complete cranking cycles at firing speed and specified room temperature. Provide a seismic rack and cables of sufficient ampacity. C. Provide a wall mounted 120V AC battery charger which shall recharge battery to full capacity within eight hours. Battery charger shall have both a high rate and float rate charging system. The battery charger shall be current limiting and shall not require cranking cutout contacts for charger protection when cranking. Accessories shall include: DC ammeter, fused input, DC voltmeter, high /low DC output voltage relay, and input voltage failure relay. Battery charger output shall be rated ten amperes minimum at required voltage. Controls to adjust both the float and equalize voltage shall be located on the front of the charger. Charger current level shall automatically drop to a sufficiently low level to eliminate overcharging of the batteries. D. The entire electric starting system shall be rated for 24 or 32V DC operation as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 ENGINE HEATING SYSTEM A. Provide jacket water heaters sized to insure that engine will start within the specified time period and ambient conditions. Provide thermostats, oil pressure disconnecting device, and required connection boxes. B. Provide branch circuit wiring in conduit from panelboard to jacket water heaters. Circuit breakers shall have the appropriate ampere and pole configuration to suit the selected jacket water heaters. 2.05 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM A. The engine shall be liquid cooled by means of an engine mounted vertical core radiator. The radiator shall be adequately sized to cool the engine on a continuous basis at the maximum ambient temperature and altitude specified. The radiator and fan shall be designed to properly cool the generator set with external static restraint of up to 0.5 inches H Provide suitable expansion space by means of either a surge tank or radiator top tank. Provide an engine driven propeller type fan. Engine coolant shall be a mixture of fifty percent ethylene glycol based antifreeze and fifty percent water. Provide duct adapter flange for flex connection to the exhaust outlet provided by others. B. The engine shall be equipped with a centrifugal type water - circulating pump and thermostat valve to maintain the engine at recommended temperature level. September 30, 2003 Engine Generator System Permit Issue 16200 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM Z Hw A. Provide an air cleaner /silencer as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Air cleaners !r 2 shall be dry type with replaceable elements. � w i 0 B. Engine exhaust outlets shall be coupled to the exhaust silencer(s) by means of an adequately co o sized section of stainless corrugated flex. Flex connector(s) shall be flanged at both ends for tu mating to the engine and exhaust system. -1 H C. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be critical grade. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be sized to limit exhaust wO back pressure to acceptable values. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be suitable for horizontal g mounting, equipped with flanged bottom inlet and flanged end outlet. The exhaust silencer(s) Q shall be double wall construction and shall have a high temperature anti - corrosion coating to applied uniformly on the outside surface. w Z �. I- 0 Z I- A. Fuel lines between injection pumps and valves shall be heavy seamless tubing. 2 w U � B. Provide fuel filters with replaceable elements. Fuel filters shall be located in an accessible 0 housing ahead of the injection pumps. 0 I- wo C. Provide an engine driven fuel transfer pump. v 2.07 FUEL SYSTEM L I O 2.08 ALTERNATOR Iii Z U = A. Engine generator set shall be rated 277/480V, wye connected, three phase, four wire, 60 0 '-- Hertz, 0.8 power factor, kilowatt capacity as indicated on the Drawings. Z B. The alternator shall be four pole, synchronous brushless type. The alternator shall be single bearing type coupled directly to the engine flywheel by means of a flexible disc coupling. C. The alternator voltage regulator shall be solid type, three phase sensing and shall incorporate an underfrequency protective circuit to limit generator excitation at lower than normal operating speeds. The voltage regulator shall be equipped with a voltage adjusting rheostat capable of plus or minus five percent rated voltage adjustment. The voltage regulator shall maintain the voltage within the limits specified. D. The alternator insulation system shall be NEMA Class H and shall be a combination of epoxy coating and varnish. The alternator shall be sized and properly derated according to NEMA MG1 -22 -1975 to yield a maximum temperature rise of 80 degrees centigrade by resistance above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees centigrade at rated altitude and Toad. E. Excitation shall be provided by a direct connected brushless permanent magnetic rotating exciter. The alternator shall be of the three -phase design and connected to a full wave three phase rotating bridge. Diodes used shall be of the silicon type mounted on proper heat sinks with surge protector. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Exciter field power shall be provided by a separate permanent magnet generator directly connected to the brushless exciter. The PMG shall provide sufficient power to the excitation system to produce 300% current from the main operator armature during a three phase fault with sufficient duration for protective devices to operate. 2.09 CONTROL AND STATUS PANELS A. General: 1. Provide an audible alarm signal, silence switch, and lamp test button on each control and status panel. Provide power for alarm system from generator battery system. 2. Upon alarm activation, sound the audible alarm signal and indicate, by means of individual lights at annunciator panels, which particular malfunction is initiating the alarm. Provide 3/16 inch high (minimum) labeling to identify the alarm. B. Main Control and Status Panel: 1. Provide a main control and status panel for each engine generator set. Panel shall be hinged door, mounted on the engine generator set with vibration isolators. 2 Main line circuit breaker. The breaker shall have a solid state trip unit with true RMS current sensing. Circuit breaker shall be 100% continuous rated. The circuit breaker shall be provided with a DPDT auxiliary contact to provide a supervisory indication should the breaker be in the off or tripped position. 3. AC ammeter, 3 inches, 2 percent accuracy, red line at maximum output of generator. 4. AC voltmeter, 31/2 inches, 2 percent accuracy, red line at 480 volts. 5. Ammeter, voltmeter selector switch. 6. Frequency meter, 3% inch dial type, 2 percent accuracy. 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge. 8. Engine oil pressure gauge. 9. Control and status points as specified under remote control and status panels. C. Remote Control and Status Panels: 1. Provide two remote control and status panels per engine generator set. Locate one in the Engineer's Control Center and one in the Fire Control Center. Provide control and status points as required by NFPA 110 for level 1 systems and as specified herein. Provide separate switch status points for each transfer switch. Engine Generator System Permit Issue 16200 -7 September 30, 2003 Condition Engine Generator Control 8 Status Panel Fire Control Center Remote Control & Status Panel Engineer's Control Center Control & Status Panel Engine Shut Down High Coolant Temperature Alarm Alarm Alarm Yes Approach to High Coolant Temperature Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Coolant Temperature Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Coolant Level Alarm Alarm Alarm No Overspeed Alarm Alarm Alarm Yes Low Oil Pressure Alarm Alarm Alarm Yes Cranking Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Battery Voltage Alarm Alarm Alarm No Battery Charger Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Fuel Day Tank Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Fuel Main Tank Alarm Alarm Alarm No Main Circuit Breaker Open or Tripped Alarm Alarm Alarm No Main Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Alarm Alarm Alarm No Load Bank Cooling Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm No Generator Running Indication Yes Yes Yes NA System Ready Indication Yes Yes Yes NA Generator Start/Stop Switch Yes No 1 Key Switch NA Transfer Switch Not in Automatic Mode (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Connected to Normal Source (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Connected to Emergency Source (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Emergency Source Available (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Normal Source Available (One •er Transfer Switch Yes Yes Yes No ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2. Provide control and status points as follows: UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 1 6200 -8 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.10 ENGINE GENERATOR SET PERFORMANCE A. The engine generator set shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: - .J 2.11 WEATHERPROOF HOUSING -' A. The engine generator set and related equipment shall be housed in a factory fabricated outdoor weatherproof enclosure. The design and placement shall be such that the generator will function properly without overheating in the ambient conditions specified. B. Enclosure shall be of the walk -in, floorless, drop over type secured to an approved reinforced concrete foundation via iron angle frame. The enclosure shall be of sufficient size and volume to accommodate acoustical attenuation and vibration isolation equipment. 1. Voltage regulation: ± 1 percent from 0 to 100% Toad. 2. Steady state voltage stability: ± 0.5 percent rated voltage. 3. Balanced telephone interference factor (TIF) shall not exceed 50. 4. Frequency regulation from no load to full load: ± 1.00 percent. 5. Steady state frequency stability shall be ± 0.25 percent. 6. Generator set shall be capable of start -up and accepting rated load within 10 seconds. 7. Maximum frequency change on application change on application or removal of 100% rated load resistive and reactive load shall not exceed ± 5.0 percent. 8. Maximum recovery time to return to frequency stability bandwidth shall not exceed 4 seconds. 9. Maximum voltage dip with step application of load up to 100% rated capacity at 0.8 power factor shall not exceed 30 percent. 10. Voltage recovery time with step application of load up to 100% rated capacity at 0.8 power factor shall not exceed ± 1% voltage within 4.0 seconds. 1 u j C. Roof shall be pitched for drainage and overlapping on all sides. Exhaust pipe opening shall be fitted watertight sealing material. Provide a drip shield around the exhaust pipe opening. D. Doors shall be gasketed and mounted on piano type hinges. Provide a key lock for each door. E. Fixed storm proof louvers shall be provided to allow the engine generator set to operate at J the project location at rated conditions with all enclosure doors closed. F. Provide an internal fluorescent lighting system with on /off switch and standby batteries. J Circuit illumination sources to an emergency power system panelboard. G. Enclosure shall be of sufficient size to allow for code required clearances and maintenance. H. Exhaust silencer shall be mounted above roof of enclosure. Silencer shall be painted with heat and weather resistant paint. Provide a bird screen at the end port. I. All exterior surfaces shall be factory painted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Unit shall have sufficient guards to prevent entrance by small animals. z K. Batteries to fit inside enclosure and along side the engine (batteries shall not be installed – w under the generator). rt 2 L. Unit shall have coolant and oil drains outside the unit to facilitate maintenance. Provide a 0 O valve Located near the fluid source. co w J = M. Fuel filter shall be mounted inside the base perimeter and located so that spilled fuel.cannot N ~ fall on hot parts of the engine or generator. Provide a cleanable primary fuel strainer to w O collect water and sediment between tank and main engine fuel filter. — 2 N. Crankcase fumes disposal shall terminate in front of the radiator to prevent oil from collecting L on the radiator core and reducing cooling capacity. = d I - w 2.12 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ? F- O A. Installation shall be in accordance with approved vibration isolation and seismic restraint w w 0p U O N o ff w w LL 2.13 ti) Z N A. Provide an engine radiator mounted airflow cooled permanent resistive Toad bank. Load ~O 1 _ z submittal. B. Fuel oil and coolant lines shall be flexible braided bronze hoses. C. Raceway connections to unit shall be in liquid tight flexible metal conduit. LOAD BANK bank shall be for local manual operation. B. The Toad bank shall be installed within the air discharge of the engine unit mounted radiator and cooled by the radiator airflow. Load bank shall be solidly attached to radiator and provided with a flexible coupling to attach to the discharge plenum. C. Load bank shall be rated 50 %•of the full KW Toad. A separate load bank feeder breaker and feeder shall be provided in the generator terminal compartment. D. The Toad bank shall be completely self contained, including resistive load elements, Toad control devices, Toad element branch circuit fuse protection, main Toad bus and terminals, control terminals, system protection devices and enclosure. E. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1, galvanized steel construction. Control components shall be subpanel mounted and isolated from load elements and cooling airflow. Airflow through load elements shall be horizontal. Provide mounting adapters suitable for the installation method. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -10 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila L. z F. Load elements shall be totally enclosed, sealed and weatherproof with an electrically = • grounded outer sheath such that the element cannot be electrically short- circuited by external .1' w foreign objects and personnel are protected against accidental electrical shock. Dements 6 shall be individually replaceable. _i 0 0 G. Provide branch circuit fuses for each 50KW Toad branch circuit. Fuses shall be 200,000 RMS c o 0 symmetrical amperes, current limiting type. w H H. Load step control shall utilize one magnetic contactor per each fused branch circuit. Load w 0 bank power wiring shall be 150 °C insulated. 2 I. Main terminals shall be copper sized at 1000A per square inch. j co a = uja J. Control power shall be derived internally from the main load bus. Control and protective F _ circuits shall operate at 220V using a control power transformer. ? F- I- O K. The load bank shall include a protection system to protect against overheating. The system al Lu shall disconnect the load elements from the power source and activate an alarm upon sensing a loss of cooling airflow or an exhaust air temperature greater than 300 °F. 0 N O 0 t- Ili ii i U 1. NEMA 1 enclosure. u 0 2. Control power on -off pushbuttons. Z 3. NORMAL OPERATION indicator lamp. V �. 4. Master load control switch. t-. H 5. Load step control switches. O 6. COOLING FAILURE alarm indicator lamp with alarm contacts. Z 7. Load bank disconnect circuit to disconnect load bank on engine start signal. 8. Load bank disconnect circuit bypass to allow the load bank to supplement the actual building load. Control Panel: 2.14 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Automatic transfer switches shall be capable of switching all classes of load and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a non - ventilated enclosure. B. Switches on 3 wire systems shall be 3 pole. Switches on 4 wire systems shall be 4 pole. C. Four pole switches shall have all 4 poles connected to a common shaft, or may be provided with overlapping neutral contacts. D. The transfer switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70 percent of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals. E. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized to minimize power consumption and heat generation. The operating transfer time shall be 1/6 of a second maximum. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -11 . - .. ...x. . . Automatic Transfer Switch Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker Rating Current Limiting Fuse Rating Up to 30 10,000 100,000 31 -70 22,000 200,000 71 -150 30,000 200,000 151 -800 50,000 200,000 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. The use of molded case circuit breakers, contactors, or other components not rated for continuous duty, repetitive switching, or transfer between two active power sources is not acceptable. G. Transfer switches shall be switchboard mounted or mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures as indicated on the Drawings. Switchboard mounted the automatic transfer switches shall be furnished without enclosure to the switchboard manufacturer. Enclosure shall be an integral part of the switchboard and fabricated by the switchboard manufacturer. Connections to other switchboard components shall be bus connected. H. The entire transfer switch and relay plate assembly shall be capable of withstanding a 2500 volt crest transient per IEEE Standard 472 -1974. The transient voltage test shall be conducted across the normal source terminals, the emergency source terminals, and between adjacent normal and emergency source terminals. Minimum withstand and close -in ratings shall be as follows (ratings shall be higher where indicated on the Drawings): I. Provide in line current limiting fuse protection within transfer switch where required to meet short circuit withstanding ratings. J Transfer switch shall have a field adjustable programmed delay in the neutral position when transferring between live sources. In -phase monitor system is not permitted. 2.15 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES A. Close differential solid state adjustable voltage sensing on all phases of normal source: 1. Set drop -out at 80% rated voltage. 2. Set pick -up at 90% rated voltage. B. Three phase voltage sensing of emergency source: C. Frequency sensing of emergency source: 1. Pick -up field adjustable from 90 to 100 %. Factory set at 95 %. Engine Generator System Permit Issue 16200 -12 September 30, 2003 1. Set pick -up at 90% rated voltage. 2. Set drop -out at 80% rated voltage. Nil 1 _j J _ 1. Mounted on enclosure door. •2. Red indicates switch in emergency position. 3. Green indicates switch in normal position. 4. White to indicate normal source available. 5. White to indicate emergency source available. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Time delay on engine start: 1. Field adjustable from 0.5 to 3 seconds. Factory set at 1 second. E. Time delay on re- transfer to normal: 1. Field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. Factory set at 10 minutes. 2. Immediate bypass of time delay and transfer to normal source if emergency source fails. F. Time delay on transfer to emergency: 1. Field adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Set at 0 seconds. G. Time delay between live sources adjustable from 0.4 to 2.0 seconds. Factory set at 1 second. H. Unload engine run cool down time delay: 1. Field adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes. Factory set at 5 minutes. I. Engine start contacts: 1. SPDT to operate upon failure of normal source. J. Test switch: 1. Mounted on enclosure door. 2. Simulates failure /return of normal source. K. Auxiliary contacts: 1. Provide 2 sets SPDT contacts to operate with switch in normal position. 2. Provide 2 sets SPDT contacts to operate with switch in emergency position. 3. Contacts shall be exclusive customer use and not utilized for any other ATS or generator system functions. 4. Contacts shall be 120V AC, 10 amp rated minimum wired to a terminal strip and labeled. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Indicating lights: Engine Generator System 16200 -13 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila M. Pre - transfer contacts: z , _w o: U N. Exerciser clock. t.) O co o . CO ul O. Service manual and wiring diagram shall be supplied inside of enclosure when shipped. M, J Z Control wiring shall be labeled to correspond with wiring diagram. N u. u. w O 2 PART 3 — EXECUTION ,— g 5 u. Q n 3.01 GENERAL = a I - w A. Provide all necessary wiring and conduit to each remote alarm panel. z F z� B. Position the generator to allow adequate ventilation over engine block and through the w w radiator and to prevent short- circuiting of radiator discharge air back to engine and radiator D o intake. U O cn : 0H C. Provide 220V branch circuit and circuit breaker and connection to batter charger and day w W tank. Connect to emergency power supply. H v ll. ~O D. Provide 220V branch circuit and circuit breaker and connection to jacket water heater. iii z I . so 1. Provide a contact closure for elevator controls prior to transfer between live sources in either direction. Interval shall be adjustable from 0 to 30 seconds. Contacts shall be rated SPDT 120V AC, 10 amps. Connect to normal power supply. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Engine start contacts shall signal generator to start when the voltage of the normal source drops below 80% on any phase, after a time delay of 1 second to allow for momentary dips. The voltage sensing relays shall be field adjustable while energized. B. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when 90% of rated voltage, and frequency of the emergency source have been reached. The maximum time interval from onset of power failure and transfer to emergency shall not exceed ten seconds. C. After restoration of normal power on all phases to 90% of rated voltage, an adjustable time delay period shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall bypass the timing relay and transfer to the normal source. D. After retransfer to normal, the engine - generator shall be allowed to operated at no load for 5 minutes. E. A test on the transfer switch shall simulate normal power failure. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -14 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS-Tukwila 3.03 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide a 6 inch high concrete housekeeping pad beneath each generator. B. Provide a concrete curb under each door of the generator room to prevent migration of spilled liquids out of the room. END OF SECTION J September 30, 2003 Permit issue Engine Generator System 16200-15 j J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide switchboards in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Switchboards include both main switchboards and distribution switchboards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility company approval of incoming section, and metering provisions. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Switchboards: B. Overcurrent Protection Devices: 1. Circuit breakers: NEMA AB -1, Federal Specification W -C -375 B /GEN, UL 489. Testing: 1. N ETA. D. Utility company requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS • A. Manufacturer's product data sheets for overcurrent protection devices. B. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing switchboards, housekeeping pads, and support locations and types. C. One line diagram showing electrical ratings, overcurrent protection device ratings, cable lugs, utility company metering, metering displays, identification nameplate, and fuse clip sizes. D. Utility company approval for components subject to their specifications. E. Wiring diagrams. F. Installation instructions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. NEMA PB -2. 2. UL 891. 3. UL service entrance label. Switchboards 16425 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Short circuit and coordination study. H. Certified test reports. z I. Seismic restraint calculations. Lu 1.05 FIELD TESTING - _I v 0 O A. Field inspection and testing shall occur after installation is complete, feeders are terminated, w = and the room is secure. Testing shall be conducted not more than 4 weeks before 1-, equipment is energized. u) 0 I B. Testing Scope: g 1. Visual and physical inspection of equipment. N ❑ 2. Check control wiring and metering. z w 3. Meter calibration. _• Z H 4. Ground fault protection. 5. Adjust circuit breaker settings based on recommendations in the short circuit and z � coordination study. 2 uj 6. Primary current injection testing of circuit breakers. m ❑ 7. System grounding. 0 N O F- 111 u 1-U 1. Field testing shall be performed by a NETA certified, independent third party testing L- Z agency: Apparatus Unlimited, Electro -Test, Power Systems Testing, or approved equal. 0 - 2. Verify that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. ~O 1- 3. Verify that the equipment has been fully tested and is operational. z 4. Perform testing and compile detailed test reports for each switchboard and overcurrent protection device. C. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION Certified Test Reports: A. Provide a n i dentification n ameplate for each switchboard, each main, and each feeder overcurrent protection device. 1.07 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY A. Prepare a short circuit and coordination study based on the actual overcurrent protection devices proposed for use and the actual conductor sizes and lengths. The study shall be prepared by an Electrical Engineer licensed in the State of the Project. B. The study shall be submitted with the distribution equipment submittal and shall indicate where device substitutions are being made in order to achieve adequate interrupting capacity ratings for each piece of equipment. C. The study shall include recommended settings of adjustable overcurrent and ground fault settings. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Provide overcurrent protective devices of suitable type and rating to meet or exceed the available short circuit currents indicated in the short circuit study. Circuit breakers protecting z elevators, including all upstream feeder circuit breakers, shall be of the appropriate frame = t-: size to ensure 100% selectivity in the instantaneous region of the trip curves at the calculated +i- W fault current. 2 E. Interrupting capacities shall be based on a fully rated protection system where all overcurrent v o co protection devices are rated for the full prospective short circuit current (as indicated in the co w final short circuit submittal). Series rated paneiboards are not permitted. co u_ F. Obtain from the utility company (and confirm in writing) the short circuit current available at w 0 the utility company's transformer secondary. 2 u PART 2 — PRODUCTS = C1 II 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Z H A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. w w CI 2.02 RATINGS 0 OH A. Switchboards shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on the Drawings. 111 i B. Switchboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating as u ~O specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings. . z U N C. Main Switchboards: ~ z O F- Z 1. Main switchboards are identified with the designation MS as shown on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 48 inches wide by 60 inches deep per section. 3. Main switchboards — circuit breaker type: 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. Main switchboards — switch and fuse type: 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. D. Distribution Switchboards: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Distribution switchboards are identified with the designation DSL (120/208V or 208V) or DSH (277/480V or 480V) as shown on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 36 inches wide by 24 inches deep per section. 3. Distribution switchboards (DSL): 42,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. Distribution switchboards — circuit breaker type (DSH): 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 5. Distribution switchboards — switch and fuse type (DSH): 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. Switchboards 16425 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Main switchboards shall be front accessible, with group- mounted main and feeder overcurrent protection devices of the number, rating, and arrangement as shown on the = w Drawings. Vertical sections shall be rear aligned. r B. Distribution switchboards shall be front accessible, with group- mounted main and feeder V 0 0 overcurrent protection devices of the number, rating, and arrangement as shown on the co w Drawings. , .4,, J = H C. Switchboards shall be completely self- supporting structures of the required number of vertical w O sections bolted together to form a single metal enclosed switchboard. Sides, top and rear 2 covers shall be code gauge steel, bolted to the switchboard structure. The frame structure • ° J members shall be die - formed, 12 gauge steel bolted together and reinforced at corners with u- a rugged gussets internal and external to the switchboard members. N 1w D. Switchboards shall be provided with adequate lifting means, and be capable of being rolled or Z H moved into position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills. Z O W La E. Steel surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated, providing a bond between paint and ? m metal surfaces to prevent the entrance of moisture and formation of rust under the paint 0 finish. Finish shall be ANSI -61 grey enamel paint. N 0 I— F. Space for future d evices s hall i nclude a II necessary bus, overcurrent protection device z v supports and mounting, and connections. L I P LLi G. Switchboards enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1 where installed indoors. Switchboards u) enclosures shall be NEMA Type 3R where installed outdoors. Switchboard sections shall be H 2 aligned on top, 90 inches high, unless lower height is required due to space limitations. Z /— H. Where required for conduit terminations, provide pull box on top of switchboard of same type of construction and finish as the switchboard. I. Where draw out type overcurrent protection devices are provided, provide a traveling type lifter, rail mounted on top of the switchboard. 2.04 BUS SYSTEM A. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout A -B -C left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear. Bus bars shall be permanently labeled by phase. Bus joints shall be bolted with high tensile zinc plated steel bolts with spring loaded Bellville type washers. B. Bus bars shall be plated copper or aluminum based on ANSI standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). In addition to full UL air clearances, bus shall be insulated with a minimum of 5 mil thickness of epoxy resin coating. Provide removable non -PVC boots for access to the cross bus joints for inspection and maintenance. C. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating (continuous) shown on the Drawings. Neutral bus shall be full size. Provide a 33% minimum copper ground bus, extending along the full length of the switchboard. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -4 .. Z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt holes drilled and tapped for future extension at the end of bus bars including neutral and ground bus so that z the addition of a future section would require only the installation of standard bolted splice plates. z e:2 tu 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES 6 U U O O . A. General: J = 1. Feeder overcurrent protection devices shall be bus connected on the line side. y ~ 2. Overcurrent protection devices shall have an external operating handle located on w 0 the front door. 2 3. Stationary or draw out type construction as shown on the Drawings. g - u- j B. Overcurrent protection device types: D. a �uw 1. Main switchboards: Insulated case circuit breakers. z H 2. Distribution Switchboards (DSL): Molded case circuit breakers. Z O 3. Distribution Switchboards (DSH): Fusible switch units or molded case circuit w uj breakers as shown on the Drawings. ? m U N C. Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: off 1. Stored energy charging mechanism and independent close and trip functions. = v 2. High interrupting capacity disconnect with electric trip for remote tripping or ground o II wz 0 - O z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue fault protection. 3. Breaker compartment interlocked to prevent access when breaker is closed. 4. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. 5. Positive ON /OFF indicators, green for OFF, red for ON. 6. Provide integral residual sensing ground fault protection for main and feeder devices. Set each ground fault sensor pick up setting at 25 percent of the rating of overcurrent protection device with a 6 -cycle time delay or as specifically indicated in the final short circuit and coordination study submittal. 7. UL listed for continuous operation at 100% rated load. 8. Auxiliary switches for remote indication of breaker ON /OFF status. 9. Microelectronic d igital processor based true RMS trip unit with interchangeable ratings plugs to change the continuous current rating. Provide a hand held, portable plug in test kit for testing and verifying programmer settings. Provide the following functions: a. Current setting adjustment (long delay pick -up). b. Long -time delay adjustment. c. Short-time pick -up adjustment. d. Short -time delay adjustment. e. Instantaneous pick -up adjustment. f. 1 -In- Out - adjustment. g. Ground -fault pick -up adjustment. h. Ground -fault delay adjustment. Switchboards 16425 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Fusible Switch Units: 2.07 UTILITY METERING A. Provide utility metering cubicle(s) in accordance with the requirements of the serving utility company. 2.08 METERING DISPLAY A. Provide an electronic digital true RMS sensing metering display for each main switchboard main. The display shall indicate voltage (each phase to each phase and each phase to neutral, amps (each phase), watts, vars, power factor, frequency, watt demand, and watt hours. Display shall be positioned not lower than 48 inches or higher than 72 inches above the finished floor. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -6 z 1. Quick -make, quick- break, dead -front type. Each switch shall be a self- contained = }-; unit, externally operated from the front. 1— z 2. Fuse a nd s witch c ompartment w ith d efeatable interlock to prevent access with Ce switch in the 'ON' position. t 6 o 3. Switches shall be equipped with rejection type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up to 600A, suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. co W 4. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. J H cn E. Molded case circuit breakers: w w 0 2 1. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON /OFF indication clearly visible. u- j 2. Thermal- magnetic trip -free, trip- indicating, quick -make, quick- break, with inverse co D time characteristic. Single- handle and common tripping on multipole breakers. H w External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. z H 3. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc - quenching devices. 4. Provide main breakers in switchboards served from transformers. w O 5. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 120V AC coils. ? o 2.06 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION 0 H A. Ground fault protection shall be provided where specified and on service disconnect switches w w rated 1000 amperes or more as required by the NEC. ~ u_ O B. Settings: Set each ground fault sensor pick up setting at 25 percent of the rating of Ili z overcurrent device with a 6 -cycle time delay unless specifically indicated otherwise in the final short circuit and coordination study submittal. O F- z • z PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 6 m J U: A. Install switchboards when the area is free and clear of dust and debris. Protect switchboards N o ; from dust and moisture. Do not utilize switchboard for temporary lighting and power services. N w w = . J H, B. Install switchboards on 4 inch high concrete housekeeping pads which shall follow the N u- ; contour of switchboards with 1 inch of overlap on all sides. w O C. Provide channel i ron s ills b elow e ach s witchboard w here t he s witchboard f rame i s n of u. Q; suitable for use as a floor sill. • SQ d END OF SECTION z H F— O: z I— tu u i ' 0 O (12 w W. V O; t iw z rz = j. J O z 1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND INDIVIDUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS z PART 1 — GENERAL re 2 1.01 DESCRIPTION U O W A. Provide disconnect switches and individual motor controllers in accordance with the Contract w = Documents. —' F CO 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE w 0 A: Disconnects and individual motor controllers shall be the same manufacturer as the u. ?. switchboards. d . I- w 1.03 STANDARDS z I— O. A. Disconnect Switches: Z F- 111 uj U� O F- w w H H .. LL lii Z p 1. Federal Specification W- S -865C. j 2. NEMA KS1. 3. UL 98 (File #4776) and 508. B. Individual Motor Controllers: 1. NEMA ICS 2 -321. j 2. UL 547, 845 and 1004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. No requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1.05 FIELD TESTING A. Test each individual motor controller and verify proper operation. B. Test motors under Toad and verify proper rotation. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an identification nameplate for each disconnect switch and individual motor controller. Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16440 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Heavy duty, horsepower rated, quick -make, quick- break, dead -front type. Self contained unit Z in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where installed outdoors), externally operable 1 ~ from the front. w B. Defeatable interlock to prevent opening the door when the switch is in the ON position. 6 D Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. N p C. Fusible switches shall be equipped with rejecting type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up _1 H to 600A, suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. Interrupting rating shall be 200,000 RMS co u. symmetrical amperes. uj 0 D. Voltage, ampacity, horsepower rating, and number of poles shall be appropriate for system 5 and load served. Provide neutral pad for circuits with neutral conductors. Provide ground co P lug. H w E. Provide 6 pole switches for connection to motors requiring 6 motor leads. Z F-O Z i- 2.03 THERMAL OVERLOAD /DISCONNECT SWITCH Ill ? . = o A. Single phase manual motor starter with quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanism and field 0 cn adjustable overload heater element. o F- w w �P u- O A. Self contained unit in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where installed outdoors), LLj Z externally operable from the front. 2.04 INDIVIDUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER U H I - B. Provide full voltage non - reversing (FVNR) type combination magnetic starters for motors of Z Y2HP to 60HP. C. Provide reduced voltage, non - reversing, auto transformer type combination magnetic starters for motors 75HP and larger. 1. Two winding, open delta connected type. 2. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing. 3. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage. 4. Field adjustable auto transformer taps: 50 %, 65% and 80 %. Factory set at 80 %. D. Fusible switch type disconnect with clips for UL Class R type fuses. E. Provide an individual control power transformer with two primary and one secondary control fuses for each motor controller. The other secondary lead shall be grounded. Secondary voltage shall be 120V AC. F. Provide each motor controller with three phase, ambient temperature compensating, thermal overload relays with heaters. Overload relays shall be adjustable from 90% to 110% of heater rating, factory set at 100 %. Provide an insulated pushbutton on the outside of door to reset overload relays. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16440 -2 nvos ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Provide each motor controller with a Hand - Off- Automatic (HOA) selector switch. Provide a Hand - Automatic (HA) selector for life safety equipment. Mount switch on outside of door. H. Provide each motor controller with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, green OFF and red RUNNING long life (50,000 hours) pilot indicators on outside of door, auxiliary relays, and other devices required for operation of the equipment to be controlled. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Disconnect switches and individual motor controller shall be installed within ten feet of load served. B. Provide independent support; do not mount on the housing of the equipment served. C. Conduit connected between disconnect switch or individual motor controller and load served shall be liquid -tight flexible metal conduit, 24 inches minimum length, 36 inches maximum length. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Disconnect Switches and individual Motor Controllers Permit Issue 16440 -3 .J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 — GENERAL Z 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION U O. N0 . A. Provide dry type transformers in accordance with the Contract Documents. w = J t- CO IL w O` 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE u_5 K. Transformers shall be the same manufacturer as the switchboards. N a = ▪ w 1.03 STANDARDS z H L O . A. ANSI C57.12.00, C57.96, and C57.110. 1- 11J uj B. NEMA ST 20 and TR 27. 0 o 0 52 C. UL 506 and 1561. at 0 I- w 1.04 SUBMITTALS u. F- -O z . A. Manufacturer's product data sheets, electrical ratings, heat release data, physical V co r~ H. O z B. Transformers shall be of the ratings and types shown on the Drawings. dimensions, noise ratings, and weights. B. Factory test reports. C. Certified vibration isolation and seismic restraint details and product data showing the number and location of each support and restraint and the exact number, size, and type of each anchor. 1.05 FACTORY TESTING A. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap locations. B. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection. C. Applied and induced potential tests. D. No load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dry Type Transformers 16460 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS z A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. J U U 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.02 RATINGS co O A. Transformers shall be self- cooled, designed for continuous operation at rated KVA for 24 w hours a day, 365 days a year. =- w B. Voltage Ratings: w O 2 2. Secondary: 120/208V, 3 phase, 4 wire, wye connected. co C ' 7 I- z � F- O zt- w w 0 o I-- w W L 0 Z w • co 0 /- 1. Primary: 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire, delta connected. • 2.03 CORE AND COIL ASSEMBLY A. Core shall be high grade, non - aging, grain oriented, silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Coil windings shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. B. The core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with n on- hydroscopic, t hermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration absorbing pads. C. Provide NEMA standard taps. D. The core and coil assembly shall be grounded to the enclosure by means of an adequately sized flexible copper - grounding strap. 2.04 ENCLOSURES Transformers indicated on the drawings to be shielded isolation type or identified with the designation TK or ETK shall be provided with an electrostatic shield consisting of a single turn of aluminum placed between the primary and secondary winding and grounded to the transformer core. F. Transformers identified on the Drawings with the designation TK or ETK shall be UL listed as suitable for non - sinusoidal current Toads with minimum K factor of K -13. The secondary neutral conductor and neutral pad shall be rated to carry 200% of normal phase current. A. Heavy gauge steel, finished utilizing a continuous process of degreasing, cleaning, and phosphatizing, followed by an electrostatic deposition of thermosetting polyester powder coating and subsequent baking. Finish color shall be ANSI 61 grey enamel. B. Units rated 30 KVA and below shall be totally enclosed, non - ventilated, NEMA 3R with lifting eyes and wall mount hardware. C. Units rated 45 KVA and above shall be ventilated, NEMA 2, drip proof, with lifting holes. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dry Type Transformers 16460 -2 z Transformer Capacity Maximum Sound Level Up to 50 KVA 45dB 51 to 150 KVA 50dB 151 to 300 KVA 55dB 301 to 500 KVA 60dB 501 to 700 KVA 62dB 701 to 1000 KVA 64dB 1001 to 1500 KVA 65dB ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.05 INSULATION A. Insulation materials shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. • B. Transformers shall be insulated with a 220 °C insulation system. C. Transformers shall be 115 °C temperature rise above 40 °C ambient, capable of carrying a 15% continuous overload without exceeding a 150 °C rise in a 40 °C ambient. 2.06 SOUND LEVELS A. Sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self cooled ratings: PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Transformers shall be floor mounted except where indicated on the Drawings to be suspended or wall mounted. B. Suspended transformers shall be mounted on hanger rods with a spring isolator in each rod. C. Floor mounted transformers shall be mounted on 4" high concrete housekeeping pads. Provide neoprene pads between transformer legs and housekeeping pad and anchor transformer to floor. D. Provide grounding electrode conductor from transformer secondary neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel. E. Conduit connected to transformers shall be flexible metal conduit, 24 inches minimum length, 60 inches maximum length. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION UNISYS - Tukwila Dry Type Transformers 16460 -3 D A. Provide panelboards in accordance with the Contract Documents. w = J F- B. Panelboards include both branch panelboards and distribution panels. w O 2 --) • 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE g Q 3 A. Panelboards shall be the same manufacturer as the switchboards. u_ d = w J B. Panelboard interrupting capacities shall be based on a fully rated protection system where all ? overcurrent protection devices are rated for the full prospective short circuit current (as i-- 0 indicated in the final short circuit submittal). Series rated panelboards are not permitted. w H jij } 1.03 STANDARDS U co w • w '. 1. NEMA PB -1 - O 2. Federal Specification W- P -115A Type II, Class.1 , , z 3. UL 50 and 67 w u U = ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila z PART 1 — GENERAL ui 1.01 DESCRIPTION U 0 A. B. Circuit Breakers: C. Fusible Switches: 1. Federal Specifications W- S -865c 2. UL98 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets, electrical ratings, and installation instructions. 2. Support locations and types. B. Branch Panelboards: 1. Detailed description and layout of each panelboard, showing physical dimensions, circuit breaker ratings and layout, identification nameplate, and cable lugs. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Panelboards: SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS 1. NEMA AB -1 2. Federal Specification W- C -375a and W- C -375b 3. UL 489 Panelboards 16470 -1 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila C. Distribution Panels: 1. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing physical dimensions and housekeeping pads. z 2. Detailed description and layout of each distribution panel, showing overcurrent r protection device ratings and layout, identification nameplate, and cable lugs, and 6 5 fuse clip sizes. v v O No D. Seismic restraint calculations. J H , u_ 1.05 IDENTIFICATION w 2 A. Provide an identification nameplate for each panelboard, each main, and each feeder 5 overcurrent protection device. .." u_ Q N z w B. Provide a typewritten directory card indicating load served by type and location for each W branch circuit in each branch panelboard. Mount directory in frame on inside of branch z panelboard door. F- O uj C. Current ratings of overcurrent protection devices shall be displayed on the device. 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS O H uw w 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS O A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. V N 2.02 RATINGS 0 1- z A. Panelboards shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on the Drawings. B. Panelboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating as specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings. C. Branch Panelboards: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Branch panelboards are identified with the designation LP (120/208V) or LPH (277/480V) as shown on the Drawings. Branch panelboards for mechanical equipment are identified with the designation MP as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 22 inches wide by 6 inches deep. 3. Branch panelboards (LP): 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. Branch panelboards (LPH): 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. Panelboards 16470 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila D. Distribution Panels: z 1. Distribution panels are identified with the designation DPL (120/208V or 208V) or 1 w DPH (277/480V or 480V) as shown on the Drawings. r4 2 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 44 inches wide by 12 inches deep per D section. 0 v 3. Distribution panels (DPL): 42,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting 0 capacity. = w 4. Distribution panels — circuit breaker type (DPH): RMS s J p typ ( ) syrnmetrical amperes u) i_ minimum interrupting capacity. 0 5. Distribution panels — fusible switch type (DPH): 200,000 RMS symmetrical W p typ , ( ) ymmetrical amperes 2 minimum interrupting capacity. u: Q 2.03 CONSTRUCTION 1-w A. Enclosures shall be corrosion resistant galvanized (zinc finished) sheet steel. Fronts shall be z H cold rolled steel, finish coated with ANSI 61 grey enamel over a rust inhibitor. Panel locks i- O shall be keyed alike. Recessed flush mounted panels shall have overlapping front. w w B. Doors for branch panelboards shall be one piece bolt on front with a lockable hinged door U over the overcurrent protection devices. o H C. Space for future devices shall include all necessary bus, supports, and connections.` H v �O di N A. Bus bars shall be sequence phased, rigidly supported by high impact resistant, insulated H I supporting bus assemblies to prevent vibration and resulting damage when subjected to z F- _stress, vibration, or short circuits. Solderless terminations shall be suitable for either copper or aluminum wire or cable. 2.04 . BUS SYSTEM B. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating shown on the Drawings. Bus bars shall be plated aluminum or copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. C. Neutral bus shall be full size. Neutral bus shall be 200% rated when supplied from an oversized neutral conductor. Neutral bus shall be capable of terminating one conductor per pole position minimum. D. Provide a copper equipment ground bus in each panelboard. In addition to the equipment ground bus, provide a copper isolated ground bus when supplied from a feeder that includes an isolated grounding conductor. Each ground bus shall be capable of terminating one conductor per pole position minimum. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Panelboards 16470 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES z 1 Z A. Overcurrent protection device types: I- w 1. Branch panelboards (LP, LPH, and MP): Molded case circuit breakers. ' 6 v 0 2. Distribution panels (DPL): Molded case circuit breakers. O 3. Distribution panels (DPH): Molded case circuit breakers or fusible switch units as co w indicated on Drawings. H co L B. Molded case circuit breakers: w O . 1. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and — g Q ON /OFF indication clearly visible. D 2. Bolt on type. Plug in type are not permitted. = a 3. Thermal- magnetic trip -free, trip- indicating, quick -make, quick- break, with inverse F- _ time characteristic. Single - handle and common tripping on multi -pole breakers. z I-- External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. z O 4. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc - quenching devices. W iii uj 5. Breakers for lighting circuits shall be SWD rated. 6. Provide main breakers in panelboards served from transformers. 0 N 7. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 120V AC coils. o I- ww IL- -O W z U = O~ C. Fusible Switch Units: 1. Quick -make, quick- break, dead -front type. Each switch shall be a self- contained unit, externally operated from the front. 2. Defeatable interlock to prevent opening the door when the switch is in the ON position. 3. Switches shall be equipped with rejection type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up to 600A, suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. 4. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount panelboards 6 feet above finished floor to top unless otherwise noted. B. Connect feed - through panels to main feeder by insulated parallel gutter taps (O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company Type PMX or PMX -C). C. Where panelboards are mounted recessed flush in wall, maintain fire integrity of wall. Provide one empty 3 /;' EMT conduit stubbed up into nearest accessible ceiling location for every three spare or space positions. D. Neatly arrange wiring and tie together in each gutter with Thomas & Betts nylon Ty -Raps or equal at minimum 4 inch intervals. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Panelboards 16470 -4 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila E. Provide plugs on open knockouts. 3.02 TOUCH UP AND CLEANING r u6 A. Backboxes shall be clean, dry, and free of construction debris and fireproofing overspray v 0 : prior to installation of panelboard interior. co o W - B. Vacuum backboxes clean of debris after installation and wiring of branch circuits. W O C. Repair and touch up paint damaged surfaces. END OF SECTION � < cn = O: O Z W U N W w. H u. 1"". • z ` D. O Z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Panelboards 16470 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16475 600V FUSES Z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION v A. Provide 600V fuses in accordance with the Contract Documents. w W J 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE LL W O A. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. g (A d = W Z I -. I- o Z F- 1.03 STANDARDS A. UL 198 and 977. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. No requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann or Littlefuse. 2.02 FUSES • A. 601 amperes through 6000 amperes: B. 600 amperes and below: 2.03 SPARE FUSES September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. UL Class L. 2. 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. 3. Bussmann KRP -C or Littlefuse KLP -C. 1. UL Class RK1. 2. 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. 3. Bussmann LPN -RK (250V) or LPS -RK (600V); or Littlefuse LLN -RK (250V) or LLS- RK (600V). A. Provide 10 percent (minimum of 3) spare power and control fuses of each type and rating utilized. B. Provide spare fuse cabinets in the main switchgear room and rooms with equipment utilizing 15 or more fuses. 600V Fuses 16475 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 600V Fuses 16475 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue and 1029. SECTION 16500 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES Z PART 1 — GENERAL ct tu 1.01 DESCRIPTION 6 00 CO c A. Provide luminaires and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents. U) w I J H 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE co u w0 A. Lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. 2 B. Ballasts shall be of the same manufacturer for each lamp type. cn O w . — C. Occupancy sensors shall be certified for operation with specific ballasts utilized in controlled Z = H J lighting fixtures. z 0 D. Equipment shall be certified for use in the State of the project and shall meet the State w uj Energy Code and local energy ordinances. D L3 O co 1.03 STANDARDS 0 _f H 0 A. Ballasts: ANSI C82. and C82.11, FCC CFR 47 Part 18, Public Law 100 -357, and UL 935 . u_ ~O .z w U = 0 . ~ B. Cords: UL 62. C. Exit Signs and Emergency Luminaires: NFPA 70 and UL 101 and 924. D. Hazardous Locations: UL 506, 844, 1203, and 1225. E. Lamp Holders and Starters: UL 496, 542, and 879. F. Luminaires: UL 57, 676, 1570, 1571, and 1572. G. Metal Halide and Mercury Vapor Lamps: Federal Standard 21 CFR 1040.30. H. Photometric data: Independent testing laboratory certified. I. State Energy Regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data sheets for each Iuminaire indicating luminaire type, ballast quantity and type, lamp quantity and type, photometric data, materials, finishes, accessories, voltage, input watts, CFM data, and photographic image of luminaire. B. Manufacturer's data sheets for each ballast - including ballast type, power factor, input voltage, input watts, and ballast factor. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -1 L . �. t,',a.r ..Nl ..v ~LHI•;'. ..RYA! aJ. tast..u.- z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Scaled and dimensioned detail plan and elevation drawings of custom and continuous row z type luminaires. 1 Z � W D. Seismic restraint calculations. 6 g _., J U O 0 PART 2 — PRODUCTS W W 1 (- 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS N u- W O A. Lighting Luminaires: Refer to luminaire schedule on the Drawings. 2 ga u. a B. Ballasts: to d • W 1. Fluorescent hybrid or magnetic type: Advance, Jefferson, or MagneTek. . . Z m 2. Fluorescent high frequency electronic type: Advance, Energy Savings Inc., i— O MagneTek, Motorola or Osram /Sylvania. z ,- 3. Fluorescent dimming type for daylighting applications (100% or 10% range): g u Advance Mark VII, Lutron Eco -10, or Motorola Helios. D 0 4. Fluorescent dimming type for non - daylighting applications (100% to 5% range): 0 �, Advance Mark X or Lutron Hi -Lume. 5. HID magnetic type: Advance, Robertson, or MagneTek. = w 6. HID electronic type: WPI Electronics, Inc. 1- ~ V — IL O C. Lamps: General Electric, Osram /Sylvania, Philips, or Venture Lighting. �j Z 2.02 LAMPS ~ 01-- z A. Provide a complete set of new lamps in each luminaire. B. Lamps shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the luminaire schedule on the Drawings: 2.03 BALLASTS 1. Linear fluorescent: T -8, 835 energy savings type. 2. Twin tube, double twin tube, or triple twin tube fluorescent: 835. 3. Long compact fluorescent (Biax): 835. 4. Incandescent: 130V, inside frosted. 5. Metal halide: Minimum 75 CRI, open fixture rated 3000K color temperature for up to 150W lamps. Minimum 65 CRI for lamps 175W and higher. 6. High pressure sodium: Deluxe color, minimum 65 CRI. A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Ballasts shall be suitable for the electrical characteristics of the supply circuits to which they are to be connected, and which are suitable for operating the specified lamps. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Provide electronic ballasts wherever there is an electronic ballast available for any specified lamp or combination of lamps. Where electronic ballasts are not available, provide hybrid or magnetic ballasts. 3. Where installed outdoors and wherever ballasts are installed in a non - heated environment (such as walk in freezers, cold food handling areas, or outside air plenums) ballasts shall be capable of lamp starting at ambient temperatures down to minimum 20 degree F. 4. Luminaires controlled by dimmers shall be provided with dimming type ballasts. 5. Single lamp ballasts for long fluorescent lamps shall be kept to a minimum, and shall only be used for the last odd Tamp in a room or space. B. Fluorescent: 1. Hybrid or Magnetic Ballasts: a. Ballasts shall be energy saving type, super low heat, rapid start, high power factor (90% minimum), Class A sound rated, UL Class P thermal protection, 0.88 minimum ballast factor, full light output with specified lamps, CBM /ETL certified, and minimum two year warranty. 2. High Frequency Electronic Ballasts: a. High frequency electronic type operating lamps at a frequency of 20KHz or high with no detectable Tamp flicker. b. Provide instant start type ballasts for T -8, T -5, T-4 and T -2 lamps. Provide rapid start type ballasts for T12 and compact fluorescent lamps. c. Ballast factor shall be 0.88 minimum unless noted to be low output or high output on the Luminaire schedule. Low output type ballasts shall have a ballast factor between 0.75 and 0.78. High output type ballasts shall have a ballast factor between 1.10 and 1.20. Maximum ballast factor for any type ballast shall not exceed 1.20. d. Ballasts shall meet or exceed FCC Regulations Part 18 and NEMA standards regarding electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall not interfere with operation of other electrical equipment. e. Ballasts shall meet or exceed ANSI C62.41, Category A and IEEE 587 standards regarding harmonic distortion and surge protection. f. . Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal lamp life. Ballasts shall maintain light output at 10% for line voltage fluctuations of 10 %. g. Ballasts for compact fluorescent, T -5, T-4 and T -2 lamps shall contain end of Tamp life sensing and provide shutdown protection. h. Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.7. Total harmonic distortion shall be Tess than 20 %. j. Minimum three year warranty. 3. Interwiring for long fluorescent lamps. a. Ballast wiring for single lamp continuous row luminaires shall allow independent control of each continuous row of luminaires. Provide as many three lamp ballasts as possible; provide two Tamp ballasts to finish a row. b. Ballast wiring for double lamp continuous row luminaires shall allow independent multiple level control of each row of lamps within each continuous row of luminaires (side lamp /side lamps). Provide as many three lamp ballasts as possible; provide two lamp ballasts to finish a row. September 30, 2003 Luminaires and Accessories Permit Issue 16500 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION c. Ballast wiring for one Tamp luminaires shall allow independent control of two adjacent fixtures. Provide 1 two lamp ballast and interwiring between each pair of luminaires. d. Where single level control of two lamp luminaires is shown, ballast wiring shall allow independent control of each fixtures. Provide 1 two lamp ballast per luminaire. e. Where multiple level control of two lamp luminaires is shown, ballast wiring shall allow independent multiple level control of two adjacent fixtures (side lamps /side lamps). Provide 2 two Tamp ballasts and interwiring between each pair of luminaires. f. Ballast wiring for three lamp luminaires shall allow independent multiple level control of two adjacent fixtures (outside lamps /inside lamps). Provide 3 two lamp ballasts and interwiring between each pair of luminaires. g. Ballast wiring for four lamp luminaires shall allow independent multiple level control of each fixture (outside lamps /inside lamps). Provide 2 two -lamp ballasts per luminaire. C. High Intensity Discharge: 1. Magnetic Type: a. Constant wattage auto transformer type, regulated, with integral thermal protection and primary circuit fuse. Ballast shall allow maximum of ± 5% Tamp voltage change with a line voltage variant of ± 10% voltage. b. Ballast for HID lamps 150W or Tess shall be lag type reactance, autotransformer, high power factor type (90% minimum). 2. Electronic Type: a. High power factor (90% minimum), Class A sound rated, UL Class P thermal protection with auto reset, ANSI C62.41 and FCC Part 18C, Class A compliance, CBM /ETL certified, and minimum two year warranty. A. Luminaires shall be completely factory assembled and wired, and equipped with necessary Iampholders, ballasts, wiring, shielding, reflectors, channels, lenses, and other parts necessary to complete the luminaire installation. B. Luminaire hardware shall be concealed. Weld exposed metal at joints, fill with weld material, grind smooth, and make free from light Teaks. Gasket incandescent luminaires with overlapping trim. Weld ballast support studs, socket saddle studs, and reflector support studs to luminaire body; self- threading screws are not acceptable. Ventilate ballast compartments and firmly secure ballast to conducting metal surface. Luminaires shall be designed for bottom relamping, unless otherwise noted. C. Construct luminaires with a minimum number of joints. Unexposed joints by shall be welded, screwed or bolted; soldered joints are not acceptable. Do not use self tapping methods or rivets for fastening removable parts used to gain access to electrical components requiring service or replacement, or for fastening electrical components or their supports. September 30, 2003 Luminaires and Accessories Permit Issue 16500 -4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 z w e: .J E. Housings for fluorescent and HID luminaires shall be designed to make electrical U 0 components easily accessible and replaceable, without removing the luminaire body from its cn W mounting. D. Cast or extruded parts of luminaires shall be close grained and free from imperfections or discolorations, rigid, true to pattern, of ample weight and thickness, and properly fitted, filed, ground, and buffed to provide finished surfaces and joints free of imperfections. 2.05 FINISHES w 0 A. Luminaire finishes shall provide a durable, wear resistant surface. Surfaces shall be g Q chemically cleaned and treated with corrosion inhibiting (phosphating) material to assure positive paint adhesion. Exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminum, etc.) and = a finished castings (except chromium plated or stainless steel parts) shall have an even coat of 1- _ high -grade methacrylate lacquer or transparent epoxy. Anodize exposed aluminum surfaces Z t- in a 20 minute bath for corrosion resistance. Sheet steel luminaire housings, and iron and Z O steel parts which have not received phosphating treatment, or which are to be utilized in w uj exterior applications, shall be zinc or cadmium plated, o r h of d ip z inc g alvanized a fter j 0 completion of all forming, welding, and drilling operations. 0 N 0 f- Ill W H� u" . . Z U= O ~ B. Screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastening or latching hardware shall be cadmium plated. C. Provide luminaires with a high temperature baked enamel coating of selected color and finish, unless otherwise noted. White baked enamel finished surfaces shall have a minimum reflectance of 86 %, unless otherwise noted. REFLECTORS A. Aluminum Reflectors: 1. Reflectors and reflecting cones or baffles shall be fabricated from #12 aluminum reflector sheet, minimum 0.057 inches thick (15 gauge). Material shall be free of tooling marks, spinning lines, and marks or indentation caused by riveting or other assembly techniques. No rivets, springs, or other hardware shall be visible after installation. 2. Reflectors and baffles shall be polished, buffed, and anodized (Alzak), with finish color as selected by the Architect. 3. Luminaires provided with tri- phosphor type lamps shall be provided with low iridescence aluminum reflectors to eliminate rainbow effect on aluminum reflector. B. Painted Reflectors: 1. Painted reflectors shall be formed before application of primer and paint. Reflectors and reflector bodies for luminaires with baked white enamel finish shall meet the following requirements and tests: a. After 100 hours of exposure to fade -o- meter, reflectance shall be not less than 86 %, and finish shall show no visible color change. September 30, 2003 Luminaires and Accessories Permit Issue 16500 -5 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.07 LENSES, FACEPLATES AND TRIMS A. Plastic lenses shall be of virgin methyl methacrylate, unless otherwise indicated. Polystyrene lenses are not acceptable. B. Lenses, louvers, and other Tight diffusing components shall be contained in frames. Lenses shall be removable but positively held within the frames so that hinging or other motion of the frame will not cause the diffusing components to drop out. D. Provide ceiling trims for rectangular recessed luminaires with mitered corners, continuously welded and smoothed before shop finishing. Lapping of trim metal is not acceptable. 2.08 LUMINAIRE WIRING A. Provide wiring between fluorescent and HID lampholders and ballasts of same or heavier gauge than the leads furnished with the ballasts, and having same or higher insulating and heat resisting characteristics. Internal wiring of luminaires shall contain a minimum number of s plices. S plices s hall b e m ade w ith s uitable m echanical insulated steel spring type connectors. B. Wiring channels and wireways shall be free from projections and rough or sharp edges. Provide bushings at points or edges over which conductors pass. 2.09 LAMPHOLDERS A. Incandescent and HID lampholders shall be porcelain bases with copper screw shells. B. Fluorescent lampholders shall be white, heat resistant plastic. Fluorescent lampholders operating with an open circuit voltage in excess of 300 volts shall be of the safety type which opens the supply circuit when the lamp is removed from the socket. C. Rigidly and securely attach lampholders to the luminaire enclosure or husk. D. Pull chains shall be insulated joint type. E. Provide lampholders suitable for specified lamps, and set to position the lamps in optically correct spacing and relationship to lenses, reflectors, filters, and baffles. F. Where fluorescent lamps are installed in unenclosed luminaires, provide a minimum of two Tamp- retaining clips per tamp. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. After 100 hours of exposure to 100% humidity at 100 °F, (cook box test) finish shall show no blistering or other degraded effects. c. After 150 hours of exposure to salt spray (20% sodium chloride) shall cause no breakdown of film. Faceplates on incandescent recessed luminaires shall open for access to the interior of the luminaire, serve as a ceiling trim, and positively held to the luminaire body by adjustable means that permit the faceplate to be drawn up to the ceiling as tight as necessary to insure complete contact of faceplate with the finished ceiling. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.10 ACCESSORIES Q ~ w A. Recessed incandescent luminaires shall be furnished with thermal protection in accordance c4 2 with Article 410 -65 of the NEC. 6 v 00 B. Where utilized as raceways, luminaires shall be suitable for use as raceways. Provide feed co 0 through splice boxes where necessary. w = H u) u_ C. Provide installation and supporting hardware including stems, plates, plaster frames, w 0 hangers, and similar items, for support of luminaires for the ceiling construction in which they 2 shall be installed. Provide laster frames made of non - ferrous metal, or of steel that has P 5 been suitably rustproofed after fabrication. u- j co D. Air handling luminaires shall have hinged air control vanes within the side slots (bent metal H ui vanes are not acceptable) factory set at fully open. Provide heat removal slots at luminaire z 1- ends. H O z i— w E. Interior fluorescent and HID luminaires utilizing ballast sound rating of lower than A shall be ? m provided with acoustical mounting pads between luminaire housing and ballast to minimize o vibration and noise level. 0 H F . Provide tempered glass lenses for metal halide luminaires. H o G. Provide fastening devices of a positive locking type, which do not require special tools to ti O Z Ili U= H. Attach reflectors to housing by means of safety chains to prevent reflectors from falling. No Z F-. I. Provide a ceiling canopy for each stem. Canopy finish shall match stem finish. J. Luminaires installed in air plenums shall be enclosed and gasketed. K. HID luminaires connected to the emergency power system shall have an integral quartz lamp instant r estrike s ystem t o p rovide I ight o utput i mmediately a fter a I oss o f p ower to the luminaire. The instant Tamp shall automatically turn off after the HID lamp has restriked. L. Provide additional feed points in pendant mounted luminaires connected to the emergency power system or provided with integral battery packs to accommodate the additional wiring. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Luminaire locations as indicated on the Drawings are general and approximate. Verify exact location of luminaires with Architect prior to installation. Verify adequacy of clearance with other equipment such as ducts, pipes, conduit, or structural elements. Bring conflicts to Architect's attention before proceeding with work. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue apply or remove them. Do not use tie wires in place of fastening devices. part of the chain shall be visible after installation. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Verify ceiling construction and furnish appropriate luminaire mounting supports, hardware, trim, and accessories for each luminaire. z C. Install luminaires in mechanical equipment rooms after ductwork and piping installation. t • Locate and mount luminaires as indicated on the Drawings unless mechanical equipment w et prohibits or makes it impractical to do so. In such cases, chain or wall mount luminaires so 6 D that serviceable equipment is illuminated. 00 D. Luminaires shall be installed free of light Teaks, warps, dents, or other irregularities. Light u) O w leaks are not acceptable. -i H U) u. E. Install reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses, diffusers, louvers, and decorative elements of w 0 luminaires after completion of wet work, plastering, painting, and general clean up in the area 2 of the luminaires. Provide final focusing and adjusting of lighting equipment. Focusing and a adjusting shall be performed under the Architect's supervision after normal working hours. u. D F. Parabolic luminaires shall be installed with mylar cover over louvers. Cover shall be UL listed F' _ for temporary lighting. Upon completion of work, remove mylar cover with white gloves. Z 1— i— O z '— G. Visible hanging devices shall be finished to match the luminaire finish, unless otherwise W noted. Suspended fixtures shall hang level and aligned when installed in rows. D p U N H. Provide fire rated enclosures around recessed luminaires that are installed in fire rated p 1— ww H- I. Provide attachment devices, brackets, plaster rings, saddle hanger and tie bars made of u- formed, rolled, or cast metal shapes with the requisite rigidity and strength to maintain .. z continuous alignment and support of installed luminaires. U O ~ J. Luminaires mounted in suspended ceilings shall be attached to the main runners of the z ceiling system with appropriate mounting hardware. Provide independent 45° slack cables from corners of luminaires to structure above. ceilings. K. Provide at least two supports for single fluorescent luminaires. Where luminaires are continuously mounted in rows, provide supports at maximum intervals of 8 feet, or closer if necessary to prevent visible deflection. . L. Equipment requiring access for service and maintenance shall be installed so that components requiring access are readily accessible. M. Immediately prior to occupancy clear reflectors, reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses, trim rings, faceplates, louvers, lamps and decorative elements. N. Replace burnt out lamps and noisy or defective ballasts. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -8 1 J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION UO A. Provide grounding system in accordance with the Contract Documents. w w. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE N u ' w O A. Utility company approval of service installation. 2 J u. Q 1.03 STANDARDS a 3' 1— w Z '— 1— O w U � O N . f- w f-1 = O • CU Z co 1.04 SUBMITTALS 0 z A. Field test report. 1.05 FIELD TESTING A. Resistance testing of ground rod system indicating maximum 5 Ohms resistance to ground. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an identification nameplate for each ground bus cabinet. A. B. C. E. F. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UL 467. ANSI C -1. IEEE 142. NEC. National Electrical Safety Code. Utility company requirements. SECTION 16680 GROUNDING SYSTEM J A. Grounding connections shall be brazed molded exothermic welded, bolted clamp terminal, or pressure connector type. Grounding System 16680 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Provide the following grounding electrodes, bonded together to form the grounding electrode a— system: Z HZ 1. Metal underground water pipe in direct contact with earth for ten feet or more and W electrically continuous to the points of connection of the grounding electrode °"' 6 " conductor and the bonding conductors. -A 00 2. The metal frame of the building, where effectively grounded. co p 3. Concrete encased electrode (Ufer ground) consisting of a minimum of 20 feet of r4., w W cu bare copper conductor (size 4 minimum) encased by a minimum of 2 inches of . i F concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that w LL is in direct contact with the earth. W 4. Ground rod of copper clad steel, minimum % inch diameter, minimum 10 feet long, 2 driven full length into the earth. If a maximum resistance to ground of 5 Ohms 5 cannot be obtained with a single ground rod, provide additional ground rods installed w D not closer than 6 feet apart until a maximum resistance to ground of 5 Ohms is Z W H obtained. Z 5. Other grounding electrodes as shown on the Drawings. O Z F- 2.03 GROUND BUS CABINETS • - W D p A. Provide a main ground bus cabinet in the main switchboard room. Provide ground bus 0 cn cabinets in other locations shown on the Drawings. 0 F— Ill i B. Ground bus cabinets shall be NEMA 1 enclosure with drilled copper bus on stand off I-- H insulators. �!- O •. Z 2.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING SYSTEM U A. Provide a continuous insulated #6 AWG (minimum) copper grounding conductor between Z each telecom terminal backboard and telecom terminal cabinet. Bond the telecommunications grounding system to the grounding electrode system and to the nearest available structural steel on each floor. 2.05 RAISED FLOOR GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a bare number 2 AWG grounding conductor the width and length of each compartmented under the raised floor. Provide a ground clamp and connection at every other raised floor pedestal (connection shall be above the pedestal leveling jack). Bond the raised floor grounding system to the grounding electrode system. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Metallic raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, equipment frames, fittings, and other metallic non - current carrying equipment parts and surfaces shall be effectively bonded to the grounding system. Nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads and contact surfaces to preserve grounding continuity or fittings shall be provided to make such removal unnecessary. September 30, 2003 Grounding System Permit Issue 16680 -2 n ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. The grounded service conductor (neutral) of each service shall be connected to the grounding electrode system with an appropriately sized grounding electrode conductor. C. The grounded conductor (neutral) of each separately derived system shall be connected to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel and nearest interior cold water pipe with an appropriately sized grounding electrode conductor. Separately derived systems include the following: 1. Step down transformers. 2. Engine generator set(s). 3. Computer power center(s). D. Neutral wiring shall be grounded at the system point of origin only and shall be isolated from downstream grounding systems. E. Provide an insulated, isolated grounding conductor for branch circuits serving isolated ground and isolated ground surge suppressor type receptacles. Isolated grounding conductors shall be isolated from other grounding systems back to the system point of origin. F. Provide an insulated grounding conductor for all segments of branch circuits serving motors controlled by variable frequency drive controllers. G. Bond interior metal piping systems to the grounding electrode system. Where metallic piping and duct systems are rendered metallically non continuous by non - conductive couplings, provide bonding jumpers to provide grounding continuity. H. Receptacles and lighting fixtures shall be grounded to the outlet box by means of a bonding jumper between the outlet box and the receptacle or lighting fixture grounding terminal. Feeders and branch circuits shall be provided with an insulated grounding conductor run with the circuit conductors. This grounding conductor shall be in addition to the ground path provided by the continuously grounded metallic raceway system that encloses the phase and neutral conductors. J. Provide bolted clamp terminal connectors where connected to removable equipment. K. Provide brazed molded exothermic welded connections to ground rods and connections to building structural steel. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Grounding System 16680 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE September 30, 2003 Permit Issue the City of the project location. hour response time. SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM z z PART 1 — GENERAL re re i 1.01 DESCRIPTION 0 0 N 0 A. Provide fire alarm and detection system in accordance with the Contract Documents. J H B. The fire alarm and detection system shall be a stand alone system operating independently w O of other control systems. 2 �. C. Related work specified in other divisions of these specifications: u_ J to D 1. Sprinkler water flow and tamper switches: I = - w . 2. Magnetic door holders and electric door locking hardware. z 1--. 3. Damper end switches, differential air pressure switches, and air flow switches. z O 4. Installation of duct type smoke detectors. w w op 0 O - 0 I- A. Fire Department approval of fire alarm and detection system. w w B. Manufacturer and equipment supplier shall have a minimum of ten year's prior experience in � ii:.) ui C. Equipment supplier shall have 24 hour parts and labor service available with a maximum 4 i H O z D. Prior to making required submittals, system supplier shall meet with the Fire Department and make an informal presentation of the fire alarm and detection system. Meeting minutes shall be issued and comments incorporated into the required submittals. ' 1.03 STANDARDS A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990. B. Fire Department Requirements. C. NFPA 13 — Sprinkler Systems. D. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code. E. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. F. NFPA 90A — Air Conditioning Systems. G. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. H. Owner's 'Insurance Underwriter. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila I. State Fire Marshal. J. UL Standard 38 Manual Alarm Stations. K. UL Standard 217 — Smoke Detectors — Single /Multiple Stations. L. UL Standard 228 — Door Holders — Closers. M. UL Standard 268 — Smoke Detectors — Systems. N. UL Standard 268A — Duct Smoke Detectors. O. UL Standard 464 — Audible Signaling Appliances. P. UL Standard 521 — Heat Detectors. Q. UL Standard 1638 — Visual Signaling Appliances. 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS A. FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel. B. FARA Fire Alarm Remote Annunciator. C. FATC Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Minutes of system supplier's meeting with Fire Department. B. Manufacturer's product data sheets for equipment including State Fire Marshal listing numbers. C. Floor plans (minimum 1/8 inch scale) showing device locations and interconnecting conduit and wire. D. Riser diagram showing devices, equipment, and interconnecting conduit and wire. Indicate points of connection to other equipment such as damper actuators, electric door locking hardware, magnetic door holders, and other related devices and equipment. E. Scaled detail drawings of FACP and FARA panel fronts. F. Wiring diagram for each device. G. Control and wiring diagrams for smoke control sequence. H. Voltage drop calculations. 1. Battery sizing calculations. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -2 a.. N., FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Manual Pull Station Area Smoke Detector Duct Smoke Detector Sprinkler Water Flow Switch Sprinkler Tamper Switch Annunciate Alarm at FACP and FARA Yes Yes Yes Yes No Annunciate Trouble at FACP and FARA No No No No Yes j ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila J. Fire alarm horn power supply sizing calculations. 1~ K. Visual alarm power supply sizing calculations. .H w c4 2 L. Power supply calculations for magnetic door holders, and electric door locking hardware. 6 v 0 J H N u_ O A. Wiring shall be inspected and tested for continuity and short circuits. The minimum allowable 2 resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is ten megohms measured with a 500 volt megger. u_ � d I-w z 1. Certification that equipment has been properly installed and is in satisfactory Z O, operating condition. w uj 2. Sensitivity settings for smoke detectors. ? o U OD- OH w = U I- M. Seismic restraint calculations. 1.06 FIELD TESTING B. Field Test Reports: 3. Detailed operational test report in matrix form indicating each initiating device, each signaling device, and each control and indicating Tight on each piece of equipment. Report shall certify the following: a. Successful operation of each alarm and supervisory initiating device. b. Successful operation of each signaling device. c. Successful operation of FACP. d. Successful operation of FARA. e. Successful operation of line supervision devices. f. Successful operation of off site alarm monitoring system connection. 1.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an identification nameplate for each equipment cabinet. 1.08 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. The system shall operate automatically in accordance with the following table: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -3 u_ O . U= O ▪ F- z Annunciate Circuit Supervisory at FACP and FARA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Activate fire alarm horns and visual alarms throughout building Yes Yes Yes Yes No Release Magnetic Door Holders Yes Yes Yes Yes No Release Electric Door Locking Hardware Yes Yes Yes Yes No Transmit Off Site Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes No ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS *Miscellaneous systems include kitchen hood fire protection systems, pre - action fire protection systems, an clean agent fire protection systems. B. Air Handling Systems: 1. Activation of a supply or return air duct detector shall shut down the associated fan or air handling system. C. Combination Fire /Smoke Dampers: UNISYS — Tukwila 1. Activation of a duct or smoke detector at a combination fire /smoke damper shall close the associated fire /smoke damper. 1.09 SYSTEM ZONING A. Alarm Initiating Devices: 1. Provide a separate, individual zone for each manual pull station, area smoke detector, duct smoke detector, area heat detector, and sprinkler water flow switch. B. Supervisory Initiating Devices: 1. Provide a separate, individual zone for each sprinkler tamper switch. C. Audible and Visual Signaling Device: 1. Entire building shall be one zone. D. Initiating and signaling device wiring circuits /loops /channels shall be loaded to no more than 50% capacity to allow the installation of future devices. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire alarm and detection system components shall be of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise noted. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Edwards, Firecom, Notifier, Siemens Cerberus, or Simplex. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 2.02 SYSTEM TYPE A. The fire alarm and detection system shall be the fully addressable type. Each fire alarm initiating device shall be a separate, individual zone. Provide interface modules to connect non - addressable devices to addressable wiring channels. B. All zoning /device location information shall be field programmable to meet the exact job requirements as approved by the Architect/Engineer and as required by the Fire Department and Fire Marshal. 2.03 LINE SUPERVISION A. All system equipment and wiring shall be supervised in compliance with the requirements of NFPA 72. B. All styles of Class A circuits shall be installed such that the outgoing and return conductors, exiting f rom a nd r eturning t o t he c ontrol u nit, r espectively, a re r outed separately. The outgoing and return (redundant) circuit conductors shall not be run in the same cable assembly (multiconductor cable), enclosure, or raceway. 2.04 STANDBY BATTERIES A. Provide sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire s ystem u pon I oss o f p ower a s required by NFPA 72. B. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. Battery charging and recharging shall be automatic. 2.05 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP1 .. A. Solid state, modular design, fully supervised. Steel enclosure in standard finish, with hinged, locking door. Integral power supply, standby batteries, and battery charger. B. Provide power on LED, power failure LED, system trouble LED, system reset switch, alarm silence switch, trouble silence switch, manual audible and visible signal switch, alarm acknowledge switch, trouble acknowledge switch, supervisory service acknowledge switch, lamp test button, tone alert, battery supervision LED, auxiliary relays, and other system indicators and controls necessary for processing alarm and signaling functions. Indicating lamps shall be LED type. C. Provide appropriate permanent identification of control and indicating functions. D. Annunciation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Serial annunciator with back lit, alphanumeric, 80 character liquid crystal display indicating clear language information as to the type of alarm (device type), point status (alarm or trouble), number of alarms on the system, and a custom location label. Ability to scroll back through prior system actions. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 2. LED matrix annunciator indicating initiating device type (columns) and floor of initiating device (rows). Provide a separate row for each floor level and a separate column for each device type (manual pull station, area smoke detector, duct smoke Z • detector, sprinkler water flow, and sprinkler valve tamper). Provide a red (alarm or t trouble) and yellow light (zone supervision) for each annunciation zone. Provide , w matrix layout, identification, and zoning requirements that meet the requirements of the Fire Department. �" -J 0 3. 20 column thermal strip printer. p 4. Provide a permanent binder with typewritten, laminated inserts cross referencing co ILI location labels to description and location of system address. w = J F.- U) u. E. System shall utilize analog type smoke detection with alarm verification, self test feature, w 0 individual sensor automatic timed sensitivity adjustment, 'individual smoke sensor field 2 adjustable sensitivity set from FACP, and automatic maintenance alarm feature. .» g 5 w =w F- _ z F- O zF- 1. Security Control Center (SCC). uJ w 2. Engineering Control Center (ECC). U p O off Ill w I L I 0 w Z i I O 2.06 FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR (FARA) A. Provide a remote video display terminal and keyboard in each of the following locations: B. Provide a remote full size dot matrix printer in each of the following locations: 1. Security Control Center (SCC). 2. Engineering Control Center (ECC). 2.07 FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. General: 1. Addressable type. 2. Provide auxiliary relays where required to satisfy system operational requirements. 3. Smoke detectors shall be analog type. Manual Pull Stations: 1. High impact Lexan or die cast metal. 2. Double action, mechanically latched upon operation until key operated manual reset. Pull station front shall be hinged to back plate assembly, requiring keyed opening to reset. C. Area Smoke and Heat Detectors: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. General: a. Common base for detachable, low profile, ionization type smoke, photoelectric type smoke, and heat detector heads. 2. Ionization type area smoke detector: a. Dual chamber type. b. 360 degrees smoke entry, locking tamper screw, pulsating on power LED indicator, UL 268. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -6 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 3. Photoelectric type area smoke detector: a. LED Tight source, silicon photodiode receiving element. Line filter and time z delay circuitry to prevent transient false alarms. = H b. 360 degrees smoke entry, locking tamper screw, pulsating on power LED 1— z indicator, UL 268. u 4. Area heat detector: 6 = a. 135 degrees fixed temperature self restoring type. U O b. Locking tamper screw, UL 521. w o a w D. Duct Type Smoke Detectors: H U) u- 1. General: w O a. Common base for detachable ionization or photoelectric type smoke g J detector head. b. Duct housing with hinged door and full length sampling tube. Visible alarm to O LED, remote LED output, UL 268A. Z w c. Provide auxiliary contacts. Z i 2. Ionization type smoke detector head: a. Dual chamber type. w O 3. Photoelectric type area smoke detector: w a. LED light source, silicon photodiode receiving element. Line filter and time D p delay circuitry to prevent transient false alarms. 0 u) . 4. Remote alarm indicator: c I— a. Ceiling mounted, red LED, stainless steel faceplate engraved ALARM. = w Provide where duct type smoke detectors are installed above a ceiling. f- H v_ O E. Addressable Transmitters /Monitor Modules: w z U 1. Addressable transmitters /monitor modules shall be provided where required to f- z interface with contact alarm devices. F. Addressable Relay Modules: 1. Addressable relay modules shall be provided where required to provide audible alarm interface and /or relay control interface. 2.08 FIRE ALARM SIGNALLING DEVICES A. Visual alarm strobes shall be synchronized throughout the building. The candela rating of visual alarm strobes shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements. Provide visual alarm strobes in addition to those shown on the Drawings to meet NFPA 72 requirements. - B. Signaling Devices September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Horns: a. Flush ceiling or wall mounted as shown on Drawings, red die cast faceplate, high sound output. b. Wheelock Series 30. 2. Visual Alarms: a. Flush wall mounted, high intensity strobe, vertical orientation with vertical engravement FIRE, beige faceplate, ADA, UL 464. Ceiling mounted type is not permitted. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION b. Gentex GXS- 4- 15 -75W W or equal. 3. Combination HornNisual Alarm: a. Flush wall mounted. b. Horn and visual alarm specifications to match individual device specification. 3.01 GENERAL A. All equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Wiring shall be color coded, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and Fire Department requirements. Install wiring in an independent, dedicated metallic raceway system. C. Connections to devices installed in accessible tile ceilings shall be flexible conduit. Device back boxes shall be securely attached to framing members. D. Provide appropriately sized backboxes for surface mounted fire alarm signaling devices, paint to match device faceplate color. Stacked or punch pressed steel type backboxes are not permitted. E. Provide watertight type backboxes where installed recessed flush in perimeter walls below grade. F. Provide wireways above and /or below equipment cabinets to accommodate large concentrations of wiring. Conductors within equipment shall be carefully formed and harnessed. G. Connect equipment to emergency power system. H. Provide power supply wiring to electric damper actuators used for smoke control that are not controlled by the temperature control system. I. Area and duct type smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type, unless otherwise noted. J. Provide a 1 inch empty conduit from the FACP to the nearest telecom terminal backboard. K. Auxiliary relays connected to the fire management system used to initiate control of monitor status of fire safety functions shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or device. The wiring between the fire management system and the auxiliary relay shall be supervised. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Fire Alarm and Detection System Permit Issue 16720 -8 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide telecommunications raceways and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Telephone service provider approval of incoming service installation. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Telephone service provider requirements. B. BICS. C. EIAITIA. D. NEMA VE. E. Cable Tray: ASTM A -123, A -525, NEMA VE -1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. No requirements. B. Manufacturer's product data sheets for cable tray and J- Hooks. C. Seismic restraint calculations for cable tray. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 TELECOMMUNICATION BACKBOARDS A. Fire retardant plywood. B. % inch thick x 8 feet high by length as shown on the Drawings. Extend full height of room for sections above or below floor or wall sleeves. 2.02 SLEEVES A. Sleeves shall be 4 inch rigid steel nipples. Extend floor sleeves a minimum of 4 inches above and below finished floor. Extend wall sleeves a minimum of 4 inches on either side of wall. Sleeve ends shall be threaded. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 16740 TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Provide sleeves between floors of telecommunication closets as in quantities and locations shown on the Drawings. z 2.03 CABLE TRAY w A. Cable tray systems shall consist of straight sections, fittings, and accessories as defined in 6 5 NEMA VE -1 and UL classified as equipment grounding conductors. Provide radiused 0 p elbows, tees, crosses, splice plates, wall and overhead supports, and other fittings necessary co w for a complete, continuously grounded system. w H B. Cable Tray Materials: w O 2 1. Aluminum: Straight sections and fitting siderails and rungs shall be extruded from 1 Q Aluminum Association Alloy 6063. Fabricated parts shall be made from Aluminum u) 2 ' Association Alloy 5052. Splice plates shall be of wedge lock design, using four z w square neck carriage bolts and serrated flange locknuts. I.- Z z f- C. Cable Tray Types: z w 1. Ladder: Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (siderails) with m 0 transverse members (rungs) welded to the siderails. Rungs shall be spaced on 6 9 . c n . 12 18 inches on center. Rung spacing in radiused fittings shall be 9 inches 0 '— measured at the center of the trays width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable = w " bearing surface of 3 /4 inches with radiused edges. No portion of the rungs shall 1-- protrude below the bottom plane of the siderails. u_ O D. Cable Tray Size: 1. Height: Cable tray shall have an overall sidewall height of 4 5 6 7 inches unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Width: Widths shall be 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 inches unless otherwise shown on Drawings. E. Loading capacity shall meet NEMA Class 8C with a safety factor of 1.5. F. Acceptable manufacturer: B -Line, Globe, or P -W Industries. 2.04 J -HOOKS A. Provide a system of overhead and wall mounted J -Hooks adequately secured to the structure. J -Hooks shall be galvanized steel, smooth edges suitable for supporting teflon coated telecommunications cabling approved for installation in a return air ceiling plenum. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -2 .z Cu U= O ~ z tj r-- 3.02 CABLE TRAY Fns 1; =a • I! xxr ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide high impact thermoplastic insulating bushings on sleeve and raceway ends. Provide metallic capped insulating bushings on used service provider incoming conduits. B. Fire seal floor sleeves and sleeves in fire rated walls to maintain fire rating of wall after telephone cables are installed. C. Arrange raceway runs less than 100 feet from point to point so that they contain no more than two 90 degree standard factory bends or three 90 degree, 24 inch radius bends. Provide pull boxes in raceway runs exceeding 100 feet from point to point with more than one 90 degree bend. Raceway runs shall not contain Condulet type fittings. A. Cable tray shall be supported at a maximum of 8 foot centers and at each bend, tee, cross, and elbow fitting. Supports shall be threaded rod trapeze style hangers or wall brackets. Side rails shall bear on the supports; rungs shall not bear on the supports. B. Cable tray shall be installed level. Manufactured offsets shall be used to change height or direction. C. Coordinate location of cable trays with other trades to avoid conflicts and maintain accessibility. Where installed above a ceiling, cable trays shall be not less than 12 inches above the bottom o f t he f inished c eiling. V ertical c learance a bove t he t ray s hall b e a minimum of 12 inches. D. Cable tray shall be continuous. Where cable tray run is interrupted at a fire rated wall, provide three 4 inch sleeves in fire rated wall. Provide bonding jumpers where cable trays are interrupted at fire rated walls and floors or are otherwise rendered . electrically discontinuous. E. Cable tray installed in an environmental air plenum shall be solid bottom with continuous cover, rated for installation in an environmental air plenum. 3.03 J -HOOKS A. Install J -Hooks on 3 4 5 6 foot centers. Coordinate location of J -Hooks with other trades to avoid conflicts and preserve accessibility. Where J -Hook run is interrupted at a fire rated wall, provide three 4 inch sleeves in fire rated wall. Provide bonding jumpers where J -Hooks are interrupted at fire rated walls and floors. Where installed above a ceiling, J -Hooks shall be not less than 12 inches above the bottom of the finished ceiling. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS A. Core and Shell: B. Tenant Areas; 1. Provide a 4 inch square x 21 /8 inch deep outlet box with single gang plaster ring and dedicated 1 inch empty conduit to nearest accessible ceiling location. 1. ' Provide a 4 inch square x 21 /8 inch deep outlet box with single gang plaster ring and dedicated 1 inch empty conduit to nearest telecommunications backboard. 2. Provide a stainless steel coverplate with grommeted hole for furniture system connections. ) END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories Permit Issue 16740 -4 w F1E COPY understand that the Plan Check approvals are d 0 iscionz; n {1d approval of subject t�� errors and r p does f , t i X11 any does not auU 1i {is '4{.A cod or or• . • Tukwila Check Processing Center Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 Mechanical and Electrical Specifications Permit Set September 30, 2003 { C1TA VOILA APPROVED DEC 2 2 2003 F1� 4J.1) BUI � NG DIVISION orryREc ver, r a OCr0 PERMIT CENTER fl)� 3 j i'8 Section No. Title Last Revision Date 15010 Mechanical General Provisions September 30, 2003 15060 Piping and Accessories September 30, 2003 15100 Valves September 30, 2003 15120 Expansion Compensation September 30, 2003 15130 Meters, Gauges and Thermometers September 30, 2003 15140 Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves September 30, 2003 15160 Pumps September 30, 2003 15170 Electric Motors September 30, 2003 15171 Variable Frequency Drives September 30, 2003 15190 Systems Identification September 30, 2003 15240 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints September 30, 2003 15241 Acoustics September 30, 2003 15250 Insulation September 30, 2003 15515 Hydronic Systems Specialties September 30, 2003 15708 Closed Circuit Cooling Towers September 30, 2003 15731 Computer Room Air Conditioning Units September 30, 2003 15734 Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems September 30, 2003 15771 Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units September 30, 2003 15786 Water Filter and Cyclone Separator September 30, 2003 15800 Ductwork September 30, 2003 15860 Fans September 30, 2003 15880 Air Filters and Cleaners September 30, 2003 15890 Water Treatment September 30, 2003 15900 Building Management System (BMS) September 30, 2003 15910 Dampers September 30, 2003 15930 Air Terminal Units ' September 30, 2003 15940 Air Outlets and Inlets September 30, 2003 15985 Automatic Control Sequences September 30, 2003 15990 Mechanical Systems Balancing September 30, 2003 15991 General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements September 30, 2003 I ._J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS UNISYS - Tukwila Page 1 Section No. Title Last Revision Date 15992 Mechanical Equipment - Equipment Starting and Testing September 30, 2003 15993 Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing September 30, 2003 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS UNISYS — Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Page 2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS = Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 are a part of the requirements for the work under this Division of the Specification. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation the heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection systems as called for in the Contract Documents and according to applicable codes and regulations. B. Provide labor, materials and accessories required to provide complete operating mechanical systems as described or which may be reasonably implied as essential for a complete operating system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with current governing codes, ordinances and regulations of the authority or authorities having jurisdiction over any part of the work and secure all necessary permits. Comply with the regulations and requirements of the Owner's insurance underwriter. B. Where codes or standards are referenced, the applicable portions apply. C. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where requirements differ, apply the more stringent. D. Should a ny c hange i n drawings or specifications be required to comply with governing regulations, notify the Architect prior to submitting bid. E. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of t he trades in a thorough, substantial, skillful and well- executed manner by competent workers. Provide a competent, experienced full -time Superintendent who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS The Architect or Architect's Representative may conduct unannounced field reviews of any work completed or in progress during the Contractor's working hours. A report will be issued to the Contractor if the field review of the mechanical, plumbing and fire protection systems construction has revealed elements of the work, which are inconsistent with the Contract Documents. All items in the report shall be addressed in writing by the Contractor within two (2) weeks and corrections in the field shall be made as directed. Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: AABC American Association of Balancing Contractors ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ADC Air Diffusion Council AFBMA Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association AGA American Gas Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers • ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association CTI Cooling Tower Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association U.L. Underwriters Laboratories B. Definitions: 1. Where it is stated in the specifications to submit to Architect or Engineer for review, refer to Architectural General and Special Conditions for proper procedures. 2. "PROVIDE" means to "Furnish" and "Install ". 3. "INSTALL" means to join, unite, fasten, Zink, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. 4. "FURNISH" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. 5. "AS DIRECTED" means as directed by the Architect, or the Architect's Representative. 6. "CONCEALED" means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or within double partitions, or installed within hung ceilings. 7. "SUBMIT" means submit to the Architect for review. September 30, 2003 Mechanical General Provisions Permit Issue 15010 -2 z w J 0 O 0 a. J 1. - N w w om . � z F =.. F- 0 z • w 0 O N w 0 w 0 z 1 V N 1 0 -- O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that the work is in accordance with Contract Documents. Guarantee work against faulty and improper material, fabrication, installation, start -up and commissioning for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, the longer term shall apply. Correct any deficiencies, which occur during the guarantee period, within 24 hours of notification, at no additional cost to the Owner, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Obtain similar guarantees from subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and sub -trade specialists. 1.06 USE OF THE ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and /or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the A rchitect a nd E ngineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media files. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects and free of damage and corrosion. B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB's or any other material which is considered hazardous by the Environmental Protection Agency or any other authority having jurisdiction. C: Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as directed by the Architect. D. Statically and dynamically balance rotating equipment for minimum vibration and lowest operating noise level. E. Provide name /data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous place. F. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people. G. Maintain uniformity of manufacture for equipment used in similar applications and sizes. H. Applicable equipment and materials to be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and manufactured in accordance with ASME, AWWA, or ANSI standards, and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. The energy -using products shall be certified for use in State of Washington and meet State energy efficient standards. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -3 z w re 0 O 0 co a CO LIJ W_ CO u- w 0 � = a F w z � F— O z f- w O (1) 0 I- w W O Z • = O 1 " z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila I. Fully lubricate equipment when installed. J. Do not operate air systems until ductwork is complete, temporary filters are in place and •-- Z • construction debris is removed. Provide 1 -inch thick fiberglass filter media across the face of = I each return air opening prior to start of each air system during temporary system operation w and system clean out. Q J U K. Do not operate water systems until piping has been cleaned and startup strainers are in U o place. w w 1 F,. L. Install floor mounted equipment on a 4 -inch high concrete pad. Concrete work shall be N u_ provided by another trade. Coordinate size and location with actual equipment used and uJ O accepted layout shop drawings. 2 J M. Secure equipment with bolts, washers and Iocknuts of ample size to support equipment. 0 C =7 Embedded anchor bolts to have bottom plate and pipe sleeves. Grout machinery set in z w concrete under entire bearing surface. After grout has set, remove wedges, shims and jack Z H bolts and fill space with grout. Z O O N. Locate valves, traps, damper operators, dielectric unions, access doors, etc. to be easily uj accessible, either in mechanical spaces or through access panels specified. Obtain m p Architect's approval of access panel locations. 0 cn . o 1.- 0. Follow manufacturers' recommendations and instructions for installing, connecting, and = w adjusting equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation. 1- L P. Pressure vessels and relief valves shall be selected, built and labeled in accordance with ui Z j I HI— Q. Equipment capabilities, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site operating conditions. z Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be de -rated with the method of de- rating identified on shop drawings. • ASME. 2.02 ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Contract Documents are based on materials specified and on equipment manufacturers indicated. Acceptance of alternative equipment manufacturers does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to provide equipment and materials which meet the quality and performance as stated or implied in the Contract Documents. B. Equipment manufacturers listed in individual sections are acceptable for this project, subject • to requirements of contract documents. C. Submit proposals to supply alternate materials or equipment, in writing, with sufficient lead time for review prior to the date equipment must be ordered to maintain project schedule. Reimburse Owner for costs associated with the review of the proposed alternative whether alternative is accepted or rejected. D. Include revisions required to adapt alternatives in such proposals, including revisions by other trades. No increase in the contract price will be considered to accommodate the use of alternative equipment. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -4 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Wherever quality standards (such as serviceability, energy efficiency, longevity or durability), operating results (such as noise levels, quantity delivered or pressure obtained) are specified or scheduled, or when the manufacturer and size of equipment, for which such operating results are published or determinable, is specified, the substitution being proposed must conform substantially to the quality and quantities specified or implied. The substitution must fit into available space conditions and must function properly in coordination with the rest of the system. F. Proposed changes and substitutions of systems, equipment and manufacturers shall be submitted and include the following information with the proposal: 1. A description of the difference between the existing contract requirements and that proposed, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to other trades. 2. Schematic drawings and details to supplement the description. 3. A list of the contract requirements that must be revised if the change is accepted, including any specification revisions. 4. Complete list of materials and equipment proposed for use in the change. 5. Include a description and estimate of costs the Owner may incur in implementing the change, such as additional space requirements, permits, architectural and aesthetic impact, design costs, tests, permits evaluation, operating and support costs. 6. A projection of any effects the proposed change would have on collateral costs to the Owner. 7. A statement of the time by which a contract modification accepting the change must be issued, noting any effect on the contract completion time or the delivery schedule. 8. A statement indicating the reduction to the contract price if the Owner accepts the change. Be responsible for appropriate modifications to all trades. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 FEES A. Pay all required fees and obtain required permits related to the mechanical installation. B. Pay royalties or fees in connection with the use of patented devices and systems. C. Provide controlled or witnessed inspection where required by authorities having jurisdiction or by these specifications. 3.02 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's data, samples and test reports as specified. B. Within two (2) weeks after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or after execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, submit a complete typed list of all mechanical equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for the equipment proposed to be provided on this project as well as names of all subcontractors. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -5 z it w QQ � JU 00 N O J H � w w 0 g? N ar = w z � � z �- w w D O N O F- w H- • O .. W U O ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Within two (2) weeks after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative or after execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, prepare an index of all submittals for the project. Include a submittal identification number, a cross - reference to the specification sections or drawing number, and an item description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the specification sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal identification number in addition to the other data specified. All subcontractors shall utilize the assigned submittal identification number. D. After the Contract is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data and samples from the manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, and all subcontractors, for all materials and equipment as specified. Submit data and details of such materials and equipment for review. Prior to submission certify that the shop drawings, product data and samples are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Check all materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any work which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop drawings as required to comply with the Contract Documents and the shop drawings. E. Review of submittals is for general compliance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Comments or absence of comments does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing the work in a safe manner, and for coordinating the work with that of other trades. F. No part of the work shall be ordered, procured, started in the shop or in the field until the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work have been submitted, reviewed and returned with either "No Exceptions Noted" or "Exceptions Noted" marked on the submission. G. A minimum period of ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Architect/Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data and /or samples are submitted for review. This time period must be considered by the Contractor in the scheduling of the work. H. Submit four (4) bond prints ofall items requiring shop drawings. Submit four (4) copies of manufacturers product submittals. Two (2) copies of submittals will be returned. Additional copies are the responsibility of the Contractor. Electronic media will not be reviewed. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -6 • ...,.. .._....a.,..e....�...,... -,.... - ._ '+: _ 4 1 1.,,'■' Stamp Interpretation No Exceptions Noted Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents. Exceptions Noted: [ J Resubmit for Record [ ] No Resubmission Required Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents and Engineer's notations are complied with. Within this category are two options. A resubmission for our records is required when corrections are necessary. A resubmission is not required if there are only minor comments. Revise and Resubmit The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents; do not proceed with fabrication, manufacture, or construction. The work and shop drawings are not permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate shop drawings. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Submissions will be stamped as follows: UNISYS - Tukwila J. Submit materials and equipment by manufacturer, trade name and model number. Include clear, legible copies of applicable brochure or catalog material. Maintenance and operating manuals are not suitable substitutes for shop drawings. K. Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed. Cross out non - applicable information. Note specified features such as voltages, motor efficiencies, special tank linings, pump seals, materials or paint finishes. Cross out all references to "options ". Cross out statements such as "subject to change without notice" or "not for construction ". Anything not specifically excluded is assumed to be included. L. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, technical data sufficient to verify that equipment meets requirements of the Contract Documents. Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with voltage ratings and schedules. M. Maintain a complete set of the most current reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data on site. N. Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for ductwork, piping work and other distribution services in minimum % inch = 1 foot scale, including elevations and locations and sizes of openings in floor decks, walls and roofs. September 30, 2003 Mechanical General Provisions Permit Issue 15010 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila O. The work described in shop drawing and product data submittals shall be carefully checked z by all trades for clearances (including those required for code compliance, maintenance and 1 H servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and proper coordination 1 "' w with other trades on the job. Each submitted shop drawing to include a certification that ce related field conditions and requirements have been checked by all Contractors and -J U Subcontractors and that conflicts do not exist. c) 0 U P. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be cu = contained on submissions or for deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents. co u_ The noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to w 0 proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, product data 2 and samples, the Contract Documents govern the work and are neither waived nor g 5 superseded in any way by the review of shop drawings, product data and samples. LL j Q. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings; product data and /or samples will not be reviewed H = and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. z t— F- O R. Indicate the following in the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing, and on the front w w cover of each product data brochure. The submittal identification number; title of the sheet or U 0 brochure; name and location of the Project; names of the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, O U Subcontractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, and Vendor; the date of submittal; and the date of p each correction, version and revision. Number all pages and drawings in product data w W brochures, test reports or submittals consecutively from beginning to end. Unless the above _!— U information is included, the submittal will be returned for resubmission. Resubmittals of shop u_ ~O drawings or product data or brochures shall include a cover letter summarizing the z corrections made in response to the review comments. U D- r: r O~ z 3.03 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contract Documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation instructions. Drawings are diagrammatic. B. The Contract Documents show the general arrangement of equipment, ductwork, piping and accessories. Follow these drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other trades will permit. Provide offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings. Investigate the site and review drawings of other trades to determine conditions affecting the work and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such conditions. C. Certain products will be provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain the requirements for installation of these products. D. Carefully check space requirements with other trades to insure that material can be installed in the spaces allotted. E. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that they have the information necessary so that they may properly install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items (valves, dampers, coils, etc.) requiring access in order than the ceiling and partition contractors can install access doors and panels in the correct locations. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Consult with other trades regarding equipment so that, wherever possible, motors, motor controls, pumps and valves are of the same manufacturer. G. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of pipes, ducts and conduits through structural masonry and concrete walls, roofs and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection of each pipe and duct passing through building surfaces. H. Install firestopping around all pipes, conduits, etc. which pass through rated walls, partitions and floors in strict accordance with the manufacturers published approval listing and rating. I. Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in structural elements and precast panels or components for mechanical work. J. Provide required structural or architectural supports and hangers for ductwork, piping and equipment, designed so as not to exceed allowable loadings of structures. K. Examine and compare the Contract Drawings and Specifications with the drawings and specifications of other trades, report any discrepancies between them to the Architect and obtain written instructions for changes necessary in the work. Install and coordinate the work in cooperation with other related trades. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences. L. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Architect for review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record drawings. M. Adjust location of pipes, ducts, panels, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work to prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication. 1. Right -of -Way: Lines which pitch have right -of -way over those which do not pitch. For example: condensate, steam, and plumbing drains normally have right -of -way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right -of -way over lines whose elevations can be changed. 2. Provide offsets, transitions and changes in direction of pipes and ducts as required to maintain proper head room and pitch on sloping lines. Provide traps, air vents, drains, etc., as required to effect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. N. Install mechanical work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of hydronic coils, controls, fan shafts and wheels, smoke detectors, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and any other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, and control components, and to clear the openings of swinging doors and access panels. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -9 z • w 6 1 0 O 0 UJ w O u_? w H z �. )- 0 Z w w 0 0- � w L O w Z U= 0 1 ' z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila O. Changes in the cross - sectional dimensions of ductwork are permissible when required to Z meet job conditions. Maintain at least the same equivalent cross- sectional duct area in z H accordance with t he I atest e dition o f t he A SHRAE G uide. S ecure t he a pproval o f t he w Architect prior to fabrication of ductwork requiring these changes. Q D W o P. Provide access panels in equipment, ducts, etc., as required for inspection and maintenance 0 o of concealed or intemal equipment, dampers, plenums, smoke detectors, humidifiers, w = controls, etc. F- N u_ Q. In cases of doubt as to the Work intended, or in the event of need for explanation thereof, w 0 request supplementary instructions from the Architect. 3.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE co O � W A. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of Z = the subsoils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or — F below ground, or other sub - surface conditions which may be encountered during the work. z O Ww B. Evaluate existing conditions which may affect methods or cost of performing the work, based n p on examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the Drawings or other 0 N information does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactory completion of the 0 '— work. • Ill W IU 3.05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL , , v. ~ O Z A. Provide excavation for the work of this Division. Excavate all material encountered, to the 0 depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Remove excavated materials not required or 0 H suitable for backfill from the site. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface z water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water which accumulates. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95 percent of standard proctor density or 75 percent relative density or as specified by the Architect. W henever u nstable s oil t hat i s i ncapable o f p roperly s upporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. C. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the required minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -10 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Trenches shall not be placed within ten (10) feet of foundation or soil surfaces which must resist horizontal forces. E. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests have been performed and the installation observed by the Architect. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfili shall consist of non - expansive material with limited porosity. Deposit backfill in 6 -inch thick layers and tamp carefully until the mechanical work is covered by not less than 12 inches of material. Backfili and tamp remainder of trench at 1 foot intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Where cutting, channeling, or drilling of floors, walis, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces are necessary from the proper installation, support or anchorage of ductwork, piping or equipment, layout the work; carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, equipment or finishes using skilled tradesmen for all required work. B. Do not cut, channel or drill unfinished masonry, tile, etc. unless written permission is obtained from the Architect. Perform this work in a manner acceptable to the Architect. C. Where ductwork, piping or equipment is mounted on a painted finished surface, or a surface to be painted, paint to match the surface. Cold galvanize bare metal whenever support channels are cut. D. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as required. Where these openings are not provided provide cutting and patching to accommodate penetrations at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.07 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS A. Prohibited Markings: In all public areas, tenant areas, storage areas and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or installation of any equipment, fixture or assembly which bears on any exposed surface any name, trademark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such object has been obtained, is prohibited. B. Exception: Required Underwriters Laboratories labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed. 3.08 EQUIPMENT PAD AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide concrete pads under all floor mounted mechanical equipment. This includes electrical components, equipment mounted on legs and pipe support stands. Equipment pads shall conform to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 2 -inch margin around the equipment and supports. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and made of a minimum 28 day, 2500 psi concrete reinforced with 6 -inch x 6 -inch 6/6 -gauge welded wire mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors, with all external corners bullnosed to a 3 / -inch radius. Use shop drawings stamped September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED" or "EXCEPTIONS NOTED" for dimensional guidance in sizing pads. z B. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia z blocks, or on concrete slabs. Verify bolts size, number and embed depth recommended by . F-- w the manufacturer of the equipment with seismic calculations as specified, and locate by 4 ; m means of suitable templates. Equipment installed on vibration isolators shall be secured. -I Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support as recommended by the vibration isolation 0 o and seismic restraint manufacturer. w 111 J = C. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws will pass cn through the gypsum board and be securely attached to the partition studs. As an altemative, w 0 the mounting screws may pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to 6 inch 2 square, 18 -gauge galvanized metal backplates, which are attached to the gypsum board with g Q an approved non - flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not acceptable. = v 1 _w 3.09 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING " ? I INEM Z O A. Include all drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment W uj specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and introduction of equipment to the m o project as required bythe construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to U N the time it is required, be responsible for its proper storage and protection until the time it is p F ., required. Pay for all costs of demurrage or storage. w W U B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by Lk 0 the project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be responsible for disassembly, re- z iii assembly, manufacturer's supervision, shoring, general construction modification, delays, 0 N overtime costs, etc., at no additional cost to the Owner. ~O H 3.10 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION A. Protect the work equipment and material of other trades from damage by work or workers of this trade, and correct damage caused without additional cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work, materials and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site, which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of dust, dirt, water or other obstructing material. Cover and protect equipment and materials from damage due to water, moisture, humidity, paint, spray -on fireproofing, construction debris, etc. Store equipment subject to moisture damage, such as insulation or electrical components in dry heated spaces. C. Provide adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of the materials and equipment against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work until final acceptance. Protect materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred, and moving parts are kept clean and dry. Do not install damaged items; take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair. Replace all wet or damp insulation or acoustic lining. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -12 z 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ELECTRICAL ROOM PRECAUTIONS A. Do not install piping, equipment or ductwork for heating, ventilation, air conditioning, plumbing or any piping systems not included as part of the electrical work, in the following rooms: switchgear, transformer, generator, elevator equipment, telephone, fire command, security, dimmer or electrical equipment rooms. B. Do not install piping, equipment or ductwork above switchboards, disconnects, panelboards, dimmers, control panels, VFD's, motor control centers, individual motor controllers, electronics, etc or the code required service space for these electrical devices. 3.12 EQUIPMENT GUARDS A. Provide easily (without tools) removable expanded metal guards for all hot surfaces, belts, couplings, exposed fan inlets and outlets, and other moving parts of machinery. Provide tachometer openings in the guards at least 2 inches in diameter, for all belt- driven, gear - driven or variable speed machinery. Comply with OSHA requirements for all equipment guards. 3.13 LUBRICATION A. Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. If a part requiring lubrication is concealed or inaccessible, extend a metallic lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and identify it with permanent laminated plastic nameplates. Identify this location in the maintenance manual. B. After installation, properly lubricate all parts requiring lubrication and keep them adequately lubricated with a lubricant recommended by the equipment manufacturer until Owner acceptance. 3.14 DATE OF COMPLETION AND TESTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and acceptance testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and the Contract closeout. Complete any adjustments and /or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date. See individual sections for extent of testing required. B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed and outlining when tests will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review within three (3) months after the notice to proceed by Owner or Owner's Representative has been given. Update this schedule periodically as the project progresses. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -13 z re 2 6 U 0 NCI Co LIJ J = U) LL w 0 gQ N a = 0 � z � 1- O z �- w w O N o w H r- -O ..z = O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND OPERATOR TRAINING A. Provide the services of factory trained specialists to supervise the operation of all equipment and systems specified and train the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel for a ten (10) day operating /instruction period. Operating instruction time is defined as straight time working hours and not including nights, weekends or travel time to and from the project. Refer to individual sections for additional training and instruction by manufacturer's trained specialists. B. Notify the Owner in writing at least three (3) weeks before the operating /instruction period begins. Do not commence until the Owner has issued written acceptance of the starting time and schedule. C. In addition to the operating /instruction period, organize and conduct a seminar to instruct the Owner's representatives in the operation and general preventative maintenance of equipment and systems provided at the completion of the project. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper starting sequences, operation, shutdown, and maintenance procedures, including normal and emergency procedures. E. Make arrangements to give instructions by system and not by building areas. F. Provide services of qualified personnel, including each sub - trade, each major equipment supplier to attend seminar and instruct on respective equipment or systems. Seminar shall be conducted by the Contractor and may be video taped and attended by the Architect or Architect's representative. G. Submit seminar agenda, schedule and list of representatives to the Owner for review thirty (30) days prior to seminar. Confirm attendance at seminar by written notification to participants. H. At seminar, submit final copies of record drawings and operating and maintenance manuals to Owner. I. Submit a written record of the seminar, complete with an attendance list to the Owner. 3.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide operating instructions and maintenance manuals for all equipment and materials furnished under this Division. B. Submit three (3) final copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least ten (10) weeks before the completion date. Provide 81/2-inch x 11 -inch, expanding spine catalog binders bound with heavy red fabric, hot stamp lettering on front and spine identifying project name and owner's name. Assemble data in a completely indexed volume or volumes and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -14 z ~ w . � 6 J0 0O cn J H w w 2 u_ j I w z = H0 Z 1— W W 0 O 0 w W L I O w U 0H z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Index the maintenance manual according to the following system: D. The manual divider and tabs shall be laminated mylar plastic and colored as follows: E. Plastic tabs with typewritten card insertions will not be accepted. F. Maintenance information shall include complete lubrication, cleaning, and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable format. Show model and serial number of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, capacity ratings, and actual Toads. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Tab —1.0 Mechanical Systems: Title page identifying project, Owner, Contractor and Engineer with clear plastic protection cover. 2. Tab — 1.1 List of HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection Drawings. 3. Tab — 1.2 Description of Systems: Provide complete descriptions of the operating sequence for each system. Include detailed system description, with individual components described, and description of how components interface with others and to the complete system. 4. Tab —1.3 Operating Division: Provide information on locations of components, how to energize switches and controls, how components interface with other components, operation of controls including operational sequence, operational changes for cooling, heating or changeover, how to accomplish the changeover, complete troubleshooting sequence, and failure and safeguards to indicate if equipment goes off -line. 5. Tab —1.4 Maintenance and Lubrication Division: Provide general maintenance and lubrication schedule for major components and include daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual and yearly checks and tasks. Explain how to execute maintenance tasks required for typical equipment such as bearings, drives, motors and filters. Compile this information for equipment separate from shop drawings. 6. Tab — 1.5 List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide list of equipment suppliers and contractors, including street addresses, web site addresses, fax and toll -free telephone numbers. 7. Tab — Certification (2.0, 2.1, etc.): Include copy of test data on degreasing and flushing of hydronic systems, analysis of system water taken at time system was put into operation, hydrostatic or air tests performed on piping systems, equipment alignment certifications, copy of balancing data for air and water systems, copy of valve and damper identification and pipe color code and inspection approval certificates from authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Tab — Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins (3.0, 3.1, 3.2, etc.): Provide material received in compliance with clause "Submittals and Reviews ". Mechanical Systems - 1.0 — 1.5 Orange Certification 2.0 — 2.4 Green Shop Drawings & Maintenance 3.0 — 3.17 Yellow Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -15 z w re 2 w i U U O N O J = • u- w 0 2 N F .. la z � I- O Z ~ • w 0 O — 0 1- 0 w 1 LL' O w = 0 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Provide the following equipment maintenance information where applicable: <• re 41 2 0 0 . ND J F w g v . w Z �. H0 Z f- w w U � O H = U Z _ w O z 3.17 RECORD DRAWINGS 1. Identifying name and number 2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list) 3. Complete nameplate data 4. Parts list 5. Performance curves and data 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Lubrication charts 8. Manufacturers' recommended operating and maintenance instructions with all non - applicable information deleted 9.' List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements 10. Assembly and disassembly instructions with exploded view Drawings where necessary 11. Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable A. The Contractor shall maintain on a daily basis at the Project site a complete set of Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall initially consist of a set of blueline prints or AutoCAD files of the Contractor's Coordination Drawings. The prints shall be marked or the AutoCAD files electronically updated to show the precise location of all buried or concealed work and equipment, including embedded piping and valves, and all changes and deviations in the Mechanical work from that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without definite written instructions from the Architect or Engineer. The updated Coordination Drawings shall be used to produce the final Record Drawings that shall be delivered to the Owner in AutoCAD electronic format media upon Project completion. B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed. Suitably identify locations of all equipment by at least two (2) dimensions to permanent structures. C. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall mark all in- progress Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: September 30, 2003 Permit issue RECORD DRAWING (3/8 -inch high letters) To be used for recording Field Deviations and Dimensional Data Only (5/16 -inch high letters) Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -16 n., RECORD. DRAWING CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8 -inch high letters) (Printed Name of General Contractor) (5/16 -inch high letters) Date: (Printed Name of Subcontractor) (5/16 -inch high letters) Date: 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor and subcontractors shall certify all Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner adjacent to the above marking with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: E. Prior to final acceptance of the Work of this Division, the Contractor shall submit properly certified Record Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review and shall make changes, corrections, or additions as the Architect and /or Engineer may require to the Record Drawings. After the Architect's and Engineer's review, and any required Contractor revisions, the Record Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner on electronic media in AutoCAD format. The Architect and Engineer do not assume any responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the Record Drawings. 3.18 CERTIFICATION A. Any certifications required by the Specifications, in addition to t hose required fors hop drawings, product data, equipment and other items, are to be so certified in writing by the Owner, a Partner, or a Corporate Officer of the firm required to provide the Certification, or by another person duly authorized to sign binding agreements for and on behalf of the Owner, Partner or Corporation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -17 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.19 FINAL REVIEW A. At a time designated by the Owner, the entire system shall be reviewed for compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Be available at all times during this review. B. Demonstrate to the Owner and /or the Architect's personnel prior to the Final Review that systems and equipment have been properly balanced and adjusted and are in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. After these demonstration tests are satisfactorily completed, but prior to the Final Review, submit a written certification that: 1) attests to the Contract Document compliance for this Project; and 2) certifies that the equipment and materials installed in this project contain no lead, asbestos or PCB. Prior to the final review the Contractor shall confirm the following items regarding the status of key elements of the work. Negative responses to any of the items indicate that the construction is not substantially complete, and the building is not ready for a final review. The Contractor shall confirm the following in writing: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Building air systems (fans, air handling units, etc.) are completely installed, commissioned and operating. 2. Building hydronic systems are completely installed, commissioned, operating and pressure tested. 3. Building management system is installed, commissioned and operating. 4. Building has normal electrical power. 5. The emergency or stand -by power system has been started -up, commissioned, and is standing by. 6. Building systems have been cleaned. 7. Seismic restraints have been inspected as specified. Any required special inspections have been completed. 8. Building systems have been balanced and copy of balance report submitted to the Architect. 9. Building fire and life safety systems have been tested and accepted by the local authorities. Any required special inspections have been completed. 10. All final wiring connections have been rechecked. 11. All base building lighting systems are completely installed and operating. 12. The domestic cold water system has been installed, flushed, disinfected, tested and operating. 13. The domestic hot water systems are completely installed, flushed, disinfected, tested and operating. 14. The sanitary sewer and storm sewer systems are completely installed, operating, connected to the required city, public or private utilities and pressure tested. 15. The fire protection systems are completely installed, operating, connected to the required city, public or private utilities and pressure tested. 16. There is no deviations or non - compliance with the Contract Documents, or provide a detailed account of any and all deviations or non - compliance. 17. All items on field review reports have been responded to in writing and are resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. 18. All outstanding items on submittals and shop drawings have been addressed in writing and are resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. 19. Schedule the final review only after providing written confirmation of all items above. Provide a minimum of ten (10) days notice. Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -18 _J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue C. Operate the entire system properly with all systems balanced and all controls adjusted. D. Certificates and Documents required by the Contract shall be presented to the Architect at least two (2) weeks prior to the Final Review. E. After the Final Review, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the work to comply with the Contract Documents shall be accomplished without delay in order to secure final acceptance of the work. 3.20 EARLY OCCUPANCY A. Be responsible for completing those systems which are necessary to allow partial occupancy of the building even if systems in the unoccupied areas are incomplete. B. Verify and comply with requirements for temporary occupancy with the local Building Department. END OF SECTION Mechanical General Provisions 15010 -19 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15060 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Piping. 2. Fittings. 3. Jointing Materials. 4. Unions and Couplings. 5. Mechanically Coupled Pipe. 6. Heat Tracing. 7. Welding and Jointing Procedures. 8. Cleaning of Piping Systems. 9. Testing of Piping Systems. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15100: Valves. C. Section 15120: Expansion Compensation. D. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. E. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. F. Section 15250: Insulation. G. Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems. H. Section 15410: Drainage Systems. I. Section 15420: Natural Gas Systems. J. Section 15470: Fire Protection Systems. K. Section 15480: Domestic Water Heating Systems. L. Section 15515: Hydronic Systems Specialties. M. Section 15890: Water Treatment. N. Section 15900: Building Management System. September 30, 2003 Piping and Accessories Permit Issue 15060 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Z A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1 1'° Q 1-- Z. B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). rl L C. American Water Works Association (AWWA). v o ca D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). J ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE w O A. Welding materials and labor to conform to ASME Code and applicable state Labor - • ga - Regulations. u- 0 Cy B. Each length of pipe, fitting, trap, fixture or device used in any piping system shall be stamped _ z w or indelibly marked with type, weight, quality and manufacturer's name or mark. ? 1- t— 0 1.05 SUBMITTALS W al A. Submit the following for review: 0 N 1. Schedule indicating the ASTM specification number of the pipe being proposed W H along with its type and grade and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating H U of fittings for each service. u- 2. Submit shop drawings indicating anchoring details, anchor points, guide details, etc. — Z 3. Submit manufacturer's data for strainers and fittings. v 4. Submit dimensioned drawings locating pipe penetrations through walls, slabs and F- Z other structural elements, anchor and guide locations, etc. 0 /` 5. Submit pipe expansion and flexibility calculations. 6. Submit test reports on all systems tested. Tests required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work shall be submitted on appropriate forms to the satisfaction of such authorities. B. Heat Tracing: Equipment sizes, locations, performance data, installation details, wiring diagrams and controls. Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Strainers: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Y -type and Basket: Mueller Steam Specialty, Spirax - Sarco, Bailey Div. Of CMB Industries, Zurn Industries, Victaulic Co. of America. 2. Handwheel Operated Type: HeIlan Fluid Strainer, Eaton, Yale- Towne. 3. Tee Type Grooved End: Victaulic Co. of America. 4. Basket Type: Viking. Piping and Accessories 15060 -2 Service Material Type Weight Condenser water, engine exhaust Steel Black Schedule 40, 0.375 -inch wall for 12 -inch and larger Condenser water runouts Copper Type L Hard Type K (buried) Soft Equipment drains and overflows, condensate drains, atmospheric vents, make -up water Steel Galvanized Schedule 40 Copper Type L Hard Refer to specific Division 15 sections for services not listed above, e.g., domestic water - refer to Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems. • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Welding Fittings: Hackney, Bonney Forge Foundry, (weld -o- lets), Weldbend. C. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings: Victaulic, Grinnell Gruvlok. D. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Unions: Watts, Perfection, Central Plastics, EPCO, Zurn, Hart. 2. Flanges: Watts, Capital, Central Plastics, EPCO. 3. Flange Kits: Calpico, Central Plastics, Advanced Plastics. 4. Couplings: Calpico, Lochinvar. 5. Nipples: Perfection, Sioux Chief, Victaulic. E. Flange Gaskets: John Crane, Garlock, Manville. F. Heat Tracing: Raychem Type XL, Thermon Type FLX, Nelson Electric Type LT. G. Cleaning of Piping Systems: Use chemicals as recommended by the water treatment specialist engaged under Section 15890: Water Treatment. H. Testing of Piping Systems: American Gas and Chemicals "Leak -Tee ", Cosgille Scientific "Sho Gas ", Flamort Chemical "Detect -A- Leak ", Highside Chemicals "Leak Finder Foam ". I. Plastic Pipe Fittings: J -M Ring Tight. 2.02 SCHEDULE OF PIPING SYSTEMS September 30, 2003 Permit issue Piping and Accessories 15060 -3 Service Size Material Type Weight Condenser water Up to 2 -inch Cast iron Threaded 250 pound Wrought copper Solder Standard 2'/2 -inch to 10- inch Steel Welded, mechanical coupling Standard Coil condensate drains All Wrought copper Solder Standard Drains, vent and relief All Steel, galvanized Threaded Standard Diesel engine exhaust pipe All Steel, black Welded Standard Cooling tower filter piping All PVC with ultra violet light resistant paint Solvent weld Schedule 80 Refer to specific Division 15 sections for services not listed above, e.g. domestic water - refer to Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems. • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.03 SCHEDULE OF PIPING FITTINGS 2.04 PRESSURE PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Black Steel, Threaded, 2 inches and smaller.: Schedule 40, ASTM A -120 or A -53: 1. Cast iron banded fittings, ANSI B16.4, 125 pound class. 2. Malleable iron, ANSI B16.3, 150 pound class. B. Black Steel, Welded, 2Yz inches and larger.: Schedule 40, ASTM A -53: 1. Steel welding -neck fittings, ANSI B16.9. 2. Steel welding -neck flanges and flanged fittings, ANSI B16.5, 150 pound. C. Black Steel, Grooved End: ASTM A -120 or A -53: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Rolled groove — Schedule 10 to Schedule 40. 2. Machined groove — Schedule 40. 3. Fusion epoxy factory coating where indicated. 4. Fittings as herein after specified. UNISYS - Tukwila Piping and Accessories 15060 -4 bar MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Copper Tubing, ANSI H23.1: 1. Wrought copper, solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.22, in sizes available with ANSI /AWS = • A5 or ASTM B 32 filler metals per Article 2.4, C. i Z 2. Cast bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.18, only in sizes not available in wrought copper. 6 = O 3. Cast bronze, threaded, ground joint unions, ANSI B16.18, 2 inches and smaller. 4. Cast bronze, flanged unions, ANSI B16.24, 150 pounds per square inch class, 21/2 v) o inches and larger. w Ili 5. Copper tubing flared fittings: bronze castings for flared type joints, ANSI B- 15.26. H 6. Victaulic grooved end copper fittings and couplings conforming to ASTM A- N w 536 /ASTM A-47. w O E. Brass: u. ?. D. 1. Standard weight and red brass pipe, 85. percent copper, 15 percent zinc, ANSI = W H27.1. Z 1 2. 125 pounds per square inch threaded brass fittings, ANSI B16.15. H O Z F- F. Cast Iron, Mechanical - Joints: D w o 1. ANSI A21.6 (AWWA C106), ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104). p N . 2. 150 pounds per square inch class. 0 1- 3. Centrifugally cast, coated, cement lined. = w 4. Mechanical joints, ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111 -53). ►- H LL G. Cast Iron, Flanged, ANSI A21.6 (AWWA C106), ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104), 150 psi class: Cu Z U= 1. Centrifugally cast, coated, cement lined. O 1-_ 2. Cast iron flanges and flanged fittings, ANSI B16.1, 125 pounds per square inch Z class. 3. Flanges integrally cast for long straight pipe runs. 4. Flanges may be threaded in areas requiring many fittings. Where field joints require close dimensional tolerance for make -up length of piping. H. Plastic pipe and fittings shall carry the National Sanitation Foundation Seal: 1. Threaded: Schedule 80. 2. Non - threaded except as noted: Schedule 40. 3. Unplasticized chlorinated polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (CPVC): ASTM D -2846. 4. Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (PVC) bell -end, AWWA C -900. 5. Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (PVC) Schedule 40 and 80: ASTM D -1785. 6. Polyethylene (PE) Schedule 40: ASTM D -2104. 7. Fittings: a. Unplasticized Polyvinyl chloride Type 1 (PVC) pressure type: (1) Socket type: (a) ASTM D -2466, Schedule 40. (b) ASTM D -2467, Schedule 80. (2) Threaded type: ASTM D -2464, Schedule 80. (3) With National Sanitation Foundation Seal. September 30, 2003 Piping and Accessories Permit Issue 15060 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Polyethylene (PE): (1) Insert type: ASTM D -2609. (2) Butt fusion type: ASTM D -3261, ASTM D -2610, Schedule 40. 2.05 JOINING MATERIALS: A. Gaskets shall be rated ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free full faced or flat ring type to suit flange facings. Selected from one of the following materials: 1. General service, water, air, natural gas: 1/16 -inch thick, non - asbestos. Crane Style 333 or approved equal. 2. PVC piping applications: 1/8 -inch thick, Durometer 65 to 75; Goodrich "Koroseal ", Grade 116 polyvinyl chloride or approved equal. 3. Hot water: Red rubber, ASTM D1330, 1/16 -inch thick; Crane Style 555 or approved equal. 4. Gaskets shall be coated with thread lubricant when being installed. B. Pipe threads shall be ANSI B2.1. C. Flange bolts and nuts shall be rated ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel. D. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. 1. 100% lead free, silver bearing solders equivalent to: a. "Silverflo" by Canfield. b. "Stay -Safe Bridget" by J.W. Harris. 2. 95% tin and 5% antimony composition. F. Brazing Filler Metals: 1. General Duty: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys, unless otherwise indicated equivalent to: • a. "Stay- Silv 15" by J.W. Harris. b. "Sil Can 15" by Canfield. 2. Refrigerant Piping: AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated 'equivalent to: a. "Safety- Silv45" by J.W. Harris. b. "Sil Can 45" by Canfield. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.06 UNIONS: A. Steel Piping 2 inches and smaller: ASTM A197 /ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use unions of a pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 pounds square inch, ground joint. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Piping and Accessories 15060 -6 ra 1. 1 inches and smaller: EPCO Model FX or approved equal: a. 250 pounds per square inch WOG. b. Provide standard gaskets for plumbing, high temperature gaskets for heating. c. Female pipe thread by solder end connections, non- asbestos gaskets, having a minimum pressure rating of 250 psig at not Tess than the design operating temperature of the fluid being conveyed. _ d. Clearflow dielectric waterways. 2. 11/2 inches and larger: EPCO Model X or approved equal: a. Brass half- union, ANSI B16.1, 175 pounds per square inch WOG. b. Clearf low dielectric waterways. c. Steel weld neck by copper solder joint end connections, non - asbestos gaskets, having a minimum pressure rating of 125 psig at not less than the design operating temperature of the fluid being conveyed. B. Insulating Flanges: C. Couplings: Provide galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, threaded ends and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225° F. D. Nipples: Provide electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225° F. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Steel Piping 2 inches and larger: ASTM A181 or A105, Grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding neck, or slip -on pattern and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller than 21/2 inches may be used as required for connecting to equipment and piping specialties. Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. Gasket material to be non - asbestos and suitable for pressures and temperatures of the piping system. C. Copper Piping: Nibco No. 633. 2.07 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS: A. Unions: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Dielectric - Flange Kits: Provide companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full -face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 2. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts, 150 or 300 psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. 3. 2 inches and smaller: Walter Vallett Company, V line or approved equal. 4. 21/2 inches and larger: Brass half- union, ANSI B16.1, 175 pounds per square inch WOG, EPCO Model X or approved equal. Piping and Accessories 15060 -7 z • w U 0 w • w J F N w w 0 gQ 1- w z = F- O z F- LU uj O � 92 0 1- w Y.- w z O — F- O 1- z 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.08 MECHANICALLY COUPLED GROOVED END PIPING SYSTEM: A. Provide mechanically coupled grooved end fittings and pipe similar to Victaulic roll grooved products manufactured under ISO 9001 certification. C. Piping Components: 2.09 STRAINERS A. Provide screwed ends up to 2 -inch size, flanged 2Y2 -inch and larger. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue The following services may use mechanical grooved pipe connections within the building in mechanical spaces and above accessible ceilings. Mechanical shafts and chases are not considered accessible. 1. Grooved couplings shall consist of two or more pieces of ductile or malleable iron. Coupling gaskets shall be a synthetic rubber gasket with a central cavity pressure responsive design. Coupling bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel, trackhead conforming to physical properties of ASTM A -183. Use Style 77 couplings for all joints within 10 feet of riser connections. Grooved fittings, couplings, valves and gaskets must be manufactured under ISO 9001. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. 2. Make full size branch connections for piping 2Y2 inches and larger with manufactured grooved end tees. Branch connections for less than full size shall be made with hole cut products. Style 920 or Style 921 branch connections with locating collar engaging into hole or Style 72 outlet coupling used to joint grooved pipe and to create a branch connection. Provide gaskets for branch connection using Grade "E" EPDM Compound with working temperature of minus 30 to 230 degrees F. Gaskets must be ISO 9001 certified. Gaskets shall be provided by the same manufacturer that provides the coupling housing. 3. Provide flanges for all connections to flanged components as follows: a. Style 741 (2 inches or larger) for connection to ANSI class 125 and 150 flanged components. b. Style 743 (2 through 12 inches) for connection to Class 300 flanged components. 4. Provide full -flow cast fittings, manufactured under ISO 9001 with grooves to accept grooved end couplings as recommended by the manufacturer: a. Standard Fittings: Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A -536 (Grade 65- 45 -12), painted with a rust inhibiting modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot - dip galvanized to ASTM A -153 or zinc electroplated to ASTM B-633, as required. b. Standard Steel Elbow Fittings (14 -24 inches): Forged steel conforming to ASTM A -106, Grade B (0.375 inch wall) painted with rust inhibiting modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot -dip galvanized to ASTM A -153. c. Mechanical -Tee: Style 920 fittings with malleable iron housings may be for up to 2 -inch outlet size. Piping and Accessories 15060 -8 z } ' w Q i 0 00 N • UJ J z H CO Lt. w 0 2 gQ c o = d I- al Z = z� W w O � o ff w LL O . W z O = ~ z CD IL C. Strainer screen shall be 316 stainless steel or mane!, reinforced, with free area not less than w 0 J 1. Perforations: P . a. Water: = W (1) Up to 2 -inch: 1/32 inches. F'" _ (2) 21/2-inch to 8 inch: 1/8 inches. ? 1' I— 0 Z I— Y -Type: Ill ul n 0 1. Screwed: Faced cap, straight thread and gasket, Muessco No. 11M or approved 0 to equal 0 H- 2. Flanged: Bolted cover, Muessco No. 751 or No. 752 or. approved equal. = w MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Body: B. Heater to be capable of being crossed over itself without overheating and of being cut to length in the field. C. Cover cable with a cross - linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. Protect cable with a tinned copper braid. Cable shall be approved for use without ground fault protection of the electric branch circuit. E. z 1. Up to 150 pounds per square inch: Y -type; cast iron body; bolted or threaded screen 1 Z retainer tapped for a blowoff valve; threaded body in sizes through 2 -inch and rated 6 at not less than 175 psi WOG; flanged body in sizes over 2 -inch and rated at not less -' D than 125 psi WOG at 240 degrees F. Cast iron body with clamped cover, tapped for 0 a blowoff valve; 125 psig flanged body for 2'/2 -inch and larger. co o 2. Up to 150 pounds square inch, basket type: Cast iron body with clamped cover; to w body tapped for a blowoff valve; 125 psig flanged body for 21/2-inch and larger. -J H 2% times inlet area. Heat tracing cable shall operate on line voltage of 120 volts without the use of transformers. Manufacturer shall provide power connection, end seals, splice and tee kits for a complete Underwriters' Laboratories listed system. Heat tracing cable shall be sized using manufacturer's standard procedure and shall maintain fluid within pipe at 40° F when outside temperature is minus 10° F. September 30, 2003 Piping and Accessories Permit Issue 15060 -9 34 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Provide a Tine voltage thermostat for on -off control of heat tracing cable by sensing ambient temperature at the traced pipe and turn heat tracing on when outside temperature is below Z 35° F and turn the heat tracing off when outside temperature is above 35° F. 1 z W w G. Provide and install manufacturer's recommended glass cloth adhesive tape and "Electrically D Heat - Traced Pipe" labels at maximum of 30 -foot centers. 00 H. Each circuit shall be protected with a 30 milliamp ground -fault protection device. CO = -I H I. Required output rating is in watts per foot at 50° F, based on 1 -inch fiberglass insulation on , N uO metal piping. Minimum Ambient minus 10° F. w g 15 1. 4 -inch pipe or less: 5 watts per foot. ,.-, PART 3 — EXECUTION w Z F- w0 3.01 APPLICATION " A. In addition to applicable portions of the Part 3, refer to the following sections for installation, 2 0 testing and cleaning requirements for specific piping systems. 0 ❑ O N . 1. Section 15400: Domestic Water Systems; Domestic Cold, Hot Water, Hot Water ❑ H Circulating Piping Systems. = W 2. Section 15410: Drainage Systems; Waste, Vent and Storm Water. F H u- 3. Section 15420: Natural Gas Systems; Natural Gas. O 4. Section 15470: Fire Protection Systems. u Z U = r-- 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Except as otherwise indicated protect piping as specified below: a. Allowance for thermal expansion and contraction shall be provided for piping passing through a wall, floor, ceiling or partition by wrapping with an approved tape or pipe insulation, or by installing through an appropriately sized sleeve to allow for thermal movement. b. Protection against abrasion shall be provided where piping comes in contact with other building members by wrapping with an approved tape, pipe insulation or otherwise suitable method of isolation. c. No ashes, cinders, refuse, stones, boulders or other materials that can damage or break the piping or promote corrosive action shall be used in backfilling any trench or excavation in which piping is installed. 2. Install piping at indicated slope free of sags, bends, and kinks. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Support all piping per Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. 3. Brace all piping per Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. 4. Clean off scale, rust and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping. 5. Install (at traps, humidifiers, instruments, etc., and wherever else directed) approved unions, to permit easy connection and disconnection. Piping and Accessories 15060 -10 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 6. Make riser branches and other offsets with 4 -elbow swings including copper risers and branches. 7. After systems are in operation, if coils do not circulate quickly and noiselessly (due to trapped or airbound connections), make all necessary corrections to the work including altering finished construction and refinishing without additional cost. 8. Make piping connections to coils, and equipment with offsets provided with screwed or flanged unions so arranged that the equipment can be serviced or removed without dismantling the piping. Do not screw unions directly to coil header piping connections. 9. Use main sized saddle type branch connections for directly connecting branch lines to main piping lines in steel piping if main is at least one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6 -inch main and if main is at least two pipe sizes larger than branch for 8 -inch and larger main. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. 10. Cap all openings in pipes during progress of the work. 11. Correct Teaks in piping immediately using new materials. Leak - sealing compounds or peening is not permitted. 12. Install drains throughout the systems to permit complete drainage. 13. Not acceptable: mitered ells, bullhead tees, notched tees, bushings .on threaded piping. 14. Do not allow any other subcontractor (electrical, telephone company, BMS, elevator, etc.) to electrically ground to any mechanical system. 15. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Encase underground piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. B. Arrangement: 1. Except for large scale details, piping is diagrammatically indicated. Install generally as shown. 2. Do not scale Drawings for exact location of piping. 3. install piping to best suit field conditions and coordinate with other trades. 4. Piping arrangement: Arrange piping along walls in horizontal groups in an organized, orderly, well executed manner. Each group shall be in one plane if possible. Maintain required slope. 5. Do not sleeve structural members without consent of Architect. 6. Maintain 1 -inch clearance from adjacent work, including insulation, except as noted or approved. 7. Install piping concealed above as high as possible above ceilings or in walls unless otherwise indicated. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights that do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. C. Expansion, Contraction and Bending: 1. Install piping with provisions for expansion and contraction. Provide expansion loops, swing joints, anchors and/or expansion joints where indicated or otherwise required so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. 2. Do not spring or force piping during installation. Piping and Accessories 15060 -11 Service Inclination In Direction of Flow Slope Condenser Water Up 1 inch per 40 feet Condensate Drain Down 1/8 inch per foot MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3. Do not bend piping without use of pipe bending machine. 4. Refer to Section 15120: Expansion Compensation. D. Sloping, Air Venting and Draining: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Slope piping as indicated, true to line and grade, and free of traps and air pockets. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, slope piping in direction of flow as follows: 3. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and Tong -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90° F. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 4. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. 5. Reducers: a. Eccentric: (1) Condenser water piping, top side flat. (2) Between water piping and pump suction, top side flat. b. Concentric: . (1) In vertical piping. (2) May be used as increasers in horizontal piping. 6. Connect condenser water branch piping to bottom of mains. 7. Provide drain valves and hose adapters at all low points in piping. 8. Provide drain valves for float type controllers. 9. Provide manual air vents at all high points in condenser water piping: a. 1 % -inch copper tube. b. Discharge vented water into nearest janitor's sink or floor drain. c. If no fixture is near provide 180° bend to discharge into portable container. Strainers:. UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Install at following locations: a. Ahead of pump suctions. b. Ahead of control and regulating valves. c. Elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. 2. . In water service, up to 250° F maximum: a. Install globe valve for blow -off with full outlet size and same pressure rating as piping system. b. Hose -end fittings are acceptable for water service only. Piping and Accessories 15060 -12 r�H z • z ct w QQ � JU O 0 CO 0 CO W J F-. w O u. ?. D. a � z � I- O w ~ w O • - 0 1- w � - L I O w 0 z 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Piping Specialties: z I i" �w QQ 2 i0 3. Provide continuous lengths of straight runs of piping upstream and downstream from 0 o 0 balancing devices as recommended by manufacturer. No joints, welds, fittings or co w __ taps are permitted in the straight runs. w z 1-- N u. G. Copper: W O 2 1. Crimping of copper tubing prohibited. ga _, 2. Isolate copper pipe and tubing from contact with ferrous materials. u- 3. For branch drops and rises to plumbing fixtures, anchor branch to wall with drop -ear = a ell or tee. F- _, 4. Remove all slivers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reaming and z 1- filing both pipe surfaces. Clean fitting and tube with emery cloth or sandpaper. Z O . Remove residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux, and assemble joint. Use 95- w w 5 solder or brazing to secure joint as specified for the specific piping service. v o O P . o1- I 1. Do not set pipe vises or threading machines on unprotected concrete floors. H o _, 2. Cover floor when making plumbing connections to avoid staining floors with oil, white u, ~O or red lead or other substances. Bear cost of removing any stains. — z . ui 0 - . OH z H. Care of Floors: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Locate thermometers and gauges to permit observation by personnel standing on floor. 2. Provide instrument cocks at pressure gauges. Heat Trace Cable: 1. Provide heat trace cable for piping systems, where indicated on drawings. 2. Install cable and components per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Apply "Electric Traced" labels to heat trace cables covered in insulation. 3.03 SYSTEMS INSTALLATION A. Heat Trace Cable: 1. Cable shall be secured to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape. 2. Install heater cable linearly along the pipe's lower quadrants after pipe has been successfully pressure tested. 3. Wrap extra cable around fittings and valves as required to offset heat loss at these areas. Piping and Accessories 15060 -13 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 PIPE JOINTING A. Fittings: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Provide standard, manufactured fittings in all cases. 2. Prohibited fittings: a. Field fabricated. b. Bushings on pressure piping. c. Clamp -on branch connections. 3. Dielectric separation: a. Provide insulating couplings or dielectric fittings at all connections or metal - to -metal contact of ferrous materials to non - ferrous materials. b. Locations shall be accessible. Coordinate with General Contractor. 4. Branch connections, steel piping: a. Equal to main and to two pipe sizes smaller: weld tees, same weight as piping. b. Three or more pipe sizes smaller than main, but 2 inches and larger: Bonney Weld -o -lets. c. To two inches and smaller: Bonney Weld -o -lets, Thread -o -lets, threaded Nip -o -lets, or steel couplings. . B. Unions: Provide unions or flanges to render all items in systems easily removable, including: 1. Valves. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Both sides of pumps and equipment. 4. Where indicated on the Drawings. C. Pipe Ends: Perform pipe cutting and end preparation to result in clean ends with full inside diameter. Grind and ream ends of pipe and tube and remove burrs to restore full inside diameter. D. Nipples: Provide extra heavy pipe for nipples where unthreaded portion is less than 1% inches long. Close nipples not permitted. E. Threaded Joints: Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dryseal threading is specified). 3. Align threads at point of assembly. 4. Tighten joint with wrench and backup wrench as required. 5. Damaged threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. 6. Sealed with sealant compounds or teflon tape. Hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking shall not be allowed. 7. Sealant compounds: John Crane or Rector Seal: a. General service: John Crane JC-40. b. Refrigerant: John Crane No. 2 Plastic Lead Seal. c. Chemicals and corrosive service piping: John Crane JC -30. Piping and Accessories 15060 -14 I MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Ranged joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and zz parallel as possible. When required, use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts = H gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. :1-- w re G. Mechanical joints: Grooved copper tube and grooved -tube fitting joints shall be assembled 6 m with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts per coupling and fitting manufacturer's standard 0 o written procedure. Grooved ends on copper and copper alloy tube shall be roll- formed only co using the appropriate roll - groove tool to construct a groove meeting the coupling and fitting CO z manufacturer's written specifications. Cut grooving methods shall not be used on copper and CO F. copper alloy tube. w wo H. Flared tube joints: Flared copper tube joints shall be made by the appropriate use of cast g Q copper alloy fittings conforming to ASME B16.26. Flared ends of copper tube shall be of the 45° flare type and shall only be made with a flaring tool designed specifically for that purpose. = d Copper alloy tube shall be reamed to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter prior to H w . forming the flared end. z I- 0 I. Welded Joints: w w U � O N o1.- wW H u- O . w U= O~ September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Where required, peen and wheel -grind welds. 2. Ends of pipe may be burned for welding: a. Grind, bevel and remove scale between welding joint. b. Ragged edges with metal beads, poor alignment or other inferior work shall be rejected. c. Preparation of pipe ends: For wall thickness up to 3/16 -inch, ends shall be finished square or with 37.5° bevel with a 1/16 inch band; for wall thickness 3/16 -inch to % -inch inclusive, ends shall be machined or ground to have a 37.5° bevel with a 1/16 -inch band per latest edition of ASTM B31.1. 3. Perform welding with oxyacetylene or electric arc process. 4. Welding shall be from outside only on pipe configurations. 5. Tack welds shall be of same quality as required in the completed weld and shall be visually examined for defects before applying any complete passes. The ends (starts and stops) of the tacks shall blend in smoothly with the base metal so that subsequent passes can be applied without interruption. 6. Inspection: Visual inspection shall be done by the welder after each pass. 7. Inspection Criteria: Cracks, cold laps, open porosity and tungsten inclusions shall not be allowed. If the above occurs, the weldment shall be removed and rewelded per this specification. Weld beads shall be applied in such a manner that they are smooth into adjacent beads and the base metal with no areas, such as crevices, undercuts, or overlaps, that would weaken the structure or prevent adequate penetration of subsequent weld passes. Undercut of the final pass, which reduces the initial material thickness, shall be repaired by additional welding. 8. Repair: All materials welded using this procedure or which fall within the requirements of this procedure may also be repair welded using this procedure. Piping and Accessories 15060 -15 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Grooved End Joints: K. Soldered and Brazed Joints: Construct soldered joints per ASTM B 828. Construct brazed joints per ANSI /AWS C3.4. L. Plastic Piping, General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pipe Preparation: The pipe ends must be clean from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. The dimensions must be according to the standard roll groove specifications as recommended by the manufacturer. Cut grooves are not acceptable. 2. Pipe Preparation Plain End: Black pipe must be thoroughly cleaned down to bare metal for one -inch from the pipe end to receive mechanically coupled fittings; removed pipe coatings, mill scale, rust and raised weld beads. 3. Tighten all nuts to assure firm metal contact of the coupling pads. 4. Groove width depth and outside diameter must conform to the standard groove specifications in the latest "Field Assembly and Installation Instruction Pocket Handbook ". 5. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gasket with cup grease or graphite paste to facilitate installation. 6. Support branch pipes independently to eliminate stress on coupled joint. 7. Determine that gasket material and lubricant are compatible with service of pipe. 1. Install solder joint to male- thread adapters, or solder -joint to male- thread unions meeting the requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, adjacent to each threaded valve and threaded equipment connection in a copper tube system. 2. Install ASME B16.24 cast copper alloy pipe flanges adjacent to each flanged valve and flanged equipment connection in a copper tube system. 3. Provide brazing for refrigerant piping system using AWS A5.8, BAg1 with 15% silver, 80% copper and 5% phosphorous. 4. Provide solder joint for building heating hot water supply and return systems, chilled water systems, and condenser water piping. 5. Clean surfaces to be jointed of oil, grease, rusts and oxides. a. Remove grease from fittings by washing in solution of 1/16 sodium carbonate and three gallons hot water (except as otherwise specified for refrigerant piping). b. Clean socket of fitting and end of pipe thoroughly with emery cloth to remove rust and oxides. After cleaning and before assembly or heating, apply Handy or Aircosil flux to joint surface and spread evenly. 6. Any joints showing evidence of overheating, cracking, poor penetration, or other defects of fit -up or workmanship shall be replaced as directed by the Architect at the Contractor's expense. 1. Threaded joints only at terminal connections or when specifically approved 2. Threaded joints only on Schedule 80 pipe or with socket - threaded adapters 3. Teflon joint thread tape 4. Approved adapters for connections to metallic piping 5. Heat - Fusion Joints: Make polyolefin pressure - piping joints according to ASTM D 2657. 6. Plastic- Piping Electrofusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage - piping joints according to ASTM F 1290. 7. Fiberglass Piping Joints: Make joints with piping manufacturer's bonded adhesive. Piping and Accessories 15060 -16 ..1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 8. Dissimilar- Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both system materials. 3.05 CHEMICAL CLEANING zz • A. General: w 1. During construction: _I a. Keep openings in piping closed to prevent entrance of foreign matter. 0 b. Clean pipe, fittings and valves internally. co 0 co c. Hammer welds to remove slag and weld beads. w H 2. After completion of pressure testing, chemically clean internally each cooling piping w u_ system. w 0 3. Proceed with chemical cleanout within 4 hours of completion of pressure testing. 2 B. Water Systems: u. J 1. Upon start -up flush and then fill with clean water, and vent as required. H w 2. Install temporary filter bags in hydronic system strainers at all pumps or cooling z 1-- J towers during start-up. Replace as often as necessary until they are relatively clean z 0 after 48 hours of service from last change. w w C. Add chemical cleaning compound: Supplied and supervised by water treatment company. v Refer to Section 15890: Water Treatment. 0 E- w 1. Circulate water of each system at respective design flow rates. H a. Three (3) 8 hour days. u_ ~O b. At end of each 8 hour period remove and clean strainers and blow off low z points. III u c. After third day of pumping, completely drain out entire systems of cleaning H H - solution. 0 d. Clean out cooling tower basins and hose down. Z e. Refill systems immediately (within 2 hours) with clean water and circulate for additional 8 hour period at end of which interval, completely drain systems. f. Immediately (within 2 hours) refill with clear water; circulate, vent air and add chemical treatment. g. . Test for alkalinity: Not more than 200 ppm in excess of alkalinity of water supply. h. Repeat circulation of water of each system at respective minimum design flow rate as described above, until 200 ppm or less, maintained for 10 days. 2. Protect against damage from freeze -up or discharge of water. 3. Provide by -pass valves to avoid flushing water coils or control valves. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Any deviation from the cleaning, installation, testing, and certification requirements herein shall be approved in writing by the Architect. 2. All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and examination by the Architect at any place where fabrication or erection occurs. Piping and Accessories 15060 -17 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. The Architect reserves the right to reject all or any part of the system that does not conform to the requirements herein. Rejected materials or equipment shall be returned at the Contractor's expense for re- cleaning and certification. 4. The Architect reserves the right to remove random samples of the installed work sufficient to establish the quality of materials and workmanship. If such samples indicate materials and workmanship do not meet the contract specification, the Contractor shall be required to replace or re -clean the installed work at no expense to the Owner. The Owner shall reimburse the Contractor on a time and materials basis for such work if the system proves to be installed to specification. 5. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Owner representative. 6. Upon completion of this work, all systems shall be adjusted for use. Should any piece of apparatus or any material or work fail in any of the required pressure tests, it shall be immediately removed any replaced by new materials. The defective portion of the work shall be replaced by new materials. The defective portion of the work shall be replaced by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner at no expense to the Owner. 7. Test gauges shall be installed and test medium source connections shall be made to convenient process connections. After completion of testing, the gauges and source connection shall be removed and the specified process attachments replaced. Any leaks found shall be repaired in the following manner: a. Welded joint — Grind out defect and re -weld. b. Brazed joint — Cut out and re- braze. c. Plastic joint — Remove /re -weld. d. Screw joint — Taken apart and re-do (do not use compound). B. Test Preparation: 1. Clean new piping internally by flushing prior to the application of pressure tests, and before the chemical cleanout procedures specified. Provide temporary strainers at the inlet to the hot water, glycol, chilled water, and condenser water pumps before the start of cleaning procedures. 2. Block off and isolate circulating pumps, condensers and hydronic coils and heating coils during - the preliminary flushing and draining process. 3. Thoroughly flush piping with water under pressure, clear of foreign matter, and then drain before proceeding with pressure testing. Blow down accumulations of grit, dirt and sediment at each strainer and each low point in the piping systems. 4. Leaks and Defects: a. Repair or replace as directed. b. Repair damage caused by test failure without additional cost. c. Retest repaired and /or damaged systems until tests are accomplished successfully. 5. Refer to other sections for tests to plumbing systems and other special piping systems. 6. Notify Architect in writing one week before test. 7. Maintain a log book of all pressure tests showing dates, personnel performing test, test observer and test results. 8. Furnish written report and certification that tests have been satisfactorily completed. September 30, 2003 Piping and Accessories Permit Issue 15060 -18 rya z j - Z w ce -1 c) 0 NO co 1.11 111 X WO �? � I-- W z� zO w 2p O N . 0 I— wW H H 11 0 Z W = O z • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Pressure Tests: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Less than 100 pounds per square inch operating pressure: Test hydrostatically to 150 pounds per square inch. 2. Over 100 psi operating pressure: a. Test hydrostatically to 1 times operating pressure. b. Never exceed test pressure ANSI B16.1 basis. 3. With system valves capped and pressure apparatus disconnected, a 4 hour duration pressure test shall exhibit: a. No pressure change (zero). b. Compensate for temperature change. 4. For air tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one -tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. The piping system exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing shall show no evidence of leaking. 5 Heat Tracing: After initial installation, and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heat tracing to testing using a 2500 volt DC megaohm meter (megger). Minimum insulation resistance shall be between 20 to 1000 megaohms regardless of length. Consult manufacturer if conditions test outside this range; if necessary, new heat tracing and insulation shall be installed to meet test criteria, at no cost to Owner. 6. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following: a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests. END OF SECTION Piping and Accessories 15060 -19 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following valve types: gate; globe; check; ball; butterfly; grooved end; automatic flow control valves; and self contained control valves. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves D. Section 15250: Insulation E. Section 15515: Hydronic Systems Specialties F. Section 15900: Building Management System 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, capacity, performance intended service and installation. B. For each type of valve indicated, include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 15100 VALVES A. Valves and valve construction shall be suitable for the pressure, temperature, and fluid quality of the service in which they are to be used. B. All valves shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI, AWWA, ASTM, MSS -SP -70 & 80 (Manufacturers Standardization Society), standards and specifications. C. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME 831.9 for building services piping valves. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold -water [sanitary waste, and storm drainage] piping valves unless referenced. D. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. F. Minimum test pressure for all valves shall be 1.5 times maximum system working pressure unless noted otherwise. G. Butterfly valves shall be suitable for dead end service and constructed of industrial design quality. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Check Valves: B. Globe Valves: Cincinnati, Crane /Jenkins, Crane /Stockham, Hammond Walworth, Grinnell, Milwaukee, Nibco. C. Ball Valves: Apollo 70- 100/200 series, or equal by Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Stockham. D. Butterfly Valves: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Bronze: Crane, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Powel, Stockham. 2. Gray -Iron Swing Check: Crane, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Powell, Stockham, Victaulic. 3. Spring- Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Metraflex 900 series or equal by Milwaukee, Mueller Steam, Nibco, Val - Matic, Victaulic. 1. Single- or no- flange: Grinnell 8000, or equal by Demco NE, Crane QuarterMaster, Stockham, DeZurik, Nibco, Keystone. 2. Flanged: Keystone Fig. 222, or equal by Grinnell, Mueller, Tyco. 3. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron: Victaulic 300 and 709 series or equal by Grinnell, Nibco. 4. High- Pressure: Crane Flowseal, Jamesebury, Tyco, DeZurik. E. Grooved End Valves: Victaulic, Grinnell, Gustin Bacon. F. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Griswold, Flow Design. G. Balancing Valves: Armstrong Type CBV, B &G Circuit Setter Plus, Taco Accu -Flo, Tour & Andersson STAS /STAD, Victaulic series 786/787. H. Plug Valves: 1. Lubricated: Milliken, Olson, Walworth. 2. Non - Lubricated: DeZurik, Grinnell, Mueller, Tyco. 3. Resilient- Seated, Cast -Iron, Eccentric: Milliken, DeZurik, Olson, Henry. I. Special -Duty Valves: 1. Plastic Valves: American, Enfield, Hayward, Jomar, Nibco, Orion, Sloane, Watts. Valves 15100 -2 •.J z re I LL/ 6 00 N Ill = • w w �_ it) 1=— _ z1 I— 0 Z F- O • N 0H w I— L . 7 v_ O' LU O - O ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Self Contained Control Valves: Bell & Gossett, Danfoss, Taco. K. Natural Gas Valves, 5 -inch and larger: DeZurik, Homestead, Rockwell, Walworth. z Z 2.02 GENERAL e: w A. Provide valves of same manufacturer for the same service. Valve pressure and temperature v 0 ratings shall be not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and co W temperatures. w = J t- B. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly and permanently N p marked on the outside of body. w C. Provide valves suitable for connection to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. u.. j N O D. Valves shall be full pipe size unless noted otherwise. H i ?F E. Provide valves identified for future connection with lockable handles. I— 0 Z I- w ul F. Valve seats shall be rated to 240° F minimum without deterioration. ? o ON 2.03 GLOBE VALVES CI H ww I-r IL' O iii Z U= 0 I- Z A. Provide globe valves for throttling in steam and water systems. 2 -inch and smaller valves shall be inside rising stem, screwed bonnet with screwed ends. C. 21/2-inch and larger valves shall be rising stem, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet and flanged ends. D. Globe valves shall be suitable for repacking under pressure. Packing shall be asbestos free. E. Valve seats shall be nickel alloy or stainless steel. B. 2.04 CHECK VALVES A. Swing Type: Provide for water and low pressure steam services: 2 -inch and smaller with screwed bonnet, screwed end; 21/2-inch and larger with bolted bonnet, flanged end. Valves shall have renewable bronze seat and disc. B. Silent Type: Provide on pumps larger than 2 -inch discharge. Valves shall have cast iron body with bronze or stainless steel trim, spring loaded, and to be of the center guide type, with flanged end. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Provide ball valves for isolation and as drain valves, in water systems up to 200° F and pipe sizes up to 2 inches. B. Provide ball valves of the bronze top -entry body type, having a straight- through full port flow passage. Design to permit disassembly without removing body from line. Provide extended neck where used on insulated piping. C. Provide stainless steel or chrome plated brass /bronze ball; conventional port. D. Construct s eats a nd g land p acking o f glass filled teflon with a threaded packing gland follower; blowout -proof stem rated at 600 psig WOG. E. Provide stem extensions when valves are installed in insulated pipe with vapor barrier so valve handles clear insulation. Lever handle shall be vinyl covered. F. Provide lever for quarter turn operation; lever to indicate open or closed position. G. When used as drain valves, provide with hose thread and brass cap with chain. Cap shall be rated for full system pressure. 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Provide butterfly valves for isolation in water systems up to 200° F and pipe sizes 2'/z -inch and larger. Provide butterfly valves for isolation in steam systems for pipe sizes 4 -inch and larger. B. Butterfly valves shall have ductile or cast iron lug body, Type 416 stainless steel stem with bronze bushings which isolate stem from body and aluminum bronze disc. C. The stem journals shall be a multiple seal design providing for completely independent seals. The stem to disc connection shall be a machined drive mated to a machined socket in the disc. Positive stem retention shall be provided to permit removal of handle or actuator while under full operating pressure. Provide extended neck where used on insulated piping. The valve seats shall be replaceable resilient elastomer bonded to a phenolic back. E. Valves up to size 6 -inch shall be supplied with multi - position handles; size 8 -inch and over shall be supplied with enclosed worm gear operator, F. Valve body shall be full -lug pattern to comply with MSS -SP -67 and be compatible with ANSI pattern flanges of appropriate pressure rating. G. Valve shall provide tight shutoff up to valve rating on dead -end or isolation service without the use of downstream flanges. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.07 GROOVED END VALVES A. Valve model and series numbers listed are based on Victaulic. z B. Butterfly Valves: re 2 —I C.) 00 ccl) 1 1. Series 700 sizes 2 -inch through 6 -inch: All valves shall be of triple seal designed for bubble- tight, shutoff service up to 200 pounds per square inch and vacuum service to 29.9 inches of mercury gauge. Disc seal (EPDM) rated for service up to 230° F. 2. Series 300 sizes 2 -inch through 12 -inch: Grooved end butterfly valve for all services up to 300 pounds per square inch. Valve body of ductile iron with grooved end designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Valves shall be bi- directional and provide bubble -tight shutoff and dead -end service at full rated working pressure. Disc seal (EPDM) rated for service up to 230° F. 3. Series 709 sizes 14 -inch through 24 -inch: Single piece ductile iron cast body, PPS coated on the inside for corrosion resistance: The ductile iron disc rides on stainless steel stems with stainless steel wetted hardware. The EPDM seal, mounted on the offset disc, seals on the PPS seal for bi- directional working pressure of 175 pounds per square inch, 230° F. 4. Provide extended neck where valve is used on insulated piping. C. Ball Valves: 1. Series 721 ball valves size 2 inches and under: designed for 600 pounds per square inch bubble -tight working pressure. 2. Provide extended neck where valve is used on insulated piping. D. Check Valves: 1. Series 715, 716 and 711 sizes 2 -inch through 12 -inch Dual Disc Check Valves: check valves with spring activated, dual disc, non - slamming design. Valves shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical installation and rated for working pressures up to 300 pounds per square inch, 230° F. 2. Series 712 Swing Check Valves sizes 2 -inch through 4 -inch: full port opening and bolted coupling closure access. Valves shall be rated for 300 pounds per square inch working pressure, 230° F, "E "' EPDM Disc Seat ASTM D -2000. 2.08 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. Provide automatic pressure- compensating flow control valves with extended valve body and dual temperature /pressure test ports. Wafer type body is not acceptable for pipe sizes 3 inches and smaller. B. Automatic flow valve shall be manufactured in one piece and to consist of ground joint union, flow control and pressure /temperature test ports. C. Valves shall be factory set to control the flow rate within 5% of the selected rating over an operating pressure differential of at least 10 times the minimum required for full flow conditions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self- contained, open- chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be Type 300 stainless steel. No plated materials are acceptable. The stainless steel cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring - loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysteresis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate for self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. Cartridge must be removable in one piece without disturbing piping connections. F. Cast iron valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet ports suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates, and shall be marked to show direction of flow. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. G. Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag shall be marked with zone identification, valve model number and rated flow in gallons per minute. H. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and consist of a pressure gauge with a 41/2-inch diameter dial, instructions, hoses, and connections; and a carrying case. Automatic flow control valves shall be furnished with fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments specified. 2.09 BALANCING VALVES A. Balancing valve for water service shall be of the calibrated balance valve type with capped pressure /temperature ports, positive shutoff angle globe type, with adjustable memory stop and indicator. B. Valves 2 inches and smaller: Bronze or copper alloy body with calibrated ball, globe or venturi /valve arrangement, integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening. Provide memory stop, drain tapping, threaded or soldered ends, with or without integral unions, P/T or Shraeder type pressure taps with integral check valves and seals and adjustable memory stop. Valves shall be suitable for 200 psig water working pressure at 250° F. C. Provide a pressure differential meter, hoses and carrying case. The kit shall include a six - inch diameter gauge with 270° arc readout. Gauge, with accuracy of plus or minus 1c/0 of full scale, shall be suitable for the differential pressures of the valves supplied for this project, with over -range protection. Include color -coded hoses ten feet minimum in length with brass connectors suitable for connection to the low and high pressure connections on the balance valves. P rovide i nstrument vaiving so meter can be vented and drained. Pressure and temperature rating shall be equal to that of the valves. Provide meter and all accessories in a durable case with carrying handle. The meter is applied directly across the pressure /temperature ports on the calibrated flow control valves. P rovide a c alibrated conversion calculator to convert pressure drop to flow in gallons per minute. Barton 247A, Midwest 809 or equal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -6 2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.10 SELF CONTAINED CONTROL VALVES A. Provide pressure operated non - electric valves with cast bronze or forged brass body. B. Actuator shall operate using an integral temperature sensor and an adjustment- spring- balanced bellows. A stainless steel spindle riding against an 0-ring within the packing gland shall provide throttling service. C. Provide 0-ring packing gland construction replaceable while the system is in operation with standard tools and without any need for isolation valves. D. Valves shall be suitable for 125 psig water working pressure at 240° F. E. Valves shall return to the open position upon failure of temperature control unit. 2.11 VALVE ACTUATORS A. Provide handwheel for valves other than quarter -turn types. B. Provide lever handle for quarter -turn valves -6 -inch and smaller, except plug valves. C. For plug valves with square heads, furnish Owner with one wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PRE - INSTALLATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. B. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. Block check valves in either closed or open position. Maintain valve end protection. C. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew -point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. D. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheeis or stems as lifting or rigging points. E. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Valves 15100 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 0 UNISYS - Tukwila Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. F. Properly align piping before installation of valves in an upright position. __ Q , i-6 3.02 INSTALLATION re 2 A. Install valves so that they are accessible for repacking. Locate valves for easy access and "� 0 O provide separate support where necessary. co w w= B. install valves with stem vertical and handle up wherever possible, never with stem below _.1 � ; horizontal position. O w C. Install 'valves with operating clearance for handle and stem in position to allow full stem movement. u. j D. Install isolation valves on equipment so that valve and piping do not interfere with equipment I - w removal or maintenance. Install unions or flanges on equipment side of valves arranged to ,..:; z H allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. F 0 ,..I zi— w u i E. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. V 0 OE O ww L I O z B. Provide 1 -inch drain valves with threaded ends for hose connections at drain points, at main v c, shutoff valves, low points of piping systems, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. 3.03 VALVE ACCESSORIES A. Provide valves of a design permitting packing while open and under pressure. C. Provide required manual or automatic vent valves at high points of piping systems to facilitate venting of air and to ensure quiet operation. Provide piping from air vents to a drain. D. Provide renewable bronze seat rings and bronze spindles for cast iron body valves. E. Provide an isolation valve in the common supply line and an individual balance valve in the return line from each hydronic coil, and all heat transfer elements. F Provide an isolation valve in each supply riser near main and a balancing valve in each return riser near main. G. Provide pressure /temperature test port fittings at each side of globe valves. H. Use plastic and plastic -lined valves with wetted surfaces made of same material as or compatible with piping and compatible with system liquid. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Valves 15100 -8 ♦:N z _J J } MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila SECTION 15120 EXPANSION COMPENSATION Z PART 1 — GENERAL W rt . 1.01 WORK INCLUDED cn 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: w W J 1. Expansion loops and flexible expansion loops N LL 2. Pipe alignment guides and anchors w O 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS g CO A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions H W Z B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories i— 0 w ~ C. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves ui U 0 D. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints O 0 . 0 H 1.03 SUBMITTALS ai w i— A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated. u" Z B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 0 0~ 1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and Z design of expansion fittings and loops. 2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly. 3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage. C. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion fitting and loop. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Flexible expansion joints shall be AGA certified for use on gas piping. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Expansion Loops: MetraFlex, Hyspan. B. Pipe Alignment Guides: Pipe Shields Series E2000 for insulated pipes; B -Line, Grinnell, Hyspan Series 9500 or MetraFlex for uninsulated pipes. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Expansion Compensation 15120 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Z A. Pipe alignment guides shall be selected for both upward and downward motion. �1i" w 2.03 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOPS re .. JU A. Provide flexible expansion loops of size and material noted on drawings. v p cn B. Flexible loops shall be designed to not impart thrust loads on the anchors. The loop shall —, _i F consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two (2) 90° elbows, and a 180° return. co u- Loops shall be installed in a neutral, pre - compressed, or pre- extended condition as required w O for application. g C. Loops installed hanging down shall have a drain plug. Loops installed straight up may be u� D fitted with an automatic air release valve that purges air from the high point of the loop. Loops z w installed in any position other than hanging down must have the 180° retum supported. ..+1 Z H D. Joints for copper piping and fittings with solder joint end connections: w O w 1. 2 -inch and smaller: bronze hoses and single -braid bronze sheaths with 340 psig at m ci 450° F minimum pressure ratings. 0 N 2. 234 to 4 -inch: stainless -steel hoses and single - braid, stainless -steel sheaths with 225 w H psig at 450° F minimum pressure ratings. i w U E. Joints for steel piping and carbon -steel fittings: LI 0 . Cu co 1. End connections shall be threaded up to 2 -inch and flanged for all other sizes. v 2. Joints, up to 2 -inch: stainless -steel hoses and single- braid, stainless -steel sheaths - - 0 f with 325 psig at 600° F minimum pressure ratings. Z 3. Joints, 2% to 6 -inch: stainless steel hoses and single- braid, stainless steel sheaths with 145 psig at 600° F minimum pressure ratings. 4. Joints up to 2 -inch: stainless steel hoses and single- braid, stainless -steel sheaths with 90 psig at 600° F minimum pressure ratings. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Guides shall be steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two- section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two- section guiding spider for bolting to pipe. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME 818.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert- wedge -type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Expansion Compensation 15120 -2 } j MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 4-w re 3.01 INSTALLATION 6 v 00 A. Provide at least two (2) guides each side of each expansion loop. Size guide cylinder to allow co W the full insulation thickness to be carried through the guide with ample clearance and without %T restricting the free movement of the pipe. Size guide cylinder for sufficient length to contain co 44. the total movement of the spider. Rigidly anchor pipe guide to building structure. w 0 B. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions in sizes matching g 5 , pipe size in which they are installed. Align expansion f ittings t o a void a nd- loading and u- <` torsional stress. = 0, I- w C. Provide expansion loops as shown. ? i 1—O`, Z F— D. Provide minimum of three (3) elbow offsets on branch pipe connections into mains and at w w each riser takeoff to allow piping flexibility and expansion. ? m0 U ,,, E. Install flexible loop within four (4) pipe diameters, both upstream and downstream, from a p �' w w lil Z. tii _ ; O H . Z PART 3 — EXECUTION pipe guide or anchor. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Expansion Compensation Permit Issue 15120 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 15130 METERS, GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Pressure gauges 2. Thermometers 3. Static pressure and filter gauges 4. Pressure /temperature test ports UNISYS - Tukwila 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.. Submit list indicating use, operating range, total range and location. B. Submit manufacturer's data for instrument types, materials, accessories and installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instruments shall be factory calibrated for the temperature and pressure of the systems in which they are installed. B. Pressure gauges shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI Specification B-40 -1 Grade 2A. PART 2 — PRODUCTS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges: Weiss, Trerice, Weskler, Taylor, Ashcroft B. Filter Gauges: Dwyer, Trerice, Orange Research C. Pressure/Temperature Test Ports: Peterson Engineering, Trerice, Weksler Meters, Gauges and Thermometers 15130 -1 z QQ w J U 0 y 0 J W w 0 . 2 g � a = I. W z Z O ff ;' 2 p 0 0- 0 1- W uj u' O .z UN 0 H O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila 2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES -- Z A. Process type in an impact resistant phenolic case, 4%-inch diameter glycerine filled phosphor bronze bourdon tube rated to 600 pounds per square inch. Brushed stainless steel 6 5 movement, '/. -inch brass socket and 1 percent mid -scale accuracy, black figures on white v U O background. Provide brass needle valve, snubber and maximum and minimum pointers. co o Weiss Instrument Model LF4UGYI or equal. w 2.03 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS co w wO A. Provide test ports Y2 inch NPT made of brass with Nordel core. In addition, supply three (3) g 5 kits consisting of 1/4 inch NPT pressure gauge, gauge adapter with 1/8 -inch probe and LL Q protecting shield, bi -metal thermometer range 25° F to 125° F with 5 -inch stem and 1% -inch - diameter dial, bi -metal thermometer range 20° to 240° F with 5 -inch stem and 1%-inch w diameter dial. Each kit to be provided in an impact resistant carrying case. z H O. Z H w w U � O - O H w Lu 1- LL O w Z U - 1. Up to 5 -inch Pipe: 2%z -inch Z I- 2.04 THERMOMETERS A. Adjustable angle dial face, bi -metal thermometer, 5 -inch diameter with 2° F scale division, accurate to ±1 percent of scale range, Type 304 stainless steel case and bezel, shatterproof glass window, silicone filled. Weiss Model SF5VBM or equal. B. Thermometers shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or as specified. Pressure temperature ratings of each thermometer shall be suitable for the system in which it is installed. Thermometers shall have the following insertion lengths: C. Provide Type 304 stainless steel wells for all pipe mounted thermometers. D. Provide extended wells and stem length to accommodate insulation thickness for insulated pipe applications. 2.05 FILTER GAUGES A. Magnehelic Gauge: 4 -inch dial with frictionless magnetic movements. Gauge to operate without use of fluid. Range to be compatible with service. Accuracy ± 2% of scale. Die cast aluminum case with clear plastic face and "0" ring seal. Diaphragm to be silicone rubber with cobalt magnet and sapphire bearings. Dwyer Series 2000 or equal. B. Provide static pressure sensing tips with integral compression fittings and sufficient length of '/. -inch aluminum tubing. C. Provide gauge mounting hardware. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Meters, Gauges and Thermometers 15130 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION ;b- Z ix 2 3.01 INSTALLATION • 6 U 00 A. Provide one pressure gauge per pump. Install piping from pressure gauge to taps before N 0 strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Refer to details on Drawings. J B. For pipes smaller than 2% inches, enlarge pipe for installation of thermometer wells. w O 2 3.02 SCHEDULE g Q m A. Pressure Gauges: 5. 0 . w 1. Pumps ? H 2. Expansion tanks 1 O 3. Other locations as indicated on Drawings w w U C 0- B. D. Filter Gauges: 1. Other locations as indicated on Drawings and in equipment specifications END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Thermometers: 1. Closed circuit fluid cooler inlet and outlet 2. Other locations as indicated on Drawings Pressure/Temperature Test Ports: 1. All automatic control valve's inlet and outlet 2. AC and CRAC unit inlet and outlet 3. Pumps concealed above ceilings 4. Other locations as indicated on Drawings Meters, Gauges and Thermometers 15130 -3 _J J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.03 REFERENCES B. Underwriters Laboratories SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ANCHORS AND SLEEVES z PART 1— GENERAL ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED _i 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: co 0 w J I- 1. Pipe, duct and un- isolated equipment hangers, anchors and supports. w u- 2. Sleeves, escutcheons. w 0 3. Through - penetration firestopping in fire -rated construction and through - penetration smoke - stopping in smoke partitions, including methods and materials applied in g 5 penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses and cod smoke. H W Z 1 I- O Z I- A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions W w B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories U O 5 ❑1- C. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints w w 1— - D. Section 15250: Insulation LL O Iii z E. Section 15800: Ductwork 0 O A. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1. MSS SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP -69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 1. U.L. Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through - penetration firestop devices (XHCR). b. Fire resistance ratings (BXUV). c. Through - penetration firestop systems (XHEZ). d. Fill, void, or cavity material (XHHW). 2. U.L. 1479 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through - Penetration Firestops, including optional air leak test. 3. U.L. Component Listing Test Criteria. 4. Warnock Hersey. C. American Society For Testing And Materials Standards: ASTM E 814 - 88: Standard Test Method For Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15140 -1 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. CIE /DIN Age Testing z = • ~ w A. Include on ductwork and piping shop drawings a layout of masonry and concrete floor and wall sleeve locations for pipes and ducts. Include elevations and sleeve sizes. J v U O B. Submit product data on through - penetration firestop. Submittal data forfirestopping systems CO D w shall include the UL System Numbers listed in the UL Building Materials Directory under at H which the material was tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) for use in a to LL. Through - Penetration Firestop System. Where there is a firestop application that has not been w O tested by UL, obtain from the manufacturer an engineered judgment that the proposed 2 application of the firestop product is suitable. Submit the engineered judgment to the authority * M having jurisdiction. N 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including detailed I i - _ specification of construction and fabrication, manufacturer's installation instructions Z t" and details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and applicable Z 0 ui UL System number or UL classified devices. � 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, v N hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements: p E- a. Manufacturer or manufacturer's representative shall provide qualified w w engineering judgments and drawings relating to non - standard applications H 0 as needed. tL 0 Z C. Submit details of hangers, anchors and supports for each pipe size and service, ductwork u w 0� z 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE and individual pieces of equipment. A. Hangers and supports to be constructed and applied according to the following standards: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Power Piping Code: ANSI B31. 2. Duct Hangers: Provide hangers as required per SMACNA Standards for ductwork pressure classification. 3. NFPA standards for Fire Protection System piping. 4. Firestopping materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating at least equal to that of the construction. 5. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 6. Submit written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint adhesion, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The guarantee period shall be one year from date of substantial completion. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -2 ,_ „_. .._... ,.,_..�._,:� -�1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS Z Z 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS re 2 w A. Pipe Hangers: Grinnell, Fee & Mason, Elcen, Tube -Turn, F &S, Pipe Shields, B -Line Kindorf, V U O Michigan Hanger, Unistrut, or approved equal. Grinnell figure numbers are listed below; N 0 equivalent material by specified manufacturers is acceptable. J = H B. Sleeves: Pipe Shields, Insul, RK Industries N LL wO C. Pipe Wrap Tape: Polycen, Nassua, 3M g J u- Q D. Firestop: Nelson, Dow, 3M, Hilti U) d = w E. Escutcheon Plates: Beaton & Corbin Manufacturing Z = H F- 0 F. Mechanical S leeve S eals: T hunderline L inkseal, A dvance P roducts; C alpico, M etraflex, W I tu Pipeline Seal ? o 2.02 GENERAL 0 H A Provide hangers of heavy construction suitable for the size of pipe to be supported. Materials z 0 shall be of steel, except pipe rolls of wrought or malleable iron. ~ u- 1. Hangers for pipes six - inches or less shall be swivel ring, wrought pipe clamp, or w adjustable wrought clevis type. Grinnell Figure 65 or 260. 0 _ 2. Hangers for pipes 8 inches and above shall have 2 rods and cross -rod with cast iron 0 '— pipe roll complete with adjustable sockets and nuts. Grinnell Figure 260, Grinnell Z Figure 181 for steam piping. 3. Pipe roller for all sizes of multiple horizontal steam piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze: MSS SP -58, Type 44. B. Multiple or trapeze pipe hangers shall be steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods if hanger load calculations are submitted. C. Wall support shall be welded steel bracket with hanger. B -Line 3068 Series, Grinnell 194 Series. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide perforated epoxy painted finish, 16 - 12 -gauge minimum steel channels securely anchored to wall structure with interlocking, split type, bolt- secured, galvanized pipe /tubing clamps. B -Line type S channel with B -2000 series clamps, Grinnell type PS200 H with PS 1200 clamps or equal. 2. When copper piping is being supported, provide flexible elastomeric /thermoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal to B -Line B1999 Vibra Cushion, or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion assemblies, B -Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 Series or equal. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Support vertical piping with carbon steel double bolt riser clamps attached to the pipe. In general, use one clamp for each two floors and one clamp at each floor for copper tubing. Where pipes are in open shafts, provide forged steel bar brackets fixed to wall. Riser clamps shall be copper, plated when used with copper pipe. Grinnell Figure 261 for steel pipe, Figure CT121 for copper pipe. E. Floor support for pipe: 1. Sizes up to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, Iocknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. F. Select hangers and supports in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended maximum loading. Hangers shall have a safety factor of 5 of 1. G. Hangers shall not be disengaged by movement of supported pipe. H. Provide copper plated or felt lined hangers for copper piping or provide 10 -mil pipe wrap tape on pipe at hangers. Tape shall extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond hanger saddle on both ends and be wrapped around pipe a minimum of 2 turns. Install vinyl- coated hangers for all plastic piping. 1. Steel hanger rods shall be threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, black finish. Provide rods complete with adjusting and lock nuts. J. Pipe Support Recommendations for Rigid Grooved Joint Systems: The maximum hanger spacing in the specification to ANSI B31 or NFPA as noted and should be used only in conjunction with Victaulic 07 zero -flex rigid couplings. For flexible systems the hanger, support, spacing and location refer to the pipe support recommendations section in the Victaulic "Field Assembly and Installation Pocket Handbook" or equivalent provided b y Grooved Joint Manufacturer. K. Anchors shall be fabricated using welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure. L. Drainage Piping: Provide MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42 riser clamps for vertical piping, and MSS Type 52, spring hangers at the base of vertical piping. 2.03 SLEEVES A. Construct sleeves for pipes passing through walls (other than foundation walls), floors, partitions, hung or furred ceilings, etc., of minimum 18 -gauge galvanized steel, flanged on each side of wall, partition, hung or furred ceiling, etc. B. Provide standard weight galvanized steel pipe sleeves with welded anchor flanges at foundation walls and reinforced concrete or masonry walls. C. Provide 20 -gauge galvanized sheetmetal sleeves, the full depth of floor or wall, for round ductwork passing through masonry or concrete and /or steel cellular floor construction. Rectangular ductwork shall be provided with framed openings through floor and wall construction. September 30, 2003 Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves Permit Issue 15140 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Provide cast iron or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. Z E. Provide mechanical sleeve seals at exterior wall and tank wall penetrations. Seal shall be of = z the modular sealing element unit type, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space r ui between pipe and sleeve. 6 D JU 0 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include N W type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. W 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. _11_ 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion - resistant coating of length O required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing W element. g Q F. Install escutcheons at exposed piping through floors, ceilings, walls and partitions in finished N areas, within cabinets and millwork, and piping through all fire -rated separations. Provide = w manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an inside diameter to Z closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an outside diameter that O completely covers opening. Escutcheons shall be cast iron or cast brass, deep - pattern z t- escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings, sleeve hubs or firestopping projections. ui O � . � H A. Fire -Rated Construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including = resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of H construction, and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. g_ 0 Z B. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the construction type, penetrant type, b'- annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the Z system be symmetrical for wall applications. Systems or devices must be asbestos -free. Mortar systems must be Warnock Hersey approved. 2.04 PENETRATION FIRESTOP C. Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform this function. D. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. E. Seal all pipe and duct penetrations through fire rated construction with factory built devices or with manufactured fill, void, or cavity materials "Classified" by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use as a Through- Penetration Firestop. All firestop devices and systems shall be approved for such use by the authority having jurisdiction. The firesafing system used shall maintain the fire resistance rating of the building component that is penetrated. F. All materials shall be non - hardening and non - toxic. The firesafing system used shall accommodate expansion and contraction of the floating mechanical piping systems without damaging the firestop or reducing its effectiveness as a smoke barrier or water seal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -5 Pipe Size (Inches) Maximum hanger Spacing (feet) Hanger Rod Diameter (Inches) Steel Cast Iron Copper Plastic Steel/ Cast Iron Copper Plastic PVC Up to 3 /. 7 — 5 3 3/8 3/8 3/8 1 7 — 5 3 3/8 3/8 3/8 1 9 -- 7 3 3/8 3/8 3/8 11/2 & 2 9 5 8 3.5 3/8 3/8 3/8 21/2 12 5 9 3.5 1/2 1/2 1/2 3 12 5 10 3.5 1/2 1/2 1/2 3% — 5 11 — 5/8 1/2 — 4 . 12 5 12 4 5/8 1/2 5/8 5 12 5 13 4 5/8 1/2 5/8 6 12 5 14 4 3/4 5/8 3/4 8 12 5 14 4 7/8 3/4 7/8 PVC: Polyvinyl chloride p astic MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 GROUT A. Grout shall be slow- hardening after application, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. B. Provide ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength from a premixed and factory pre- package. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Deflection of pipes shall not exceed 1/240th (0.416 percent) of span. Support horizontal piping in accordance with the following schedule: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Provide hangers at each change in direction and both sides of valves 4 -inch and larger. Place Z a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow, valve, strainer, or similar piping specialty Q item. Z CL C. Support hangers from concrete inserts or beam clamps. Furnish, locate and set inserts. 6 m Construct inserts of malleable iron or pressed steel with space for rods of all sizes. Install v U O inserts for pipes 3 inches and larger in size with a reinforcing rod 5/8 -inch in diameter run cn 0 through a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose. J = I- D . If piping is required in a space where no inserts have been provided, drill holes in the slab CO w (subject to structural engineer's prior approval) and provide rods and hanger attached to an w O approved fishplate or install double expansion shields connected by a 2 -inch by 2 -inch angle, from which the hanger rod is to be suspended. For pipe size 2 inches and under use single u_ Q shields but the hanger spacing shall be reduced to 5 feet. The carrying capacity and size of u) a each shield shall be calculated on the basis of the spacing indicated above but the minimum z w size shall be 3/8 -inch. Install additional shields of the same size so that the number of Z x hangers is of adequate size to support the loads which they carry. Shields may be used in H O concrete slabs only. Obtain from the expansion shield manufacturer an ICBO Evaluation Z H ` Report for the product and submit to the Architect. w D p E. Regardless of the type of construction (i.e., concrete, concrete - deck -steel or other variations) UO take particular care to support main lines and large and heavy pipes in an approved manner, o 1- including the provision of supplementary steel, if required. Supplementary steel shall be mill- = w rolled sections. Submit shop drawings, indicating support methods, point loadings to the H H building structure and hanger locations for review sufficiently in advance of concrete pouring a- O schedules to permit evaluation, critique and any necessary changes to handling and support Iii Z methods. U F. Hangers shall be directly bolted to steel beams of building construction, where they occur if z approved by the structural engineer. Smaller pipes shall be suspended from crosspieces of pipe or steel angles, which in turn, are securely fastened to building beams or hung from building concrete construction by means of rods and inserts. The intention is to provide supports which shall be amply strong and rigid for the Toad, but which will not weaken or unduly stress the building construction. G. Provide approved roller support, floor stands, wall brackets, etc., for lines running near the floor or near walls, which can be properly supported or• suspended by the floors or walls. Pipelines near walls may also be hung by hangers carried from approved wall brackets at a higher level than the pipe. H. Do not hang piping or ductwork from supports for other services. Install supports shall accommodate free expansion of the piping and duct system. {. Wherever hangers using pipe rolls are used, provide approved steel pipe covering protection saddles, spot - welded to the piping at each hanger location. J. Anchor piping where shown to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and of heavy forged or welded construction of approved design. All anchor designs, when submitted for approval, shall include piping reactions which respective anchors are capable of supporting. Provide indicated expansion loop. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -7 .. ..F�r.;: 5: �:, a:•• A.. Su: ��ia' c: �,,.+:. �� :za:a:sit:r.,::i.�.iia:u::,�: .. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila K. Install anchors where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated, Z install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between i Z expansion loops. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both w expansion and contraction of piping. re j J0 L. Support copper tubing individually by approved hangers not more than 6 feet apart. Hangers 0 0 for u ncovered I ines s hall b e s pecially d esigned f or c opper t ubing a nd o f e xact o utside co w diameter of tubing. Hangers for covered tubing shall be broad straps fitting outside of 11.1 Z covering. co wO M. Hangers for insulated piping shall support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Refer to 2 "Section 15250: Insulation" for insulation protection shields and pipe inserts. g u. Q D N. For piping 4 inches and larger, support the elbows of the piping adjacent to pumps with steel (.12 a supports from the concrete housekeeping pad, or from the inertia base where pump is E— _ mounted to prevent loading heavy weights of piping on pump flanges or casing. Where ? 1— inertia base or spring vibration isolation is not provided, base elbows shall be supported on z 0 concrete pad with 1 -inch neoprene pad. w w 0. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1 %z -inch minimum after piping is erected. Install 0 hangers so that Y2 -inch minimum clearance is maintained between finished covering of pipe p l— and adjacent work. w w U P. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. u ~ O .z Q. Adjust hangers to obtain pipe slope where specified V co R. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use O z standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that similar types are used and all data is submitted for prior review. S. Perform all welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint or other foreign matter and properly align before welding. Use wire brush on welds after welding. Welds shall show uniform section, smoothness of weld metal and freedom from porosity and clinkers. Where necessary to achieve smooth connections, joints shall be dressed smooth T. Factory coat supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres with hot dip galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM Al23, 1.5- ounces /square foot of surface, each side. Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 150, 2.0 mil coating. Field cuts and damaged finishes shall be field- covered with zinc rich paint of comparable thickness to factory coating. Corrosive atmospheres include the following locations: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Exterior locations. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 SLEEVES z A. Provide sleeves for pipe passing through floors, walls or partitions, hung or furred ceilings, of z • sufficient diameter to accommodate pipe covering where such is required. Locate sleeves tu secure in place so that an equal space is around the pipe, after the pipe is .installed. QQ JU B. For exposed pipes, caulk floor sleeves with firestop material watertight and project sleeve 0 0 approximately 2 inches above the finished floor. Finish sleeves with specified flanges flush u) w with the bottom of slab and also with the finished faces of wall. J = H U) u_ C. Provide sleeves with an inside diameter at least ' /cinch greater than outside of pipe served, w 0 including pipe insulation which must be continuous through sleeve. N J D. Where piping penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., pack N D space between piping and sleeve with mineral wool (for depth of sleeve), or firestop material. = C7 i--.w z � E. Do not support pipes by resting clamps on sleeves. Clamps shall extend beyond sleeve and F- O be supported outboard of sleeve in an approved manner. In no case shall sleeves be cut or z g slotted to accommodate pipe clamps. ILI w Dp F. Provide escutcheon plates of the proper size for piping in sleeves passing through floors, 0 cn walls, soffits, furrings, partitions, hung ceilings, etc., throughout the building where exposed. Ct H Exposed escutcheons shall be cast brass chromium plated, bell type, with setscrews of w w sufficient diameter to include any required pipe insulation. Attach escutcheon to building H material, not to pipe .Do not penetrate vapor barriers. LL O Z U 1. Split- casting, deep - pattern type cast -brass type with concealed hinge and set screw N with polished chrome - plated and rough brass finish. H 2. Split- casting, floor -plate type cast brass with concealed hinge and setscrew. z G. Exterior -wall pipe penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Where space for future ducts, pipes and conduits is required, provide sleeves and fill with lightweight concrete or firestop. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Install aboveground steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches. 2. Install aboveground cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Provide firestopping and grouting around pipes and ducts penetrating concrete slabs, concrete walls and masonry walls with cement grout in the sleeved opening extending full depth t hrough w all o r f loor s lab. Provide sheet metal cover over the insulation before applying grout. Around pipes and ducts through fire rated gypsum board construction, pack the annular space between the wall sleeve and the insulation sheet metal cover with noncombustible approved firestop material and finish with 20 -gauge sheet metal collar on ducts and escutcheons on pipe where duct or pipework is exposed. Attach escutcheons to wall. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. D. Environmental requirements: 1. Provide adequate ventilation if using solvent. 2. Provide forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. 3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 5. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. E. Clean surfaces that will be in contact with penetration seal materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance. F. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory or Mortars per Warnock Hersey approval and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. G. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. H. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes, ducts or other items, close unused portions of opening with firestopping material t ested f or t he application. See U.L. Fire Resistance Directory or Warnock Hersey approvals and Section 3.06 of this document. 1. Install smokestopping as specified for firestopping. 3.04 GROUTING A. Mix, install and cure grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -10 I MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila C. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. Z D. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. w E. Place grout around anchors. (9 c.) O u) o • N W END OF SECTION 1-' W O ', Q< u. ( 11 0 w . O . Z O N . O 1-* W W! 4 : 0' i . Z. UN: X ' O Z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves 15140 -11 7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories C. Section 15170: Electric Motors D. Section 15171: Variable Frequency Drives E. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Alternates to scheduled pumps shall operate at or near their point of peak efficiency, allowing for operation at capacities of approximately 25% beyond design capacity. Maximum impeller size shall not exceed 85% of the difference between the maximum and minimum impeller diameter. B. In order to insure stable operation and prevent any possibility of hunting, the pump curve shall be continuously rising from maximum capacity up to the shutoff point. Pumps shall be non - overloading over the full range of the pump curve. C. Furnish each pump and motor with a metal engraved nameplate giving the manufacturer's name, serial number of pump, capacity in gpm and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full Toad current. D. All pumps shall operate without excessive noise or vibration. E. Furnish one spare seal and casing gasket for each pump to Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing submittals shall include pump curves, net positive suction head requirements, and pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating points plotted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15160 PUMPS 1. End suction base mounted pumps 2. Cooling coil condensate pumps 3. Manufacturer's factory representative's supervision of installation and start-up Pumps 15160 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Submit construction details, materials of construction, type of seals, pump base, and z mounting details. 1 Z �w C. Submit motor construction, winding type and efficiencies as specified in Section 15170: D Electric Motors. . v UO U) til PART 2 — PRODUCTS - _I H u) u. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS • 0 A. End Suction: Armstrong, Paco, B &G, Aurora, Taco r . g a co B. Cooling Coil Condensate: Little Giant, March, Beckett, Hartnell H W n.. z H 2.02 END SUCTION BASE MOUNTED PUMPS H O z t— A. Pump shall be of the end suction, vertically split case centrifugal type. 2 0 uj B. The casing shall be close - grained case iron free from blowholes, sand pockets and other 0 ( 2 2 . detrimental defects. Liquid passageways shall be smooth and contoured to permit maximum 0 H efficiency. Casing shall be designed for working pressure as scheduled and shall be x x ill hydrostatically tested at 150% of the maximum working pressure. Suction and discharge i flanges shall be drilled to ANSI standards. LI 0 W C. A steel drip rim base shall be furnished for each pump unit. Pump and drive unit shall be V carefully aligned and bolted in place prior to factory shipment. p I z D. The impeller supplied for the specified conditions shall be a one -piece bronze casting and balanced statically, hydraulically and dynamically. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and securely retained in an axial position by positive mechanical means. E. Pump shaft shall be carbon steel with stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, sized, and designed to limit shaft deflection at the seal to no more than 0.002 inches. Provide mechanically sealed suction pumps with John Crane Type 1 B, elastomer, non - pusher type balanced mechanical seals on pump serving system above 150 pounds per square inch gauge. Provide unbalanced mechanical seals on pumps serving system with 150 pounds per square inch gauge rating. G. Pump bearings shall be heavy -duty conrad type suitable for grease lubrication and contained in moisture and dust -proof bearing housings with a minimum B life of 20,000 hours. H. Provide flanged connections on suction and discharge sizes 2'/z inches and larger, drilled to ANSI standards complete with pressure gauge taps. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Provide pumps suitable for maximum system working pressure with pump seals rated to operate continuously at fluid temperature up to 250° F. Pumps 15160 -2 ., MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Provide bronze replaceable case wear ring. Ring shall be pinned to lock the ring in place. K. Pump shall have EPDM flexible coupling suitable for variable speed drive operation. Motor zz and pump shall be factory aligned and mounted on a steel or cast iron drip rim base. An _ OSHA approved coupling guard shall be provided. - re 2 J U PART 3 — EXECUTION 0 co 0 0 co 3.01 INSTALLATION J H A. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for aligning in the field prior to startup of all W 0 flexibly coupled pumps. Alignment accuracy of plus or minus 0.002 inch shall be verified with 2 a dial indicator. Prior to start-up, the manufacturer shall submit a written report certifying that g the alignment work has been performed and that the pumps are ready for operation. N D = B. Base mounted pumps shall be leveled up on tapered steel wedges in such manner to permit F- _ a minimum of 3 h -inch of grout between the pump base and the top of the concrete base. Z 1- , F— O Z I— C. Pump motor, suction and discharge openings shall be covered during construction period. If W tu w the motor is started, the Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the environment in 2 Cl which the motor is running is clean. UO N 0 1- 3.02 PIPING = W �U A. install all pumps in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Access /service space u- O~ around pumps shall not be less than minimum space recommended by pump manufacturer. iii Z U � B. Support piping adjacent to pump such that weight is not carried on pump casings. ~O H Z C. Decrease from line size at pump connections with long radius reducing elbows or concentric reducers /increasers in the vertical piping, or eccentric reducers /increasers for horizontal piping. Install eccentric reducers /increasers with the top of the pipe level. D. At all pump suctions, install a straight pipe length of 4 times the suction diameter. • E. Seals for all pumps serving condenser water or open cooling towers shall be supplied with a flushing water line piped with Crane Kynar Series 100 abrasive separator and Akron ball type sight flow indicator. F. Provide needle valves and drain connection on pump casings, or at pump inlets to allow for complete drainage of pump casing. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Pumps 15160 -3 1,. .J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Z PART 1 — GENERAL IX 2 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: w w w 0 2 ? . 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS = w A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. z 1— 0 O . B. Section 15171: Variable Frequency Drives. 2 D C. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. O N, 0I— w W U O ui 0 - O ~ A. Submit motors under the sections covering the driven equipment. Z B. Submit motor efficiencies at full load, 75% full load and 50% full Toad. C. Submit certified dimensions, insulation class, NEMA frame size, materials of construction, base details and mounting details. 1.04 STANDARDS 1. Constant speed and two -speed squirrel cage, polyphase electric induction motors for mechanical equipment. 2. Provide electric motors designed and rated for use on Alternating Current Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) where applicable. D. Section 15241: Acoustics. E. Division 16: Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS SECTION 15170 ELECTRIC MOTORS D. Include with the motor driven equipment submittal, the following motor information: manufacturer, horsepower, voltage, phase, hertz, rpm, full Toad efficiency. Include project specific wiring diagrams prepared by the contractor specifically for this work. E. Include manufacturer's instructions in the operating and maintenance manuals for the specific equipment. Include the following information if not previously documented on shop ._I drawings: full Toad power factor, service factor, NEMA design designation, insulation class, and frame type. A. ANSI /IEEE 112: Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. B. ANSI /NEMA MG 1 -1993 — Motors and Generators. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electric Motors 15170 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. ANSI /NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC). 1~ E. Motors intended for variable speed applications shall have U.L. approval for use on "Generic" w pulse width modulated and /or 6 -Step waveforms. Motors requiring one specific manufacturer 6 j of VFD to meet the UL criteria are not acceptable. J U 00 F. Motors shall conform to applicable requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and NEC standards N W and shall be listed by U.L. for the service specified. ILI _ H V) u_ G. Furnish m otors for starting i n accordance with utility requirements and compatible with w 0 starters as specified. 2 J 1.05 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 0 g =d A. All starters, overload relay heater coils, disconnect switches and fuses, relays, wire, conduit, 1— _ pushbuttons, pilot lights, and other devices required for the control of motors or electrical ? !- equipment are provided as specified by Division 16. z 0 0 w al B. Division 16 drawings and specifications show number and horsepower rating of all motors j p furnished by this Contractor. Should any discrepancy in size, horsepower rating, electrical UO characteristics or means of control be found for any motor or other electrical equipment after p contracts are awarded, Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect of such discrepancy. w w Refer to Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. H U u_O C. Furnish project specific wiring diagrams to Division 16 Contractor for all equipment and al z devices furnished under this section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Constant Speed Applications: Toshiba Model E.Q.P., Magnetek E -Plus III, Baldor Super E, Reliance XE Premium, General Electric Energy Saver, Marathon Series E. B. Variable Speed Applications: U.S. Electrical Motors `Inverter Grade " ®, Baldor "Inverter Drive" ® or approved equal. 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide electric motors for driving the mechanical equipment. Motors shall be of proper power, construction and speed to suit the specified manufacturers of equipment. If other manufacturers of equipment are accepted, the proper adjustment of motor speed, torque and power must be included without additional cost. Submit drawings for review before the equipment is purchased. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Electric Motors 15170 -2 U= Of"' z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. One -half horsepower and larger motors shall be rated 460 Volts alternating current (VAC) Q • and suitable for operation on a 480 VAC (plus or minus 5 %t) — 3 -phase — 60 hertz nominal = Z Z electrical supply system. r tii C. Fan powered terminal unit motors shall be rated 277 VAC — single phase -60 hertz and shall v p be provided with integral thermal overload protection. co 0 w 11.1 D. One -third horsepower and smaller motors shall be rated 120 VAC — single phase -60 hertz J I- and shall be provided with integral thermal overload protection. w LL w 2?_. E. Motors s hall b e g enerally c onstant s peed, s quirrel-cage t ype, o pen drip -proof or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) design. Single phase motors shall be high efficiency capacitor u- Q start, induction run, or split phase type as approved for the service. CO C7 I-w F. Motor temperature rise when operating on a variable frequency drive shall not exceed Class Z = H F insulation limits at full load, with 115° C allowable winding hot spot temperature, across its — 0 nameplate speed and torque envelope. Sinewave temperature rise shall be Class F or w w better. U� • G. Motors shall have minimum Class B insulation for continuous full load duty at 40° C and a o H maximum altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Where normal operating temperatures will — exceed the Class B insulation rating, provide Class F insulation. For all motors driven by = U variable frequency drives, provide Class H insulation. u_ O H. Motors shall be of quiet operating type, guaranteed to fulfill the specified requirements iui without producing any objectionable sound exceeding room NC levels as specified. All belt U = connected motors shall have adjustable b ases a nd s et s crews t o m aintain p roper b elt 0 F- tension. Provide proper belt guards, in accordance with OSHA Standards. Z I. Motors and accessories shall be UL listed and comply with NEMA standards. J. Minimum Service Factor: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Constant speed applications: 1.15. 2. Variable speed application: Nameplate Sinewave Service factor shall be 1.15 or greater. K. Coordinate the NEMA type of each motor with the torque and inertia load of the equipment served, and the inrush current characteristics of the motor with the motor starter selection, so that all items furnished constitute a properly related package. Motor shall not operate in the 15% service factor range. L. Motors located in ducted air streams or subject to outside air elements shall be totally enclosed fan cooled; others shall be open drip -proof design. Motors 1 horsepower or larger shall have encapsulated stator windings of the epoxy or silicone type. M. Fan motors shall be capable of accelerating their respective fans from 0 revolutions per minute to design or synchronous revolutions per minute within a maximum of 10 seconds. Electric Motors 15170 -3 �..w...,..:,,s.s�.» ..:.,: �- :.::;5!.•.,v�cw.::�..:.:::::; , �1... �: c< Ur: i:.: f:: :+.�i}:ii.:a'aji:'ri,.:. °1:iat: MOTOR EFFICIENCY BY MOTOR SIZE AND SPEED Horsepower 1200 rpm 1800 rpm 3600 rpm ODP ■ TEFC ODP TEFC ODP TEFC 1 /2 and 3 /4 80.0 80.4 82.1 82.7 79.1 78.5 1 82.5 82.5 85.5 85.5 80.0 85.5 1% 86.5 87.5 86.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 2 87.5 88.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 3 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 91.0 7% 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 89.5 91.7 15 92.4 91.7 93.0 91.7 91.0 91.7 20 92.4 92.4 93.0 92.4 92.4 92.4 25 93.0 92.4 93.6 93.0 93.0 93.0 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila N. All motors 1/2 horsepower and larger, except two -seed motors, specially wound motors and inline pump motors frame size 56 and smaller, shall be high efficiency design with full load efficiencies (in percent) which meet or exceed the values listed below when tested in accordance with NEMA MG: O. Each motor shall be factory wired to a junction box mounted on the motor or on the driven piece of equipment to facilitate single point of field power connection under Division 16. 2.03 VARIABLE SPEED APPLICATIONS A. Motors used with variable frequency drives shall be designed specifically for use on AC inverter power and adjustable speed applications, with the following requirements: 1. Frame materials shall be cast iron, aluminum or rolled steel. 2. Motor insulation shall be Class H and designed to meet the voltage spike limits defined by NEMA MG1, Part 31, 1993. Insulation systems shall utilize 200° C magnet wire with a Pulse Endurance Index greater than 100. Insulation systems utilizing heavy film wire are not acceptable. Complete insulation of the slot, cell and phase groups is required. The system shall be rated for Class F rise or better. 3. Stator core designs shall be of high rigidity with reinforced end turn construction to minimize mechanical fatigue of the winding, and to reduce resonant noise. Varnished materials shall be double dip, double bake using polyester phenolic Class H varnish. Single dip and bake cycles are not acceptable. Electric Motors 15170 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Winding thermal protection, utilizing normally closed contacts, shall be sized to match the maximum safe operating temperature of the insulation system. Contacts Z Q • shall open when winding temperature reaches 155° C. Hazardous location motors T I— shall have winding thermal protection sized as required to meet UL or as auxiliary w devices where not required by UL. 5. Low Toss electrical steel shall be utilized in the stator and rotor core assemblies. -J 0 6. Maximized copper content shall be utilized to achieve high motor efficiency and N 0 thermal transfer. v) w 7. Rotor cores and/or assemblies shall be of a low vibration design that meets one -half -J H of the NEMA MG1 recommended levels for balance. N u- 8. The final motor design shall be evaluated by factory test on inverter power over the W 0 full range of speeds. i5 J B. Variable Torque, Variable Speed Motors: N Z� . 1. Motors shall meet NEMA design "B" performance levels. Design "A" motors are H = a cceptable when higher than normal efficiencies are required. z ~ 2. Motors shall be nameplated for 6 to 60 hertz operation. Hazardous location motors Z 1— may be nameplated 10 to 60 hertz. D C. Constant Torque, Variable Speed Motors: 0 N 0 H 1. Motors intended for constant torque applications shall be TEFC, TENV or TEBC w w" (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled, Totally Enclosed Non - Ventilated or Totally Enclosed H , Blower Cooled) construction. u_ 1- 2. TEFC motors rated for 3:1 constant torque on "GENERIC" inverter power shall meet tii Z NEMA design "B" levels. TENV motors and motors rated for speed ranges greater U co than 3:1 may be rated as NEMA design "A ". TEBC motors shall meet NEMA design H "B" levels. - Z 3. Motors shall meet NEMA criteria for mechanical construction. D. Nameplates: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Performance data for adjustable speed operation shall be stamped on a steel data plate and permanently attached to the motor frame. 2. The minimum amount of adjustable speed nameplate data shall include: a. Application Type — Constant Torque, Variable Torque or Constant Horsepower. b. Maximum approved continuous torque. c. Approved RPM and frequency operating range. d. Typical motor full Toad amps on VFD (inverter) power. Electric Motors 15170 -5 Open Drip -Proof TEFC Horse- power 2 Pole 4 - Pole 6 Pole 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 1 - 85.5 80.0 - 85.5 81.5 1.5 82.5 85.5 84.0 84.0 85.5 85.5 2.0 84.0 85.5 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 3.0 84.0 89.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 90.2 5.0 87.5 89.5 88.5 88.5 90.2 90.2 7.5 87.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.0 10 88.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.7 91.0 15 89.5 92.4 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 20 91.0 93.0 ' 91.7 91.0 93.0 91.7 25 91.7 94.1 93.0 91.7 93.0 92.4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Motors used in variable speed applications shall have the following minimum NEMA nominal efficiency levels nameplated on the motor: F. The above efficiency values represent motor designs rated for 230 VAC or 460 VAC at 1800 rpm nominal speed. Other base speeds and /or voltages may deviate from the above levels, but the NEMA Nominal efficiency must be provided at the time of the bid. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. When motor will be flexible coupled to the driven device, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Using a dial indicator, check angular misalignment of the two shafts; adjust motor position as necessary so that the angular misalignment of the shafts does not exceed 0.002 inches per inch diameter of the coupling hub. Again using the dial indicator, check the shaft for run -out to assure concentricity of the shafts; adjust as necessary so that run -out does not exceed 0.002 inches. Set all direct driven equipment with not more than one -half of the coupling manufacturer's recommended maximum tolerance for parallel and angular variance in alignment. B. Align all belt driven equipment to provide minimum wear on belts and drives, with belts properly tensioned. C. Mount motors on a rigid base designed to accept a motor, using shims if required under each mounting foot to get a secure installation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electric Motors 15170 -6 .. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. When motor will be connected to the driven device by means of a belt drive, mount sheaves = I-- on the appropriate shafts in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Use a straight ;r w edge to check alignment of the sheaves; reposition sheaves as necessary so that the straight 2 edge contacts both sheave faces squarely. After sheaves are aligned, loosen the adjustable 6 v motor base so that the belt(s) can be added and tighten the base so that the belt tension is in c.o 0 accordance with the drive manufacturer's recommendations. Frequently recheck belt tension co o co W. and adjust if necessary during the first day of operation and again after 80 hours of operation. W _ f- CO) IL W A. Coordinate overload heater requirements with motor starter provider. k B. Verify the proper rotation of each three -phase motor as it is being wired or before the motor is = d ' W Z �. C. Lubricate all motors requiring lubrication. Record lubrication material used and the 0 recommended frequency of lubrication. Include this information in the maintenance manuals Z 1— . uj 2 p O -- O 1— WW H H O ' N 0 0 1 '" Z 3.02 START UP September 30, 2003 Permit Issue energized for any reason. END OF SECTION Electric Motors 15170 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15171 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) for mechanical equipment where indicated • A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions B. Section 15160: Pumps C. - Section 15170: Electric Motors D. Section 15771: Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -top Units E. Section 15860: Fans F. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) G. Section 15985: Automatic Control Sequences H. Division 16: Electrical 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data as specified, including outline dimensions, weights, power and control wiring schematics, and equipment schedule. IEEE — Standard 519 compliance calculation and harmonic analysis for this particular installation: 1. Total harmonic voltage d istortion a nd t otal h armonic c urrent d istortion. P rovide calculations, specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5 percent. 2. Input line filters shall be sized and provided as required by the manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE standard 519. All VFDs shall include a minimum of a 3- percent impedance reactor. C. Start -up Service Report and guarantee. A. Provide a 2 -year unconditional parts and labor warrantee on all VFD components. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -1 z Z re w 6 J U O 0 CO O J SQ u- w O u_ I _ z I- t— O . z t u U� O N W u J IO . . Z U - 0 H O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Referenced Standards: z _ I- 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Standard 519 -1992, IEEE w Guide for Harmonic Content and Control. 2. Underwriters laboratories: UL508C. _1 0 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable U o Speed Drives. co w 4. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2. w i C. Qualifications: VFDs and components shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFDs that w 0 require field- supplied external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not acceptable. 2 u_ ? PART 2 -. PRODUCTS = v I-- 11 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS z HO Z H A. Variable Frequency Drives: Toshiba, ABB, Graham /Danfoss. W j D CI 2.02 AC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 0 to oI- A. Provide completely assembled VFD, factory- tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall = w operate from a line overvoltage of 30 percent over nominal. The undervoltage trip level shall i- i= be 35 percent under the nominal voltage as a minimum. u- O Z B. The alternating current variable speed drive system shall include the microprocessor based U variable frequency controller, the required signal logic and control. The electrical drive ~ O l e q u ip m en t specified including the variable frequency controller and its associated Z microprocessor control system, shall be of the same manufacturer. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier to ensure compatibility between drive and AC Motors. C. All equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA. The electrical equipment, as well as the design, construction, and installation thereof, shall comply with all the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and be E.T.L. or U.L. approved. D. The variable frequency drive shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure for drives inside the building, N EMA 12 enclosure for drives in air handling plenum spaces, and NEMA 3R enclosure for drives outside the building. The control circuitry shall be isolated from the power circuitry. E. The manufacturer shall submit calculated line distortion percentages in accordance with IEEE STD -519, based upon the total connected horsepower and source kilovolt- amperes of the utility and emergency power distribution system. Request electrical data for calculation from the Division 16 contractor. F. The speed controller shall respond to a speed adjusting potentiometer from the VFD sequence panel when in the manual mode or shall respond to a milliamp or voltage electrical signal when operating in the automatic mode. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. The cabinet shall require front access only. The unit shall be suitable for operation in ambient air at 0 to 40 degrees C and up to 95 percent RH at rated load and switching frequency. Z H. The variable frequency controller shall convert 230 or 480 volt (plus or minus 30 percent) 3- = F- • 4- Z phase, 60 hertz (plus or minus 3 percent) utility supplied or standby generator supplied power to variable frequency, variable voltage three -phase AC power for induction motor speed 6 D control. The controller shall be selected to have sufficient capacity to provide stepless speed U O control of the specified horsepower motors throughout a continuous speed range under a N 0 variable torque load not exceeding the motor full -load rating. w w J 1- 2.03 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER N u- w 0 A. The controller shall be of the pulse width modulated (PWM) type and shall have three g sections including a minimum 3 percent line impedance reactor as follows: u. Q 1. AC -DC section (a 3- phase, full wave, half diode bridge or transistor bridge). = W 2. Capacitor section. F- Z 3. 3 -phase output module. z !- H Z I- B. The controller shall be capable of performing the following functions: 11J j D 1. Adjustable linear timed acceleration and deceleration. 8 P- 2. Pius or minus 0.5 hertz frequency stability. 0 1- 3. 10:1 controlled speed range. = w 4. Manual /automatic operation. 1- �. 5. Other functions as described. II O ti! Z C. Include the following protective devices and /or features: U O~ September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Regulator with self- contained test module or panel. 2. Contactor shall be vacuum break design to carry specified current (OLT) on continual basis without damage (normal condition), designed to break specified locked rotor ampere current repeatedly without damage (abnormal operation). Entire VFD assembly shall be rated for minimum 60,000 amperes interrupting capacity root mean square symmetrical (AIC RMS). 3. AC overload protection to continuously monitor peak current and shut down the DC module gate signals if the instantaneous electrical trip motor current exceeds 180 percent of the controller full load current rating. 4. Monitor lamps or LED read -out on VFD front panel to provide immediate indication of controller functions. 5. Current limit. 6. Adjustable volts /hertz. 7. Adjustable offset voltage increases starting and accelerating torque capability. 8. All output phase modules shall turn off instantly when a high DC bus occurs or when the current exceeds 150 percent of rated current. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -3 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila The following controller adjustments shall be contained on one regulator card of microprocessor control board: Z _ 1. 1. Minimum hertz/maximum hertz. at 2. Acceleration rate (Adjustable 0 to 125 seconds). 3. Deceleration rate (Adjustable 0 to 125 seconds). U O 4. Volts /hertz. co p 5. Offset voltage. w = J i_ E. Provide a test panel or module to permit on -line monitoring and troubleshooting of the drive. 0 u.. Monitor the following regulator signals: w 0 1. Internal power supplies. J 2. Ramp generator output. N D 3. DC bus voltage. H W HO Z I- A. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating Toad (forward or reverse) and accelerate W LLI or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start). The D p VFD shall also be capable of DC injection braking at start to stop a reverse spinning motor 0 SP - prior to ramp. o 1- w W B. The VFD shall be equipped with an automatic extended control power Toss ride - through ( P. circuit, which shall utilize the inertia of the load to keep the drive powered. Typical control u- O power loss ride- through for a fan load shall be 2 seconds minimum. Iii Z C. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110 percent of its normal duty current rating for 1 I 1 minute every 10 minutes. The minimum full -load ampere rating shall meet or exceed the Z values in the NEC /UL table 430 -150 for 4 -pole motors. 2.04 SAFETY CONTROLS & PROTECTIVE COMPONENTS D. The VFD shall have an integral 3 percent impedance line reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. E. The VFD shall be capable of sensing a Toss of load (broken belt / broken coupling) and signal the loss of load condition. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and /or over the serial communications bus. Relay output shall include programmable time delays that allow for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false underload condition. F. Provide surge reduction filter for electrical circuit lengths in excess of 200 feet. G. The following shall be provided: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Motor thermal overload relays at the output for motor protection. 2. Enclosure door interlocked disconnect switch. 3. All coils for relays and contactor shall be suppressed. 4. Automatic Restart: Controller shall automatically attempt to restart five (5) times after a fault. After five (5) restarts, a manual start of the drive equipment is required. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -4 �. , , `:.tii...ii..:i;:.;::..._..t �.. :.�.1y:,�:.:y:3�i:,u`.;_,N.,.e: _. t. �;:' r:- t...._...,...._: a, u.•e..������;.�,.�.:.;in.:.�,v� z:.�;;...,4.. . :.sa.. �.. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 5. The following contacts shall be wired to terminal boards of users control and z indication: a. Motor running speed. = z b. Drive faults. w c. Remote stop- starting D 6. A complete factory wired and .tested bypass system consisting of an output v 0 contactor and bypass contactor. Overload protection and single phase protection N p shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes. Include door mounted manual by- u) w pass switch with bypass contactor and t, indicator light. Electronic bypasses are not -J H acceptable. N u. w0 H. Drive faults shall consist of the following: 2 J 1. Motor thermal overload. w 3 2. AC input voltage dips to 60 percent or Tess of its nominal value. z w 3. Drive output current exceeds 110 percent of controller full load rating. ~ Z 4. A fault condition in any of the 3 output power module phases. 0 z 1- 2.05 ADJUSTMENTS AND CONTROLS D 0 A. All VFDs shall have the following operator adjustable components: 0 D 0 1- 1. Two (2) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from = w operating the Toad continuously at an unstable speed. 1- 2. PID Setpoint controller shall be standard in the drive, allowing a pressure or flow u- 0 signal to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the Z ill closed loop control. The VFD shall have 250 milliamp of 24 volts DC auxiliary power 0 and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID setpoint I= 1 shall be adjustable from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications z bus. 3. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept a current or voltage signal. 4. One (1) programmable analog output. 5. Two (2) programmable digital Form -C relay outputs. The relays shall include programmable on and off delay times. Default settings shall be for run and not faulted (fail safe). 6. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds. 7. Two independently adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps. B. All VFDs shall have the same interface, including backlit LCD digital display and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The keypad shall be used for local control, for setting all parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus. The keypad shall be removable /lockable to the cabinet, capable of remote mounting, and shall have it's own non - volatile memory. T he k eypad s hall a How for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs. 2. The keypad shall include Hand - Off-Auto selections. When in "Hand ", the VFD shall be started and the speed will be controlled from the up /down arrows. When in "Off', the VFD shall be stopped. When in "Auto ", the VFD shall start via an external contact closure and the VFD speed shall be controlled via an external speed reference. Manual pilot devices are not acceptable. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -5 Z � MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Display shall indicate drive frequency, output voltage or output current. Provide an indication of the activation of the drive protection features and /or status in plain English without the use of code abbreviations as follows: Z a. Overcurrent. H Z b. Overvoltage. . w c. Current Limit. 6 d. Decel Voltage Limit. � 0 e. Ground Fault. v o f. Overtemperature. co w g. ! Protection. -I _ h. Improper Input Voltage Selected. co u_ i. Minimum /Maximum Speed Improperly Adjusted. uj 0 C. Serial Communications: _ ga u.¢ co 1. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocol shall be = d Modbus. Optional protocols that must be available are: Johnson Controls N2 bus, F' w x Profibus and DeviceNet. ? 2. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to, run -stop Z 0 0 control; speed set adjustment, proportional /integral /derivative PID control w w adjustments, current limit, and accel /decel time adjustments. A minimum of 15 field parameters shall be capable of being monitored. The DDC system shall be able to U N monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or bypass mode (if bypass is 0 . specified) over serial communications. The drive shall have the capability of allowing w w the DDC to monitor feedback as a minimum, with 5 additional: H U a. Process variable feedback. tL 0 W Z U= O f" z Output speed /frequency. Current (in amps). Percent torque. Power (kw). Kilowatt hours (resettable). Operating hours (resettable). Relay outputs. Diagnostic warning and fault information. j. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible. 3. The VFD shall allow the DDC to control the drive's digital and analog outputs via the serial interface. The serial communications interface shall allow for DO (relay) control and AO (analog) control. This control shall be independent of any VFD function. The outputs can be used for modulating chilled water valves via the analog output, actuate a damper etc. In addition, all drive digital and analog inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system. b. c. d. e. f. 9. h. D. The following shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer and shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Fused VFD -only disconnect (service switch). Fast acting semi - conductor fuses exclusive to the VFD to allow the VFD to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection, maintaining bypass capability. Bypass designs which do not have fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted. Three contactor bypass schemes are not acceptable. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -6 1 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit issue 2. The following operators shall be provided: a. Bypass Hand - Off -Auto. b. Drive mode selector. c. Bypass mode selector. d. Bypass fault reset. 3. The following indicating lights (LED type) shall be provided. A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided. a. Power -on. b. External fault. c. Drive mode selected. d. Bypass mode selected. e. Drive running. f. Bypass running. g. Drive fault. h. Bypass fault Bypass H -O -A mode. j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected. 4. The following relay (form C) outputs from the bypass shall be provided: a. System started. b. System running. c. Bypass override enabled. d. Drive fault. e. Bypass fault- motor overload or underload due to broken belt. f. Bypass H -O -A position. 5. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24 volt or 115 volt AC (selectable). The bypass shall incorporate internally sourced 24 volt power supply and not require an external control power source. 6. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip — provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks s hall r emain f ully f unctional w hether t he s ystem is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. 7. The VFD shall include a "run permissive circuit" that will provide a normally open contact any time a run command is provided (local or remote start command in VFD or bypass mode). The VFD system (VFD or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it receives a dry contact closure from a damper or valve end - switch). When the VFD system safety interlock (fire detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc) opens, the motor shall coast to a stop and the run permissive contact shall open, closing the damper or valve. 8. Class 20 electronic motor overload protection shall be included. 9. There shall be an internal switch to select manual or automatic bypass. 10. There shall be an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide Toss of load indication when in the bypass mode. Variable Frequency Drives 15171 -7 z 2 O 0 N o • w to H • w w 0 = w Z � F- 0 Z F— U • � O N � w w. H H . O w Z U O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 1— 3.01 INSTALLATION re 2 6 A. The contractor shall install the drive and power wiring shall be completed in accordance with 0 O the recommendations of the manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual. co o Ill Start -up Service: Provide certified factory- authorized start-up service for purposes of N installation inspection, initial drive equipment setting, energization and adjustment. Start -up w 0 shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start -up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner. g s- C Coordinate with equipment supplier to ensure compatibility between variable frequency drive N d and the motor supplied with the equipment. z w•-. Division 16 shall mount and wire the drives in locations as shown on the Drawings. f- O z 1- ; E. Maintain code required electrical clearance around all VFD cabinets. o r .. V END OF SECTION o H ' w tu . H - L W Z O ~ . September 30, 2003 Variable Frequency Drives Permit Issue 15171 -8 f MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15190 SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Valve and automatic damper- identification. 2. Equipment identification. 3. Piping and ductwork identification. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15150: Access Doors in General Construction & Color Coded Identification Buttons. C. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. Valve and damper identification chart. 2. Lists of pipe and equipment to be labeled. 3. Color chart. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation, including samples of valve and damper tags, equipment identification and piping identification. C. Maintenance Manuals: Provide valve and damper tag schedules for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A13.1 — 1981: Scheme for identification of piping systems. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping identification shall comply with ANSI Standard A13.1. September 30, 2003 Systems Identification Permit Issue 15190 -1 w 6 -J C.) O 0 (/) W = CO u- wO 2 u. VI d Hw I- O zi- , w 2 O. ON O I - WW 1- c) u O w O 1- Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 - PRODUCTS Z A. Brady /Seton. Ce B. Stranco. CO 0 2.02 VALVE AND DAMPER IDENTIFICATION J = H A. All tagged components shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1 -1981. w w w0 B. For valves and automatic dampers, use metal tags 2 -inch minimum diameter, fabricated of g u_ N d 1. Attach tags with jack chain s -hook or split ring of same materials. H w 2. For stamped tags, use 'A-inch high letters. •••• Z = I- 0 Z I- w A. Labels shall have 2 -inch high letters and integral directional flow arrows. Smaller letters may v o . be used only when space does not permit 2 -inch high lettering. 0 H w w H1- U. O w Z 0— 0 A. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently screw Z fastened to the equipment. Nameplates shall be black surface, white core laminated bakelite with engraved letters. Plates shall be a minimum of 3 -inch long by 1 -inch wide with white letters 3/8 -inch high. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.03 LABELS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue brass, stainless steel or aluminum. 1. For piping up to 5 -inch diameter, use pre- formed snap -on markers Seton "Setmark" or equal. 2. Pressure sensitive tapes are unacceptable. 2.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION B. - Identification of Automatic Controls shall be as per Section 15900, Automatic Temperature Control, specification. C. Terminal equipment installed in ceiling spaces such as variable volume terminals, fan coil units, heat pumps, etc. shall have identifying number stenciled on bottom of unit so that it is visible from below. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 VALVE AND AUTOMATIC DAMPER IDENTIFICATION A. Do not identify valves where the use is obvious, such as equipment isolation valves. B. Provide schedules of all valves showing number, size, type and service of each valve. Provide separate list for each separate hydronic system. Incorporate in maintenance manuals. Systems Identification 15190 -2 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Tag automatic dampers with identical letters or numbers as shown on Drawings. 3.02 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment with identical letter and/or number as used on Drawings. Where space is available use full name of equipment. Attach nameplates in a permanent manner in a location that will be clearly visible after• installation is complete. B. Controls identification shall be specified in Section 15900, Building Management Systems. Also identify controls not included in Section 15900 such as float switches, alarms, remote pushbutton switches with '% -inch high lettering and laminated plastic plates screwed or changed to equipment. 3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Piping identification shall be in conformance with the ANSI A13.1 -1981. B. Identify piping systems with color coded bands, sharply contrasting with background. Locate bands near strategic points, such as valves, items of equipment, changes in direction, wall penetrations, capped stub out for future connection and every 40 feet of straight runs. If necessary, paint a strip background of black or white to obtain contrast. C. Apply bands where they can be easily read. Provide bands with backgrounds of different colors. D. Drain piping serving mechanical equipment items for which the drain discharge is not visible from the equipment shall be marked near the point of discharge indicating the item of equipment served. 3.04 ACCESS IDENTIFICATION A. Identify service, damper, duct access door, piping and equipment behind all architectural access doors. B. Removable ceiling tile shall be marked by small color markings at corner of tile or door in accordance with the following color assignments: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue HVAC - Blue Fire Protection - Red Plumbing - Silver END OF SECTION Systems Identification 15190 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS z ~ w re 2 _ U U O N O A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: J = I- 1. Vibration isolation elements for a II Division 15 piping, ductwork and all rotating N u- equipment. w O PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 2. Flexible connectors. 4a 3. Seismic restraints for all equipment, piping and ductwork. u- Q 4. Supervision and inspection of installed vibration isolators, seismic restraints and to d associated hardware. z � I- O z I— A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. w U B. Section 15241: Acoustics. O 0 w w O I z . 1. Catalog cuts and data sheets on specific vibration isolators to be utilized showing U _, compliance with the specifications. 0 I- 2. An itemized list showing the items of equipment and piping to be isolated, the isolator z .. type and model number selected, isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specific drawings. 3. Written approval of the base design shall be obtained from the equipment manufacturer. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Manufacturer's Data: B. Shop Drawings: Concrete reinforcing details and templates for all foundations, bases, supports, inertia blocks, hanger bolts, etc.; s upport frame d etails, p ipe s upport d etails; vibration isolation mountings for equipment and piping including equipment weight, center of gravity and operating speed, location and installation details. Include in the vibration isolation equipment submittal drawing the following information based on equipment submittals released for construction. 1. Isolation mounting deflections. 2. Spring diameters, compressed spring heights at rated load and solid spring heights where steel spring isolation mountings are used. 3. Equipment operating speed. 4. Seismic restraint calculations stamped by a Washington State licensed structural engineer. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila • 5. Number and location of seismic restraints and anchors for each piece of equipment including but not limited to bolted or welded connections between cooling tower and support beams, vertical pipe risers, bolt sizing and embedment depth, and seismic cable strength and diameters. 6. Specific details of restraints including anchor bolts for mounting and maximum loading at each location. 7. Drawings showing methods of suspension, support guides for piping and ductwork. 8. Drawings showing methods of isolation of pipes and ductwork piercing walls and floor slabs. 9. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and performance. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1. 1997 Washington State Building Code. 2. SMACNA — Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association: Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems. 1.05 MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide control of excessive noise and vibration in the buildings due to the operation of machinery or equipment, and /or due to interconnected piping, ductwork or conduit. Install vibration isolation units and associated hangers and bases under the direct supervision of the vibration isolation manufacturer's engineer. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. 3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection. 4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and performance. 5. Purchased and /or fabricated equipment must be designed to safely accept external lateral forces based on 1.00W where W is the equipment weight. Equipment must also accept an external vertical force equal to one third of lateral force calculated. Substitution of "Internally Isolated" mechanical equipment in lieu of the specified isolation of this Section must be accompanied by submittal details, seismic calculations and be approved for individual equipment units. Refer to Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions for Alternates. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -2 w k rte•, �: _ �:..: . MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1. Vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or calibration markings so that after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided according to the design. 2. Isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Furnish load versus deflection curves that are linear over a deflection range of not less than 50% greater than the design deflection. 3. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall be not less than 0.9 nor greater than 1.5. 4. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per isolator and isolator stiffness shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than plus or minus 10 percent. 5. All neoprene mountings and components shall be oil resistant and have: a. Shore durometer hardness of 40 to 65, after minimum aging of 20 days or corresponding oven - aging. b. Minimum tensile strength of 2000 pounds per square inch. c. Minimum elongation of 300 %. d. Maximum compression set at 25 %. B. Adhere to SMACNA Guidelines for Restraints of Mechanical Systems. C. Design seismic restraints in accordance with Local Code Seismic Zone. D. Mounting systems or components shall not be resonant with any of the supported equipment forcing frequencies. E. Isolators shall be selected on the basis of the static and dynamic loads actually supported. Dynamic loads include those due to: wind, fluid flow, thrust and rotational inertia. Select each isolator independently for proper load distribution on each piece of equipment, duct and pipe support, or base. F. Vibration Isolation Hardware shall not be concealed until reviewed by the Architect. G. Verify specified clearances, plumb installation of hanger rods and lack of 'interference — no contact permitted with gypsum board, framing, ceiling wires, Tight fixtures, conduit, ducts and piping. H. Verify proper vibration isolator loading and deflection. I. Vibration isolation field inspection engineer shall provide a punchlist report for the Architects review. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Isolation: Mason Industries (MII), Vibration Mountings & Control (VMC), Amber - Booth (AB), Vibration Eliminator (VEC), Vibrex Vibration Control Systems (WC). B. Seismic Piping and Duct Supports: Kin -Line, Super Strut, Mason Industries, and per SMACNA. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All vibration isolation devices shall be the products of a single manufacturer. B. Where exposed to the atmosphere all steel shall be hot dipped galvanized; hardware shall be cadmium plated; springs shall be neoprene coated. 2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Refer to these specifications and drawings for vibration isolator types to be used. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Type A spring isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Minimum diameter of 0.8 of the loaded operating height and horizontal spring stiffness 1.1 times rated vertical spring stiffness. b. Reserve deflection, from loaded to solid height, of 50% of rated deflection with leveling device. c. Minimum ' /cinch thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside, unless designated otherwise. Neoprene elements shall be as specified. d. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel. e. Tapped holes in base plate for bolting isolator to base, housekeeping pad or structural support. Type SLFH MII Type OSK VEC Type RMS VMC 2 Type B spring isolators shall be same as Type A, except: a. Provide built -in resilient vertical limit stops. b. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment. c. Capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment erection. Type SLR Series 100 MII Type KW VEC Type RMSL -EQ VMC 3. Type C spring hanger rod isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Spring element seated on a steel washer in series with a deflected neoprene element as specified. b. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene washer. Ensure no metal to metal contact. -c. Minimum '/z -inch clearance between retainer box and spring hanger rod. Provide neoprene grommet. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS A. Neoprene Type FC -1: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue d. Where operating weight differs from installed weight provide built -in adjustable limit stops to prevent equipment rising when_weight is removed. Stops shall not be in contact during normal operation. e. Maximum 30° allowable rod misalignment from centerline axis. Type 30N MII Type SNCR VEC Type RSH -30A VMC 4. Type D elastomer isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Bolt holes for bolting to equipment base. b. Bottom steel plates for bolting to sub -base as required. c. Molded unit type neoprene element as specified. Type BR Mil Type 368 SD VEC Type FUD -EQ VMC 5. Type E elastomer hanger rod isolators shall incorporate the following: a. Molded unit type neoprene element as specified. b. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting. c. Clearance between mounting hanger rod and steel retainer box. Provide neoprene grommet. Type HD Mil Type CD VEC Type HSS VMC 6. Type F pad type elastomer mountings shall incorporate the following: a. % -inch minimum thickness neoprene elements as specified. Verify thickness will not degrade or derate the isolator performance. b. Sized for 50 pounds per square inch maximum loading. Provide suitable bearing plate to distribute load. c. Ribbed or waffled design. d. 1/6-inch deflection per pad thickness. e. 1/16 -inch galvanized steel plate between multiple layers of pad thickness. Type Super W (SW) MII Type 200N VEC Type !so-Cube VMC 7. Type G pad type elastomer mountings shall incorporate the following: a. Laminated canvas duck material and neoprene as specified. b. Maximum loading 1000 pounds per square inch. Provide suitable bearing plate to distribute Toad. c. Minimum thickness, 2 -inch. Type HL MII Type Fabriflex VMC 8. Type H: Roof spring curb with tube -steel structural members and laterally stable springs. Tate, Thy -Curb or approved equal. 1. Manufactured of nylon tire cord and neoprene molded and cured with hydraulic presses. 2. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Elbow shall have single sphere forming the corner of joint. 4. Rated 150 pounds per square inch at 220° F. 5. Size 6 -inch and larger and all flexible piping connectors at pumps, and chillers shall employ control cables with end fittings isolated from anchor plates by means of 1/2- bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings. Type Safeflex SFDEJ, SFDCR Mil B. Flexible Stainless Hose, Type FC -2: 2.05 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Braided flexible metal hose. 2. 2 -inch pipe size and smaller with male nipple fittings. 3. 2'/z -inch and larger pipe size with fixed steel flanges. 4. Suitable for operating pressure and temperature with 4:1 minimum safety factor. 5. Length as specified on Drawings. Type BSS Mil Type MFP VMC 1. Provide restraints capable of safely accepting forces specified in Part 1 of this section, without failure, to maintain equipment, piping, duct, variable volume terminal units, fan coil units, fan powered terminal units in a captive position. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise. Submit calculations by Structural Engineer licensed and registered in the State of the project to verify seismic restraint and sway cable capacities. a. Spring Seismic Restraint, Type I: Comply with general characteristics of spring isolators. Incorporate snubbing restraint in all directions. Restraint shall be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection. Type SSLR MII b. Seismic Restraint, Type II: Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8 -inch thick pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made o f p late, s tructural members or square metal tubing in a welded assembly incorporating resilient pads. Type Z -1225 MII c. Seismic Restraint, Type III: Cable type with approved end fastening devices (minimum of two per end) to equipment and structure. Cable to comply with Federal Specification MIL -W -83420 military grade 7x19 galvanized steel. Type SSB MII 2. Provide diagonal thrust restraint consisting of Type C Hanger with the same deflection as specified for the spring mountings. Design the spring element so it can be preset for thrust and adjusted to allow for a maximum of 'A -inch movement at start and stop. Attach diagonal restraints at the centerline of thrust restraint. Type WV MII Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 - EXECUTION q1H 3.01 GENERAL w A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions. v v 0 Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping resulting in y a piping stresses or misalignment. J = H B. Isolate mechanical equipment from the building structure by means of vibration isolators as co u- specified and scheduled on the Drawings. w O g i5 C. Piping and ductwork to be isolated must pass freely through walls and floors without rigid u.. a connections. Maintain 3 h -inch to 1 -inch concentric clearance around outside surfaces of fA m piping or ductwork at penetration points. Pack this clearance space tightly with fiberglass, m w - and caulk airtight after installation of piping or ductwork, or provide resilient firestopping as Z X required. Provide supports 6 to 8 inches from walls or partitions on both sides of F- O penetrations. w 1-- w 7 D. Do not make rigid connections between equipment and building structure that degrades or D 0 _.. s circuits the vibration isolation system specified herein. p En- 0 )- E. Provide flexible connectors to all other connections to vibration isolated equipment such as w w i condensate drains, make -up water, fuel, compressed air and other piping as allowed by 1- codes and /or local authorities. I id F. Loop electrical circuit connections to isolated equipment to allow free motion. Include at least U one slack 90° bend. p F- z _) _J G. Bring to the Architect's attention prior to installation any conflicts with other trades which will result in unavoidable rigid contact with equipment or piping as described herein, due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation will be at the Contractor's expense. H. Support vertical piping Toads, including water strainers, and valves between pump base elbow supports and the suction and discharge header piping by means of the pump base spring isolators without stress or strain to the pump housing. I. Provide a flanged steel pipe spool piece between suction and discharge valves and pumps to permit future installation of flexible connectors. J. Level vibration isolated equipment under rated design operating conditions while maintaining the isolation criteria. Isolators shall be plumb and aligned during operation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 EQUIPMENT ISOLATORS Z _� A. Mount vibration isolating devices and related inertia blocks on concrete housekeeping pads. w B. Support each fan and motor assembly on a single structural steel frame. Provide flexible ' -i 0 duct connections at inlet and discharge of heat pumps, air conditioning units, fan coils and N p fans, including plug fan assemblies inside factory assembled air handling units unless u) w prohibited by codes or local authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Section 15800, Ductwork. w J H ,x� u) u. C. If the equipment to be mounted is not furnished with integral structural frames and external w 0 mounting Tugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), install approved structural sub -base in 2 the field which will support the equipment to be hung and to which will be attached the ". J hangers. N d D. Provide cooling tower with sufficient bolted connections to structural steel support beam. Z H Verify cooling tower mounting flange thickness and bolt hole diameters with seismic calculations. ' ' z O - ww E. Additional Requirements: AA, v p O N 1. Provide brackets to accommodate the isolator. Manufacturer shall indicate bolt hole 0 H sizes and locations, welds required, and specify the vertical position and size of the w w bracket. H 2. Maintain a minimum operating balance between the equipment frame on rigid steel L -E O base frame and the concrete housekeeping pad of 1 inch. Maintain a minimum w Z operating clearance between concrete inertia and base and concrete housekeeping H D. pad or floor of 2 inches. O 1-- 3. Temporarily s upport t he structural steel or concrete inertia base with blocks or z shims, as appropriate, prior to the installation of the equipment or isolators. ,,. 4. Install the isolators without raising the equipment and frame assembly. 5. Adjust the isolators after the entire installation is complete and under full operational load so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolator. When all isolators are properly adjusted, the blocks or shims will be barely free and shall be removed. , 6. Verify that all insulated isolator and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all directions. Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to flexibly limit equipment start -up lateral motion to ' /cinch. 7. Prior to start-up, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment and under inertia bases. Verify that there are no isolation short circuits in the base or - isolators. 3.03 PIPING ISOLATORS A. Isolate piping as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Piping in machine rooms, fan rooms, or boiler rooms. 2. Piping where exposed on roof. 3. Piping within 50 feet (or 100 diameters if greater) from connected rotating equipment and pressure reducing stations. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Install isolators with the isolator hanger box attached to, or hung as close as possible to, the structure. Provide outrigger supports where required for clearance to equipment and to Z maintain minimum clearance of equipment to structure above. C. Suspend isolators from substantial structural members, not from slab unless specifically ~ w re permitted. Attachments to fireproofed structural members shall be re- fireproofed as required. 6 = JU D. Align hanger rods to clear the hanger box. Replace bent rods. u) p u) ILI E. Suspend horizontal pipe 2 inches and smaller by means of Type E isolator with a minimum of -J H 0.25 inch deflation. Support pipe larger than 2 inches by isolator Type C with a minimum 1 Yr N 0 inch static deflection. F. Domestic water lines and HVAC piping in and above sound -rated construction shall be 1 Q isolated using Acousto -Plumb or Trisolator series 100 or 500 resilient attachments as u) d appropriate. 1 W Z G. Sanitary drain or storm drain piping passing above rooms or spaces requiring F- ry P�p� 9 P 9 P q 9 NC -35 or less shall be attached and supported using Trisolator series 100 isolator for horizontal piping and Z O in vertical piping Type "D" underneath the supporting clamps. Provide Type "F" resilient pads W under pipe elbows supported from the floor. U p O N H. All other individual pipes in sound -rated construction shall be isolated with Trisolator resilient o H attachments. For pipes Tess than 3 inches in diameter with resilient thermal insulation = w between the pipe and pipe support, resilient attachments are not required. F- 11 O I. All other grouped pipes shall be isolated by using Type "E" vibration isolators supporting tii Z trapeze hangers and selected to provide a static deflection of 0.2 inches. Grouped floor- V N supported pipes shall be isolated using Type "D" isolators selected to p rovide a s tatic ~ O H deflection of 0.15 inches. Z J. Mount floor supported horizontal pipe at slab using Type A isolator with a minimum static deflection of 1 -inch or same deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever is greater. K. Utilize two neoprene Type F or G isolator elements for pipe sway braces to accommodate tension and compression forces. L. Mount all isolators between building structure and supplementary steel. M. Suspend isolators from rigid and massive support points. N. Supplementary steel to be sized for a maximum deflection of 0.08 inches at center of span. O. Support water piping riser floor supports with Type F isolators (2 layers) or Type G pad depending on piping Toads and support point space conditions within shafts. P. Vibration isolation components shall not be used to correct misaligned sections of pipe. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Q. Pipe riser guides, anchors and supports shall be located so that there will be no direct metal _... . contact of the piping with the building structure. 1. Weld steel guide bars to the pipe at a maximum spacing of 60 feet. The outside diameter of the opposing guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the pipe riser clamp in accordance with standard field construction practice. Each end of the pipe riser clamp shall be rigidly attached to an all- directional pipe anchor isolation mounting, which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the supplementary steel framing within the shaft. 2. The all- directional pipe anchor and guide isolation mountings shall consist of a telescoping arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by, a minimum of '/ inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad. Provide vertical restraints by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 pounds per square inch. 3. Mountings to be Type ADA — Mason Industries, or approved equal. 4. Construct piping guides for insulated piping with a 10 -gauge metal sleeve around the piping. Provide the thermal insulation requirements for the piping between the piping and the sleeve. The metal sleeve outside diameter shall be smaller than the pipe riser clamp inside diameter in accordance with standard field construction practice. The pipe riser clamp shall be rigidly attached to an all directional pipe anchor which shaii be rigidly attached to the steel framing within the shaft. 5. Weld the pipe riser clamp at anchor points directly to the pipe and to pairs of all directional pipe anchor mountings, which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing in the pipe shaft. 6. The pipe anchor mountings shall be capable of safely supporting loads, expansion, and thrusts developed by the installed piping. R. Provide flexible piping connections for connections to rotating equipment as specified and where shown on the Drawings. S. Provide flexible piping connections and four -elbow offsets for all piping that crosses building seismic or expansion joints unless more stringent flexible all- directional joints have been specified elsewhere. 3.04 INSPECTION A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices specified herein, the local representative of the isolation manufacturer, the manufacturer's engineer shall inspect the completed system and submit a report to the Architect indicating the adequacy of the installation and listing any corrective action required. B. Replace any component found to be visibly deflected with more substantial components. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -10 Equipment Deflection (Inches) Isolator Type Restraint Type Closed Circuit Cooling Towers 1/6 "F" - I Packaged air - handling units: internal isolation 2.0 "A" I Suspended fans, air conditioning units 2.0 "A" III Base - mounted pumps 1/6 "F" - Other small pumps and motors 0.35 "D" III Wall mounted fans and exhaust fans less than 1 /4 hp 0.25 "D" - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS C. Unless otherwise scheduled on the Drawings provide the following Equipment Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila END OF SECTION Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 15240 -11 j j _.J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Sound - lining. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. • Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. C. Section 15800: Ductwork. D. Section 15940: Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: September 30, 2003 Permit issue SECTION 15241 ACOUSTICS 1. Sound - lining. 2. Certification that sound - lining meets erosion test method described in U.L. Publication No. 181 erosion test method. 3. Non - hardening caulking. 4. Submit certified test data from approved laboratory for pressure drop and insertion Toss ratings: a. For square or rectangular attenuators: test results for a 24 -inch x 24 -inch cross - section attenuator. b. Certification data for pressure drop and net insertion Toss: based on tests of same attenuator. c. Attenuators and tests: subject to inspection upon request. 1. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Standard 36 — Determination of Ventilating Equipment Sound Power. 2. ANSI — American National Standards Institute Standard S1.13 — Precision Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Broadband Noise Sources in Reverberant Rooms. 3. AMCA — Air Movement and Control Association Standard 300 — Determination of Sound Power Levels. Acoustics 15241 -1 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 4. ARI — American Refrigeration Institute Standards: a. Standard 575 — Measurement of Sound in Equipment Rooms. b. Standard 885 — Sound Transmission Losses. 5. ISO — International Standards Organization 5135 and 3741 — Acoustics. 6. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials Standard E477 — Test for Duct Lining and Silencer Performance. Standard C423 — Method for Measuring Sound Absorption. Standard E90 — Method for Measuring Sound Transmission Loss. 7. Refer to Section 15940: Air Inlets and Outlet for additional reference standards. A. Acoustical Criteria: 1. Noise levels, generated by equipment and ductwork shall be attenuated to permit attainment of sound pressure levels in all 8 octave bands in occupied spaces that conform to the following Noise Criteria (NC) curves: a. Lobbies, corridors, toilets, spaces within 10 feet of equipment room walls : NC-40. b. Conference Rooms: (1) Small: NC -35 (2) Large: NC -30 c. Executive Offices: NC -30 d. All other spaces: NC -35 2. In addition to complying with the standard full octave band sound pressure levels based on maximum NC design requirements, acoustical performance of fans, air handling units, chillers, boilers, cooling towers, pumps, VFD's, terminal devices, valves, pressure regulating devices, humidifiers, etc., when operating under design conditions shall not create any objectional pure tones. A pure -tone is defined as a peak sound pressure level which, when measured in 1/3 octave band frequencies, is higher by more than 5 decibels than adjacent 1/3 octave band frequencies. 3. Comply with specified NC levels for radiated noise from terminal and pressure regulating devices and /or duct breakout noise by having full octave band sound pressure levels of at least two contiguous frequencies tangent to the NC spectrum. A single frequency controlled NC environment is considered obtrusive and unacceptable. B. Mechanical Performance: 1. Air distribution system equipment; terminal device noise: a. Maximum permissible sound -power levels in octave bands of airborne transmissions through the combination of grilles, registers, diffusers, and terminal units, or related pressure reducing devices, when operated in installed condition shall be as follows: Acoustics 15241 -2 Octave Band Frequency (Hertz) Octave Band Number Maximum PWL in Decibels Referred to 10 " Watts NC -30 NC -35 NC-40 NC-45 NC -50 63 1 58 62 66 68 70 125 2 52 56 60 63 66 250 3 45 49 54 58 62 500 4 41 46 51 56 61 1000 5 38 43 48 53 58 2000 6 37 42 47 52 57 4000 7 36 41 46 51 56 8000 8 37 42 47 52 57 Octave Band Frequency (Hertz) Octave Band Number Maximum PWL in Decibels Referred to 10 Watts NC -35 NC-40 NC-45 NC -50 63 1 72 76 79 82 125 2 70 74 77 80 250 3 61 65 68 71 500 4 60 64 68 72 1000 5 57 62 68 72 2000 6 56 60 65 70 4000 7 66 70 75 80 8000 8 65 70 75 80 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Pressure reducing terminal devices above ceiling; radiated noise: a. Maximum permissible radiated sound -power levels in octave bands when operated in installed condition over occupied spaces, is as follows: 3. Provide sound- lining in accordance with U.L. 181. 4. Provide all materials in accordance with NFPA, U.L. and state and local codes. Acoustics 15241 -3 z z � w o: J 00 U J wO g Q w = W z Z O 0. Uca 0 w W w Z OH z Lining Thickness (inches) /Density (pounds per cubic foot) Octave Band Center Frequency (Hertz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 1 / 1.5 to 3.0 .15 .50 .60 .80 .90 .90 1.5/1.5to3.0 .20 .70 .80 .95 .95 .95 2 / 1.5 to 3.0 .30 .90 .95 .95 .95 .95 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sound - Linings: Certainteed, Schuller, Owens - Corning Fiberglas. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Duct Lining: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Low pressure fiber glass duct liner downstream of terminal units shall be finished with an acrylic polymer facing, stenciled NFPA 90. 2. Medium pressure duct liner shall be finished with perforated 24 -gauge galvanized sheet metal, 28% minimum open area or foil facing equal to Owens Corning 703 FRK. 3. Thickness: a. In ductwork: minimum 1 inch matte faced unless otherwise noted on drawings or specification. b. In plenums and in supply, return or exhaust duct downstream of local floor equipment rooms: minimum 2 inches, 3 pound per cubic foot density, semi- rigid. c. For sound - lining where used in lieu of external thermal insulation minimum thickness shall conform to requirements as specified in Section 15250: Insulation. d. Linear Diffuser Supply Plenums: Minimum 1 /z inch, 1 pound per cubic foot density. 4. Minimum density, ducts: 11/2 pounds per cubic foot. 5. Minimum density, plenums: 3 pounds per cubic foot. 6. Flamespread shall be maximum 25 fuel contributed and smoke developed shall be maximum 50. 7. Suitable for duct velocity of 4000 feet per minute. Meet erosion test method described in U.L. Publication No. 181. 8. Dynamic Loss Coefficient: Maximum 1.2. 9. K Factor: Maximum 0.25 Btu /inch -hour - degree Fahrenheit - square foot. 10. Minimum sound - absorption coefficients (ASTM C423 Mounting #6 or F -25) for sound - absorbing duct lining material when tested while mounted to 24 -gauge sheet metal. Acoustics 15241 -4 z Z 2 J 00 co u) w J I--. w ga v) ° z IIw Z � z O ul 0 co 0- 0 1- LL) W O Z w F Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 11. Acceptable product for lining circular duct: Casco Circliner. 12. Where acoustically Tined circular or oval duct is required, lining shall be positively retained in place. Acceptable manufacturers of pre - fabricated duct include United Sheet Metal and Sheet Metal Products. B. Fire Retardant Adhesive and Sealer: Benjamin Foster 85 -20 or approved equal. v UO U) C C. Non - Hardening Caulking shall be guaranteed to be permanently elastic. Tremco Polybutene or approved equal. H w 0 PART 3 — EXECUTION g u_ Q 3.01 INSTALLATION to d =w A. In order to obtain satisfactory acoustical performance of the terminal devices, complete the Z = H following: E .. p z I- 1. Proper duct connections at inlet to the terminals. 2 j Lu 2. Proper air - balancing. D 0 3. Avoid excessive dampering right at the terminals. p N. 0H w w I- LL O .. w z O 1 O z B. Sound- Linings: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Adhere with 6 -inch wide strips of adhesive at 12 -inch centers at all joints in lining. 2. In addition, secure with grip nail standard stamp on or weld pins and 2 -inch diameter integral or press -on head washers on maximum 16 inch centers and in compliance with SMACNA standards. 3. Coat all edges with sealer. 4. Provide continuous sheetmetal edge protection nosings at entering and leaving edges of lined duct sections and all joints. 5. Dimensions of lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions after lining has been installed. 6. Extent of Ductwork Sound - Linings. a. Heating, Ventilating and Air - Conditioning Systems: (1) Supply: Ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms and not less than 25 feet downstream of fan room and mechanical equipment room walls and floor slabs. (2) Exhaust, Relief and Return: Ductwork in fan rooms and mechanical equipment rooms but not less than 25 feet from fan or 15 feet from room walls. b. Outside air supply systems a minimum distance of 25 feet downstream of fan. Stop lining 10 feet from outside air intake. c. Ventilation Systems: As indicated on Drawings. d. Exhaust Systems: As indicated on Drawings. - e. Ductwork downstream of fan coil units, heat pumps, AC units or terminal units: Minimum 10 feet. Branch takeoffs to diffusers are not allowed in this 10 -foot lined section. f. Minimum lengths shown. Provide additional acoustical treatment as required to meet maximum permissible sound -power levels scheduled for equipment. Acoustics 15241 -5 z Z w MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 7. Sound -Lined Plenums: As specified and indicated on Drawings. 8. All transfer and jumper ducts. 9. All linear diffuser supply plenums. C. Soundproofing of Construction: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Required for packing between ductwork and the following construction: a. Fan room and mechanical equipment room walls. b. Floors, except in shafts. c. Sound barrier ceilings. d. Sound rated walls: Any interior wall or partition with intemal insulation. Refer to Architectural drawings. 2. Soundproofing: ., a. Fill openings with fiber glass blanket or board for full depth of penetration. b. Caulk each side of opening with non - hardening, non -aging caulking compound. Schuller "Duxseal" or approved equal. 3. Soundproofing may be deleted when firestopping material is provided. END OF SECTION Acoustics 15241 -6 :�a MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 - GENERAL Z 1.01 WORK INCLUDED a H A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: a D J U 1. Duct insulation, jackets. U 0 2. Piping insulation, jackets. W w 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS u) LL w O A. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions 2 J B. Section 15060 Piping and Accessories D C. Section 15241 Acoustics 1._ _ z 1.- H O Z I- ww A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service D 0 . or equipment scheduled, locations, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 0 co 0 H B. Submit details of sheet metal boxes for pieces of insulated equipment. Refer to 2.06.A.7. = w i- 1 9 - - O . Z A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions during storage and installation of all 0 products required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. p z 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS B. Protect insulation from contact with water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS B. Adhesives and Sealers: Ductmate, Benjamin Foster (BF); Insul - Coustic (IC); 3M, Childers. C. Jackets: Childers; Johns Manville. D. Premolded fitting, valve, strainer and equipment insulation: Extol of Ohio Inc. 2.02 • GENERAL A. Conform to application schedule for type and thickness of insulation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15250 INSULATION A. Insulation with /without integral Jackets: Owens - Corning Fiberglass; Johns Manville; Armstrong; Certain -Teed; PPG. Insulation 15250 -1 Service Temperature Range (degrees F) Material Runouts Insulation Thickness (inches) for Pipe Sizes: 1 and less 11/4 to 2 21/2 to 4 5 to 6 Domestic hot water, domestic recirculated hot water 105 to 140 Glass fiber '/z 1 1 11/2 11/2 Condenser water, domestic cold water 40 to 60 Glass fiber 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 Condensate drains above ceilings All Glass fiber -- %2 1/2 'A - Plumbing vents within 10 feet of atmosphere All Glass fiber -- — • 1 1 1 Heat traced piping All Glass fiber — 1 11/2 1% 1% 1' Hot water and drain piping below lavatories All Glass fiber -- 1% 11/4 1% -- * Runouts are up to 2 inch piping directly connected to a fan coil, heat pump, AC unit, unit heater, terminal unit or radiation and not exceeding 12 feet in length. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Insulation, jacket, facing and adhesives s hall b e n oncombustible m aterial m eeting C ode requirements and fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E -84, National Fire Protection Association 225, and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50. rt w E. Jacket Puncture Resistance shall be 50 units (Beach) or greater. 0 0 N to uJ J = Q w w 0 u . = F.w Z = 1- 0 Z w • w O 5 O H w t u 1- ▪ O O - O ~ z C. Adhesive, mastic or Insulating material shall not contain asbestos. D. Vapor jacket permeance shall be 0.02 perms or less. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION A. Materials: 2.04 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES A. Insulation Schedules: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Glass Fiber: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible. a. Installed 'K' Value: 0.23 BTU -inch per hr- square foot - degree F at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: White kraft paper, vinyl coated, embossed and reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 2. Field Applied Jackets. a. PVC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, gloss white. Connections shall be pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. b. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 ounce per square yard, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. c. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 -inch thick sheet, stippled finish, with longitudinal slip joints and 2 -inch laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. Insulation 15250 -2 Service Material Thickness (inches) , Exhaust ducts within 10 feet of exterior openings Flexible glass fiber 1 'Supply ducts (cooling and heating systems) Flexible glass fiber 1 1/2 Return ducts Flexible glass fiber 11/2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Use factory premolded fittings of the same materials and thickness as the pipe insulation for fittings, flanges and valves. 2. Where premolded insulation fittings are not manufactured, insulate fittings, flanges, strainers and valves with mitered segments of the same density as the adjoining pipe covering. Vaporseal for cold (below dew point) applications u sing a dhesive with open weave glass mesh lay in while wet. Provide a final coat of adhesive. Overlap glass mesh and outer coat adjacent covering by a minimum of 2 inches. Adhesive shall be IC 501 or BF 30 -35. 3. Provide insulation for the removable covers and flanges of pipe strainers on cold services with built -up sections o f g lass f iber p ipe c overing, a rranged t o f acilitate servicing of the strainer. Complete applications with vaporseals as specified above. Vapor barriers shall be sealed and continuous through guides, hangers, walls, sleeves, etc. Adhesives and coatings shall be as noted herein. 4. Insulate fittings, flanges, valves, etc. for services where calcium silicate insulation is specified with mineral wool cement of equal thickness to the pipe insulation. Apply evenly and finish with glass cloth. 2.05 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Materials: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Flexible Glass Fiber: ASTM C553, formaldehyde -free flexible blanket. a. Installed `K' Value: 0.27 BTU -inch per hr- square foot - degree F at 75 degrees F. b. Density: 0.75 pounds per cubic foot. c. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire- resistant kraft paper, secured with 2 -inch wide UL listed pressure sensitive tape and outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. Maximum vapor barrier perm rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms. 2. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 ounces per square yard, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant adhesive. B. Ductwork Insulation Schedule: C. Wherever external duct insulation is specified and internal acoustic treatment of equivalent insulating effect is also required by the Drawings or Specifications for the same location, the external insulation may be omitted. Insulation 15250 -3 c.. w...r. «Yn. Lal,�n:li.Y....v:A'u uSriaaiy.,rLii4u:« . Service Material Thickness (Inches) Condenser water expansion tanks and fill tanks, air separators, chemical bypass feeder. Flexible glass fiber . 2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Materials: 1. Flexible fiberglass blanket: ASTM C612. a. Installed 'K' Value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. c. Density: 6.0 pounds per cubic foot. d. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire- resistant kraft paper, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic a s n eeded. M aximum v apor b arrier p erm r ating s hall n of e xceed • 0.02 perms. Equipment Insulation Schedule: PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with Section 15800: Ductwork before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of dirt, duct, debris, moisture or foreign material. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes and industry standards. B. Verify piping has been pressure tested as specified in Section 15060: Piping and Accessories before applying insulation materials to pipe joints. C. Continue insulation and vapor barrier through penetrations. D. Piping, Valve and Accessories Insulation: 1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations where exposed. 2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Insulation 15250 -4 } = Z re W QQ 2 JU 0 0 CO CI CO W w w 0 u. a. I w I- al I- 0 Z O U j , 0 h. W H = W U 2 O F- z - . MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Provide insulated pipes, fittings, valves and accessories conveying fluids below ambient temperature with continuous vapor retarder jackets with self - sealing laps. Insulate complete system and provide molded flexible polyvinyl chloride jacket for all fittings and valves. Vaporseal all jacket seams. 4. For insulated pipes, fittings, valves and accessories conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self - sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment, flanges and unions. 5. Protect pipe insulation a t h angers, guides, and rollers with 2 0 gauge galvanized metal shields, one -third the insulation circumference in width and minimum 6 inches in length up to 4 inch pipe size, 12 inches in length on pipes 5 inch and larger, on the outside of the insulation and vapor barrier or jacket. Center shield on hanger and hold shield in place by straps or by manufactured centering tabs or channels on the shield itself. Do not pierce the insulation with hangers. 6. Provide insert between support shield and piping. Fabricate of calcium silicate or other heavy density non - deforming insulating material suitable for temperature. Length of insulation inserts shall match support shield length as specified. 7. For exterior applications or locations where abrasion or damage may occur, provide weather protection jacket. Insulated pipe, fittings, accessories joints, and valves shall be covered with ultra - violet light resistant painted polyvinyl chloride or aluminum jacket. Jacket seams shall be located on bottom side of horizontal piping. 8. Apply prefabricated sectional insulation for straight pipes neatly fitted around the piping, and sealed with adhesive. Apply adhesive to only one side of each joint and not to pipe surface. 9. Seal all joints with BF 3 0 -35 f ire resistant v apor b arrier m astic. 0 versized p ipe sections or board type insulation may be used to fabricate a nd i nstall i nsulation around pipe specialties. All void spaces shall be firmly filled with flexible insulation to support oversized pipe insulation. 10. Secure sectional insulation with 0.02 inch thick by 1 /2 inch wide aluminum bands manufactured by Childers, or Thomas & Betts "TY -RAP" nylon ties, on 24 inch centers for pipe sizes 2 inches and larger. Install at least two (2) bands per section of insulation. 11. Insulate and thoroughly vapor seal control valve bodies where the valve actuator penetrates the insulation. 12. Thoroughly vaporseal the ends of all condenser water, domestic cold water, valve and fitting insulation sections to prevent condensation from wicking between sections. 13. Replace any self - sealing insulation or lap that is found to be not sealing properly. Do not use staples to secure the insulation or coverings. E. Equipment Insulation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if necessary. As required, secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. 2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retardant cement. 3. Provide cold equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature with vapor retardant jackets. Insulation 15250 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS F. Ductwork Insulation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with '/z inch thick insulating cement, or aluminum jacket. 5. Do not insulate over sight glasses, visual level or flow indicators, nameplates or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around these items. 6. When equipment with insulation requires periodic opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage to insulation or vapor barrier. 7. Cold equipment insulation shall be covered with 1 /2 inch thick insulating cement over vaporseal mastic and copper clad hexagonal wire. 1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with continuous vapor retardant jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams, punctures, tears and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant adhesive. 2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without vapor retardant jacket. Where service access is required,. bevel and seal ends of insulation. 3 Continue insulation through non -fire -rated walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. The underside of ductwork 24 inches or greater shall be secured with mechanical fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18 inches on center. The protruding ends of the fasteners shall be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when required, sealed with the same tape as specified above. 5. For exterior applications, provide internal duct insulation. Insulation 15250 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 6 � , A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: co w w = J i 1. Air vents. co w 2. Air separators. w O 3. Relief valves. 2 4. Suction diffuser. g -' 5. Expansion tanks. N < 6. Glycol. z 1.-w 1.02. RELATED DOCUMENTS z 1•- z 0 A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. LU al D p , B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. 0 co w uj 1- A. Product Data: Certified manufacturer's latest published data indicating performance data, u- O. catalog cuts, model numbers, materials of construction, dimensional information, and ti. z pressure rating and pressure drops. w s. 0 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. ASME Pressure Vessel Forms. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15515 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES C. Submit manufacturer analysis of installed glycol solution. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable requirements of ASME, ANSI, U.L.; ASTM and National Electric Code. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Air Vents: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Sarco, Hoffman, Amtrol. B. Air Separators: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Amtrol. C. Relief Valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, McDonnell Miller, Kunkle. D. Expansion Tanks: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, Taco, Wessels. Hydronic Systems Specialties 15515 -1 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 AIR VENTS A. Provide air vents with 3 h -inch IPS inlet connection and 3/8 -inch outlet, suitable for the system and for the system working pressure and temperature. Design vents to eliminate air from the system automatically without permitting the passage of water. Construct vents of brass or semi -steel body, copper float and stainless steel valve parts. 2.03 AIR SEPARATORS A. Centrifugal Air Separator: 1. Provide as indicated on Drawings, a centrifugal type air separator. Provide with inlet and outlet connections tangential to the vessel shell. Vessel shell diameter to be minimum three times the nominal inlet/outlet pipe diameter. 2. Provide an internal stainless steel air collector tube with 5/32 -inch diameter perforations and 63% open area designed to direct accumulated air to an external air vent via an NPT connection at top of unit. 3. Construct the unit with a removable galvanized steel system strainer with 3/16 -inch diameter perforations and a free area of not Tess than five times the cross - sectional area of the connecting pipe. Provide a blow down connection to facilitate routine cleaning of the strainer. 4. Manufacturer shall provide data sheet specifying air collection efficiency and pressure drop at rated flow. 5. Provide a Manufacturer's Data Report for Pressure Vessels, Form U -1 as required by the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for each air separator. 2.04 RELIEF VALVES A. Provide diaphragm operated safety relief valve, ASME labeled, for relieving pressure. Refer to Drawings for pressure rating of valve and relief setting. Discharge water shall be through NPT connection. B. Provide valve with a low blow down differential constructed of bronze or iron body. The valve seat and all moving parts exposed to fluid shall be of non - ferrous material. 2.05 EXPANSION TANKS A. Provide a replaceable bladder type hydro - pneumatic expansion tank especially designed for use on the services specified. Construct the compression tank of welded steel and equip with a heavy duty butyl rubber flexible bladder to maintain a separation between the system water and the air cushion. The system water shall be contained within the bladder. Provide with top inlet connection for all water systems. Each.tank shall bear an appropriate ASME label for the following minimum working pressures and temperatures: 1. Building Closed Condenser Water System: 125 pounds per square inch gauge - 100° F. B. The minimum total tank and bladder volume shall be as specified on the Drawings. Provide a factory initial charge of 12 pounds per square inch gauge. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Hydronic Systems Specialties 15515 -2 i J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provide suitable structural and seismic support as required for each tank as indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide for each tank, lifting Tugs, base ring, drains, charging connections, piping connections, and specialties as required for bladder replacement and as indicated on the Drawings. Provide one (1) bottle of nitrogen gas and manifold to be used to charge all tanks. Each tank shall have an ASME relief valve set at the appropriate pressure. E. Provide a UL listed pressure operated by a brass bourdon tube activating a mercury switch. This switch shall activate a low pressure alarm as indicated in Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). Mercoid Series DA31 -153 -7 or approved equal. F. Paint the outside of the tank with a shop coat of approved rust inhibiting primer after fabrication. 2.06 MANUAL AIR VENT A. Construct from short vertical section of 2 -inch diameter maximum or line size pipe to form air chamber. Provide 1/8 -inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide automatic air vents at high points of all piping and as required for removal of air from the system using 3 /. -inch steel pipe suitable for the pressure service between the main pipe and inlet. Provide 3/8 -inch OD hard drawn Type L copper tubing from vent outlet for overflow in case of defective action. Copper tubing shall run into a suitable drain. When vents are located above hung ceilings, connect all vent drains to a common drain main and pipe to nearest sink or floor drain. Provide 3 /4 -inch valve in the inlet line for servicing of automatic air vent. Manual vents may be substituted for automatic vents, at system high points, only as directed by the Architect and where readily accessible. B. Provide at each heat transfer element supplied with water, not less than one'/ inch manual air vent. C. Provide manual air vent valves in the piping connections to each condenser water connection. Provide soft temper copper tube pigtail or manual vents so that vent can be discharged into a bucket. D. Provide relief valves at expansion tanks, pressure tanks and as indicated. Install relief valves in upright position with discharge piped to nearest floor drain. E. System relief valve capacity shall equal makeup valve capacity. Equipment relief valve capacity shall exceed flow rating of connected equipment. Where one pipe vents several relief valves, cross section area shall equal sum of individual vent areas. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Hydronic Systems Specialties 15515 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION CO o A. General: Provide closed circuit fluid coolers in accordance with the Contract Documents. J w B. In addition to the work covered under this Section, comply with description of individual N u- systems under other Sections of the Specifications. w O 2 1.02. RELATED DOCUMENTS g co A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. H W Z � B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. 1- O Z I- C. Section 15170: Electric Motors. w U � D. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. OD H E. Section 15860: Fans. w w F. Section 15890: Water Treatment. _ Z ui G. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). O H. Section 15985: Automatic Control Sequences. , Z. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit sound power levels for each octave band (8 total octave bands) at 5 feet and 50 feet from intake louvers and discharge for locations in front, at side, and directly above fluid cooler. B. Submit performance curves for the fluid coolers, showing leaving water temperatures from the cooler for the design temperature range and for temperature ranges corresponding to 80 percent, 60 %, 40% and 20% of the design temperature range for wet bulb temperatures of 78 °, 75 °, 72 °, 70 °, 65 °, 60 °, 55 °, 50 °, 40° and 30° F for design water flow and for 65% of design water flow. C. Submit seismic restraint calculations for all internally mounted components and for fluid cooler a nchoring to supports. Refer to Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. D. Submit materials of construction and certified dimensioned drawings. E. Submit fan airflow performance for the as- installed configuration. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15708 CLOSED CIRCUIT COOLING TOWER Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 15708 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Submit certification that motor starter requirements have been coordinated with the Division 16 Contractor including number of speed(s), number of windings, time delay between starts, duty cycle, etc. : � PART 2 — PRODUCTS QQ '3 J U 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUAFACTURERS N p tu A. Baltimore Air Coil, Evapco. J H LL, 2.02 CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLER — FORCED DRAFT TYPE w O A. Provide a forced draft, blow - through, vertical discharge, fluid coolers of sizes and capacity indicated on the Drawings. w d F w B. Guarantee the fluid coolers to perform as per schedule requirements with the understanding z that the building structure in relation to the fluid cooler will be as shown on the Drawings. F. 0 Maximum drift loss from the tower shall not exceed 0.002 %. w �- w C. The coolers shall have centrifugal fan assemblies built completely into the pan, with all V moving parts factory mounted and aligned. Unit casing construction shall be heavy gauge 0 H hot -dip galvanized steel finished with zinc - chromatized aluminum paint after assembly. Unit basin shall be heavy gauge hot -dip galvanized steel welded construction. = v D. In addition, the coolers shall be provided with electric heaters, sized to maintain basin water u. O at 40° F minimum with ambient air temperatures at —10° F, with factory prewired control U junction box for field connection of power wiring for electric water level controller, and variable volume capacity control dampers and controllers, electric pan thermostat and all associated 0 controls. Provide low water level cutout to prevent heater operation unless heater elements Z are fully submerged. E. Pan -Fan Section, Casing: The combination pan -fan section shall consist of galvanized steel channels and sheets of welded construction. Pans shall be galvanized steel 10 -gauge angle framework and channels with galvanized 12 -gauge panels. Casings shall be galvanized steel 16- gauge. Provide water and airtight manholes in pan section for access into interior of the cooler. Anti - cavitation device and screen, shall be provided for all suction sumps. Pans shall include waste water bleed line with valve, mechanical make -up valve, ladder and handrail as required. F. Eliminators: Eliminators shall polyvinyl chloride. G. Fans: The forwardly curved centrifugal fans with V -belt drive assembly dynamically balanced. Fans and housings shall be constructed of hot -dip galvanized steel. 18 -gauge metal screens shall be provided around entire fan assembly. Provide modulating capacity control dampers with integral vane motor operator for control from a basin water thermostat. Fan motors shall be 460 volt, 60 Hz, 3- phase, totally enclosed, fan cooled. Provide control damper end switch to stop fans. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 15708 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Water Distribution System: Polyvinyl chloride header with removable branches and plastic self- cleaning spray nozzles, Water /glycol solution shall be distributed uniformly over the coils at a flow rate of not Tess than 4.5 gallons per minute per square foot of coil cross section. I. Provide electrical float switch water level control, low -high water level alarm systems. Electric float switch and controls shall be guaranteed to operate properly in ambient temperatures of - 10° F. J. Coil Section: The heat transfer section(s) of the fluid cooler(s) shall be encased with hot dip galvanized steel panels and the section(s) shall be removable from the pan. The cooler coil(s) shall be all prime surface steel, tested at 350 pounds per square inch air pressure under water and hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. The coil(s) shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of the fluid. K. Water Recirculating Pump(s): Pumps shall be close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal and shall be mounted on the pan and completely piped to the suction strainer and water distribution system. Pumps shall be installed vertically so that the pump and piping will drain freely when the pan is drained. Pumps shall be sized to meet the cooler capacity as scheduled on the Drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORTS A. Steel supports as shown on architectural and structural drawings will be provided by other trades, and any changes, including any engineering and /or architectural fees required for checking of same, required in this steel work to suit the tower furnished under this Section shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. 1 B. Steel carrier rail supporting the tower and bearing on vibration isolators shall be provided by this Contractor. Manufacturer shall coordinate beam selection and isolator placement. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Closed Circuit Cooling Tower 15708 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.03 SUBMITTALS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15731 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following ceiling- mounted computer room air conditioning systems: 1. Water - cooled direct expansion computer room air conditioning systems, CRAC -7 and 8. B. The system shall be designed to maintain temperature and humidity conditions in the rooms containing electronic equipment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. C. Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. D. Section 15170: Electric Motors. E. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. F. Section 15241: Acoustics. G. Section 15250: Insulation. H. Section 15860: Fans. I. Section 15880: Air Filters and Cleaners. J. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). K. Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. A. Product Data: 1. Operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 2. indicate published rated capacity. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. Actual net sensible cooling capacity for all AC units furnished; with specified components, under scheduled conditions and in the configuration(s) shown on the drawings. z B. Shop Drawings: — Q �; Z 1. Details of equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required o: clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each 6 v field connection. c) O 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring including detailed wiring co 0 diagrams that clearly differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field- w = i nstalled wiring. 1--4 NIL 3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate 0 and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 2 4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is g 5 based and their installation requirements. `� u- 5. Field quality- control test reports. N a H w C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For computer -room air - conditioning units to include in ..y., z f _.. emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Z O w D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. j 0 0 U O 0 1- A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA = 0 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and LL marked for intended use. z w B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for r_ Mechanical Refrigeration." ,w; O ~. z C. Coefficient of performance and energy - efficiency ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water - cooled condenser shell to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. E. System shall be supplied with ETL and NRTL listing according to UL 1995. The specified system shall be factory- tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to: Quality Control Checks, "Hi -Pot" Test (two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts, per NRTL agency requirements), and Metering Calibration Tests. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 COORDINATION z A. Coordinate layout and installation of computer -room air - conditioning units and H suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by - 6 them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. 0 -J v 0 0 B. Coordinate locations for electrical rough -ins. w = - 1.06 . WARRANTY 0 N O 2 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair g 5 . or replace components of computer -room air- conditioning units that fail in materials or u- Q workmanship within specified warranty period. to O Z B: Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years Z III from date of Substantial Completion. f- O z F- C. Warranty Period for Electronic Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not Tess than 2 tu three(3) years from date of Substantial Completion. v CI ON 0 I- PART 2 — PRODUCTS w W 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - 0 A. Computer room air conditioning systems: Liebert. v O 2.02 GENERAL z A. The environmental control system shall be a factory- assembled unit. On direct expansion models, the refrigeration system shall be split, with the compressor located in a remote or close- coupled condensing unit. B. The evaporator section shall be designed for above dropped - ceiling installation. Condensing units shall be designed for above - dropped - ceiling installation. C. Evaporator Cabinet Construction: The cabinet and chassis shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel, and shall be serviceable from one side. Mounting brackets shall be factory attached to the cabinet. D. Provide packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped computer room air conditioning Unit (AC unit), as shown on the Drawings to operate on 277 volt, 1- phase, 60 Hz power. September 30, 2003 Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems Permit issue 15731 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Air Distribution: The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width, double inlet. The shaft shall be heavy -duty steel with self - aligning ball bearings with minimum life of 100,000 hours. The fan motor shall be 1750 rpm and mounted on an adjustable base. The drive package shall be equipped with an adjustable motor pulley. The fan /motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators. z F. System shall be suitable for ducted air distribution. et 2 G. Microprocessor Control: The control system shall be microprocessor based. The wall- -J p mounted control enclosure shall include a 2 -line by 16- character LCD display providing co 0 continuous display of operating status and alarm condition. A 7 -key keypad for w F. setpoint/program control and AC unit on /off shall be located below the display. N w w u- I. Monitoring: The LCD display shall provide on /off indication, operating mode indication d (cooling, heating, humidifying, dehumidifying) and current day, time, temperature and w humidity (if applicable) indication. The monitoring system shall be capable of relaying AC `" z Y (� PP )� 9 Y P Y 9 F-: unit operating parameters and alarms to a generic monitoring system. ,. ; Z 0 w 2.03 CONTROL SETPOINT PARAMETERS: ? 0 A. Temperature setpoint 65° - 85° F. o H w 1-� II. 0 w A. Compressor short -cycle control: The control system shall prevent compressor short- P B. Temperature sensitivity 1° - 5° F. 2.04 AC UNIT CONTROLS Temperature and humidity sensors shall be located in a waiibox, which shall be capable of being located up to 300 feet from the evaporator unit. cycling by a 10 minute timer from compressor stop to the next start. B. Common alarm and remote on /off: A common alarm relay shall be provided to provide a contact closure to a remote alarm device. Two (2) terminals shall also be provided for remote on /off control. Individual alarms shall be "enabled" or "disabled" from reporting to the common alarm. C. Setback control: The control shall be programmable on a daily basis or on a 5 day /2 day program schedule. It shall be capable of accepting 2 programs per day. D. Temperature calibration: The control shall include the capabilities to calibrate the temperature and humidity sensors and adjust the sensor response delay time from 1 to 90 seconds. The control shall be capable of displaying temperature values in degrees F or C. E. System Auto Restart: For start -up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6- second increments) time delay. Programming can be performed either at the wall- mounted controller or from the central site monitoring system. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -4 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 ALARMS A. AC unit alarm: The control system shall monitor AC unit operation and activate an audible a and visual alarm in the event of the following factory preset alarm conditions: + z � w 1. High and low temperature. 6 D 2. High and low humidity. 3. High head pressure. N o 4. Change filter. co LU ill I 5. Loss of air. 6. Local alarm. N u.. w B. Alarm Controls: Each alarm (AC unit and custom) shall be separately enabled or 2 disabled, selected to activate the common alarm (except for high head pressure). g Q CD D C. Audible Alarm: The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the z w operator. Z H D. Common Alarm: A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user O selected alarms with a remote alarm device. w la M E. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to the generic remote monitoring p N system with the following information: date and time of occurrence, AC unit number, and 0 '— present temperature and humidity. w 2.06 DIRECT EXPANSION SYSTEM EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS LI z iii A. The evaporator section shall include evaporator coil, thermostatic expansion valve, and U filter drier. The evaporator coil shall have two circuits, minimum. p f- B. The evaporator coil shall be 4 rows deep, constructed of copper tubes, aluminum fins and a maximum face velocity of 500 feet per minute. An externally equalized thermostatic expansion valve shall control refrigerant flow. C. The coil shall be provided with a stainless steel drain pan, with an internally trapped drain line. The evaporator drain pan shall include a factory installed float switch to shutdown the evaporator upon high water condition. 2.07 WATER/ GLYCOL COOLED CONDENSING UNIT A. The water /glycol condensing unit shall be equipped with a coaxial condenser. Components shall include scroll compressor, high - pressure switch. The condensing unit shall be factory charged with R -22 refrigerant. B. The condenser circuit shall be pre -piped with a 3 -way regulating valve which is head - pressure actuated. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -5 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. The condenser water /glycol circuit shall be designed for a static operating pressure of 150 psig. D. A hot gas bypass circuit shall be provided to reduce compressor cycling and improve z operation under low load conditions. _ H Z 2.08 FACTORY INSTALLED OPTIONS re L L1 A. Disconnect switch, non - locking: The non - automatic, non - locking, molded case circuit U O breaker shall be factory mounted in the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The u) 0 switch shall be accessible from the front of the AC unit. J = r f- B. Free - cooling /dual cooling source: A free - cooling coil shall be integral to the evaporator w O cabinet, and shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. Free - cooling shall 2 be activated by a temperature stat, and shall include factory piped three -way valve and ,.._, 5 separate supply and return piping. u_ j u) a C. Remote sensors: The AC unit shall be supplied with remote temperature and humidity H w sensors. The sensors shall be connected to the AC unit by a shielded cable. z H i- O D. Condensate Pump: The condensate pump shall be complete with integral float switch, W pump, motor assembly, and reservoir. - w U� E The filter clog switch shall activate the audible and visual alarm on the wallbox when filter N pressure drop exceeds and adjustable setpoint. w H = W - U F. Single Point Power Kit: A single point power kit shall be provided for a close - coupled system to allow a single electrical power feed to supply power to both the evaporator and z indoor close - coupled condensing unit. ▪ co G. Remote Monitoring System: Provided remote monitoring of the AC unit and monitoring of O other support equipment. The remote monitoring shall have the capability to monitor and z change (at the user direction) the temperature and humidity setpoints and sensitivities of each AC unit. The printer shall provide the user with chronological alarm information. It .., shall also be capable of being programmed to print out environmental conditions or operating modes at each AC unit. , PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. General: Install air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install AC unit plumb and level, firmly anchored to support the AC unit weights in location indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Electrical Wiring: Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Piping Connections: Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's piping connection diagram submittal to piping contractor. D. Supply and Drain Water Piping: Connect water supply and drains to air conditioning unit. AC unit drain shall be trapped internally, and shall not be trapped externally. E. Field Quality Control: Start up air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer's start up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. " • September 30, 2003 Permit issue END OF SECTION Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15731 -7 J . MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following floor- mounted computer room air conditioning systems: 1. Water cooled direct expansion computer room air conditioning systems, CRAC -1 through 6. 2. Seismic floor stand The system shall be designed.to maintain temperature and humidity conditions in the rooms containing electronic. equipment. • 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: B. Section 15060: C. Section 15140: D. Section 15170: E. Section 15240: F. Section 15241: G. Section 15250: H. Section 15860: I. Section 15880: J. Section 15900: K. Section 15990: 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: September 30, 2003 Permit issue SECTION 15734 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS Mechanical General Provisions Piping and Accessories Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves Electric Motors Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints Acoustics Insulation Fans Air Filters and Cleaners Building Management System (BMS) Mechanical Systems Balancing • 1. Operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 2. indicate published rated capacity Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Actual net sensible cooling capacity for all AC units furnished; with specified components, under scheduled conditions and in the configuration(s) shown on the drawings. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Details of equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required Lu clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each 6 D field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring including detailed wiring co 0 diagrams that clearly differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field- installed u) ILI wiring. .., � H C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that computer -room air - W O conditioning units, accessories, and components shall withstand seismic forces defined in Section 15240: Vibration isolation and Seismic Restraints. Include the following: "` ' u. Q Y2 a 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test = W of assembled components or on calculation. 6 -4 4 Z H a. The term "withstand" means "the AC unit shall remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic 1 z 1- forces specified." 2 D Ili 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate '. ' D o and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. p N . 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is 0 ;-- based and their installation requirements. = w 4. Field quality- control test reports. f- LLO D. Operation and maintenance data shall be included in emergency, operation, and uj Z maintenance manuals. U H I- E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. z 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Energy- Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by 2001 Washington State Energy Code. D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water - cooled condenser shell to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. September 30, 2003• Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems Permit Issue 15734 -2 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of computer -room air - conditioning units with computer room access z flooring installer and with computer room equipment layout. _ k r w o: 1 B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases, cast anchor -bolt inserts into B pad, concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in other Divisions. 0 c o C. Coordinate locations for condenser water, drain piping and electrical rough -ins. J = f- 1.06 WARRANTY N u- wO A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components 2 of computer -room air - conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified u. Q warranty period. to a z B. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five (5) years Z H from date of Substantial Completion. H- O w 1- uj C. Warranty Period for Humidifiers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. U 0 O N 0 H w uj H 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS LL' Z ui 0 I D. Warranty Period for Electronic Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not Tess than three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. A. Provide extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One (1) set for each belt -drive fan. 2. Filters: One (1) set of filters for each AC unit. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Computer room air conditioning systems: Liebert. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -3 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 PACKAGE WATER COOLED TYPE A. Provide packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped computer room air °- z conditioning Unit (AC unit), as shown on the Drawings to operate on 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz , Z p w re 2 1. AC units shall be configured for downflow air discharge or top horizontal air M -I 0 0 discharge as indicated on the Drawings. ' co o 2. The cooling capacity shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. w w , 1 J B. Each AC unit shall have the following cycle capabilities: w LL w0 1. 100% capacity with the use of the free - cooling coil. 2 2. Operation of the direct expansion coil and water - cooling coil, simultaneously. During i g Q this mode of operation, the water - cooling coil, shall act as a pre - cooling coil, . , c decreasing the load on the Direct Expansion coil, thus lowering the suction pressure = 0 and the kilowatt draw of the operating compressors. _ 3. 100% capacity with mechanical refrigeration and direct expansion coil. z FN. 1— O C. Cabinet: W w Dp 1. Panels shall be of welded steel, suitably braced for rigidity, supporting compressors UO and other mechanical equipment and fittings, with floor stand with adjustable legs 0 H and vibration isolation pads. Provide minimum 14 -gauge furniture -grade steel w w construction with a tubular steel frame. Cabinet shall be finished in a color and 0 texture matching the computer cabinets. The main front panel shall have captive'/- u.. g turn fasteners. The exterior panels shall be powder coated. z 2. Each AC unit shall have full front access doors and be fully serviceable from the front 0 c allowing the AC unit to be positioned within 1 inch of rear wall. Provide side and back i o H access doors to match front. All doors panels shall be hinged and easily removable z and shall be set on neoprene or polyurethane gaskets with recessed, self - tightened latches to prevent air leakage. AC unit shall be arranged to provide full service access to all electrical controls and complete refrigeration section without interrupting system operation. All refrigeration cycle components, including compressors condensers, refrigerant flow control valves, strainer /driers and sight glasses shall be out of the conditioned air stream and readily accessible for service. 3. Casing and panels shall be lined with thermal and acoustical insulation of minimum one -inch thick, 1 % -pound density glass fiber, neoprene coated on exposed surface. 4. Air shall be discharged out of the cabinet through an internal duct, which prevents conditioned air from passing over compressors or condensers. 5. AC unit shall be sectionalized to facilitate, if required, shipping separate fan, refrigeration and air duct sections to jobsite without the need for field piping or wiring. September 30, 2003 Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems Permit Issue 15734 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Floor Stand 1. Provide welded tubular steel seismic floor stand. Coordinate exact height with raised floor contractor. 2. Submit seismic calculations per Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic = �;, Restraints. i` z 3. A factory- supplied and welded floor stand integral turning vane shall be provided. ce tu E. Fan Section: v v 0 N D 1. Supply air fans shall be forward curved, double width, double inlet centrifugal type w w mounted on a single fan shaft. The fan shaft shall be ground- polished and coated N 1 with rust proof compound. The fan shaft shall be selected to operate at 75 percent of O its first critical speed. Fan shaft bearings shall be self - aligning type, permanently 2 lubricated and selected for minimum 200,000 -hour life span. The entire fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to a maximum tolerance of u. Q 2 mils in any plane. v d 2. Motor leads shall be factory wired, terminating in a_ convenient junction box. = w Adjustable, dual V -belt drive shall be sized for 200% brake horsepower, with heavy- Z H duty cast iron sheaves, designed for continuous operation. Single belt drives are H O unacceptable. w F- w U� ON 1. Provide pleated, lofted, nonwoven, reinforced cotton fabric filters supported and 0 H bonded to welded -wire grid, enclosed in cardboard frame [with 2 -inch thick, = w . disposable, glass -fiber prefilter). 1 a. Nominal thickness: 2 inches. u_ O b. Dust -spot efficiency: 20 %. ui z c. Weight arrestance: 90% to 92 %. U d. Initial resistance at 500 -FPM face velocity: 0.30 -inch wg. 0 F- e. Recommended final resistance: 1 -inch wg. z 2. For rear - return configured AC units, the filter chamber shall be located on the back of the cabinet, serviceable from the end of the unit. F. G. Free Cooling Coil: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Filters: 1. The dual cooling source system shall consist of an air or water ,cooled compressorized system with the addition of a chilled water coil, a modulating control valve, and a comparative temperature sensor. The system shall be able to function either as a modulating chilled water system or as a compressorized system, or a combination of both. The primary mode of cooling shall be chilled water. Switchover between the two cooling modes shall be performed automatically by the microprocessor control. The microprocessor positions the valve in response to room conditions. Cooling capacity shall be controlled by bypassing chilled water around the coil. The modulating valve travel for dehumidification shall be proportional. 2. The dual - cooling source coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and aluminum fins and located in the return air, before the A -Frame evaporator coil. 3. The free - cooling coil shall be of seamless copper tube, expanded into aluminum fin construction with minimum six rows. The face area shall be equal to the area of the direct expansion coil and shall be located upstream of the direct expansion coil, in the same plane. The coil shall be rated for continuous operation at 300 psig. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. The free - cooling coil shall contain a three -way, motorized valve. The valve shall operate in conjunction with sensing controls located within the AC unit. The coil shall be complete with drain and vent connections. Coil support shall be of stainless steel. 5. Mount coil assembly over stainless -steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump -motor assembly, and condensate reservoir. H. Direct Expansion Coil: 1. The direct expansion evaporator coil shall be alternate -row or split into two equal circuits. 2. The evaporator coil shall be an A -Frame design. Refrigerant of each system shall be distributed throughout the entire coil face area. A stainless steel condensate drain pan shall be provided. 3. The coil shall be of seamless copper tube, expanded into aluminum fin and shall have stainless steel supports. 4. Coil shall be located downstream of the water - cooling coil and shall be in the same plane. 5. Mount coil assembly over stainless -steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump -motor assembly, and condensate reservoir. 1. Drain Pan: A common drain pan shall be employed for both the water cooling and direct expansion coils The drain pan shall be of stainless steel construction with non - ferrous connections and shall include a factory- installed copper drain trap with removable, brass cleanout plug. J. Compressors: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Each AC unit shall have hermetic or semi - hermetic compressors with a suction gas cooled motor, anti -slug protection, complete with discharge and suction shut -off valves, each with gauge ports. Maximum operating speed shall be 1750 rpm. 2. The compressors shall be located in a separate compartment so they may be serviced during operation of the equipment and shall be capable of being demounted from the cabinet without removing other components and without cutting into piping. Compressors shall be equipped with crankcase heaters. 3. A compressor sequence switch shall be provided for changing lead -lag sequence of the compressors. 4. Provide spring vibration mounts with seismic restraints for the compressors. The switch shall be located within the electrical control panel. 5. Provide thermal overloads, oil sight glass, manual reset high pressure switch, pump down low pressure switch, suction line strainer, reversible oil pumps for forced feed lubrication. 6. Four -Step Refrigeration System: The environmental control system shall include cylinder unloaders on the semi - hermetic compressors. Solenoid valves that are controlled from the microprocessor control shall activate the unloaders. In response to the return air temperature, the microprocessor control shall activate the unloader solenoids and the liquid line solenoids such that four stages of refrigeration cooling are obtained. The stages shall be: a. One compressor, partially loaded. b. Two compressors partially loaded. c. One compressor partially loaded, one compressor fully loaded. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila L. Receiver: d. Two compressors fully loaded. e. On a call for dehumidification, the microprocessor control shall insure that at least one compressor is on full for proper humidity control. z K. Refrigeration Circuit: 1- w 1. Provide a minimum of two refrigeration circuits complete with liquid line solenoid t6i v valve, replaceable filter drier, pressure relief valve, liquid and moisture indicator, 0 0 thermal expansion valves with external equalizer and liquid line shut -off valves with cn 0 charging port. Refrigeration circuits, including expansion valves, shall be serviceable w = a adjustable while AC unit is operating. Suction line accumulator, liquid receiver f' with shut -off valves, evaporator pressure regulating valve shall be installed on each N w wO refrigeration circuit. 2 2. Each refrigeration circuit shall be charged and ready for operation, requiring only connection of services and opening of service valves. 3. Head Pressure Control: Each refrigeration circuit shall have flooded head pressure d controls. The controls shall be adjustable and set to maintain a constant condenser H w and receiver pressure under various fluid temperatures, eliminating the possibility of z H compressor short- cycling. 1 - p zi- w w 1. Each refrigeration circuit shall have a factory- mounted liquid receiver, large enough 0 N o I- to hold the entire floodback charge. 2. The receiver shall be located in the AC unit cabinet. Each receiver shall be fitted with w w all necessary line shut -off valves to permit it to be isolated from the refrigeration i circuit for service. A purge valve shall be factory installed on the receiver. - z w U = O~ M. Water Cooled Condenser: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. The condenser shall be brazed -plate type with 100% counterflow, tube -in -tube Shell - and -tube type fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, mechanically cleanable type with removable heads and of all non - ferrous. construction. 2. Condenser shall be capable of operating at system working pressure, with a minimum rating of 350 psig. 3. Provide a two -way automatic control valve for modulating water flow from head pressure control. 4. Provide liquid -line stop valve and head - pressure - actuated, two -way, water - regulating valve. 5. Terminate water connections outside cabinet. N. Infrared Steam Humidifier (for CRAC - 4 to 6 only): 1. AC unit shall be supplied with an infrared humidifier consisting of high- intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless -steel evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections and prepiped and using condensate water from cooling coils 2. Provide stainless -steel or brass float -valve mechanism located in bypass airstream with flush -cycle timer and solenoid drain valve humidification system. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -7 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila O. Hot gas reheat (for CRAC — 4 to 6 only): Provide a complete hot gas reheat system shall include a copper tube, aluminum fin coil, three -way solenoid valve, and refrigerant check valve. P. Integral Electrical Controls: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Branch circuits shall be individually fused and shall include a 24 volt control transformer from which magnetic starters and control devices shall operate. 2. Magnetic starters shall have three -line, three -coil, ambient - compensated overload protection, with manual reset. 3. Refrigeration cycle shall be fitted with a low and high pressure cutout switch, with manual reset on high pressure cutout. A compressor sequence switch shall be provided for sequencing lead -lag control of the compressors. All wiring greater than 24 volt shall be in conduit. 4. Unit- mounted electrical enclosure with piano-hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control- circuit transformer. 5. Disconnect Switch: Non - automatic, molded -case circuit breaker with handle accessible when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off position. AC unit Temperature and Humidity Controls: 1. AC unit shall be equipped with electronic control system for fully automatic operation factory piped and wired including: a. Three -way automatic free cooling water valve, condenser water valve. b. Hot water reheat valve. c. Chilled water valve. d. Reheat system. e. Thermostats and humidistat. 2. AC unit shall have four stages of cooling, two stages of heating, fluid temperature sensing control and individual high and low limit humidistat. 3. Set up control for operation with a preset deadband between humidifying and dehumidifying. Control settings and deadbands shall be field adjustable from the AC unit front control panel. 4. Control system shall provide temperature set point range 65° F to 85° F and humidity setpoint 40% to 60% RH. 5. Control system microprocessor shall provide for adaptive control of AC unit operation in response to rate of change of room loads. 6. Control system shall provide protection against compressor short cycling and shall provide for automatic lead /lag compressor sequencing. 7. Control system shall provide automatic restart of AC unit with programmed time delay. R. Disconnect Switch: The AC unit shall be supplied with a main circuit interrupter for disconnecting electrical power to the AC unit from the exterior of the AC unit cabinet without having to open the cabinet doors. 1. Locking Type: The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage electrical components until switched to the "OFF" position. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -8 4..., , ,. ..J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila S. Smoke Detector: 1. AC unit shall be furnished with a factory- installed smoke detector with return air Z sensing element, which shall sound a local alarm and shutdown AC unit. Q 2. Provide contacts for remote alarm indication to the central fire alarm system = H provided under Division 16. w T. Condensate Pump: _i 0 coo 1. Condensate pump shall be complete with float switch, pump and motor assembly u) w and one gallon reservoir. _i H 2. Minimum capacity at 20 feet head: 40 gallons per hour for AC units up to 20 tons N W cooling capacity. 100 gallons per hour for AC units over 20 tons cooling capacity. W 0 2 U. Water Detectors (CRAC —1 to 3 only): Provide two solid state water detectors per AC unit for g mounting under or on top of raised floor. Connect to AC unit control panel for alarm. co O 1-W ?� 2.03 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL WITH GRAPHICS Z� A. Advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor dot matrix W W display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu driven with on- D 0 screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user review and 0 (L programming of temperature and humidity setpoints, alarm parameters, and setup selections 0 ;— including choice of control type. A password shall be required to make system changes. For W W all user selections, the range of acceptable input (temperature, humidity, or time delay) shall 1— v be displayed on the monitor screen. The system shall provide monitoring of room conditions, 0 operational status in % of each function, component run times, date and time, and four w Z analog inputs from sensors provided by others. t) to Z 0 /- B. The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions: 1. Temperature setpoint 65° to 85° F. 2. Temperature sensitivity plus 1° to 9.9° F in 0.1° F increments. 3. Humidity setpoint 20% to 80% relative humidity. 4. Humidity sensitivity plus 1% to 30% relative humidity. 5. All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel. Temperature and humidity sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and humidity sensors in the room. C. Predictive Humidity Control: The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and prevent unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to changes in dewpoint temperature. In addition, the system shall provide the following internal controls: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Compressor short -cycle control: The control system shall include a program to prevent compressor short- cycling. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. System auto - restart: For start-up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6- second increments) time delay. Programming shall be performed either at the unit or from the central site monitoring system. 3. Sequential load activation: During start-up, or after power failure, the microprocessor shall sequence operational load activation to minimize inrush current. Systems allowing multiple loads to start simultaneously are unacceptable. 4. Chilled water /hot water /free cooling coil flush cycles: Chilled water, hot water, and free cooling coils shall be automatically flushed to prevent the buildup of contaminants. Systems without this feature shall include the necessary devices to bypass fluid into the coil on a programmed basis. D. Front Monitor Display Panel: The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor 240 x 120 dot matrix display panel with adjustable backlighting. This display (along with five front mounted control keys) shall be the only operator interface required to obtain all available system information such as room conditions, operational status, graphical data, alarms, control and alarm setpoints, and all user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch selections, and diagnostics. All indicators shall be in language form. No symbols or codes shall be acceptable. E. The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. High and low temperature. 2. High and low humidity. 3. Short cycle. 4. Compressor overload. 5. Main fan overload. 6. Humidifier problem. 7. High head pressure. 8. Change filter. 9. Loss of airflow. 10. Low suction pressure. 11. Loss of power. 12. Provide up to four customer accessible alarm inputs to be indicated on the front panel. Custom alarms shall be identified with prepared (programmed) alarm labels for the following frequently used inputs: a. Water under floor. b. Smoke detected. c. Standby glycol pump on. d. Loss of water flow. e. Standby unit on: User customized text shall be entered for two of the four custom alarms. 13. Each alarm (unit and custom) shall be separately enabled or disabled, selected to activate the common alarm, and programmed for a time delay of 0 to 255 seconds. 14. Provide an audible alarm to annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the operator. Provide audible alarm override switch. 15. Provide a programmable common alarm to interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -10 • tk • C.14 j MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to a site monitoring system with the following information: date and time of occurrence, unit number, and present temperature and humidity. G. Analog Inputs: The system shall include four customer accessible analog inputs for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20- milliamp signal. The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5 volts dc or 0 to 10 volts dc if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front panel. The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front panel. H. Diagnostics: The control system and electronic circuitry shall be provided with self - diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The controller board shall be diagnosed and reported as pass /not pass. Control inputs shall be indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control outputs shall be able to be turned on or off from the front monitor panel without using jumpers or a service terminal. An LED on a circuit board shall indicate each control output. Data Collection: The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of compressor, reheat, humidifier, fan motor, and free cooling coil. The ten most recent alarms shall also be retained. J. Communications: The microprocessor shall be compatible with all generic remote monitoring and control devices. K. The control shall display the following graphical data: PART 3 — EXECUTION 1. Temperature, humidity, analog inputs. 2. Component operating status by hour. 3. Water detection floor plan. 4. Operating status. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS J A. Install AC unit level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances, on a floor mounted seismic stand supplied by the AC unit manufacturer. B. CONNECTIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 2. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 3. Water and Drainage Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. Provide adequate connections for water - cooled units, condensate drain, and humidifier flushing system. 4. Condenser -Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15060: Piping and Accessories. Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water - cooled units. 5. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. Electrically ground equipment according to Division 16 Specifications. Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 6. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field - assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. 2. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: a. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. b. After installing computer -room air- conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. c. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. • D. STARTUP SERVICE 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. 2. Verify that computer -room air- conditioning units are installed and connected according to manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. 4. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier. E. ADJUSTING 1. Adjust initial temperature [and humidity] set points. 2. Set field - adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. F. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer -room air - conditioning units. September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. 2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice. END OF SECTION Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems 15734 -12 1 I .J • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Packaged air - cooled roof -top air conditioning units. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions :. B. _ Section 15170: Electric Motors C. Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints D. Section 15241: Acoustics E. Section 15800: Ductwork F. Section 15860: Fans G. Section 15880: Air Filters H. Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) 1. Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing J. Division 16: Electrical 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for review: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15771 PACKAGED AIR - COOLED ROOF -TOP UNITS 1. • Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 3. Performance schedules. 4. Dimensions and weights. 5. Materials of construction. 6. Wiring diagrams, as required. 7. Fan curves. 8. Roof mounting frames and curbs. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -1 z 6 w J U U0. N0 W = J N u. w00 g J. u_ ? w d w • z , 1— 0. w ~ Do u 0 H. w ts- Z. Di 0 ~' z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry of governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bear AMCA certified rating seal. 1. AMCA — Air Moving and Conditioning Association 2. ARI — Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 3. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 4. NEMA — National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 5. NFPA — National Fire Protection Association 6. OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Act 7. UL — Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 8. 1997 Washington State Energy Code 9. Local Codes B. Scheduled equipment performance is minimum capacity required. C. Scheduled electrical capacity shall be considered as maximum available. D. Additional Guarantee: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Compressors: Five years 2. Furnace heat exchangers: Five years PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof -top air conditioning units: 1. AAON 2. Trane Co. 3. McQuay Air Conditioning 4. Carrier Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 ROOF -TOP UNITS, GENERAL Z A. Factory fabricated packaged units, complete with: 1 Z o w 1. Compressors. j 2. Air - cooled condenser. -J U O 3. Direct expansion cooling coils. 0 4. Gas -fired furnace. c w 5. Supply fan. .J H 6. Return fan. co u- 7. Modulating dampers. w 0 8. Filters. 2 9. Controls. J 10. Insulated casing. w O = w B. Units rated in accordance with ARI Std 360. I- _ Z H C. Factory Assembly: z O g. Ili w 1. Completed assembled, piped and wired. D p ' 2. Run test at factory: U O u2, a. Three hours minimum. 0 f- 3. Charge with refrigerant R -22 and compressor oil. w w 4. Ship fully assembled. H 0 LL ui 0 D. Electrical: 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. One point connection. 2. Knockouts for power and control connections. 3. At least one 115 volt convenience outlet. 1. Cold rolled steel. 2. Reinforced and braced with angles. 3. Access sections with hinged door. a. Quick opening handles. 4. Insulated: minimum 3 inches thick, coated fiberglass board NFPA -90 approved, 1.0 Ib. density. 5. Finish: a. Standard factory finish. (1) Galvanized and painted. b. Submit color options, if any, for approval by Architect. 6. Completely weatherproof. a. Joints sealed to prevent leakage. b. Tops crowned or sloped to drain. No pockets to retain water. 7. Gasketed access panels. a. Quick opening handles. b. Brass or stainless steel hinge. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Drain Pans: 1. Under cooling coils and fans. 2. Insulated. C. Unit Base: 1. One piece welded assembly. 2. 14 gauge formed bearing members. . 3. Base to curb sealing gasketing. 4. Curb overhang. 5. Lifting lugs. a. Use for unit tiedown points. D. Roof Curb: 1. Galvanized steel construction with: a. Wood nailer strips. b. Base plate. c. Insulation: (1) 1 inch thick. (2) 1 Y2 Ib. density. (3) UL listed, fire retardant. 2. Match unit base. a. Gaskets between unit and curb. 3. Complete weatherproof installation. 4. Similar to Stiles Corp. Model No. SC -2AP. 2.04 FANS A. Refer to Section 15860: Centrifugal Fans. B. AMCA certification in accordance with ARI Standards 210 and AMCA Standard 2408 for centrifugal fans. • C. Performance: 1. See fan schedule on Drawings. 2. Capacities: minimum as scheduled. 3. Performance based on sea level conditions. 4. Capable of accommodating static pressure variation of plus or minus 10 percent. 5. Performance with inlet vanes: manufacturer's published catalogue rating of fan with vanes. 6. High efficiency type motors. September 30, 2003 Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units Permit Issue 15771 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Wheels: z 1. Formed steel or extruded aluminum. 1 2. 24 inch diameter and larger: w a. Backward curved air foil blade. cc 2 3. Under 24 inch diameter: a. . Backward curved blade. v U O 4. Under 12 inch: cn 0 co Lu a. Forward curved blade. I H 5. Factory balanced, statically and dynamically. co Li. iii p E. Power Return: 2 g Q 1. Return 80 percent of supply air, minimum. 2. Forward curved centrifugal fan. co ▪ C7 a. Belt- driven. t' w b. Multiple or single. Z c. Similar to supply fan specified above. Z 0 ` 3: Smaller units may use propeller fan. w • w 0 O N 0 )— w u- 1 7 5" 0 Off' z J 2.05 COILS .., A. Design and Construction: 1 J 1. Extended surface type coils: a. Tubes: Copper. (1) Minimum thickness: 0.020 inch. b. Plate or helical fins of copper or aluminum. (1) Plate fins: flat or conformed. (2) Helical fins to be solder dipped. (3) Minimum thickness: 0.008 inch. 2. Maximum Face Length, 12 feet per section. 3. Rows and fin spacing. a. Minimum rows and fins as scheduled.. 4. Circuiting as required. 5. Tubulators permitted. 6. Headers: Copper tubing or cast iron. 7. Certified by A.R.I. per current Standard 410. 8. Pressure and leak tested at factory. B. Headers totally enclosed. C. Refrigerant Coils: 1. Serpentine type. 2. Brass or copper header arranged: a. To prevent trapping of oil. b. To distribute liquid refrigerant to circuits. September 30, 2003 Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units Permit issue 15771 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 GAS FURNACE C. Burner: 3. Silver soldered or brazed joints. 4. For refrigerant R -22. 5. Include factory assembled multi- circuit distributor. 6. One circuit per compressor. 7. Expansion valves. A. Completely assembled and wired gas fired heating system integral within unit. 1. UL and FM approved specifically for outdoor applications. 2. Downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. 3. Gas supply through side or bottom of unit. 4. Factory pressure and leak tested. B. Heat Exchanger: 1. Tubular two pass design. 2. 16 -gauge stainless steel primary heat exchanger surface. 3. 18 -gauge secondary heat exchanger surfaces. 4. Factory pressure and leak tested. 1. Industrial type. 2. With air proving switch. 3. Ceramic cone burner assembly. D. Combustion Blower: E. Gas Safety Controls: 1. Centrifugal type fan. 2. Fan motor with built -in thermal overload. A. Compressors: 2.07 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Electric flame safety controls to prove combustion air prior to ignition sequence. 2. Two stage with sixty second delay between first and second stage gas valves. 3. Continuous electronic flame supervision. 4. Air -flow proving switch. 1. Type: Serviceable semi - hermetic or hermetic type. a. Direct driven. b. 1750 rpm. 2. Capacity unloaders. 3. Unloaded starting. 4. Vibration isolators. 5. Suction strainer. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -6 1. Stainless steel clips. 2. Latching hardware. J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 6. Crankcase oil level sight glass. a. Oil charging valve. 7. Forced feed lubrication with reversible rotating oil pump. 8. Magnets in oil circuit. 9. Ring valves. 10. Backseating suction and discharge service valves. 11. Suction line accumulator to prevent compressor slugging. B. Condenser: 1. Direct driven propeller type fans: a. Permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Built -in thermal overload protection. c. With safety guard. 2. Extended surface coils: a. Seamless copper tubes. b. Aluminum fins. 3. Sub - cooling circuit. 4. Accumulator. 5. Low ambient temperature control. 2.08 FILTERS A. UL Class II bag filters., 1. 30 percent minimum efficiency per ASHRAE Std. 52 -76. B. Mounted in galvanized steel frames. 2.09 ECONOMIZER DAMPERS. A. Fully modulating dampers: 1. Outside air. 2. Retum air. 3. Exhaust air. Construction: 1. See Section 15910: DAMPERS. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units . 15771 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.10 CONTROLS A. Electrical Wiring: 1. Electrical wiring and controls: Conform to requirement of NEC and State of Washington. 2. Wiring color -coded and /or numbered for easy identification. 3. Unit control panel will include: a. Integral power disconnect b. Circuit breaker type overload protection c. Starters d. Relays e. Factory wired f. Run tested prior to shipment B. Automatic temperature controls for overall operation of building systems provided under Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). C. Provide internal controls required for operation of economizer system and condensing unit operation, upon starting signal from external control interface. 1. See Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS). D. Provide additional relays, internal wiring, additional facilities and terminals to make external control sequences compatible with internal control sequence. E. Provide electronic control circuit with discharge sensor to: 1. Start compressors. 2. Load and unload refrigeration with capacity changes. F. Provide time delays and hot gas bypass to prevent short cycling compressor between Toad stages for VAV units. G. Provide Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) control interface with BMS in order to adjust supply and return air for speeds, as necessary. H. Short Cycle Control: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Prevent compressor short cycling resulting from rapid change in thermostat setting. 2. Prevent compressor restart within five minutes after shutdown. Head Pressure Control: 1. Condenser fan control. 2. Maintenance head pressure control down to —20° F outside air temperature. Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -8 .r; 4 J _1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Provide remote control and monitoring panel for each unit to contain: Z 1. System operating switch �' 2. Fan operating pilot light w re 2 3. Fan malfunction pilot light 4. Cooling malfunction pilot Tight � v 5. Dirty filter pilot light p co u) la J PART 3 — EXECUTION Cl) u. w O 3.01 INSTALLATION 5 g Q u_ A. Air Conditioners: to d Z 1. Reassemble factory fabricated components in field, at no additional cost, where units Z H are shipped in sections. 2. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. z 1- w uj D o 0 O- 1. Hold -down method: 0 I—' a. Two restraints on each of two long sides. = w b. Cable loop at each restraint point as specified in Section 15240: t-- v VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS. u_ p' .. Z w U � ' Ir M .: 0 B. Unit Mounting Bases: C. Piping Connections: 1. Gas: See Section 15240: GAS SYSTEMS. 2. Condensate drain piping: See Section 15060: PIPING AND ACCESSORIES. 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND START -UP A. Start -up work shall be by service personnel employed by manufacturer. B. Test and adjust completed air handling units to insure proper operation. 1. Complete and thorough start -up of the refrigeration cycle. 2. Check that: a. All drives are aligned. b. Set screws are tightened and seated. c. All dampers fully closed on return, fully open on outside air and exhaust air. 3. Operate economizer cycle through its extremes: 'a. Using unit controls to check calibration and proper closure. 4. Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent until: a. Ductwork is clean. b. Filters in place. c. Bearings lubricated. d. Fan has been run under observation. September 30, 2003 Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units Permit Issue 15771 -9 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provide operational tests to demonstrate proper operation and adequate capacity at completion of balancing and adjusting, D. Supply and install sheaves as necessary for final air balancing. E. Coordinate operational tests with Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) and Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. F. Submit report certifying above work to Architect. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Packaged Air - Cooled Roof -Top Units 15771 -10 .1.2 j ai J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNtSYS - Tukwila z Q :� J U 00 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: N W . Cooling tower water cyclone separator with controls, valves and closed loop liquid t� u recovery tank. w O 2 g Q CD D I- w F- O z W w U � O N OH W z A. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the pump, motor filter, separator, valves and all H _ z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 • RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. E. 1.03 SUBMITTALS appurtenances. SECTION 15786 WATER FILTER AND CYCLONE SEPARATOR Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. Section 15160: Pumps. Section 15170: Electric Motors. Section 15708: Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. Section 15890: Water Treatment. B. Submit all component sizes, capacities and piping arrangements. C. Submit controls, mounting details, materials of construction. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Filters: Process Efficiency Products, Filtomat, United Industries. B. Cyclone Separators: Lakos, Griswold, Filtrite. September 30, 2003 Water Filter and Cyclone Separator Permit Issue 15786 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila 2.02 CYCLONE SEPARATORS z A. Provide a pre - engineered, factory assembled centrifugal separator system with » Z • interconnecting piping to the closed loop liquid recovery tank and cooling tower water piping w as shown on the Drawings. The system shall be complete with flanged inlet and outlets, = -I pressure gauges, automatic purge system, circulation pump, electrical control panel, v automatic and hand valves, piping, 1 inch purge outlet, mounting bracket. v o B. Separation tank shall be constructed of 3/16 inch carbon steel with top mounted pressure w H gauge and auto -purge system. Provide positive sealing gasketed access to the internal ' "' CO u_ components of the tank. Tank operating pressure shall be 150 pounds per square inch. w 0 Provide 150 pound A.N.S.I. raised -face flanges. 2 J MM C. The separator shall be designed with tangential entry into the acceptance chamber. Upon w tangential entry, the liquid /solids are drawn through internal tangential slots and accelerated • ‘ _ into the reduced diameter separation cylinder. The solids heavier than the carrying liquid are F- _ centrifugally spiraled down the perimeter of the separation cylinder past the deflector stool ? and allowed to accumulate into the separator's collection chamber. The liquid (free of Z 0 separable solids) will follow the vortex created and centered on the deflector stool up through w w the interior of the separator cylinder and into the vortex finder which becomes the separator outlet. w O D. The separator shall incorporate a pressure relief line from the collection chamber to the w w venturi located in the tangential inlet to enhance separation by facilitating quiescent solids F U sedimentation in the collection chamber. Quiescent solids accumulation shall also be u_ ~O facilitated by the baffle spin arrestor below the deflector stool in the collection chamber. z Separation and collection of solids shall not promote excessive wear nor require a continuous v N "involuntary" underflow. p. H . O Z E. The control system shall be pre -piped and pre -wired for automatic separation and purge to clean the solids collector when the differential pressure across the tank increases to a preset point. Pipe purge line to closed loop liquid recovery tank. F. Provide shop coats of primer and finish enamel. G. Provide factory supplied wall mounting brackets or floor stands. H. Provide Lakos Model TCX -0100 -SRV or equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 Comply with manufacturer's instruction regarding installation, particular with regard to mounting height above or below operating levels of the cooling tower sump and make -up levels. 3.02 Run drain lines to an approved indirect waste. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Water Filter and Cyclone Separator 15786 -2 _J• MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3'.03 Protect cyclone separators and piping exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures with factory installed electric heat tape and insulation. Protect the pre- strainer, pump, piping, valves, pressure switch tubing and filter tank. 3.04 All interconnections (piping, wiring, control), and interlocks between controls and cooling tower water pumps shall be by Division 15. Provide 2 sets of dry contacts for interface to Building Management System for the separator. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Water Filter and Cyclone Separator 15786 -3 PART 1 - GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 SUBMITTALS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15800 DUCTWORK z �w 6 00 N0 1. Supply and return ductwork. cn w 2. Fasteners and Sealants. -I H 3. Duct Testing. co w 4. Installation of Equipment and Materials Furnished Under Other Sections. w 0 5. Installation of Duct Smoke Detectors. 2 6. Access Doors. 5 w c H w z1- F- O zF- A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: A. Submit the following for review: 1. Submit ductwork shop fabrication and shop construction standards prior to submittal of ductwork shop drawings. 2. Ductwork shop fabrication and shop construction standards shall include all applicable shop details and product data. Include the following: a. Duct reinforcement tables for all pressure classes, duct materials (galvanized steel, aluminum, stainless steel, black iron) and ductwork shapes (rectangular, round, spiral, flat oval) to be used on this project. b. Duct reinforcement tables shall include material gages, transverse joint reinforcement type and standard shop joint spacing. c. Transfer duct construction detail. d. Acoustical lining, perforated metal liner, adhesive, nosing and fastening cuts and details. e. Installation details for volume dampers, single blade and multiblade type, remote and cord operated remote volume dampers, control dampers, fire damper installation detail. f. Duct access doors. g. Duct fitting construction details such as rectangular and radius elbows, turning vanes, offsets, branch connections, etc. h. Duct support and attachment details. Flanged duct connection details for all systems and each manufacturer used on project. Minimum duct construction gages shall be as per SMACNA duct reinforcement tables. Duct gages may not be reduced based on alterative jointing manufacturer's recommendations. J. Ductwork sealant. k. Diffuser ductwork connection details. Duct penetrating full height partition details. m. Flexible connection details. 3. Product Data including manufacturer's installation instructions, application, materials of construction, gauges, descriptive literature, and maintenance data for: a. Ductwork and fittings. b. Plenums. c. Fasteners and sealants. d. Access doors. 15800 -1 U O - O )- w H- LLO • z U 0 = 1-. z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Prior to mounting or hanging of mechanical equipment or ductwork, obtain approval from Architect for proposed method of mounting particularly in existing buildings. Submit weights and location of all mechanical equipment and ductwork to the Architect for approval well in advance of general construction work to allow sufficient time for any structural evaluation, critique and necessary redesign to accommodate the installation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS • A. The latest editions of specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Handbooks (Latest Editions). 2. SMACNA — Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, inc.: a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, 1995 with Addendum 1 dated November 1997. b. Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, Fourth Edition, 1992. c. HVAC Systems Testing Adjusting and Balancing. d. Seismic Restraint Manual Addendum dated November 1993. e. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 1 Edition. 3. UMC — Uniform Mechanical Code, Standard 6 -1: Standard for Metal Ducts, Latest Edition. 4. AABC — Associated Air Balance Council Manual: National Standards for Total System Balance. 5. ANSI — American National Standard Institute. 6. NFPA — National Fire Protection Association Standards: a. NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. NFPA 90B, Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. c. NFPA 96, Exhaust Systems. 7. UL — Underwriters' Laboratories, Standards for Safety: UL 181, UL 555 (Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers) UL 555S (Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems). 8. The State of Washington Codes. B. Where two or more references conflict, the most stringent, as determined by Architect shall take precedence. 1.04 DUCT CLASSIFICATION A. Duct classification is based on pressure classification as scheduled in Table 1 -1 and as described in the 1995 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible). Comply with NFPA 90A when ducts traverse through smoke zones. Comply with UBC /UMC when more stringent than NFPA 90A or SMACNA standards. B. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams, Snap -lock or button punch seams are not acceptable. If SMACNA seal class A or B is specified, the longitudinal seam shall be sealed from the inside. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15800 -2 Duct System SMACNA Table No. SMACNA Pressure Classification (in ga 9e) ter SMACNA Seal Classification All supply ducts on variable volume systems from fan discharge to terminal units. 1 -5 +1 B All ductwork downstream of terminal units to diffusers and parts of return or exhaust ducts under positive pressure 1-4 +1 B All return, exhaust and relief ducts, where not used for smoke exhaust under negative pressure 3 -2B -2 B Flexible ducts +1 B I Outside air supply systems 1 -4 +1 B J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: UNISYS - Tukwila C. Minimum pressure classification for each duct system and appropriate S MACNA table references are as follows: 1. Steel Sheets: a. Cold rolled steel sheets, lock forming quality meeting ASTM A -653 and A- 653M. b. Black or galvanized as specified. - c. Galvanizing: 1% ounces per square foot both sides. Miscellaneous Products: 1. Screws and Rivets: a. Same material as sheet, except as noted. b. Zinc or cadmium plated with neoprene grommets, permitted on galvanized sheets. c. Minimum screw size: No. 10. d. Minimum rivet size: 4 pound. 2 Duct Sealants: a. Sealing compound shall be flexible water -based adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure classes. Sealant shall be UV- resistant, conform to AST4 E84, be UL 723 listed and meet NFPA requirements for Class 1 ductwork. 15800 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Flexible Connections shall be used where ductwork connects to rotating, vibrating or noise producing machinery. Connectors shall be attached in such a manner to provide an airtight and waterproof seal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Flange Gasket: Provide a continuous butyl rubber gasket which complies with UL Standard 181 and 723 testing and meets MIL -C 18969B and TTS- S- 001657. This material shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type of materials that will support fungal or bacterial growth. Gasket width shall match duct flange or angel connection with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Ductmate Industries Model 440 gasket tape or approved equal. c. Liner Adhesive used to adhere insulation to metal duct shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 723 specifications. Ductmate Industries PROtack Liner adhesive or approved equal. d. Lagging Adhesive shall be applied to insulated ductwork where the insulated edge of the duct would otherwise be exposed to the airflow. Materials shall comply with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723 testing. Ductmate Industries Lag -It or approved equal. 3. Hard - setting joint tape shall be a UL listed two -part tape consisting of woven fiber tape impregnated with activator /adhesive of polyvinyl acetate type. a. Flame spread: 10 maximum; Smoke developed: 0. 4. Spring Fasteners: Self- ejecting oval head stud and receptacle with screwdriver slot. 5. Provide angles, tie rods and structural steel shapes for reinforcing ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. 6. Slide -on Transverse Joint Connectors: a. Prefabricated slide -on transverse duct connectors and components shall be accepted. Ducts constructed using prefabricated systems shall refer to the manufacturer guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper joint reinforcement. Ductmate Industries, Ward, Nexus, or approved equal. b. Formed -on flanges shall be constructed as T -25 NB flanges, of which the construction guidelines are given in Figure 1-4 of the 1995 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition. No other construction standards pertaining to formed -on flanges shall be accepted. Formed -on flanges shall include the use of corners, bolts, cleat and gasket. c. All components shall be metal unless other materials are required by code or specified. 1. Conform to UL 214, NFPA 90A and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. 2. Provide roll formed 1 -inch long minimum or match length and width of fan, plenum or machinery connection companion flange: a. Aluminum, 1 gauge heavier than ductwork, plenum, fan or machinery connected. b. Galvanized steel, 26 gauge minimum or matching gauge of ductwork, fan, plenum or machinery connected. c. Other materials same as gauge and material as ductwork, plenum, fan or machinery connected. 3. Provide 2 -inch slack in fabric and install to allow minimum movement of 1 inch. 4. Length of fabric connections: 4 inches minimum; 10 inches maximum. 5. Materials: a. Indoor installations shall be a UL listed, fire retardant neoprene or vinyl coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 30 ounces per square yard and rated to 200° F. 15800 -4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z D. Turning Vanes: w QQ 2 1 0 O 0 co o CO J � w • O J E. Rectangular main duct to round duct take -off fittings shall be factory- fabricated spin -in fittings. • W 1. Die - formed, same material as ductwork. z 2. Pressure ratings shall be equal to the duct pressure rating in which they are installed. 0 3. Provide balancing damper with locking regulator. w �. uj 2.02 ROUND AND OVAL DUCTWORK D 0 O • N w I- H O W z O — - O H z A. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue General: b. Outdoor installations shall be a UL listed ultra violet Tight resistant Hypalon coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 24 ounces per square yard and rated to 250° F. c. Flame spread rating: 25 maximum, smoke developed rating: 50 maximum. 1. Galvanized steel ductwork: galvanized steel or painted black steel, except as noted. 2. Other ductwork: same material as ductwork. 3. Construction shall meet or exceed SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards ". a. Use of single wall vanes with % -inch trailing edge shall be limited to maximum air velocity of 2000 feet per minute and a maximum duct dimension of 18 inches. b. Double wall vanes shall be used in ducts where air velocity exceeds 2000 feet per minute or any duct dimension over 18 inches. 1. Provide factory- fabricated spiral lockseam duct, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Factory- fabricated longitudinal seams are acceptable for ducts larger than standard factory sizes and are required where branch sizes, fitting sizes, air inlet or outlet sizes exceed the seam -to -seam dimension. 3. Round and oval ducts joints shall be constructed as follows: a. Up to 20 -inch equivalent diameter: Interior slip coupling beaded at center and fastened t o the duct with screws. Seal joint with approved sealant continuously applied around joint prior to assembly and after fastening. Make certain that majority of sealant is on the interior of the joint. b. From 21 -inch to 72 -inch equivalent diameter: Use joining system as described in a. above or join using a three piece gasketed flanged joint consisting t o two i nternal flanges, w ith i ntegral m astic s ealant a nd o ne external closure band which compresses the gasket between the internal flanges similar to Ductmate Industries "Spiralmate" or "Ovalmate" or approved equals. 4. Factory- fabricated fittings shall be same manufacturer as duct and the same material and construction as duct in which installed. a. Tees: 45° conical tap with center -line take -off, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuously welded seams. b. Elbows: (1) Segmented seams or standing segmented seams. (2) Continuously welded for positive or negative 2 -inch water gauge and greater: (a) 2 gores — less than 35° (b) 3 gores — 36° through 71° (c) 5 gores — over 71° to 90° maximum 15800 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 B. Single -Wall Ducts: z 1. Materials of construction: 4- z a. Galvanized steel: Supply and return, general and toilet exhaust ducts. rt w 6 D C. Factory- Fabricated Accessories: tJ O N 1. Couplings. co LLI _ 2. Volume dampers. - H 3. Bellmouth fittings. N LL w0 4. End caps. 2 5. Angle rings. .K., g 6. Insulation ends: Connections of double to single wall ducts. w j 7. Access doors: Hinged, framed or pressure relief per SMACNA "HVAC Duct co Cy Construction Standards" Fig. 2 -10. 1=— w z 1.- H- O zH- FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. W U0 1. Provide UL 181, Class I air duct with polymeric liner, labeled for compliance with 0 H UMC. Use only where indicated. 2. Flexible ducts shall meet criteria as defined in Section 3 of the 1995 SMACNA H v Manual, HVAC Duct construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition or u- l— as specified. — 0 iui z B. Static Pressure Class up to 1 -Inch Water Gauge. V =' O t- z General: 1. Insulated Flexible Duct: a.. Maximum working pressure 1 -inch water gauge. b. Nominal 1 inch insulation with vapor barrier. c. Maximum thermal conductivity 0.27 BTUH per square foot per degree F per inch at 75° F. 2. Similar to Wiremold Type WG. 3. Use at air inlets and air outlets. Provide factory fabricated collar. Flexible ductwork clamps shall be adjustable screw type stainless steel straps approved for use with flexible ductwork. 2.04 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors shall comply with the 1995 SMACNA— Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15800 -6 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Duct a ccess d oors s hall b e i nsulated o r u ninsulated, s ame as duct. Make completely accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Minimum Size: a. 20 inches by 14 inches, 18 inches by 16 inches or Larger. b. Ducts less than 16 inches: one dimension 20 inches; other dimension 2 inches less than duct width or height. c. Larger sizes where required for access. 2. Systems designed for 2 -inch water gauge and less (SMACNA Seal Class B or C) shall utilize a hinged and cam, square framed access door. 3. All other systems shall utilize a hinged access door. Construct door in accord with Figure 2 -10 of the 1995 SMACNA Manual "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" second Edition. 4. Provide in following locations: a. Coils in ducts: entering and leaving side. b. Automatic dampers: linkage side. c. Balancing dampers and backdraft dampers. d. Fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire /smoke dampers. e. Duct - mounted smoke detectors, sprinkler heads, heat detectors. f. Duct humidifiers. g. All controls, sensing, processing, transmitting and actuating devices. 5. Provide permanent label on all access doors identifying the concealed components as specified above. 3.01 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Construct with gauges, joints, bracing, reinforcing, and other details per latest UMC, SMACNA, or NFPA unless specified otherwise. Comply with most stringent. 2. Ductwork shall not exceed the deflection limits established in UMC Standard 6 -1- Standard for Metal Ducts, 1997 Edition. Maximum allowable deflection for transverse joints and intermediate reinforcements shall not exceed 0.25 -inch for duct widths up to 100 inches and shall not exceed 0.3% of the span for duct widths greater than 100 inches. 3. Construct ducts with NFPA 90A gauges when traversing smoke zones. 4. Construct of galvanized sheet metal, except where otherwise indicated or specified. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net, inside, clear, dimensions. For internally lined ducts, add lining thickness to determine metal duct dimensions. 6. At exposed duct penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings, provide sheet metal angle type escutcheons fastened to the duct only. 7. Provide minimum 26 -gauge sheet metal construction for ducts crossing fire rated corridors. Refer to Architectural drawings for wall types and ratings. 8. Install exposed ducts as high as possible but within 36 inches of the ceiling. Coordinate with other trades to maintain not less than 90 inches clearance above finished floor, unless indicated otherwise. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15800 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Elbows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 9. Transitions: Pitch sides of duct in "diverging" or "converging" airflow. a. Maximum of 15 °- included angle. b. Exception: Provide 71/2z concentric diverging velocity cones at the discharge of vane axial fans. 10. Duct Openings: Provide openings where required to accommodate thermometers, smoke detectors, controllers, wiring, conduit, tubing etc. Insert through airtight rubber grommets. a. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems: (1) include threaded metal cap, spring loaded cap or threaded plug to eliminate any air leakage. (2) For Pitot tube tests install Ventlock No. 699 and 699 -2 instrument test holes. (3) Coordinate locations of openings with balancing contractor. b. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork for insertion of instruments, install insulation material metal sleeve, flanged on one end for use as plug. Reseal vapor barrier. 11. Duct lining: Install lining in ducts and plenums as specified in Section 15241: Acoustics. 12. Flexible Duct Connections. a. Install: (1) At connections to fan discharge, fan coils, heat pumps, air conditioning units and all air handling equipment. (2) As indicated on Drawings or specified in other sections. 13. Refer to SMACNA duct construction standards for outdoor flexible connection • details. 14. Volume dampers: a. Install damper as specified in Section 15910: Dampers and Section 15940: Air Outlets and Inlets. b. Install damper in branch duct for all air inlets and outlets at accessible location most remote from air inlet or outlet. 1. Use radius elbows in rectangular ducts unless otherwise indicated. Centerline radius shall be a minimum of 150% of duct width. 2. Where space does not permit duct radius specified above, install short radius or square elbow with vanes per SMACNA duct construction standards. 3. Do not use turning vanes in the following applications: a. Grease and vapor exhausts. b. Fume hood exhaust. c. Breeching. d. Toilet exhaust ducts. e. Any gravity ductwork. f. Clothes dryer exhaust. g. Hoistway vent. 4. For 2 -inch water gauge or above pressure class ductwork, spot weld turning vanes to duct. 5. For all 2 -way splits in supply, return and exhaust systems, provide 2 elbows, proportionally sized per SMACNA Duct Standards, either radius or square. A single fitting is acceptable with turning vanes and duct openings sized as specified. 15800 -8 { Duct Diameter End Lap No. of Rivets /Screws in Slip Joint 8 inches 3 / -inch 4 9 to 16 inches 1 -inch 6 17 inches & up 1%-inch 7 plus 3 per inch of circumference J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila --1 September 30, 2003 Permit Issue C. Rectangular Duct Joints and Seams: 1. Provide standing, longitudinal seams, except where flush drive slip seam is specified. 2. Use grooved seam for exposed ducts except in garages, electrical or mechanical rooms, and where required for clearance. 3. "Duct Connection System" joints, may be used in lieu of standing seams. Plastic clips are only allowed for breakaway connections. 4. Fabricate ductwork and coordinate installation such that seams or joints shall not be cut or interrupted for the installation of branches, fittings, dampers, access doors, air inlets or air outlets. D. Joint Sealing: 1. Seal to SMACNA Seal Classifications previously specified by one of the following methods: a. 6 -ounce canvas strip, 6 inches wide adhered with lagging adhesive. b. Hardcast PC -S tape (Duct Tape Not Allowed) and United Hi- Velocity sealer. c. Applications as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Seal punched holes and corner cracks (Duct Tape Not Allowed). 3. After installation and testing reseal joints found to be leaking. 3.02 ROUND AND OVAL DUCTWORK A. Joints between ducts: 1. Construct with beaded sleeve joints. 2. Mechanically fasten with sheet metal screws or pop rivets except for clothes dryer ductwork. 3. Duct sealer shall be applied to male end and over all joint, screw and rivet heads. 4. Seal as specified for rectangular ductwork. B. Joints, duct and fitting: 1. Slip projecting collar of fittings into duct with a minimum insertion length of 2 inches. 2. Apply duct sealer. Seal as specified for rectangular ductwork. 3. Mechanical fastener schedule: 15800 -9 z re w ug 00 N co Ili J = H wO 2 �Q _ I— w Z H F— 0 z H w O H w LL- O w Z c o O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK D. 3.04 DUCT A. C. Junctions between ducts: 1. Branch take -off from round duct: 45 °. z D. Horizontal supports shall be one piece clamp band strap, minimum one strap per section. 4- W Support fittings as required by SMACNA. E. Use angle iron braces for duct reinforcing. Refer to the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction _1 0 Standards figure numbers 1 -9 thru 1 -12. v o F. Additional bracing: Provide additional bracing and support for ductwork as required due to the large plenum space and the requirement for all ducts and equipment to be installed within 36" of the ceiling w 0 level. g Cy A. Provide continuous, single pieces. H = B. Maximum Length: 6 feet. Z C. End Connections: w O U� O 5 0 i- t w u. O w V N` 1= O ~ z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Connect to duct collars, terminal unit connections and round air outlets per manufacturer's instructions. 2. Secure with strap clamps specified above. Installation: 1. Support per SMACNA. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS General: 1. Support horizontal ducts with hangers of size and spacing as indicated in SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. 2. Attachment to structure shall be as specified in Section 15140: Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. 3. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints for ducts shall be as specified in Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. 4. Seismic restraints shall comply with SMACNA or UMC, whichever is more stringent. Horizontal Duct Supports: 1. Install hangers at each change in direction of duct. 2. Strap hangers: a. Extend strap down both sides of ducts. b. Turn under bottom two inches minimum. Provide a minimum of 2 screws per side. c. Screw hangers to bottom, upper and lower sides of ducts at 12 inches on center maximum. d. Seal all screw penetrations of ductwork. 3. Angle hangers: a. Per SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints. b. Seal all penetrations of ductwork. 15800 -10 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS A. Install the following equipment and materials furnished under other sections. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions, code requirements, UL listing and the requirements of local authorities. 1. Backdraft and balancing dampers. 2. Fire, smoke, and fire /smoke dampers. 3. Control dampers, automatic louver dampers. 4. Access doors. Allow for adequate length of duct to install access door for all dampers. 5: Smoke detectors, flow switches, controls and fire alarm devices. 6. Pressure, temperature, humidity sensors /transmitters. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION 15800 -11 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Z re 1.1 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: w w J F. CO LL Ili O u- CA a F W Z � O ; Z H: W U • � O -; OH = U . I- LL w z 0 PART 1 — GENERAL 1. Centrifugal Fans: a. Cabinet. b. Plug (Unhoused Centrifugal). 2. Axial Fans: a. Propeller. b. Mixed Flow. 3. Roof Exhaust Fans: a. Backdraft dampers for vaneaxial fans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15860 FANS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15140 - Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Sleeves. C. Section 15170 - Electric Motors. D. Section 15171 - Variable Frequency Drives. E. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. F. Section 15241 — Acoustics. G. Section 15771 — Packaged Air Cooled Rooftop Units. H. Section 15910 — Dampers. I. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. j A. Submit construction details, gauges of fan wheels and housing components and certified dimensioned drawings. B. Submit manufacturer's latest published data for weights, materials, accessories and installation details. Fans 15860 -1 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Submit full technical rating data based on tests in accordance with current AMCA standards and in an AMCA approved laboratory. Fan curves shall indicate the relationship of airflow to static or total pressure for various fan speeds. Brake horsepower, recommended selection range, and limits of operation shall also be indicated on the curves. Indicate operating point on the fan curves at design air quantity and indicate the manufacturer's recommended drive Toss factor for the specific application. Tabular fan performance data is not acceptable. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Include manufacturer's certified fan volume- pressure performance curves, from shutoff to free delivery. Consider drive efficiency in motor selection according to manufacturer's published recommendation or according to AMCA Publication 203, Appendix L. 2. Include certified sound power ratings based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 300. Correct all ratings and curves for altitude and temperature where applicable. D. Motor construction and efficiencies. E. Bearing life calculations based on maximum design speed for the class of each fan scheduled on the drawing. F. Fan shaft critical speed at scheduled performance. G. For variable air volume application, include data that indicates the effect of capacity control devices, such as inlet vanes, on performance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For each fan, provide a multispeed fan performance curve with multiple horsepowers on a single sheet. Computer generated single speed fan curves are not acceptable. B. Provide a full two -year parts and labor warrantee for all fan - mounted control air compressors. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Construct all fans, except vaneaxial adjustable blade, to comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Standards and Bulletins. Certify these fans by AMCA for performance and sound ratings and provide the AMCA Performance and Construction Seal for Air and Sound. 1. AMCA 203 - AMCA Fan Application Manual — Troubleshooting. 2. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for Rating. 3. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 4. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 5. ANSI /AFBMA 9: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 6. ANSI /AFBMA 11: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. Fans 15860 -2 -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Centrifugal Fans: Twin City, Chicago, Buffalo, Greenheck. B. Propeller Fans: Twin City, Greenheck, Bayley, Woods. C. Roof Exhaust Fans: Greenheck, Penn, Cook, Greenheck. 2.02 GENERAL — ALL FANS A. Unless noted otherwise, provide discharge direction and drive arrangement to suit space conditions and conform as closely as possible to the layouts shown on the Drawings. Maintain clearance for service and access to all components. B. Provide factory- fabricated, - assembled, - tested, and - finished fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. Fans shall be quiet operating and non - overloading over the entire range of operation. C. Provide fan motors in accordance with Section 15170: Electric Motors. Size motor to drive its respective fan when the fan is operating at a speed 5 percent in excess of that required to meet the scheduled fan performance. Do not select motors within the service factor for this range. D. Statically and dynamically balance fan wheels /impellers at the factory and certify balance. Design all vertically mounted fans to withstand the vertical thrust loads. E. Provide precision self - aligning bearings designed to prevent leakage of oil or grease. Provide cups, oil chambers, Zerk or Alemite lubrication fittings in accessible locations for ease of lubrication. Provide heavy duty split pillow block bearings with tapered, double -row spherical roller assemblies. Provide bearings with AFBMA L service life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum published fan operating conditions for the AMCA construction class required unless noted or specified otherwise. F. Provide copper lubrication leads, for lubrication of intemal motors and bearings, extending to a capped termination point external to the fan casing or air handling unit. G. Extend wire leads on fans driven by direct motor drive from the motor junction box in airtight rigid walled conduit, to a junction box mounted external to the fan casing. H. On fans driven by belt drive provide standard "V- groove" type oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic belts with cast iron or steel sheaves suitable for the service intended. Fan sheaves shall be non - adjustable type with removable machined bushings. Provide adjustable pitch type motor sheaves with double locking feature, to 10 percent above and below the rated fan speed. Dynamically balance sheaves with over three grooves. Provide at least two belts and sheaves each capable of carrying the entire load with one belt broken. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila I. Provide pre- formed expanded metal and sheet metal belt guards at the fan and motor shafts, for all exposed sheaves and belts. Guard shall comply with OSHA and SMACNA Z requirements; 0.1046 -inch thick, 3/4 -inch diamond -mesh wire screen welded to steel angle Q frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short- circuiting H z vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of et 2 tachometer with guard in place. 6 D 00 J. For motors in the airstream, provide TEFC type motors, unless other types are required as N 0 specified in Section 15170; Electric Motors. I H N u_ K. Provide solid hot rolled steel drive shafts, accurately turned and polished to a close tolerance w 0 where in contact with bearings. Secure fan wheels /impellers to the drive shaft by a key and 2 keyway assembly. Shafts shall be sized for first critical speed and at least 1.43 times maximum speed for AMCA fan class. s2 L. Manufacture fans of materials and paint finishes suitable for the service intended. H w Z F. M. Construct wheels /impellers exposed to normal atmospheres of cast aluminum or hot dip - 0 galvanized steel and finished with two layers of factory applied non - scaling paint. W a al N. Construct fans exposed to corrosive atmospheres using all- welded construction of corrosion 0 CI resistant materials suitable for intended use, and factory finished with epoxy or other 00 H approved corrosion resistant coatings. W w U 0. I- iz Provide fans exposed to elevated temperatures with components rated for high temperature service. Do not use belt drive assembles exposed to the airstream. Use direct drive motors certified for high temperature service. ui N H = P. Electrically ground all fans and drives to prevent accumulation of static charge. Indicate Z F- grounding method in fan submittals. Q. Provided threaded drain plugs at fan housing low points. R. Completely house fan assemblies exposed to weather in weatherproof enclosures including motor and drive. S. Fan wheels /impellers and housings shall be relieved of residual stresses produced in the forming process. T. Provide fans used to exhaust grease -laden vapors with motor drive and bearings completely external of air stream, and fan housings continuously welded inside and outside. U. Provide housings with integral inlet and discharge flanges, complete with bolt holes for flexible or hard duct connections. Shop fabricate any companion flanges required for connections to sound attenuators. Companion flanges shall be rolled angles matched to both fan housing and sound attenuators. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -4 --, • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila V. Provide variable frequency drives as specified in Section 15171: Variable Frequency Drives. Q • ~Z W. Provide gasketed access doors to permit routine maintenance and inspection of motor and o: w internal components. Inside surface of access door shall be flush with the inside surface of 6 m the fan housing. U O u) 0 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS co = J H A. Scroll Type: co w O 1. Provide airfoil (AF), fan wheels, and single width single inlet (SWSI), as specified or 2 7 indicated on the Drawings, enclosed in a scroll shaped fan housing with shaped u- } cutoff and doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components. N d 2. Weld or securely rivet fan blades to the hub plate and rim. = w •---) 3. Fan housings: Z H a. Heavy gauge construction, continuously welded inside and outside. i— O —•' b. Housings shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration or pulsation and have w (- spun, aerodynamically designed spun inlet cones or inlet venturis for smooth 2 w __) air entry into the wheels. m 0 1 c. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99, Class I. O P- 4 . All fan wheels shall have tapered spun wheel cones or shrouds providing stable flow 0 l— and high rigidity. Housing with lock seam construction or partial weld shall not be 11.1 w acceptable unless for smaller fan sizes (12 inch wheel diameters or less) where it is 1- F standard construction for models listed on Drawings. — O w 0- 1. Provide scroll type centrifugal fans, factory installed within a cabinet enclosure, and z comply with the requirements of Scroll Type Centrifugal Fans. 2. Internally isolate fan and motor assemblies from the cabinet. 3. Provide gasketed access doors and panels for inspection and routine maintenance of the internal components. • 4. Provide solid state variable speed controllers for small ceiling mounted direct driven exhaust and transfer fans. B. C. Plug Type: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Cabinet Type: 1. Single width, single inlet air foil type fan blades. 2. Plug fans shall have self aligning pillow block bearings with minimum AFBMA L life of 400,000 hours. 3. Plug fan plenums and inlet plenums shall be provided with an expanded metal door locked to prevent access to fan inlet, or a door switch h ardwire i nterlocked t o automatically shut down fan operation. Fans 15860 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 AXIAL FANS A. Propeller Type: 1. Include propeller type impellers, complete with motors, and pane! or ring mountings. 2. Vary fan blades in camber and twist from base to tip. 3. Construct impellers of die formed steel or aluminum with a welded reinforcing gusset on the backside for added rigidity, attached to a central hub mounted on the fixed drive shaft. 4. Rotate fan hub on the fixed drive shaft using sealed ball bearings. 5. To eliminate overhang load on belted fans, design to apply belt load to the hub in the same plane as the bearings. 6. Direct drive fans are only acceptable where belt driven units do not meet the performance criteria or direct drive is specified. 7. Provide panels or rings with spun venturi inlets suitable f or w all mounting and structural angle supports of welded steel construction. 8. Provide basket type fan guards for exposed inlets and discharges. 9. Provide TEFC motors on all fans. 10. Provide factory fabricated wall sleeves. 2.05 ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Provide roof exhaust fans of the centrifugal, belt - driven type. Construct fan housing of heavy gauge aluminum. B. Construct all spun parts with a rolled bead for added rigidity and spun so as to seal the pores of the aluminum providing greater resistance against oxidation and deterioration. C. Provide all- aluminum fan wheel of the centrifugal blower type backward inclined blades and a tapered inlet shroud. Statically and dynamically balance wheels. E. Provide inlet cone of aluminum centrifugal blower type. Enclose motor and drives in a weather -tight compartment separate from airstream and extend motor leads in metal conduit down through support base to facilitate wiring from below roof. Design to provide air for cooling the motor to the motor compartment by way of an air passage from an area free of contaminated exhaust fumes. Provide motors of the heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing type. Size drives for 200 percent of motor horsepower capabilities and of the cast iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts. Provide variable pitch drives. G. Construct fan shaft of steel construction, turned, ground and polished to precise tolerances in relationship to the hub and bearings. H. Provide drive belts of the oil- resistant, non - static, non - sparking type with an ABMA L life expectancy of minimum 24,000 hours. I. Provide flanged, permanently lubricated and sealed ball or roller type bearings. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -6 • t . .:4,�4� r= :�..'iA'•vF°i15.",@.'S?t ! ?4A;w�.:�ESisin �'.u; ".... J. . The entire drive and wheel assembly shall be removable as a complete unit from the support structure without disassembling the external fan housing. The assembly shall be hinged on = t' one side with full length weatherproof piano hinges. Mount the complete drive assembly on ui rubber vibration isolation. aa D U0 K. Provide direct drive units of identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts, N 0 and fan shaft bearings. w w J F _ L. Construct all belt drive units interior and exterior parts, including wheel, wheel hub, supporting U) posts, fan shaft, drive assembly, and all outside fasteners, of aluminum or non - ferrous w O material. Include a five -year warranty. g 2 u- ._, M. Provide a sound - attenuating roof curb with backdraft damper of the same manufacture as the v> > roof exhaust fan. z w I ._ _ 7 z 1 .. N. Upblast units shall have motor, bearings, and drives completely enclosed and isolated from 0 the exhaust air stream with ventilation provided by outside air. Units handling grease laden i z t- vapors to be U.L. listed for conveying such vapors, operating continuously at 300 degrees F. w 1 U 0 J 0 0 I— LL W H H u- O A. Install f ans i n a ccordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the w z co Drawings. Follow SMACNA and AMCA recommended procedures for fan installations, belt 0 1 guards, duct connections, etc. 01- z -� B. Provide flexible connections as described in specification Section 15800: Ductwork shall provide sufficient separation of ductwork, plenum panels, or air handling unit casings from fan assembly to prevent metal -to -metal contact due to start-up torque or operating under specified isolator deflections. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION C. Install fans and motors with proper support and vibration isolation as specified in Section 15240: Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. D. Provide sufficient clearances around fans for access and servicing of components. Install fans such that tachometer openings, access doors, motors, belts, lubrication lines, electrical connections, etc. are readily accessible and not obstructed by other installations or structures. 3.02 START UP A. Verify thermal - overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify proper motor rotation direction, fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Align and adjust belts, install belt guards and verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire /smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are fully open. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fans 15860 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Bump start fans to check that fan wheel /impeller has maintained static and dynamic balance and the rotation corresponds to the desired direction for airflow. Correct fans found to be rotating in a direction opposite to that desired. Unbalanced wheels shall be re- balanced by an AABC — certified test and balance contractor. C. Tighten belt drives, taking into account the service factor and any other design of the drive. Exercise care not to overtension belts. D. Check all bolts and fasteners to ensure proper tightness. Do not overtighten nuts and bolts. E. Check bearings and motor for proper lubrication, taking care not to overlubricate. Use only recommended by the manufacturer. 3.03 FAN ACCESSORIES A. B. Provide 22 gauge wire mesh reinforced galvanized steel inlet and discharge guard screens for all fans or sound attenuators connected to fans without inlet or discharge ductwork. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Provide the following accessories: 1. Support legs, hanger brackets welded to housing. 2. OSHA approved belt guard. 3. Weatherproof motor and drive cover, as applicable. 4. Shaft seal. 5. Threaded drain connection. 6. Backdraft damper. Provide shaft seal to reduce leakage and protects the bearings from contaminated airstream. Seal shall be constructed of non - asbestos woven fibrous materials (ceramic felt) compressed between an aluminum cover plate and the fan housing. END OF SECTION Fans 15860 -8 Z — W 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 6 JU A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: p cn cn 1. Panel filters. J 2. Filter frames, clips, housings and holding assemblies. N LL 3. Filter gauges. w O 2 g Q. ca = d F- _ Z F- O W 1- uj ? p U O Y 0 1- 7 A Submit manufacturer's data on Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) rating, sizes, w w J pressure drops, maximum velocities and weights of complete units. u. O �� B. Submit materials of construction, joining and fastening details for filters, frames and holding v Z assemblies. O Z 1 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL SECTION 15880 AIR FILTERS AND CLEANERS 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15130: Meters, Gauges and Thermometers. C. Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS C. Submit drawings showing arrangement of multiple filter units. D. Filter gauges, mounting hardware and wiring diagrams. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All filter efficiencies are .stated in MERV performance as described in ASHRAE Standard 52.2 -1999, except as noted. B. Filter coatings shall comply with ASTM D93. C. All filters shall comply with NFPA and U.L. standards for fuel contributed, flame spread and smoke development. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat filters, : Flanders /CSC, Cam /Farr, American Air Filter (AAF). B. Filter Gauges: Dwyer, or approved equal. 2.02 TYPE "A" — PANEL FILTERS A. Provide 2 -inch thick pleated, lofted, non - woven, reinforced fabric, supported and bonded to a g welded wire grid, and enclosed in cardboard frame for all panel filters with a MERV 7 rating. _ g � Z � I 0 Z tr w for the maximum scheduled airflow. 0 O ( . w w H F U. O w U - H O z B. In locations where "slide -in" side access type is required, install filters with adequate provisions for preventing bypassing of air around ends. C. Do not exceed 400 feet per minute filter bank face velocity or as scheduled on the drawings D. Frames shall be 16 -gauge galvanized steel, complete with gaskets and spring type positive sealing fasteners. E. Initial resistance shall be 0.3 -inch water gauge, 0.9- inches water gauge recommended final resistance. 2.03 FILTER HOUSINGS (Side Access) September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Housing shall be factory- fabricated of 16 -gauge galvanized steel, welded and properly braced. Provide pre - punched standing flanges shall facilitate field installation. B. Housing or holding frame shall be of the same manufacturer as filter media or provided by the air handling unit manufacturer. Coordinate media size with filter rack design. Contractor fabricated housings or filter racks shall not be accepted. Housing assembly shall be suitable for use in duct systems with 2 inches of water gauge static pressure. C. Casing and tracks shall be constructed of galvanized or e nameled s tees o r a Iuminum. Mounting tracks and access doors shall have gaskets to minimize air bypass around the filters. D. Insulate housings where adjacent duct or air handling apparatus is insulated. Insulation shall be c ontained w ithin a 2 -inch t hick, d ouble w all s teel p anel a nd m eet t he r equirements specified for adjacent duct or apparatus. E. Universal holding frames shall be constructed with U -type bearing channels, polyester gasketing and positive sealing clips. F. Extrusions of heavy gauge anodized aluminum shall be provided with a replaceable woven pile seal for sealing between extrusion and holding frame. Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -2 z FZ w QQ � J U O 0 co W = J � N V„ w0 D. Provide two (2) complete sets of filters specified for each fan powered terminal, computer room air conditioning unit, and air conditioning unit. Install one set immediately prior to the air balance and testing required by Section 15990: Mechanical Systems Balancing. The other set shall be delivered to the owner at the time of initial occupancy of the project. E. Maintain necessary clearance for changing filters. F. Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount gauge on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible location. Install tubing and gauge valves between gauge and sensor tips. Adjust and level each gauge. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 FILTER GAUGES 1 Z. A. Provide filters with direct reading gauges, 4 -inch dial type, diaphragm actuated, in a metal re 2 case to monitor both primary and secondary filter banks. Dwyer Magnehelic Series 2000 or 6 v approved equal. U O co c B. Provide direct reading gauges, 4 -inch dial type, diaphragm actuated, in a metal case with CO = electrical control contacts to provide high pressure alarm at the BMS. Dwyer Photohelic 1 U) u_ Series 3000 or approved equal. w O 2 C Lettering shall be black figures on white background. Provide front recalibration adjustment. u- a D. Provide gauges with the following differential ranges in inches water gauge: N D = I- al 1. MERV7to10:0.Oto1.0. Z 1- H O Z I- w w 3.01 INSTALLATION c O U 0 S O H A. Reinforce all filter banks and frames by welding the frames together or with galvanized angles or channels, in accordance with the filter manufacturer's recommendations. The = U maximum deflection at any point shall not exceed 1 /. -inch with the filter bank operating at a u_ 0 final air pressure drop of 1.2- inches water gauge. Z iii 0 u) B. Fully gasket each filter bank to prevent air bypass around the filter sections or between the H Z ' filter modules. Caulk and seal between the plenum and the holding frame. Z F- PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Provide complete sets of type `A' filters for each air handling unit to be used during the construction phase. The initial set shall be factory installed and each subsequent construction set shall be installed at the direction of the owner or contractor, or when filters reach a maximum air pressure drop of 0.75- inches water gauge. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 OPERATION A. Maximum air velocity through the filter media shall not exceed 100 feet per minute for pleated type filters or a maximum face velocity of 400 feet per minute through the filter bank at the maximum scheduled fan airflow. B. Install filter assemblies according to manufacturer's instructions and accepted trade practice. Focus particular attention on sealing against leakage between holding frame, housing, filter headers and filters. C. Do not operate the equipment until specified filter media has been installed. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the cleanliness of air handling apparatus and air distribution systems during construction through regular inspection and changing of filter media throughout the construction period. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Air Filters and Cleaners 15880 -4 --, A. Submit the following for review. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL September 30, 2003 Permit issue SECTION 15890 WATER TREATMENT 1 Z w 1.01 WORK INCLUDED V U O D A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: w = - 1- N I w g a 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS cn A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions Z ILI B. Section 15060 - Piping and Accessories Z O F- 2 C. Section 15160 - Pumps v o, O D. Section 15708 — Closed Circuit Cooling Towers - 0 H w w E. Section 15515 - Hydronic System Specialties v Liz 0 1.03 SUBMITTALS ui z O 1— 1. Open condenser water piping and closed circuit cooling towers 2. Closed condenser water piping 3. Chemical treatment equipment, chemicals and service 1. Makeup water analysis. 2. Layouts of feeding equipment. 3. Details of testing equipment. 4. Description of treatment program including calculations, list of chemicals and quantities of chemicals to be used on a daily, weekly and monthly basis. 5. Provide system schematics showing the following: a. Condenser Water System: (1) Circulation rates. (2) Pressures. (3) Temperature differential across closed circuit cooling tower and condenser. b. Closed Loop Condenser Water Systems: (1) Volume. (2) •Circulation rates. (3) Pressures. (4) Temperature differentials. 6. Provide written report witnessed by Contractor containing log and procedure of system cleaning, giving times, dates problems encountered and condition of water. 7. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 8. Manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 9. Properties and product datasheets for all chemicals. Water Treatment 15890 -1 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Published specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. NEMA — National Electrical Manufacturing Association. 2. ASHRAE — American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. 3. UL — Underwriters' Laboratories. 4. OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Act. 5. EPA — Environmental Protection Agency. 6. UBC — Uniform Building Code. 7. UMC — Uniform Mechanical Code. 8. UPC — Uniform Plumbing Code. 9. The State of Washington Codes. 10. Local Codes. A. Retain a national water treatment chemical company to provide water treatment chemical feed equipment and chemicals for circulating water systems, steam systems and equipment as defined herein and as may be required to maintain the integrity of the piping systems and mechanical equipment. B. The water treatment chemical and service supplier shall be a recognized specialist, active in the field of industrial water treatment, whose business is in the field of water treatment, and who has full time personnel within the trading area of the job site. Supplier shall have completed five existing chemical treatment systems of equal or greater in size as this project and these projects shall have been operating for a minimum of two years. C. Furnish and install all equipment and material on this project in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, suitable for its intended use on this project, approved by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and so certified by the manufacturer. D. Analyze water from the local water company to be used on the project before establishing treatment procedures. E. Treatment Standards Control levels are listed in ppm (parts per million) or as noted: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Open Condenser Water Systems: a. Non -toxic organic corrosion and scale inhibitor: Control Level: 300 ppm as total organic inhibitor. b. Molybdate Residuals: Control Level: 5 -10 ppm. c. Organic Flocculating Agent: Control Level: 1 ppm. d. Organic Growths: Control Level: None. Apply non - oxidizing EPA registered biocide when necessary. e. PH: Control Level: 8 -9. Apply acid or alkali if required. To be determined from an analysis of makeup water and local atmospheric conditions. f. Cycles of Concentration: Control Level: 6 -8. Actual cycles of concentration to be determined from an analysis of the makeup water. Water Treatment 15890 -2 -, MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 - PRODUCTS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 2. Closed Recirculating Water Systems: Closed condenser water (220 °F maximum). Z a. Non -toxic organic corrosion and scale inhibitor: Control Level: 2000 ppm as total organic inhibitor. t=- w b. Molybdate: Control Level: 200 -300 ppm. re c. Nitrate: Control Level: 300 -500 ppm Condenser Water as NO D • d. PH: Control Level: 7 -9. 0 0 0 u) ii_ O 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2 g 1 5 A. Chemical Water Treatment Service: � 1. Nalco. t w 2. Mogul. ? I 3. Garret - Callahan. Z O. w uj 2.02 PRESTART -UP CLEANING AND FLUSHING ? m 0 co A. Furnish all required pipe cleaning chemicals, chemical feed equipment, materials, and labor p necessary to clean the piping as herein specified. In addition, permanently install necessary W uj chemical injection fittings complete with tubing, unions, sampling cocks, stop valves and H U coupon racks, etc. LL ~ O Z B. Provide a pre - startup, non - foaming, liquid detergent dispersant cleaner for cleaning of all v N water systems to remove oil and foreign material from the piping and equipment prior to the O F final filling of the systems. This chemical shall not be injurious to persons, piping, pipe joint z compounds, packing, coils, valves, pumps and their mechanical seals, tubes, gaskets or other parts of the system. C. Furnish instructions dictating the quantities of the cleaner to use, methods and duration of the operation. Refer to Section 15060 for cleaning procedure. 2.03 WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS A. Provide a one - year's supply of necessary water treatment chemicals including the following: 1. Closed System Chemical Treatment (Closed Condenser Water): Liquid nitrate to reduce scale deposits, to adjust pH and to inhibit corrosion. Treatment shall not contain any chromates or other toxic substances. 2. Open Condenser Water Chemical Treatment System: Agent to inhibit scaling, acid or alkali to treat alkalinity and pH, corrosion inhibitor and biocides. Biocides shall be alternated periodically to prevent algae from developing immunity. Materials shall not contain any chromates, mercury, tin, arsenic or any toxic substances. Recommended biocides of an oxidizing and a non- oxidizing composition shall be registered with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and EPA registration numbers are to be clearly shown on all product literature and drum labels. Water Treatment 15890 -3 U o CO W - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 WATER TREATMENT CONTROL TESTING EQUIPMENT A. Supply one year's quantity of testing chemicals to properly analyze the treated water. Provide separate test kit for each chemical used. B. Provide Myron L "DS" meter with a range of 0 -5000 micro -ohms per centimeter with automatic temperature compensation from 50 to 160 degrees F with 9 -volt transistor batteries. C. Furnish a one -year supply of log sheets on which to record the test results and bound copy of full test instructions. 2.05 CONDENSER WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Provide a completely automated system for inhibitor feed and blowdown. Inhibitor application shall be meter activated and directly responsive to all variables that affect makeup water quantities. Blowdown shall be conductivity activated, and directly responsive to variations in concentrations of recirculating water. Provide program timer treatment package- for automatic feed of biocides. Treatment package shall include: timer panel, chemical metering pump, suction and discharge tubing and stainless steel injection nozzle. B. Provide a Carlon, or as approved, water meter, equipped with an electric switch adapter to output an electric impulse for each preset number of gallons of water passing through the meter. Electric switch shall be rated 10 amps, 115 to 250 volts A/C. The impulse shall initiate an automatic reset interval timer, the maximum setting so designed that it cannot exceed the minimum interval between impulses so that signal /operation overlap is avoided. C. Provide an automatic solid -state pulse timer to receive a signal from a water meter and drive a chemical feed pump for a maximum preset time of 90 seconds. The timer shall have a momentary time activation switch, front panel dial adjustment "A -O -M" (Automatic -Off- Manual) switch. D. Provide chemical feed pumps of suitable materials of construction with adequate capacity to handle chemical inhibitors of variable pH. Pumps shall be positive displacement, diaphragm type, with adjustable volume from 0 - 100 percent of capacity while in operation, with a foot valve, strainer and back -check valve assembly with '/2 inch NPT male connection with suitable capacity and head to feed the chemical inhibitor directly from the shipping drum. Pumps shall be furnished with an anti - siphon valve suitable for 115 volts, single phase, 60- hertz power. E. Provide an electronic conductivity controller equipped with a "flow through" sensing probe and relay for operating a 110 -volt solenoid valve on the blow -down line. The conductivity controller shall feature a large linear reading dial and scale for control point setting and conductivity reading. This unit shall have plus or minus 5 percent accuracy with single scale reading. The flow through the sensing probe shall be equipped with mounting brackets and cleanout brush and shall have 3/8 inch outside diameter copper tube or PVC fittings. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Water Treatment 15890 -4 4 z Iz CC w QQ � J0 0 N 0 co 111 J CO u_ w 2 u-? • w z = zF- w • w 0 O • D- o w H u- O . .. z w O ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Provide blow -down control assembly including a cast iron pipe strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel screen and solenoid valve. Where blow -down line is larger than 1 inch ID, furnish a solenoid operated diaphragm valve. G. Provide a corporation stop injection nozzle assembly,'/ inch CPVC injection nozzle with 3/4 inch NPT male connection for injecting chemical treatment into the center of flow in the condenser water recirculating line. H. Provide a flow switch with 3/8 inch tubing connections to function as a fail -safe device, overriding inhibitor feed when water recirculation stops. 1. Provide a Hersey MVR total register water meter for installation on the blow -down line. J. Chemical pump shall be mounted on a floor supported plastic coated steel pump rack with PVC pump shelf. 2.06 CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT FOR CLOSED WATER SYSTEMS A. Provide bypass pot feeders with 5 gallon capacity, 3/4 inch brass drain valve furnished with slotted lexan inlet and outlet strainers and sight flow indicator and able to withstand the maximum system working pressure. Wingert, Lakewood, Nalco or approved equal. 2.07 CLOSED SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT A. Typical for: 1. Condenser water piping. B. Provide bypass feeder: Five gallon capacity. C. Test kits as previously specified: Nitrite. D. Chemicals: PART 3 — EXECUTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Alkaline boilout compound. 2. Nitrite corrosion inhibitor. 3.01 TECHNICAL SERVICE AND CONTROL A. Water treatment equipment shall be located in mechanical equipment rooms or spaces when feasible to do so. B. Supervise the installation of water treatment equipment. C. Supervise the cleaning of open and closed systems and provide a written certification of cleanliness at completion of cleaning procedure. Water Treatment 15890 -5 z a • jw 00 0 J H Nu_ w O 2 J . u- ? . o �W z � HO z I- w D o U o W u j U U. w z � 0 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila- D. Provide a four -hour training program to the Owner's operating personnel instructing them clearly and fully on the installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of the water treatment system. The training course shall be arranged by the mechanical contractor at the startup of the system. E. For a period of one year after completion of system commissioning, provide the services of a fully qualified field engineer for one year at no additional cost to the Owner. This field engineer must be a graduate chemist or chemical engineer and shall be active in the water treatment field in this locale. The water treatment company shall also provide laboratory and technical assistance from a fully qualified engineering staff to support the following tasks. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Chemical Feeders: B. Piping: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Make monthly technical service visits to the installation to perform field inspections and to make water analysis on site, with sufficient complexity as to evaluate the water systems operations. Discuss findings with the Owner's personnel in writing advising on proper practices, chemical requirements and any corrective actions needed to protect the water systems from scale, corrosion, and fouling. Copies of the field service report must be forwarded each month to the Owner, Architect and Engineer. 2. Make on -site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency outages in order to properly evaluate the success of the water treatment program and to make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections. 1. Chemical pumps shall be mounted at height suitable for pumping chemical treatment solutions directly from supply drums to condenser water system. 2. Top of reservoir tank maximum 4 feet above floor. Provide drip pan of same material as tank with drain under tank and pumps. 1. Proportioning pump piping shall include pressure gauge and relief valve on discharge line. 2. Install by -pass feeders: a. Install feeder in location convenient for filling. 3. Condenser Water Systems: a. Bleedoff: (1) Provide approved bleed manifold with: (a) Solenoid bleed valve (b) Manual by -pass valve (c) Piping to drain (2) Bleedoff rate controllable. b. Provide accessible City water hose connection at system basins for cleaning and flushing. c. Provide sample stream injection assembly: (1) 316 stainless steel injection pipe (2) All necessary compression connectors (3) Safety retaining ring (4) Threadolet Water Treatment 15890 -6 7 _J 1 'J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila (5) Full port gate valve 4. Drain connections at low points of piping. C. System connections and feeder locations shall be approved in the field by water treatment firm before installation of treatment equipment begins. 3.03 INITIAL CLEANING OF SYSTEMS A. Prior to operation, clean system as specified. B. Upon completion of cleaning, dose system with chemicals to obtain specified treatment conditions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Water Treatment 15890 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15900 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) A. The work under this Section of the Specifications includes all labor, materials, equipment and services to provide a fully operational Building Management System (BMS). The work in general consists of, but is not limited to, the following: 1. The BMS shall be as specified and consist of a high- speed, peer -to -peer network of DDC controllers and an operator workstation. The operator workstation shall be a personal computer (PC) with color monitor, mouse, keyboard, and printer. The PC shall allow a user to interface with the network via dynamic color graphics. Each HVAC system, lighting system(s), building floor plan, and control device will be depicted by point- and -click graphics. 2. Remote portable operators interface computer units as specified. 3. A dedicated data communications network including electric isolation and protection from electrical interference. 4. A network of stand alone Direct Digital Control (DDC) controllers and field panels, including sensors, and control devices. 5. Complete electrical installation including wiring, raceways and power wiring, except as noted. 6. Software required to produce a complete and operational BMS as specified herein. Include a minimum of two licenses for any proprietary software being provided. 7. Complete operating and maintenance manuals and field training of operators and maintenance personnel. 8. System commissioning and acceptance tests as specified. 9. Full documentation for all software and equipment provided. 10. Project management for managing system installation including, but not limited to: Design, installation, equipment delivery, and coordination with other trades, labor management, commissioning and acceptance testing. 11. Review of fire alarm shop drawing for acceptance by BMS contractor to ensure proper coordination of scope of work, wiring and operating sequences. 12. Autodial modems for communication to the control system and to remote DDC controllers or other work stations. Autodial modem shall have remote paging for pager annunciation of alarms. 13. Miscellaneous control wiring including, but not limited to: a. Wiring of packaged air conditioning unit thermostats. b. Fuel oil control system. c. Closed Circuit Cooling tower panel interface wiring. d. Cooling tower level controls and filter /separator. e. Interlock wiring including summary alarm supervision or stand -alone systems. f. Power wiring from designated Division 16 outlets or circuits to BMS components that require power. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 14. Provide service kit. 15. Provide spare parts as noted in this specification. 16. Warranty of system including all associated materials, labor, and services for period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 17. Web -based operator access software. B. Qualification Proposal: 1. Submit complete proposal for review prior to final acceptance of Division 15 bid. The following information shall be submitted: a. Schematic of BMS configuration indicating DDC panels, locations, capacity and functions. b. List of Subcontractor and supplier of components with descriptions of their services or components furnished. c. Location and qualification of primary software programming support staff. d. Specific detailed list of all areas of the proposed BMS that cannot comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Reference the specification paragraph where compliance is not possible. Provide additional information to evaluate the impact of the deviation. e. Provide all required detailed information for a satisfactory evaluation of the bid. Failure to submit may result in rejection of proposal. 2. Submit written resumes of key personnel proposed on the project. 3. The following minimum qualifications are required from the BMS contractor. a. Have comprehensive local service and trained support personnel capable of giving instruction and provide emergency maintenance on the system, including all software, firmware and hardware components. b. Have access to local supplies of essential expendable and spare parts. c. Have a proven record of successful installations and maintenance of equivalent systems for a minimum period of 5 years. d. Have installed two systems of similar size and BMS architecture. e. Provide all engineering, programming and support by a local office located within 75 miles of the project site. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation. C. Section 15708 — Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. D. Section 15771 — Packaged Air - Cooled Rooftop Units. E. ; Section 15930 - Air Terminal Units. F. Section 15985 - Automatic Control Sequences. G. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. H. Division 16 - Electrical Specifications. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -2 I '1 R.� MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.03 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Installation of the following items furnished under this Section but installed under other sections. 1. Automatic control valves. 2. Automatic control dampers. 3. Thermowells. 4. Liquid flow sensor — transmitters. 5. Liquid flow switches. 6. Terminal unit DDC controllers. 7. Packaged air handling equipment DDC controller. B. Designated circuits shall be furnished by the Division 16 Contractor from the distribution panelboards for BMS power. Power wiring from the designated power outlets or circuits shown on Division 16 drawings to BMS components shall be within the work scope of this section. C. Supervise and coordinate the installation of equipment, instruments and materials fumished under this Section but installed under other Divisions of the Specifications. All equipment and instruments shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions. 1.04 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS SECTION A. Closed Circuit Fluid Cooler Controls. B. Variable frequency drives. C. Water treatment controls. D. Condenser water filtration controls. E. Packaged air conditioners. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Configuration: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The Building Management System (BMS) shall perform both monitoring and control of mechanical and electrical equipment for building management, energy conservation, and environmental control. 2. The BMS control philosophy shall be direct digital control and be implemented by a distributed digital system. 3. The personal computer (PC) shall provide for overall building data acquisition and transfer, report generation, historical data storage and retrieval, and operator interface. Building Management System 15900 -3 Z re w QQ � JU 0 0 0 . co wi J CD IL. w 2.) d w z � Z � w 0 O � 0 E- w t- - U- 5 W Z 0 ~ O~ . z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. The PC and DDCs shall communicate through dedicated communications network(s). All communications on network shall be by digital signals only. Operator's workstation shall as a minimum support Point -to -Point (PTP) and Ethernet LAN types. Operator's terminal shall support all services necessary to provide the following functional groups: a. Clock Functional Group. b. Event Response Functional Group. c. Time Master Functional Group. d. Device Communications. 5. The Direct Digital Controllers shall perform remote data acquisition and process control. DDC panels shall be locally mounted completely self - contained, field programmable, real -time microprocessor based controllers capable of stand alone operation. 6. Each DDC shall be connected to its particular controlled environment through field input/output (I /O) instrumentation. B. Design and Performance Criteria: 1. Expansion Capability: a. System Point Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The PC operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system. b. System shall be modular to allow change of function and operation in the field by plug -in modules, equipment and software changes to expand system capacity without interrupting system operation. 2. System Performance: a. The system shall conform to the following minimum performance standard: (1) Graphic Display: The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 10 seconds. (2) Graphic Refresh: The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 8 seconds. (3) Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be Tess than 2 seconds. Analog objects should start to adjust within 2 seconds. (4) Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high -speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation has been updated within the previous 60 seconds. (5) Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds. (6) Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -4 Measured Variable Reported Accuracy Space Temperature ±1 degree F Ducted Air ±1 degree F Outside Air ±2 degrees F Water Temperature ±1 degree F Delta -T ±0.25 degree F Relative Humidity ±2.5 percent RH Water Flow ±5 percent of full scale Airflow (terminal) ±10 percent of full scale (Note 1) Airflow (measuring Stations) ±5 percent of full scale Air Pressure (ducts) ±0.1 inches water gauge Air Pressure (space) ±0.01 inches water gauge Water Pressure ±2 percent of full scale (Note 2) Note 1: 10 -100 percent of scale Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS (7) Performance: Programmable controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency of at least once per second. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency, (8) Multiple Alarm Annunciations: All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other. (9) Reporting Accuracy: The system shall report all values with an end - to -end accuracy as listed or better than those listed in Table 1. (10) Stability of Control: Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point within the tolerances listed in Table 2 below. Table 1: BMS System Performance Reporting Accuracy September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila Building Management System 15900 -5 ce w. 6U 0 0 co 0 J = CO u-. w0 N = w. I— _ Z F I-0: Z 1—• ILI w U� O co, 0 t— w uj : 1 tl ui Z. U= 0 ~ z Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium Duct Air Pressure ±0.2 inches water gauge 0 -6 inches water gauge Space Differential Air Pressure ±0.01 inches water gauge -0.1 to 0.1 inches water gauge Airflow ±10 percent of full scale Space Temperature ±1.0 degrees F Duct. Temperature ±2.0 degrees F Fluid Pressure ±1.5 psi 1 -150 psi ±1.0 inches water gauge 0 -50 inches water gauge differential MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Table 2: BMS System Control Stability and Accuracy UNISYS - Tukwila Environmental Conditions: (1) The DDCs, Field Equipment Panels, and other equipment shall operate under continuous ambient environmental conditions of 35 degrees to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 percent to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing as a minimum. Sensors and control elements shall operate under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered for the installed location. (2) Other e quipment, s uch a s v ideo s creen t erminais and printers, shall, unless designated otherwise, operate 'properly under continuous ambient environmental conditions of 50 degrees to 104 degrees F and a relative humidity of 20 percent to 80 percent. c. Materials and Equipment: (1) Where multiple units of the same type are required, the units shall be products of a single manufacturer, however, the component parts of the system .need. not be the products of a single manufacturer. The components shall not require customizing other than setting jumpers and switches and adding firmware. Each major component of equipment shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, address, model and serial number. (2) All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. d. Total system shall be immune to internal and external generated sources of electrical noise. Building Management System 15900 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.06 SUBMITTALS Z A. General: Indicate at the beginning of each submittal known substitutions and deviations 2 H from requirements of the Contract Documents. Refer to Section 15010: Mechanical w General Provisions. J U . B. Product Data: Provide technical bulletins and catalog data for all equipment and system U p components. Clearly identify, by use of symbol or tag number, the service of each item. All c o w irrelevant information shall be marked out leaving only pertinent data. _I U) w C. Shop Drawings: w 0 1. Shop drawing submittals shall include sufficient data to indicate complete g Q compliance with Contract Documents. Submissions of drawings, brochures, N d bulletins, catalog data, and narrative descriptions shall include as a minimum: = w a. Symbol and abbreviation lists. F. _ b. System block diagram showing quantity and location of PC, operator Z F' console equipment, DDCs, Field Equipment Panels and Major System z O- Components. c. Control diagrams for all systems controlled. Controls shall be shown on D p system flow diagrams. U N d. Interfaces (software and hardware) with equipment provided in other p H sections of specifications. w w e. Narrative description of operation for each system, enumerating and H v describing the function of each component. Include alarm and ~ u. O emergency sequences, and equipment interlocks. Z f. Description of manual override capabilities. c. fli i . g. Complete input and output point schedule. Identify point function, type i H and location. Z D. Programming: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue h. Spare capacity provisions. Detailed bill of materials. j. Valve and Damper Schedule: Provide identification numbers, location, system, dimensions and performance data. k. Device mounting details: Include as a minimum: (1) Sensing elements in ducts or casings. (2) Sensing elements in piping. Complete full size drawings, 11 inch by 17 -inch minimum using AutoCAD 2000 Software or above. 1. Point identification code. 2. System advisory messages, printouts, logging formats. 3. Drawings of system graphics showing monitored points. 4. Software flow charts for application and DDC programs. 5. Graphic User Interface program, include commands, alarm annunciation, logs and programming capabilities. 6. Description of system operation under failure conditions. Building Management System 15900 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Samples: 1. Thermostat and temperature sensor covers. Z 2. All devices mounted on finished surfaces or exposed. = H :1-- W F. Quality Control Submittals: CC 2 J U 1. UL, FM listing compliance certificates. 0 0 2. Final calibration, commissioning and testing reports. y w J = 1.07 OWNER'S MANUALS u) u_ w0 A. General: 2 g J 1. Submit draft copy of Owner's manuals for review. After review by authorized u) m representative, the Contractor shall incorporate review comments and submit 6 final = 0 copies. I- _ 2 Update manuals with modifications made to system during guarantee period. ? !— Provide replacement pages or supplements in quantity stated above. Z O 3. Assemble Owner's manuals into multi - volume sets as necessary and required by the W w Owner. 4. Protect each volume with a heavy duty vinyl plastic binder. Volumes to have plastic 0 cn printed dividers between major sections and have oversized binders to 0 '— accommodate up to 1 /2 inch thick set of additional information. W w 5. Each binder shall show the project name and volume title on front cover and spine. H 0 6. On the first page of each manual identify with project name, manual title, Owner's u_ ~O name, Engineer's name, Contractor's name, address and service phone number, Z and person who prepared manual. Provide a detailed table of contents for each 0 cn volume of the manuals. 7. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be 0 Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. Z B. Operating manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day -to -day operation of the system. As a minimum include the following: 1. Control flow diagram. 2. Sequence of operation for automatic and manual operating modes. The sequences shall cross reference the system point names. 3. Description of manual overrides operation of control points. 4. System manufacturer's complete operating manuals. 5. Troubleshooting sequence, flow diagram and procedures. 6. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. C. Provide maintenance manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day -to -day maintenance and major system repairs. As a minimum include the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Complete as -built installation drawings for each system including locations on plans of all control devices drawn to scale. As -built drawings shall be submitted in AutoCAD format. Building Management System 15900 -8 .J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Overall system electrical power supply scheme indicating source of electrical power for each system component. 3. Indicate which components are on emergency power and indicate all battery backup Q • provisions. z 4. Overall system shielding and grounding scheme indicating all major components and w ground paths. 5 -1 0 5. Photographs and drawings showing installation details and locations of equipment. 6. Charts showing normal operating conditions at significant points such as electrical 0 0 test points. co w 7. Routine preventative maintenance procedures, corrective diagnostic troubleshooting j _ procedures, and calibration procedures. co 8. Parts lists with manufacturer's catalog numbers and ordering information. w 0 9. Lists of ordinary and special tools, operating materials, supplies and test equipment 2 recommended for operation and servicing. g 5 10. Manufacturer's operating set up, maintenance and catalog literature for each piece u- j of equipment. = v 11. Recommended spare parts. H = 12. Field test reports. ? F- 13. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be z O 0 Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. w w D. Provide Programming Manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of U 0 system programming. As a minimum include the following: 0 - wW 1. Complete programming manuals, and reference guides. 2 o 2. Details of any special software packages and compilers supplied with system. 3. Information required for independent programming of system. Z 4. Documentation on application and DDC programs: Flow charts, equations, and U 0 parameters. i= z . 5. Point schedule; include all points, real and virtual. Z 6. Software troubleshooting procedures. 7. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD -ROM format. Document format shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 5.0 or later. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall provide an experienced full -time Project Manager for this work, responsible for direct supervision of installation and startup of the system. B. Comply with all current governing codes, ordinances and regulations, as well as with requirements of NFPA, UL and all other applicable codes. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.09 MAINTENANCE Z A. Submit an alternate price to perform complete preventative and emergency maintenance H z of the BMS for a period of one (1) year in accordance with the Contractor's recommended rt w standards and schedule. This price shall be itemized to show material costs and labor 6 v costs. This price shall be based upon work being executed during normal working hours P•° v O but shall include separate emergency callout provisions. Prices submitted should be co 0 based upon current price lists and labor rates, details of which shall be included with the w w bid and should be broken out into three categories. -j H u_ 1. Computer hardware and associated equipment. W O 2. • Field equipment including DDCs, sensors and final control elements. g 5 3. Software and programming. u_ N B. The preventative maintenance contract may be renewed annually, at the option of the = W Owner, up to a total term of 10 years. The annual price shall be negotiated 3 months in Z H advance of annual contract expiry and shall be at the mutual agreement of both parties. H O Variation in annual prices shall reflect only changes in material and labor costs as Z H substantiated by Federal Guideline Consumer Price Indexes. g D D p 1.10 WARRANTY p N o I- A. Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for w w ci a period of 12 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction . Z in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty w service within 24 hours during normal business hours. U F ~ B. All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the Owner has received beneficial use Z due to an early system startup. If the work specified is split into multi -phase contract, then each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period. C. At the end of the final startup, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Architect and Owner the date of acceptance shall be the start of pre- warranty endurance test. D. Operator workstation software, project - specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware updates which resolve known software deficiencies as identified by the Contractor shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period. E. After t he a bove a cceptance t ests a re c omplete a nd t he s ystem i s d emonstrated to be functioning as specified, a thirty -day endurance test period shall begin. If the system functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test period the system fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight hours, the Owner may request that the endurance tests be repeated after problems have been corrected. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -10 .�: ''._, __..... MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS Z 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF DDC SYSTEM Z 're LLI A. Alerton Technologies. 6 D JU B. Siemens Building Technologies. w o co ui C. Automated Logic. - H D. Invensys. w O 2.02 CENTRAL CONSOLE u_ � d A. Provide a central operator's console to include as a minimum: H w Z1 1. Personal computer. t— 0 2. Color graphics display terminal. w I- 3. Printer (alarm and logging). 2 j U� B. Assemble console equipment in a console configuration that allows operator access to all 0 H console equipment from one position. w = w 2.03 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR'S WORK STATION (PC) O A. The computer shall be an IBM compatible U.S. EPA certified Energy Star PC with the ti.i U O }— Z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue following provided: 1. Input/output ports and expansion slots: Five PCI Slots, one 4X AGP Slot, one parallel port, two USB -2 ports, two serial ports, one video port, audio in and out, microphone in, one keyboard and one mouse port. 2. Intel Pentium — Intel Pentium® 4, 2.0 GHZ microprocessor. 3. 256MB PC600 RDRAM® of random access memory. 4. 3% inch, 1.44 megabyte diskette drives with storage bay space for front accessible removable CD /DVD drive. 5. Hard disk drive and tape backup: a. 40GB ATA- 66/100 IDE (7200 rpm) hard drive. b. 20GB, SCSI, Travan -5 tape back up. Provide two Travan tapes. 6. Logitech® First Mouse TM with 2 buttons and scroll wheel. 7. SVGA flicker -free 21 inch color display monitor with Energy Star rating, digital controls: a. Diagonal viewable area: 20 inches minimum. b. Resolution: 2048 x 1536 / 75 Hz (multiscan). c. PHILIPS 21 IN /20V 24MM Monitor or approved equal. 8. Graphics card: 64MB SDRAM NVIDIA® Quadro2 Pro® or approved equal 9. lomega Zip Drive 250 MB, provide two spare disks. Building Management System 15900 -11 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 10. 8X/4X/32X IDE CD Read -Write CD /DVD Drive. 11. Keyboard: 101 -key typewriter -like keyboard with special function keys "F1" through "F12" and numeric keyboard. Keys to have tactile feedback. Include rubber wrist rest pad. Microsoft or equal. 12. Color ink jet printer: 2800 x 700 dpi black and white resolution, 5 pages per minute with a 150 sheets of 11 x 17 sheet feeder, and printer cable. All change -of -state reporting, system logs, information summaries, system malfunctions and alarms shall be printed at this terminal. HP 1220 C /PS series or approved equal 13. Provide an internal V.90 56,600 baud fax -modem with software for remote communications. 14. Sound card /speakers: SoundBlaster Live! Value audio card, Harmon /Kardon Speakers. 15. Software: Microsoft® Office 2000 Small Business Edition, Windows 2000®CD with latest service pack. 16. PC work station shall be Dell Precision ® WorkStation or Equal. B. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): Provide a portable UPS capable of maintaining operation of the PC and all peripherals for 30 minutes in the event of a failure of the normal power supply. UPS shall provide instantaneous backup power during blackouts and brownouts, lightning and surge protection tested to UL 1449, and network -grade line conditioning and two EMI /RFI filters. 2.04 LOCAL OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (LOT) A. Provide portable terminal(s) to allow local programming, control and monitoring at each DDC panel. B. Provide one (1) portable LOT which can be connected to any DDC panel. C. The portable LOT shall meet the following requirements: 1. Portable Operator's Terminal. Furnish a LOT that shall be capable of accessing all system data. Also provide a network connection tool that shall allow technician to connect a laptop PC to any MS/TP network or at any MS/TP device and view and modify all information throughout the entire network. Laptop PC connection to tool shall be via Ethernet or PTP. The Portable Operator's Terminal shall be an IBM compatible notebook -style PC including all software and hardware required. The PC shall contain at minimum: a. Pentium® 4 Processor, 1.6 GHz with 13.3" TFT XGA Display. b. 256 MB of RAM. - c. 30.0 GB hard drive d. Modem and NIC card: Ethernet 10/100 plus Modem 56. e. 1.44- megabyte floppy disk drive and CD -RW drive. f. Touch -pad or other internal pointing device. g. Two USB -2 ports, one serial port. h. Audio in and out. Dell Latitude or equal. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -12 i MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.05 DIRECT DIGITAL BUILDING CONTROLLER A. DDC Building Controllers shall be completely self - contained, field programmable, real time 32 -bit microprocessor based controllers. - B. DDC application programs shall be resident in the DDC. Once downloaded, a DDC shall not require further communication with the CPU except for data base changes, operator commands, and requests from the CPU for DDC data. C. Provide current and voltage limiting devices at communications network cable connection. D. Provide power supplies with transient power line surge protection. E. Provide floor mounted or wall mounted cabinet with full front - hinged door, locking handle with master key and non -glare baked enamel finish. Each DDC shall contain a clear plastic encased control diagram showing associated controls. F. Provide the manufacturer's standard enclosure except if location requires additional protection due to potential vandalism, environmental conditions or any other reason. Take all necessary precautions to protect the DDC and related components, including: 1. Using suitable NEMA enclosure. 2. Heavy -duty key locks. G. Capabilities: 1. Stand -Alone Capability: If PC or communications network malfunctions, each DDC shall continue to control, monitor and have the ability to be accessed and programmed via .the LOT. 2. Degraded Mode: If failure of a sensor or system component causes information critical to a DDCs program to be lost, default values or subroutines shall automatically be used to approximate critical information to ensure continued control. 3. Networking: Each DDC shall be capable of sharing point information with other DDCs on the same data network. 4. Real time operating system shall be capable of time -of -day scheduling and other time based functions. 5. Unauthorized access to hardware or software programs shall be accomplished by a password or cabinet lock. In the locked or unauthorized position, the operating characteristics of the DDC cannot be changed, although inputs, outputs and set point values can be displayed. In the unlocked or authorized position, the ability to change the DDC program shall be unhindered. 6. Alarm processing shall include: change of state, flow proof, high and low analog limits, and setpoint deviation. Provide at least two levels of alarm priority. 7. The DDC programming language shall be designed for Building Automation and Control applications and shall be capable of performing the following control algorithms: Floating; Proportional (P) direct and reverse acting; Proportional plus Integral (PI); Proportional Integral plus Derivative (PID); Anti - integral wind up; Cascade; Programmed interlock logic; Deadband switching and control; Incremental control. `September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -13 z w re 6 0 0 1 N w w g a I - w z HO w ~ w O N 0H w w 1- I LLO W Z 0 - 0 1 " z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 8. Building controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3 -way router. Controller shall route messages between the high -speed LAN (Ethernet 10 /100MHz), at least 4 master slave token passing (MS/TP) LANs, a point -to -point Z (PTP — RS -232) connection and an on -board modem. '� 1 a. Each MS/TP LAN shall be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps. w b. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection shall accept either 10Base -T or 100Base- TX over twisted pair cable (UTP). ••. -J U O c. The direct access port shall be a female DB -9 connector supporting o temporary PTP connection of a portable operator terminal at 9.6 to 115.2 w w Kb over RS -232 null modem cable. w ' F , U) u_ H. DDC Configuration: w O 2 1. Points used in the same control loop or algorithm shall be connected to the same •., g Q DDC. d 2. Spare Capacity: Allow for 10 percent increase of each point type per DDC location, or a minimum of two of each point type per DDC location whichever is greater. H = Addition of points shall require only programming, control devices and wiring. Z 1— 3. Programming shall be object- oriented using control function blocks, supporting DDC Z 0 0 functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values. All flowcharts shall be w w generated and automatically downloaded to controller. Programming tool shall be 2 m resident on workstation and the same tool used for all controllers. 0 4. Building controller shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the , • 0 u. system based on information from any objects in the system regardless if the object w w is directly monitored by the controller or by another controller. The program that H implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. Any L I ~O systems utilizing factory pre - programmed global strategies that cannot be modified ... by field personnel on -site or downloaded via remote communications are not S _u2 acceptable. Changing global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable. I~ H O Z 2.06 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (CAC) A. General. Provide an adequate number of Custom Application Controllers to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 of this section on system performance. Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The Custom Application Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 2. Data shall be shared between networked Custom Application Controllers. 3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communication signals to allow other distributed controllers to share real and virtual object/point information, and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real -time clock. 5. The Custom Application Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall operate under a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification to the BMS network. Building Management System 15900 -14 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Environment: 1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 2. Controllers used outdoors and /or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 degrees F to 150 ct 2 degrees F. 6 3. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, v U O and shall be rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F. co o u) I1J C. Keypad: A local keypad and display shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. A -J H system security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and co w display. wO D. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring u. Q connections shall be made to field- removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination to d card connected by a ribbon cable. H w ZI- E. Memory: The Custom Application Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming F„ O information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. w f- w F. Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90 percent to 110 percent v o of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent nominal O N voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hertz and from 0 H keyed radios up to 5 watts at 3 feet. = w • - 1- H 2.07 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS LL Z ui A. General: Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are microprocessor -based DDC controllers, U which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of 0 1- equipment. ASCs shall be user - programmable, and customized for operation within the z confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. Application Specific Controllers shall - i communicate with other controllers on the internetwork. B. Each ASC shall be capable of standalone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. C. Each ASC shall contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. D. Communication: 1. The controller must reside on a network using the MS/TP Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. 2. Each controller shall have compatible connection for a LOT or a portable operator's tool. This connection shall be extended to a space temperature sensor port where shown. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Building Management System 15900 -15 _�. ....mss. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. E. Environment: 1. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 2. Controllers used outdoors and /or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 3. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F. F. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field- removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. I. Transformer: Power supply for the ASC shall be rated at minimum of 125 percent of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. J. Hardwired inputs and outputs shall tie into the system through building, custom application, or application specific controllers. 2.08 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE A. All input points and output points shall be protected such that short circuiting of the point to itself or to another point, or to ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. Inputs and outputs shall be arranged on interchangeable modules or circuit boards to allow the replacement of a damaged module or board without replacing the entire controller. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Memory: The Application Specific Controller shall use non - volatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power Toss. Immunity to Power and Noise: Controllers shall be able to operate at 90 percent to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent . Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 -120 Hertz and from keyed radios up to 5 watts at 3 ft. The ASC shall provide the following information either on the PC or the LOT unit. 1. Space temperature /humidity. 2. Space temperature set point(s) for heating and cooling. 3. Minimum primary air set point. 4. Maximum primary air set point. 5. Valve and damper positions in percent open. 6. Air volume in cubic feet per minute. 7. Fan status for fan powered terminal unit (if applicable). 8. Control parameters (deadbands, PID gains, etc.). Building Management System 15900 -16 trzi MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of On /Off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 milliamp to be compatible with commonly available control devices, and shall be protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied. C. Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: This type of object shall conform to all the requirements of binary input objects, and also accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. D. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low- voltage (0 to 10 volts DC), current (4 to 20 milliamps), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field- configurable to commonly available sensing devices. E. Binary outputs shall provide for On/Off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on Building and Custom Application Controllers shall have three - position (On /Off /Auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation. F. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 volts DC or a 4 to 20 milliamp signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on Building or Custom Application Controllers shall have status lights and a two- position (AUTO /MANUAL) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year. G. Tri -State Outputs: Provide tri -state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs) for control of three -point floating type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three -point floating devices shall be limited to zone control and terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct mounted heating coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.). Control algorithms shall run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking. H. Input/Output points shall be universal type, i.e., controller input or output may be designated (in software) as either a binary or analog type point with appropriate properties. Application Specific Controllers are exempted from this requirement. • 2.09 POWER SUPPLIES A. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current - limiting type, or furnish over - current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for C lass 2 s ervice p er N EC requirements. Limit connected Toads to 80 percent of rated capacity. B. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full -wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 millivolt maximum peak -to -peak. Regulation shall be 1.0 percent line and load combined, with 100 microsecond response time for 50 percent load changes. Unit shall have built -in over - voltage and over - current protection, and shall be able to withstand a 150 percent current overload for at least 3 seconds without trip - out or failure. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -17 z ~ • w tr 6U O - 0 w J H ! IL w g Q = • d I - w zz H ZH W w 0 O N w 1- � U- O w Z U 0 ~' z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS • Tukwila C. Unit shall operate between 0 and 50 degrees C. EM /RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B, and MIL -STD 810C for shock and vibration. 2.10 SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES A. General: 1. Provide sensors and control devices, as specified, indicated on mechanical plans, control f low d iagrams a nd a s r equired t o m eet s pecified p erformance. W here performance specifications exceed capabilities of hardware specified, performance governs. The installation of such devices, if not specifically indicated, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Equip analog sensors with industry standard 4 to 20 milliamp transmitters with built - in circuit protection against reverse polarity and supply voltage transients. The transmitters shall be matched to the sensing element and compatible with the DDC Building Management System. 3. All sensor /transmitters assemblies shall be factory calibrated. 4. All sensor wiring, analog or digital, input or output shall be capable of sharing single conduit runs without affecting signal performance. All signal wiring shall also be capable of sharing single conduit runs with switched AC of 120 or 277 volts. The sensor range and type shall be suitable to the application. Minimum contact rating of relays and switches shall be 10 amperes, 110 volts resistive. 7. Devices UL shall be listed for electrical safety where applicable. 8. All components of sensors exposed to process shall be rated to withstand 150 percent of maximum process temperature and pressure. B. Thermowells: Provide type 316 stainless steel thermowells for each immersion type temperature sensor and switch. Thermowells shall have extension for pipe insulation and threaded connection to pipe. Threaded connection shall be a minimum of 3 /4 inch nominal pipe thread. Maximum insertion length shall be 6 inch or 75 percent of the pipe diameter whichever is smaller. C. Temperature Sensors: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Temperature sensor assemblies shall consist of a 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD sensor and a solid state, 2 -wire, 4 to 20 milliamp transmitter protected in a housing suitable for the environment in which it is installed. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler Model T4, W eiss M odel EN or a cceptable equivalent. 3. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or minus 1.0 degree F except for c hilted w ater temperature applications the accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5 degree F. 4. Sensors for mixed air and coil discharge applications and for fan discharge applications in systems over 5,000 cubic feet per minute shall be averaging type sensors. Probe lengths shall be minimum one linear foot per four square feet of duct or coil area or equal to duct, plenum or AHU casing width where installed, whichever is longer. 5. Outside air sensors shall be mounted on a northern exposure and mounted within a ventilated enclosure. Building Management System 15900 -18 i rui MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Pressure Transmitter Assembly — Air Streams: 1. The assembly shall consist of a pressure sensor and a solid- state, 2 -wire, 4 to 20 milliamp transmitter contained in a housing suitable for duct mounting. 2. The assembly shall be factory calibrated and field installed to an accuracy of plus or minus 0.05 inches water gauge over a range of 0 to 4 inches water gauge. 3. Probe: 8 -inch pitot tube, brass. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brandt, Setra, Air Monitor. E. Differential Pressure Transmitter Assembly — Water: -? G. Current Sensing Switches: • September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Assembly shall consist of a differential pressure sensor and an electronic 2 -wire, 4 to 20 milliamp transmitter assembly enclosed in a gasketed, dust and watertight case. All body cavities open to the process fluid shall be provided with drain ports at the cavity bottom and vent ports at the top of the cavity. Both drain and vent ports shall be minimum 1 /. inch nominal pipe thread. 2. The transmitter shall be 24 volt DC powered and capable of sustaining up to 50 psig differential pressures in either direction, up to the body rating without damage of the instrument, loss of accuracy, or zero shift. Minimum pressure rating: 200 psig. 3. The transmitter shall be fully compensated for both process and ambient temperature v ariations. T he t ransmitter s hall b e f urnished c omplete w ith input gauges and factory mounted 3 -valve manifold. 4. Accuracy: plus or minus 1 percent of full range. 5. Repeatability: 0.5 percent. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mamac PR -282 or acceptable equivalent. F. Watt Transducer: 1. The assembly shall consist of the hardware necessary to generate a pulsed signal indicating the total power being measured by the kilowatt-hour meter provided by others. 2. If existing meter cannot be modified to provide a pulsed output, provide a watt transducer. 3. Watt transducer shall consist of current and voltage transducers and 4 to 20 milliamp transmitters. The assembly shall have output open and short circuit protection. Total accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent of span. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Scientific Columbus, Ohio Semitronics. 1. Current switches shall produce a digital signal corresponding to the current draw of the device being monitored, and such signal shall be scaled in amperes. Current switches shall incorporate an automatic adjustment feature and be sized such that the rated current of the device to be monitored is between 20 percent and 80 percent of the maximum current transducer. Current measurement precision shall be ± 0.1 amp, and a current accuracy shall be ± 2 percent of range. Veris or equal. 2, Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status. Building Management System 15900 -19 Z w 6 tY� 00 U) 0 J = U) w w 0 2 gj _ °. w z � I- 0 Z ~ w 0 O o 1— w H H • O W Z O — 0 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Differential Pressure Switch — Liquid: 1. Provide completely enclosed contact mechanism. z 2. Switch differential setpoint shall be adjustable without removing the cover. 3. Maximum differential pressure of 200 psig. . 1 w 4. Maximum low side pressure of 180 psig. 6 5 5. Bellows shall be stainless steel. •, v v 0 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: JCI /Penn Model P74, Barksdale EPDI or acceptable co p equal. w w J I- V) u_ w 1. Provide diaphragm operator to actuate a single -pole double -throw snap- acting g 5 switch. Operating point shall be adjustable. Range shall suit application. w Wa u_ Q 2. High and low sensing ports shall be 1/8 inch nominal pipe thread connected to angle u type tips designed to sense pressure. '' = C7 . 3. Switches used for fan shutdown shall be manual reset type. i" ' _ . 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cleveland Controls Model AFS 3152 or acceptable F"" z ~ equal. Z O 2 m J. Differential Pressure Switch — Filters — Indicating: D p U N 1 . Differential pressure switch shall incorporate gauge and switch setpoint indicators for 0 H continuous indication of applied pressure and switch settings. Operating point shall w w be adjustable. Range shall suit application. ? 1- 2. High and low sensing ports shall be 1/8 inch nominal pipe thread connected to angle LI O, type tips designed to sense pressure. Z 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dwyer Series 3000 or acceptable equal. v = ', O 1- z Differential Pressure Switch — Air: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Damper End Switch: 1. Provide oil- tight, roller type, single pole double throw snap- acting switch. Mechanism to provide ample overtravel to prevent stress on damper and control equipment. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Furnas Electric, Allen Bradley, Telemechanique. L. Low Limit Thermostat: Shall have a 20 -foot flexible vapor charged element. When temperature sensed by any 12 inch segment of the element falls below setpoint (usually 35 degrees F), thermostat shall operate double -pole double -throw manual reset contacts. Building Management System 15900 -20 f1 '1 .J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.11 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS Z A. Provide automatic dampers as indicated on Drawings as either automatic dampers or i H automatic louver dampers. w IX B. Dampers shall be low leakage type, with published AMCA certified leakage data. Leakage 6 5 through a 48 inch by 48 inch damper at 4 inches water gauge pressure difference shall be N p less than 6.2 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper. co w J I- C. Damper blades and frames shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum, reinforced for co u_ rigidity. Blades shall be of airfoil design with full - length edge seals with inflatable pockets to al enable air pressure from either direction to assist in blade seal off. Edge seals shall be mechanically locked to the blades locked without the use of cement but easily replaceable in g Q the field. Edge seal material shall meet all local codes and requirements of city officials. N D. Bearings shall be non - corrosive and axles shall provide positive locking connection to blades = Cy and linkage. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings. Jamb seals E' _ shall be aluminum, flexible compression type. z f' HO ZF- D. Dampers used for modulating control application shall be of opposed blade configuration and w fu dampers used for open /closed applications shall be parallel blade type. D p U w E. Dampers shall have a maximum blade length of 48 inches and a maximum blade width of 8 p F. inches. The maximum height of each damper section shall be 72 inch. Where greater length w w or height is required, provide an assembly of multiple damper sections. -. 2 6 O F. Install damper actuators of sufficient quantity and size to limit leakage to specified rate. w Z Damper assemblies consisting of multiple damper sections shall be provided with a minimum V N of one damper actuator per section or be connected with an approved jack- shafting 0 H arrangement. Z G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ruskin, Pottorff, Air Balance, Johnson Controls. 2.12 AUTOMATIC VALVES A. Automatic control valves shall be globe type with modulating plug throttling guides, replaceable seats and discs, and stainless steel stems. B. Valves 2 inch and smaller shall have bronze bodies with screwed ends. Valves 2 %2 inch and larger shall have iron bodies with flanged ends. C. Valve body rating shall be equal or greater than the piping in which it is installed and the valve shall be rated for operation against the minimum system differential pressure. Rangeability shall be at least 40 to 1 or as required to provide proper control. Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 percent for single seated valves and 1 percent for double- seated valves. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -21 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Characteristics: z 1. Chilled Water Service: Equal percentage flow characteristics, single seated type. = I- 2. Isolation Service: Linear flow characteristics. Single or double seated. tu E. Valve Action: U O 0 1. Cooling valves normally closed. CD w 2. Or as noted or specified. w H Ci) F. Size valves to meet the coil loads as specified and as follows: , ' w 0 2 1. 2- Position Valves: Line size unless noted. . J u. 2. Water Service: Maximum pressure drop shall be equal to the pressure drop of the D associated coil or exchanger, or 5 pounds per square inch whichever is greater. = C7 3. Cooling Tower Bypass Valves: Sized according to pressure available. 1-- _ 4. Chilled Water Service: Where load exceeds capacity of 4 -inch control valve provide z 1..- two valves piped in parallel and operating in sequence. The larger valve shall have a Z 0 0 coefficient of flow (Cv) that is between 2 and 3 times larger than the smaller valve. W uj D 0 2.13 AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC DAMPERNALVE ACTUATORS 0 D . 0 I- A. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent w W damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. f- 9 - - O . B. Where shown, for power - failure /safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring- return w z mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 0 C. All rotary spring- return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise and counter - clockwise spring- return operation. Linear actuators shall spring- return to the retracted position. D. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 volts DC or 0 to 20 milliamp control signal and provide a 2 to 10 volts DC or 4 to 20 milliamp operating range. E. All 24 volt ACNDC actuators shall operate on NEC Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10 volt -amps for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 volts AC or 230 volts AC shall not require more than 11 volt -amps. F. All non - spring- return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.. Spring- return actuators with more than 60 inch - pounds torque capacities shall have a manual crank for this purpose. G. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built -in switch to allow the reversing of direction of rotation. H. Actuators shall be provided with a raceway fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre -wired to eliminate the necessity of opening t he a ctuator h ousing t o m ake electrical connections. September 30, 2003 Building Management System Permit Issue 15900 -22 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 Listed and CSA Class 4813 02 Certified as meeting correct safety requirements and recognized industry standards. J. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full- stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque. K. Actuators shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft and valve position. The actuator shall be capable of operating the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and vice versa in Tess than 60 seconds. L. Acceptable Manufacturers: Siemens, Belimo Aircontrol. 2.14 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Butterfly valves are permitted for use for two position operation on low temperature water applications only. B. All butterfly valves shall be of the full lug body style with lugs drilled and tapped and have drip tight shutoff capabilities in either direction up to and including maximum system working pressure. Butterfly valves shall be capable of closing tight after long periods of inactivity. C. All valves shall be suitable for use with ANSI Standards flanges. Bodies shall be semi -steel or cast iron. D. Valves shall provide tight shutoff up to the full valve rating on dead end or isolation service without the use of downstream flanges. E. All valves shall be furnished with self - lubricated bronze bearings. Shafts seals shall be provided to prevent leakage and to protect bearings from internal or external corrosion. F Seats shall be of the reinforced resilient type (or retained seat on high performance valves) and shall also act as a body liner to prevent flow from contracting the body casting. Resilient seats shall have flange sealing lips to provide a positive seal without use of flange gaskets. G. Seats shall be Nordel suitable for use with HVAC water to 250 degrees F. Shafts shall be one piece, machined from type 416 stainless steel, finish ground and polished to minimize bearing and shafts seal wear. Shafts of 8 inch and larger valves shall have a non - adjustable thrust collar. H. Discs shall be semi -steel with welded nickel edge. The disc -to -shaft connections shall be type 316 stainless steel. Pins, shaft and disc of all valves shall be individually machined and completely interchangeable. Valves shall be line size unless otherwise noted on Drawings. J. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jamesbury, Keystone, Victaulic Series 300. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Building Management System 15900 -23 z w L c J 0 00 • 0 w = H N LL w 0 2 ? . = 1- w _ z F. F- O w ~ O • N O H w W 0 r- w z O - O I z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.15 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM Z A. Optical Cable: Optical cables shall be duplex 900 millimeter tight -buffer construction 1I designed for intra - building environments. The sheath shall be UL Listed OFNP in te a , 6 accordance with NEC Article 770. The optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI, ANSI X3T9.5 PMD for 62.5/125 millimeter. -J 0 0 i p B. ' Connectors: All optical fibers shall be field- terminated with ST type connectors. Connectors vi w shall have ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies. 2.16 SERVICE KIT uj 0 t g5 N d 1. All specialized nonstandard tools and adapters and fittings required for operating, F.- _ maintaining, testing and adjustment of the system. ? '— 2. Keys for thermostats and humidity control, two per kit. z O. 3. Lubricant required for automatic valves and automatic dampers, one year supply. uj U 0— OH W W . ILL O w z co 0 z A. 2.17 SOFTWARE A. General: B. Executive Software: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Provide three service kits for use by Owner in testing and making minor service adjustments to the system. include as a minimum: 1. Fully implement, optimize, and commission all software described under this paragraph and required for a complete operable system. 2. Although "Program" implies software, hardware solutions may be acceptable after review and approval of authorized representative. Such differences shall be considered deviations and presented as such. 3. Software programs are described as to general intent. It is recognized that BMS contractors' software differ; however, the programs that are provided shall incorporate the features described. 4. Each point shall be identified in software with a unique point name of not Tess than 8 alphanumeric characters. Point names shall be logically and consistently coded to allow . identification of the point location (e.g., Building, MER), associated HVAC system (e.g., AHU -1, Chiller -2), and point function (e.g., supply temp, freezestat) as a minimum. 1. The executive software shall include all programs required for systems, applications, peripheral devices and communications networks. 2. Restrict user software modifications to insure system security. User access to the executive software shall be provided as follows: a. Ability to switch failing output devices to another device without loss of data or otherwise handle device failures (e.g., jammed printers). b. Ability to modify the priorities and scheduling of application programs. c. Ability to add or delete peripheral devices. Building Management System 15900 -24 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 3. Provide diagnostic programs to report and display DDC system failures at the Operator's console both on video display and printer. Provide on -line error detection and messages for the discs, power supplies, CPUs, communications boards, and peripherals. Upon failure of a video display system, the system shall be operable using the printers and keyboard. 4. Provide a Software Time Clock which shall display date, time information where required to resolution of one second and otherwise supply data to programs at resolution of 0.1 seconds; display real time clock in 12 hours or 24 hours format and date. Time and date shall be resettable by mouse or keyboard entry. 5. Peripheral Equipment Selection: a. Provide peripheral equipment selection control to apportion data to peripheral console as required (e.g., alarms to alarm printer). b. Apportionment of data and control functions shall be a programmable function by an authorized operator at any console. Initialization of the apportionment of data shall be according to the description of the Functional Requirements stated under. each Console Description. Contractor shall provide all software and programming time required to initialize the system. Submit initial apportionment for all monitored and control functions for review prior to final programming. c. The graphics display shall allow simultaneous operator interaction and alarm indication in separate on- screen windows. 6. System Access Control: Provide a minimum of three levels of access using selectable passwords to the system software. Each higher level will increase the allowed interaction by the user. Each password must be entered by the operator to access a particular level of system operation. The password shall not be displayed or printed. Each password shall be unique for each operator. 7. The system shall observe the following command priorities (from highest to lowest): a. Smoke Control and Life Safety. b. Manual Operator Command. c. Energy Management. d. Automatic Control. C. Operator interface Program: 1. Provide Microsoft Windows© compatible software as the operator interface with the BMS for defining and selecting points, parameters, report generation, graphics, time schedules and all functions associated with day -to -day operation of the system. 2. Provide software to notify the operator of the occurrence of an alarm condition. All alarm messages displayed on the video terminal, on the local printer, and on the remote printer shall be in simple English- language format. System shall print and sound an audible alarm at each occurrence. Operator acknowledgement shall silence the audible alarm. System shall print upon return to normal. 3. Report Generation Software shall be provided to present system information in an organized manner: a. System Point Log — A log for each system shall include all points required for operation and monitoring of the system. Do not include points used in intermediate calculations and program logic or points used for system tuning and set up. Building Management System 15900 -25 ._; y•:� ���. ter: �..,. z re w 6 0 00 co co Ill J H 0 co I- III Z H w ~ w U 0 0 � ww U II W z = O ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Display for each point: Point Name, Point Description, Current Value, Engineering Units, Alarm Status and Command Priority. c. Application Program Logs — Log for each program shall include current values of all points and parameters used in application program. d. Summary Logs — Logs shall summarize system status. Include as minimum: (1) Alarm Summary. (2) Run Time Totalization Summary. (3) Disabled Point Summary. 4. Provide fully implemented interactive graphics with latest available process data fully integrated with the display. Point values shall be dynamically updated at an operator selectable rate from 5 to 120 seconds. a. Provide a minimum of 32 different operator selectable colors for the various system components to facilitate rapid recognition and ease of interaction. Colors shall be uniform on all displays, such as all master alarms red blinking with reverse field. b. Graphics generation and editing shall be via Windows© based mouse - operated interactive software. The graphics program shall be provided with a library of standard symbols with the capability for use to add custom symbols or modify library symbols using Auto Cadd© version 2000. c. Provide graphics for but not limited to the following: (1) Scale floor plans of each level showing status of associated points within area including but not limited to: smoke detectors, HVAC equipment, controls, sensors. Indicate locations of equipment within area such as DDCs, FEPs, MERs, transmitters, actuators, sensors, lighting control panels, etc. (2) Separate Air and Water Systems Riser Diagrams showing all systems in Block Diagram Form. System status (on, off, alarm) shall be indicated. Risers shall include common sensing points such as outside air and supply and return temperature in main piping systems. (3) Each air and water system. 5. Provide software to output a user programmed message to the printer or video terminal in response to an alarm or change of value of any system point. Message length shall be at least 4 lines of 80 characters each. 6. All software shall be mouse operated (point and click; drop- and -drag, etc.) with the option of using predefined keyboard commands. D. Application Software: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Time of Day and Event Scheduling: a. Software shall automatically start and stop equipment based on the time of day and day of week, including holidays and the type of event. The scheduled time -of -day program shall operate in conjunction with the Start/Stop Time Optimization program. Building Management System 15900 -26 z 1=— Z 00 W • = J 1- • u_ w O gQ — 0 � z �. F- 0 w ~ ju U S2 a H ww H� �' Z U= O 1- z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Schedule assignments shall be for individual points or group of points. For points assigned to one group, assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop command within that group if required. The system shall have the capacity to accommodate a minimum of 500 uniquely defined schedules. Each Toad group shall be capable of accommodating a minimum of 250 loads. Initialize the system with Owner schedules and load assignments. c. The operator shall be able to define the following information: (1) Time, day, dates. (2) Commands such as on, off, auto, etc. (3) Load or Toads assigned to groups. (4) Time delays between successive commands. d. Include provisions for manually overriding each schedule. e. The following reports shall be provided: (1) Report of any and all defined time schedules. (2) Loads assigned to each time schedule. 2. Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO): a. Software shall perform optimized start-up and shutdown of selected equipment. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone conditions by occupancy time. The SSTO program shall also shutdown HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions. Initialize the system with default values used on previous projects of similar construction with similar equipment. b. The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons. It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to all individual systems. c. The SSTO program shall operate on outside weather conditions as well as inside zone conditions, and empirical factors. The empirical factors shall relate to the dynamic responsiveness of particular zones such as heat retention and transfer coefficients. The program shall be fine tuned during the warranty period using empirical data compiled during operation of the building. d. The program shall automatically adjust itself utilizing adaptive control techniques. e. The system operator shall be able to, for each system under control of the SSTO program, establish and modify the following parameters: (1) Occupancy period. (2) Desired occupancy temperature. (3) Heating /cooling transfer coefficients. (4) Heating /cooling retention coefficients. (5) Primary equipment lag time. f. A report shall be provided detailing SSTO parameters such as zone coefficients, zone occupancy time and temperature, activated /inactivated zones, etc. Building Management System 15900 -27 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 3. Demand Limiting: a. Software shall perform electrical demand limiting (EDL). The EDL program shall monitor the rate of electrical power consumption and forecast the total demand during each demand interval using a sliding window approach. b. The program shall automatically shed and restore Toads to prevent the electrical demand from exceeding an operator set level. c. ' Kilowatt rating of each load shall be prioritized by the operator to ensure proper number and sequencing of loads being shed when excessive electrical demand is predicted. For initial scheduling purposes, each load shall be assigned to five priority groups. (1) Priority Group 1, 2 and 3 - Automatically shed as required. (2) Priority Group 4 and 5 - Issue operator advisory to manually shed particular Toad by operator action at console. d. When Toad shed condition exists, program begins searching for loads in Groups 1 and continues through Group 3 until necessary number of kilowatts have been shed. Loads within each group shall be shed on an operator selectable basis. Load restoration procedure is opposite of load shedding procedure. e. Each load shall be programmed with maximum off time, minimum on time and minimum off time. f. The operator shall be able to define the following information: (1) Load kilowatt and priority. (2) Maximum demand setpoint. g. The following information shall be available in report from: (1) Load data. (2) Maximum demand for a given period (day, week, month, etc.). (3) Current demand and Toads shed. h. When an operator - selectable percentage of maximum target is exceeded alarm shall sound, current demand in kilowatt displayed and printed out with time of occurrence on alarm printer. i. Degraded Mode: Loss of all or part of data trunk cable shall not cause the shed Toads to restart and the electrical load to exceed setpoint. DDCs shall cycle connected loads in a stand -alone mode to eliminate or reduce potential increases in maximum demand level. 4. Automatic Restart: During a power outage the DDC operating programs and database shall be protected against loss of memory with battery backup. If length of the power outage exceeds the battery backup capacity, the programs and database shall be automatically reloaded from disk storage upon power restoration. After power has been restored, the system points shall either be returned to the state they would be in if there were no power outage or remain off as defined by equipment and operational requirements. Points to be restarted shall start over a programmed time schedule to affect soft start. 5. Automatic False Alarm Lockout: When systems are off, certain analog variables may drift past programmed alarm limits. Inhibit analog variable limit alarms until after system is restarted and stabilized. Building Management System 15900 -28 ,.•4 144, z � • z ce w QQ � JO O 0 N o • ILI J 1- U u. w LLQ = � w 2 Z �.. H0 . zI-- w • w 0 O N . � I— w LO w z l = 0 ~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 6. Historical Trending: a. Any system point either real or calculated shall be assignable to the historical trending program. All changes in point value shall be recorded Z • for points assigned. The trend interval shall be user selectable. H b. All trend information shall be recorded in non - volatile memory and w re graphically displayed. Display shall accommodate up to twelve different g point trends simultaneously displayed in user selectable colors and -J o dynamically updated. 0 7. Custom Application Program: W w a. Provide real -time control programming capability to allow operator to create customized control strategies based on arithmetic, logical, to u_ conditional, and time logic. w 0 E. Remote Alarm and Communication software: The BMS shall have the ability to alarm and 2 communicate with other off site PC (LOT) by using the modem dial out/in using BACnet g Q • Point To Point service or PC Anywhere or equal commercial software. The BMS shall have the ability to notify the owner via voice or numeric pager of serious alarms on the BMS. = d I- Ill F. Web Access: z I Z I— . w w U� 0 52 o1- ww U LLO w z 0- O1 z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. The system shall be capable of supporting at least 64 clients using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator Systems requiring additional software to enable a standard web browser are not acceptable. 2. The web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the web browser. 3. The web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. 4. The web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: a. User log -on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the web browser. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the web browser interface. c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a web page. HTML editing of the web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the BMS, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the web access computer. e. Real -time values displayed on a web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual "refresh" of the web page. Building Management System 15900 -29 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION f. User's shall have administrator - defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: (1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner. (a) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. (b) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. (2) Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right - clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop -up menu. No entry of text shall be required. (3) View Togs and charts. (4) View and acknowledge alarms. Graphic screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired Zink. 3.01 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT A. The Drawings and Specifications describe approximate locations of the work. Verify all locations in the field. B. Locate equipment and accessories so as to provide easy access for proper service and maintenance. C. The PC and peripherals shall be located in Room No. 11, Security. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide wiring for control devices, monitoring devices, instrumentation, and interlocks as required for a complete system. Coordinate with Divisions 14, 15, 16 and 17 of the Specifications for devices requiring wiring under this Section. B. Run all wiring in compliance with the requirements of the Division 16 Specification and in accordance with authorities and codes having jurisdiction. Provide separate conduit for control wiring under this Section. C Provide all BMS wiring, including power wiring to DDCs and BMS equipment. All power wiring for control system shall be from an emergency power panel. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Engineer for resolution before rough -in work is started. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -30 z Z re w 00 co 0 co III J N LL W O 2 � 22a 1- • w z � F- O Z F- LU uj U � O N O I— LL W LL O w Z U O F z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. The Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be installed as shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Engineer for resolution before rough -in work is started. C. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work. If head room or space conditions appear inadequate — or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and the Contractor's work, and the plans and the work of others — the Contractor shall report these discrepancies to the Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate the Contractor's work with the work of others. Any changes in the work covered by this specification made necessary by the failure or neglect of the Contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by — and at the expense of —this Contractor. 3.04 PROTECTION A. The BMS Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by its work or employees, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for its work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open of work with temporary covers during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Device and panel locations are the responsibility of the BMS Contractor. Group instrumentation on ductwork, air handling units, packaged equipment and fan casing in an organized manner. Locations shall be consistent for each type of system. Each control device, field or panel mounted, shall be identified by an engraved lamacoid nameplate permanently attached to its enclosure. B. Sensors mounted on air ducts having exterior insulation shall be provided with standoff spacers with insulating material firmly fitted around spacers. C. Averaging temperature and low temperature detectors shall be installed in serpentine fashion and supported by steel grid or multiple bulb holders. Minimum coverage 1 linear foot of sensor element per 4 square feet of coil face area. D. Wall mounted sensors shall be 42 inches above finished floor and consistent with ADA requirements as outlined in Division 1 of the specification. In service corridors where subject to damage, mounting height shall be 84 inches unless noted otherwise. Provide insulated base where mounting on exterior wall is required. Provide metal guards where mounted in mechanical, electrical, storage, and maintenance areas or in any area where subject to damage. E. Locate pressure transducers within 50 feet of sensing point. Connect sensors with tubing of diameter recommended by sensor manufacturer and as required to prevent signal phase lag. Provide gauge tees at transducer for connection to pressure gauge. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Building Management System 15900 -31 z w 6 00 U) Co J -- W • D 2 g co _° 1- W Z = 1- O Z 1- W • w U � O - � 1- WW LLO • z j • I O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. DDC panels shall not be located directly underneath valves or other areas where they may be Z subject to water or heat damage. In addition, panels shall be mounted with the bottom no _ a • lower than 3 feet and the top no higher than 7 feet above the floor, with a minimum of 3 foot H Z clearance at the front. Et w 3.06 WIRING UO N D A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes and W w Division 16 of this specification. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in . , N F_ Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence. O w B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL Listed in approved raceway per NEC and Division 16 requirements. "' N a C. All low- voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Low - voltage power circuits shall H w be sub -fused when required to meet Class 2 current - limit. Z = H HO D. Where NEC Class 2 (current - limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations Z I including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used, provided 2 m that cables are UL Listed for the intended application. For example, cables used in ceiling U 0 plenums shall be UL Listed specifically for that purpose. o N E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms — or where subject to mechanical = w damage — shall be installed in raceway. ~ 176 u. F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels w N containing high - voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low- voltage wiring except 0 _ for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers). p I– Z G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing. H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or . „, i perpendicular to it, and neatly tied at 10 -foot maximum intervals. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems. J. All wire -to- device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip. All wire -to- wire connections shall be at a terminal block. K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals. L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120 volt. If only higher voltages are available, the Contractor shall provide step -down transformers. M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -32 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations. Z O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in :• UJ keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC requirements, except as noted r[ 2 elsewhere. J v 0 0 P. Include one pull string in each raceway 1 inch or larger. co Cl w = Q. Use coded conductors throughout with different colored conductors. co ~ u. O R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures 2 include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 g 5 starters. co d S. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Install raceway - F _ to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches from high- temperature equipment (over 104 Z I- . degrees F). z O . UJ w T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie v N rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork. o f- Ill w U. Adhere to Division 16 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion joints. H 0 u V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of Z iii U= W. The Contractor shall terminate all control and /or interlock wiring, and shall maintain updated O Z (as- built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site. all vertical raceways. X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid- tight, flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 3 feet in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than 1/2 inch electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture — including chiller and boiler rooms — liquid- tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used. Y. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (per code). Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed. 3.07 BMS COMMUNICATION WIRING A. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication cabling. B. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1 or other Class 2 wiring. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Building Management System 15900 -33 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable installation as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during installation. D. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable. E. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed between the lines and ground. The lighting arrestor shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. F. All runs of communication wiring shall be un- spliced length when that length is commercially available. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations Article on Communications Circuits, Cable and Protector Grounding. 3.08 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors to give instruction in the adjustment, o peration and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system specified. The training shall be oriented toward the system installed rather than being a general training course. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and material required for classroom training. B. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases for the time interval specified for each phase. 1. The first phase shall be given prior to the acceptance test period at a time mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Owner, and shall be at least five (5) days (8 hours /day) in length. 0 perating p ersonnel s hall b e t rained i n t he f unctional operations of the BMS installed and the procedures that the operators will employ for system operation. The training shall include but not be limited to: a. General BMS Configuration. b. Operation of Computer and Peripherals. c. Command Line Mnemonics. d. Report Generation. e. Operator Control Functions. f. Graphics Generation. g. General Equipment Layout. h. Troubleshooting Procedures i. Preventative Maintenance Procedures. j. Sensor Maintenance and Calibration. k. Proper use of service kit. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Building Management System 15900 -34 w QQ � JU 0O w 0 w J w w W Z 1 F- 0 w ~ W . 0 O N' 0 W H� LL li l Z W F I- O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. The second phase shall be conducted after system acceptance testing for a period of eight (8) days. The training shall occur up to one year after the first phase of training as determined by the Owner and shall include but not be limited to: a. DDC Programming. b. Data Base Generation. w c. Supervisory Level Operator Commands. d. Topics requested by Owner. 0 0 3.09 CALIBRATION AND COMMISSIONING co w I J I- A. Perform a three -phase commissioning procedure consisting off field I /O calibration and co u. commissioning, s ystem c ommissioning a nd integrated system program commissioning. al 0 Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets that shall be submitted prior to acceptance testing. Notify the Owner in writing of the testing schedule so u. Q that operating personnel may observe calibration and commissioning. d z B. Field I/O Calibration and Commissioning: Z H 1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been Z O 1.-. , installed according to the shop drawings and test, calibrate, and bring on -line each Ill ? . control device. Commissioning to include but not be limited to: D 0 a. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90 percent of range. 0 cn b. Sensor range. o l— c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting. w w d. Point value reporting. I e. Binary alarm and switch settings. u_ O f. Actuator spring ranges. w Z g. Failsafe position on loss of control signal. U N 2. • Record calibration and test data on commissioning data sheets and submit. Data 0 H sheets shall include the device designation, the date of commissioning and the name z of person who performed commissioning. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue System Program Commissioning: After control devices have been commissioned, each DDC program shall be put on -line and commissioned. The Contractor shall confirm that the DDC program logic follows the approved software flow chart and sequence of operation. Each control loop shall be adjusted to provide stable control and control within the specified accuracies. System program test results and loop adjustments shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted. D. Integrated System Commissioning: 1. After all DDC programs have been commissioned, the Contractor shall verify the overall system performs as specified. Tests shall include but not be limited to: a. Data communication, both normal and failure modes. b. Fully loaded system response time. c. Impact of component failures on system operation. d. Time /date changes. e. End of month /end of year operation. f. Global application programs. Building Management System 15900 -35 Instrument Accuracy Temperature: 1 /. degree F or 1 /2 percent of full scale, whichever is Tess Pressure: Y2 pound per square inch or Y2 percent of full scale, whichever is less MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING g. System backup and reloading. h. System status displays. Diagnostics. j. Power fail /restart. k. Battery backup. A. Submit a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements at least 4 weeks before the start of testing. This procedure to be approved prior to the start of the testing. B. During acceptance testing provide services of a fully qualified building automation technician who is knowledgeable of the project. C. Using the commissioning test data the Owner shall s elect, a t random, f unctions to be demonstrated. The Contractor in accordance with the acceptance test procedure shall demonstrate these functions. At least 15 percent of the systems functions shall be demonstrated. At least 95 percent of the functions demonstrated must perform as specified and documented on commissioning data sheets or the system must be retested. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Furnish instruments required for testing. Submit catalog data on all instruments for approval prior to performance tests. E. After the above acceptance tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning as specified, a thirty -day endurance test period shall begin. If the system functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test period the system fails to perform as'specified and cannot be corrected within eight hours, the Owner may request that the endurance tests be repeated after problems have been corrected. END OF SECTION Building Management System 15900 -36 J J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1 Z Z 1 re w Q � JU V O 1. Static and Dynamic Fire Dampers. u) w 2. Balancing Dampers. -J H 3. Backdraft Dampers. co u. wO g Q co =d H= z C. Section 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets. F- O '. Z F— D. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. 2 ? . E. Division 16 — Electrical. v U O of w w . A. Manufacturer: Test and qualify with UL a complete range of damper sizes covering dampers specified. Testing one size only is not acceptable. u- Z Damper shall open and close under HVAC system operating conditions in accordance with U N' UL 555S. 01- z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15910 DAMPERS A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. • Section 15800 — Ductwork. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Pressure drop ratings of dampers shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. D. Air Flow Rating: UL approved for dual directional airflow. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. C. NFPA 92A - Smoke - Control Systems. D. UL 555 - Standard for Safety; Fire, Smoke and Fire /Smoke Dampers. E. UL 555S - Standard for Safety; Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Dynamic fire damper submittal shall include performance data developed for UL 555 standard tests. Maximum allowed air flowrate and static pressure for duct and non -duct mounted installations shall be documented. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Dampers 15910 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Submit construction details, hardware details, gauges and certified dimensioned shop drawings for all damper types. C. Manufacturer's product data: w 1. Include leakage, pressure drop, and maximum pressure data. re 2 2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. _i 0 3. Verify conformance to NFPA 90A, NFPA 92A, UL 555, UL 555S, and applicable v O o building code. N w 4. Verify damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in 11.1 accordance with AMCA 500. to uj O PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS • u- A. Static and Dynamic Fire Dampers: Ruskin DIBD2 Style B, IBD2 Style B, or approved equal by w A Balance, AWV, Pottorff, Greenheck. 1 ._ B. Backdraft Dampers: Ruskin CBD4 counterbalanced, Ruskin BD2 non - counterbalanced or z 0; equal by Air Balance, AWV, Arrow. uj C. Manual Balancing Damper: Ruskin MD35, MD25, MDRS25, CD025. 0 N 2.02 FIRE DAMPERS H w w A. Provide static and dynamic fire dampers in ducts penetrating fire rated walls, floors, and F' v ceilings as required by NFPA, local codes and authorities regardless if shown or not shown ` II 0 on the Drawings. Dampers shall be factory marked for static or dynamic use. w B. Provide conveniently located access doors, of ample size for resetting the dampers. Duct 0 / - mounted grilles, registers or diffusers can be used for access as long as such access is Z readily available as determined by the Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Integral sleeve frame shall be minimum 20 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Details. D. Dampers shall be spring - loaded with shutter stored out of the airstream to provide minimum 95 percent free area. E. Dynamic rated fire dampers shall be labeled in accordance with UL 555S. Static fire dampers shall be labeled in accord with UL 555. F. Dampers shall be actuated by UL approved fusible Zink. Upon operation of the Zink, the dampers shall close automatically and remain tightly closed. Fusible links shall operate approximately 50 degrees F above the maximum temperature the duct system will encounter under normal operation, but not less than 165 degrees F. G. Dampers shall be of types acceptable to the local authorities, Owner and Architect. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dampers 15910 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 BALANCING DAMPERS — SINGLE BLADE A. Provide volume dampers as specified or shown on the Drawings for proper balancing and zz distribution of air, in the various branches of the ductwork for use in testing and balancing the = system. Dampers shall be installed separate and independent from the damper specified to .t— w be set behind supply, return and exhaust air grilles. Provide single blade dampers in ducts c4 24 inches in width or less, or 12 inches in height or Tess. Provide multiple blade dampers for J all other duct sizes. Coordinate with the air balancing contractor and provide additional 0 0 dampers required for proper air balance. w= B. Provide single blade and quadrant type volume dampers of minimum 20 gauge round or 22 N 1- gauge rectangular galvanized steel construction, pivoted to turn easily. Provide operating O handles and Ventline 560 or equal locking devices mounted on outside of the duct in an w accessible location. Blade shall have 4 full length brakes for increased stiffness and rigidity. g J u. C. Damper component penetration shall be closed and sealed consistent with the specified duct sealing class. End bearings are required for 3 inch water gauge class. w 2.04 BALANCING DAMPERS — MULTIPLE BLADES z 1- HO A. Manual d ampers s hall h ave a minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel channel frame with W w mounting flanges and axles set in molded polycarbonate or oil impregnated bronze bearings. Axles s hall b e minimum o f Y2 inch i n diameter and s hall b e interlocked with b lades to O N po eliminated slippage. B. Blades shall be minimum of 16 -gauge galvanized steel. Manual dampers shall have a = U minimum of four breaks running the entire length of the damper to assure rigidity and tight �" F close off. Blades shall be on centers no greater than 9 inches and no blade shall exceed 48 L O inches in length. All blades shall be interconnected to act in unison for opposed blade uj operation. U % � C. When installed, damper frame shall be gasketed or caulked to eliminate leakage between z duct or plenum and damper frame. Head and sill shall have stops. Damper shafts shall be marked to indicate blade position. D. Dampers shall be provided with Ventline 560 or approved equal, locking quadrants of sufficient size and design to securely hold the damper sections and blade linkage hardware. 2.05 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS — COUNTERBALANCED TYPE A. Provide counterbalanced backdraft dampers as specified and where indicated on the Drawings. Each damper shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be suitable for installation in the mounting arrangement shown. B. Backdraft damper shall be the heavy duty pressure relief counter - balanced shutter type similar to Ruskin type CBD4, or approved equal. C. Damper frame shall be minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel or 16 -gauge aluminum. Damper frame shall be of channel construction for ductwork mounting or have a front flange when installed in a wall. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dampers 15910 -3 •n.. • ,, x134,•:•+i ^ l'r.. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Damper blades shall be minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel or 16 -gauge aluminum. Provide individual adjustable counterweights on each blade. The damper shall be capable of maintaining static pressures of 0.05 to 0.20 inch water gauge. Furnish tie bars constructed of minimum 16 -gauge galvanized steel or 16 -gauge aluminum on damper sections over 24 inches wide. After damper has been installed, counterweights shall be adjusted to balance the system static pressure as directed by the test and balancing contractor. • E. Damper blades shall have polyurethane foam, neoprene, or vinyl gaskets glued, riveted or rolled into blade edges. F. Damper bearings shall be molded polycarbonate, bronze oilite, nylon, or cycoloy. G. Furnish counter - balanced backdraft dampers with No. 1% mesh aluminum bird screen for rear mounting where counter - balanced backdraft dampers are mounted in outside walls. 2.06 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Furnish and install backdraft dampers as specified and where indicated on the Drawings. Each damper shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings and shall be suitable for installation in the mounting arrangement shown. Backdraft dampers mounted in roof curbs shall be secured to galvanized steel support angles fastened to the curb. B. Backdraft dampers shall be heavy duty relief shutter type suitable for wall and duct mounting or installation at a centrifugal fan discharge. Backdraft dampers shall be similar to Ruskin Type BD2 -A1 for face velocities to 1500 feet per minute and Ruskin Type BD2 -A2 for face velocities to 2500 feet per minute or approved equal. Damper frame shall be constructed of minimum 0.090 -inch thick aluminum or minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Damper frame shall be of channel construction when installed in ductwork or have a front flange when installed in a wall. D. Damper blades shall be constructed of minimum 0.025 -inch thick extruded aluminum suitable for face velocities up to 1500 feet per minute and minimum 0.05 -inch thick extruded aluminum for face velocities to 2500 feet per minute. Damper blades shall have neoprene or vinyl gaskets riveted or rolled into the blade edge. Each backdraft damper section shall be furnished with tie bars constructed of minimum 16 -gauge aluminum. Furnish two tie bars on damper sections over 40 inches wide. E. Damper bearings shall be molded polycarbonate, bronze oilite, nylon, or cycoloy. F. Furnish backdraft dampers with 1.5 inch by 1.5 -inch 22 -gauge wire mesh aluminum bird screen for rear mounting where backdraft dampers are mounted in outside walls. G. Damper leakage shall not exceed 12 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper face area at 0.5 inches water gauge differential pressure. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install dampers square and free from twist or racking with blades running horizontally. B. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dampers 15910 -4 -J • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provide conveniently located access doors, of ample size for resetting the dampers. Duct mounted grilles, registers or diffusers can be used for access as long as such access is readily available as determined by the Architect, Owner or Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Fire damper operation shall be tested after the installation is complete. Static fire dampers shall be tested with the system fans not operating. Dynamic fire dampers shall be tested with system fans operating at their maximum static pressure ratings. A written certificate shall be issued by the Contractor to the Owner stating: 1. Damper identification. 2. Damper location. 3. Date tested. 4. Names and signatures of witnesses and testing personnel. E. Provide a copy of certification to system balancing agent for inclusion in balancing report. F. Size and quantity of dynamic fire damper shall be based on the UL listing of the damper manufacturer. Provide intermediate mullions and split duct connections as required. G. Provide ribbon at each manual damper handle. September 30, 2003 Permit issue END OF SECTION Dampers 15910 -5 J -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15930 AIR TERMINAL UNITS z • w QQ : � J U O 0 N 0 A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: w = J H 1. Fan powered terminal units. u.. 2. Factory mounted and calibrating control modules, actuators. w O ; u. Q 22 a � w Z H 1- O Z 0 � O N 0 I- w W . L- O wz H =` O z PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15170 - Electric Motors. Section 15190 - Systems Identification. Section 15241 Acoustics. E. Section 15250 — Insulation. F. Section 15900 - Building Management System (BMS). G. Section 15985 - Automatic Control Sequences. H. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. I: Division 16 - Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS C. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Submit manufacturer's leakage rating, certified airflow performance test data, sound performance test data and certified dimensioned drawings. Submit materials of construction, assembly details and mounting details. C. Submit actuators and linkages with control requirements specified. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Standard 130. B. ARI Standard 880. C. U.L. Standard 1995. Air Terminal Units 15930 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Z A. Electric coils shall be given a 2000 -volt dielectric test. �_ w s u� B. Sound ratings for all units shall not exceed valves specified in Section 15241: Acoustics at 1- U O inch water gauge static pressure. 0 co 0 co w C. Terminal units shall be listed as a composite assembly per U.L. 1995. ILI _ U) w w 0 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2 J 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS CO O � w A. Fan Powered Terminal Units: Titus, Trane, Nailor Industries. x Zh- '2.02 FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS z 0 0 IIJ w A. Furnish fan - powered terminal devices as indicated on the Drawings. Refer to equipment D 0 schedules for duct connection sizes and capacities. Provide the terminal units with a primary 0 to variable air volume damper that controls the primary air quantity in response to a control 0 ! - signal. The terminal units shall contain a fan and motor assembly, and an electric heating w w coil where scheduled or indicated on the Drawings. The fan shall provide a constant volume H of discharge air at all air - blending ratios from minimum to maximum scheduled primary air u O quantities and zero to 100 percent return airflow rates. Review the space limitations carefully Ili Z to ensure all terminal units will fit in the space allowed including National Electric Code o u clearances required in front of all panels containing electrical devices. Provide an access I 1 door or doors to service all internal components and a removable panel to service the fan Z and electric motor. Provide cam latches for the access doors. Provide a filter rack with a 1- inch thick throwaway filter. Filter shall be replaced prior to building occupancy. The terminal units shall include all equipment and controls as required to provide a complete and operating system with the following minimum equipment and controls: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Single point electrical connection for the voltage /phase as scheduled. Refer to Electrical Drawings and specifications for power wiring requirements. 2. Circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch sized to protect all terminal unit electrical components. 3. Individual electrical overcurrent protection devices as required to protect individual terminal unit devices and transformers. 4. A fan speed control system shall be furnished by the terminal unit manufacturer to manually set the fan speed. Speed controller shall be continuously adjustable from maximum to minimum. Match speed control device to operate with the m otor. Provide relays to start or stop the fan motor on a signal from the BMS. Air Terminal Units 15930 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 5. Provide a multi -point flow sensor device that will control the maximum primary airflow for the terminal unit to that indicated on the Drawings through a transducer and a Direct Digital Control (DDC) microprocessor provided by the Control Contractor. Locate the multi -point flow sensor in the primary duct connection in a position to accurately monitor the supply airflow. Equip the primary inlet with a gradual transition (SMACNA Construction Standards) as required to connect to the primary duct size shown on the Drawings. The transition shall be provided by the terminal unit manufacturer and field installed by the Contractor. Provide a 4 -inch long minimum transition with a 1/8 -inch high raised bead approximately 1'/z inches from the inlet connection. Permanently mark the primary and fan design airflow settings on the bottom of the unit. Provide a transformer with 24 volt AC secondary to provide power for the controls. The terminal unit manufacturer and the Controls Contractor shall verify compatibility of multi -point sensor with transducer and DDC microprocessor prior to building this Project. The multi -point flow sensors and flow transducers in conjunction with the DDC control system shall be capable of controlling the terminal unit discharge air volume (CFM) t o w ithin 5 p ercent o f scheduled design fan air volume (CFM). 6. Provide steel fan /motor assembly with forward curved centrifugal fan dynamically balanced wheel with a direct drive motor. Provide permanent split capacitor motor with i ntegral t hermal overloads, and designed for u se w ith a Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) speed controller. Provide isolation between fan motor assembly and unit casing to eliminate any vibration from unit casing. Provide anti -back rotation system or provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse rotation and not affect life expectancy. 7. Fan motor assembly shall be a forward curved centrifugal fan with a direct drive motor. Motors shall be General Electric ECM variable -speed direct current brushless motors specifically designed for use with a single phase, 277 -volt, 60 -hertz electrical input. Motor shall be complete with and operated by a single -phase integrated controller /inverter that operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to electrically commutate the stator. An integral controller furnished by the terminal unit manufacturer shall provide a signal to the "ECM" motor to maintain constant supply airflow. All motors shall be designed for synchronous rotation. Motor rotor shall be permanent magnet type with near zero rotor losses. Motor shall have built -in soft start and soft speed change ramps. Motor shall be able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or vertical orientation. Motor shall be permanently lubricated with ball bearings. Motor shall be direct coupled to the blower. Motor shall maintain a minimum of 70 percent efficiency over its entire operating range. Provide isolation between fan motor assembly and unit casing to eliminate any vibration from the fan to the terminal unit casing. Provide anti -back rotation system or provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse rotation and not affect life expectancy. Motors and inverter assemblies manufactured by Emerson, General Electric, Fasco, or A.O. Smith shall be acceptable. a. The manufacturer of the fan powered terminal units shall set the fan discharge airflow (cfm) at the factory or in the field. The factory setting for the fan cfm shall be clearly marked on each terminal identification label. If the fan cfm is set in the field by the terminal unit manufacturer the set cfm shall be written on the label in the field by the terminal unit manufacturer's technician. If the fan powered terminal unit manufacturer cannot factory set the fan cfm, factory technicians shall be sent to the field to adjust the motor and the associated controller /inverter to the discharge airflow on the drawings. Fan cfm shall be constant within ±5 percent regardless of Air Terminal Units 15930 -3 • MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Design the primary air damper to vary primary air supply in response to an electronic signal. Damper leakage at shutoff shall not exceed 4 percent of the scheduled maximum fan airflow at 2 inches water gauge. Provide damper connection to the operating shaft of a positive mechanical type to prevent any slippage. Provide non - lubricated delrin or mylar bearings for the damper shaft. Select the primary air damper in conjunction with the DDC microprocessor furnished under Section 15900: Building Management System (BMS) to provide control at low primary air velocities. The total deviation in primary airflow shall not exceed plus or minus 5 percent of the primary airflow corresponding to a 300 feet per minute air velocity through the primary air valve at 0.2 inches water gauge inlet static pressure. The primary airflow accuracy and repeatability shall be laboratory demonstrated and proven with any inlet configuration and inlet static variation from 0.2 to 2.0 inches water gauge. Dampers shall be life cycle tested to at least 10,000 cycles. C. Sound attenuation of air stream noise and acoustical treatment of terminal unit must comply with Section 15241: Acoustics with 1 inch water gauge inlet pressure, 0.3 inch water gauge discharge pressure, and the specified design air volume scheduled on the Drawings. Record radiated noise and self - generated noise readings at 0.5, 1.0 and 1.5 inch water gauge inlet static pressures. D. Provide thermal insulation for all portions of the terminal unit in contact with primary cold or fan - powered heated air as 1 inch, 1% pound density fiberglass insulation with a minimum installed 3.5 R -valve which complies with U.L. 181 and NFPA 90A, with a continuous inner sealed liner of non - porous material. The liner shall meet the requirements of U.L. 723, U.L. 181, NFPA 90A and the bacteriological standards of ASTM C685. All cut edges of insulation and liner shall be sealed from the air streams by use of sheetmetal nosings. Exposed fiberglass shall not be accepted. E. Provide a double wall galvanized sheetmetal cabinet with minimum 20 gauge steel outer sheet and perforated 22 gauge inner sheet. Clearly identify on the cabinet mounting connections for hanging the terminal unit by sheetmetal straps. Factory install all components, including all controls and wiring, except the following field connections: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue changes in static upstream or downstream of the terminal unit after it is installed in the field. Fan cfm shall be set with a potentiometer and digital meter. Neither SCR's nor rheostats shall be an acceptable means of setting the fan cfm. One speed adjustment device shall be provided by the terminal unit manufacturer to the Owner for field adjustment of the fan speed should construction or design changes become necessary. b. A witnessed test shall be conducted by the fan powered terminal unit manufacturer in an independent testing laboratory to confirm that the terminal unit and the fan motor as an assembly performs in accordance with this specification. If the fan powered terminal device and dc motor as an assembly fails to perform as specified and as scheduled on the Drawings, the terminal unit manufacturer shall make adjustments and take all corrective action as necessary at t he t erminal u nit m anufacturer's s ole expense. 8. The terminal u nit s hall b e I isted i n a ccordance w ith U .L. 1 995 as a c omposite assembly consisting of the terminal unit with or without the electric or hot water heating device. 1. Primary duct. 2. Secondary duct. Air Terminal Units 15930 -4 4wY • 141iu_Sic:..,u..wi u.�v.........t�_� .....�,... _........... ✓...... 4a:JS.vx. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Single point electrical connection. 4. BMS electronic control signals. 5. Room sensor connection. Z IT- F. The terminal unit shall be designed to provide full cataloged airflow range at an inlet static W rt pressure or 0.25 inches water gauge or less. Downstream static pressure requirements shall 5 be supplied by the unit internal fan. _, 0 co 0 G. The following equipment shall be supplied by Control (BMS) Contractor and installed by the uu) w fan powered terminal manufacturer: _1 H N w 1. DDC microprocessor based controller. Ui 0 2. Pressure transducer if it is not contained in the DDC microprocessor. J H. The Control Contractor shall furnish the DDC unit controller and flow transducers (if not n integral with the unit controller) to the terminal unit manufacturer's factory. The Control = O . Contractor shall supply written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to F' _ enable the terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation. The terminal Z t" manufacturer shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the terminal unit controller and all Z O g associated instrumentation and final control elements based on the information provided by the Control Contractor. The Control Contractor shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's D p facility at the completion of the first production run for this Project and prior to the shipping of 0 u) any units to the project site, to inspect the installation of the DDC controller. The terminal unit p H manufacturer shall not make any factory adjustments to the DDC unit controller or enter any w w data into the DDC unit controller in any way. All testing, entry of data and adjustments of any H 0 kind to the unit controller shall be undertaken by the Control Contractor at the project site. ~ u- O Z I. GE "ECM" fan motor shall have a multi -point flow sensor factory- installed in each induction 6.1 w port. An averaging flow sensor of equal accuracy may be provided at the fan inlet in lieu of 0 H flow sensors at each induction port. U.L. listed (F -R) type tubing shall be factory installed as Z required for the flow sensors and bulkhead pressure fittings. 1. 24 volt AC transformer. 2. 24 volt AC fan start/stop relay. 3. 24 -volt AC relays for the electric heating coil control through the Division 17. 4. Manual and /or automatic fan speed adjustment device. 5. Sheet metal enclosure for the DDC controller. 6. Primary air damper and linkage. J. The terminal unit manufacturer shall verify the operation of each fan - powered terminal before shipment. Testing shall include at least the following: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Apply electric power to the unit. 2. Start the fan and verify fan rotates properly. 3. The terminal unit manufacturer shall factory or field adjust the GE ECM motor and associated controller /inverter to the discharge cfm indicated on the Drawings. 4. Energize the electric heat through the electric heating coil relay. Verify the signal with a volt meter to ensure proper heater operation. 5. De- energize the electric heating coil and verify the signal with a volt meter to ensure the heater is de- energized. Air Terminal Units 15930 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 6. Disconnect the primary air damper actuator from the DDC terminal unit controller. Provide separate power source to the actuator to verify operation and rotation of damper. Drive the damper closed and verify by feel or observation that damper is driven fully closed. Return primary air damper to the fully open position prior to shipment. 7. Provide a written inspection report for each terminal unit signed and dated by the factory test technician verifying all terminal unit wiring and testing has been performed per the manufacturer's testing and quality assurance requirements. K. The Control Contractor shall provide the terminal unit manufacturer with multi -color point to point wiring diagrams detailing the wiring of the DDC controller and other control equipment installed on the terminal device. The terminal unit manufacturer shall review and approve the wiring diagrams and coordinate any changes necessary with the Control contractor. The terminal unit manufacturer shall incorporate the final version of the wiring diagram in the terminal unit shop drawing submittals. 2.03 FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS ELECTRIC HEATING COILS A. Provide electric heater coils of open coil design constructed of the highest grade 80 percent nickel, and 20 percent chromium resistance wire or nichrome elements and insulated with ceramic, phenolic, or lava insulators in aluminized steel, galvanized steel, or stainless steel brackets, supported in heavy gauge aluminized or galvanized steel frames. Construct each unit containing an electric heating coil and install in accordance with requirements of the local authorities and shall carry U.L. or ETL approval and listing for the terminal unit device with heater. B. Refer to the Drawings for coil capacities. Coils rated to 5 kilowatts shall be 277 -volt single phase, larger capacities shall 480 volt, three phases. Coils up to 3 kilowatts shall be single step. Coils larger than 3 •kilowatts shall be two -step. C. Provide terminal bolts, nuts and washers of corrosion resistant materials. Construct coils so the installation may be accomplished in accordance with the provisions of the National Electric Code, for zero clearance. Coils shall receive a 2000 -volt dielectric test at the factory. D. Provide automatic reset thermal cutouts for primary protection with manual reset limit switches in power circuits for secondary protection. Both devices must be serviceable j through terminal box without removing heating element from the terminal unit. E. Construct heater with a terminal box and cover containing built -in mercury step controlled contactors for each circuit, branch circuit fusing for each 48 amp circuit per NEC, and a static pressure or airflow safety interlock switch for installation in the heater control enclosure. Use contactors mounted in ceiling above occupied tenant spaces of the mercury type. Provide a separate 120 volt fused control power transformer with primary and secondary protection and a disconnect. F. Bring all wiring of built -in devices to clearly marked terminal strips. Provide a complete wiring diagram permanently attached to the terminal device cover or the terminal device. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Air Terminal Units 15930 -6 z HZ • w QQ � JU U O u) o w = -4 1.- w 2 u. = x w z F F- O z ►- w U� 0- 0 I- w 1- ui = 0 /- z j • c MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15940 . AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Air Outlets. 2. Air Inlets. 3. Accessories for Air Inlets and Air Outlets. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15241 — Acoustics. C. Section 15250 — Insulation. D. Section 15800 — Ductwork. E., Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. F. Division 16 — Electrica.I G. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for floor, wall and ceiling construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's performance data including air throw and drop, outlet velocities, total and velocity pressures and acoustic performance. Submit manufacturer's specifications of construction including materials, installation instruction and adjustment data. Include "K" factors for balancing. Submit product accessories. Submit samples, color and finish selections, schedule of sizes and model number for review by the Architect prior to fabrication. Schedule of air outlets and air inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. Air Outlets and Inlets September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15940 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air outlets and inlets to be tested in accordance with: z _I- • 1.' ARI 885 -90: Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the w Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets. 2. ARI 880 -94: Air Terminal Test Standard. -J 0 3. ANSI /ASHRAE 70 -91: Air Diffuser Performance Standard, Isothermal and Cooling. co p 4. ASHRAE 55 -91: Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy. co w 5.. ASHRAE 113 -90: Method of Testing for Room Air Distribution. LLJ H CO B. All air inlets and outlets shall be factory painted or anodized. Paint or anodized finish shall ill 0 pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM -870 Water g 5 Immersion Test and an ASTM D -2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch -pound co force applied. Finish (pencil) hardness shall be minimum HB to H. = 0 Few z� 1- O i- LLI 0 O N : 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 0 1- w w A. Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of air inlets and air outlets and are 1-- based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products ' g_ 0 with equal quality, appearance, finish and performance characteristics may be considered. w z Refer to Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions for alternates or substitutions. U O 1- C. For all components provided with fiberglass acoustic lining, refer to Section 15250: Insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Air Inlets and Outlets: Titus, Krueger, Price, Nailor. C. Accessories: Dampers, equalizing grids, turning vanes, extractors, plenums, hardware and frames shall be provided by the same manufacturers as the air inlets and air outlets provided. 2.02 GENERAL A. Air distribution outlets as shown on the Drawings shall accommodate the air volume and throw indicated to maintain a maximum terminal velocity of 50 feet per minute in the occupied area. The overall noise level produced by all of the supply air outlets and exhaust or retum air inlets in various rooms shall not exceed specified limits. B. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for reflected ceiling plans, elevations, wall and ceiling types and construction. Air outlets and inlets in fire rated ceilings or walls must be all steel construction. Coordinate frame and border types to accommodate the wall or ceiling specified or shown on the Architectural Drawings. C. All dampers provided shall be operable from the face of the Air Inlet or Air Outlet. D. Model numbers noted herein are Nailor unless otherwise noted. Air Outlets and Inlets September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15940 -2 ,V z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 OUTLET TYPES A. Square Ceiling Diffuser, Louver Face Fixed Pattern: 1. Provide louver face supply diffusers, all steel construction with AG -75 steel opposed blade volume control damper. 2. Diffuser shall have three one -piece precision die - stamped cones to provide uniform appearance if different neck sizes are used. The back cone shall include an integral drawn inlet. The two inner cones shall be a removable assembly with adjustable vanes to change the airflow from fully open to fully closed. 3. Sizes indicated on Drawings are neck sizes. 4. Baked white enamel finish. 5. Type CD -2: 24 inch by 24 inch face size. Nailor Model RNS or approved equal. 6. Type CD -1: 12 inch by 12 inch face size. Nailor Model RNS or approved equal. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Combination Plenum and Linear Slot: 1 1. Provide all steel linear slot diffuser with insulated plenums. 2. Slot widths shall be Y2 inch. 3. Assembly shall include factory- fabricated plenum, slot diffuser and pattern controller. The maximum air leakage of the assembly shall not exceed 5 percent of the air volume indicated on the Drawings. 4. Number of slots, lengths, air volume border type, frame type, and fastening or mounting type as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Baked enamel finish. All visible surfaces painted flat black. 6. Type SD -1 & 2: Nailor Model 57501 or approved equal. j C. Perforated Floor Diffuser: 1. 24 inch square all steel construction. J 2. 25% open area. 3. Capable of handling concentrated Toad up to 1250 lbs. 4. Galvanized slide damper mounted to underside of diffuser. 5. Covering to be equivalent of floor tiles as specified by the Architect. 6. Type FD -1: Tate Model Perf 1250 Air Flow Panel or approved equal. J 2.04 INLET TYPES A. Ceiling Perforated Grille: j 1. Provide all steel construction. Face area as shown on the Drawings. 2. Flush perforated face shall be an exact match in construction, mounting type and appearance to the perforated face air'outlets as specified. 3. Perforated face shall be easily unlatchable from the back pan. 4. Face area as shown on the Drawings. 5. Baked white enamel finish. 6. Type CR -1: Nailor Model 4360 or approved equal. Air Outlets and Inlets 15940 -3 z re w . 00 N0 co cu J = H U- lu 0 2 (.2d = w H Z �. I— O w ~ • w 0 O - 0 I- I w w' - • O w U =� 0 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL .A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories to achieve air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Locations indicated on the Architectural drawings shall take precedence. For lay -in ceiling panels, locate in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install a ir o utlet a nd a ir i nlet w ith a irtight c onnection t o d ucts a nd to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. B. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions. All visible interior surfaces of air inlets shall be factory painted flat black. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Air Outlets and Inlets Permit Issue 159404 L .• Z PART 1 — GENERAL w 1.01 WORK INCLUDED - 2 U O . A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: u) o co w 1. Supply and install necessary software, programming, sensing, controlling and w H controlled devices, piping, wiring and commissioning of automatic control systems, u) u- so as to provide a complete control system, meet requirements of control sequences w O . specified. u-Q �D = 0 A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. I _ . ZH ! F- O B. Section 15900 - Building Management System (BMS). Z !— w uj Do i PART 2 — PRODUCTS c OH w 1- I- ~• W 0- O 1- -J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS NOT USED. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL SECTION 15985 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Contractor shall provide customized control strategies and control sequences and define appropriate control loop algorithms and choose the optimum loop parameters for loop control. All control loops shall be tuned to stabilize within plus or minus 1 percent of setpoint within 5 minutes of setpoint change or startup. B. Safety devices shall be hardwire interlocked with "hand" and "automatic" positions in series with motor controller holding circuit. C. Smoke control, fire and life safety sequences shall override other automatic control sequences including hardwired safety devices. D. Reset schedules and setpoints shown in sequences are for initial programming and start up. During system commissioning the reset schedules and setpoints shall be fine tuned to obtain desired thermal comfort, energy and ventilation system results. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue The intent of the reset schedules indicated is that the range of the output be limited between the minimum and maximum values indicated in the reset schedules. F. All functions which use analog points to switch equipment on and off (e.g. fans, pumps) must be programmed with dead bands, and if necessary, time delays to prevent short cycling of equipment. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -1 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Starting of fans and pumps shall have built in time delays where a damper or valve is required to open or close prior to fan or pump pressure build up. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION = • A. Modes of Operation Definition: re JU 0 0. u) 0 U.1 J H N LL w 0 g Q . ° I- w Z H 0 Z uj U 0 — O H w W -O w O September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Occupied Mode: a. The system shall operate in occupied mode whenever the schedule indicates an occupied time period or when any zone control space temperature sensor override device is in the override position or; b. The warm -up or cool down cycle is complete but the scheduled occupancy period start time has not been reached. 2. Warm Up Mode: a. The BMS shall calculate a representative zone temperature based on the average of selected zone temperatures. b. An optimal start program shall determine the required start time to bring the building's representative space temperature to its occupied heating setpoint by the scheduled occupancy period. c. Warm -up mode shall be initiated if: (1) The optimal start program determines that morning warm -up is required and the building is in unoccupied mode at the optimal start time. d. Warm Up mode shall end when: (1) The representative zone temperature reaches setpoint, or (2) Return air temperature rises above 68 degrees F, or (3) A scheduled occupancy period has started, or (4) The building enters after -hours override occupied mode. e. Upon ending warm -up mode, the building shall enter occupied mode. 3. Cool Down Mode: a. The BMS shall calculate a representative zone temperature based on the average of selected zone temperatures. b. An optimal start program shall determine the required start time to bring the building's representative space temperature to its occupied cooling setpoint by the scheduled occupancy period. c. Cool down mode shall be initiated if: (1) The optimal start program determines that cool down is required and the building is in unoccupied mode at the optimal start time. d. Cool down mode shall end when: (1) The representative zone temperature reaches setpoint, or (2) Return air temperature drops below 76 degrees F, or (3) A scheduled occupancy period has started, or (4) The building enters after -hours override occupied mode. e. Upon ending cool down mode, the building shall enter occupied mode. 4. Unoccupied Mode: a. The building is considered to be in unoccupied operation whenever it is not in warm -up, cool down or occupied operation. b. The system shall not operate whenever the operating schedule indicates an unoccupied time period. 5. Fire Mode: a. The system shall run in this mode based on input from the fire alarm system. This mode shall have priority over all other control modes. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -2 z -J 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off" state as described above. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.03 CONSTANT VOLUME VARIABLE TEMPERATURE AIR HANDLING UNIT (WATER ECONOMIZER) Z A. General: .1-- Z w 1. CRAC —1 TO 8 6 U o B. System Off: co cl ~ 1. Condenser water control valve closed. to u.: 2. Mechanical cooling system off. w 0 3. All other control loops inactive. J C. System Start: IL. n = d . 1. Operator entered command at the BMS. Z i 2. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedules, z� D. System Operation: al ? . m 0 1. Unit shall report status to the BMS. 0 ( 1 . Occupied Mode: 0 l— a. The condenser water valve shall open. = tu w b. The mechanical cooling system shall operate to maintain space temperature F- 0 setpoint. u. t c. When the condenser water temperature is equal to or lower than 47 °F the unit . Z tt shall be in full economizer mode. c) d. When the space temperature cannot be maintained through the use of the H water economizer sequence, modulate the cooling system as required to Z maintain space set point. e. Control the humidifier from a humidity sensor located in the return air as follows (CRAC -4 through 6 only): (1) Upon a drop in humidity sensed, the humidifier shall be energized and cycled as required to maintain the humidity at setpoint. 3. Unoccupied Mode: The system shall be off. 4. Automatic Switchover (CRAC -1 through 6 only): On a weekly basis one unit will be selected as the lead unit with the other units selected as the lag units and staged on as appropriate to maintain space temperature. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue System Stop: F. Setpoints: 1. Space temperature 70 degrees F heating and 75 degrees F cooling. Alarm at BMS at +1- 2 degrees F from septpoint. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1. A differential pressure switch with indicator gauge installed across the filter shall z indicate whenever the filter is obstructed and initiate a non - critical alarm at the BMS. • H. Fire Alarm: 1. Upon signal from fire alarm system, the unit shall shut down. 3.04 VARIABLE VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: C. G. Safeties: ce w QQ � J 0 0 0 00 CO UJ J H A. General: w 0 2 1. AC -1 and AC -2. .,ft., g Q B. System Off: = • v ,_ w z = 1. Minimum outside air, economizer and relief air dampers closed. f 2. Return air damper open. z O , 3. Supply fan off. I ui 4. Cooling system off. o 0 5. All other control loops inactive. 0 O —: CI H September 30, 2003 Permit Issue System Start: w 1. Operator entered command at the BMS. u. 0 2. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. ill U= 0 System Operation: 1. The supply fan starts. 2. A duct static pressure sensor located two- thirds down the main duct shall, through the BMS, modulate the fan speed drive to maintain the duct system static pressure setpoint. 3. Modulate the relief air dampers in sequence to• maintain space differential pressure setpoint. 4. Warm Up and Cool Down Mode: a. During the warm up mode, the outside air damper, minimum outside air damper and relief air damper shall be closed and the return damper shall be open. The gas fired heating coil shall be activated. The cooling system shall be off. b. During the cool down mode, if outside air temperature and enthalpy is greater than the return air temperature and enthalpy, the dampers shall be positioned as described under Warm Up mode, otherwise the dampers shall be controlled as described in the occupied mode. The cooling system shall be modulated to maintain a discharge temperature of 55 degrees F. 5. Occupied Mode: a. The minimum outside air damper shall modulate to minimum airflow setpoint. If damper is fully open and cannot maintain airflow setpoint modulate return air damper closed to achieve minimum outside airflow setpoint. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -4 z i t MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. System Stop: G. Safeties: H. Fire Alarm: 1. Upon signal from fire alarm system, the unit shall shut down. 3.05 FAN POWERED VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT (SERIES TYPE): A. System Off: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. When the outside air temperature and enthalpy is lower than the return air temperature and enthalpy modulate the economizer outside air and return air dampers as required to maintain supply temperature setpoint. c. When the supply air temperature cannot be maintained through the use of air economizer sequence modulate the cooling system as required to maintain setpoint. d. When the mixed air temperature at minimum outside air falls below 55 °F, the gas fired heating coil shall modulate to maintain the 55 °F supply air temperature setpoint. e. When all fan powered terminal (FPT) primary air dampers are less than 90% of maximum scheduled CFM the AC unit shall reset the supply air temperature upwards. When a single FPT primary air damper is at maximum CFM then the AC unit shall reset the supply air temperature downwards until the primary air damper is at 90% of maximum cfm or the supply air temperature is 55 °F. 6. Unoccupied Mode: The system shall be off. 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on a preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off' state as described above. Setpoints: 1. Supply air temperature between 55 and 65 degrees F. Alarm at BMS at +/- 2 degrees F from setpoint extremes. 2. Space pressure differential setpoint 0.05 -inch w.g. relative to outside. Alarm at BMS at +/- .02 -inch w.g from setpoint. 3. Supply duct static pressure setpoint one inch w.g. Alarm at BMS at +/- .25 -inch w.g from setpoint. 1. A differential pressure switch with indicator gauge installed across the filter shall indicate whenever the filter is obstructed and initiate a non - critical alarm at the BMS. 2. Cooling system alarm. 3. Supply fan frequency drive alarm. 1. Fan off. 2. Primary air damper closed. 3. Electric heating coil de- energized. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. System Start: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. Operator entered command at the BMS. 3. Automatically on low space temperature alarm. C. System Operation: 1. Fan Control: a. Occupied and Warm Up /Cool Down Mode — The fan shall run continuously. 2. Primary Air Damper Control: a. Occupied and Cool down Mode — Damper shall modulate to provide primary airflow between minimum and maximum airflow setpoint to maintain space temperature setpoint. b. Warmup Mode — Damper shall be closed. 3. Electric Resistance Coil: a. The electric step controller shall maintain space temperature at the heating setpoint. Controller shall sequence with primary airflow damper and shall be off if primary airflow is greater than the minimum primary heating airflow setpoint. 4. Unoccupied Mode: The system shall be off. D. System Stop: 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off' state as described above. Setpoints: F. Safeties: 1. Fan shall stop if associated primary air system is shutoff by the fire alarm system. 3.06 COOLING TOWERS /CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM: A. System Off: 1. Cooling tower fans, circulation pump and filter system pump off. 2. Cooling tower bypass valve open. 3. Control loops inactive. B. System Start: 1. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. Automatically when there is demand for condenser water from air conditioning equipment. 3. Operator entered command at the BMS. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -6 1. Occupied space temperature setpoint of 74 degrees F. Alarm at BMS at +/- 2 degrees F from setpoint MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. System Operation: z 1. Condenser Water System Filter Pumps: The pump shall operate whenever the Q • condenser water basin circulation pump operates. .FT- 2. Condenser Temperature Control: a. Fan and Bypass Valve Operation: The lead cooling tower fan(s) shall be 6 v staged from off /small motor /large motor with the tower isolation valve open c) O and the tower bypass valve closed to maintain the condenser water supply to 0 temperature setpoint. If both towers are operating the fans shall be staged w w in the following order on a rise in condenser water supply temperature — N both units off, first tower small motor, second tower small motor, first tower a. D. System Stop: E. Setpoints: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue w large motor, second tower large motor. If the fans are off, a further drop in condenser water supply temperature shall cause the tower bypass valve to modulate open to maintain condenser water setpoint. Fan cycling shall be u_ restricted to the minimum cycle times recommended by the tower v _ ) O manufacturer. Include a software delay between small and large motor if = w not integral to the fan motor starters. z i b. Fan and Bypass Valve Operation: The cooling tower fans shall be staged H O from off to full speed in unison, with the tower isolation valve open and the w I— tower bypass valve closed to maintain the condenser water supply setpoint. 2 D If the fans are off, a further drop in condenser water supply temperature m 0 shall cause the tower bypass valve to modulate open to maintain condenser o D water supply temperature setpoint. 0 H w w 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on a iii preprogrammed schedule. I U 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert .to that "Off' state as ~ O '— described above. z 1. Condenser Water Supply Temperature Setpoint: The setpoint shall be determined by the outside air wet bulb temperature and cooling tower approach. The setpoint shall not be less than that recommended for safe operation of the air conditioning units. Setpoint shall be set initially at 76 degrees F with alarm at + 80 degrees F. As outside air temperature drops the cooling tower leaving water temperature shall drop to a minimum of 47 °F with alarm at 43 °F. F. Safeties: 1. Cooling Tower Ice Alarm: Each cooling tower shall be supplied with a fan vibration switch. The switch shall be wired to alarm at the BMS that the possibility of ice build up on the cooling tower has occurred. 2. Condenser Water Freeze Alarm: If the condenser water sump temperature falls to 38 degrees F, an alarm at the BMS indicating low temperature shall notify the operator that the following sequence has commenced. All outside air dampers shall close at air handling units if the system is in operation. Sump heating elements shall be activated. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -7 . .. . . ......... -.. .. .. � ..c . n 1...r.r. w.iyt(. nY�. iu' vlG. ° u:C".lAlil ^c.2 . MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.07 TOILET EXHAUST LOADING DOCK AND TELECOM ROOM EXHAUST FANS B. A. System Off: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Fans off 2. Exhaust dampers closed. System Start: 1. Automatically by the BMS based on preprogrammed schedule. 2. Operator entered command at the BMS. 3. TF -1 shall be activated to maintain a minimum space temperature of 65 °F. 4. TF -2 shall be activated to maintain a maximum space temperature of 75 °F. System Operation: 1. Dampers open. 2. Fans start after proof of damper opening. System Stop: 1. Operator command at the BMS or automatically by the BMS based on a preprogrammed schedule. 2. When the system is called to stop, the system shall revert to that "Off' state as described above. Alarms: 1. Fan failure. 3.08 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS A. System Off: 1. Fan and gas heating system shall be off. System Start/Stop: 1. Automatically from internal control system. C. System Operation: 1. The unit heaters shall modulate to maintain a minimum space temperature in the attic of 45 °F at all times. Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -8 .J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.09 PLENUM VENTS A. System Operation: 1. When the plenum temperature falls below 70 °F the dampers shall be closed. 2. When the plenum temperature rises above 75 °F the dampers shall be open. 3.10 INPUT /OUTPUT SUMMARY SHEETS A. The following pages provide a list of input/output points. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardware and software including sensors and wiring. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -9 SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H21 SET POINT ADJ. SPEED CONTROL STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY 1 TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S32I COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME MORNING WARMUP OUTDOOR X X X 1 CCCT -1 X X X X X X X X X 2, 3 CCCT -2 X X X X X. X X X X 2, 3 CWP -1 X X X X X X X 4 CWP -2 X X X X X X X 4 BASIN FILTRATION - X X X CT BYPASS VALVE X X CW DIFF. PRESSURE SENSOR X X ET -1 X X X DOMESTIC WATER FILL VALVE _ X X X 5 GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM 1. Outdoor air temperatures and RH one location. 2. Supply and return condenser water temperatures. 3. Provide alarms for main motor, pony motor, low basin water temperature and high/low basin water level. 4. VFD speed control. 5. Provide alarm if fill valve remains open for longer than 2 minutes (adj). September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -10 Z 4 — W J U 0 tu N 0 uJ 1 W O 2 u_Q co I v � Z � 1—O w o 0 O- 0 H WW H p: u - W Z U = O F. Z SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H2I SET POINT ADJ. SPEED CONTROL STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO-AAO OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP J 13S32I COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME J MORNING WARMUP AC UNIT X X X X X X X X X X SUPPLY FAN X 1 SUPPLY AIR X X X 2 RETURN AIR FAN X , 1 RETURN AIR X X SPACE X X 3 GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS VARIABLE VOLUME AC UNITS (TYPICAL FOR 2) 1, VFD speed control. 2. Duct static pressure. 3. Space differential pressure. Septernber 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -11 z z o: W 2 JU 00 w 0 J H N U W 0 z � z I w O - ca W I I O 113 z U= O z SYSTEM POINT LIST . EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H2I SET POINT ADJ. STATUS ON /OFF r STATUS OPEN /CLOSED r HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO-AIO OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S32I I COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME I MORNING WARMUP AC UNIT X X X X X X X X X SPACE X X 1 GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS COMPUTER ROOM AC UNITS 1. RH for Statement Room only. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue UNISYS - Tukwila Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -12 SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE HI MO1A SET POINT ADJ. PRIMARY AIR VOLUME STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO-dAO OPEN- CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG AdIVNIB HJIH LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S3ZI COLOR GRAPHIC 3WLL Nns MORNING WARMUP FPT X X X X X X X X X ELECTRIC HEATING X SPACE X X X GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLER UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -13 z W ce 2 J O 0 N 0 u) W : J F w • 0 ga N � _ a . H W z F Z o U c o 0— oI— i- u' 0 w z P 0 z SYSTEM POINT LIST EQUIPMENT TAG AND POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM FEATURES KEY TO NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE H2I SET POINT ADJ. STATUS ON /OFF STATUS OPEN /CLOSED HIGH -LOW LEVEL NO-3d0 OPEN - CLOSED HIGH ANALOG LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY TIME SCHEDULING OPT. START /STOP 13S32I COLOR GRAPHIC RUN TIME MORNING WARMUP EF -1 X X X X X X TF -1 X X X X X X X X TF -2 X X X X X X X X GENERATOR X X X 1, 2 UPS X X X PLENUM X X X PLENUM VENT DAMPERS X X X FIRE ALARM X 3, 4 GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1. On /Off operation status. 2. General alarm monitoring. 3. Trouble and alarm. 4. Notification from fire alarm to reset to normal BMS operation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS END OF SECTION Automatic Control Sequences 15985 -14 UNISYS - Tukwila aU • 0 w • 0 Q co Z I- 0 Z � U o. o D . o 1- o ui Z U = . MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15100 — Valves. C. Section 15160 — Pumps. Section 15708 — Closed Circuit Cooling Tower. E. Section 15731 — Computer Room Air Conditioning Units. Section 157343 — Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems. G. Section 15771 — Packaged Air - Cooler Roof -Top Units. H. Section 15860 — Fans. I. Section 15910 — Dampers. J. Section 15930 - Air Terminal Units. K. Section 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets. L. Section 15985 - Automatic Control Sequences. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each balancing contractor providing a bid for this work shall submit the following information with the bid, or the bid shall not be accepted by the Owner. September 30, 2003 Permit issue SECTION 15990 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BALANCING 1. Adjust and balance hydronic systems. 2. Adjust and balance domestic hot water systems. 3. Adjust and balance air systems. 4. Perform acoustic measurements to systems. 1. List previous projects of similar scope with dates that projects were executed. 2. Outline organization of contractor, including names of principals, years of operation, address, and phone number. Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -1 z Z re w 6 D. 00 co co i J I u- w O J u- j. ▪ d w ' z � Z o ; w U • 0 O N 0 I- w • U LL ~O. wz O co O z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. List instruments owned by contractor and procedures that will be used on this project. 4. List name of job site supervisor that will execute this work and a resume of individual's specific work experience. 5. Provide a sample of a balance report on a project of similar scope. B. The final balancing, testing, and adjustments of the complete mechanical systems shall be the direct responsibility of the balancing contractor, including all costs for doing this work and provision of the personnel, materials, tools, and instrumentation to accomplish this work. Meet standards contained in the AABC National Standard Chapter 17 through 26 and other criteria as set forth in these specifications. C. The Contractor must primarily be engaged in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. The Contractor must be AABC certified. 1.04 PROCEDURES A. General: Prior to commencement of balancing, review proposed schedule, methods and instruments to be used in balancing with the Architect. Include descriptive data, procedure data and sample forms. B. Descriptive Data: Review contract documents, shop drawings released for construction, design concepts and general function of each system including associated equipment and operation cycles. Confirm listing of flow and terminal measurements to be performed; selection points for proposed sound measurements. C. Procedure Data: Outline procedures for taking test measurements to establish compliance with requirements. Specify type of instruments to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and correction factors. Verify access to valves, dampers and equipment for test and balancing. D. Sample Forms: Submit forms showing application of procedures to typical systems. Forms shall be of AABC format. E. AABC test sheets required are as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Air Moving Equipment Test Sheet. 2. Exhaust Fan Test Sheet (Supply, Return, Relief Fans). 3. Air Inlet and Outlet Test Sheet. 4. Water Balance Element Test Sheet. 5. Circulating Water Pump Data Sheet. 6. Duct Traverse Zone Totals Sheet. 7. Duct Traverse Readings Sheet. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit excerpts from recent previous final balancing reports. B. Submit certification of most recent calibration of all instruments to be used on this project. Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.06 CONTRACTOR COOPERATION A. The balancing contractor shall check and report defects or deficiencies that may affect balancing. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Mechanical contractor shall cooperate with the balancing contractor to: a. Provide sufficient time before final completion date and individual equipment manufacturer's start-up so that balancing can be accomplished. b. Provide immediate materials, labor and tools to make corrections without delay. c. Place heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue the operation for each working day of testing and balancing. d. Advise testing and balancing contractor of changes made to the system during construction. e. Install required test holes or wells complete with removable and replaceable plugs or caps. f. Make necessary revisions to controls, valves, dampers, fan and pump drives and consult with equipment manufacturers as required to achieve the specified system's performance. g. Supply and install dampers as specified and shown on drawings, and where required to obtain final system balance. h. Provide lifts, ladders, scaffolds, tools and labor to assist the work of the balancing contractor, including removing ceiling tiles, guards, adjusting pulleys, belts; replace when finished. i. Building Management System contractor shall cooperate with and work with the balancing contractor when setting damper linkages, minimum outside air dampers, and other air volume devices, and shall be available for readjusting of dampers, devices or controls that are not properly calibrated. j. Set pressure regulating and reducing valves to operating and code conditions. k. Check and set relief and safety valves to code requirements. Clean strainers. Check air filters immediately prior to air balancing. m. Open fire dampers. Provide certification of damper operation as required by Section 15910: Dampers. n. Verify return air openings have been provided in full height walls as specified, shown on the Drawings or as required for proper balancing and system operation. o. Variable pitch sheaves supplied on 20 horsepower motors and larger shall be changed to fixed sheaves after the air balance is completed. Provide such sheaves. Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENTS A. Instruments for testing and balancing of air and hydronic systems shall have been calibrated within a period of 6 months and verified for accuracy prior to start of work. B. Submit a list of equipment, which will be used for the balancing of systems and test and calibration certification by an independent instrument calibration laboratory indicating date of test, and test results showing accuracy and repeatability are within limitations acceptable to the AABC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURE A. Balance to maximum measured flow deviation from specified values of 10 percent at terminal device and 5 percent at equipment or mean sound level deviation of 15 decibels. B. Permanently mark settings on valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices. C. Take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Architect. At the completion of balancing procedures, allow for a minimum of 2 days for the Architect to witness test procedures and conduct operational tests. 3.02 SITE VISITS A. A review of the installation shall be made prior to commencing balancing work and any additional dampers or valves required for proper balance shall be reviewed with the Architect and the Contractor. B. The Test and Balance Contractor shall visit the job site a minimum of 3 times during the ductwork, equipment and piping installations. Site Visit Reports shall be submitted to the Architect listing any deficiencies found. Identify in the report any additional balancing valves or dampers required. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A. Mechanical systems shall not be considered ready for final inspection until balancing results acceptable to the Architect are obtained. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -4 z 1 - Z re w 6 U 0 � W • I . • w w 0 u_? = W z F. 1- 0 z F- w O • L w w H - L .. z w U = 0~ z 1 _j MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. If it is found that the specified airflows cannot be achieved on portions of the system, the actual conditions shall be reported to the Architect for consideration of corrective action before continuing the balance procedure. C. If measured flow at final inspection shows deviation of 10 percent or more or mean sound level deviation of 10 decibels or more from the certified report listings for more than 10 percent of selected areas, the report shall be rejected. D. If report is rejected, systems shall be rebalanced and a new certified report submitted. 3.04 BALANCING REPORT A. Submit a draft copy of reports prior to final acceptance of project. Provide copies of final report for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. B. Provide reports in durable soft cover, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents, indexing tabs and cover identification at front and side. C. Include types, serial number and dates of calibration of instruments. D. Record test data on a sepia made from the latest available revised set of mechanical shop drawings and submit copies upon completion of the balancing contract. E. Install at each piece of mechanical equipment a "Data Register" showing significant operating temperatures, pressures, amperes, voltage, and brake horsepower. "Data Register" shall be enclosed in a hard, clear plastic holder securely attached to the equipment or to a wall in the adjacent area. Submit with report, fan and pump curves with operating conditions plotted. Submit grille and diffuser shop drawings and diffusion factors. G. Report shall be indexed as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue a. Air Summary Procedure Instrumentation Drawings Equipment Summary Fan Sheets Fan Curves Fan Profile Data Static Data Air Monitoring Station Data Traverse Data and Schedule Terminal Unit Summary Outlet Data Summary and Schematics (per system) Building Pressurization Data Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -5 re w QQ � 0 w J u w wO gQ d H= z F 1- 0 : z I- w 0C 0 I-- Ill l a U uiz U= 0H z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Water Summary Procedure Instrumentation Pump Data Pump Curves Flow Stations Coils Equipment Data Element Data Summary and Schematics (per system) c. Sound Summary Procedure Instrumentation Drawings Profile Scale Readings d. Fire Damper Certification e. Copy of Contractor's Certification 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Execute air systems balancing for each air system in accordance with AABC specifications and as described herein. B. Make tests with supply, return and exhaust systems operating and doors, windows, closed or in their normal operation condition. C. Test and adjust fan or blower speed to design requirements. D. Test and record motor full Toad amps. Record each installed motor manufacturer and motor efficiency. E. Traverse main supply air ducts, using a pitot tube and manometer. Calibrate the manometer to read two significant figures in velocity pressure ranges. Take a minimum 16 readings per traverse. The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse the total air quantity supplied by the fan and to verify the distribution of air to zones. A main duct is defined as any of the following: 1. A duct serving 5 or more outlets. 2. A duct serving 3 or more branch ducts. 3. A duct serving a hydronic coil. 4. A zone duct from a fan powered VAV terminal unit. 5. A duct emanating from a fan discharge or plenum and terminating at one or more outlets. September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit Issue 15990 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Submit data in support of supply fans deliveries by the following four methods. For return, z relief and exhaust fans, methods 1 and 4 are sufficient: Z 1. By summation of the air quantity readings at inlets or outlets. i ., ur 2. By duct traverses of main supply ducts. — ucts. 2 3. By rotating vane traverse across the filter bank or coil bank. UO 4. By plotting revolutions per minute and static pressure readings on the fan curve. Air co 0 density corrections must be indicated. w = J 1 ... G. Test and record required and measured system static pressures; filter differential, coil N u. differential and fan total static pressure. uj 0 H. Test and adjust systems for design recirculated airflow rates. g I. Test and adjust system for design outside airflow rates. H W 1 z J.' Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures. z O z E- K. Install one -inch roll media filters upstream of air filters to impose 90 percent of the w w manufacturer's recommended final filter air pressure drop. v o . L Adjust main supply and return ducts to proper design flow rates. 0 F- wW M. Inspect and confirm all fire dampers are open, all duct access doors are closed and fire H damper fusible links are accessible. u- Z w to N. Adjust zones to proper design, supply and return flow rates. U O O. Test and adjust each air inlet and air outlet and transfer duct to within 10 percent of design z requirements. Identify each air inlet, air outlet, transfer duct and transfer wall opening as to location and area. Q. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and testing equipment. Use manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations. R. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, report the required face and neck velocity, test face and neck velocity, and required air pressure drop and flow rate. Test after adjustments. S. Building Management System contractor shall set adjustments of automatically operated inlet vanes, cones, plugs and all dampers to operate as indicated in cooperation with balancing contractor. T. Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts, dumping, and to prevent "short circuiting" between supply and return outlets. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila U. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. Remove air slots on return air troffers to achieve adequate relief and minimize pressure drop into the ceiling plenum. V. Vary total system airflow rates by adjustment of fan speeds or fan volume- varying devices. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. W. Record installed fan drive assemblies; fan sheaves, motor sheaves, belts and motors. X. The final balanced condition of each area shall include testing and adjusting of pressure conditions. Test and record building pressurization levels in variable volume systems throughout full range of fan delivery rates, under both heating and cooling conditions. Document abnormal building leakage conditions noted. Y. Complete balancing to achieve positive building pressure unless otherwise instructed. A positive pressure relative to outside of 0.05 -inch water gauge minimum and 0.10 -inch water gauge maximum shall be achieved, measure with negligible, outside wind velocity. 3.06 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS PROCEDURE A. Preparation of System — Phase l: The hydronic system shall be prepared for balancing in the following manner: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Open valves to full position including coil stop valves; close bypass valves; and return line balance valves. 2. Examine water in system to determine if it has been treated and is clean. 3. Check pump rotation. 4. Check expansion tanks to ensure that they are not air bound and that the system is full of water. 5. Check air separators and air vents at hydronic coils and high points of water systems to ensure that they are installed properly and are operating freely. Make certain all air is removed from circulating system. 6.. Set temperature controls to close all automatic bypass valves and provide full flow through coils. 7. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 8. Check and set operating temperature of closed circuit cooling tower at design requirements. 9. Execute air balance before water balance is initiated. Test and Balance Procedure — Phase II: 1. Check operation of variable speed pump and record pump data at varying percentages of full flow. 2. Set pumps to deliver approximately 10 percent excess flow volume if possible. Do not overload motors. Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -8 ti 1. After making adjustments to coils, recheck settings at pumps. Readjust if required. __j 2. Install pressure gauges on each coil then read pressure drop through coil and set flow rate on call for full flow through coil. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure drop. 3. Balance flow through equipment and coils by means of pressure drop. Obtain curves from the various manufacturers indicating the relationship between flow and pressure drop through the coils and equipment. Take readings on calibrated test gauges. 4. Upon completion of the water balance, reconcile the total heat transfer through coils by recording the entering and leaving water temperatures and the entering and leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures. 5. Upon completion of balancing, adjust differential bypasses for the same pressure �. drop on full bypass as on full flow. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3. Adjust flow through cooling tower. 4. Check and record entering and leaving water temperatures and pressure drop through closed circuit cooling tower. Reset to design temperatures. 5. Check and record water temperature at inlet side of coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures from source. 6. Where automatic flow control valves are installed verify that the operating pressure differential across the valve taps is within the range indicated on the submittal data sheet for that model number. 7. Position and mark/lock manual calibrated balance valves for design flow through coils, AC units, heat pumps, convectors and all other items in system requiring circulation of condenser water. 8. Upon completion of flow readings and coil adjustments, mark settings and record data. 9. Ensure bypass valves are tightly closed. C. Test and Balance Procedure — Phase III: 3.07 BALANCING DATA A. Air Handling Equipment Installation Data: Manufacturer, model and size Arrangement, discharge and class Motor type, horsepower, speed, efficiency, voltage, phase, cycles and full Toad amperes Location and final identification B. Air Handling Equipment Design Data: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Total airflow rate Static pressure across coil, filter, damper, mixing box sections and total Motor horsepower, speed, efficiency, voltage and amperes Fan speed and brake horsepower Hydronic coil inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures initial filter air pressure drop Mechanical Systems Balancing 15990 -9 z re m1 00 w= J I wO uQ D. d . z � H0 Z ~ w U� O P o W W LLO w z O~ z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Air Handling Equipment Recorded Data: Total airflow rate Static pressure across coil, filter, damper, mixing box sections and total Fan speed and brake horsepower Motor operating amperes Inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures Filter air pressure drop D. Duct Air Quantities: Mains, Branches, Outside Air and Exhausts (Maximum and Minimum): Duct sizes Number of pressure readings Sum of velocity measurements Average velocity Duct recorded airflow rate Duct design airflow rates E. Air Inlets and Outlets: Inlet/outlet identification location and designation Manufacturer's catalogue identification and type Application factors Design and recorded velocities Design and recorded airflow rates Deflector vane or diffuser cone settings F. Building Pressurization Data: Outside air temperatures and humidities Outside wind velocity Building pressures plotted with respect to systems Supply air, return air and exhaust airflow rates for varying damper positions Locations of pressure measuring points, inside and outside building Pump Installation Data: Manufacturer, model and size Impeller diameter Drive type Motor type, horsepower, efficiency, speed, voltage, phase, cycles and full load motor amperes H. Pump Design Data: Flow rate and head pressure Pump speed and horsepower Pump efficiency Mechanical Systems Balancing September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 15990 -10 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Pump Recorded Data: Discharge and suction pressures (full flow and no flow) Operating pressure and total dynamic head Operating rate (from pump curves if metering not provided or from variable speed controller) Motor operating amperes Balancing valve setting (full open, 60 percent open etc.) J. Expansion Tank Installation Data: Manufacturer, size, capacity Pressure reducing valve setting Pressure relief valve setting K. , Heating Equipment Recorded Data: Element type and identification (location and designation) Entering and leaving temperatures Flow rates and pressure drops L. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Design Data: Heat transfer rate Water pressure drop across coil Air static pressure drop Entering and leaving water temperatures Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures M. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Recorded Data: Element type and identification Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures Entering and leaving water temperatures Water pressure drop across coil Water pressure drop across bypass valve Air static pressure drop Air and water flow rates Adjusted temperature rise or drop September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit Issue 15990 -11 z re 2 1LI 00 co • w J F, • u. W O g Q . F w F Z O` w U � ca w ' O w z O ff . z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. Sound Level Data: Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument Overall decibels (A) level Reading at each octave band frequency from 31.5 Hz to 16 kilohertz Noise criteria (NC) curves plotted and compared to those recommended by ASHRAE or AABC publications 0. Sound Level Recorded Data: Air Inlets and Outlets Fan Powered Terminal Units Air Handling Units Closed Circuit Cooling Towers VFD's Fans AC Units END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Balancing Permit Issue 15990-12 1 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 15991 GENERAL MECHANICAL STARTING AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical Equipment Starting and Testing - Section 15992 B. Mechanical System Starting and Testing - Section 15993 1.02 GENERAL A. Prior to starting, testing, balancing, adjusting and cleaning.processes, verify with Architect any tests required to be witnessed. Provide sufficient notice to Architect prior to commencement of procedures. B. Architect shall be allowed to witness all testing, adjusting, starting, balancing and cleaning procedures. C. Assume all costs associated with starting, testing, balancing and adjusting, including the supply of testing or cleaning medium. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A. Prior to starting equipment or systems, obtain and review manufacturer's installation, operation and starting instructions. Read in conjunction with procedures specified herein. B. Use manufacturer's and supplier's starting personnel where required to maintain validity of manufacturer's warranty. C. Compare installation to manufacturer's published data. Record discrepancies. Correct deviations detrimental to equipment performance prior to starting equipment. 1.04 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION A. Several processes involved in starting procedures defined in this section may be duplications of authorities verification. To facilitate expedient turnover of building, arrange for authorities to witness these procedures. B. Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and comply with rules and regulations of authorities have jurisdiction. Include copies of certificates with starting reports. 1.05 USE OF INSTRUMENTS SUPPLIED UNDER CONTRACT A. Use equipment supplied for this project testing, balancing and adjusting. Ensure equipment is properly calibrated and is proven to be in good working condition. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements 15991 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. After proper calibration: 1.06 CONTRACTOR TESTING INSTRUMENTS PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements 15991 -2 1. Use probe type flow meter and fittings supplied for this project to verify flows and z volumes. )- 2. Use thermometers and pressure gauges supplied for this project to verify , temperatures and pressures. 3. Use the airflow measuring stations to verify airflows. _1 0 ig 00 Provide calibration histories for each instrument. Recalibration of use of other instruments co w = will be required if accuracy of readings is questioned by Architect. 1— U) w w 0 2 A. Provide two -way radios and ladders as required to complete the program as outlined in this g Q specification. Provide all safety equipment required for personnel involved in the starting, testing, balancing _ Z w H and adjusting program. O . Provide listing of equipment and instruments, which will be used in starting, testing, balancing W w , and adjusting mechanical equipment for approval and review by Architect. v p O E i2 H 1 - O Z w . 0 Z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 • RELATED DOCUMENTS B. 1.04 FIELD REPORTS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 15992 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT — EQUIPMENT STARTING AND TESTING co �. co w A. Check, start and test each piece of mechanical equipment. Verify that the equipment has 1 been properly installed and is operating at a level, which meets the specified requirements. cn o I A 1 Q • N a = = . Z I .; f O '. Z I— w iu O - O I-- 111 uj A. Use factory trained representatives and submit manufacturer's check sheets for starting the I H following specialty equipment: A. Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions. Section 15990 - Mechanical Systems Balancing. C. Section 15991 - General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements. D. Section 15993 - Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing. 1.03 FACTORY TRAINED REPRESENTATIVES 1. Closed Circuit Cooling towers. 2. Variable speed drives. 3. Building Management System. 4. Chemical cleaning and treatment. 5. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units. Use manufacturer's factory trained personnel where required to maintain manufacturer's warranties. A. Submit field reports documenting the starting and testing procedures performed, observations and tests results obtained. B. Submit field reports in accordance with Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -1 h ' MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS Z NOT USED. ;~ W PART 3 — EXECUTION 6 U 00 co 0 3.01 FLUID HANDLING EQUIPMENT W Ill A. Pumps: co LL, w 0 1. Pre - Starting: 2 a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data, including: (1) Make /model /size.. D (2) Impeller size. N 0 (3) Seal type. H w .. _ (4) Lubrication fittings. Z F- (5) Motor size, speed, efficiency, and voltage. Z 0. (6) Flow gallons per minute (gallons per minute). w w (7) Head feet of water column (feet water column). ` ". j D b. Ensure pump installation is as specified and as per manufacturer's 0 N recommendations. Fill out manufacturer's check sheet including: 01— (1) Pump is level. w uj (2) Isolation valves, strainers, check valves are installed properly. H c�. (3) Pump suction has sufficient length of straight run. u_ t; (4) Air is completely bled off piping system. ... (5) Expansion tank is charged and on -line. cn (6) Ensure strainers have screens in place and are clean. 0 H, (7) Ensure electrical connections are properly made. 0 (8) Ensure nameplate is readily visible. (9) Check clearance space adequately permits removal or servicing. (10) Check voltage to pump motor. c. Ensure chemical cleaning of piping system is completed. d. Check and adjust oil levels bearing lubrication. 2. Starting: a. Start pumps as per manufacturer's recommendations. b. Ensure impeller and motor are rotating in the correct direction. 3 Post Starting: a. Check chemical treatment status. b. Run -in pumps for minimum 12 continuous hours. c. Ensure flows through parallel pumps are equally balanced. d. Record motor power consumption. e: Ensure mechanical seals do not leak. Ensure packing gland type seals are wetted. f. Calculate overall pump efficiency. g. Calculate /check Net Positive Suction Head. h. Verify the motor has sufficient airflow around to allow cooling. i. Plot operating point at time of starting on pump curve. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Pre - Interim Acceptance: a. Change pump seals. b. Clean strainers. c: Trim pump impeller at the factory and verify flows, based upon information z recorded and documented during balancing and adjusting. re w B. Closed Circuit Cooling Towers: U O w = J F. CO u w � Q w F- O w ~ Lu U� O N D H w • UJ • O Ili Z co O — 0 H O C. Miscellaneous Fluid Handling Equipment: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to the installed data including: (1) Make /model /size (2) Fan motor size, efficiency and speed options, electrical consumption (3) Accessories including access ladder (4) Control sequences (5) Construction b. Prior to starting, perform the following: (1) Clean entire unit and wash down basins. (2) Ensure all accessories are properly installed. (3) Check motor at all stages of capacity overloads on all 3 leads. (4) Lubricate motor bearings and check motor insulation. (5) Check fan for freely rotating wheel and for blade tip clearance. (6) Check water make -up float and level controls. (7) Check for clearance of airflow and service. (8) Check oil level in gear reducer. (9) Check for isolation and structural support. (10) Ensure chemical treatment is properly working. (11) Ensure water meters are properly working. (12) Verify water level in multiple cell cooling towers are equalized. 2. Starting: a. Start as per the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Fill out manufacturer's check sheets. c. Post - Starting: (1) Check fan is rotating in correct direction. (2) Check water level. (3) Check for chemical treatment levels. (4) With unit running on low speed and on high speed, provide radiated acoustical measurements on both faces, space directly beneath unit, and from 50 feet away on all four sides. d. Pre - Interim Acceptance: (1) Check tower for proper basin water level. (2) Check and document chemical treatment level. 1. Confirm all gauges and thermometers can be read from the floor level and they are installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Verify the following equipment is installed and calibrated as per manufacturer's recommendations. Fill out manufacturer's start-up sheets: a. PRV's b. Air eliminator c. Strainers Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -3 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila d. Check valves e. Balancing valves 3.02 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT A. Air Handling Units: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre- Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawings data to installed data including: (1) Make /model /size (2) Fan wheel size (3) Nameplate flow, static pressure (4) Motor size, speed, efficiency, type, and voltage (5) Heating coil, cooling coil (6) Humidifier (7) Mixing baffles (8) Return, exhaust and outside air motorized dampers, operation and size. (9) Filters. (10) Vibration isolation, flexible connections and seismic restraints (intemal and external). (11) Special features — access doors, liners, inlet vanes, labels. (12) Ensure variable speed drive is operational. (13) Ensure silencers are installed. b. Lubricate bearings on fans as per manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure fan wheel rotates smoothly without binding. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension. c. Vacuum out air system plenums and ductwork. d. Ensure temporary filters are installed. Under no circumstances run systems without filters installed. e. Ensure all balancing dampers are open and ductwork is complete. For VAV systems, ensure that at least 60 percent of terminal units are open. f. Ensure minimum position specified for terminal units are properly set. g. Ensure all coils are in operation. h. On parallel fan systems, ensure backdraft dampers are installed. Ensure electrical connections are completed and system disconnects are within visual access of unit. j. Ensure controls are operational. k. Ensure inlet and discharge duct geometry are properly installed. 2. Starting: a. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. b. Check fan and motor for correct rotation. 3. Post - Starting: a. Check vibration isolation and seismic restraints. b. Check radiated and discharge acoustics at design conditions. c. Run for one hour and check filters, coils, and humidifier bypass. Seal as required. d. Determine fan speed, airflow rates, static pressure and record on fan curve. e. Effectiveness of mixing chamber. Measure temperature profile. Adjust mixing baffles. f. Balance water flow across humidifier and ensure water treatment is operational. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -4 J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Pre - Interim Acceptance: a. Replace temporary filters with permanent filters. b. Vacuum heating coil and cooling coil. c. Re- lubricate all bearings. Z d. Perform acoustical measurements of discharge plus radiated levels at w operating conditions after entire system is operational. D e. Check belt for tension and wear. _, 0 w p B. Fans: w w J i 1. Pre - Starting: N w a. Check the specified data and the shop drawing data against the installed w O data including: (1) Make /model /size. u. q (2) Fan wheel size. N D (3) Nameplate airflow, static pressure. H W (4) Motor size, speed, and efficiency. Z . (5) Backdraft dampers. Z 1— (6) Accessories. Z i— (7) Special features. 11J u i b. Lubricate bearings on fans as per manufacturer's recommendations. D p Ensure wheels rotate freely without binding. 0 u) c. Ensure ductwork and fan casing is free of dirt or foreign material. c 1- d. Ensure electrical connections are properly made and fan disconnects are w w properly located. i- e. Ensure inlet and discharge duct geometry is properly installed. LL O 2. Starting: w Z a. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. V -: b. Check fan and motor for correct rotation. 1-F 3. Post - Starting: Z a. Check isolation and flexible connections. • - b. Check radiated and discharge sound power levels. c. Determine speed, airflow rates, static pressure and record on fan curve. d. Pre- Interim Acceptance: (1) Re- lubricate all bearings. (2) Perform measurements of discharge, inlet and radiated sound power levels after entire system is balanced and adjusted. C. Fan Powered Terminal Units: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including the following: (1) Make /model /size. (2) Maximum airflow (cfm) (3) Minimum airflow (cfm) (4) Direct or reverse acting controls. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Check the following: (1) Inlet duct connection: (a) Must have 4 duct diameters to box inlet. (b) Must not have more than 12 inches flexible duct. (c) Must not have flow straightening vanes. (2) Access to controls. (3) Completeness of control documents. (4) Silencer /acoustic duct. (5) Exterior casing or controls are not damaged. (6) Support. 2 Starting: a. Follow manufacturer's starting procedures. 3. Post - Starting: a. Measure airflow and inlet static at full flow. b. Set maximum airflows. c. Set minimum airflows. d. Determine minimum static pressure necessary to provide design airflow. e. Measure radiated sound power levels at 2 inches inlet static. f. Measure discharge sound power levels at 10 feet downstream. g. Check damper stroke over full range, minimum to maximum. h. Measure inlet air temperature. 4. Pre - Interim Acceptance: Not applicable. Miscellaneous Air Handling Devices: 1. Motorized Dampers: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including: (1) Make /model. (2) Size — minimum, maximum. (3) Operator. b. Review the installation to ensure: (1) No cracks around damper frame. (2) Blades close and seals engage completely. (3) Damper strokes fully open to fully closed. (4) Suitable access and identification. Gravity/Barometric Dampers: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including: (1) Make /model. (2) Size. (3) Throat and hood size. (4) Blade construction. (5) Blade seals. b. Review the installations to ensure: (1) Damper fully closes — adjust weights. (2) No cracks or air leakage around frame. 3. Air Outlets: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data; to installed data including: (1) Make /model. (2) Throat size. (3) Accessories. (4) Construction. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila b. Review the installation to ensure: (1) Air outlet is clean, (2) Air outlet is centered in space within the constraints of room layout. c. Balance air outlet to specified value. d. Take acoustical measurement on each outlet at specified airflows and compare to published data. 4. Balancing Dampers: a. Check installation to ensure: (1) Damper can open and close fully. (2) Access is clearly marked. (3) Damper is not located in a turbulent air stream. 3.03 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Variable Speed Drive Units: 1. These starting procedures shall only be performed by qualified and factory trained technicians. 2. Visually inspect for the following items prior to commencing manufacturer's recommended starting procedures: a. Voltage of unit and motor are same. b. Transformer is properly installed. c. Unit has U.L. labels. B. Tanks: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Check the specified and shop drawing data against the installed data including: (1) Make /model /size /volume. (2) Pressure rating. (3) Labels ASME. b. Visually inspect to ensure no damage to: (1) Access ports /manholes. (2) Piping sizes — inlet/outlet are correct. (3) Lining is intact and not damaged. (4) Piping is accessible to tank removal. c. Ensure adequate access to manholes. 2. Starting: Not applicable. 3. Post - Starting: a. Verify operation of: (1) Drain line (2) Make -up line if applicable (3) Gauge glass (4) Diaphragm if applicable 4 Pre - Interim Acceptable: Not applicable.. Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -7 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. DX Computer Room Air Conditioning Units: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Pre - Starting: a. Compare specified and shop drawing data to installed data including: (1) Make /model /size. (2) Electrical characteristics. (3) Cooling output. (4) Accessories: temperature controller, filters, leak detection, condensate pump. (5) Condenser water flow. (6) Airflow, extemal static pressure. (7) Discharge air temperature: dry bulb /wet bulb. (8) Entering air temperature: dry bulb /wet bulb. b. After installation, check the following: (1) Drain pan and drain line installed correctly. (2) Unit is level and seismically restrained. (3) Internal isolators installed. (4) Condenser water complete. (5) Bearings greased. (6) Filters installed and are clean. 2. Starting: a. Start unit as per manufacturer's recommendations. b. Fill out manufacturer's check sheets. c. Post - Starting: (1) Verify the following: (a) Airflow. (b) Static pressure. (c) Entering dry bulb /wet bulb. (d) Leaving dry bulb /wet bulb. (e) Entering water temperature. (f) Leaving water temperature. (g) Water flow rates. (h) Perform acoustical measurements. d. Pre- Interim Acceptance: (1) Change filters. END OF SECTION Mechanical Equipment — Equipment Starting and Testing 15992 -8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Mechanical General Provisions - Section 15010. B. Mechanical Systems Balancing - Section 15990. C. General Mechanical Starting and Testing Requirements - Section 15991. D. Mechanical Equipment Starting and Testing - Section 15992. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED SECTION 15993 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS STARTING AND TESTING A. Check, start and test each system, verify that each system is operational and will operate to meet the specified operating criteria. PART 3 — EXECUTION - 3.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEM A. Ensure piping in system is completed prior to performing cleaning, testing and starting operations. Ensure all valves are accessible. Ensure all major pieces of equipment are serviceable and complete with unions, isolating valves, etc. Test piping as follows: 1. Condenser water — 1.5 times maximum working pressure or 150 pounds per square inch. E. During system full operational tests, check and document linear expansion at elbows, U- bends, expansion joints and offsets to ensure adequate clearance. F. Provide detailed written report defining outline of the entire proposed chemical cleaning procedure at least two weeks prior to cleaning including times, system status, problems encountered and the condition of the water. Procedure shall be approved by Architect prior to commencement of cleaning process. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Perform a complete water analysis of all water being used prior to commencing operation. Include copy in report defined in 3.01.F. above. Ensure water being used will not damage systems being tested. H. Use water meter and record to ±Y2 percent the volume of water in each system for each fill cycle. The cleaning solution for condenser water systems shall be the following mass of chemicals per 400 gallons of water in the system: N 0 Tri Sodium Phosphate 1 pound w = Sodium Carbonate 1 pound N LL Low Foaming Detergent 0.02 pound w O I. Ensure system is free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material. g Q J. Remove, inspect and replace strainers on all systems prior to initial fill. Provide temporary N O strainers on pumps that do not have permanent strainers. Provide pressure circulating w gauges on the strainers to detect plugging. Remove, clean and replace the strainers after z f... the cleaning process is complete. i— O z �- w K Ensure all control valves are operational and fully open to ensure terminal units can be U 0 . O E L. System pumps may be used for cleaning provided a new set of seals is installed and pumps • H uj are dismantled and inspected. Replace worn parts, install new gaskets and turn over used i - 0 seals. u O M. The system shall be completely operational, all safety devices functional and any hydraulic ui co 1=- O 1- z Q. September 30, 2003 Permit issue property cleaned. tests completed before cleaning. N. Add chemical solution to system. O. For water systems, establish circulation and apply heat to raise temperature slowly to maximum design temperature of system or 180 degrees F minimum. Circulate for 12 hours and ensure flow in all circuits. Remove heat and continue to circulate while the temperature is 100 degrees F or less. Drain system as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water; circulate for 6 hours at design temperature. Drain and repeat procedures defined above. Refill with clean water and add sodium sulfite. Test for residual sulfite. P. For condenser water systems circulate cleaning solution for 24 hours at maximum velocity at ambient temperature ensuring flow in all circuits. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water; circulate for 24 hours, drain. Refill with clean water and add sodium sulfite. Test for residual sulfite. For cooling tower systems, fill with clean water; circulate for one hour minimum at maximum flow. Drain and clean basin and screens. Refill, add chemicals and circulate. Test for residual chemicals. R. When cleaning is completed and system filled, establish circulation, expansion tank level and set pressure control. Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -2 z _ • re 2 w 1 _ 0O _.f J • } j MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila S. Check to ensure all insulation is properly installed. Do not proceed with installation until all tests are completed to the satisfaction of the Architect. T. Submit with report certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier. 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM A. Ensure piping in system is completed p rior t o performing flushing, testing and starting operations. B. Test to 150 pounds per square inch water pressure measured at system low point. C. Flush entire system for eight hours. Ensure full two hours of flushing through each outlet. Let stand for 24 hours and draw one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify system is clean. Let system flush for two more hours and draw off sample for testing. D. Shock treat entire system with liquid sodium hypochlorite to 5 percent concentration at end of line. Hold for 24 hours and flush systems for additional one hour. 3.03 DUCTED SYSTEMS A. Power vacuum all ducts 36 inches and larger. B. Ensure exhaust, supply and return fans are all operational, and proper starting procedures completed as defined in Section 15992 executed. C. Blow air through ductwork at 2 inch water gauge above system operating pressures to clean ducts and air outlets. Use system balancing dampers to assist in creating sufficient velocities. D. Test ductwork as follows: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Low pressure — test for tightness such that leakage is inaudible and not detectable by feel. - 2. Medium and high pressure — test for tightness as specified by SMACNA manuals with maximum leakage of 1 /2 percent at any branch or main duct at design static pressure. Ensure system is free of audible leaks. 3. High pressure fume extraction — test for leakage of 0 percent at 3 inches water gauge static pressure on discharge side of fans and 1/2 percent leakage at 3 inches water gauge on suction side of fan. 4. Dust extraction — test for maximum leakage at 1 /2 percent at 3 inches water gauge static pressure. 5. Kitchen Exhaust Ducts — test as defined in NFPA 96. 6. Low Pressure Fume Extraction — test for leakage of Y2 percent at 3 inches water gauge on suction side of fan and 0 percent leakage at 3 inches water gauge on discharge side of fan. Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -3 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 PLUMBING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS (SANITARY) A. Test by filling with water to produce water pressure of 5 pounds per square inch minimum — z and 10 pounds per square inch maximum. Z �w obstruction with hydraulic test. 8 co 0 C. Ensure all traps are fully primed. w = J F- D. Ensure all fixtures are properly anchored and connected to the system. N w w E. Flush each valve, drain each sink and operate each fixture to ensure drainage. 2 � J F. Open each cleanout, cover with linseed oil and reseal each cleanout. Ensure each cleanout N d is fully accessible and access doors are properly installed. w Z � 3.05 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM F- O , zt- . A. Ensure installation of piping system is completed prior to performing starting and testing ? Q procedures. Ensure all equipment used has U.L. labels visible. U ON 0 I- ww 1- Li_ O w 0- O B. For buried systems perform all tests prior to backfilling. Retest for proper grade and B. Fill system with water. Record pressure of water supply. Pressure test piping system as per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Ensure all valves in the sprinkler system are monitored and are clearly visible. E. Ensure all flow switches are installed and are operational. F. Flush systems as follows: 1. Filled with water, let stand at full operating pressure for one week. Drain the system. 2. Repeat above procedure three times. G. Flow tests shall be performed as required by: C. D. 1. Authorities having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 13. 3. NFPA'14. 4. NFPA 20. Record incoming water pressure to building once a day for ten days prior to activating system. :,a:'•.;..J..a:r,.y:jiv; „ ; rs;...�rc..t�::.;c::s September 30, 2003 Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing Permit Issue 15993 -4 z MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila I. Test and place sprinkler valve into operation. Adjust pressure switches. J. Coordinate sequencing of fire alarm with Division 16. 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS A. Test the following system as follows: 1. Gas piping: Test as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.07 CONTROLS A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Provide complete system documentation before start of testing: a. System manuals including hardware, software, maintenance and operations. b. Interlock and control diagrams for all systems controlled. c. Shop drawings and calibration procedures. d. Written description of control strategy for each system. e. Table of operating setpoints and alarm limits for control strategies. f. Listing of actual data file for each point and for control strategies. g. Certification of operation and list of calibration requirements of all hardware components. Hardware Starting: 1. Ensure each hardware component is properly installed as per manufacturer's recommendations and functioning properly. 2. Hardware Setting: a. This testing must be completed and verified before any software logic and control is added to the system. b. Calibrate the following components as per manufacturer's recommendations: 1. Thermostats and temperature sensors 2. Damper motor operators and positioners 3. Valves operators and positioners 4. Transmitters 5. Humidistats and humidity sensors 6. Pressure reducing /relief valves 7. Clocks 8. Gauges, thermometers, etc. 9. Pressure /electric switches 10. Static sensors and transmitters 11. Flow switches 12. Alarm settings 13. Fire alarm and security system interface 14. Interposing relays 15. Current sensitive relays Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS . UNISYS - Tukwila C. Software Starting: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue c. Gauge all wiring used to ensure conformance to UL specifications. Ensure all circuits are complete and all terminal wiring connections are tight. d. Adjust control d ampers. E nsure u niform m ixing. E nsure tight shut -off closure and measure leakage. Configure for fail -safe operation. e. Put all electronic hardware into operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace all defective components. Prove proper operation with software starting and printout. f. Test and ensure all interface with Division 16 is complete. Test and ensure all interface with other "package control" is complete. g. Ensure point identification is completed and all wire labeling is completed. As a minimum standard, the point tag should contain the following information: (1) Logical Point Name (2) Point Multiplexer (3) Address (4) Associated System Identification (5) Point Description h If dynamic graphics are included, ensure the proper operation of: (1) Dynamic values displayed on screen. (2) Update period. (3) Color change or status change. (4) Proper identification of system and points on screen. (5) Reaction to alarms. Check out each point through the terminal device end -to -end. This checkout to include tests for range, reliability and repeatability. j. Calibrate all control valves: (1) Ensure no overlap of control ranges. (2) No leakage when valves are closed, particularly steam. (3) Failsafe operation. k. Check all interface cabinetry to ensure compliance with the specifications and applicable codes. 1. Ensure all hardware is completely installed and started and fully operational before software start -up. 2. Compare shop drawings and specifications to final software and check: a. Flow charts. b. Hardcopy printouts. c. Control flow logic diagrams. 3. Enter software and operating setpoints and schedules into terminal device. 4. Check out each system through the terminal by: a. Simulation of system start/stop functions. b. Simulation of systems operation including: 1. High limit functions. 2. Low limit functions. 3. Safety features (override values). 4. Operation sequences specified. c. Verification of system component hardwired interlocks. Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing 15993 -6 j J MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 5. Verify operation of specific routines such as: a. Optimization. b. Demand limiting. c. Peak shaving. d. Night setback, morning warm -up. e. Building dynamic control. f. Variable volume air systems supply /return fan tracking control. g. Power failure recovery. 6. Simulate alarm conditions and verify alarm printouts. 7. Check out reports generation. 8. Check out communication network, input and output. 9. Check operation of system under failure modes. a. Component failure. b. Smart remote failure. c. Communication failure. d. Host failure. e. Outside air sensor failure. END OF SECTION Mechanical Systems Starting and Testing Permit Issue 15993 -7 Section No. Title 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16020 Equipment Connections and Coordination 16030 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 16110 Raceways and Boxes 16120 600 Volt Wire and Cable 16140 Wiring Devices 16200 Engine Generator System 16425 Switchboards 16440 Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16460 Dry Type Transformers 16470 Panelboards 16475 600 Volt Fuses 16500 Luminaires and Accessories 16680 Grounding System 16720 Fire Alarm and Detection System 16740 Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories J • • J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS September 30, 2003 Permit issue TOC UNISYS — Tulwila Page 1 J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General and Supplementary Conditions are a part of the requirements for the work under this Division of the Specifications. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation the electrical systems as called for in the Contract Documents, and in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. B. Provide labor, materials, and accessories required to provide complete, operating electrical systems. Labor, materials or accessories not specifically called for in the Contract Documents, but required to provide complete, operating electrical systems shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility companies serving the project and the Owner's insurance underwriter. B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where requirements differ, the most stringent apply. Should a ny c hange i n d rawings or specifications be required to comply with governing regulations, notify the Architect prior to submitting bid. D. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of ADA, ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, IES, NEC, NEMA, NETA, NFPA, OSHA, SMACNA, UL, and the State Fire Marshal. F. Equipment shall be certified for use in the State of the project and shall meet the State energy code. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of t he t rades in a t horough, substantial, workpersonlike manner by competent workpeople. Provide a competent, experienced, full -time Superintendent who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -1 Z w re J 00 U) o Wp -J w 2 u ¢ � a w F- O Z w M o U O wW H H LL 0 w Z U = ; OH : z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS z ,i- Z A. Abbreviations: w tx 6 D ADA Americans with Disabilities Act v U O ANSI American National Standards Institute co o ASA Acoustical Society of America u) ILI ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials -J H , BIL Basic Impulse Level W 0 i O CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers EIA Electronic Industries Association g ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. u. Q FM Factory Mutual to O IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers z w IES Illuminating Engineering Society z s IPCEA International Power Cable Engineers Association Z 0 LED Light Emitting Diode z O NEC National Electric Code w NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association D o ' NETA National Electrical Testing Association p N NFPA National Fire Protection Association 0 P- OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer = W OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 1- H S Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - 0 UL Underwriters Laboratories t .. Z U = B. Definitions: O / - z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to Engineer for review, refer to Architectural General and Supplementary Conditions for proper procedures. 2. FURNISH means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. 3. INSTALL means to join, unit, fasten, Zink, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. 4. PROVIDE means to FURNISH and INSTALL. 5. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Architect, or the Architect's representative. 6. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or within drywall partitions, or installed within hung ceilings. 7. SUBMIT means submit to Architect for review. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -2 J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Guarantee work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are provided or specified herein, the longer term shall apply. Correct any deficiencies, which occur during the guarantee period, within 24 hours of notification, without additional cost to the Owner, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Obtain similar guarantees from subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and subtrade specialists. 1.06 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect orEngineer a set of AutoCad or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and /or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect a nd E ngineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion. B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, or any other material that is considered hazardous by the Environmental Protection Agency or any other authority having jurisdiction. C. . Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide name /data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous place. E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people. F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar applications and sizes. G. Fully lubricate equipment where required. H. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance, and attendance by the Owner's representative is required to witness such tests, associated travel costs and subsistence shall be paid for by the Contractor. J. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site operating conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of derating identified on the submittals. K. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be NEMA type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed outdoors shall be NEMA type 3R. L. Energy consuming equipment shall be certified for use in the State of the project and shall meet the State Energy Code and local energy ordinances. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Contract Documents are based on equipment manufacturers as called out in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings. Acceptance of substitute equipment manufacturers does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to provide equipment and materials, which meet the performance as, stated or implied in the Contract Documents. B. Submit proposals to provide substitute materials or equipment, in writing, with sufficient lead time for review prior to the date equipment must be ordered to maintain project schedule. Reimburse Owner for costs associated with the review of the proposed substitution whether substitution is accepted or rejected. C. Indicate revisions required to adapt substitutions including revisions by other trades. Substitutions that increase the cost of the work and related trades are not permitted. D. The proposed substitution shall conform to the size, ratings, and operating characteristics of the equipment or systems as specified and shown on the Drawings. E. Proposals for substitutions shall include the following information: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. A description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. 2. Schematic drawings and details. 3. List of revisions to the Contract Documents that must be made if the substitution is accepted. 4. Estimate of costs the Owner may incur in implementing the substitution, such as test, evaluation, operating and support costs. 5. Statement of the time by which a Contract modification accepting the substitution must be issued, noting any effect on the Contract completion time or the delivery schedule. 6. A statement indicating the reduction to the Contract price if the Owner accepts the substitution. Include required modifications to all related trades. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -4 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 FEES AND PERMITS A. Pay all required fees and obtain all required permits related to the electrical installation. B. Pay royalties or fees in connection with the use of patented devices and systems. C. Provide controlled inspection where required by authorities having jurisdiction or by these specifications. 3.02 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS j ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's product data sheets, samples, and test reports as specified. B. Within one month after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or after execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, submit a complete typed list of all electrical equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for the equipment proposed to be provided on this project, as well as names of all subcontractors. C. Within two months after notice to proceed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or after execution of Owner /Contractor Agreement, prepare an index of all submittals for the project. Include a submittal identification number, a cross - reference to the Specification sections or Drawing number, and an item description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the Specification sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal identification number in addition to the other data specified. All subcontractors shall utilize the assigned submittal identification number. D. After the Contract is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data and samples from the manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, and all subcontractors, for all materials and equipment as specified. Submit data and details of such materials and equipment for review. Prior to submission, certify that the shop drawings, product data and samples are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Check all materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any work, which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop drawings as required to comply with the Contract Documents and the shop drawings. .E. Review of submittals is for general compliance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Comments or absence of comments shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing the work in a safe manner, and for coordinating the work with that of other trades. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -5 Stamp Interpretation No Exceptions Noted Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents. Exceptions Noted [ ] Resubmit for Record [ ] No Resubmission Required Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents and the Engineer's notations are complied with. Revise and Resubmit • The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents; do not proceed with fabrication, manufacture, or construction. The work and shop drawings are not permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate shop drawings. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work have been submitted and accepted. G. A minimum period of ten working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data and /or samples are submitted for review. This time period must be considered by the Contractor in the scheduling of the work. H. Submit two bond prints of all items requiring shop drawings. Submit six copies of manufacturer's product submittals. Submittals will be stamped as follows: J. Submit materials and equipment by manufacturer, trade name, and model number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalog material. Maintenance and operating manuals are not acceptable substitutes for shop drawings. K. Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed. Cross out non - applicable information. Note specified features such as materials or paint finishes. L. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation and technical data sufficient to verify that equipment meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. Include wiring, piping and service connection data. M. Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data on site. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -6 z w 6 U 00 co 0 co tu J = H CO W w 2 u.? c = w zE- t— 0 z ~ w 0 O N c- ww u' O .. w U = 0 ~ z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. For each room or area of the building containing electrical equipment, submit the following: < z 1. Floor Plans: Plan and elevation layout drawings indicating the equipment in the exact w location in which it is intended to be installed. These plans shall be of a scale not 6 D Tess than 1 /4 inch = 1' -0 ". They shall be prepared in the following manner: v O a. Indicate the physical boundaries of the space including door swings and cn 0 ceiling heights and ceiling types (as applicable). w b. Illustrate all electrical equipment proposed to be contained therein. Include J H top and bottom elevations of all electrical equipment. The Drawings shall be u) LL wO prepared u tilizing t he dimensions contained in the individual equipment 2 submittals. Indicate code and manufacturer's required clearances. 1 5 c. Illustrate all other equipment therein such as conduits, detectors, luminaries, u_ < ducts, registers, pull boxes, wireways, structural elements, etc. co d d. Indicate the operating weight of each piece of equipment. H w e. Indicate the heat release from each piece of electrical equipment in terms of Z = BTU p er h our. T his i nformation s hall b e that which is supplied by the F respective manufacturers. i Z 1- f. Illustrate concrete pads, curbs, etc. w D g. Indicate dimensions to confirm compliance with code - required clearances. 0 h. Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for each piece of p equipment (as per each respective manufacturer's recommendation). C) H i. Equipment removal routes. w w O. The work described in shop drawing submissions shall be carefully checked by all trades for u- 0 clearances (including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, tit Z co maintenance of architectural conditions and coordination with other trades on the job. Each U submitted shop drawing shall include a certification that related job conditions have been ~ 1 O c hecked by the Contractor and each Subcontractor and that conflicts do not exist. Z P. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained on submissions, or for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, product data and samples, the Contract Documents govern the work and are neither waived nor superceded in any way by the review of shop drawings, product data and samples. Q. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data and /or samples will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. R. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing and on the front cover of each product data brochure cover: The submittal identification number; title of the sheet or brochure; name and location of the project; names of the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, and vendor; the date of submittal; and the date of each correction, version and revision. Number all pages and drawings in product data brochures consecutively from beginning to end. U nless t he a bove i nformation i s included, the submittal will be returned for resubmission. Resubmittals of product data or brochures shall include a cover letter summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila S. The distribution equipment, short circuit and coordination study, and room layout submittals shall be submitted concurrently. Failure to submit concurrently may result in the immediate return of the submittal marked REVISE AND RESUBMIT. 3.03 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contract Documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation instructions. Drawings are diagrammatic. B. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit the work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible conflict or delay. C. The electrical drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other trades will permit. Provide offsets, fittings, and accessories, which may be required but not shown on the Drawings. Investigate the site, and review drawings of other trades to determine conditions affecting the work, and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such conditions. D. The I ocations o f I ighting f ixtures, o utlets, p aneis a nd o ther e quipment i ndicated on the Drawings are approximately correct, but they are understood to be subject to such revision as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed in consequence of increase or reduction of the number of outlets, or in order to meet field conditions, or to coordinate with modular requirements of ceilings, or to simplify the work, or for other legitimate causes. E. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, outlets, switches, etc., and have precise and definite locations accepted by the Architect before proceeding with the installation. F. The Drawings show only the general run of raceways and approximate locations of outlets. Any significant changes in location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect for review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Verify with the Architect the exact location and mounting height of outlets and equipment not dimensionally located on the Drawings. H. Circuit tags in the form of numbers are used where shown to indicate the circuit designation numbers in electrical panels. Show the actual circuit numbers on t he a s -built R ecord Drawings and on the associated typed panelboard directory card. Where circuiting is not indicated, provide required circuiting in accordance with the loading indicated on the Drawings and /or as directed. The Drawings generally do not indicate the number of wires in conduit for the branch circuit wiring of fixtures and outlets, or the actual circuiting. Provide the correct wire size and quantity as required by the indicated circuiting and /or circuit numbers indicated, the control intent, referenced wiring diagrams (if any), the specified voltage drop or maximum distance limitations, and the applicable requirements of the NEC. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -8 -J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila J. Carefully c heck s pace requirements with other trades to insure that equipment can be installed in the spaces allotted. Z K. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure 1 Z that they have the information necessary so that they may properly install the necessary o! W connections and equipment. Identify items (remote ballast, pull boxes, etc.) requiring access 5 in order that the ceiling trade will know where to install access doors and panels. U U O N L. Consult with other trades regarding equipment so that, wherever possible, motor controls and w distribution equipment are of the same manufacturer. - H CO u_ M. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of electrical risers through structural masonry and w O concrete walls a nd f loors a nd e Isewhere a s r equired f or t he p roper p rotection o f e ach 5 electrical riser passing through building surfaces. u- Q N. Provide firestopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc. which pass through rated z w walls, partitions and floors. Z H • O. Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in precast members for w O w 0 D CI P. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit and equipment, designed so as not to O N exceed allowable loadings of structures. 0 I- CU u j Q. Examine and compare the Contract Documents with the drawings and specifications of other H trades, a nd r eport a ny d iscrepancies b etween t hem t o t he A rchitect and obtain written Z instructions for changes necessary in the work. Install and coordinate the work in w cooperation with other related trades. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid U interferences. 0 E- electrical work. R. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Architect for review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of Record Drawings. S. Furnish of an experienced Superintendent, who shall be in constant charge of all work, and who shall coordinate work with the work of other trades. No work shall be installed before coordinating with other trades. T. Coordinate with the local electric utility company and the local telephone company as to their requirements for service connections and provide all necessary metering provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labor, testing, and appurtenances. U. Before commencing work, examine adjoining work on which this work is in any way affected and report conditions, which prevent performance of the work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -9 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila V. Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work to prevent Z interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of 1- ' each conduit prior to fabrication. ui 1. Right -of -Way: Lines which pitch have the right -of -way over those which do not pitch. UO For example: condensate, steam, and plumbing drains normally have right -of -way. co o Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right -of -way over lines whose N w elevations can be changed. -I H 2. Provide offsets, transitions and changes in direction of conduit as required to N w maintain proper headroom and pitch on sloping lines. W. In cases of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of need for explanation, request "' u. supplementary instructions from the Architect. N d 3.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE Z H A. Prior to the submitting of bids, visit the project site and become familiar with all conditions w O affecting the proposed installation and make provisions as to the cost thereof. w 2 m B. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of p ((13 . the sub - soils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above 0 f- or below ground, or other sub - surface conditions which may be encountered during the work. = w Evaluate existing conditions, which may affect methods or cost of performing the work, based F-- on examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the Drawings or other ! O information does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the satisfactory completion of w Z the work. U O~ z 3.05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide excavation for the work of this Division. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as required. Remove from the site excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water, which accumulates. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative density or as specified by the Architect. Whenever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -10 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the following minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise z specifically shown. Q • �Z 1. Electric service: 2 feet minimum. .e: W 2. Telephone service: 2 feet minimum. 6 D 10 D. Trenches should not be placed within ten feet of foundation or soil surfaces, which must N o resist horizontal forces. J H E. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests have been performed and installation observed N u- by the Architect. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the Specifications. W 0 Backfill shall consist of non - expensive soil with limited porosity. Deposit in 6 layers and g thoroughly and carefully tamp until the work has a cover of not Tess than 1 foot. Backfill and u. tamp remainder of trench at 1 foot intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished N d surface. H W z � 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING ZO A. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other W W surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other D Ca equipment, layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, p Y equipment or defaced finished plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc., using skilled tradespeople 0 H of the trades required at no additional cost to the Owner. W w B. Do not cut, channel, chase or drill unfinished masonry, tile, etc., unless permission from the u- Z rifi Architect is obtained. If permission is granted, perform this work in a manner acceptable to W the Architect. U C . Where conduit or equipment are mounted on a painted finished surface, or a surface to be z painted, paint to match the surface. Cold galvanize bare metal whenever support channels are cut. D. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as required.. Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to accommodate penetrations at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.07 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Mounting heights shall conform to ADA requirements. B. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Architect before installation. C. Electrical and telecommunications outlets shall be mounted not lower than 15 inches above finished floor to bottom of outlet and not higher than 48 inches above finished floor to top of device. D. Electrical switches shall be mounted not lower than 36 inches above finished floor to center of switch and not higher than 48 inches above finished floor to center of switch. E. Fire alarm manual pull stations shall be mounted 48 inches above finished floor to center of manual pull station. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -11 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Outlets for public and other wall mounted type telephones shall be installed so that the particular telephone installed conforms to ADA mounting height requirements. z G. Visual Alarms: Mount not less than 80 inches to the bottom or 96 inches to the top of the Z device. o: w H. Wall Mounted Exit Signs: 2 inches above top of door to bottom of sign. -J 0 (0 0 I. Low Level Exit Signs: 6 inches to bottom of sign. w w J J. Stairwell and utility corridor wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted 8 feet 6 inches N u- above finished floor or 1 foot below ceiling or structure above, whichever is lower. w 0 3.08 CONTINUANCE OF EXISTING SERVICES g ES A. Existing electrical services not specifically indicated to be removed or altered shall remain as z w they presently exist. Z H B. Where existing services interfere with new construction, alter or reroute such existing w O equipment to facilitate new construction after obtaining written permission from the Architect. w Notification in writing giving two weeks advance notice of planned alteration is required. v 0 O- C. Preserve continuity of service of existing facilities (related to damage or alteration due to new 0 ' construction). U nauthorized alteration to existing equipment shall be corrected without w w additional cost to the Owner. F- 2 P- 3.09 CLEANING UP ui Z U z A. Avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, loose materials, crates, etc., resulting from the 1:.* O /- installation of this work. Remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and z keep the premises clean and free of dust and debris. B. Clean all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project. Wipe clean exposed lighting fixture reflectors and trim pieces with a non - abrasive cloth just prior to occupancy. C. All electrical equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed and wiped clean prior to energization and at the completion of the project. Equipment shall be opened for observation by the Architect as required. 3.10 WATERPROOFING A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, make penetration prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch - pockets required. Advise the Architect and obtain written permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown on the Drawings. B. Restore waterproofing integrity of walls or surfaces after they have been penetrated without additional cost to the Owner. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -12 -- 3.11 SUPPORTS Z H Z. A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers, re W auxiliary structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work. 6 m 0 B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated v) o as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In w = particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets and mechanical equipment rooms. —i H u) u- WO C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment, which i s installed i n a freestanding position. u. ? D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support N O system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a = H w = substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of Z F- all equipment mounted on them. H 0 z I-- E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall ? o . not depend on electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support. v O N F. Electrical equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media 0 H (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). x UJ Provide independent support of electrical equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for H H ductwork, piping or work of other trades. g_ Z ui G. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, equipment, etc., so that loading will not v exceed allowable loadings of structure. Electrical equipment and supports shall not come in p /- contact with work of other trades. z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.12 FASTENINGS A. Fasten equipment to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice. B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 pounds or I ess, conform t o the following as a minimum: C. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 100 pounds, but is 300 pounds or less, conform to the following as a minimum: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Concrete and solid masonry: Bolts and expansion shields. 3. Hollow construction: Toggle bolts. 4. Solid metal: Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs. 5. Steel decking or sub -floor: Fastenings as specified below for applied weights in excess of 100 pounds. 1. At concrete slabs provide 24 inch x 24 inch x '/2 inch steel fishplates on top with through bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top of slab screed line, where no fill is to be applied. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -13 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. At steel decking or sub -floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts or threaded rods. The tops of bolts or rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed Z • line and grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In = cases where the decking or sub -floor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to W work with their decking or sub -floor such hangers shall be provided. _i U D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 300 pounds, coordinate with and U p obtain the approval of Architect and conform to the following as a minimum: w w J i- 1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural N u_ steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably W 0 welded or clamped to building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members. D E. For items, which are shown, as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the = C7 building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or F ' _ angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements. z '— i— O Zi— F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars. m p Prefabricated steel channels as manufactured by Kindorf or Unistrut are acceptable. U p i- 3.13 IDENTIFICATION = w I— t= A. Identify electrical equipment with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates with 1 /2 ti.. O inch high white engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or load tii Z served as appropriate. Nameplates for equipment connected to the emergency power U N system shall be red with white lettering. Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated 0 H screws; peel and stick tape or glue on type nameplates are not allowed. Z B. Cable tags shall be flameproof secured with flameproof non - metallic cord. C. Provide an engraved nameplate for each switch controlling loads, which are not local to the switch. D. See individual sections for additional identification requirements. 3.14 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or installation of any equipment or assembly which bears on any exposed surface any name, trademark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such object has been obtained, is prohibited. B. Required UL labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -14 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.15 EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide concrete pads under all floor mounted electrical equipment. Equipment pads shall z conform to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 1 inch margin 1— Z around the equipment and supports. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and made of o: 2 a minimum 28 day, 2500psi concrete reinforced with 6 inch x 6 inch 6/6 gauge welded wire 6 D mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors, with all U O external corners bullnosed to a 3 /, inch radius. Shop drawings stamped NO EXCEPTIONS co o NOTED shall be used for dimensional guidance in sizing pads. co w H B. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia co w O . LL blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the w manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment i5 installed on vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the u floor, pad, or support as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer. v H C. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall pass w Z F , through the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. As an alternative, the F- O mounting screws may pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to 6 inches W F- square, 18 gauge galvanized metal backplates, which are attached to the gypsum board with 2 D an approved non - flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are U CI not allowed. O OH 3.16 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING = v H i= A. Provide drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment u. Z specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and installation of equipment as required w by the construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time that it is U required, the Contractor shall be responsible for its proper storage and protection until the ~ O '— time it is required. Pay for all costs of drayage or storage. Z B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by the project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be responsible for resulting disassembly, re- assembly, manufacturer's supervision, shoring, general construction modification, delays, overtime costs, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.17 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION A. Protect the work, equipment, and material of other trades from damage by work or workmen of this trade, and correct damaged caused without additional cost to the Owner. B. Take responsibility for work, materials, and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage, and carefully store material and equipment received on site, which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. Cover and protect equipment and materials from damage due to water, spray -on fireproofing, construction debris, etc. Store equipment to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -15 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Provided adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of materials and equipment z against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work until final acceptance. i Z Protect materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no ce w finished surfaces will be damaged or marred, and moving parts are kept clean and dry. Do j not install damaged items; take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair. U co 13 D. Lighting fixture troffers with parabolic reflectors shall be installed with factory mounted plastic w protective bags around parabolic reflector assembly. Remove protective bag just prior to .. N occupancy. LL w 0 3.18 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 u_ A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and co d acceptance testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion z w date to permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and Contract closeout. Z H Complete any adjustments and /or alterations, which the final acceptance tests indicate as H 0 necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date. See z H ILI individual sections for extent of testing required. 2 w B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed 0 En- and outlining when field testing will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review o F within six months after the notice to proceed by Owner's Representative has been given. = w Update this schedule periodically as the project progresses. H u. O 3.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide the services of factory trained specialists to provide an operating instructions seminar O H for equipment and systems. The seminar shall be conducted over a five day (consecutive) Z period. Instruction time is defined as straight time working hours and does not include nights, weekends, or travel time to and from the project. B. Submit seminar agenda, schedule and list of representatives to the Owner for approval thirty days prior to suggested date of seminar. Do not commence seminar until the Owner has issued a written acceptance of the starting time and attendees. Confirm attendance of seminar by written notification to participants. C. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper starting sequences, operation, shutdown, general maintenance and preventative maintenance procedures, including normal and emergency procedures. D. Submit final copies of Record Drawings and Operating and Maintenance Manuals to Owner at seminar. E. Submit a written record of minutes and attendees of the seminar to the Owner. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Electrical General Provisions 16010 -16 PRI Z 3.20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS < Z A. Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and materials furnished under re 2 this Division. 6 v 0 O CD N - LL w 0 u. w 1_w Z H 0 Z H ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Submit three final copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for review at least ten weeks before the completion date. Assemble data in a completely indexed volume or volumes in three -ring binders and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. Print the project name on the outside of the binders. C. Maintenance manuals shall include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in a clear and e asily u nderstandable format. Show model numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, capacity ratings, and actual loads. D. Provide the following information where applicable: 3.21 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain on a daily basis at the Project site a complete set of Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall initially consist of a set of blueline prints or AutoCAD files of the Contractor's Coordination Drawings. The prints shall be marked or the AutoCAD files electronically updated to show the precise location of all buried or concealed work and equipment, including embedded conduit, raceways and boxes, and all changes and deviations in the Electrical work from that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without definite written instructions from the Architect or Engineer. The updated Coordination Drawings shall be used to produce the final Record Drawings that shall be delivered to the Owner in AutoCAD electronic format media upon Project completion. B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed. Suitably identify locations of all equipment by at least two dimensions to permanent structures. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Identifying name and mark number. 2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list). 3. Complete nameplate data. • 4. Certified Record Drawings and Final Reviewed submittals. 5. Parts list. 6. Performance curves and data. 7. Wiring diagrams. 8. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions with all non - applicable information deleted. 9. List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements. 10. Assembly and disassembly instructions with exploded view drawings where necessary. 11. Test reports. 12. Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable. Electrical General Provisions 16010 -17 w 0 O ww u' O . w Z U= O ~. Z RECORD DRAWING CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8 inch high letters) (Printed Name of General Contractor) (5/16 inch high letters) Date: (Printed Name of Subcontractor) (5/16 inch high letters) Date: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit issue RECORD DRAWING (3/8 inch high letters) To be used for recording Field Deviations and Dimensional Data Only (5/16 inch high letters) UNISYS - Tukwila C. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall mark all in- progress Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: D. . Upon completion of the work, the Contractor and subcontractors shall certify all Record Drawings on the front lower right hand corner adjacent to the above marking with a rubber stamp impression or an AutoCAD image similar to the following: Electrical General Provisions 16010 -18 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila E. Prior to final acceptance of the Work of this Division, the Contractor shall submit properly Z certified Record Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review and shall make changes, Z corrections, or additions as the Architect and /or Engineer may require to the Record Drawings. After the Architect's and Engineer's review, and any required Contractor revisions, re W the Record Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner on electronic media in AutoCAD format. B The Architect and Engineer do not assume any responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the Record Drawings. w 0 O p ' vo w la 3.22 FINAL PUNCHLIST H WO A. Prior to the Final Punchlist, certify that systems and equipment are complete, operational, and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. g J u. B. During the Final P unchlist, provide personnel with access keys, h and held radios, and to O necessary expertise to operate each system and piece of equipment to demonstrate = w operational compliance with the Contract Documents. Z H C. Any deficiencies noted on the Final Punchlist shall be expeditiously corrected and certified in W O . D p 3.23 EARLY OCCUPANCY ' - ; off A. Complete those systems which are necessary to allow partial early occupancy of the building. = W H U .. B. Verify and comply with requirements for temporary occupancy with the local Building and Fire u' O Departments. writing. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Electrical General Provisions 16010 -19 i J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide equipment connections and coordination in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. No requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 Not applicable. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL SECTION 16020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION . A. Provide equipment connections and coordination in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and product submittals. Provide disconnect switches for equipment. Where equipment requires fuse protection, provide fusible type disconnect switches with fuses rated in accordance with equipment manufacturer's requirements. Disconnect switches for single -phase equipment shall be thermal overload type. Locate disconnect switches in coordination with the layout of equipment. Provide supports for a free standing installation if required to allow access to disconnect switch and /or proximity to equipment served. C. Provide final connections to hard -wired equipment with a minimum of two feet of liquid tight flexible metal conduit. D. Verify the requirements of cord and plug equipment and provide receptacles, branch circuiting and branch circuit overcurrent protection to match. Receptacle types shown on the Drawings are for bidding purposes only. E. Where equipment is supplied from conduit run under or within the floor slab, extend conduit to a junction box mounted on a two -foot stub up of rigid steel conduit. Provide suitable bracing on conduit stub up. F. Where equipment is fed from overhead, support conduit on flanged floor type fitting. September 30, 2003 Equipment Connections and Coordination Permit Issue 16020 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION TYPES Z = Z A. Provide equipment connection types as indicated on the equipment connection schedule. w B. Equipment Connection Types: U co D 1. Type DP: Duplex pump system with controller provided under Division 15. Provide u) ill connection to controller and connections from controller to pumps in accordance with _ H the controller manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide connections for local N u- controls and alarms in accordance with the controller manufacturer's installation W 0 instructions. 2. Type FR: Fractional horsepower single phase motor. Provide thermal '" g Q overload /disconnect switch and motor connection. v> 3. Type FWS: Equipment furnished with starter. Install starter and provide connection Z W to starter and connection from starter to equipment. Z x 4. Type M: Motor with starter provided under Division 16. Provide disconnect switch - O and motor connection. z H 5. Type SPC: Single point connection. Provide single point connection to equipment provided with factory mounted starter /controller listed for single point power D p connection. Provide fusible disconnect switch with fuses sized in accordance with 0 equipment nameplate requirements. [3'— 6. Type VFD: Variable frequency drive furnished under Division 15. Install VFD and W W provide connection to VFD and connection from VFD to equipment. F H IL O W Z U= A. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. � 1 — z 3.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT B. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and Toad side of controllers. C. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed, duplex, triplex, lead -lag, pony motor or other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. 3.04 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Equipment Connections and Coordination 16020 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16030 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS z PART 1 — GENERAL rt 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION U Q co A. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints in accordance with the Contract Documents. co H co u_ B. Provide isolation for engine generator set, dry type transformers, and at electrical w 0 connections to rotating or vibrating equipment. 2 C. Provide seismic restraints for all electrical equipment. ! d . 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE H = z I . A. Vibration isolators and seismic restraints shall be of the same manufacturer. 1— O' z I- LL/ ui 1.03 STANDARDS 2 D U A. SMACNA Guidelines for Restraint of Mechanical Equipment. O D o1 B. Requirements for UBC seismic zone 3. H U u Ili U N . A. Manufacturer's product data sheets and installation instructions for each vibration isolator and ~ H z 1.04 SUBMITTALS seismic restraint. B. Plan and elevation diagrams showing equipment, points of attachment, vibration isolators, seismic restraints, mounting methods, and hardware types and sizes. • C. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Seismic restraint calculations. Seismic restraint calculations shall be certified by a Professional Structural or Civil Engineer registered in the State of the project. D. Field inspection report. 1.05 FIELD INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's local representative shall field inspect . the installation and submit a report verifying the completeness and performance of the installation. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 16030 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Z A. Amber - Booth, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co., Vibration Mounting & Controls Inc., w or Vibrex Vibration Control Systems. U 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS N ca co w ui A. General: .�. H U) LL w O 1. Devices installed outdoors shall be weatherproof; steel components shall be hot 2 dipped galvanized, hardware shall be cadmium plated, and springs shall be g J neoprene coated. u_ 2. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at to d rated load. = w 3. Springs shall have an additional minimum travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated �. z H. deflection. H 0 z f- B. Mounting Method Type A: 2 m uj D o 1. Floor mounted spring isolators for seismic and restrained service. 0 P- 2. Built in resilient limit stops shall limit upward, downward, and horizontal travel to a 0 H maximum of /, inch. = w 3. Trapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment. t- H 4. Mounting holes in bottom plate for bolting to concrete housekeeping pad. - 0 5. Neoprene pad between bottom plate of isolator housing and bottom of spring W z isolator. U 6. Mason Industries type SLR. ~ O h- z C. Mounting Method Type B: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Hanger rod neoprene isolators. 2. 45° slack seismic restraint cables. 3. Neoprene element with a projecting bushing to prevent steel to steel contact. 4. Steel retainer box encasing the neoprene element. 5. Rod shall be able to swing 15° before contacting resilient bushing. 6. Mason Industries type HD neoprene hanger and type SCB seismic cable brace. D. Mounting Method Type C: 1. Floor mounted bridge bearing neoprene mounts with all directional seismic capability. 2. Two separated and opposing molded bridge bearing neoprene elements contained in a ductile iron casting. 3. Mounting holes in bottom plate for bolting to concrete housekeeping pad. 4. Mason Industries type BR. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 16030 -2 Equipment Mounting Method Static Deflection Engine Generator Set A 1 inch Dry Type Transformers - Suspended B 0.2 inch Dry Type Transformers -Floor Mounted C 0.2 inch • J J j J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Installation shall be in accordance with seismic restraint calculations and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Verify that mounting methods provide the required vibration isolation and seismic restraint and that there are no vibration short circuits. C. Conduit connected to rotating or vibrating equipment shall be flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible conduit. 3.02 MOUNTING SCHEDULE September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints 16030 -3 J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide raceways and boxes in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Conduit, Boxes, Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. No requirements: Modular Wiring Systems: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets of system components. 1.03 IDENTIFICATION September 30, 2003 Permit issue SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES z re 5 00 • N 0 . 111 U) IL! uj O: gQ = a. w z � w . 2. 1/8 inch scale plans showing layout of lighting fixtures and modular wiring system. : ? 0 0 I — w w. � O ` ill Z O~ Z A. Mark junction box covers with permanent stencil identification of panelboard and circuit numbers of wiring contained within. B. Paint fire alarm and fire pump system boxes red. j PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Conduit and Boxes: 1. UL listed and labeled products of any manufacturer meeting the specified performance requirements are acceptable. Modular Wiring System: 1. Reloc, Dual -Lite, or equal. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Square D or equal. Raceways and Boxes 16110 -1 • ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Rigid conduit, heavy wall, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, threaded ends. 2. ' Threaded type fittings. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: 1. Rigid conduit, heavy wall, threaded ends. 2. Threaded type fittings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Continuous, seamless steel tubing galvanized or sherardized on exterior, coated on interior with smooth hard finish of lacquer, vamish or enamel. 2. ' Steel, set screw or compression type fittings. Provide concrete type fittings where required. Metal Clad Cable 1. E. Flexible Steel Conduit: Galvanized steel armor, copper conductors, insulated copper equipment grounding conductor, and intemal marker tape. Screw in grounding type insulated throat type fitting with die cast steel Iocknut. 1. Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double- wrapped steel, hot dip galvanized inside and out forming smooth internal wiring channel. 2. Steel, compression type fittings. F. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: 1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, inert, watertight plastic outer jacket. 2. Fittings shall be cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one- piece brass grounding bushings threaded to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated throat. G. Rigid Non - metallic Conduit: 1. Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride suitable for 90 °C. 2.. Solvent cemented type fittings. Raceways and Boxes 16110 -2 -, ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM A. Factory pre - assembled connectors and pre -wired cable assemblies to interface with lighting fixtures and lighting switches. UL 498 overload test for connecting or disconnecting under Toad. UL listed for use in air handling plenums. B. Components shall be color coded for voltage class, function keyed, and dead fronted to avoid the possibility of electrical shock. Cables shall be capable of connecting to any fixture connector on respective switching function. C. Connectors shall be made of injection molded polyester thermoset compound with up to four copper alloyed spade pins or taps for positive contact, two positive locking latches and rated for 20 amps. Provide one multipurpose flexible connector with two power out (one un- switched and one switched) and one switchleg connection faces at each lighting fixture female receptacle to allow for switched o r u n- switched f unctions. P rovide o ne female receptacle for each lighting fixture. Receptacle shall be capable of rotating 270° to reduce excessive stress that may be caused by the cable assemblies. Receptacles shall be recessed or capable of being mounted in a standard 1 /2 inch knockout allowing for end mount conversions in the field where necessary. D. Cable assemblies shall be constructed using a flexible armor jacket with insulated solid 12 gauge copper conductors. Provide a full size insulated grounding conductor in each cable assembly. Each cable assembly shall be supplied with a minimum of two feet of cable more than what is required to connect from fixture to fixture. Quantity of conductors in each cable assembly shall be as required. 2.04 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Sizes and shapes as indicated and /or as required. B. Provide necessary elbows, tees, connectors, adapters, etc. C. Continuous removable cover secured with screws and keyhole slots. Hinged cover where installed above suspended ceiling. D. Provide wire retainers at not greater than 12 inches on center. 2.05 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES A. Cast Type Boxes: 1. Ferrous alloy box with inside threaded hubs for rigid steel conduit. 2. Aluminum box with threaded hubs for rigid aluminum conduit. 3. Ferrous alloy box with compression or inside threaded hubs with adapter for electrical metallic tubing. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Distribution j unction b axes s hall contain up to f our r eceptacles m ounted i n a UL listed enclosure. Provide with external flanges for mounting to building structure. Raceways and Boxes 16110 -3 34` ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 4. Cast raised cover, size matched to contour of box. z 5. Tapered threads for hubs. Z . B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes: re 10 00 co 0 w I. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 1. General: a. Pressed steel, galvanized or cadmium - plated, 4 inches minimum octagonal or square with galvanized cover or extension ring as required. 2. Concrete Box: a. 4 inches minimum octagonal with removable backplate. Depth of box shall allow for minimum of 1 inch of concrete to be poured around the backplate. 3. Lighting Fixture Box: a. 4 inches minimum octagon. b. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling and a modular wiring system is not used, provide a junction box and extend flexible steel conduit to each fixture. 4. Provide 3/8 inch no bolt fixture studs where required. C. Sheet Steel Boxes: 1. No. 12 gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side less than 40 inches, and maximum area not exceeding 1,000 square inches; riveted or welded 3 /4 inch flanges at exterior corners. 2. No. 10 gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side 40 to 60 inches, and maximum area 1,000 to 1,500 square inches; riveted or welded 3 / inch flanges at exterior corners. 3. No. 10 gauge sheet steel riveted or welded to 11/2 inch by 1% inch by % inch welded angle iron framework for boxes with maximum side exceeding 60 inches and more than 1,500 square inches in area. 4. Covers: a. Same gauge steel as box. b. Subdivided single covers so no section of cover exceeds 50 pounds. c. Machine bolts or machine screws threaded into tapped holes. 5. Paint: a. Rust inhibiting primer, ANSI 61 grey enamel finish coat. A. Provide raceways for all systems. 277/480V wiring shall be kept independent of 120/208V wiring. Emergency system wiring shall be kept independent of other wiring systems. Provide insulated grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be Y2 inch. Wiring of each type and system shall be installed in separate raceways. B. Protect metallic raceway in earth or fill from corrosion with two coats of corrosion resistant paint or tape wrap. September 30, 2003 Raceways and Boxes Permit Issue 16110 -4 • w a � u- < N v Z � I-O 11.1 uj 2 t— UC3 ON =w ll. ti . z U= O~ z 1 Provide raceways with appropriate seal -offs, explosion -proof fittings, etc. in special occupancy areas as required. Provide conduit seal -offs where portions of an interior raceway — 1 system pass through walls, ceilings or floors which separate adjacent rooms having substantially different maintained temperatures, refrigeration, or cold storage rooms. J. Provide pull cord in empty raceways. Tag both ends noting destination. K. Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. Use ball mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit insider diameter) followed by close fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This assembly may be pulled with, but ahead of cable being installed. Clean empty raceways similarly. Clear or replace any raceway which rejects ball mandrel. L. Install exterior underground conduits 24 inches minimum below finished grade. Do not penetrate waterproof membranes unless proper seal is provided. 1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Elbows for conduit installed below grade or embedded within floor slabs shall be rigid steel conduit with two coats of corrosion resistant paint or tape wrap. D. Tie embedded raceways securely in place prior to concrete placement. Raceways installed below or within floor slabs shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished slab or housekeeping pad to the first connector. Install capped bushings on conduit stub ups. E. Locate raceways so that the integrity of structural members is not affected and they do not conflict with the services of other trades. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight. Protect threads from corrosion after installation with zinc chromate or equivalent protection. F. Conceal raceways except at surface mounted cabinets and freestanding equipment. Install minimum of 6 inches from flues, steam pipes, or other heated lines. Provide flashing and counter - flashing f or w aterproofing o f r aceways w hich p enetrate t he r oof. I nstall p ower raceways a minimum of 24 inches from telecommunications raceways, cross at 90° angle. Route exposed raceways and raceways above suspended ceilings parallel or perpendicular to building lines with right angle turns and symmetrical bends. Provide sleeves in concrete walls, floor slabs and partitions. Waterproof sleeved raceways where required. G. Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways at expansion joints and between structures to compensate for differential movement. Provide bonding conductor. H. Provide one empty % inch raceway for each three spare unused poles or spaces of flush - mounted panelboards. Terminate conduit in an accessible location for future extension. M. Secure raceways clamps or supports to masonry materials with toggle bolts, expansion bolts, or steel inserts. Install raceway on steel construction with approved clamps which do not depend on friction or set -screw pressure alone. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Raceways and Boxes 16110 -5 z � • Z re w 6U O 0 0 w l- w w w o co d � z o . Z H w U � O S o ff ww O w Z - I O~ z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila N. Raceways Embedded in Floor Slabs: z .f.- Z 1. Raceways shall not be installed in slab without the approval of the Structural re w Engineer. 6 = 2. Raceways shall not interfere with placement of floor slab reinforcement components. v 0 3. Install raceways between the upper and the lower layers of reinforcing steel. u) 0 4. Space raceways not less than 8 inches on centers except where they converge at u) 11.1 panels or junction boxes. ,.-.- 5. Raceways running parallel to slabs supports, such as beams, columns and structural u) w walls, shall be installed not less than 12 inches from such supporting elements. w O 2 O. Non Metallic Raceway Installations: g Q co D 1. Joints shall be made using the material recommended by the raceway manufacturer. s w Components shall be cleaned prior to assembly. Z H 2.. Raceway cutoffs shall be square and shall not deform conduit. Ream rough F O surfaces. z I- 3. Provide male box adapters to terminate raceways. w w 4. Where separable terminations are required, provide PVC threaded adapters with m p Iocknuts or bushings. Provide "0" rings for watertight installations. 0 2) 5. Bends shall be made by methods that do not deform or damage the conduit. 0 H 6. Provide expansion fittings where required. w w 7. Raceway supports shall be installed to allow the non - metallic conduit to slide through I- the supports. u- O 8. Non - metallic raceway is not permitted within the building. w z U= O F- P. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Raceways Above Suspended Ceilings: 1. Single runs of 1/2 inch or % inch raceways may be supported from ceiling support wires where permitted by the rating of the ceiling system. 2. Provide independent support of raceways larger than 3/ inch. Provide independent support of multiple raceways (more than one). Provide unistrut support and threaded rod to structure above. Attachment to ceiling support wires is not permitted. 3. Provide independent support of raceways installed above fire rated ceilings. Attachment to ceiling support wires is not permitted. 4. Install conduit 1 foot -0 inch minimum above top of ceiling. Q. Underground Duct Banks: 1. Provide underground duct banks as indicated. Provide concrete encasement of power systems duct banks except where duct banks run beneath building slab on grade. Provide concrete encasement of duct bank elbows for all systems. Provide steel reinforcing bars for concrete encased duct banks. Provide spacers to permit concrete to completely surround and encase each conduit. Concrete strength shall be 3,000 pounds per square inch minimum. Provide red dye inhibiting agent in concrete mix. Raceways and Boxes 16110 -6 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Pitch conduit down and away where duct bank enters the building or equipment. 3. Support raceways installed in duct banks every 5 feet to assure correct alignment z prior to placing concrete. m I= 4 Terminate raceways with flared end bells. Clear raceway terminations of burrs and w rough edges. 6 J U R. Conduit connected to rotating or vibrating equipment shall be flexible metal conduit or liquid 000 tight flexible conduit. co w J = S. Raceways and fittings installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall conform to NEC co u_ Article 500 requirements for the associated Class and Division. w 0 3.02 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM g D A. Provide distribution boxes where transitions are made from fixed raceways to the modular = C7 wiring system. Label distribution junction box with panelboard and circuit numbers. I- _ zI- B. Cable assemblies shall be connected horizontally to multi - purpose connectors. Support z O cable assemblies at intervals not to exceed 4 feet -6 inches on center or closer if required. IIJ w Provide dust caps on unused connector faces. m o 8 3.03 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS p H ww A. Install wireways above suspended ceilings such that cover will hinge upward from side. H o u_ i= B. Provide 12 inches clear from wireway cover when in open position. . z U= O z 3.04 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES A. Provide outlet, junction, and pull boxes as indicated and as required for a complete installation and to facilitate proper pulling of wires and cables. Boxes shall be sized per electrical code as minimum. Plug open knock outs. B. The exact location of outlets and equipment is governed by field conditions. Where necessary, relocate outlets so that fixtures and equipment are symmetrically located in accordance with the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment. Verify final location of outlets, fixtures, and equipment with Architect. C. Back -to -back outlets in the same wall, or "through -wall" type boxes are not permitted. Provided 12 inch minimum spacing for outlets shown on opposite side of a common wall. Provide acoustical potting compound on outlet boxes installed in private offices and conference rooms. D. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceilings or wall with appropriate covers, set flush with the finished surface. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use multiple gang boxes and covers. Provide tile box or a 4 inch square box with tile ring in masonry walls not plastered or furred. Where drywall material is utilized, provide plaster ring. Provide outlet boxes of type and size suitable for the specific application. Provide barriers where required for voltage or systems separation. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Raceways and Boxes 16110 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Where exposed to physical damage. 2. Indoors where exposed to moisture. 3. Where required by code. 4. Exposed indoor installations within 10 feet above finished floor. 5. Exposed outdoor installations. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing: D. UNISYS - Tukwila E. Provide pull boxes so that an individual run of conduit does not contain more than the equivalent of 4 ninety degree bends (360 degrees total). 3.05 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS z ku U CO Li. w O '. M g J . LL j : 1. General purpose feeders and branch circuits, except where another conduit type is N a specifically required. w z � ` Metal Clad Cable: Z 1. Use i n dry locations only concealed above suspended ceilings or within hollow W � . partitions for lighting and receptacle branch circuits (not permitted for circuit home D p 0 0 S p F- w � 1. Dry locations only. u z 2. Connections to lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings. H z 3. Connections to equipment installed suspended ceilings. H 4. Transformer connections. O 5. Connections to equipment where vibration isolation is needed. z 6. Maximum length shall be 6 feet. E. Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit: 1. Same as flexible steel conduit in damp or wet locations. 2. Motor connections. Rigid Non - metallic Conduit: 1. Underground duct banks. 2. Below slab on grade. 3. Embedded in floor slabs. Modular Wiring System: 1 • Non - emergency lighting system connection in accessible ceiling locations. G. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Flexible Steel Conduit: Raceways and Boxes 16110 -8 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Where indicated. F- 2. Above and below panelboards, lighting relay cabinets, and terminal cabinets to z Lu accommodate large concentrations of wires. 6 m' U O to O W w , A. Cast Type Boxes: -�; u) u.. 1. Where connected to rigid steel, intermediate metal, rigid aluminum conduit and liquid w 0 tight flexible conduit, 11/4 inches and smaller. M 2. Exposed conduit installations within 10 feet above finished floor.. g Q , 3. Where exposed to moisture and outdoors. co F Z O B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes: F- W Z ' 1. Where connected to electrical metallic tubing and flexible steel conduit, 1 inches Z O: and smaller. 11.1 ui 2. Dry locations. D o 3. Where concealed in walls and above suspended ceilings. 0 CP- o 1- . = U 1. Where connected to conduit larger than 1% inches. O . w z END OF SECTION V = _ O• Z 3.06 APPLICATION OF BOXES OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES C. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Sheet Steel Boxes: Raceways and Boxes 16110 -9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16120 600V WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide 600V wire and cable in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Rubber Insulated Wire and Cables: ICEA S- 19 -81, NEMA WC 3, and UL 44. B. Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables: ICEA S -61 -402, NEMA WC 3, and UL 83. Cross Linked Thermosetting Polythylene Insulated Wire and Cables: ICEA S -66 -524, NEMA WC 7, and UL 44. Service Entrance Cable: UL 854. E. Annealed Copper Wire for Conductors: ASTM B -3. F. Terminal Blocks: UL 1059. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE C. A. Wire and cable shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Field test reports. 1.05 FIELD TESTING A. Inspect splices and terminations and make mechanically and electrically tight during the fifteen day period immediately prior to final acceptance of the work. wi B. Feeder insulation shall be tested after installation, and before final connection. C. Demonstration: Subsequent to wire and cable installation and connection, energize circuits and demonstrate functioning in accordance with contract requirements. Correct deficiencies and retest to demonstrate compliance. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Tests shall be performed with a 500 volt megger, and conductors shall test free from short circuits and grounds. 2. Conductors shall be tested phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground. 3. Furnish the instruments, materials, and labor required. 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -1 Z v O co 0 W = J t— o L W O 2 u-Q ° 1- ZO w U o O D- o 1— W H H u- O W Z U N: 0 Z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Wire and Cable 1. C. Electrical Tape: 1. Insulating type, Johns - Manville or 3M. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE A. General 1. 600V minimum insulating rating. B. Conductor C. Stranding and Number of Conductors September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Anaconda, Brand -Rex, Collyer, Cyprus, General Cable, Hatfield, Houston, Kaiser, Kerite, National, Okonite, Rome, Simplex, or Triangle. Connectors Wire size number 14 through number 6: a. Hand applied: Piggy (Thomas & Betts), Scotchlock (3M), (Ideal). b. Tool applied: Burndy HYDENT or Thomas & Betts Stakon. Wire size number 4 through number 1: a. Tool applied: One hole compression type, Burndy HYLUG Betts 54000 Series. 3. Wire size number 1/0 through 1000 MCM: a. Tool applied: Two hole compression type, Burndy HYLUG Betts 54000 series. or Wing Nut or Thomas & or Thomas & 1. Electrical grade, annealed copper, tinned if rubber insulated, and fabricated in accordance with ASTM and ICEA standards. Minimum size number 12 for branch circuits; number 14 for control wiring. 2. Aluminum conductors are not permitted. 1. Number 12 and number 10 solid. 2. Larger than number 10, stranded ASTM Class B. . 3. Control wires stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding designations. 4. Cables for low voltage systems shall be multi conductor type unless otherwise noted. 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -2 • z re Lu J U; 0 0; mo w i 1- N LL w 0 u. I- Ill I- 0 Z f-. w 0 -. o 1-. w w _ 0 w Z 0 z Conductor 120/208V System 277/480V System Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Grey Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Green/Yellow Stripe Green/Yellow Stripe J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS D. Insulation 1. 600 volts, PVC insulation, nylon jacket, surface printed identification, listed as type THHN or THWN per UL 83. E. Color Coding September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Wiring shall be color coded as follows: UNISYS - Tukwila 2. Wire number 8 and smaller shall be factory color -coded the entire length. Wire number 6 and larger shall be color coded by color taping entire length of exposed conductor at all accessible locations. 3. Control wiring shall be color coded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Maximum of three branch circuits in one conduit unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide minimum number 10 wiring for 120 volt branch circuits exceeding 150 feet in length from panelboard to furthest outlet. Provide minimum number 10 wiring for 277 volt branch circuits exceeding 250 feet in length from panelboard to furthest outlet. C. Do not install wire until raceway systems are complete. D. Provide cable supports for vertical risers. E. Wire size shall be uniform for the entire length of the circuit unless noted otherwise. F. Do not splice feeders or dedicated branch circuits unless otherwise indicated. G. Make connections, splices, taps, and joints with solderless devices, mechanically and electrically secure. 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -3 6v 00 N0 • uj J H CO u. w 2 g Q _ Z � 1- 0 Z 1- w 2 • o O • N 0 1- ww 1- H z . w W . 0 H O z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila H. Lubricate cables to facilitate pulling. Lubrication material shall be inert to cable insulation and raceways. I. Install compression connectors with hydraulic die, embossing die code into connector. Connect to bus with Bellville type washers for positive pressure over complete contact area. Insulate with heat shrink tubing. J. Provide a separate neutral for dimmer branch circuits, ground fault interrupter branch circuits, and branch circuits serving isolated ground and isolated ground surge suppressor type receptacles. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Conductors.in underfloor electrical systems shall be number 10 AWG minimum. END OF SECTION 600V Wire and Cable 16120 -4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES z Z . PART 1 — GENERAL ct 2 1.01 DESCRIPTION U O co 0 A. Provide wiring devices in accordance with the Contract Documents. w = J F . 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE N LL wO A. Switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer. ga <' B. Occupancy sensors shall be certified for operation with specific ballasts utilized in controlled N d lighting fixtures. H = zI— C. Occupancy sensors shall have a minimum three year warranty. Z O' uw D. Equipment shall be certified for use in the State of Washington and shall meet the State 2 D . Energy Code and local energy ordinances. 0 O N: E. Coordinate service fittings with electrified furniture system supplier. o H _ wW v F. Floor boxes shall comply with UL scrub water tests for carpet, wood and tile floors. F=. — O. 1.03 STANDARDS kJ co I = 0 z A. Switches: Federal Specifications WS -896E. B. Receptacles: Federal Specification WC596 -D, NEMA WD -1, and UL 498. C. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles: UL 943 Class A. D. Wall Dimmers: ANSI C62.41, UL 20. E. Electrified furniture system supplier's requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data sheets. B. Occupancy sensor layout drawings, 1/16 inch scale, including interwiring of switchpacks and control devices. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Wiring Devices 16140 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.05 COLORS A. Device and coverplate colors shall be as selected by Architect. B. Switches and receptacles connected to the emergency power system shall be red. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Catalog numbers shall not be used to determine colors of devices and coverplates. Catalog numbers are used to establish minimum acceptable standard. B. Switches and Receptacles: Arrow Hart, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, or Slater. C. Wall Dimmers: Lightolier or Lutron. D. Occupancy Sensors: Mytech, Novitas, or Watt Stopper. E. Floor Boxes and Fittings: 1. Poke through type: Walker RCI. " 2. Recessed flush floor box type: Steel City or Walker. F. Plugstrip: Wiremold or Mono - systems, Inc. 2.02 SWITCHES A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Switches shall be �f the type indicated on the Drawings. 2. Switches shall be commercial specification grade, 20A, 120/277V, 1 HP rated at 120V, 2HP rated at 240V, back and side wired, silent handle operation. Lighting Switches: 1. Rocker handle type: a. Single pole: Leviton Decora 5621. b. Double pole: Leviton Decora 5622 -2. c. 3 way: Leviton Decora 5623. d. 4 way: Leviton Decora 5624 -2. Wiring Devices 16140 -2 s. n ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila C. Illuminated Handle Switches: 1. Rocker handle type: a. Single pole: Leviton Decora 5631. b. 3 way: Leviton Decora 5633. D. Transfer Fan Switches: 2.03 RECEPTACLES 1. Toggle handle type, single pole: Leviton 1221 -2, coverplate engraved FAN. 2. Rocker handle type, single pole: Leviton Decora 560.1 -2 engraved FAN. E. Weatherproof Switches: 1. Weatherproof handle / coverplate. F. Electronic Timer Switch 1. Five button time interval: 5, 10, 15 and 30 minutes plus OFF button. 2. Ratings: a. 1000W, 120VAC, incandescent. b. 20A, 120VAC, inductive. c. 1 HP, 120VAC, motor. 3. Leviton Decora 6230M. A. General: 1.. Receptacles shall be of the type indicated on the Drawings. 2. Receptacles shall be commercial specification grade, 125V, grounding type, back and side wired. B. Receptacles: 1. Designer style single, 15A: Leviton Decora 16251. 2. Designer style duplex, 15A: Leviton Decora 16252. 3. Designer style duplex, 20A: Leviton Decora 16352. C. Isolated Ground Receptacles: 1. Designer style duplex, 15A: Leviton Decora 16262 -IG. 2. Designer style duplex, 20A: Leviton Decora 16362 -IG. D. Isolated Ground Surge Suppressor Receptacles: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Duplex, 15A: Leviton 5280 -IG. 2. Duplex, 20A: Leviton 5380 -IG. Wiring Devices 16140 -3 z z QQ � J U U co o CO w J F co U. wO gQ d = W Z �± I- O Z ~ w Dp U 'O N w H r- u. - .z . W U � O z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 E. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles: 1. Duplex, 15A: Leviton 6598. 1 2. Duplex, 20A: Leviton 6898 -HGR. W F. Special purpose receptacles: Rating as indicated on the Drawings. G: Weatherproof Receptacles: moo w w Jam N LL wO H. Power Connection to Electrified Furniture System: 2 J u. 1. Single gang stainless steel coverplate with factory cut hole suitable for connection or O �w Z F- O Z I- A. Wall dimmers shall be suitable for control of the Toad type (incandescent, low voltage, or L . fluorescent), load capacity, and branch circuit voltage of the lighting fixtures controlled. m p 0 52 B. Thin profile, linear slide to off control, power failure memory, front accessible service switch. o 1- w uj C. Lightolier Sunrise /Momentum series or Lutron Nova T -Star thin profile series. i H - O iu A. Occupancy sensors shall be suitable for control of the load type (incandescent, low voltage, r" i = - or fluorescent), load capacity, and branch circuit voltage of the lighting fixtures controlled. z 1. Duplex, weatherproof coverplate with hinged door. WALL DIMMERS 2.05 OCCUPANCY SENSORS B. Ultrasonic, passive infrared, or dual technology type, user adjustable time delay and sensitivity settings. C. Wall Switch: D. Ceiling Mounted: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue electrified furniture system wiring whip. 1. Manual ON, manual OFF control switches. 2. Bypass override ON switch in the event of product failure. 3. 120/277V operation. 4. Mytech LP -2, Novitas Model 01 -211, or Watt Stopper WA -100. 1. One way type: M ytech ONMI -US series, Novitas Model 01 -100 series, or Watt Stopper WT -605. 2. Two way types: Mytech ONMI -US series, Novitas Model 01 -110 series, or Watt Stopper WT -1105. 3. Corridor type: Mytech ONMI -US 2000, Novitas Model 01 -180 (one way) and 01 -190 (two way) series, or Watt Stopper WT -2255. Wiring Devices 16140 -4 E. Switchpacks: j ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for wiring devices. Provide multiple gang coverplates where multiple devices are installed in a common location. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES Pushbutton: Glowing button, Leviton 9702. B. Buzzer: Leviton 602, provide transformer. C. Bell: Leviton 601, provide transformer. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue' 1. Provide switchpacks as required for circuiting and control as shown. 2. 120/277V operation. 3. Isolated 20A contacts. 4. Novitas Model 13 -031 series, Mytech MP series, or Watt Stopper B120/277E -P. 1. Verify the exact location of wiring devices with Architect. 2. Devices mounted above counters shall be 2 inches above the top of the backsplash to the bottom of the coverplate. 3. Provide a number 12 grounding conductor from the device grounding terminal to the panelboard ground bus. Bond wiring device to outlet box. 4. Switches that control devices that are connected to the emergency power system shall be the illuminated handle type. 5. Connect electrified furniture system wiring whip to power outlet. Switches: 1. Mount switches vertically with the ON position on top. 2. Mount switches on the strike side of doors. 3. Provide rocker handle type lighting switches in all areas. C. Receptacles: 1. Mount receptacles vertically with the grounding pin on bottom. 2. Provide designer style type duplex receptacles to match rocker handle type lighting switches in all areas. Wiring Devices 16140 -5 z Q w 1 v c.) 0, co o w= J H N w 2 J u_ ? . � v w z �..: I- 0 Z Lu U � O —. O 1- . W W - U U. � O w z - • = 0~ z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Occupancy Sensors: E. Coverplates: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Range and coverage of occupancy sensors may vary from one manufacturer to another. Occupancy sensors on drawings show general placement and zoning intent only. Provide additional occupancy sensors to ensure complete room coverage in accordance with manufacturer's coverage and orientation requirements. Where two or more occupancy sensors are indicated within a room or space, they shall be arranged so that the coverage overlaps an adjacent sensor's coverage by not Tess than 25 %. 2. Provide occupancy sensors with minimum and maximum load specifications appropriate to the Toad controlled. 1. Install device plates in full contact with wall surface. Plates shall not project out from the wall. 2. Coverplates for multiple gang wall dimmers shall be continuous flush type tailored to match wall dimmer physical dimensions. 3. Provide thermoplastic, smooth face coverplates in all areas. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices 16140 -6 �.K ,.J • ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1.03 STANDARDS SECTION 16200 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM A. Provide engine generator system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related work specified in other divisions of these specifications: 1. Main fuel oil tank and fuel oil day tank(s). 2. Fuel oil pumping and transfer pump system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment supplier shall have local representation and shall have been actively engaged in installation and service of generator sets and automatic transfer switches for a period of not less than 10 years. Equipment suppliers shall have full parts backup and 24 hour per day service availability for this equipment. The generator set supplier shall review the fuel system design and certify that the installation meets the engine manufacturer's requirements and will allow for proper operation of the generator set at full rated Toad. A. Alternator: 1. ASTM D396. 2. NEMA MG -1 -22. B. Battery Charger: 1. UL 1236. C. Transfer Switches: 1. UL 508 and 1008. 2. NFPA 101. D. Engine Generator: 1. Local Air Quality Management District. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila E. General System Design installation and Testing: z 1. NFPA 110. ,= Z �w F. Testing: 6 D JU 00 . 1. NETA. to o iu 1.04 LOCATION CRITERIA 1- N u_ w0 1. Altitude: 500 feet above sea level. 2. Seismic: UBC Zone 3. 5 u. < 1.05 SUBMITTALS t/1 m H w A. Detailed drawing of the engine generator set with dimensioned locations of components and ,�_ z H external connections and attachments. Indicate position of radiator and direction of air F- 0 movement. z 1— ta a l B. Engine manufacturer's specifications, performance data, certified power outlet curves, and v 0 certified fuel consumption curves. 0 H C. Calculations c ertifying t hat t he n et e ngine h orsepower i s equal t o o r g reater t han 1.45 z v uj horsepower per kilowatt Tess parasitic loads at specified ambient conditions with engine 1— u_ O F= manufacturer's supporting data. z Iii N D. Exhaust system back pressure calculations certifying that the engine exhaust system with H = proposed silencer and piping as indicated on the mechanical drawings for this installation is 0 i— within the manufacturer's criteria. E. Starting battery sizing calculations showing compliance with specifications at ambient conditions. F. Drawing showing battery cell and'jar connections. G. Certified vibration isolation details and product data showing the number and location of each support and the exact number, size, and type of each anchor. Submit for engine generator set, exhaust silencer, day tank, and battery rack. H. Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and wiring diagrams for each engine generator system component. I. Detailed point -to -point wiring diagrams. J. Manufacturer's statement that the overall system design and specification has been reviewed and is satisfactory for system performance or list of exceptions. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Engine Generator System 16200 -2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 1.06 K. After the engine generator system is accepted, submit a completed permit application for the Z local Air Quality Management District, ready for submission by the Owner. ,_- Z tu L. Manufacturer's product data sheets, performance data, detailed layout drawings, and control 6 = a nd wiring diagrams for the automatic transfer switches. 0 U O co o M. Name and location of factory authorized service agency to approve and start up installation. w w J = H N. Name and location of factory authorized service agency to perform warranty and service N LL w work. 2 O. Name and location of certified testing agency to perform field- testing. u_ _ Co P. Certified prototype, factory, and field test reports. w Z = H O Z H w uj D p 1. Factory tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer. o 2. Owner's representatives may elect to witness factory testing. Provide 14 day advance notification. x V 3. Test alarm points. 4. Test shut -down points. O . 5. 4 hour, 100% resistive and reactive Toad test at full rated Toad and power factor. w N a. Monitor voltage stability. = F- b. Monitor frequency stability. 0 F. c. Apply and remove load in 25% increments. Z 6. Oscillograph chart recordings of voltage and frequency of generator set transient performance for 100% step load addition and subtraction indicating compliance with specifications. 7. Equipment shall be Prototype Test Supported certified. SYSTEM TESTING A. Factory Tests: B. Field Tests: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Field tests shall be conducted by factory certified technicians. 2. Field inspection and testing shall occur after installation is complete and the room is secure. 3. Test transfer switches, engine start circuits, time delay circuits, status points, and system control points. 4. Perform 4 hour 100% full resistive load test using a temporary load bank. Unsuccessful tests shall be fully documented, submitted, and re- tested until successful. 1.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The engine generator set supplier shall provide a minimum off our h ours of o perating instructions on maintenance and operation of the emergency power system. Classes shall be open up to three representatives of the Owner's maintenance staff. Instructions shall be administered by a full time employee of the supplier. Engine Generator System 16200 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS z A. Diesel Engine: Caterpillar, Onan, Detroit Diesel, Kohler . 4-- W B. Radiator: Modine, Perfex, or Young. 6 v 00 C. Exhaust Silencer: Cowl, Maxim, or Nelson. co ui D. Vibration Isolators: Mason Industries or Vibration Eliminator. -3 1.' CO O E. Batteries: C & D, Exide, or Nife. 2 F. Battery Charger: LaMarche, Onan, or Sens. G. Generator: Caterpillar, Kato, Marathon, or Onan. H w 2� H. Govemor: Woodward. Z O • w I. Voltage Regulator: Basler or Stanford - Newage. v o J. Circuit Breakers: Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D /Groupe Schneider. p H w — K. Load Bank: Avtron, Loadtec, or Simplex. �_.. V w H 2.02 ENGINE ti. z UN A. The engine shall run on number 2 diesel fuel, 1800 RPM, compression ignition type, four H stroke- cycle, water cooled, solid injection, either vertical in -line or vee configuration. B. The net brake horsepower of the engine at rated operating speed shall be not less than 1.45 times the rated standby electric kilowatt rating of the engine generator. Net brake horsepower is defined as the horsepower that the fully derated bare engine can deliver less all parasitic loads. C. Fuel consumption of the engine generator shall be substantiated by means of manufacturer's certified curves. D. The engine shall be equipped with an electronic governor to maintain engine speed within specified limits. G overnor s hall b e a djustable f rom i sochronous t o f ive p ercent d roop. Frequency shall be factory set at rated frequency. E. Engine safety devices, including high water temperature switch, overspeed sensing switch, low oil pressure switch, low water temperature switch, and other required devices, shall be mounted on the engine and connected to the control and status panel instruments and alarms as specified herein. F. Engine wiring shall be industrial quality, heat resistant, insulated, copper conductors. Wiring shall be protected and shall be isolated from high temperature engine parts. Wiring for alternating current power circuits shall installed in conduit. September 30, 2003 Engine Generator System Permit Issue 16200 -4 2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM A. Provide an engine mounted electric starting motor with solenoid and over - running clutch drive. The starting motor shall be of the required voltage and ampere rating. B. Provide a system of lead calcium batteries sized such that the engine generator set may complete four, sixty- second complete cranking cycles at firing speed and specified room temperature. Provide a seismic rack and cables of sufficient ampacity. C. Provide a wall mounted 120V AC battery charger which shall recharge battery to full capacity within eight hours. Battery charger shall have both a high rate and float rate charging system. The battery charger shall be current limiting and shall not require cranking cutout contacts for charger protection when cranking. Accessories shall include: DC ammeter, fused input, DC voltmeter, high /low DC output voltage relay, and input voltage failure relay. Battery charger output shall be rated ten amperes minimum at required voltage. Controls to adjust both the float and equalize voltage shall be located on the front of the charger. Charger current level shall automatically drop to a sufficiently low level to eliminate overcharging of the batteries. D. The entire electric starting system shall be rated for 24 or 32V DC operation as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 ENGINE HEATING SYSTEM A. Provide jacket water heaters sized to insure that engine will start within the specified time period and ambient conditions. Provide thermostats, oil pressure disconnecting device, and required connection boxes. B. Provide branch circuit wiring in conduit from panelboard to jacket water heaters. Circuit breakers shall have the appropriate ampere and pole configuration to suit the selected jacket water heaters. 2.05 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM A. The engine shall be liquid cooled by means of an engine mounted vertical core radiator. The radiator shall be adequately sized to cool the engine on a continuous basis at the maximum ambient temperature and altitude specified. The radiator and fan shall be designed to properly cool the generator set with external static restraint of up to 0.5 inches H Provide suitable expansion space by means of either a surge tank or radiator top tank. Provide an engine driven propeller type fan. Engine coolant shall be a mixture of fifty percent ethylene glycol based antifreeze and fifty percent water. Provide duct adapter flange for flex connection to the exhaust outlet provided by others. I B. The engine shall be equipped with a centrifugal type water - circulating pump and thermostat 1 valve to maintain the engine at recommended temperature level. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.06 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM Z 11 A. Provide an air cleaner /silencer as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Air cleaners } w shall be dry type with replaceable elements. re i0 B. Engine exhaust outlets shall be coupled to the exhaust silencer(s) by means of an adequately v O sized section of stainless corrugated flex. Flex connector(s) shall be flanged at both ends for u) w mating to the engine and exhaust system. w _ H co u_ C. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be critical grade. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be sized to limit exhaust w O back pressure to acceptable values. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be suitable for horizontal 2 mounting, equipped with flanged bottom inlet and flanged end outlet. The exhaust silencer(s) 1 shall be double wall construction and shall have a high temperature anti - corrosion coating D applied uniformly on the outside surface. = v �w 2.07 FUEL SYSTEM Z F- O ZF- A. Fuel lines between injection pumps and valves shall be heavy seamless tubing. al Lu U housing ahead of the injection pumps. p H Ili w C. Provide an engine driven fuel transfer pump. H 0 tr_O 2.08 ALTERNATOR Z B. Provide fuel filters with replaceable elements. Fuel filters shall be located in an accessible iii 0— A. Engine generator set shall be rated 277/480V, wye connected, three phase, four wire, 60 = H Hertz, 0.8 power factor, kilowatt capacity as indicated on the Drawings. Z B. The alternator shall be four pole, synchronous brushless type. The alternator shall be single bearing type coupled directly to the engine flywheel by means of a flexible disc coupling. C. The alternator voltage regulator shall be solid type, three phase sensing and shall incorporate an underfrequency protective circuit to limit generator excitation at lower than normal operating speeds. The voltage regulator shall be equipped with a voltage adjusting rheostat capable of plus or minus five percent rated voltage adjustment. The voltage regulator shall maintain the voltage within the limits specified. D. The alternator insulation system shall be NEMA Class H and shall be a combination of epoxy coating and varnish. The alternator shall be sized and properly derated according to NEMA MG1 -22 -1975 to yield a maximum temperature rise of 80 degrees centigrade by resistance above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees centigrade at rated altitude and load. E. Excitation shall be provided by a direct connected brushless permanent magnetic rotating exciter. The alternator shall be of the three -phase design and connected to a full wave three phase rotating bridge. Diodes used shall be of the silicon type mounted on proper heat sinks with surge protector. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. Exciter field power shall be provided by a separate permanent magnet generator directly connected to the brushless exciter. The PMG shall provide sufficient power to the excitation system to produce 300% current from the main operator armature during a three phase fault with sufficient duration for protective devices to operate. 2.09 CONTROL AND STATUS PANELS A. General: B. Main Control and Status Panel: C. Remote Control and Status Panels: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Provide an audible alarm signal, silence switch, and Tamp test button on each control and status panel. 'Provide power for alarm system from generator battery system. 2. Upon alarm activation, sound the audible alarm signal and indicate, by means of individual lights at annunciator panels, which particular malfunction is initiating the alarm. Provide 3/16 inch high (minimum) labeling to identify the alarm. 1. Provide a main control and status panel for each engine generator set. Panel shall be hinged door, mounted on the engine generator set with vibration isolators. 2. Main line circuit breaker. The breaker shall have a solid state trip unit with true RMS current sensing. Circuit breaker shall be 100% continuous rated. The circuit breaker shall be provided with a DPDT auxiliary contact to provide a supervisory indication should the breaker be in the off or tripped position. 3. AC ammeter, 3'/2 inches, 2 percent accuracy, red line at maximum output of generator. 4. AC voltmeter, 3 inches, 2 percent accuracy, red line at 480 volts. 5. Ammeter, voltmeter selector switch. 6. Frequency meter, 3 inch dial type, 2 percent accuracy. 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge. 8. Engine oil pressure gauge. 9. Control and status points as specified under remote control and status panels. 1. Provide two remote control and status panels per engine generator set. Locate one in the Engineer's Control Center and one in the Fire Control Center. Provide control and status points as required by NFPA 110 for level 1 systems and as specified herein. Provide separate switch status points for each transfer switch. Engine Generator System 16200 -7 • Condition Engine Generator Control & Status Panel Fire Control Center Remote Control & Status Panel Engineer's Control Center Control & Status Panel I Engine Shut Down High Coolant Temperature Alarm Alarm Alarm Yes Approach to High Coolant Temperature Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Coolant Temperature Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Coolant Level Alarm Alarm Alarm No Overspeed Alarm Alarm Alarm Yes Low Oil Pressure Alarm Alarm Alarm Yes Cranking Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Battery Voltage Alarm Alarm Alarm No Battery Charier Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Fuel Day Tank Alarm Alarm Alarm No Low Fuel Main Tank Alarm Alarm Alarm No Main Circuit Breaker Open or Tripped Alarm Alarm Alarm No Main Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Alarm Alarm Alarm No Load Bank Cooling Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm No Generator Running Indication Yes Yes Yes NA System Ready indication Yes Yes Yes NA Generator Start/Stop Switch Yes No Key Switch NA Transfer Switch Not in Automatic Mode (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Connected to Normal Source (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Connected to Emergency Source (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Emergency Source Available (One per Transfer Switch) Yes Yes Yes No Transfer Switch Normal Source Available (One per Transfer Switch) Yes _ Yes e Yes No ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 2. Provide control and status points as follows: UNISYS - Tukwila Engine Generator System 16200 -8 z w t � -J C.) 00 U o CO ILI J CO U- lu 0 2 g T° w z � 1- O z 1- w U O N OH w O .. z w z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.10 ENGINE GENERATOR SET PERFORMANCE Z A. The engine generator set shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: ; i— w CG 1. Voltage regulation: ± 1 percent from 0 to 100% load. 6 v 2. Steady state voltage stability: ± 0.5 percent rated voltage. 0 0 3. Balanced telephone interference factor (TIF) shall not exceed 50. to 0 4. Frequency regulation from no Toad to full load: ± 1.00 percent. w w 5. Steady state frequency stability shall be ± 0.25 percent. -J 1.- 6. Generator set shall be capable of start-up and accepting rated load within 10 uj 0 seconds. 2 7. Maximum frequency change on application change on application or removal of 1 00% rated load resistive and reactive load shall not exceed ± 5.0 percent. u- 8. Maximum recovery time to return to frequency stability bandwidth shall not exceed 4 N d seconds. H w 9. Maximum voltage dip with step application of load up to 100% rated capacity at 0.8 Z H power factor shall not exceed 30 percent. F- 0 10. Voltage recovery time with step application of load up to 100% rated capacity at 0.8 w f-' power factor shall not exceed ± 1% voltage within 4.0 seconds. ? Q 0 O N 0E- A. The engine generator set and related equipment shall be housed in a factory fabricated = v outdoor weatherproof enclosure. The design and placement shall be such that the generator O will function properly without overheating in the ambient conditions specified. — Z w u) B. Enclosure shall be of the walk -in, floorless, drop over type secured to an approved reinforced H = concrete foundation via iron angle frame. The enclosure shall be of sufficient size and 0 H volume to accommodate acoustical attenuation and vibration isolation equipment. Z 2.11 WEATHERPROOF HOUSING C. Roof shall be pitched for drainage and overlapping on all sides. Exhaust pipe opening shall be fitted watertight sealing material. Provide a drip shield around the exhaust pipe opening. D. Doors shall be gasketed and mounted on piano type hinges. Provide a key lock for each door. E. Fixed storm proof louvers shall be provided to allow the engine generator set to operate at the project location at rated conditions with all enclosure doors closed. F. Provide an internal fluorescent lighting system with on /off switch and standby batteries. Circuit illumination sources to an emergency power system panelboard. G. Enclosure shall be of sufficient size to allow for code required clearances and maintenance. H. Exhaust silencer shall be mounted above roof of enclosure. Silencer shall be painted with heat and weather resistant paint. Provide a bird screen at the end port. All exterior surfaces shall be factory painted. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila J. Unit shall have sufficient guards to prevent entrance by small animals. K. Batteries to fit inside enclosure and along side the engine (batteries shall not be installed W under the generator). 6 D JU L. Unit shall have coolant and oil drains outside the unit to facilitate maintenance. Provide a N p valve located near the fluid source. w W I J F- M . Fuel filter shall be mounted inside the base perimeter and located so that spilled fuel cannot co u_ fall on hot parts of the engine or generator. Provide a cleanable primary fuel strainer to W 0 collect water and sediment between tank and main engine fuel filter. 2 J N. Crankcase fumes disposal shall terminate in front of the radiator to prevent oil from collecting co a on the radiator core and reducing cooling capacity. H W —? H F-O zF- A. Installation shall be in accordance with approved vibration isolation and seismic restraint W W 0 ON 0 I- W W C. Raceway connections to unit shall be in liquid tight flexible metal conduit. H H -O 2.13 LOAD BANK i z u = A. Provide an engine radiator mounted airflow cooled permanent resistive Toad bank. Load p ' bank shall be for local manual operation. 2.12 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS submittal. B. Fuel oil and coolant lines shall be flexible braided bronze hoses. B. The Toad bank shall be installed within the air discharge of the engine unit mounted radiator and cooled by the radiator airflow. Load bank shall be solidly attached to radiator and provided with a flexible coupling to attach to the discharge plenum. C. Load bank shall be rated 50% of the full KW Toad. A separate load bank feeder breaker and feeder shall be provided in the generator terminal compartment. E. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1, galvanized steel construction. Control components shall be subpanel mounted and isolated from Toad elements and cooling airflow. Airflow through Toad elements shall be horizontal. Provide mounting adapters suitable for the installation method. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue The Toad bank shall be completely self contained, including resistive Toad elements, load control devices, Toad element branch circuit fuse protection, main Toad bus and terminals, control terminals, system protection devices and enclosure. Engine Generator System 16200 -10 z F. Load elements shall be totally enclosed, sealed and weatherproof with an electrically z ~; grounded outer sheath such that the element cannot be electrically short- circuited by external 4- z foreign objects and personnel are protected against accidental electrical shock. Elements o: .c shall be individually replaceable. 6 5 JU UO . G. Provide branch circuit fuses for each 50KW load branch circuit. Fuses shall be 200,000 RMS to o symmetrical amperes, current limiting type. w = I Lii J ~ H. Load step control shall utilize one magnetic contactor per each fused branch circuit. Load N w O bank power wiring shall be 150 °C insulated. 2 I. Main terminals shall be copper sized at 1000A per square inch. J Control power shall be derived intemally from the main load bus. Control and protective w circuits shall operate at 220V using a control power transformer. z H i- O K. The load bank shall include a protection system to protect against overheating. The system w ui shall disconnect the load elements from the power source and activate an alarm upon j sensing a loss of cooling airflow or an exhaust air temperature greater than 300 °F. U O P o1- w w _ y 1 . NEMA 1 enclosure. ~ H L I O 2. Control power on -off pushbuttons. z ui 3. NORMAL OPERATION indicator lamp. v = i 4. Master load control switch. H F- 5. Load step control switches. 0 6. COOLING FAILURE alarm indicator lamp with alarm contacts. z 7. Load bank disconnect circuit to disconnect load bank on engine start signal. 8. Load bank disconnect circuit bypass to allow the load bank to supplement the actual building load. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila L. 2.14. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Automatic transfer switches shall be capable of switching all classes of Toad and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a non - ventilated enclosure. B. Switches on 3 wire systems shall be 3 pole. Switches on 4 wire systems shall be 4 pole. C. Four pole switches shall have all 4 poles connected to a common shaft, or may be provided with overlapping neutral contacts. D. The transfer switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70 percent of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals. E. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized to minimize power consumption and heat generation. The operating transfer time shall be 1/6 of a second maximum. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Control Panel: Engine Generator System 16200 -11 Automatic Transfer Switch Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker Rating Current Limiting Fuse Rating Up to 30 10,000 100,000 31 -70 22,000 200,000 71 -150 30,000 200,000 151 -800 50,000 200,000 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila F. The use of molded case circuit breakers, contactors, or other components not rated for continuous duty, repetitive switching, or transfer between two active power sources is not acceptable. G. Transfer switches shall be switchboard mounted or mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures as indicated on the Drawings. Switchboard mounted the automatic transfer switches shall be furnished without enclosure to the switchboard manufacturer. Enclosure shall be an integral part of the switchboard and fabricated by the switchboard manufacturer. Connections to other switchboard components shall be bus connected. H. The entire transfer switch and relay plate assembly shall be capable of withstanding a 2500 volt crest transient per IEEE Standard 472 -1974. The transient voltage test shall be conducted across the normal source terminals, the emergency source terminals, and between adjacent normal and emergency source terminals. Minimum withstand and close -in ratings shall be as follows (ratings shall be higher where indicated on the Drawings): I. Provide in line current limiting fuse protection within transfer switch where required to meet short circuit withstanding ratings. J. Transfer switch shall have a field adjustable programmed delay in the neutral position when transferring between live sources. In -phase monitor system is not permitted. 2.15 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES A. Close differential solid state adjustable voltage sensing on all phases of normal source: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Set drop -out at 80% rated voltage. 2. Set pick -up at 90% rated voltage. B. Three phase voltage sensing of emergency source: 1. Set pick -up at 90% rated voltage. 2. Set drop -out at 80% rated voltage. C. Frequency sensing of emergency source: 1. Pick -up field adjustable from 90 to 100 %. Factory set at 95 %. Engine Generator System 16200 -12 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila J. D. Time delay on engine start: Z 1. Field adjustable from 0.5 to 3 seconds. Factory set at 1 second. .j- z w re E. Time delay on re- transfer to normal: 6 m J U UO 1. Field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. Factory set at 10 minutes. co W 2. Immediate bypass of time delay and transfer to normal source if emergency source w = fails. -... F-, CO u- w F. Time delay on transfer to emergency: 2 1. Field adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Set at 0 seconds. u N a G. Time delay between live sources adjustable from 0.4 to 2.0 seconds. Factory set at 1 = w' ~_ z H I- H. Unload engine run cool down time delay: w I-- D p '. 1. Field adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes. Factory set at 5 minutes. U ,O F I. Engine start contacts: 0 H. w w 1. SPDT to operate upon failure of normal source. F' u- w Z 0 = O z second. Test switch: 1. Mounted on enclosure door. 2. Simulates failure /return of normal source. K.. Auxiliary contacts: 1. Provide 2 sets SPDT contacts to operate with switch in normal position. 2. Provide 2 sets SPDT contacts to operate with switch in emergency position. 3. Contacts shall be exclusive customer use and not utilized for any other ATS or generator system functions. . 4. Contacts shall be 120V AC, 10 amp rated minimum wired to a terminal strip and labeled. L. Indicating lights: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Mounted on enclosure door. 2. Red indicates switch in emergency position. 3. Green indicates switch in normal position. 4. White to indicate normal source available. 5. White to indicate emergency source available. Engine Generator System 16200 -13 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila M. Pre - transfer contacts: z 1. Provide a contact closure for elevator controls prior to transfer between live sources = t` in either direction. Interval shall be adjustable from 0 to 30 seconds. Contacts shall 4— w r4 be rated SPDT 120V AC, 10 amps. N. Exerciser clock. 0 0 w . O. Service manual and wiring diagram shall be supplied inside of enclosure when shipped. .�, � � Control wiring shall be labeled to correspond with wiring diagram. co u_ w 0 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION g Q N 3 = 0 Fw A. Provide all necessary wiring and conduit to each remote alarm panel. z F F- O z H B. Position the generator to allow adequate ventilation over engine block and through the LU uj radiator and to prevent short- circuiting of radiator discharge air back to engine and radiator - 2 0 intake. 0 N 01— C. Provide 220V branch circuit and circuit breaker and connection to batter charger and day W w tank. Connect to emergency power supply. H H u_ O D. Provide 220V branch circuit and circuit breaker and connection to jacket water heater. ill Z Connect to normal power supply. 3.01 GENERAL 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Engine start contacts shall signal generator to start when the voltage of the normal source drops below 80% on any phase, after a time delay of 1 second to allow for momentary dips. The voltage sensing relays shall be field adjustable while energized. B. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when 90% of rated voltage, and frequency of the emergency source have been reached. The maximum time interval from onset of power failure and transfer to emergency shall not exceed ten seconds. C. After restoration of normal power on all phases to 90% of rated voltage, an adjustable time delay period shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall bypass the timing relay and transfer to the normal source. D. After retransfer to normal, the engine - generator shall be allowed to operated at no load for 5 minutes. E. A test on the transfer switch shall simulate normal power failure. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Engine Generator System 16200 -14 0— — 0 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 3.03 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide a 6 inch high concrete housekeeping pad beneath each generator. B. Provide a concrete curb under each door of the generator room to prevent migration of spilled liquids out of the room. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Engine Generator System 16200 -15 -- 1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide switchboards in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Switchboards include both main switchboards and distribution switchboards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. , Utility company approval of incoming section, and metering provisions. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Switchboards: SECTION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS C. One line diagram showing electrical ratings, overcurrent protection device ratings, cable lugs, utility company metering, metering displays, identification nameplate, and fuse clip sizes. Utility company approval for components subject to their specifications. D. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. NEMA PB -2. 2. UL 891. 3. UL service entrance label. Overcurrent Protection Devices: 1. Circuit breakers: NEMA AB -1, Federal Specification W -C -375 B /GEN, UL 489. C. Testing: 1. NETA. D. Utility company requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data sheets for overcurrent protection devices. B. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing switchboards, housekeeping pads, and support locations and types. Wiring diagrams. F. Installation instructions. Switchboards 16425 -1 re LI -1 C.) U O w w J U) LL w O g 5 u- <. = w F- _ z F I o w uj U � O N: � H w H .= IL. O . ..z w O z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Short circuit and coordination study. H. Certified test reports. _. z I. Seismic restraint calculations. ,F - w 1.05 FIELD TESTING m JU 0 A. Field inspection and testing shall occur after installation is complete, feeders are terminated, N co and the room is secure. Testing shall be conducted not more than 4 weeks before ..-, _ equipment is energized. co u_ w B. Testing Scope: 2 u. c w Z �. HO Z 1 1. Visual and physical inspection of equipment. 2. Check control wiring and metering. 3. Meter calibration. 4. Ground fault protection. 5. Adjust circuit breaker settings based on recommendations in the short circuit and coordination study. 6. Primary current injection testing of circuit breakers. 7. System grounding. C. Certified Test Reports: 1.06 IDENTIFICATION 1. Field testing shall be performed by a NETA certified, independent third party testing agency: Apparatus Unlimited, Electro -Test, Power Systems Testing, or approved equal. 2. Verify that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Verify that the equipment has been fully tested and is operational. 4. Perform testing and compile detailed test reports for each switchboard and overcurrent protection device. A. Provide a n identification n ameplate for each switchboard, each main, and each feeder overcurrent protection device. 1.07 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY A. Prepare a short circuit and coordination study based on the actual overcurrent protection devices proposed for use and the actual conductor sizes and lengths. The study shall be prepared by an Electrical Engineer licensed in the State of the Project. B. The study shall be submitted with the distribution equipment submittal and shall indicate where device substitutions are being made in order to achieve adequate interrupting capacity ratings for each piece of equipment. C. The study shall include recommended settings of adjustable overcurrent and ground fault settings. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -2 • Z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Provide overcurrent protective devices of suitable type and rating to meet or exceed the available short circuit currents indicated in the short circuit study. Circuit breakers protecting elevators, including all upstream feeder circuit breakers, shall be of the appropriate frame size to ensure 100% selectivity in the instantaneous region of the trip curves at the calculated fault current. PART 2 — PRODUCTS E. Interrupting capacities shall be based on a fully rated protection system where all overcurrent protection devices are rated for the full prospective short circuit current (as indicated in the final short circuit submittal). Series rated panelboards are not permitted. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. 2.02 RATINGS A. Switchboards shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on the Drawings. B. Switchboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating as specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings. D. Distribution Switchboards: September 30, 2003 Permit issue Obtain from the utility company (and confirm in writing) the short circuit current available at the utility company's transformer secondary. Main Switchboards: 1. Main switchboards are identified with the designation MS as shown on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 48 inches wide by 60 inches deep per section. 3. Main switchboards — circuit breaker type: 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. Main switchboards — switch and fuse type: 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 1. Distribution switchboards are identified with the designation DSL (120/208V or 208V) or DSH (277/480V or 480V) as shown on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 36 inches wide by 24 inches deep per section. 3. Distribution switchboards (DSL): 42,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. Distribution switchboards — circuit breaker type (DSH): 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 5. Distribution switchboards — switch and fuse type (DSH): 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. Switchboards 16425 -3 z z ce 6 0 0 co 0 W J u- ' w u . ~ _ z ,- z O O N 0H w w 1-r U. lll O ~ z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Main switchboards shall be front accessible, with group- mounted main and feeder overcurrent protection devices of the number, rating, and arrangement as shown on the Drawings. Vertical sections shall be rear aligned. B. Distribution switchboards shall be front accessible, with group- mounted main and feeder overcurrent protection devices of the number, rating, and arrangement as shown on the Drawings. C. Switchboards shall be completely self- supporting structures of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a single metal enclosed switchboard. Sides, top and rear covers shall be code gauge steel, bolted to the switchboard structure. The frame structure members shall be die - formed, 12 gauge steel bolted together and reinforced at corners with rugged gussets internal and external to the switchboard members. Switchboards shall be provided with adequate lifting means, and be capable of being rolled or moved into position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills. E. Steel surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated, providing a bond between paint and metal surfaces to prevent the entrance of moisture and formation of rust under the paint finish. Finish shall be ANSI -61 grey enamel paint. F. Space f or f uture d evices s hall i nclude a II necessary bus, overcurrent protection device supports and mounting, and connections. G. Switchboards enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1 where installed indoors. Switchboards enclosures shall be NEMA Type 3R where installed outdoors. Switchboard sections shall be aligned on top, 90 inches high, unless lower height is required due to space limitations. H Where required for conduit terminations, provide pull box on top of switchboard of same type of construction and finish as the switchboard. I. Where draw out type overcurrent protection devices are provided, provide a traveling type lifter, rail mounted on top of the switchboard. 2.04 BUS SYSTEM A. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout A -B -C left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear. Bus bars shall be permanently labeled by phase. Bus joints shall be bolted with high tensile zinc plated steel bolts with spring loaded Bellville type washers. B. Bus bars shall be plated copper or aluminum based on ANSI standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). In addition to full UL air clearances, bus shall be insulated with a minimum of 5 mil thickness of epoxy resin coating. Provide removable non -PVC boots for access to the cross bus joints for inspection and maintenance. C. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating (continuous) shown on the Drawings. Neutral bus shall be full size. Provide a 33% minimum copper ground bus, extending along the full length of the switchboard. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -4 1 ' l ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt holes drilled and tapped for future extension at the end of bus bars including neutral and ground bus so that the addition of a future section would require only the installation of standard bolted splice plates. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES A. General: 1. Feeder overcurrent protection devices shall be bus connected on the line side. 2. Overcurrent protection devices shall have an external operating handle located on the front door. 3. Stationary or draw out type construction as shown on the Drawings. B. Overcurrent protection device types: 1. Main switchboards: Insulated case circuit breakers. 2. Distribution Switchboards (DSL): Molded case circuit breakers. 3. Distribution Switchboards (DSH): Fusible switch units or molded case circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings. C. Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Stored energy charging mechanism and independent close and trip functions. 2. High interrupting capacity disconnect with electric trip for remote tripping or ground fault protection. 3. Breaker compartment interlocked to prevent access when breaker is closed. 4. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. 5. Positive ON /OFF indicators, green for OFF, red for ON. 6. Provide integral residual sensing ground fault protection for main and feeder devices. Set each ground fault sensor pick up setting at 25 percent of the rating of overcurrent protection device with a 6 -cycle time delay or as specifically indicated in the final short circuit and coordination study submittal. 7. UL listed for continuous operation at 100% rated Toad. 8. Auxiliary switches for remote indication of breaker ON /OFF status. 9. Microelectronic d igital processor based true RMS trip unit with interchangeable ratings plugs to change the continuous current rating. Provide a hand held, portable plug in test kit for testing and verifying programmer settings. Provide the following functions: a. Current setting adjustment (long delay pick -up). b. Long -time delay adjustment. c. Short-time pick -up adjustment. d. Short-time delay adjustment. e. Instantaneous pick -up adjustment. f. 1 -In- Out - adjustment. g. Ground -fault pick -up adjustment. h. Ground -fault delay adjustment. Switchboards 16425-5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila D. Fusible Switch Units: _ z 1. Quick -make, quick- break, dead -front type. Each switch shall be a self- contained 1 unit, externally operated from the front. w 2. Fuse a nd s witch c ompartment w ith d efeatable interlock to prevent access with re 2 switch in the 'ON' position. U a 3 Switches shall be equipped with rejection type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up N o. to 600A, suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. 4. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. _ F N w E. Molded case circuit breakers: Lu 0 1. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and g a ON /OFF indication clearly visible. u. d 2. Thermal- magnetic trip -free, trip- indicating, quick -make, quick- break, with inverse _ time characteristic. Single- handle and common tripping on multipole breakers. - -„ I- _ External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. ? ~ 3. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc - quenching devices. I- O z F- 4. Provide main breakers in switchboards served from transformers. w w 5. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 120V AC coils. U D O 92 OH Ill A. Ground fault protection shall be provided where specified and on service disconnect switches H U .. rated 1000 amperes or more as required by the NEC. ~O Z B. Settings: Set each ground fault sensor pick up setting at 25 percent of the rating of U co; overcurrent device with a 6 -cycle time delay unless specifically indicated otherwise in the final r~ H short circuit and coordination study submittal. O z 2.06 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION 2.07 UTILITY METERING A. Provide utility metering cubicle(s) in accordance with the requirements of the serving utility company. 2.08. METERING DISPLAY A. Provide an electronic digital true RMS sensing metering display for each main switchboard main. The display shall indicate voltage (each phase to each phase and each phase to neutral, amps (each phase), watts, vars, power factor, frequency, watt demand, and watt hours. Display shall be positioned not lower than 48 inches or higher than 72 inches above the finished floor. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -6 l • .J J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z �_ c ut 3.01 GENERAL 16 v UO : A. Install switchboards when the area is free and clear of dust and debris. Protect switchboards rn 0 from dust and moisture. Do not utilize switchboard for temporary lighting and power services. w ILI high concrete housekeeping w 0 B. Install switchboards on 4 inch hi g p g pads which shall follow the w O ; contour of switchboards with 1 inch of overlap on all sides. 2 C Provide channel i ron s ills b elow e ach s witchboard w here t he s witchboard f rame i s n of 4C suitable for use as a floor sill. a 1 END OF SECTION z H PART 3 — EXECUTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Switchboards 16425 -7 `? 1.03 STANDARDS i — 1 I "1 _J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila re 00 N 0 A. Provide disconnect switches and individual motor controllers in accordance with the Contract w = D ocuments. J I w O : A. Disconnects and individual motor controllers shall be the same manufacturer as the U switchboards. v ; z F.. I- O A. Disconnect Switches: Z H U.1j 1. Federal Specification W- S -865C. 0 co. 2. NEMA KS1. O 3. UL 98 (File #4776) and 508. w — = w O w z ON 0 I- O PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND INDIVIDUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS Individual Motor Controllers: 1. NEMA ICS 2 -321. 2. UL 547, 845 and 1004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS No requirements. 1.05 FIELD TESTING A. Test each individual motor controller and verify proper operation. B. Test motors under Toad and verify proper rotation. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an identification nameplate for each disconnect switch and individual motor controller. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16440 -1 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Heavy duty, horsepower rated, quick -make, quick - break, dead -front type. Self contained unit Z in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where installed outdoors), externally operable 1 H from the front. ?" w CC .ic B. Defeatable interlock to prevent opening the door when the switch is in the ON position. "-' 6 o Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. O co co w C. Fusible switches shall be equipped with rejecting type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up ,--. LU _ to 600A, suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. Interrupting rating shall be 200,000 RMS co LL symmetrical amperes. w 0 D. Voltage, am acit , horsepower rating, and number of poles shall be appropriate for s stem 5 9 P Y P 9 P Y � - and load served. Provide neutral pad for circuits with neutral conductors. Provide ground co m lug. = v t --w E. Provide 6 pole switches for connection to motors requiring 6 motor leads. z� I- O Z 1- 2.03 THERMAL OVERLOAD /DISCONNECT SWITCH w D 0 A. Single phase manual motor starter with quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanism and field 0 cn adjustable overload heater element. p H Ill W 1- U O A. Self contained unit in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where installed outdoors), iii Z externally operable from the front. 0 co O ~ B. Provide full voltage non - reversing (FVNR) type combination magnetic starters for motors of Z %HP to 60HP. , C. Provide reduced voltage, non - reversing, auto transformer type combination magnetic starters for motors 75HP and larger. 2.04 INDIVIDUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER 1. Two winding, open delta connected type. 2. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing. 3. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage. 4. Field adjustable auto transformer taps: 50 %, 65% and 80 %. Factory set at 80 %. D. Fusible switch type disconnect with clips for UL Class R type fuses. E. Provide an individual control power transformer with two primary and one secondary control fuses for each motor controller. The other secondary lead shall be grounded. Secondary voltage shall be 120V AC. F. Provide each motor controller with three phase, ambient temperature compensating, thermal overload relays with heaters. Overload relays shall be adjustable from 90% to 110% of heater rating, factory set at 100 %. Provide an insulated pushbutton on the outside of door to reset overload relays. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16440 -2 i d��.ti: y :,�uL,c a.. a.-- ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila G. Provide each motor controller with a Hand - Off- Automatic (HOA) selector switch. Provide a Hand - Automatic (HA) selector for life safety equipment. Mount switch on outside of door. H. Provide each motor controller with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, , green OFF and red RUNNING long life (50,000 hours) pilot indicators on outside of door, 1: auxiliary relays, and other devices required for operation of the equipment to be controlled. 6 UO W = ` 3.01 GENERAL N V. wO 2 A. Disconnect switches and individual motor controller shall be installed within ten feet of load ga 5 ' served. u. � B. Provide independent support; do not mount on the housing of the equipment served. LU, C. Conduit connected between disconnect switch or individual motor controller and load served 1— 0 shall be liquid -tight flexible metal conduit, 24 inches minimum length, 36 inches maximum W H ; length. 2 >> - O • N END OF SECTION z 0 : lL F' _ O Cu • N H H O Z PART 3 — EXECUTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Disconnect Switches and Individual Motor Controllers 16440 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide dry type transformers in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Transformers shall be of the ratings and types shown on the Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Transformers shall be the same manufacturer as the switchboards. 1.03 STANDARDS A. ANSI C57.12.00, C57.96, and C57.110. B. NEMA ST 20 and TR 27. C. UL 506 and 1561. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data sheets, electrical ratings, heat release data, physical dimensions, noise ratings, and weights. C. Certified vibration isolation and seismic restraint details and product data showing the number and location of each support and restraint and the exact number, size, and type of each anchor. Factory test reports. SECTION 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 1.05 FACTORY TESTING A. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap locations. B. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection. C. Applied and induced potential tests. D. No load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Dry Type Transformers 16460 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. re 6 J U 0 CO 0 A. Transformers shall be self - cooled, designed for continuous operation at rated KVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. N u. w0 QQ 1. Primary: 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire, delta connected. LL 2. Secondary: 120/208V, 3 phase, 4 wire, wye connected. = CJ � Z F- i- 0 z I— w w 0 O N 0 H w W H - . g_ 0 .. Z w U = O ~ z 2.02 RATINGS B. Voltage Ratings: 2.03 CORE AND COIL ASSEMBLY A. Core shall be high grade, non - aging, grain oriented, silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Coil windings shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. B. The core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with n on- hydroscopic, t hermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration absorbing pads. C. Provide NEMA standard taps. D. The core and coil assembly shall be grounded to the enclosure by means of an adequately sized flexible copper - grounding strap. E.. Transformers indicated on the drawings to be shielded isolation type or identified with the designation TK or ETK shall be provided with an electrostatic shield consisting of a single turn of aluminum placed between the primary and secondary winding and grounded to the transformer core. F. Transformers identified on the Drawings with the designation TK or ETK shall be UL listed as suitable for non - sinusoidal current Toads with minimum K factor of K -13. The secondary neutral conductor and neutral pad shall be rated to carry 200% of normal phase current. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. Heavy gauge steel, finished utilizing a continuous process of degreasing, cleaning, and phosphatizing, followed by an electrostatic deposition of thermosetting polyester powder coating and subsequent baking. Finish color shall be ANSI 61 grey enamel. B. Units rated 30 KVA and below shall be totally enclosed, non - ventilated, NEMA 3R with lifting eyes and wall mount hardware. C. Units rated 45 KVA and above shall be ventilated, NEMA 2, drip proof, with lifting holes. September 30, 2003 Dry Type Transformers Permit Issue 16460 -2 I..q Transformer Capacity Maximum Sound Level Up to 50 KVA 45dB 51 to 150 KVA 50dB 151 to 300 KVA 55dB 301 to 500 KVA 60dB 501 to 700 KVA 62dB 701 to 1000 KVA 64dB 1001 to 1500 KVA 65dB ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.05 INSULATION A. Insulation materials shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. B. Transformers shall be insulated with a 220 °C insulation system. C. Transformers shall be 115 °C temperature rise above 40 °C ambient, capable of carrying a 15% continuous overload without exceeding a 150 °C rise in a 40 °C ambient. 2.06 SOUND LEVELS A. Sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self cooled ratings: PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Transformers shall be floor mounted except where indicated on the Drawings to be suspended or wall mounted. B. Suspended transformers shall be mounted on hanger rods with a spring isolator in each rod. C. Floor mounted transformers shall be mounted on 4" high concrete housekeeping pads. Provide neoprene pads between transformer legs and housekeeping pad and anchor transformer to floor. D. Provide grounding electrode conductor from transformer secondary neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel. E. Conduit connected to transformers shall be flexible metal conduit, 24 inches minimum length, 60 inches maximum length. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION UNISYS - Tukwila Dry Type Transformers 16460 -3 B. Panelboards include both branch panelboards and distribution panels. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE f A. Panelboards shall be the same manufacturer as the switchboards. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide panelboards in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. 1.03 STANDARDS B. C. September 30, 2003 Permit issue Panelboard interrupting capacities shall be based on a fully rated protection system where all overcurrent protection devices are rated for the full prospective short circuit current (as indicated in the final short circuit submittal). Series rated panelboards are not permitted. Panelboards: 1. NEMA PB -1 2. Federal Specification W- P -115A Type II, Class 1 3. UL50 and 67 Circuit Breakers: 1. NEMA AB -1 2. Federal Specification W- C -375a and W- C -375b 3. UL 489 Fusible Switches: SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS 1. Federal Specifications W- S -865c 2. UL98 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets, electrical ratings, and installation instructions. 2. Support locations and types. B. Branch Panelboards: 1. Detailed description and layout of each panelboard, showing physical dimensions, circuit breaker ratings and layout, identification nameplate, and cable lugs. Panelboards 16470 -1 Z •1- CC 61.1 6 U 00 CO 0 U) =` J 1- w 0 g a ; = d F. w Z 1- 0 Z 1-' w uj o Y 0 1-- w W ' LL I ii Z . O z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila C. Distribution Panels: z w rt UO D. Seismic restraint calculations. wi 1.05 IDENTIFICATION co u wO . A. Provide an identification nameplate for each panelboard, each main, and each feeder 2 overcurrent protection device. g D. B. Provide a typewritten directory card indicating load served by type and location for each z w branch circuit in each branch panelboard. Mount directory in frame on inside of branch Z i panelboard door. I- O; z i- C. Current ratings of overcurrent protection devices shall be displayed on the device. ILI uj 0 O 5 . 0 I- w W 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS i - u, O A. .Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. ui z U= 2.02 RATINGS ~ O 1- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing physical dimensions and housekeeping pads. 2. Detailed description and layout of each distribution panel, showing overcurrent protection device ratings and layout, identification nameplate, and cable Tugs, and fuse clip sizes. A. Panelboards shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on the Drawings. B. Panelboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating as specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings. C. Branch Panelboards: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Branch panelboards are identified with the designation LP (120/208V) or LPH (277/480V) as shown on the Drawings. Branch panelboards for mechanical equipment are identified with the designation MP as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 22 inches wide by 6 inches deep. 3. Branch panelboards (LP): 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. • Branch panelboards (LPH): 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. Panelboards 16470 -2 z i ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila D. Distribution Panels: 2.03 CONSTRUCTION 1. Distribution panels are identified with the designation DPL (120/20BV or 208V) or DPH (277/480V or 480V) as shown on the Drawings. 2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 44 inches wide by 12 inches deep per section. 3. Distribution panels (DPL): 42,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 4. Distribution panels — circuit breaker type (DPH): 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. 5. Distribution panels — fusible switch type (DPH): 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. A. Enclosures shall be corrosion resistant galvanized (zinc finished) sheet steel. Fronts shall be cold rolled steel, finish coated with ANSI 61 grey enamel over a rust inhibitor. Panel locks shall be keyed alike. Recessed flush mounted panels shall have overlapping front. B. Doors for branch panelboards shall be one piece bolt on front with a lockable hinged door over the overcurrent protection devices. C. Space for future devices shall include all necessary bus, supports, and connections. 2.04 BUS SYSTEM A. Bus bars shall be sequence phased, rigidly supported by high impact resistant, insulated supporting bus assemblies to prevent vibration and resulting damage when subjected to stress, vibration, or short circuits. Solderless terminations shall be suitable for either copper or aluminum wire or cable. B. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating shown on the Drawings. Bus bars shall be plated aluminum or copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. C. Neutral bus shall be full size. Neutral bus shall be 200% rated when supplied from an oversized neutral conductor. Neutral bus shall be capable of terminating one conductor per pole position minimum. D. Provide a copper equipment ground bus in each panelboard. In addition to the equipment ground bus, provide a copper isolated ground bus when supplied from a feeder that includes an isolated grounding conductor. Each ground bus shall be capable of terminating one conductor per pole position minimum. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Panelboards 16470 -3 C. Fusible Switch Units: PART 3 — EXECUTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES A. Overcurrent protection device types: w fL 1. Branch panelboards (LP, LPH, and MP): Molded case circuit breakers. 6 = 2. Distribution panels (DPL): Molded case circuit breakers. 3. Distribution panels (DPH): Molded case circuit breakers or fusible switch units as N 0 indicated on Drawings. w B. Molded case circuit breakers: u_ w 1 I- al Z = I- 0 Z ~ 0o 0 I- wW � O w z . U � O ~ 1. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON /OFF indication clearly visible. 2. Bolt on type. Plug in type are not permitted. 3. Thermal- magnetic trip -free, trip - indicating, quick -make, quick- break, with inverse time characteristic. Single- handle and common tripping on multi -pole breakers. External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. 4. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc - quenching devices. 5. Breakers for lighting circuits shall be SWD rated. 6. Provide main breakers in panelboards served from transformers. 7. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 120V AC coils. 1. Quick -make, quick- break, dead -front type. Each switch shall be a self- contained unit, externally operated from the front. 2. Defeatable interlock to prevent opening the door when the switch is in the ON position. 3. Switches shall be equipped with rejection type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up to 600A, suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. 4. Handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount panelboards 6 feet above finished floor to top unless otherwise noted. B. Connect feed - through panels to main feeder by insulated parallel gutter taps (O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company Type PMX or PMX -C). C. Where panelboards are mounted recessed flush in wall, maintain fire integrity of wall. Provide one empty 3 /" EMT conduit stubbed up into nearest accessible ceiling location for every three spare or space positions. D. Neatly arrange wiring and tie together in each gutter with Thomas & Betts nylon Ty -Raps or equal at minimum 4 inch intervals. Panelboards 16470 -4 z E. Provide plugs on open knockouts. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS- Tukwila 3.02 TOUCH UP AND CLEANING A. Backboxes shall be clean, dry, and free of construction debris and fireproofing overspray prior to installation of panelboard interior. B. Vacuum backboxes clean of debris after installation and wiring of branch circuits. C. Repair and touch up paint damaged surfaces. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Panelboards 16470 -5 J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila re 2 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION v 0 N 0 A. Provide 600V fuses in accordance with the Contract Documents. w = J � PART 1 — GENERAL 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.03 STANDARDS A. UL 198 and 977. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. No requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann or Littlefuse. 2.02 FUSES A. 601 amperes through 6000 amperes: B. 600 amperes and below: 2.03 SPARE FUSES September 30, 2003 Permit Issue SECTION 16475 600V FUSES 1. UL Class L. 2. 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. 3. Bussmann KRP -C or Littlefuse KLP -C. 1. UL Class RK1. 2. 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. 3. Bussmann LPN -RK (250V) or LPS -RK (600V); or Littlefuse LLN -RK (250V) or LLS- RK (600V). A. Provide 10 percent (minimum of 3) spare power and control fuses of each type and rating utilized. B. Provide spare fuse cabinets in the main switchgear room and rooms with equipment utilizing 15 or more fuses. 600V Fuses 16475 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Z A. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. LI • 00, coo cow W =, J F... LL': W O. • ILQ� H=• Z _ I— O: Z , O c n :. W W — 0 : w Z H F', Z September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION UNISYS - Tukwila 600V Fuses 16475 -2 D. Equipment shall be certified for use in the State of the project and shall meet the State Energy Code and local energy ordinances. J i .J ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16500 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide luminaires and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. B. Ballasts shall be of the same manufacturer for each Tamp type. C. Occupancy sensors shall be certified for operation with specific ballasts utilized in controlled lighting fixtures. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Ballasts: ANSI C82.2 and C82.11, FCC CFR 47 Part 18, Public Law 100 -357, and UL 935 and 1029. B. Cords: UL 62. C. Exit Signs and Emergency Luminaires: NFPA 70 and UL 101 and 924. D. Hazardous Locations: UL 506, 844, 1203, and 1225. E. Lamp Holders and Starters: UL 496, 542, and 879. F. Luminaires: UL 57, 676, 1570, 1571, and 1572. G. Metal Halide and Mercury Vapor Lamps: Federal Standard 21 CFR 1040.30. H. Photometric data: Independent testing laboratory certified. I. State Energy Regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data sheets for each luminaire indicating luminaire type, ballast quantity and type, Tamp quantity and type, photometric data, materials, finishes, accessories, voltage, input watts, CFM data, and photographic image of luminaire. B. Manufacturer's data sheets for each ballast - including ballast type, power factor, input voltage, input watts, and ballast factor. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Lamps shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the luminaire schedule on the Drawings: 2.03 BALLASTS 1. Linear fluorescent: T -8, 835 energy savings type. 2. Twin tube, double twin tube, or triple twin tube fluorescent: 835. 3. Long compact fluorescent (Biax): 835. 4. Incandescent: 130V, inside frosted. 5. Metal halide: Minimum 75 CRI, open fixture rated 3000K color temperature for up to 150W lamps. Minimum 65 CRI for lamps 175W and higher. 6. High pressure sodium: Deluxe color, minimum 65 CRI. A. General: September 30, 2003 Permit issue 1. Ballasts shall be suitable for the electrical characteristics of the supply circuits to which they are to be connected, and which are suitable for operating the specified lamps. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -2 C. Scaled and dimensioned detail plan and elevation drawings of custom and continuous row Z type luminaires. D. Seismic restraint calculations. 0 0 PART 2 — PRODUCTS N 0 I . 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 0 u_ A. Lighting Luminaires: Refer to luminaire schedule on the Drawings. 2 J B. Ballasts: u_ d = w 1. Fluorescent hybrid or magnetic type: Advance, Jefferson, or MagneTek. .., _ 2. Fluorescent high frequency electronic type: Advance, Energy Savings inc., ? 1 MagneTek, Motorola or Osram /Sylvania. z 0 0 3. Fluorescent dimming type for daylighting applications (100% or 10% range): w w Advance Mark VII, Lutron Eco -10, or Motorola Helios. 4. Fluorescent dimming type for non - daylighting applications (100% to 5% range): 0 Advance Mark X or Lutron Hi -Lume. 0 1— 5. HID magnetic type: Advance, Robertson, or MagneTek. w w . 6. HID electronic type: WPI Electronics, Inc. H 0 H C. Lamps: General Electric, Osram /Sylvania, Philips, or Venture Lighting. LI Z tii 2.02 LAMPS rz H Z A. Provide a complete set of new lamps in each luminaire. INN ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 2. Provide electronic ballasts wherever there is an electronic ballast available for any specified Tamp or combination of lamps. Where electronic ballasts are not available, provide hybrid or magnetic ballasts. 3. Where installed outdoors and wherever ballasts are installed in a non - heated environment (such as walk in freezers, cold food handling areas, or outside air plenums) ballasts shall be capable of lamp starting at ambient temperatures down to minimum 20 degree F. 4. Luminaires controlled by dimmers shall be provided with dimming type ballasts. 5. Single lamp ballasts for long fluorescent lamps shall be kept to a minimum, and shall only be used for the last odd lamp in a room or space. B. Fluorescent: 1. Hybrid or Magnetic Ballasts: a. Ballasts shall be energy saving type, super low heat, rapid start, high power factor (90% minimum), Class A sound rated, UL Class P thermal protection, 0.88 minimum ballast factor, full Tight output with specified lamps, CBM /ETL certified, and minimum two year warranty. 2. High Frequency Electronic Ballasts: a. High frequency electronic type operating lamps at a frequency of 20KHz or high with no detectable Tamp flicker. b. Provide instant start type ballasts for T -8, T -5, T-4 and T -2 lamps. Provide rapid start type ballasts for T12 and compact fluorescent lamps. c. Ballast factor shall be 0.88 minimum unless noted to be low output or high output on the Luminaire schedule. Low output type ballasts shall have a ballast factor between 0.75 and 0.78. High output type ballasts shall have a ballast factor between 1.10 and 1.20. Maximum ballast factor for any type ballast shall not exceed 1.20. • d. Ballasts shall meet or exceed FCC Regulations Part 18 and NEMA standards regarding electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall not interfere with operation of other electrical equipment. e. Ballasts shall meet or exceed ANSI C62.41, Category A and IEEE 587 standards regarding harmonic distortion and surge protection. f. Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal Tamp life. Ballasts shall maintain Tight output at 10% for line voltage fluctuations of 10 %. g. Ballasts for compact fluorescent, T -5, T-4 and T -2 lamps shall contain end of lamp life sensing and provide shutdown protection. h. Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.7. i. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 20 %. j. Minimum three year warranty. 3. Interwiring for long fluorescent lamps. a. Ballast wiring for single Tamp continuous row luminaires shall allow independent control of each continuous row of luminaires. Provide as many three lamp ballasts as possible; provide two lamp ballasts to finish a row. b. Ballast wiring for double lamp continuous row luminaires shall allow independent multiple level control of each row of lamps within each continuous row of luminaires (side lamp /side lamps). Provide as many three lamp ballasts as possible; provide two lamp ballasts to finish a row. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -3 z w 6 • � 0 O 0 V) 0 wi CO V- ia 0 H ON 0 ww I- LL z U = F. 1- z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.04 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION September 30, 2003 Permit Issue c. Ballast wiring for one lamp luminaires shall allow independent control of two adjacent fixtures. Provide 1 two Tamp ballast and interwiring between each pair of luminaires. d. Where single level control of two lamp luminaires is shown, ballast wiring shall allow independent control of each fixtures. Provide 1 two lamp ballast per luminaire. e. Where multiple level control of two lamp luminaires•is shown, ballast wiring shall allow independent multiple level control of two adjacent fixtures (side lamps /side lamps). Provide 2 two lamp ballasts and interwiring between each pair of luminaires. f. Ballast wiring for three lamp luminaires shall allow independent multiple level control of two adjacent fixtures (outside lamps /inside lamps). Provide 3 two Tamp ballasts and interwiring between each pair of luminaires. g. Ballast wiring for four lamp luminaires shall allow independent multiple level control of each fixture (outside lamps /inside lamps). Provide 2 two -lamp ballasts per luminaire. C. High Intensity Discharge: 1. Magnetic Type: a. Constant wattage auto transformer type, regulated, with integral thermal protection and primary circuit fuse. Ballast shall allow maximum of -±5% Tamp voltage change with a line voltage variant of ± 10% voltage. b. Ballast for HID lamps 150W or less shall be lag type reactance, autotransformer, high power factor type (90% minimum). 2. Electronic Type: a. High power factor (90% minimum), Class A sound rated, UL Class P thermal protection with auto reset, ANSI C62.41 and FCC Part 18C, Class A compliance, CBM /ETL certified, and minimum two year warranty. A. Luminaires shall be completely factory assembled and wired, and equipped with necessary Iampholders, ballasts, wiring, shielding, reflectors, channels, lenses, and other parts necessary to complete the luminaire installation. B. Luminaire hardware shall be concealed. Weld exposed metal at joints, fill with weld material, grind smooth, and make free from light leaks. Gasket incandescent luminaires with overlapping trim. Weld ballast support studs, socket saddle studs, and reflector support studs to luminaire body; self- threading screws are not acceptable. Ventilate ballast compartments and firmly secure ballast to conducting metal surface. Luminaires shall be designed for bottom relamping, unless otherwise noted. C. Construct luminaires with a minimum number of joints. Unexposed joints by shall be welded, screwed or bolted; soldered joints are not acceptable. Do not use self tapping methods or rivets for fastening removable parts used to gain access to electrical components requiring service or replacement, or for fastening electrical components or their supports. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -4 D. Cast or extruded parts of luminaires shall be close grained and free from imperfections or discolorations, rigid, true to pattern, of ample weight and thickness, and properly fitted, flied, = z ground, and buffed to provide finished surfaces and joints free of imperfections. r4 w 2 E. Housings for fluorescent and HID luminaires shall be designed to make electrical v p components easily accessible and replaceable, without removing the luminaire body from its co 0 mounting. J H 2.05 FINISHES N LL w O A. Luminaire finishes shall provide a durable, wear resistant surface. Surfaces shall be g chemically cleaned and treated with corrosion inhibiting (phosphating) material to assure u- Q positive paint adhesion. Exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminum, etc.) and N O finished castings (except chromium plated or stainless steel parts) shall have an even coat of = w = H high -grade methacrylate lacquer or transparent epoxy. Anodize exposed aluminum surfaces z H in a 20 minute bath for corrosion resistance. Sheet steel luminaire housings, and iron and i— O steel parts which have not received phosphating treatment, or which are to be utilized in w 1— exterior applications, shall be zinc or cadmium plated, o r h of d ip z inc g alvanized a fter g D completion of all forming, welding, and drilling operations. v 0 _J O N B. Screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastening or latching hardware shall be cadmium plated. 0 H w = U ,j C. Provide luminaires with a high temperature baked enamel coating of selected color and finish, unless otherwise noted. White baked enamel finished surfaces shall have a minimum - 0 reflectance of 86 %, unless otherwise noted. ui Z _., U = 2.06 REFLECTORS p H Z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila A. Aluminum Reflectors: B. Painted Reflectors: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Reflectors and reflecting cones or baffles shall be fabricated from #12 aluminum reflector sheet, minimum 0.057 inches thick (15 gauge). Material shall be free of tooling marks, spinning lines, and marks or indentation caused by riveting or other assembly techniques. No rivets, springs, or other hardware be visible after installation. 2. Reflectors and baffles shall be polished, buffed, and anodized (Alzak), with finish color as selected by the Architect. 3. Luminaires provided with tri- phosphor type lamps shall be provided with low iridescence aluminum reflectors to eliminate rainbow effect on aluminum reflector. 1. Painted reflectors shall be formed before application of primer and paint. Reflectors and reflector bodies for luminaires with baked white enamel finish shall meet the following requirements and tests: a. After 100 hours of exposure to fade -o- meter, reflectance shall be not Tess than 86 %, and finish shall show no visible color change. Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.07 LENSES, FACEPLATES AND TRIMS b. After 100 hours of exposure to 100% humidity at 100 °F, (cook box test) finish shall show no blistering or other degraded effects. c. After 150 hours of exposure to salt spray (20% sodium chloride) shall cause no breakdown of film. A. Plastic lenses shall be of virgin methyl methacrylate, unless otherwise indicated. Polystyrene lenses are not acceptable. B. Lenses, louvers, and other light diffusing components shall be contained in frames. Lenses shall be removable but positively held within the frames so that hinging or other motion of the frame will not cause the diffusing components to drop out. C. Faceplates on incandescent recessed luminaires shall open for access to the interior of the luminaire, serve as a ceiling trim, and positively held to the luminaire body by adjustable means that permit the faceplate to be drawn up to the ceiling as tight as necessary to insure complete contact of faceplate with the finished ceiling. D. Provide ceiling trims for rectangular recessed luminaires with mitered corners, continuously welded and smoothed before shop finishing. Lapping of trim metal is not acceptable. 2.08 LUMINAIRE WIRING A. Provide wiring between fluorescent and HID Iampholders and ballasts of same or heavier gauge than the leads furnished with the ballasts, and having same or higher insulating and heat resisting characteristics. Internal wiring of luminaires shall contain a minimum number of s plices. S plices s hall b e m ade w ith s uitable m echanical insulated steel spring type connectors. B. Wiring channels and wireways shall be free from projections and rough or sharp edges. Provide bushings at points or edges over which conductors pass. 2.09 LAMPHOLDERS A. Incandescent and HID Iampholders shall be porcelain bases with copper screw shells. B. Fluorescent Iampholders shall be white, heat resistant plastic. Fluorescent lampholders operating with an open circuit voltage in excess of 300 volts shall be of the safety type which opens the supply circuit when the lamp is removed from the socket. C. Rigidly and securely attach lampholders to the luminaire enclosure or husk. D. Pull chains shall be insulated joint type. E. Provide Iampholders suitable for specified lamps, and set to position the lamps in optically correct spacing and relationship to lenses, reflectors, filters, and baffles. F. Where fluorescent lamps are installed in unenclosed luminaires, provide a minimum of two lamp- retaining clips per lamp. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Recessed incandescent luminaires shall be furnished with thermal protection in accordance with Article 410 -65 of the NEC. B. Where utilized as raceways, luminaires shall be suitable for use as raceways. Provide feed through splice boxes where necessary. C. Provide installation and supporting hardware including stems, plates, plaster frames, hangers, and similar items, for support of luminaires for the ceiling construction in which they shall be installed. Provide plaster frames made of non - ferrous metal, or of steel that has been suitably rustproofed after fabrication. Air handling luminaires shall have hinged air control vanes within the side slots (bent metal vanes are not acceptable) factory set at fully open. Provide heat removal slots at luminaire ends. E. Interior fluorescent and HID luminaires utilizing ballast sound rating of lower than A shall be provided with acoustical mounting pads between luminaire housing and ballast to minimize vibration and noise level. F. Provide tempered glass lenses for metal halide luminaires. G. Provide fastening devices of a positive locking type, which do not require special tools to apply or remove them. Do not use tie wires in place of fastening devices. H. Attach reflectors to housing by means of safety chains to prevent reflectors from falling. No part of the chain shall be visible after installation. I. Provide a ceiling canopy for each stem. Canopy finish shall match stem finish. J. Luminaires installed in air plenums shall be enclosed and gasketed. K. HID luminaires connected to the emergency power system shall have an integral quartz lamp instant r estrike s ystem t o p rovide I ight o utput i mmediately a fter a I oss o f p ower to the luminaire. The instant lamp shall automatically turn off after the HID Tamp has restriked. L. Provide additional feed points in pendant mounted luminaires connected to the emergency power system or provided with integral battery packs to accommodate the additional wiring. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Luminaire locations as indicated on the Drawings are general and approximate. Verify exact location of luminaires with Architect prior to installation. Verify adequacy of clearance with other equipment such as ducts, pipes, conduit, or structural elements. Bring conflicts to Architect's attention before proceeding with work. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. Verify ceiling construction and furnish appropriate luminaire mounting supports, hardware, trim, and accessories for each luminaire. C. Install luminaires in mechanical equipment rooms after ductwork and piping installation. Locate and mount luminaires as indicated on the Drawings unless mechanical equipment prohibits or makes it impractical to do so. In such cases, chain or wall mount luminaires so that serviceable equipment is illuminated. D. Luminaires shall be installed free of light leaks, warps, dents, or other irregularities. Light Teaks are not acceptable. E. Install reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses, diffusers, louvers, and decorative elements of luminaires after completion of wet work, plastering, painting, and general clean up in the area of the luminaires. Provide final focusing and adjusting of lighting equipment. Focusing and adjusting shall be performed under the Architect's supervision after normal working hours. F. Parabolic luminaires shall be installed with mylar cover over louvers. Cover shall be UL listed for temporary lighting. Upon completion of work, remove mylar cover with white gloves. G. Visible hanging devices shall be finished to match the luminaire finish, unless otherwise noted. Suspended fixtures shall hang level and aligned when installed in rows. H. Provide fire rated enclosures around recessed luminaires that are installed in fire rated ceilings. Provide attachment devices, brackets, plaster rings, saddle hanger and tie bars made of formed, rolled, or cast metal shapes with the requisite rigidity and strength to maintain continuous alignment and support of installed luminaires. J. Luminaires mounted in suspended ceilings shall be attached to the main runners of the ceiling system with appropriate mounting hardware. Provide independent 45° slack cables from corners of luminaires to structure above. K. Provide at least two supports for single fluorescent luminaires. Where luminaires are continuously mounted in rows, provide supports at maximum intervals of 8 feet, or closer if necessary to prevent visible deflection. L. Equipment requiring access for service and maintenance shall be installed so that components requiring access are readily accessible. M. Immediately prior to occupancy clear reflectors, reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses, trim rings, faceplates, louvers, lamps and decorative elements. N. Replace burnt out lamps and noisy or defective ballasts. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Luminaires and Accessories 16500 -8 z � • z re W i O O 0 w 0 J = F- WO 2 g< co _° F Z = F- O Z F- LU w U D O 0 1- w H H u w z U O 1 ' z A. Provide an identification nameplate for each ground bus cabinet. 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila SECTION 16680 GROUNDING SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide grounding system in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility company approval of service installation. 1.03 STANDARDS A. UL 467. B. ANSI C -1. C. IEEE 142. D. NEC. E. _ National Electrical Safety Code. F. Utility company requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Field test report. 1.05 FIELD TESTING A. Resistance testing of ground rod system indicating maximum 5 Ohms resistance to ground. 1.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Grounding connections shall be brazed molded exothermic welded, bolted clamp terminal, or pressure connector type. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Grounding System 16680 -1 Z • w 00 cn u1_ H, w u_ W O 2 g Q 1 W 1- =. Z H Z 0` w uj 0 N; 0 I- w uj ui OH z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 2.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Provide the following grounding electrodes, bonded together to form the grounding electrode system: 2.03 GROUND BUS CABINETS e.. • A. Provide a main ground bus cabinet in the main switchboard room. Provide ground bus cabinets in other locations shown on the Drawings. B. Ground bus cabinets shall be NEMA 1 enclosure with drilled copper bus on s tand o ff insulators. 2.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a continuous insulated #6 AWG (minimum) copper grounding conductor between each telecom terminal backboard and telecom terminal cabinet. Bond the telecommunications grounding system to the grounding electrode system and to the nearest available structural steel on each floor. 2.05 RAISED FLOOR GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a bare number 2 AWG grounding conductor the width and length of each compartmented under the raised floor. Provide a ground clamp and connection at every other raised floor pedestal (connection shall be above the pedestal leveling jack). Bond the raised floor grounding system to the grounding electrode system. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Metallic raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, equipment frames, fittings, and other metallic non - current carrying equipment parts and surfaces shall be effectively bonded to the grounding system. Nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads and contact surfaces to preserve grounding continuity or fittings shall be provided to make such removal unnecessary. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Metal underground water pipe in direct contact with earth for ten feet or more and electrically continuous to the points of connection of the grounding electrode conductor and the bonding conductors. 2. The metal frame of the building, where effectively grounded. 3. Concrete encased electrode (Ufer ground) consisting of a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor (size 4 minimum) encased by a minimum of 2 inches of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth. 4. Ground rod of copper clad steel, minimum 3 /4 inch diameter, minimum 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth. If a maximum resistance to ground of 5 Ohms cannot be obtained with a single ground rod, provide additional ground rods installed not closer than 6 feet apart until a maximum resistance to ground of 5 Ohms is obtained. 5. Other grounding electrodes as shown on the Drawings. Grounding System 16680 -2 tri E j ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila B. The grounded service conductor (neutral) of each service shall be connected to the grounding electrode system with an appropriately sized grounding electrode conductor. C. The grounded conductor (neutral) of each separately derived system shall be connected to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel and nearest interior cold water pipe with an appropriately sized grounding electrode conductor. Separately derived systems include the following: 1. Step down transformers. 2. Engine generator set(s). 3. Computer power center(s). D. Neutral wiring shall be grounded at the system point of origin only and shall be isolated from downstream grounding systems. E. Provide an insulated, isolated grounding conductor for branch circuits serving isolated ground and isolated ground surge suppressor type receptacles. Isolated grounding conductors shall be isolated from other grounding systems back to the system point of origin. F. Provide an insulated grounding conductor for all segments of branch circuits serving motors controlled by variable frequency drive controllers. G. Bond interior metal piping systems to the grounding electrode system. Where metallic piping and duct systems are rendered metallically non continuous by non - conductive couplings, provide bonding jumpers to provide grounding continuity. H. Receptacles and lighting fixtures shall be grounded to the outlet box by means of a bonding jumper between the outlet box and the receptacle or lighting fixture grounding terminal. Feeders and branch circuits shall be provided with an insulated grounding conductor run with the circuit conductors. This grounding conductor shall be in addition to the ground path provided by the continuously grounded metallic raceway system that encloses the phase and neutral conductors. Provide bolted clamp terminal connectors where connected to removable equipment. • K. Provide brazed molded exothermic welded connections to ground rods and connections to building structural steel. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue END OF SECTION Grounding System 16680 -3 c • hvi ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila z ; Z PART 1 — GENERAL Ct ac 1.01 DESCRIPTION UO CO O A. Provide fire alarm and detection system in accordance with the Contract Documents. W = J I— B. The fire alarm and detection system shall be a stand alone system operating independently N u- ' of other control systems. 2 O " 5 C. Related work specified in other divisions of these specifications: u. j 1. Sprinkler water flow and tamper switches. H w 2. Magnetic door holders and electric door locking hardware. z F- 3. Damper end switches, differential air pressure switches, and air flow switches. i— O 4. Installation of duct type smoke detectors. w I- ui 0 p 0 O - A. Fire Department approval of fire alarm and detection system. O H-. ZU B. Manufacturer and equipment supplier shall have a minimum of ten year's prior experience in ~ F. the City of the project location. L I O uJ C. Equipment supplier shall have 24 hour parts and labor service available with a maximum 4 U hour response time. Z 1- 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM D. Prior to making required submittals, system supplier shall meet with the Fire Department and make an informal presentation of the fire alarm and detection system. Meeting minutes shall be issued and comments incorporated into the required submittals. 1.03 • STANDARDS A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990. B. Fire Department Requirements. C. NFPA 13 — Sprinkler Systems. D. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code. E. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. . F. NFPA 90A — Air Conditioning Systems. G. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. H. Owner's Insurance Underwriter. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila I. State Fire Marshal. J. UL Standard 38 Manual Alarm Stations. K. UL Standard 217 — Smoke Detectors — Single /Multiple Stations. L. UL Standard 228 — Door Holders — Closers. M. UL Standard 268 — Smoke Detectors — Systems. N. UL Standard 268A — Duct Smoke Detectors. O. UL Standard 464 — Audible Signaling Appliances. P. UL Standard 521 — Heat Detectors. Q. UL Standard 1638 — Visual Signaling Appliances. 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS A. FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel. B. FARA Fire Alarm Remote Annunciator. C. FATC Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Minutes of system supplier's meeting with Fire Department. B. Manufacturer's product data sheets for equipment including State Fire Marshal listing numbers. C. Floor plans (minimum 1/8 inch scale) showing device locations and interconnecting conduit and wire. D. Riser diagram showing devices, equipment, and interconnecting conduit and wire. Indicate points of connection to other equipment such as damper actuators, electric door locking hardware, magnetic door holders, and other related devices and equipment. E. Scaled detail drawings of FACP and FARA panel fronts. F. Wiring diagram for each device. G. Control and wiring diagrams for smoke control sequence. H. Voltage drop calculations. I. Battery sizing calculations. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Manual Pull Station Area Smoke Detector Duct Smoke Detector Sprinkler Water Flow Switch Sprinkler Tamper Switch Annunciate Alarm at FACP and FARA Yes Yes Yes Yes No Annunciate Trouble at FACP and FARA No No No No Yes ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila J. Fire alarm horn power supply sizing calculations. K. Visual alarm power supply sizing calculations. L. Power supply calculations for magnetic door holders, and electric door locking hardware. M. Seismic restraint calculations. 1.06 FIELD TESTING A. Wiring shall be inspected and tested for continuity and short circuits. The minimum allowable resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is ten megohms measured with a 500 volt megger. B. Field Test Reports: 1.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an identification nameplate for each equipment cabinet. 1.08 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. The system shall operate automatically in accordance with the following table: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Certification that equipment has been properly installed and is in satisfactory operating condition. 2. Sensitivity settings for smoke detectors. 3. Detailed operational test report in matrix form indicating each initiating device, each signaling device, and each control and indicating light on each piece of equipment. Report shall certify the following: a. Successful operation of each alarm and supervisory initiating device. b. Successful operation of each signaling device. c. Successful operation of FACP. d. Successful operation of FARA. e. Successful operation of line supervision devices. f. Successful operation of off site alarm monitoring system connection. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -3 Annunciate Circuit Supervisory at FACP and FARA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Activate fire alarm horns and visual alarms throughout building Yes Yes Yes Yes No Release Magnetic Door Holders Yes Yes Yes Yes No Release Electric Door Locking Hardware Yes Yes Yes Yes No Transmit Off Site Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes No ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS •Miscellaneous systems include kitchen hood fire protection systems, pre - action fire protection systems, and clean agent fire protection systems. B. Air Handling Systems: 1. Activation of a supply or return air duct detector shall shut down the associated fan or air handling system. C. Combination Fire /Smoke Dampers: 1. Activation of a duct or smoke detector at a combination fire /smoke damper shall close the associated fire /smoke damper. 1.09 SYSTEM ZONING A. Alarm Initiating Devices: B. Supervisory Initiating Devices: UNISYS — Tukwila 1. Provide a separate, individual zone for each sprinkler tamper switch. C. Audible and Visual Signaling Device: 1. Entire building shall be one zone. D. Initiating and signaling device wiring circuits /loops /channels shall be loaded to no more than 50% capacity to allow the installation of future devices. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire alarm and detection system components shall be of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise noted. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Edwards, Firecom, Notifser, Siemens Cerberus, or Simplex. September 30, 2003 Fire Alarm and Detection System Permit Issue 16720 -4 1. Provide a separate, individual zone for each manual pull station, area smoke �. detector, duct smoke detector, area heat detector, and sprinkler water flow switch. 4wJ z oc 4 -.. z IX w 0 00 m e w = F- N LL w �a _ ° w z � ZO w uj () O N 0H w O .. U- H Fz- O z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 2.02 SYSTEM TYPE z A. The fire alarm and detection system shall be the fully addressable type. Each fire alarm 2 z initiating device shall be a separate, individual zone. Provide interface modules to connect ct 2 non - addressable devices to addressable wiring channels. 6 m 00 B. All zoning /device location information shall be field programmable to meet the exact job co o requirements as approved by the Architect/Engineer and as required by the Fire Department w = ILI and Fire Marshal. 1 LL 2.03 LINE SUPERVISION w O A. All system equipment and wiring shall be supervised in compliance with the requirements of u. NFPA 72. N 0 = 1w - _ B. All styles of Class A circuits shall be installed such that the outgoing and return conductors, z F exiting f rom a nd r eturning t o t he c ontrol u nit, r espectively, a re r outed separately. The 1— O outgoing and return (redundant) circuit conductors shall not be run in the same cable z i assembly (multiconductor cable), enclosure, or raceway. ? Q 0 O P o F- A. Provide sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire s ystem u pon I oss o f p ower a s Ili - v 2.04 STANDBY BATTERIES required by NFPA 72. u. Q. B. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. Battery v z r_- • 1- charging and recharging shall be automatic. 2.05 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. Solid state, modular design, fully supervised. Steel enclosure in standard finish, with hinged, locking door. Integral power supply, standby batteries, and battery charger. B. Provide power on LED, power failure LED, system trouble LED, system reset switch, alarm silence switch, trouble silence switch, manual audible and visible signal switch, alarm acknowledge switch, trouble acknowledge switch, supervisory service acknowledge switch, Tamp test button, tone alert, battery supervision LED, auxiliary relays, and other system indicators and controls necessary for processing alarm and signaling functions. Indicating lamps shall be LED type. C. Provide appropriate permanent identification of control and indicating functions. D. Annunciation: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Serial annunciator with back lit, alphanumeric, 80 character liquid crystal display indicating clear language information as to the type of alarm (device type), point status (alarm or trouble), number of alarms on the system, and a custom location label. Ability to scroll back through prior system actions. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -5 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 2. LED matrix annunciator indicating initiating device type (columns) and floor of initiating device (rows). Provide a separate row for each floor level and a separate z column for each device type (manual pull station, area smoke detector, duct smoke = detector, sprinkler water flow, and sprinkler valve tamper). Provide a red (alarm or trouble) and yellow Tight (zone supervision) for each annunciation zone. Provide re sc matrix layout, identification, and zoning requirements that meet the requirements of 6 5 the Fire Department. U U O 3. 20 column thermal strip printer. co p 4. Provide a permanent binder with typewritten, laminated inserts cross referencing location labels to description and location of system address. -I1- WD E. System shall utilize analog type smoke detection with alarm verification, self test feature, 2 �. individual sensor automatic timed sensitivity adjustment, individual smoke sensor field adjustable sensitivity set from FACP, and automatic maintenance alarm feature. 2.06 FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR (FARAZ w Z H. A. Provide a remote video display terminal and keyboard in each of the following locations: I— O Z F- 1. Security Control Center (SCC). w 2. Engineering Control Center (ECC). v p B. Provide a remote full size dot matrix printer in each of the following locations: o H w 1. Security Control Center (SCC). ti 2. Engineering Control Center (ECC). — p w Z U = O~ 2.07 FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. General: 1. Addressable type. 2. Provide auxiliary relays where required to satisfy system operational requirements. 3. Smoke detectors shall be analog type. B. Manual Pull Stations: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. High impact Lexan or die cast metal. 2. Double action, mechanically latched upon operation until key operated manual reset. Pull station front shall be hinged to back plate assembly, requiring keyed opening to reset. Area Smoke and Heat Detectors: 1. General: a. Common base for detachable, low profile, ionization type smoke, photoelectric type smoke, and heat detector heads. 2. Ionization type area smoke detector: a. Dual chamber type. b. 360 degrees smoke entry, locking tamper screw, pulsating on power LED indicator, UL 268. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -6 z ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila 3. Photoelectric type area smoke detector: a. LED light source, silicon photodiode receiving element. Line filter and time delay circuitry to prevent transient false alarms. b. 360 degrees smoke entry, locking tamper screw, pulsating on power LED indicator, UL 268. 4. Area heat detector: a. 135 degrees fixed temperature self restoring type. b. Locking tamper screw, UL 521. D. Duct Type Smoke Detectors: 1. General: a. Common base for detachable ionization or photoelectric type smoke detector head. b. Duct housing with hinged door and full length sampling tube. Visible alarm LED, remote LED output, UL 268A. c. Provide auxiliary contacts. 2. Ionization type smoke detector head: a. Dual chamber type. 3. Photoelectric type area smoke detector: a. LED light source, silicon photodiode receiving element. Line filter and time delay circuitry to prevent transient false alarms. 4. Remote alarm indicator: a. Ceiling mounted, red LED, stainless steel faceplate engraved ALARM. Provide where duct type smoke detectors are installed above a ceiling. E. Addressable Transmitters /Monitor Modules: 1. Addressable transmitters /monitor modules shall be provided where required to interface with contact alarm devices. F. Addressable Relay Modules: 1. Addressable relay modules shall be provided where required to provide audible alarm interface and /or relay control interface. 2.08 FIRE ALARM SIGNALLING DEVICES A. Visual alarm strobes shall be synchronized throughout the building. The candela rating of visual alarm strobes shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements. Provide visual alarm strobes in addition to those shown on the Drawings to meet NFPA 72 requirements. B. Signaling Devices September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Horns: a. Flush ceiling or wall mounted as shown on Drawings, red die cast faceplate, high sound output. b. Wheelock Series 30. 2. Visual Alarms: a. Flush wall mounted, high intensity strobe, vertical orientation with vertical engravement FIRE, beige faceplate, ADA, UL 464. Ceiling mounted type is not permitted. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -7 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS — Tukwila PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL September 30, 2003 Permit Issue b. Gentex GXS- 4- 15 -75WW or equal. 3. Combination HornNisual Alarm: a. Flush wall mounted. b. Horn and visual alarm specifications to match individual device specification. A. All equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Wiring shall be color coded, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and Fire Department requirements. Install wiring in an independent, dedicated metallic raceway system. C. Connections to devices installed in accessible tile ceilings shall be flexible conduit. Device back boxes shall be securely attached to framing members. D. Provide appropriately sized backboxes for surface mounted fire alarm signaling devices, paint to match device faceplate color. Stacked or punch pressed steel type backboxes are not permitted. E. Provide watertight type backboxes where installed recessed flush in perimeter walls below grade. F. Provide wireways above and /or below equipment cabinets to accommodate large concentrations of wiring. Conductors within equipment shall be carefully formed and harnessed. G. Connect equipment to emergency power system. H. Provide power supply wiring to electric damper actuators used for smoke control that are not controlled by the temperature control system. I. Area and duct type smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type, unless otherwise noted. J. Provide a 1 inch empty conduit from the FACP to the nearest telecom terminal backboard. K. Auxiliary relays connected to the fire management system used to initiate control of monitor status of fire safety functions shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or device. The wiring between the fire management system and the auxiliary relay shall be supervised. END OF SECTION Fire Alarm and Detection System 16720 -8 entai R .. • wJ ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 16740 TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide- telecommunications raceways and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Telephone service provider approval of incoming service installation. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Telephone service provider requirements. B. BICS. EIA/TIA. NEMA VE. E. Cable Tray: ASTM A -123, A -525, NEMA VE -1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. No requirements. B. Manufacturer's product data sheets for cable tray and J- Hooks. C. Seismic restraint calculations for cable tray. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 TELECOMMUNICATION BACKBOARDS A. Fire retardant plywood. B. % inch thick x 8 feet high by length as shown on the Drawings. Extend full height of room for sections above or below floor or wall sleeves. 2.02 SLEEVES A. Sleeves shall be 4 inch rigid steel nipples. Extend floor sleeves a minimum of 4 inches above and below finished floor. Extend wall sleeves a minimum of 4 inches on either side of wall. Sleeve ends shall be threaded. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila • D. E. Loading capacity shall meet NEMA Class 8C with a safety factor of 1.5. F. Acceptable manufacturer: B -Line, Globe, or P -W Industries. 2.04 J -HOOKS A. Provide a system of overhead and wall mounted J -Hooks adequately secured to the structure. J -Hooks shall be galvanized steel, smooth edges suitable for supporting teflon coated telecommunications cabling approved for installation in a return air ceiling plenum. September 30, 2003 Permit Issue Cable Tray Size: Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -2 w B. Provide sleeves between floors of telecommunication closets as in quantities and locations shown on the Drawings. P � Z 2.03 CABLE TRAY w A. Cable tray systems shall consist of straight sections, fittings, and accessories as defined in `" NEMA VE -1 and UL classified as equipment grounding conductors. Provide radiused 0 0 elbows, tees, crosses, splice plates, wall and overhead supports, and other fittings necessary N w for a complete, continuously grounded system. H B. Cable Tray Materials: W 0 1. Aluminum: Straight sections and fitting siderails and rungs shall be extruded from "" g Q Aluminum Association Alloy 6063. Fabricated parts shall be made from Aluminum v> Association Alloy 5052. Splice plates shall be of wedge lock design, using four z w ' square neck carriage bolts and serrated flange locknuts. Z C. Cable Tray Types: z O g ww 1. Ladder: Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (siderails) with m c transverse members (rungs) welded to the siderails. Rungs shall be spaced on 6 9 p P- 1 2 18 inches on center. Rung spacing in radiused fittings shall be 9 inches 0 H . measured at the center of the trays width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable = w bearing surface of 3 /4 inches with radiused edges. No portion of the rungs shall t— protrude below the bottom plane of the siderails. LL- 0 w Z 1. Height: Cable tray shall have an overall sidewall height of 4 5 6 7 inches unless z otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Width: Widths shall be 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 inches unless otherwise shown on Drawings. . �mJ t %. 1 tow ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila z PART 3 — EXECUTION z 3.01 GENERAL g A. Provide high impact thermoplastic insulating bushings on sleeve and raceway ends. Provide U N o metallic capped insulating bushings on used service provider incoming conduits. N w J = B. Fire seal floor sleeves and sleeves in fire rated walls to maintain fire rating of wall after cn u_ . telephone cables are installed. w 0 C Arrange raceway runs Tess than 100 feet from point to point so that they contain no more than Q two 90 degree standard factory bends or three 90 degree, 24 inch radius bends. Provide pull boxes in raceway runs exceeding 100 feet from point to point with more than one 90 degree = v bend. Raceway runs shall not contain Condulet type fittings. f- _ z1.- 3.02 CABLE TRAY Z O w A. Cable tray shall be supported at a maximum of 8 foot centers and at each bend, tee, cross, U 0 and elbow fitting. Supports shall be threaded rod trapeze style hangers or wall brackets. O gt Side rails shall bear on the supports; rungs shall not bear on the supports. p F- B. Cable tray shall be installed level. Manufactured offsets shall be used to change height or U L w z C. Coordinate location of cable trays with other trades to avoid conflicts and maintain V le accessibility. Where installed above a ceiling, cable trays shall be not less than 12 inches / above the bottom o f t he f inished c eiling. V ertical c learance a bove t he t ray s hall b e a z minimum of 12 inches. 3.03 J -HOOKS September 30, 2003 Permit Issue direction. D. Cable tray shall be continuous. Where cable tray run is interrupted at a fire rated wall, provide three 4 inch sleeves in fire rated wall. Provide bonding jumpers where cable trays are interrupted at fire rated walls and floors or are otherwise rendered electrically discontinuous. E. Cable tray installed in an environmental air plenum shall be solid bottom with continuous cover, rated for installation in an environmental air plenum. A. Install J -Hooks on 3 4 5 6 foot centers. Coordinate location of J -Hooks with other trades to avoid conflicts and preserve accessibility. Where J -Hook run is interrupted at a fire rated wall, provide three 4 inch sleeves in fire rated wall. Provide bonding jumpers where J -Hooks are interrupted at fire rated walls and floors. Where installed above a ceiling, J -Hooks shall be not less than 12 inches above the bottom of the finished ceiling. Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila 3.04 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS A. Core and Shell: B. Tenant Areas: September 30, 2003 Permit Issue 1. Provide a 4 inch square x 21 /8 inch deep outlet box with single gang plaster ring and dedicated 1 inch empty conduit to nearest accessible ceiling location: 1. Provide a 4 inch square x 21 /8 inch deep outlet box with single gang plaster ring and dedicated 1 inch empty conduit to nearest telecommunications backboard. 2. Provide a stainless steel coverplate with grommeted hole for furniture system connections. END OF SECTION Telecommunications Raceways and Accessories 16740 -4 So, VOA • • t ., z ce u6 � U v) Q, v) cu = z �. I- O z F— W Q Q 1- w W` • Ili • .0 =, O ~ z . MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS UNISYS - Tukwila G. Provide electric heater coils designed for operation with the DDC controller and control system as specified in Section 15900: BUILDING MANAGMENET SYSTEM (BMS). H. Construct duct heater coils to mount on the discharge of the terminal device. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain service clearance for terminal unit controls. B. Stencil all terminal units with nametags on the bottom casing panel to match tags shown on drawings. Lettering /numbering shall be 3 inches high using red primer paint. C. Terminal unit manufacturer shall provide flow curves for the primary air sensors clearly label and permanently attached on the bottom or side of each terminal unit. END OF SECTION September 30, 2003 Air Terminal Units Permit Issue 15930 -7 DEPARTMENTS: 4 i g Build ivisioo Public Works ❑ Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: M03 -158 DATE: 10 -14 -03 PROJECT NAME: UNISYS SITE ADDRESS: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S Original Plan Submittal X Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after /before permit is issued Fire Prevention Structural ❑ Planning Division ❑ DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 10 -16 -03 Complete [( Incomplete ❑ Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES /THURS ROOTING: Please Route , NI2 Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) [1 Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: PERMIT COORD COPY Permit Coordinator Not Applicable ❑ DUE DATE: 11 -13 -03 DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: // Departments issued corrections: Bldg ' Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: SZE ACTIVITY NUMBER: M03 -158 PROJECT NAME: UNISYS SITE ADDRESS: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S DATE: 10 -01 -03 X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # _ _ Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after /before permit is issued DEPARTMENTS: n p-1 -03 Building Division Public Works D APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28.02 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP x12- I OC, ID-6 Fire Prevention Structural GI Ej DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 10 -02 -03 Complete ❑ Incomplete Comments: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: PERMIT COORD COPY Planning Division Permit Coordinator ii Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: /0-4 0-03 LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg rg Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: .o+ TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route ❑ Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE: 10 -30 -03 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: DEPARTMENTS: Buiidli' Division on Public Works ❑ Documents /routing slip.doc 2-28-02 ACTIVITY NUMBER: M03 -158 DATE: 12 -03 -03 PROJECT NAME: UNISYS SITE ADDRESS: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # ,Response to Correction Letter # I Revision # after /before permit is issued APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Fire Prevention Structural 0 Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 12 -04 -03 Complete [Vf Incomplete ❑ Comments: Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES /THURS RNG: Please Route St ructural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE: 01 -01 -04 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ["J Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: PERMIT COORD COPY z 1Z W JU 0 co co W - 1- WO I Q. = a 1- W z� z� Lu U � O N off W W � O ..z W = O~ z PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: M03 -158 DATE: 01 -09 -04 PROJECT NAME: UNISYS SITE ADDRESS: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WAY SOUTH Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # 1 after REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Documents /routing slIp,doc 2 -28.02 Incomplete PERMIT COORD COPY /permit is issued DEPARTME TS: 1-1 MSC 44 Fret Buildi g ivision Q Fire Prevention Planning Division El Public Works ❑ Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 01 -13 -04 Complete Comments: Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES /THURS ROyTING: Please Route , L ., l Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE: 02 -10 -04 APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved 13 Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: Q . /pc 3 ® Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 ❑ Response to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # after/before Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: UNISYS Project Address: 11621 EAST MARGINAL WY S Contact Person Terri Iverson Summary of Revision: I P 4-C PERMIT CENTS. Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: (YM5 d Entered in Sierra on 5. A-C- 1 Plan Check/Permit Number: Phone Number ROOMED C1 fi/ OF TUI(WILP 4 200' 10/06/03 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 z 1 w • . Q Q J U 0 0 w= H uj 0 J ▪ cc I- al Z F. ❑ HO Z ~ f' U N Project Name: LA NA l S w H Project Address: 1 1 Marc, t ev&S CJ k t S F Contact Person: fA pp NtWIC—V---i Phone Number: LI z Summary of Revision: Ft n'wt L bee" (.14f Lc. uAA1`lea^ t 1 .l UPI I r:5 0 i r.oakkar411'.;:-,,-,11.itak:01:14-14,46.1.4.- • ;' • y•7j, � :1 h � ! j, . IIaL ..':4 Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 12'0 Plan Check/Permit Number: Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # f Revision # after Permit is Issued Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Kr) 3 -158 O rrt uu�� � r rmP a� cr�Q �� 11 lily h caza.d �4.,eehsrk,,- J t P /�.r,h... sh 5vb4. i• revi �c.) RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWII N DEC - 3 2003 P ERMrr CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: . 4 5 ,J Entered in Permits Plus on /Z - ,e 3 ' 6/ 3 08/06/03 Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 1 Plan Check/Permit Number: M (23 - (5e O Response to Incomplete Letter # O Response to Correction Letter # Revision # 1 after Permit is Issued O Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: V N I S `(S City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Project Address: 1\G2 EAST 04A - k6( r./R IN/AA( co 4 TV�wwA- Contact Person: T Av6 C1- ALTo,J Phone Number: 20 L ` �9 Z - 9/ S5 Summary of Revision: R v►s u,J C t 50 Ai E kiv D /0,e Czt - T , rA -ra . Tt +( r pL4 J t t'HE - ►vlo,ee V/4LJE ETl tN/6. o Pvc 1 A-7.11). LAYuvT /2CsuLr7NL tr'J so"— D v U T L -'r , r p. v t S r oN) A1Ip o ‘1. (Z/4 -C-t_ [? mJ 7 o POVA/IN yH R-C 11 ' WO 615 1J, TI oNA a0L/ P44 c_7.Ij l S t A S /36 J 1)cr PER_ if / Es T al= "1 l e - cp & s o r- pL,ArIS I -rY- Sheet Number(s): 1, 1 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: (r Entered in Permits Plus on /"1 C171 ... 7U1 fty 0 9 2004 PERMIT cEy 08/06/03 • z.w ; u...a;, :s,WJ , w asa Revision No. Date Received i Staff 1 1 Initials I Date Issued Date .. Issued ' - Staff Initials f l i SIGS 1 /— /5-0 Summary of Revision: 4.7 Summary of Revision: xSG,.G ....4-40.4,0, oz _ /_...- u d.. ' • ' G�h� rGecC��.�7 / daw,c41ia 24 ao sx , • , Received By: DgvE C ft - 1 - bJ Revision No. Date Received ! i Staff Initials Date .. Issued Staff Initials . 1 I 1 Summary of Revision: Received By: Received By: •' Revision No. • Date Received Staff Initials Staff Initials Date Issued Staff I Initials . 1 I 1 Summary of Revision: Received By: Revision No. Date Received Staff Initials Date Issued Staff Initials Summary of Revision: Summary of Revision: Received By: . Received By: Revision No. Date I Received Staff Initials Staff Date Initials - Issued i I 1 Summary of Revision: Received By: . PROJECT NAME: GC / /.VS PERMIT NO:. /103 /a8 Site Address: lib z e Uas% %,&/ br. S: Origin Issue Date: REVISION LOG (please print) (please print) (please print) please print please print I July 2, 2004 Edi Hanbicki 1201 Alaskan Way, #201 Seattle, WA 98101 RE: Permit Application No. M03 -158 11621 East Marginal Way South Dear Permit Holder: In reviewing our current records the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the Uniform Building Code and /or Uniform Mechanical Code, every permit issued by the Building Official under the provisions of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: This inspection is intended to determine if substantial work has been accomplished since issuance of the permit or last inspection; or if the project should be considered abandoned. If such determination is made, the Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve a one -time extension up to 180 days. Extension requests must be in writing and provide satisfactory reasons why circumstances beyond the applicants control have prevented action from being taken. In the event you do not call for the above inspection or request and receive an extension prior to August 15, 2004, your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, Stefania Spencer Permit Technician • Call the City Of Tukwila Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670 to arrange for the next or final inspection. Xc: Permit File No. M03 -158 Bob Benedicto, Building Official Ciiy of Tukwila 2 Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 October 6, 2003 Terri Iverson Interior Architects 1201 Alaskan Way Pier 56, Suite 201 Seattle, WA 98101 RE: Letter of Incomplete Application #1 3 -15 Development Permit Application Number DO-3-21M Unisys — 11621 East Marginal Way South Dear Terri: This letter is to inform you that your application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on October 1, 2003, is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan review process the following items need to be addressed: Buildin2 Department: Ken Nelsen, at 206 431 -3677, if you have questions concerning the following: 1. Please provide engineering analysis and calculations for structural support of AC -1 and AC -2. Please address the above comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 433 -7165. Sincerely, Stefani pencer - Permit Technician Enclosures File: Permit File No. i1,464•5b city of Tukwila Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director Steven M. Mullet, Mayor 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 November 14, 2003 Terri Iverson / Ed Habicki Interior Architects 1201 Alaskan Way Pier 56, Suite 201 Seattle, WA 98101 RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Development Permit Application Number M03 -158 Unisys —11621 East Marginal Way South Dear Terri / Ed: This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building Department. At this time the Fire, Planning and Public Works Departments have no comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) complete sets of revised plans, specifications and /or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `revision sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 433 -7165. Sincerely, Stefania Spencer Permit Technician encl xc: File No. M03 -158 City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 p. BUILDING DIVISION REVIEW Date: Project Name: Application #: Plan Review: No further comments at this time. Nov. 12, 2003 Unisys mechanical permit application M03 -158 Ken Nelsen, Senior Plans Examiner mak Tukwila Building Division 6300 SouthCenter Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 206 -.31 -3670 To follow -up a telephone conversation with Ed Habicki on November 7. 2003, it was indicated by Mr. Habicki that significant revisions to the mechanical system are being considered by the applicant. Because of the extensive changes in the H.V.A.C. system type and function, the Building Division will not conduct a complete mechanical plan review pending the clarification of the potential revisions. Should there be questions on this comment, please contact the Building Division office at 206 -431 -3670. 11/26/03 12:02 FAX 818 545 9033 ACCO rn2s.o52 -o01) (R/r471 :P.CCO ENGINEERED, •SYSTEMS INCA:. 625 •.SAN . FERNANDO RD• , •GLENDALE CA. • .9.12 01 • OM( OF TUKKWILA DEC 2 3 2 . PERMIT CENTER SEAT'LE DEPARTIVIE fT• OF•LABOR' +,NL) INDUSTRIES • REGISTERED AS. •PRO \IDED BY, LAW CRJ\TStt' „ S,PEQILrT ::�!�t.S"•.�•.y,1,,:.;� ,:.il•H rr,'j�•S� .•. .. • �1 � ^ . :. FYYx.� I 7 � i � Y ; ,- : • �,: T• }: � j��r :.,. !:-F ra g&�'rL�b... ,fh.: y, " '; :. ice: "P(.i'f•` .'t.7�r'7; >'!, ...� �• - -: �i"�.. � t•, 1. EF'Ft1IV•E DATE. . ;331%200. 3 00.1 z Cr 2 6 —J C.) 00 N W = LL : W 0 gQ N D Z d : 11 Z � I 0 Z H: Dp U 0 co W w W I— — iii Z U =, 0 H.. z , DRAWING LIST r-, _ M -0.0 M -0.1 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M -0.2 MECHANICAL ENERGY CODE FORMS M -1.0 M -1.1 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN AT GROUND MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN M -1.2 - MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN --- - AI -3.0 --, MECHANICAL CONTROL DIAGRAMS V I AILS • • UNISYS /1 YE SET CONSTRUCTION / BID SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATKIN SET MECHANICAL LEGEND AND ,. ABBREVIATIONS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, -WA 98168 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101- 2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax. (206) 342 -9901 .0 .f ` WSP , ,. �...�.� 11.26.03 10.14 03 . 09.3Q03 06.2403 09.12.03 DEC 0 3 2003 OAI 080 OD P P0 P - - PERF PRV PS0 PSI R (R) - RA OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER OUTSIDE DIMENSION PUMP PRESSURE DROP -� PERFORATED + - PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE r PLENUM SLOT DIFFUSER POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH I __ RISE EXISTING TO BE RELOCATED RETURN AIR RF RETURN FAN RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE RTU SA SENS SF SM SP _ST TG TK TR Tyr - UH UON VAR VAV VD VFD WB WG WO 12X12 WMS (300) (X) ABBREVIATIONS OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE ROOF TOP UNIT SUPPLY AIR SENSIBLE SUPPLY FAN OR SQUARE FEET SHEET METAL STATIC PRESSURE SOUND TRAP(SOUND ATTENUATOR) TOP GRILLE TANK TOP REGISTER TYPICAL UNIT HEATER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VARIABLE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT VOLUME DAMPER VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WITH WET BULB WATER GAUGE WALL OPENING (SIZE) WIRE MESH SCREEN 300 CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE OF AIR EXISTING TO BE REMOVED 4 ABV AC ACC AD AFF AHU AL ALD ARCH 8 .BDD pc BHP 8MS BR BTU CCI CHEM CFF CFM _ CLG CO CONC COMP CONV CR CCCT CW DB DF DIA DN DX (E) EA EAT EDB EF _EFF EHC ELEV !EWB iEWT F 'F FBO FC FCC FD FLA FLR FPT FPI FRE FSD FT C.C. GPM H HC HF HP HR ID IN KW EAT _LBS ED LRA LWT _ MAT MAX MBH MCC MFG MiN HUA (N) NC NFA NIC NK NO NTS ABBREVIATIONS ABOVE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AIR COOLED CONDENSER ACCESS DOOR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT ACOUSTICAL LINING AUTOMATIC LOUVER DAMPER ARCHITECTURAL BOILER BACK DRAFT DAMPER BOTTOM GRILLE BRAKE HORSEPOWER BUILDING MANAGEN.NT SYSTEM BOTTOM REGISTER BRITISH THERMAL UNIT CEILING DIFFUSER CHEMICAL CAP FOR FUTURE CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CEILING GRILLE CEILING CLEAN OUT (DOOR) CONCRETE COMPRESSOR CONVECTOR CEIUNG REGISTER CLOSED CIRCUIT COOLING TOWER CONDENSER WATER DROP DRY BULB DUCT FURNACE DIAMETER DOWN DIRECT EXPANSION EXISTING TO REMAIN EXHAUST AIR ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE ENTERING DRY BULB EXHAUST FAN EFFICIENCY ELECTRIC HEATING COIL ELEVATOR ENTERING WET BULB ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE FILTER DEGREES FAHRENHEIT FURNISHED BY OTHERS FLEXIBLE CONNECTION FIRE CONTROL CENTER FIRE DAMPER FULL LOAD AMPERES FLOOR FAN POWER TERMINAL FINS PER INCH FIRE RATED ENCLOSURE COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER FEET GENERAL CONTRACTOR GALLONS PER MINUTE HUMIDIFIER HEATING COIL HEATING FURNACE HORSE POWER HOUR INSIDE DIMENSION INCHES KILOWATT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE POUNDS LINEAR DIFFUSER (CEIUNG, WALL, SILL & FLOOR) LOCKED ROTOR AMPERES LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MIXED AIR TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM THOUSAND BTU PER HOUR MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MANUFACTURER MINIMUM MAKE UP AIR UNIT NEW NORMALLY CLOSED NET FREE AREA NOT IN CONTRACT NECK NORMALLY OPEN NOT TO SCALE 111E3111 r /(X12 r f leo +i L V V VVV` ISO c; 9 1►E LEGEND SLOPING RISE IN DUCTWORK SLOPING DROP IN DUCTWORK DUCT SIZE (CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSION) FIRST FIGURE INDICATES PLAN SIZE ROUND DUCT DIAMETER SIZE OVAL DUCT SIZE ACOUSTIC LINING IN DUCT (SIZE NOTED INDICATES INSIDE DIMENSIONS) FLEXIBLE CONNECTION IN DUCT FLEXIBLE DUCT VOLUME DAMPER IN DUCT AUTOMATIC LOUVER DAMPER FUSIBLE LINK FIRE DAMPER WITH DUCT ACCESS DOOR SMOKE DAMPER WITH DUCT ACCESS DOOR COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER WITH DUCT ACCESS DOOR BACK DRAFT DAMPER WITH DUCT ACCESS DOOR DUCT ACCESS DOOR ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES DUCT SPLIT WITH SPLIT SIZE BRANCH TAKEOFF WITH VOLUME DAMPER RADIUS ELBOW DUCT MOUNTED HEATING COIL, WITH DUCT ACCESS DOOR UPSTREAM OF HEATING COIL. SLOT DIFFUc'C.R FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT CEILING DIFFUSER CEIUNG DIFFUSER WITH FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION RETURN REGISTER OR GRILLE RETURN REGISTER OR GRILLE WITH FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION NEW WORK EXISTING WORK EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED POINT OF CONNECTION TO EXISTING WORK DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR THERMOSTAT WITH ZONE OR EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION HUMIDISTAT WITH HUMIDIFIER DESIGNATION DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SUPPLIED BY ELECTRICAL TRADE, INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL TRADE. LOUVER 0008 (SQUARE FEET INDICATED) SQUARE FEET EMERGENCY BREAK GLASS SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT SHUT -DOWN FLOW SWITCH 1 -WAY BLOW 2 -WAY BLC'W 3 -WAY BLOW 4 -WAY BLOW c 3.4. 4.-0 t C -� ( S E DETAIL DESIGNATION M2.1� < CQ- 1.12X1,2 (550) CT EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION Sum ---> Li 11 124 _4 f TPG 12x12 .;w0 12X12 1 j CONCENTRIC REDUCER -- ECCENTRIC REDUCER UNION CAPPED PIPE WITH SHUT -OFF VALVE DIRT POCKET 'Y" TYPE STRAINER i Y" TYPE STRAINER WITH HOSE END BLOW OFF VALVE Mai - 1E!) TOP PIPE CONNECTION SLOPED CHANGED IN PIPE ELEVATION PITCH PIPE DOWN IN DIRECTION OF FLOW PUMP PIPING FLEXIBLE CONNECTION i CONDENSER WA I LR SUPPLY CONDENSER WATER RETURN ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW DRAIN LINE VENT UNE PIPE ANCHOR rs PIPE GUIDE LEGEND i PIPE EXPANSION JOINT EXPANSION LOOP (SIZE) EL80W TURNED UP ELBOW TURNED DOWN BOTTOM PIPE CONNECTION . GATE VALVE GLOBE VALVE CHECK VALVE AUTOMATIC 2 -WAY CONTROL VALVE AUTOMATIC 3 -WAY CONTROL VALVE - 'RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (PRY) LUBRICATED PLUG VALVE AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVE MANUAL AIR VENT AUTOMATIC AIR VENT r WELL THERMOMETER t - P RESSURE GAUGE AND GAUGE COCK TEMPERATURE- PkESSURE TEST rITTING RISER DESIGNATION SECTION DESIGNATION 1 .1 3 -24 TERMINAL UNIT - -THE NUMBER ON THE FLOOR DESIGNATION L- ---- -rLOOR OR LEVEL -� -• EQUIPMENT TYPE ._/ EQUIPMENT NUMBER TAPE AIR OUTLET /INLET ,CD- 1 .1 2 X 12 -NECK OR FACE DEVICE DESIGNATION (5 50) SIZE CFM SUPPLY REGISTER WITH AIR OUTLET DEVICE DESIGNATION RETURN OR EXHAUST REGISTER OR GRILLE WITH AIR INLET DEVICE DESIGNATION WALL OPENING IN WALL ABOVE HUNG CEIUNG (SIZE) RECTANGULAR SUPPLY DUCT UP RECTANGULAR SUPPLY DUCT DOWN RECTANGULAR RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT UP RECTANGULAR RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT DOWN ROUND DUCT, UP ROUND DUCT, DOWN BEAM PENETRATION .;r RISER SERVICE RISER HUMBER SECTION NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER •- DETAIL NUMBER • , DRAWING NUMBER TRANSFER GRILLES ON BOTH SIDES OF PARTITION OR WALL (SIZE) -y- - --- . _..�...._ •••••■ _ . _.w► 2001 "ASHINGTON STATE EN Y CODE (WSEC) G PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: 1. 100X AIR OR WATER ECONOMIZERS FOR AC -1 & 2 AND CRAC -1 THROUGH 8 AS PER SECTION 1413 OF THE 2001 WSEC. 2. CONTROLS TO PREVENT SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING AS PER SECTION 1435 OF THE 2001 WSEC. REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 15985 FOR DETAILS. 3. EQUIPMENT WITH MINIMUM PERFORMANCES AT THE SPECIFIED RATING CONDITIONS OF NOT LESS THAN T'OSE SHOWN IN TABLES 14 -1A THROUGH 14-1G OF THE 2001 WSEC. , 4. CONTROLS WITH 5'F MINIMUM DEADBAND PER SECTION 1412.2 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15985 FOR DETAILS. 5. NIGHT SETBACK AND SEVEN DAY CLOCK FOR ALL CONTROL FUNCTIONS AS PER SECTION 1412.4 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15985 FOR DETAILS. t 6. AUTOMATIC DAMPERS AND CONTROLS AS PER SECTION 1412.4.1 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS 15771, 159 AND 1 x385 FOR DETAILS. 7. OPTIMUM START STOP CONTROLS PER SECTION 1412.4.2 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15985 FOR DETAILS. $. CONTROLS T MUDULATE 100% AIR ECONOMIZER BASED ON OUTSIDE AIR CONDITIONS AS PER SECTION 1413.2 OF THE WSEC SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION ' 5985 FOR DETAILS. 9. HVAC SYSTEM CONTROLS THAT ALLOW THE AIF AND WATER ECONOMIZERS TO OPERATE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH MECHANICAL '.:00UNG SYSTEMS PER SECTION 1413.3 OF THE WSEC. 10. DUCT SEALING AS REQUIRED BY SECTION 1414.' OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15800 FOR DETAILS. 11. DUCT AND PIPING INSULATION AS REQUIRED BY SECTIONS 1414.2 AND 1415.1 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15250 FOR DETAILS. 12. RECORD DRAWINGS AND OPERATING MANUALS AS PER SECTIONS 1416.1 AND 1416.2 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15010 FOR DETAILS. 13. AIR AND WATER BALANCING AS PER SECTIONS 1416.3.2 AND 1416.3.3 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15990 FOR DETAILS. 14. SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING AS PER SECTION 1416.4 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS 15991, 15992 AND 15993 FOR DETAILS. 15. ELECTRIC MOTOR EFFICIENCIES AS PER SECTION 1437 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15170 FOR DETAILS. 16. AUTOMATIC SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE RESET AS PER SECTION 1432.1 OF THE 2001 WSEC. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15985 FOR DETAILS. BY Get Nhar A 011416 IME WS To R P R1G- FILE COPY I understand that the Plan Check approvals are , subject to errors and omissions and approval of plans does not authorize the violation of any adopted code or ordinance. Receipt of con- tractor's copy of approved plums adcna*Nedged• Or( Tu ltw° ti•PRoy OEC 22 AS NOT SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: 0 MECHANICAL O ECTRICAL :- UMB1NG i.. sP1P1NG CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION CORRECTION LTRO_„1 , i 158 1 •.4161111 _ _., FAN SCHEDULE (SPEC SECTION 15860) AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS SCHEDULE (SPEC SECTION 15940) DESIGNATION MANUF. MODEL NUMBER TYPE OF SERVICE FACE DIMENSIONS REMARKS (NECK SIZE /CFM RANGE) SD -1 NAILOR 57501 SUPPLY 24 " -L, 2 -SLOT PAINT ALL EXPOSED OR VISIBLE SURFACES FLAT BLACK SD -2 NAILOR 57501 SUPPLY 48 " -L, 2 -SLOT PAINT ALL EXPOSED OR VISIBLE SURFACES FLAT BLACK CD -1 NAILOR RNS SUPPLY 12 "x12" (4 "0/0- 120CFM, 6 "0/121- 170CFM, 8 "0/171- 350CFM, ) CD -2 NAILOR RNS SUPPLY 24 "x24" SEE "SUPPLY 24x24 DIFFUSER" TABLE FOR NECK, SAME SHEET • CR -1 NAILOR 4360 RETURN 24 "x24" TYPE L FOR LAY -IN CEILINGS AND TYPE S FOR GYP CEILINGS; SEE "RETURN 24x24 GRILLE" TABLE FOR NECK, SAME SHEET FD -1 TATE PERF 1250 SUPPLY 24 " x24" PROVIDE WITH OPTIONAL EALANCING DAMPER - NOTE: 1. COORDINATE BORDER /TRIM TYPE WITH ARCH CLG TYPE FAN SCHEDULE (SPEC SECTION 15860) DESIGNATION LOCATION/ SERVICE AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE • AIR COOLED CONDENSER DESIGNATION / MODEL NUMBER SUPPLY CFM DX COOUNG f LA VOLTAGE/ PHASE OPERATING WEIGHT (Ibs) DESIGNATION - MANUF./ MODEL NUMBER COOLING CAPACITY MBH AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE DB 'F /WB'F 1 OPERATING WEIGHT (LBS) F'U! i t I VOLTAGE/ / PHAS . REMARKS NOTES 1,2 (IN WG TOTAL ) TO L CAPACITY MBH SENSIBLE SE S BLE CAPACITY MBH EAT DB /WB �F CRAG -1 &2 MMD36E X0080 1250 0.3 33 27 72/60 23.6 277, � 1 250 CU-1&2 A2 1 UEBERT/ PFHO37A -YLO 33 95 200 12.8 208 � �- 3 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE CONDENSATE PUMP. 2. AIR DISTRIBUTION PLENUM. 3. WALL MOUNTED MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM. , FAN SCHEDULE (SPEC SECTION 15860) DESIGNATION LOCATION/ SERVICE MANUF. MODEL NUMBER TYPE CFM STATIC PRESSURE (IN WG) WHEEL SIZE (IN) RPM BHP I4OTOR REMARKS NP (WATTS) VOLTAGE/ PHASE EF -1 ROOF/ TOILET EXHAUST GREENHECK/ GB131 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF 1500 .250 - 1200 .20 1 /4 120 �- 1 CONSTANT FLOW �� -1 PLENUM/ DOCK TRANSFER GREENHECK/ CSP -218 GREENHECK/ CSP -224 / CABINET 150 .250 - 1400 J - " (1i�) - -' (83) 120 1 _ CONSTANT FLOW ,, TF- 2 PLENUM/ TELECOM RM CABINET 200 .250 - 1000 -- 120 1 - CONSTANT FLOW TF -3 PLENUM/ ELEC RM GREENHECK/ CSP -250 CABINET -- 450 _ 0.125 - 1000 - 140 (140) 120 1 CONSTANT FLOW CR -1 (24x24) RETURN /EXHAUST GRILLE CFM RANGE I INLET NECK SIZE (IN)/ (TOTAL BOX) DUCT CONNECTION SIZE 0 -250 6 "0, 6 "0 251 -400 8 "0, 8 "0 401 -500 10 "0, 10"0 501 -775 12 "0, 12 "0 776 -1000 14 "0, 14 "0 1001 -1200 16 "0, 16 "0 1201 -1600 18x18, 20 "0 1601 -2300 22x22, 24 "0 CD -2 ( 24x24) SUPPLY DIFFUSER T INLET NECK CFM RANGE SIZE (IN) 0 -300 6 "0 301 -450 8 "0 451 -650 10 "0 651 -900 12 "0 901 -1200 14 "0 1201 -1300 15 "0 DES IGNATION AC -1 AC -2 & 3 AC -4 MANUF. MODEL NUMBER TRANE - TCD420A4 TRANE - YCD211C4L0 TRANE - TCD420A4 M TOTAL AIR FLOW CfM 11,500 6,750 13,500 to MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR CFM 1100 100 200 3 U 11,500 6,750 13,500 SUPPLY FAN 1.5 1 1 683 7.8 10 YES 760 3.7 5 NO 696 9.6 15 8,900 6,750 NO 13,500 RELIEF FAN W /VFD 0.5 0.5 0.5 78q 835 915 5 5 5 YES YES YES • PAT r ROOFTOP PACKAGED AIR COND!TIONING UNIT (DX AIR CGOLED /GAS HEAT /RELIEF FAN) (SPEC SECTION 15771) DX COOUNG COIL UT CAPACITY O m H E to P.D. AIR IN. WG TOTAL AREA (SF) 78 63 55 53 396 335 0.2 $1.7 2 180 . 175 _ 180 63 z 75 , 6. 55 52 399 337 75 63 55 52 199 150 0.35 0.4 a1.7 180 DESIGNATION FPT -9 FPT -10 FPT -11 FPT -12 FPT -13 FPT -14 FPT -15 FPT -16 FPT -17 TYPE SERIES ROWS/ FINS PER FT. GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION 250 350 MANUF. MODEL NUMBER NAILOR 35SE PROVIDE SINGLE POINT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR ALL FPT UNITS. 460 3 ' 84.5 460 -4'' 46 X 3 89.9 X 460 X NO x YES x YES 5100 VARIABLE FLOW 2500 CONSTANT FLOW 5100 CONSTANT FLOW r 203 68 80 283 68 80 11= INLET SIZE DUCT SIZE (INCHES) COMPRESSOR SECTION 2 15 2 10/5 2 15 6 340 AIR COOLED CONDENSER PROP 1.1 PROP 0.5 Z PROP 1.1 340 , 100 240 .3 .6 .6 .6 FAN PRIMARY CFM INDUCTION CFM ESP • CFM - (IN WG) CAPACITY MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM ( FPT -1 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 8 650 650 195 455 0 0.25 4.5 - - - -- - - �_ - .� FPT -2 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 8 840 840 252 590 0 0.25 4.6 FPT -3 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1200 1200 360 840 0 0.25 6.0 2 FPT -4 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 6 480 145 335 0 0.25 ' 2.8 1 FPT -5 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1040 1040 310 730 0 0.:5 3.7 1 FPT -6 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 1 3 8 520 520 155 365 0 0.25 3.2 1 FPT - -7 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 6 310 ' 310 90 220 0 0.25 1.4 '1 1 4-- - ..-- -_ ..► - -4 � FPT -8 SERIES . NAILOR 35SEST 3 . 8 670 670 200 470 0 0.25 2.5 1 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1120 1 1120 ' 335 785 0 0.25 5.0 2 ♦-- SERIES , NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1380 1380 415 965 0 0.25 6.2 . 2 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 7 14 1 2880 2880 865 2015 O 0.25 9.1 0.25 1.8 ._......:_.... -- - -- ELECTRICAL DATA STARTER VOLTAGE/ UNIT DIV. DIV. PHASE MCA 15 16 DISCONNECT DIV. DIV. 15 16 EMERG. POWER WEIGHT (t.es) FAN POWERED TERMINAL WITH ELECTRIC COIL SCHEDULE (SPEC SECTION 15930) ELECTRIC COIL F AN CONTROL EAT LAT HP STEPS (i) (•F) 2 f SERIES i NAILOR 35SEST 3 SERIES - NAILOR 35SEST 3 --T-- SERIES NAILOR D35SEST 1 900 900 270 450 450 135 240 240 70 1 . VOLTAGE/ PHASE 65.5 87.2 1 1/2 19.75 277 ; w -- 65.5 82.6 1/2 20.11 277 60.5 81,4 3/4 12.72 480 65.5 84.2 1/2 13.61 277 65.5 76.6 3/4 18.86 2 �� 65.5 85.2 1/2 15.05 277 65.5 79.4 1/2 8.55 277 65.5 77.5 1/2 12.53 277 1 65.5 79.6 3/4 11.51 480 3 65.5 79.7 3/4 12.96 480 - 65.5 75.5 203/4 21.85 480 3 65.5 82.2 1/2 10.00 V REMARKS REMARKS mr4 o DEC !►� fe„ tic►3 V • UNISYS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 A VE SET CONSTRUCTION / BID SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET Issue Description Dote NQ 21123500 DARES 1,29'04 ..M -0.1 NON 0 w i/ V �� �� •_ : P VON 1 4 , nr MECHANICAL SCHEDULES P III I FIack+Kwtz inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite X00 Seattle WA 98101 -2260 Tel (206) }Iy -g9pp Fax (2(16) 312 - 9901 1417 fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle. WA 981 01 -2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax (206) 342 --9901 `wsv . MP a, mW.: 11.26.03 10.14.03 09 30.03 09.24.03 09.12.03 PECIPIED "Ivy rxr T IMP . DEC 0 3 2003 .►. Otiowt AJ obi AN Omer Apprcwd Sods NQS ri UNIT HEATER (GAS HEAT) DESIGNATION F MANUF. MODEL NUMBER SUPPLY FAN f GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION I ELECTRICAL DATA STARTER DISCONNECT EMERG. POWER WEIGHT (LBS) REMARKS CFM RPM 1550 MOTOR HP 1/50 _ INPUT MBH 4 --- OUTPUT MBH EAT CO ----�_ LAT Cr) , VENT DIA. INCHES VOLTAGE/ UNIT PHASE FLA DIV. 1 S DIV. 16 DIV. 15 DIV. 16 UH -1 REZNOR FE -25 380 25 ` 20 44 93 , 4 120 1 1.9 X X NO NO 90 90 SEE NOTES BELOW UH-2 REZNOR FE -50 650 1550 1/35 50 ^ 40 44 100 100 4 ! 120 2,2 X X SEE NOTES BELOW UH-3 & 4 REZNOR FE -75 980 1 1550 1/15 75 60 44 4 120 2.8 X X NO 100 SEE NOTES BELOW ' PROVIDE: 1. THERMOSTAT AND RELAY KIT 2. UNIT MOUNTED THERMOSTAT BRACKET DES IGNATION AC -1 AC -2 & 3 AC -4 MANUF. MODEL NUMBER TRANE - TCD420A4 TRANE - YCD211C4L0 TRANE - TCD420A4 M TOTAL AIR FLOW CfM 11,500 6,750 13,500 to MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR CFM 1100 100 200 3 U 11,500 6,750 13,500 SUPPLY FAN 1.5 1 1 683 7.8 10 YES 760 3.7 5 NO 696 9.6 15 8,900 6,750 NO 13,500 RELIEF FAN W /VFD 0.5 0.5 0.5 78q 835 915 5 5 5 YES YES YES • PAT r ROOFTOP PACKAGED AIR COND!TIONING UNIT (DX AIR CGOLED /GAS HEAT /RELIEF FAN) (SPEC SECTION 15771) DX COOUNG COIL UT CAPACITY O m H E to P.D. AIR IN. WG TOTAL AREA (SF) 78 63 55 53 396 335 0.2 $1.7 2 180 . 175 _ 180 63 z 75 , 6. 55 52 399 337 75 63 55 52 199 150 0.35 0.4 a1.7 180 DESIGNATION FPT -9 FPT -10 FPT -11 FPT -12 FPT -13 FPT -14 FPT -15 FPT -16 FPT -17 TYPE SERIES ROWS/ FINS PER FT. GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION 250 350 MANUF. MODEL NUMBER NAILOR 35SE PROVIDE SINGLE POINT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR ALL FPT UNITS. 460 3 ' 84.5 460 -4'' 46 X 3 89.9 X 460 X NO x YES x YES 5100 VARIABLE FLOW 2500 CONSTANT FLOW 5100 CONSTANT FLOW r 203 68 80 283 68 80 11= INLET SIZE DUCT SIZE (INCHES) COMPRESSOR SECTION 2 15 2 10/5 2 15 6 340 AIR COOLED CONDENSER PROP 1.1 PROP 0.5 Z PROP 1.1 340 , 100 240 .3 .6 .6 .6 FAN PRIMARY CFM INDUCTION CFM ESP • CFM - (IN WG) CAPACITY MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM ( FPT -1 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 8 650 650 195 455 0 0.25 4.5 - - - -- - - �_ - .� FPT -2 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 8 840 840 252 590 0 0.25 4.6 FPT -3 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1200 1200 360 840 0 0.25 6.0 2 FPT -4 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 6 480 145 335 0 0.25 ' 2.8 1 FPT -5 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1040 1040 310 730 0 0.:5 3.7 1 FPT -6 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 1 3 8 520 520 155 365 0 0.25 3.2 1 FPT - -7 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 3 6 310 ' 310 90 220 0 0.25 1.4 '1 1 4-- - ..-- -_ ..► - -4 � FPT -8 SERIES . NAILOR 35SEST 3 . 8 670 670 200 470 0 0.25 2.5 1 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1120 1 1120 ' 335 785 0 0.25 5.0 2 ♦-- SERIES , NAILOR 35SEST 5 10 1380 1380 415 965 0 0.25 6.2 . 2 SERIES NAILOR 35SEST 7 14 1 2880 2880 865 2015 O 0.25 9.1 0.25 1.8 ._......:_.... -- - -- ELECTRICAL DATA STARTER VOLTAGE/ UNIT DIV. DIV. PHASE MCA 15 16 DISCONNECT DIV. DIV. 15 16 EMERG. POWER WEIGHT (t.es) FAN POWERED TERMINAL WITH ELECTRIC COIL SCHEDULE (SPEC SECTION 15930) ELECTRIC COIL F AN CONTROL EAT LAT HP STEPS (i) (•F) 2 f SERIES i NAILOR 35SEST 3 SERIES - NAILOR 35SEST 3 --T-- SERIES NAILOR D35SEST 1 900 900 270 450 450 135 240 240 70 1 . VOLTAGE/ PHASE 65.5 87.2 1 1/2 19.75 277 ; w -- 65.5 82.6 1/2 20.11 277 60.5 81,4 3/4 12.72 480 65.5 84.2 1/2 13.61 277 65.5 76.6 3/4 18.86 2 �� 65.5 85.2 1/2 15.05 277 65.5 79.4 1/2 8.55 277 65.5 77.5 1/2 12.53 277 1 65.5 79.6 3/4 11.51 480 3 65.5 79.7 3/4 12.96 480 - 65.5 75.5 203/4 21.85 480 3 65.5 82.2 1/2 10.00 V REMARKS REMARKS mr4 o DEC !►� fe„ tic►3 V • UNISYS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 A VE SET CONSTRUCTION / BID SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET Issue Description Dote NQ 21123500 DARES 1,29'04 ..M -0.1 NON 0 w i/ V �� �� •_ : P VON 1 4 , nr MECHANICAL SCHEDULES P III I FIack+Kwtz inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite X00 Seattle WA 98101 -2260 Tel (206) }Iy -g9pp Fax (2(16) 312 - 9901 1417 fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle. WA 981 01 -2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax (206) 342 --9901 `wsv . MP a, mW.: 11.26.03 10.14.03 09 30.03 09.24.03 09.12.03 PECIPIED "Ivy rxr T IMP . DEC 0 3 2003 .►. Otiowt AJ obi AN Omer Apprcwd Sods NQS ri Ph.0 eSs MOM - Metela _ _Deis 12/2/2003 CeeDiets the following ter M B design A a sgtrirtel•eape. T.lrsme induction permanently wired pdypllase motors from 1 hp to 200 hp bawq svn0vvnous speeds 013800. 1800 or 1200 rpm toffees one of Pe tampions below apples 1 Fo► BkMtearmg Dspamrnset flea - - �� Motor No re Locebn HP Type 'open/dosed) Dssaptlon of Appbcafon Of Um tiyrdl �80aed Mn Nan Full bed 1,7CMrrr AC 1 ` eat esacrs:CSTIOM seCTICM 161 Ida 401241.e. 70341044 394000 11500 Scour ALL MOTOR ervictesr:n SP4CIpIID Mt?T 40 r � Minimum efficiency ac•3e3 i aCeze TWO= aagtrlati0 DT SOCTIOM 143 212000 301000 6750 13500 *comp Irmo 11.00 ,.60 Applicant Phone 301.311 Her ac - t TRAM t4•42sA4 caw u3 lanie.t •stereo• -soeeo 33000 1250,N.A. l khdicals ae systanne 0n Plans f++diea4 tier nrnuttanea» hSStfr and soo8tw le pnofhibMsd kstssa t3ee d •xdpeore K N1aeEeQ 10.00 yes 1412 4 Heat _: • ui . aunt Scheduk Equp '0 Stand Name' 1 Madan Pb ' . . SMrh ToOM CF'M • dm err Eaono IrW Brun Output DPP E . 1412 4 2 01111 n's Abe sew 11C41.• 203000 5750 icon* 250000 203000 80.000 80.006 1412 6 Combustion hue WM 30 *e 28300 --- .► Scow 250000 2115000 17111 N- 1. 1 1 20000 380 .4 25000 20000 10.000 Ewa re-,a 40000 450 .A it 40000 01.008 0-344 wawa re.74 40000 980$.1 N- 0.0 00000 40.000 Fate Equipment Schedule 10 &and Wane' Modes MD OM 1 gp' WSW. Minimum Nominal Full-Load Efficiency bawler. of Serves Open Motors Mead wbloa Exceptions 1 Motors in systems designed b use more than one speed of a isle -speed motor 2 Molar abesdy Inducted n the efficiency requer ents for HVAC egupnert (Tubbs 14-1 M 14.2) a. Motors Chet are an inlays, part (I a not Belly removed end replaced of epeciMfzed process mutation, (I e. equipment w ich requites a specter motor, such as an explou,n- pmt motor). 4 Motors integral to • haled piece of equipment let w sc h no ell V g mote has been approved (h e If Oe only U L Irebng for the equipment is with a bss••fRorsnt mob► and Mere •s no energy -ei8r /ens molar wean) ! For motors dining an exoepbon. Ise molar and now releh excepeon applies . S NIc40110110 Speed 111Pilli 3.800 1 1.800 1,100 3.800 1 1,800 1 1 .20(1 HP ERte (11) 150• 0.13 Vacancy no 1.0 - ". 3 80.0 755 825 RIO 15 823 84.0 84.0 ' 82 S 84.0 85.5 20 84.0 84.0 855 84.0 84.0 88,3 3 0 84.0 84.5 815 85.5 87.5 £ 87.5 50 855 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87 5 7 5 87 5 88.5 MI5 815 89 5 _ 89.5 10 - 815 80.5 40.2 %.S 89.5 89.5 • 15 a 89.5 91.0 902 90.2 91.0 901 20 90.2 91.0 01.0 90.2 910 90.2 25 91 0 91,7 917 91.0 924 91. 30 91.0 _ 92.4 • 92.4 91.0 924 91 7 40 91 7 93.0 93.0 91.7 930 910 50 92 4 93.0 910 924 930 (13.0 60 910 • 93 6 • 916 93 0 936 93 6 75 - 93 0 94 1 93.6 90.0 941 93.6 100 930 94.1 94.1 93.6 94 5 94.1 125 916 94 5 941 94 5 94.5 941 150 916 990 94.5 94.5 950 95.0 200 - 94 5 95 0 94 5 950 95 0 95 0 Equipment Schedules The loawno mice net•ori 4 required o to int:Grpome d wrei ohs mechanics equipment scheduler on tae pans. Fur propels *Moot plenk lien the required ntormanon bwbw, - rc Cooling Equipment Schedule twig, ID Word Name' Medd No comply] go," Tow CFM OSA Ctrl or Foam BEER or EER rue 1,7CMrrr AC 1 r• . a . 70341044 394000 11500 Scour 4.70 IIeeY . arts [M. Minimum efficiency ac•3e3 tears Tm311C44.e 212000 301000 6750 13500 *comp Irmo 11.00 ,.60 Applicant Phone 301.311 Her ac - t TRAM t4•42sA4 caw u3 lanie.t •stereo• -soeeo 33000 1250,N.A. l khdicals ae systanne 0n Plans f++diea4 tier nrnuttanea» hSStfr and soo8tw le pnofhibMsd kstssa t3ee d •xdpeore K N1aeEeQ 10.00 yes 1412 4 Heat _: • ui . aunt Scheduk Equp '0 Stand Name' 1 Madan Pb ' . . SMrh ToOM CF'M • dm err Eaono IrW Brun Output DPP E . 1412 4 2 01111 n's Abe sew 11C41.• 203000 5750 icon* 250000 203000 80.000 80.006 1412 6 Combustion hue WM 30 *e 28300 --- .► Scow 250000 2115000 17111 N- 1. 1 1 20000 380 .4 25000 20000 10.000 Ewa re-,a 40000 450 .A 50000 40000 01.008 0-344 wawa re.74 40000 980$.1 N- 0.0 00000 40.000 Fate Equipment Schedule 10 &and Wane' Modes MD OM 1 gp' WSW. Flow CoArvr bawler. of Serves IN' - I 4 1a11 JI , 1500' 0.25 0.25 cr seer to 1 •reeaeeett css -eta 150• 0.13 0.15 cw .140•0 ". 3 weea•ee• err 114 200 0.13 0.11 c• rte' • Project Info - 11/44K1 .. Address wins - eal.at. M Meal.lg Only C d003 chin MS09 tierS• p 13/3/2003 ter y d l Building Depart/me e Notes Mal mei 444.61441 wy 1401.1424) Equipment parforr3a )L* 14'1 ' r• . a . iisline4 se HMI Pt 0 $ l c Ng a cip list heel pumps On schedule Setback Si Mhul'df Apparent Name IIeeY . arts [M. Minimum efficiency Equipment sdmee:as with type, cepsaty, efRO•ncy T Appian- Alias 141+ he. h• a.e. e444e• toe ISM .ie. h.m 411•1 Applicant Phone 301.311 Her T N• I 1 N - 0. ••• 1433 yea System Description See Section 1421 to fi0 desapeon of Setae SysIern gualifica.Ons. If ►see.ngiccooli ng a COOb l9 Oedy ❑ comurt Yon DAN cooled? 0 Packaged sys' 7 <54.000 Beet L ! sate system? CI Economizer included? lOr 1900 dm? M Meal.lg Only C d003 chin 0 4 70% outride ale? Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH -CHK r.N. ..i .. .•luny .A v e re... �� .r..e. -. M1'J Pf Address Weirs - WOW la r aiS 12/2/2003 The 1011owmg twnnptOn a eecealary b shock • mechanical permit apwcaron Its corttpUanoe with the rnedwirticai wpdMn*3t1 In Mho Waehlnplon Stole Nonmedsnt*3 Enemy Code Avuktillty yes 0. n.a.) 00de I Section I Cwiponattt I locab� 'Information Required en Plans l Building Depart/me e Notes HVAC REGUIREMENa(Sections 1401.1424) Equipment parforr3a )L* 14'1 ' r• . a . • 411 4 Pt 0 $ l c Ng a cip list heel pumps On schedule Setback Si Mhul'df ye. •411.1 Minimum efficiency Equipment sdmee:as with type, cepsaty, efRO•ncy te e- 0.0 India*, submallc teem t4 12 •+V AC oe boss yea "412 1 Temperature vines Dnaala•id control Indicate iocaltartl On Mee , inmost, 5 degree dearlbarid minimum T N• I 1 N - 0. ••• 1433 yea '412 2 P . a • 1 412 3 Hurreckty control InOlcato hurrdh*ctat l khdicals ae systanne 0n Plans f++diea4 tier nrnuttanea» hSStfr and soo8tw le pnofhibMsd kstssa t3ee d •xdpeore K N1aeEeQ at o • � •• yes 1412 4 Aultmsee setback - -�� Indicate thermostat with night saber* and 7 dill. day types N- 0.0 . a G O roe 1412 4.1 Daemers tnaicate damper kleiton and atiomebc controls ' - ~ yes 1412 4 2 01111 n's Abe fndicete optimum sine centrob Indicate microprocessor processor on ennostat schedule m N - 0 . 0 `-----.. 0 . • . 1412. i4.at pump comic ic n . a . 1412 6 Combustion hue Indicate rlodtlatug a staged coned Indicts% VAV, unheelsdrun000led or heat roc makeup i ► --- .► Iwo 1412 7 Ralancilg Indicate t andng fea.Mes an plans N- 1. 1 h . a. +427 Thermostat interlock I E Indicate trhennosfal interim/ an Wens ' Equipment yes 142 cr e1Ortters schedule N-0 . 0 1 1413 Air economizers Y 1413 • Op•r11on Indicate 100% capable on schedule N- 0.0 Ye 1411 2 Control Indicate contras able to evaluate outside as N- 0 .0 y. 1413 3 ntegraled operabon Indicate capability for lames cooling ei- 0.0 1414 DucOrlg sytterns - yea 1414 1 Duct sealing Indictee seabmg neceosary i N- C .0 e yea 1414 2 Duct hnsulatlon Indicate R•vaue of Insulation on duct N- 0.0 ye a ^� 1413 1 Piping mnsllebon Irickeet0 R - vaIu• of emulation nn piping N-0.0 1416 Completion Requrements Is 0 0 yea yes _ 1416.152 Drawings b Manuals Indicate requirement for record *swings and operabn dots -� 1416 3 2 Air Balancing Inchoate err► system beano requirements r N- 0.0 n • . ..116 3,3 14 6 Hydronit Raining Indicate hyd orec system belance 'Oguirermenb yes Commrssarwq Indicate requirements for conemssiorn and ng prelim. Report N - 0.0 N 1 yea 1424 Separate ale sys Indicate separate sysbwms on plans Medi Sum Form Completed and attached Equipment schedule with types k m0utroufput eleaency, elm. hp, economizer ' SERVICE WATER HEATING , AND HEATED Serl'cm wafer rep Elec. water healer POOLS (Sections 1440 - 1454) Inchoate R -10 insulation under tank 1440 1441 n . • . .. n • . 1442 Shut -elf controls indicate aubmatic shut of, - 1443 Pipe r. indicafe R -value of insulation on 0101119 h • • • 1453 Pool healer ountrcmtt � Indeute switch and 6: degree conic) n . • . « 1454 1454 �Pooxs V Pool covers - tedreate Indicate vapor reta►dalt cover n . a . 904 degrees r2.12 pin cover Mecham( (ii ('t>rtll)1(e Sy,-terll', CC he( klist MECH COMP - ! -.-.w .ed. e.Qne...re Orh.. 6 '.. r Project Address _ wrzm • fetus t a Dole 12/2/2003 The Meowing additional infontrson Is necessary ID deck a mechanics( Welt app_cMion for a =Tidal lhadoleical syslarn for oomph na valet the modelled rugt•remenb M Pe Wallwhgbn St* Nonresidential Energy C ode. Use the checklist es 1 reference for rotas added to the mechanical drawings {sae the 1MECH- CHK dtaduW b additional system requirements) Tits nbmkallon must be on dm plans elm this O due official road d the permit Hewing the kt&ormalion In female speolc.eeone alene is NOT an s_OepNbb alternators Fa DOpit rent U$0 . Applicability Code m no. na ) SecYOn Component ADDITIONAL CNECKUST ITEMS FOR Intorn4Mon Required Lricati0n an Plan f i Being Depxl eN Noes COMPLEX SYSTEMS ONLY --..... n e ' 1431 1 Field aeesvn sys. Pro lds Cakstasons n. a. 1432 1 Setback Si Mhul'df Indicate ssperals systems Or show 'touter devices on plans r. 1432 2 1 Art system reset India*, submallc teem N- o, o 0.4. 1432.2 . Hyd m e systems newt Indicate aulornsec reset ' ••• 1433 Eoonomnoar's Indicate economizer on equTprreniecaidule or amide calculations to Justify esenpbh T N- 0.0 a. a . 1434 - Se�arale a< eye Sense M9 i 1yg, l khdicals ae systanne 0n Plans f++diea4 tier nrnuttanea» hSStfr and soo8tw le pnofhibMsd kstssa t3ee d •xdpeore K N1aeEeQ at o • � •• 3^e 1435 _ a. a . 1436 Heat recovery kdkaM heat reo0mlery om pins. oomtperb aced attedr hest rxCOVery rMklulasOrts y 1437 • Elec molar etlk elEt2+MOT or Equip Sdhedule with hp rpm. efficiency N 1r . 1438 Vane* goer sys Nldicele venal* Bow on fan and pump schedules . M- 0.1 1439 1 n Hoods Indictee wi oisd and unhealed make -up all � 1430 2 l e rw. i• .•...rL• ice.. Fume Hoods r.. _..�_ .��....a- Indicts% VAV, unheelsdrun000led or heat roc makeup i ► --- .► _ 1 2001 Washsnglon State Nr'nres dential Energy Code Compliance Form 4- AI 2001 Wash' ton Stag Norweseoenbal Fiver(' Code Cornsliahnce Form Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist lint Y4ar.eravh Suir • Urn! MECH -CHK Mechanical - General Requirements 1411.1 General. E gunmen, shall have a rnnvnum perbmnenc• at 111e specified rating conditions riot less bare toe views showy, m Tao 14.1 through 14 -3 If a naeonauy recognized oertecatton program mists ear a product cowered n Tables 14 1 dowse e 14.3 and d includes proY!ssm tot verification and detainee of equipment etectency ratings glen the product seal be listed in to Oeniecatrol program 1411.2 Raeng Conditions: cooling seinenent shat be rated at API test Conditions and procedures when available '(mere no applscable pecedl$es exist Wile shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer 1411.3 Comblealion Space and Smoke Wear I•Nadng: Fcr combination speee and service water heaters wen a prncnpal function of providing space heat. M Confined Amore Mooney !CAE) may be takula*d by mere ASHRAE Saniar>y 124199; Storage ware• heelers used in combnsbon space heat and win!' near epplestems shoo hew eerier en Energy FAebt (Ell or a CAE of not tens Man the toIov .ng EF CAE 4 S0 gal swaps 0 5e 0.71 B0to7o 057 071 Q i• 70 gal storage 1 C 55 0 70 1411.4 Packaged Electric H.Ming •410 CoaiMg Equipment Packaged etectnc equipment prowling bole reatng and cooing with a total coring capacity premier than 20.000 Stub steal be a heat pump Exception: Unelefled equipment showier, a cabinets used e asily to persanel wrens service taukbes. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Twrnisem use Controls iiach srslen shit be provided weth at Nest one li mperslurr coned dev ce Each tone shall be crowded by In tv, a: ohenrwst.ajc controls responding to lemperasar• worn Pe tot AI a minimum. each fluor of a Isidro she be considered as a separsM tone. 1412.2 DeedeenO Conlrole Mee uald N o nirol both minion hsw,ng and cooling. 2000 Ihsenostatrc controls shoe be capable of a osadband o' et !west 5 degrees F wlr.n mesa the suppry of heeling and cooing energy to the zone Ie she off or reduced to a minimum ' Special ocarpelcy. Masciel usage or code requirements *hew deadband controls are not Wevolllehl 2 Widnes complying *eh Senor 1141 4 1 m lee proposed bulldog energy analyst heebno and cooling t s wroslat meows ere set to tae same iemperslure between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive mind assumed lobe eoneent throughout tae year 3. Thermostats Pei require manual changeover between Meting and coolie modes 1412.3 Humidity Castries: M s syebne es equipped v l e a mans 40r eddxg morst.re a huidors she be prowled 1412.4 Setback and Shen -Oft. 14VAC systems stet be equipped Mei e.rbmatrc cuntrds capable el accomplisher; a reduction of energy use trough Control whack a equipment shuld wn dummy penal* of noisome er ehernele use of the spaces served by tin systems. Tee anlomoec eNlrols dram here a 'llrarhwe seven -fay dot* and be capable of berm est tom seven Ailletent day types per week Exceelloe 1 Systems see deg suNe wned1 mums salmmurvs Opera11on al Ilse sortie Worwer.aue 2. Equipment van tell toed durance 412 kW (6 826 S.siln) or less rem be OWlialled IN readily accessible neemrd oeMoum melee 1412 4.1 pemp•rs. Ou11/s sir Ill ies tram Octets sir/ eke 01411811 earwig oprteloned sacs Mn11 Of stuellied awl dampers Wien calm aIlmna0eaBp wham the system a off er upon poem bikes Escepdens: 1 Systems shoving Mess a tech woe asrdnuols eptleeor 2 CONtbtsese err tte8abes 1412 4.2 Optbeen Start Ceseele: Healing and anew Mys ere w1A demon supply ea Ca -Jhr4 Ire0r4drg 10000 clrn flee hem speeur Part control Optimum star canines Male be designed le alaane8lMy 111104. flee Meal tees Man eMAC system exit dig on brow Me some M dewed oomph* lentee ebee levels mmaedlMety betel uAesmrad occupancy TAe antra MpMen stall as a rea•eeae. bi a ammo, d os tlohwnce Oelween ,wletle tenloereb.e end 0oetple0 tw/rt cad M Mrnorre ed ante pros N ethedefen •talseacy 1412.5 Hest rump Controls: Urliery e' cooled heat mimes shall metier aeicroprooessor commas that minimum 44.0 014.40.11911 heel usage owing sin - 430 se1 -up. and Meow weapons These camerae shat ante-male reed for heat end use commission heating es Dee test stage of heal Camels shat indurate weer sepplementsl Meting a berg used Pror•Oh visual means fe.e . LED eleacatorsl 1412.6 Combustion Heinen Equipment Commis: ( iereusIOn Heeling eq,,ement with a capacity over 225 000 Blurb Viso nave m0tlwe.ng a staged co busWn conb0i. Exceptions 1 Bothers 2. Radiant Heaters 1412.7 S.*nehw: Fach of sue ouNN or ale Or ester lemenel device snail have a means br baian*q including but not 'mood b. demean lempetature and pressure test cornscteons died beaneng wives 1413 AIr EconowMzers 1413.1 Operation: As ecoNower rs she be of sulpmat ca fly modelxlirg outside and return air hampers to prow* '00 percent ache design supdy air as outside Or to reduce w sentinels tin need to mechanical cooling 14132 Control: Ar economizers .has be controeed by a coned syssem capable of del. mining 4 outside au can reset part was el the buddi g's cooing wads 1413.3 integrated Operation: Suadieg Neat! g Energy' Aar scenomrze s shall be capable of prowling p•reai cooing even when medicinal mechanical cooling le rmquUed to meet the terminate of the cooing bed Contras shah not preclude the !COMMON cymbal wren methane/ cooling is required sanulet• user E xception: Economizers on ndnsduel, direct expansion, cooling systems wen cemates riot memo then 73.000 BWe may include amerces nest snit simultaneous opera bon Of the economizer and mechanical cooing for Ore purpose of preventing b bxmrebon on 000trq coils 1414 Ducting Seams 1414.1 Sealing. Duct atom which as deigned b opstate M ere rtes above 1 R ince weer column siateC maws sham be sealed el accordance UdM1 Standwd RS -16 sent •1 seeing legume s es follows 1. Seale pressure 1r2 it b 2 .ides seat transverse Ores 2 Saes a ees 2 inches to 3 uncles. seal all transverse pees ere IoraPtudrruil sews 3. SIMC meant above 3 elehss. seal sit earleverse puree lerigiludmel seems and dud well pemeratbns Duct ripe Ina tine pressure sensor* tape shat not be used as Mee Primer, eeelent where dW3s are designed b operate at sale pressures d 1 Inch W C a greater 14142 lreuW.don: Duets and plan nrs Met ale pOMruteed and funtyol es pan or the bussing enrsbo s. by separating Maria space from exterior W oo. Pelll noel 4e appiceble riowereents of Chewier 13 Thes! lequVSarlents Include IstIMOn entlletalrnr melebrre control. am leak age and bulling enr.wpe resesotl levers u- heeled equipment rooms we combutbon ale louvers must be isolate! bona Me condemned space by 1214•4•10.1.1•1101 sateoes le a inwermum R.11 and any exterior emebpe sr*Ntrs pre Chaplet 13 Otlbrle sr ducts serving rnolrkluel WM* as ui v.dm less Wen 2.800 tiro of *one' tlwappty ex caps*/ shell be Yodeled N • thyinawn of P - 7 and ale am eeikaidered budding muskies ales eMSlae M -_ new we 011111tdered bulling envelope oriel (ley 1. Belie !led b M Ilse a ocean' em pmea0 a 3. ere sslMed roan the •Mean aims w eteoms11e shot -elf dormer eortkplynnp 0104 flout 1412 4 - floe eft ale as snots meet Mee moss Isere requirements. we nuns seem coriAa4ed epos seem own* 0111 tale 14-6 reememer4s Mermen and plweels Mum be Venn * imevrsed per Term tee. Receptions'. 1. Yhlten ea MAC esipme t t Usual le ducts min soleect b atederse8ltl. • Gooses ducteemi sem a same tin Mmes Hall soave Mfg Preen' Smarm 1115.1 pee •n: Peng **Is neeehied M acomemme ecru bile 144 E ICelleen: Proms aeMM11 Weis earn HVAC squeals* MOW pees wade Moe :wndehaad epics awl 0e imeel d in 10_._ .w wee Weitemlon 9110e plt Cede MAC 51 -241) 1e1s C•Nlolee*o Requr••ena -Warts AMC Seam me weft &gene Conwrvs..oneg G4401014 04 pMese•d lab t>Ae A•etmp damallialiIi t) Amptilliatt rr aletwltiN 4eefttevpsdales let NM. 0•11111lfmam wl esteetreontspap'nesaleest 46 • - tL *NW 1411 471 Abe e net Nat• , .ePM' 111 ri No*** 1w.rar. -a •".et Parr Carer Eecbon 1 432 2 std Wale Supply Ternperaluie Reese Reamed 700• Mh0•996. are Norend[neM romp Core Co•rrerrce raw • 7wi.ae6•Mq' , •0000(1 , - 2001 Wash ton Stale Nonres doltial E . • . Decision Flowchart Ilse tee fbtrdlWR b Oelern'nne how Oho requiem**, of the Complex Syslenxi °peon apply b the prONU. Refer b the Indicaled Code sections tin mere rxstpN/e iMan..bo t on the N ` ,aw d NW M . Are s Mo re. - Waging System ,- +.• No Sews Mope '..dlW 000 litun Zones i 'V I tie 2001 Washi on State Nortesrdentral E = • Code Compliance Form 41 Car., ore oataesr. --- .....- ...,...•∎. •j ,4. a n. . 410, I Swim we it mei sm a Oa • � .. .410, . sus eueisn ewe aeee►wy rgeprrrr � e � J e3. laew'm1 bower -• • 14.031111Mr over err . •.res frame 0 .444 M Rome Noun. • Y T YIN wee' i Yr err.r•ra - rr Hamm 4. 646 C. - ,neerr.taa . -�tti. �1 4 49604540100 MY• No t MA SI Here seeder 141 t 1 Egilpment MIMIC" Shall abl Meet Tes 14.1 1 ewer 14 - 1 1 1 wlt>•Aseanmbl EQupawnit Ohrrtv0.. tlern+r 1 pra�l.r �� i f f Code • •fiance Form EMats I 414411m WM 1 1 Ile Moir err •a ' t1DC / ti � ♦ self 4144•••• laser --r.. r if (continued on beck) t---..o 14 4 Morrre r sy.a { r-rJfmm. Cora M�w J 6.. _w .94 000 e.n Yes L lifter tact s.c: on 1431 1 1} CabWaane d Toil 1 On-be E rie mm input Dew Required - I 1 - _ sou 1 Alloeo �. ernewe v el m >--em-a• 1A � Th.-e! Meer rho. NW /C 'len Norose v $.1 1432 2 ShMOI3 4-. Reset Contras. Rrqurr0 4 Mechanical - Complex Systems (back) MECH -COMP •omEtenw.aw NOMP011 e s J Mechanical Summary aware MECH -SUM Project Description *novo t uovinc.• wow and features ❑Irhtluie, pans • 1Complunce Option '0 avanabce r As tiled ao0or4069 to Tabu 14.1, 14.: w 14.3 ' e 4Ic1ueed COP. HSPF Co ntautuon Ethos. or AFUE. Me Iloohcab* 4 Few oo eel ears venom are volumeemie, constant vows, 1C or vend* I0ex3 (VSI Mechanical Summary (back) MECH -SUM Decision Flowchart no `Complex Systems 2001 Washington State Nonresidential E 2001 Washrniglon State Nonresidential Energy Code CO TIOeiancs Form Variable volume air cooled DX AHU's and tan powered terminals 'lath electric resistance heating condition most of the space. Water cooed Luis omputer room AC units condition the process loads fed by a CW rewrote on rmaareq o0a ion ne mei do measronlre serum a is Solon 14i; Sample Syebm Currhpwa ttymlar41 (J Swerve Moues (See Decwaon Fkrwcham tow ) lax lealicahe►s Use wow MECH -SIN 4a sere 1roneetti Hewes ) Code Compliance Forrn Use pas flowchart to detwrllne if propct qualifies for Simper System Option If not. either Mee Conpeari System or Systems Analyse; Op11one must be used 7 < eys.' Type ex coo+ y *hone? m , p PDS Healing Only V , / ,./ .. *13C° dm? ' C <A s r Cooled .a Yes fife wice •'' SKI SKI no sec. 1421 1 Of)0 n71 1900 dm? Zee B 1423 0. M 1 1. %dem l Laic � Yea j Refer to MECH -COMAO Medlenkal Complex Systems b► assistance n delrnrehs which Complex Systems requiter/eft are apple: b Mrs protect M o3I' "& no no 1 � � Weems ' -> Speer Sec 1430 • Cirf ( F EC 22 wag 1 • U1ITISYS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 A • " \ W SET 11.26.03 CONSTRUCTION / 8D SET 10.14.03 PERMIT SET ' 09,30.03 PROGRESS SET 09.24 03 COORDINAT10N SET 09.12 03 Issue Description 1 Flack + Kurtz inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-7260 , t Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax. (206) 342 -9901 ' WSP A OW ewe 4.904 Dote ISOCIPUED ...NV -1 i A DEC 032003 • mer . .:04111 1 R groan Al God IAN Cum, ', io4 At 2i¢3503 _ Sate NiS MECHANICAL ENERGY CODE w FORMS ..M . � r .'t. '.L1t ar.ie•[tt:l1 f - iRi.:r: r ..r +, w` +- =l 5. '.�" �a�y""1•r'v..P'.. - '�'.."" . ..• wr/r n-tii ♦ r •- . r�Ap . .f:. �.. rib • • 1 • • 4 — 1 I ' - -.1 • • 40x20 FROM AC-2 ABOVE TERMINATED AT RAISED FLOOR ' t • • - - • .- • - • ' - --Front Front • • Front Front fir • I • — - L 7- 1 ' 1 .1 i • • • . : . - • i I _Front f s. ,1 1 • . • . 1 '- — -•;--- - "'- -:' - - ' '—'- - ' I i 1 . — -.."-- f 't 7 - ,-- t- ' ,..;.; ...T. It......:4, =.7 ,,-- • ' "''''''...: - , . • • 1, • - • - - 4:- l; • -- -4.-- • • It- •-• I` .• ; , ; .." - r • - • • • • . • __ Front • • • • • • • ro -1 - fr",1,,7 • Ai.• 4 • • — . _ . • : • i• j — ; 4 • • , r #. r * .4 l • , • • # fi■ 4 :— ..... _ •, i 4..-...._ - it,- .„.-.......li...... -............--.. . - .. . i t , • .1 ' , • . 44 • . I I fr • •-,-7.:- --- _-.'r_..;•,.,, -_ - - , 4t -- , - .; :'..7. :It' .:..47.::'.1.,...77 -4 (675) (TYP-20 • • Front •"' 1 • .101111111-. • , -77 = 7 - — • roe ••••• oar • - • - • ••••• - - - "7 . 4 . 4■,— - 4oxis I . • „ t - Front ‚ ''' ; • f : • ....: .1 • • ; • _ . • • 1 • 1, • • '. .. ... - ' -. r ''.".. - . 1 - .....••■•-...i 1... , f i i• ; f 1 .. 1....;,....1. -;.": .fl.. ... :....t1 ,, -,•_-rt• •,. ••■••■•••■•••••••••••—... -......■••••••■••••••••••• • - • • 1 • • -.4 - - 4 - ' . • • ; •-• • • - , A _ . vatr....imuPtresuauvvY.driw.f.,v-v-.3r)._,-.21aeir • ; ....... :4 t-471---:::-- 40x20 FROM AC-3 ABOVE TERMIPATED AT RAISED FLOOR • •• 1 1 . - : L 1 . - r- , • • i • . • • • I - I - • . • • I t • Agit, • „ • , • 7 • 1 . ; • ;.. • • - lir"' """ -1... - - • r - NUMBERED NOTES KE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION , • -, • •• ••• • I. -• 1 r .. 3 . ... , ill i . - 4 .... _ . - • .. : ei . ii i r .: ;'`. ff.,.. ......," - Jli '..., 1 :: 4 • . f . '......... ,... • 4 r •-• i'. ' I 7 'I' ' 4 Ir`" it i • .....) ..... ......• i V . - — ' • P t. ....4. — , 7- ' -.,+' '- al ; - -4, 1., . .., •1 ..! • . • ' 114 ••■• ' 14 ri . L. _ ; Sdi.li''ildr...1 , . • MOH4113a. 111...1411■•••••••••••••••• - ••••- • ' • — 1 - •mit , 1" • • !' - • , -Eft _ . 3 ': - - - St... yOr • V • I - I • • •- , r 4 Nto3 Ise) • c t• - V - • • • — ; • • • 41 • - .L. ••••• • - 7. L A. • •, ; • r • -• 6 • 4 t ee UNISYS •••■•• • • UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 Flack + Kurtz inc. 1417 Fourth AVf Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-2260 Tel (206) 342-9900 Fax (206) 342-9901 O WSP VW lbw WWI, 1 . SET 11.26.03 CONSTRUCTION ,/ DID SET 10.14.03 PERMIT SE? 09.30.03 PROGRESS SET 09.24 03 COORDINATION SET 09.12.03 Issue Description Dote OEM AJ �m& AN QOM tcpcmt RECEIVED 'SW (W 71 WM A DEC • 3 2003 1111114T cirM I Ilte. sed, 11!-I-0" MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN p AT GRADE ..olotOwiWmaideadlisosilair..06,44". tl".•:14V16.04110■11k4.,V4V&IINiiiiisoklik cai-1111‘01160•1116•1144tiles;211:.4qtaa 180 DOWN AL (E) ROOF ACCESS HATCH 9 • • • J 0 0 —4> f 0 < r - 4 : f • 1111-4-. - • 4 • • I. I I I I offle • 40. 4111104M MO 1,10 9 ?, • • ; -. 3 ■ (E) SKYLIGHTS TO REMAIN (TYP) • 40. REPLACE SKYLIGHT WITH GREENHECK FABRA SIZE. SET ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR FILL 40. REPLACE ;OUGHT WITH GREENHECK FABRA SIZE. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR FILL 0 PLENUM TEMPERATURE SENSOR NUMBERED NOTES 0 r __J — • • HOOD GRAVITY REM: 30x60 THRO OF SKYLIGHT AREA. SEE DETAIL HOOD GRAVITY WAKE; JOAO TH OF SKYLIGHT AREA. SEE DETAI 10/M-4.0 r L 0 0 ' I t 0 L__ flows° • - 1 .1 UNISYS )1 - ,. tateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 VE SET CONSTRUCTION / BID SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET EXPIRES t/29 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN Flack + Kurtz Inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-2260 Tel (206) 342-9900 r•lx. (206) 342-9901 WSP or • 11.26.03 10.14.03 09.30.03 09.24 03 09.12.03 Issue (*se-option Date Drawri Ai _God AN Oarlar trfcmi efrY 41 211123S0 1 AWN r 4.INTER DEC a 3 2003 t X.42. • • ••■••111...- . • V • e FPT - WITH REHEAT GRAVITY VENT PLENUM GRAVITY VENT NO SCA L LOCATED IN PLENUM (TYP -4) PRNAND AIR SECONDARY Ali ROOM THERMOSTAT AI ROOM TEMP AO) SETPOINT SUPPLY AIR NOT TO SCALE O AIR CONDITIONING UNIT CONTROL _ W _ (CRAG -1 & 2) RELIEF AIR DAMPER TO RELIEF AIR HOOD FROM OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE HOOD REUEF AIR DAMPER TO RELIEF AIR HOOD — FROM OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE HOOD AO iAINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER AO ' MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER AI RETURN AIR DAMPER DAMPER N AIR VFD REUEF ,F AN VFD REUEF AN AO 0 START /STOP STATUS ALARM AO SPEED AI CONSTANT VOLUME DX AIR HANDLING UNIT (AC- 2,3,4) START /STOP STATUS ALARM SPEED ME DX AIR HANDLING UNIT NO CALE GAS FURNACE HEATING ( D V TYPICAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS (EF , F- , -2, TF -3) VFD NOTES: 1. THE FAN ON -OFF CONTROL FROM BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PANEL. 2. FAN STATUS INDICATION VIA DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH. USE CURRENT SENSOR WHERE DIFFRENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES ARE NOT APPLICABLE. 1 ----6 - 0) START /STOP a) SMOKE — POWER, SIGNAL, © AND MCC INTERLOCK BY DIV 16. START, /STOP 0 STATUS © ALARM 0) SPEED a I a SMOKE IH SMOKE ITCH HI POWER, SIGNAL, AND MCC INTERLOCK BY DIV 16. 034v /573 POWER, SIGNAL, AND 1-- MCC INTERLOCK BY DIV 16. m SPACE REF POWER, SIGNAL, AND — MCC INTERLOCK BY i DI) DIV 16. REF TO OUTSID: MOUNT DUCT STATIC AS SHOWN ON DRAWING AI SPACE REF MOUNT DUCT STATIC AS SHOWN ON DRAWING EXHAUST FAN . REF TO OUTSIDE NO SC woo j C 2 2 03 NS Iqrt. mow Divea• NO SCALE NO SCALE'' UNISYS � Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 :a UNISYS 16 ji t4) MIA Oran Ai Oa& AN Flack + Kurtz Inc. 1417 Fourth Pet Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101 -2260 Tel (206) 342- -9900 Fax. (206) 342 -9901 VISP WI Sim .Wilmf A VE SET 11 26.03 CONSTRUCTION / BID SET 10.14.03 PERMIT SET 09 30.03 PROGRESS SET 09.24. COORDINATION SET 09.12.03 Issue Description Dote DEC • 23 sow alma 90m Approvd Scale t±RS MECHANICAL CONTROL DIAGRAMS 4 F w' ..M -3.0 .► • f START /STOP STATUS DI SUMMARY ALARM D --� ROOM TEMP CRAC UNIT • ODD DP 1 0) MAIN DUCT SECURITY BARRIER GRILLE SEE ARCH DRAWING FOR CURB AND FLASHING DETAILS (E) ROOF - AUTOMA TIC DAMPER GRAVITY VENT /RELIEF VOLUME DAMPER AT MAIN DUCT CONNECTION -- 0 • MINEEN 1111. 1 1111111•1111111111111111111i1 /1 SECURE GYP HARD CEILING CR -1 OR CD -2 GRAVITY VENT 30x60 SUSPENDED CEIUNG SUPPLY OR RETURN DUCT r 24x24 PLENUM FLEXIBLE DUCT COLLAR SLOT DIFFUSER WITH PATTERN CONTROL LINEAR AIR OUTLET CONNECTION TITUS SG -BG -FM SECURITY GRILLE 0 SECURITY GRILLE TITUS MODEL SG -BG -FM `- INSECT SCREEN P LENUM W/ 1 /2" FLAT BLACK AL 1 NOT TO SCALE EXTENC DOWN 1O' -O" FOR INTAKE HOODS; TERMINATE AFTER AUTOMATIC DAMPER FOR RELIEF HOODS I NOT TO SCALE EXTERIOR WALL WINDOW I NOT TO SCALE 7 SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPE MASON INDUSTRIES 3ON HANGER ROLL WYE TOWARD SLOT INLET NECK SUPPLY DIFFUSER ../ /e " ANGLE STAINLESS STEEL \ DRAW BAND Y2" MIN. WIDTH MIN. RADIUS (R) 1.5 TIMES NECK DIA. BALANCING DAMPER - FLEXIBLE DUCT. SAME AS DIFFUSER NECK SIZE MIN. LENGTH 3' MAX. LENGTH 6' BALANCING DAMPER. LOCATE AT BRANCH TAKE -OFF. r NOTE 4 - - Y SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT NOTE: 1. HANGER SPACING ALONG LENGTH OF UNIT TO BE AS FOLLOWS: MINIMUM - 2 HANGERS MAXIMUM SPACING 6' -0" 2. PROVIDE ADEQUATE SEISMIC CABLE BRACING TO RESIST MOTION IN ALL LATERAL DIRECTIONS 3. REFER TO SMACNA SEISMIC RESTRAINT MANUAL GUIDELINES (LATEST EDITION) FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 4. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. 5. SUBMIT ALL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT DETAIL FOR STRUC i UFAL PEVIEW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT WITH SEISMIC CABLES ROUND TAP TO ROUND MAIN "Y" LATERAL FITTING • 45' DIFFUSER CONNECTION DETAIL AIR FLOW TYPE III SEISMIC AIRCRAFT CABLE REFER TO SPECIFICATION I- 1/2"CLEAR MAX. R DUAL U -BOLT CABLE CLAMPS N.-CABLE EYELET LOCK NUT AND WASHER MAIN ROUND DUCT FLEXIBLE DUCT TO DIFFUSER ROUND DUCT COLLAR WITH 3 /6" RAISED BEAD AND BALANCING DAMPER BRANCH CONNECTIONS TO MAIN — LOW PRESSURE I NOT TO CALE DRAW BAND WITH CABLE SUPPORT ATTACHED TO SLAB ABOVE WHEN FLEX DUCT IS 5' OR LONGER STAINLESS STEEL DRAW BAND 1 /2" MIN. WIDTH CEILING TILE --- CEI LING TEE NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE SECONDARY ZONE DUCTWORK WITH MIN. 10' -0• OF 1" AL, LOW PRESSURE CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO PLANS FOR SIZE - FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT WITH ELECTRIC HEATING COIL. SEE SCHEDULE OF FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS (FPT) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. FPT RETURN AIR DUCT GENERAL NOTES TRANSITION TYP -1 0 SEE SCHEDULE - OR DWGS FOR SIZE PRIMARY AIR SUPPL i DUCTWORK. MEDIUM PRESSURE CONSTRUCTION REF. TO PLANS FOR SIZE NUMBERED NOTES FAN POWERED TERMINAL COIL TYPE BLOW - THROUGH (LOCATED ON DISCHARGE SIDE OF FAN) DRAW - THROUGH (LOCATED ON SUCTION SIDE OF FAN) DIELECTRIC FITTING (FOR COPPER PIPE APPLICATION ) CLEAN OUT PLUG, BOTH ENDS COOUNG COIL DRAIN PAN 1 " MINIMUM HI Fit " H1 (HEIGHT) MINIMUM " 0 NEGATIVE STATIC PRESSURE AT DRAIN PAN IN INCHES PLUS 1 INCH , COOLING COIL CONDENSATE TRAP 0 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL AND FAN CONTROL ENCLOSURE. TYP CONCENTRIC INLET REDUCER 1. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR DUCTWORK CONFIGURATION FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL FPT POWERED TERMINAL UNIT (FPT). REFER TO SCHEDULES FOR SPECIFIC FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT, ELECTRIC HEATING COILS, PRIMARY AIR SUPPLY, SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY AND FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 2. FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT (FPT) TO BE INSTALLED A MAXIMUM 2 -0" ABOVE CLC PLANE, COORDINATE FAN POWERED UNIT LOCATION WITH STRUCTURE AND ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED ACCESS TO MOTORS, FILTERS, ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL ON UNIT. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING WORKING CLEARANCES FREE OF PIPING, CONDUITS, DUCTS AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS. 1 MAINTAIN MINIMUM STRAIGHT DISTANCE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER OF FAN POWERED TERMINAL DEVICES. (2x INLET DIAMETER MINIMUM.) 2 SERVICE CLEARANCE TO BE 42" DEEP x FULL PANEL WIDTH IF UNIT POWERED TO THIS SIDE UNIT 150 VOLTS OR GREATER. (30" MINIMUM WIDTH) 3 VERIFY UNIT CONTROL POWER AND ELECTRICAL HEATER POWERED JUNCTION BOX LOCATIONS WITH UNIT MANUFACTURER. . 4 SIDE TAKE -OFF FITTING EQUAL TO "FLEXMASTER" MODEL STD (WITHOUT VOLUME DAMPER.) 5 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE ACCESS CLEARANCE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING UNDERSIDE OF FAN POWERED UNIT CLEAR OF CONSTRUCTION FOR BOTTOM ACCESS PANEL REMOVAL MANUFACTURER SHALL PROVIDE WARNING LABEL ON TOP AND BOTTOM OR WIRE. IF INDUCED AIR OPENING, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING A MINIMUM OF 20" CLEAR, FREE OF PIPING. CONDUIT, DUCTS AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS. 7 MINIMUM SIDE CLEARANCE SHALL BE 1' -0" (FOR MOTOR SERVICE ACCESS AS PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. (HEIGHT) POSITIVE STATIC PRESSURE AT DRAIN PAN IN INCHES TIMES 2 (2" MINIMUM) NEGATIVE STATIC PRESSURE AT DRAIN PAN IN INCHES PLUS 1 INCH OPEN END WITH VENT CAP ALL PIPE SIZED PER U.M.C. (1 1 /2" MINIMUM) SLOPE DOWN 1 /8" PER FOOT TURN DOWN OVER DRAIN, PROVIDE 1 AIR GAP OR UNIO CONNECTIONS TO CONDENSATE PUMP NO SCALE NOT Ti SCALE NOT USED e (E) BUILDING 4" HOUSEKEEPING PAD , PROVIDE 0.5" WIDE 3" LONG, ON 6" CENTERS. SLOTS AT BTM FOR DRAINAGE GENERATOR SECTION EXPANSION ANCHOR NEOPRENE PAD ALL AROUND AC UNIT SUPPORT BASE SUPPORT CURB. SEE ARCH PLANS - CONCRETE AC UNIT ,NOTES: 1. MOUNT UNIT DEAD LEVEL `-- BUILT UP ROOF GENERATOR DUCT SUPPORT ROOF MOUNTED AC UNIT SUPPORT I I. 'RADIATOR DISCHARGE AIR T VMS 60x72 CMU WALL ATTACH COUNTERFL4SIIING TC UNIT BASE WITH 1" WIDE S - ITCH WELD 012" O.C. AND MASTIC SEAL ALL AROUND WATERTIGHT GALV. STEEL PLATE e — GALV. S.M. SCREW r- 18 GA GALV. S.M. COUNTERF LASHING FLASHING AND CANT. � - ROOFING did;;;zort egrf 00 oic 22t° i NO SCALr NO SCALE NOT Ti SCA .• • w•- r.∎•.•M► • UNISYS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 • YE SET # No N23503 Tb CONSTRUCTION / BID SET PERM!' SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET hare Dincript ion MECH DETAIL Dan AJ Gac A Flack + Kurtz Inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax. (206) 342 -9901 ` YVSP nn DEC A32003 mmumalo chwierftrad toa, MS 11.26.03 10.14 03 09.30.03 09.24.03 09/172Q'53 Dote v' MM4 DRAWING LIST P -0.0 PLUMBING LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS p- to PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P - 2.0 FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN P -3.0 PLUMBING ENLAkGED PLAN P -4.0 PLUMBING ROOF PLAN I I, ITEM WC -1 WC -2 DF -1 SS -1 SK -1 FS -1 GO -1 HWM - CM -1 NB -1 WH -1 MV I 4 i IN IW JS JP L LOR M MAX MGA MG y MIN MS ..._.— MUG (N) NC NIC NO OD OST OS&Y PAV PD PD P /FT PG P:V POC r PRV PSI PSIG RD SA SAN SD SE SED SF SK SPD SP SPKR SS ST TOP TOS TPV TS TYP UON UP UR V VB VP VR VTR W — WC WH 7 DESCRIPTION WATER CLOSE - WATER CLOSET (ADA) UR -1 URINAL UP L -1 URINAL (ADA) LAVATORY (ADA) DRINKING FOUNTAIN (ADA) SERVICE SINK KITCHEN SINK (ADA) FLOOR SINK GARBAGE DISPOSAL HOT WATER MACHINE COFFEE MAKER WATER FILTER HOSE BIBB- INSIDE WALL HYDRANT - OUTSIDE MIXING VALVE EYE /FACE WASH DESCRIPTION INCH ABBREVIATIONS INDIRECT WASTE JANITOR'S SINK JOCKEY PUMP LAVATORY LEADER - -- - - - - -- - MANHOLE MEDICAL AIR COMPRESSOR MAC NUM MEDICAL GAS ALARM MEDICAL PRESSURE NATURAL GAS MINIMUM MCP SINK ME EICAL VACUUM PUMP NE A' NORMALLY CLOSED NOT IN THIS CONTRACT NORMALLY OPEN OVERFLOW DRAIN OVERFLOW STORM PIPING OUTSIDE SCREW & YOKE GATE VALVE PRE - ACTION VALVE PLANTER DRAIN PUMP DISCHARGE PITCH PER FOOT PRESSURE GAUGE POST INDICATING VALVE POINT OF CONNECTION PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (GAUGE) ROOF DRAIN SOIL SHOCK ABSORBER SANITARY SMOKE DETECTOR SEWAGE EJECTOR SEWAGE EJECTOR DISCHARGE SQUARE FEET SINK SUMP PUMP DISCHARGE SUMP PUMP SPRINKLER SERVICE SINK STORM PIPING TOP OF PIPE TOP OF SINK TRAP PRIMER VALVE TAMPER SWITCH TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UP (PENETRATES FLOOR SLAB) URINAL VENT VACUUM BREAKER VACUUM PUMP VENT RISE VENT THROJGH ROOF WASTE WATER CLOSET WALL HYDRANT ZONE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE I S CONNECTIONS V CW 1 HW 4" 2" 1 1/4" 4" 2" 1 2" 1 1 " 2 11/' 1 2" 11 /2" 1 /2" 2" 11 /2" 1 /2" 3" 2" 3 /a" 11 /2 W 3" 2" TO GD - -1 2" 11/2. - TO FD-1 LOCAT ION ELECTRIC WATER HEATER I 1MmrORTAL ROOM 4• Ih" REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 3/ 1 /2" REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. i CIO WALL MOUNTED. FLUSH VALVE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. SPPUANCE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. PLUMBER TO MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS. MAY, WATERSENTRY V. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. .l• %. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 3 "TEMPERED REFER 10 SPECIFICATIONS. WATER PLUMBING WATER HEATER SCHEDULE TAN CAPACITY CALMS) I RECOVERY RATE -._. 20 *BD _ AD AFF BLDG BOP BOB By CALC CD CFM CLG COTG CO CA CONN CONT CP CI CV CW DIA DI DN DR DWBP DWG (E) EL EWC EWH FCO FD 'FDC iFHC F'HR FHV IFHVC FL FLH FOA FOF FOR FOS FOV FP FP FSK ESP FS FT EU GAL GPM CV HB HCLG HD HT HW HWC ID AUTOMATIC BALL DRIP REMARKS BUILDING DOWN DRAIN DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMP DRAWING EXISTING ELEVATION ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ELECTRIC WATER HEATER FLOOR CLEANOUT FLOOR DRAIN FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FIRE HOSE CABINET FIRE HOSE RACK FIRE HOSE VALVE FIRE HOSE VALVE CABINET FLOOR FLOOR HYDRANT FUEL OIL ALARM PANEL FUEL OIL FILL PIPING 77 GPH 0 80'F TEMPERATURE RISE ABBREVIATIONS AREA DRAIN ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR BOTTOM OF PIPE BOTTOM OF THE BEAM BALANCING VALVE CALCULATION CONDENSATE DRAIN CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CEILING CLEANOUT TO GRADE CLEANOUT COMPRESSED AIR PUMP CONNECTION CONTINUATION CIRCULATING PUMP CAST IRON CHECK VALVE COLD WATER DIAMETER DEIRONIHR FUEL OIL RETURN PIPING FUEL OIL SUPPLY PIPING FUEL OIL VENT PIPING F UEL OIL PUMP FIRE PUMP FLOOR SINK FIRE STANDPIPE f LOW SWITCH FEET FIXTURE UNIT LOW PRESSURE NATURAL GAS GALLONS GALLONS PER MINUTE GATE VALVE HOSE BIBB HUNG CEILING HEAT DETECTOR HEAT TRACING HOT WATER HOT WATER CIRCULATION INSIDE DIAMETER WALL MOUNTED. FLUSH VALVE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS WALL MOUNTED. FLUSH VALVE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. WALL MOUNTED. FLUSH VALVE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. IN- SINK- ERATOR, MODEL BADGER 5, 1/2HP, 120V, SINGLE PHASE, 120V. IN- SINK- ERATOR, MODEL H -770, 115V, 6.5AMPS, SINGLE PHASE 4 SMOCK ABSORBER -..... Q -_-,-.- MANUAL AIR VENT :!d — AUTOMATIC AIR VENT — +--VALVE (SPECIFICATION FOR TYPE) - ---- CHECK VALVE SOLENOID VALVE - .•.�� PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE - CHECK VALVE WITH A.B.D. - --' • -A- -- BALANCING VALVE rx' ----- VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH C1 REUEF VALVE MIXING VALVE P ANGLE RELIEF VALVE 4 WATER FLOW SWITCH PUMP METER e ® FLOOR DRAIN, AREA DRAIN o POINT OF CONNECTION (NEW TO EXISTING) -C•: I� H -4- I ACV 1 L i LPG DCVA RPBP MANUFACTURER & MODEL # A.O. SMITH, DSE -20 15KW, THREE PHASE, 480V, 18.0 AMPS. 27 "H x 20 1/2" DIA. x 25" DEPTH VACUUM BREAKER OSkY (OUTSIDE SCREW & YOKE) VALVE GAS COCK VALVE UNION LEGEND REDUCER 1 ECCENTRIC REDUCER (E.R.) SLEEVE PRESSURE GAUGE AND COCK THERMOMETER • SPRINKLER INSPECTOR TEST STATION FLOOR SINK ROOF DRAIN OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION WALL MOUNTED FIRE HOSE VALVE FIRE HOSE VALVE CABINET FIRE DEPT. HOSE VALVE W/ CAP & CHAIN ROOF MANIFOLD SPRINKLER FLOOR CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY HOSE BIBB ALARM CHECK VALVE W/ ALL RELATED APPURTENANCES PRE- ACTION VALVE W/ ALL RELATED APPURTENANCES DRY PIPE VALVE W/ ALL RELATED APPURTENANCES DOUBLE CHECK VALVE BPA t BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY LIST OF FIELD VERIFICATION ITEMS - PLUMBING — — SAN — — I SANITARY OR WASTE BELOW FLOOR - ST r STORM DRAIN PIPING - T OVERFLOW STORM PIPING - OST M) SAN SANITARY OR WASTE ABOVE FLOOR IW CD DR F t I lc (x1 I . EXISTING GAS METER CAPACITY 2. EXISTING GAS PIPING SIZE AND LAYOUT 2. EXISTING SEWER CONNECTION AND INVERT ELEVATION 3. EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVE LOCATION 4. EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER LRIE 5. EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER METER LOCATION LIST OF FIELD VERIFICATION ITEMS -FIRE PROTECTION TEST F. N! INFQRIIATION: 1. HYDRANT FLOWED 2. FLOW (GALLONS PER MINUTE) 3. RESIDUAL PRESSURE (PSI) 4. STATIC PRESSURE (PSI) 5. MAIN (INCH) 6. TEST LOCATION ( ADDRESS) SPD SED P = SAN, VENT STACK OR DOMESTIC WATER RISER �111100 L = STORM DRAIN LEADER RISER RISER F = FIRE STANDPIPE RISER I►_ --- RISER NO. T LEGEND EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION DETAIL DESIGNATION -"'- DETAIL NUMBER --� DWG. SHEET NO. SHEET NOTE NUMBER REVISION NUMBER INDIRECT WASTE CONDENSATE DRAIN SPRINKLER DRAIN PIPING 1 SUMP PUMP DISCHARGE SEWAGE EJECTOR DISCHARGE - -- SPV - -- • SUMP PUMP VENT FIRE WATER SUPPLY --- SP FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING FSP -- COMBINED FIRE STANDPIPE - - - SEV -- -- SEWAGE EJECTOR VENT FOS FUEL OIL SUPPLY PIPING FOR FUEL OIL RETURN PIPING FOV FUEL OIL VENT PIPING G NATURAL GAS PIPING (LOW PRESSURE) MG NATURAL GAS PIPING (MEDIUM PRESSURE) SW DOMESTIC SOFT WATER PIPING VENT PIPING DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPING DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN PIPING EXISTING PIPING EXISTING PIPING TO BE REMOVED CHANGE IN PIPE ELEVATION ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW PITCH PIPE DOWN IN DIRECTION OF ARROW - WALL HYDRANT FLOOR CLEANOUT /GRADE CLEANOUT FLOOR CLEANC,JT /GRADE CLEANOUT PIPE D(''aN PIP_ UP BOTTOM PIPE CONNECTION TOP PIPE CONNECTION P -TRAP Y STRAINER WITH BLOW OFF VALVE --- FLEXIBLE CONNECTION L (t) EXPANSION LOOP SIZE �--� EQUIPMENT • — EQUIPMENT NO. '�--- VALVE IN VERTICAL • ,• 4 4 d 4 ,TOTES: �.+.�.�._. ....., _....,_ �..�:. 4 41 4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR SIZING SCHEDULE ITEM - ITEM NO. I FIXTURE UNIT CAPACITY 655 -D 161 TO 113 COLD WATER LINE --\: SHUT -07 VALVE ----4.- TRAP PRIMER VALVE i TRAP PRIMER AIR GAP --- 1. TRAP PRIMER VALVE SHALL BE MOUNTED ONE FOOT ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR FOR EVERY 20 FEET OF PRIMER LINE. 2. INSTALL TRAP PRIMER PIPING AND UNIT PER , - MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. PIPING MUST SLOPE TO POINT OF CONNECTION TO DRAIN WITHOUT TRAPS IN PIPING TRAP PRIMER INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE AIR GAP • TP e N DEEP SEAL 'P' TRAP MANUFACTURER SIOUX CHIEF MANUFACTURER DRAIN BODY WITH TRAP PRIMER INLET - ili= ilt= iTi =iTi- ‘-c FLOOR SINK - I I -1I I -1I I -1 11= �= Ill =lll =1 I F- -111=111=1 oIREcTiar, OF mow � REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE ASSEMBLY INDOOR HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION - WILKINS MODEL 975XL 2 SCALE: NONE - - 1 '12" MIN. 30" I MAX. 1 PO.0 ''. Pf RMIZ P ND APPRO`I . REQUIRED r UNISYS //, UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 ,pb Na 21323503 CONSTRUCTION / BID SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET true OescriptK'n Flack + Kurtz Inc: 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101 -2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fox. (206) 342 -9901 `11/8P . OW a.. 10.14.03 09.30.03 09.24.03 09/IF293 Dote nrAefiltrow . DEC 0 3 "Alla D an AJ Os& Ow" Appwd Wei NTS PLUMBING LEGEND AND t ABBREVIATIONS WILKINS BACKFLOW PREVENTER SIZE: 2 ", MODEL 975XL NEW 2 "DOMES i IC WATER SERVICE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION POINT OF CONNECTION .. ---�►� --i. BY CIVIL 5' -0" 1 /4 "CW MAKE -UP WATER FOR EXPANSION TAN REMOVE AND CAP EXISTING COLD WATER LINE TO CLEAR NEW ELECTRICAL ROOM SPACE EXPANSION TANK (E)GAS METER TO REMAIN 3 /4 "PUMPED CONDENSATE UH -3 (75MBH) SHEET NOTES NUMBERED NOTES CRAC UNIT DISCHARGE CONDENSATE DRAINS TO SERVICE SINK THROUGH AN AIR GAP WILKINS BACKFLOW PREVENTER SIZE: 2 ". MODEL 975XL A CHANICAL U, ITS AND EQU!F AL MAKE -UP WATER FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED "NON POTABLE WATER ". GAS -P_ SIZfNS: EXISTING GAS LOA C T F I TING UNIT HEATER C S OAD NEW GAS LOAD: AC -2: 200M8H. AC - -3: 200MBH, AC -4: 50 BH, UH -1: 25MBH. UH-2: SOMBH, UH -3: 75MB EXISTING GAS METE R : • ` • • • • � , •` - VC1NPt c C rr NEW GAS PIPE SIZE IS BASED ON: 350 TOTAL DEVELOPED LENGHT. VERIFY ON SITE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN LOCA ?!ON OF EXISTING GAS METER AND THE MOST REMOTE EQUIPMENT AND ADJUST PIPE SIZE TO ACTUAL DISTANCE BASED ON TABLE 12 -3 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE. (E)2 "GAS 1"CD-U (24TONS) (E)UNIT HEATER TO BE REMOVED 1 "COMDENATE (BY GRAVITY) 1 "G (75MBH 1 1/2"G-UP T -._. (250MBH) 1 1/2"G-UP (250M9H) • , RELOCATED (E)UNIT HEATER - . .— _.. UH -1 (25MBH) MATCH EXISTING GAS PIPE SIZE Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 • • UNISYS F)1 VE SET CONSTRUCTION /' Be SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET Ione Description Fran Al Clock Ivor 2=500 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN UNISYS Flack + Kurtz inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle. WA 98101 -2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax (206) 342 -9901 ` VISP — 0.1. mum" Omer d 11.26.03 10.14.03 £9.30 03 09.24 03 09(@9'93 Dole DEC o 3 2003 r kis 113 1 wove' • • l , I • • 4 1 1' L. ' •••• • • ti • • 1 • 4 - t• -` • -1 5: 4-.1 •••••■+. Jr • ••••p•O•1111. t 4 4.44 I. It•••a• a-, , l• a 1/4 1 • :r . - . L 4 4 0 4 • • ••• 7 T- T t X sr t• -- • . . ((E)FIRE HO 1 • `. - S ' - . • .1- • . : - 4-- t - -It-. • - -r - ; . .. 1. " % • : r !- . - - • • - '5 • . • • .4 • +-L.-- - ; • 4 •41L_ • • • . -4 •;-+- II -; - 1- r •• --- 41_ .... 4 i• 4 -t- 1 * - '- 4+ • - I s . 0 1 -44-iti 4- 4 ... 4 4 -... 1-;.- . ' ' ' t - t • • • 4---4-1- ; I. .;._:.1 .. 1,i,i, : 'Ift'll'eleF.ttIP. . 4 ..........,...... j.-. 4 . : !.... _ -• t 1- • • - - 4-- • 14 1 - - - - • • • • ; . ' • - ••■ : . ' ' ' • • • ima • t 14- . _ ip4.,= - k • - •••- • -1- 4. -4 • • S J. . :.: - 4 ; • • • r • -* -• ••■ 4.-.01.4 ••■•••■•• • • ••-- , -44 -1 •--■-• ; ••• - ; • 44. ••• 4 • ; r- ', • : I. (WIRE HOS 1TD REMOVE -4. • 4 4. 44 4 •- . ; . • • • -1- ...5 7 I S: . 7 :41 1, r t i: ......"'.."4, -4 : .*.......'""''. . '• •4 44.5 - :4-1 4-1 4- t 1 4 4..1 4 t .4M 111 ,1 111,1 1 1 ' s 4.- -4. 1 ■ I. . 1 4 , • • .44 4- t... 4: • • ,..... , ta „.,, , " - t - • ,- 5----f+#4-1' -- --,-----, . .... . , ..t .. a ...... 5 - 1-; " reel • - ........- _ ......; .11 • • • ' ' t 441111kr• • 1-• r.44- ;4,1 ; 1 •t . 4: C 1-4 - I . t " - '1 - ' N( : L . .4 : - • - 54 S I • is 4 4 • I • - _ - r• • S . ; 1 1 - I , L T *. -- - . ' UP . . • 1 ..•. • • • • I • SHEET NOTES A. SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE FULL-BUILDING WET SYSTEM. RUN SPRINKLER PIPING ABOVE CEILING. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM. REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 1 5470 FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM INFORMATION. D. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE SPRINKLER HEADS, SIZE, LAYOUT SPRINKLER PIPING AND PROVIDE HYDRAUUC CALCULATIONS TO SUPPORT NEW SPRINKLER SYSTEM. C. COORDINATE SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT AND PIPING WITH LIGHTING, HVAC AND ALL OTHER TRADES. I INSTALL SPRINKLERS ABOVE AND BELOW CEILING. G. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXISTING TYPE OF SPRINKLER HEAD. NEW SPRINKLER HEADS BELOW AND ABOVE CEILING SHALL BE THE SAME MANUFACTURER. G. MIXING BRANDS AND TYPES WITH DIFFERENT K IS NOT ALLOWED. H. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY DOUBLF. DETECTOR CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY LOCATION. I. THE AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL CONFORM TO THE REOUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARD # 13. NO SPRINKLER PIPING SERVING AREAS OUTSIDE ANY ELECTRICAL ROOM SHALL BE ROUTED THROUGH ANY ELECTRICAL ROOM. t l ; • .4 (E)SPRINKLER DRAIN (E)CHECK VALVE (E)POST INDICATING VALVE (E)FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (E)8"FIRE MAIN (E)SPRINKLER BRANCHES(TYP.) 3 LIGHTING SPRINKLER HEADS IN ALL AREAS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE ARCHITECT, REFLECTED CEILING PLAN, FIXTURES AND MECHANICAL DIFFUSERS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CURRENT FLOW DATA. CONFIRM FLOW DATA PRIOR TO DESIGN Ate LAYOUT OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM. 5. 4"C4 • . ba5.4s SEPARATE PEWIT Iwo APPRovsk REQUIRED e tt Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 UNISYS UNISYS Issue Description ONSTRUC110N MD SET PERACT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET cYP:i4.5 / S Rack + Kurtz Inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-2260 Tel (206) 342-9900 Fax. (206) 342-9901 WSP amp 4444 11.1 Dram Ai csiKk _Ow igrovti 1 / 1 / Dote Sr t sot& V15=T-0* FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN PLAN .1r ■•• a , 10.14.03 09.30.03 09.24.03 09A3 4 . ••1111.114141144. 41411...• if` AO, • • • • .... 11 SHEET NOTES A. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS ANC ELEVATIONS OF ALL NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES. 8. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND KITCHEN EQUIPMENT EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN SHALL BE SPECIFIED PY THE ARCHITECT. C. FIELD VERIFY LOCATION, AND EXTEND OF EXISTING PIPING ADJUST POINTS Oi CONNECTION OF NEW TO EXISTING PIPING ACCORDINGLY. D. PROVIDE FILTERED 1 /4 "CW STUB - OUT FOR COFFEE MAKER. E. CONNECT 1 /2 " ^W TO WATER FILTER AND CONNECT TO COFFEE MAh!R. MAkF PIPE CONNECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. F. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL INSTA -HOT UNDER SINK. MAKE PIPE CONNECTIONS S IN ACCORDANCE TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. G. CONNECT ' /2"CW UNE FROM SINK COLD WATER SUPPLY AND CONNECT TO HOT WATER MACHINE. H. ACCESS PANEL FINAL LOCATIONS SUBJECT TO ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. NUMBERED NOTES EWH - . REFER TO WATER HEATER SCHEDULE, DWG P0.0. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF WATER HEATER WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE WITH DRIP PAN AND THERMAL EXPANSION TANK. DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE TO FLOOR SINK THROUGH AIR GAP. I • CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING SANITARY LOCATION, SIZE, CONDITION AND INVERT ELEVATION. SEWAGE EJECTOR PUMP MIGHT BE REQUIRED W EXISTING INVERT ELEVATION OF SANITARY LINE IS HIGHER THAN NEW INVERT ELEVATION. ALL PIPING BELOW FLOOR SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH EXISTING FOOTINGS. REROUTE PIPING AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR EXISTING r BOILING FOOTINGS. 2 2 "V -RISE, 4 "SAN, 1 1/4"CW(TYP.OF6) 1 y4 » TRAP PRIMER VALVE � C-2 -� / WITH ACCESS PANEL �� -1 FD -1- Pc .,1 1 �4" 4.9- CONNECT TO EXISTING --/4" SANITARY SYSTEM. TRAP PRIMER VALVE WITH ACCESS PANEL ,. • (TYP.) 4 "SAN -DN BELOW FLOOR gwH -1 - MOUNTED ON SHELF DRIP PAN ED= 2"V-DN WC-2 WCO 4 \. WHA -1 2 "V -DN - FOR ADDITIONAL PLUMBING WORK AT THIS AREA REFER TO DWG P -1.0 1 /2 "TRAP PRIMER LINE (TYP.) !1 FCO 1 J 2 "V -DN -- 3 . - w we -1_1 FCO FCO 3 "- 3 /4 "HW 3 /4 "CW -DROP • bib .; • f -- 1/2"CW -DROP JO TRAP PRIMER VALVE - --- - .11■11 , — i 4 2" I 2" -4, t\___ 7`MV -1� 3" � • FIELD ROUTE AND CONNECT - -- $ /4" TO EXISTING VENT SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY SIZE AND EXACT LOCATION 1 POINT OF CONNECTION - Lit 1 1/2"V -RISE, 2'SAN, 1 /2 "HW & 1 /2 "CW (TYP.OF 4) 1 1 /2 "V -RISE, 2 "SAN, 1 "CW (TYP.OF2) 2 "V -DN W CO 4" - "CW- DROP SHUT -OFF VALVE ::2i "HW -DROP 1" 4 cw SEE DRAWING P -1.0 2" 1 /2" r r 2 "V-DN, ' 1 1 2 " 3 SEE DRAWING P -1.0 )VH -1 4 1 /2 "CW- STUBOUT FOR COFFEE MAKER - - WCO 1/ 1 / •!4 ' /2 "CW -DROP 1 1/2"V 2 "SAN 2 "SAN -DROP BELOW FLOOR FCO 4 • ' T• � 1 /2 "HW -DROP • ' 1 "V -RISE, 2 "SAN -DN, 1 /2 "HW 4C 1/2 WF -1 • 4 frib3 -1. S { •• • WV' SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVA1 REQUIRED UNISYS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Way S. Tukwila, WA 98168 awry Description A YE SET CONSTRUCTION / 8$D SET PERMIT SET PROGRESS SET COORDINATION SET EXPIRES Flack + Kurtz inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-2260 Tel (206) 342 -9900 Fax. (206) 342 -9901 WSP A or E-. 11.26.03 10.14 03 09.30.03 09.2403 09) 3 Dote '�n► c�cnlln.,., DEC a s 200 '''o' IT rER Rahn AJ (fed Owner A�rovd ice 25215110 - K't-a PLUMBING ENLARGED ALAN r ,. • . r P,matalziat ::r 'sr" 1 . i • rc ,`►&asti _ _ to°1i1 • , ^f V • AC-1 UNIT REFER TO MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION AC-2 UNIT REFER TO MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION VCD—DN (12TONS) AC-3 UNIT REFER TO MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION AC-4 UNIT REFER TO MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN FO k EXACT LOCATION UNISYS UNISYS Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. - Tukwila, -WA 98168 I. PLUMBING ROOF PLAN tgb Nte moo scci, WT-0* Issue Description Dole Flack + Kurtz Inc. 1417 Fourth AVE Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98101-2260 Tel (206) 342-9900 Fox. (206) 342-9901 11 01 WSP Ur ..4.7 lE SET 11.26.03 CONSTRUCTION BID SET 10 14.03 PERMIT SET 09.30 03 P PROGRESS SET 09.24 03 COORDINATION SET 09,4120 3 Ir • • or .■ . ..11411111116. .1■ .1111N. ".11111r1.44" 4.101131 4 4 4 ,/' -W/ 12'0 TAP TO -FPL-4 aM4O 18'• MP TO FPT-11. ` _ REDUCES' TO 1 F'.• , us ELL 11 I fro , ■C UNIT. I �* i ! 1.12 140 TYP -2 CD -2 75 TYP -2 ;;R -1 I (530) (TYP - 2) , -- '•+iiitiFt!!�1IH 8'. R -1 450) (TYP -2 14 "/ WEN r ;1 140 TYP -6 'CR -1 •(1730). I ft II - 16 ('IYI'. 2) J ? F_• • M ■III 11111111_ 1 18x12 -- z - -t -' -�.{ • : I - -•i"- tGRR,LE (MI. 3) • t _ ! 1 1; } far - - 44,04 + ' ! 1 ' T• t 1 1 -- ; 1-- + r I I I - t i I i r •— • 4 ' i : . ' • t , - 4.....». - :.._.. t ...T_..:.,- 1 t - I • ' -- +- 14".• ",4 --- . 1•. ., ..f... i . -.. . -_ ... -' ••- - .4.._.-4w_.w 4- •.a. - t . -,. • 1---.--.J.._.: .. .... - • • .. .. y..... • ii 1 I "' j ; i i , t 1 , t } { 1 Y-- +--- ►-- + --4- -i I - • -••- - • 4-4.+-4-4 1- -- . •._.._____4..__ - - --4 - .�•- -. } ` i ! I 1 4.-4. -- *-- 4..1 T - 1--- #-- �-•.-1--- ..:..t --• _ - .t___. a t t + . .• Er.. _.. • . • •- ..•1.-- _. -y... , r—.�� sr• .. • '.�.: 4,:`iceT - mara»s or cc remits maids on >t•• awry eta wifis fit'i W. 1 c•. nr anee,.e earned* from cntnpftn+ce won ''q . 'Ns check S Qn y tot "won of as vowing, T con0ea of trite OA of at prefect - .., apnpaanne wit* the xabffnat!on given in the oonbact aou► • ••o, The contr4•we ts napponseds far prrrvrdm 9 IS infannswan "mars. . ' . 'nom cknfivning and C nslati l a�/ Quinn** " wt. • ' tatb: •rata,^ *41. w h'lgIes ono easuenoss of . &don, onondrating work With ems of agar Min am p. • I, el a safe and saastecdcry mtinner NOOaotta on fi x Owe. • AMMO ! changes b Pia use Xoo,n don* dehout MfRwR atAtwotali0at *Ott ths goofs . FLACK + KURTZ NC -4•-- -- -CR -_1 -_ If ttlt i I DATE: 12 -04-03 L y t•--: -- ..+F- -- 4.i... - ....- ....— �......p..........., r._..,, — :•-- r..—. __ • ` ,j.,..,..; - ` �.- . - t .. 1 . . j.-•- • ...• . � or ..... • •••• ' •••••!: • . 1 ... i ....M.....}.... .- ,�.._ ' r... a.. _ ...i...�•4 - -.4_.. ...... :.. -_. - - • ..L.,................-_,................... .; •� • ' �• i '�1'' . -- rte.. +4• i .J w....•.1. —i ... ►. -.. ' — ..r...i. ..r. iframEsioci, .. , i , i • ...i....'—.1—, .... • Al. • ••••••■•••■••• • •••••••••••••■•■• i. j ' j i t • j I ; ; i ' ' ARC T}� _: r t i: t j + I 1 �Cf I tt _-• t•----t r -- -I --s - -•-r _ '..1._ ,�_ . _ ;7"4" _ .� . 8 a , N , 7. • 22'0 %sa., 22 11411111g ` CR -1 CD -2 225 TYP -2 TYP- 300 T / / 6 'r B/0 CD -2 2 + ( TYP) I BDD .. ••• . ••» ••• -r - •• _i•a • - - :.7 - •'s IAN 0 9 2(iO4 Drown By 073805 Project Mgr Gateway North, Building 7 11621 East Marginal Way S. Tukwila WA 98168 UNISYS CONSTRUCTION / BD SET PERMIT SET MECHANICAL F sue t W WSW It' W' =T- 10.14.03 09.30.03 09.24.03 09.12.03 Dote sa N • (J 8pe a • •CD -2 260 ITYP -2 CD -2 10 "0 CD4 88 260 " TYP -2 JO SD-2 CD -2 18 "0 UP TO EF -1 %wax. Ala tut fox. ALL Ducts iti3OuE 6'P. (km) D _ 1 1 ---- c T�e -1 T WE REFER PIPING FROM CRC-1 TO COND. UNIT ON ROOF W /BDD DE.L.CrE SA+ovF DETEcrnrL ° sl CONDENS•G • - i UNIT FOR , CRAC -1 ON ROOF I Q SD -2 ° ij i v J ` 4 CD -2 G •• •e••••• • Irma. w111; 90 :Lr3Ow fo PeJa Aununt oN. • a a CD -2 v ° f t--• • _I • ,._..r.....i.r �._ .••..... .. -•.•. - rap. , , I t t , • • CD-2 SD-2 • (140) (TYP -7) 4 ° • .s —ter — •j .+..- — .•......r.... NUMBERED NOTES O PROVIDE SHUT METAL PUNK OFF PANELS PAINTED FLAT BUCK. OP AC -1 ANO AC -4 LOCATED ON ROOF, 71 x26 SUPPLY AND 7644 RETURN BOTH PROVIDED WITH SECURITY BARRIER GRILLES TITUS MODEL SG -86- AT ROOF PENETRATION. PROVIDE PROVIDE DUCT WITH 1 -3 AL WITH PERFORATED METAL UNER FOR 15' -0' AFTER CONNECTION WITH AIR HANDUNG UNIT. AC -2 AND AC -3 LOCATED ON ROOF, 55x24 SUPPLY AND 62x19 RETURN BOTH PROVIDED WITH SECURITY BARRIER GRILLES TITUS MODEL SG- BG -FM AT ROOF PENETRATION. PROVIDE DUCT WITH 1 -3 AL WITH PERFORATED METAL USER FOR I5' -0' AFTER CONNECTION WITH AIR HANDUNG UNIT. PROVIDE TITUS SG-BC-FM SECURITY BARRIER GRILL, SIZED AND MODIFIED TO MATCH ROOF PENETRATION. PROVIDE SECURITY BARRIER GRILLE, SEE DETAIL 12/M -4.0 INSTALL BMS PC WITH PERIPHERALS CGNNECTED TO EMERGENCY POWER IN SECURITY ROOM 11. UNIT HEATER LOCATED IN PLENUM PROVIDE REMOTE ACTUATORS (YOUNG REGULATOR MODEL 5020CC) FOR ALL BALANCING DAMPERS LOCATED OVER HARD OR INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS. PLACE ACTUATOR AND ROUTE CABLE TO NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CLG LOCATION. SEE DRAWING M1.0 FOR LOCATION OF THESE CRAC UNITS 4, CD -2 I .s . • • ' • ••••••■■• • • .1. _._._-• ---� - sass -- — s _ Zr 4 ` • SHEET NOTES A. PROVIDE 10' -0 OF 1 ACOUSTIC LINING AT DISCHARGE OF ALL FPT'S O. FOR ALL FPT RA, CR -I, CONNECTIONS REFER TO M -0.1 FOR RA GRILLE NECK INLET SIZE AND CONNECTING DUCT SIZE TO FPT WITH FINAL ROUND- SQUARE TRANSITION REQUIRED AT BOX, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CFM BASED ON TOTAL BOX CFM C. FOR ALL DIFFUSERS, CD -2, CONNECTIONS REFER TO M -0.1 FOR NECK INLET SIZE AND CONNECTING DUCT SIZE. D. COORDINATE CEILING ACCESS LOCATIONS FOR ALL FPT'S, VALVES, AC UNITS, ETC. LOCATED ABOVE CEILING WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR IN ORDER TO PROVIDE ACCESS THROUGH THE INSULATION OVER THE ACOUSTIC TILE CEIUNG. C. =mots CO MRACTOR TO *WY 11401 SIDE OF EACH FPT tfT . Fla UP FROM THIS PI MI PRIOR TO NISTAULNG FPT OOW101S ALL DUCT SW F" l S Sf4EET MEW SRES• per ARE OUTSDE DMNSI 6) F. POW SEPA TE P REQUIRED FOR MECH ANICA` ELEC WOOING GA S PIP1NG • I,(VV11..A cm( o G DIVISIO ,V11.D" 4 s' • • t -1 r _ CR -1 8't Q .. - -.... a—INI 10r1O 13 .... .- _...._- . ._.,, .. -- i... __...__•:_. • ; • • ' r • r DROPS TO •: kk caws � (Mk 2) x-16" TO Ell R4 �y -� GRILLE (T 6) --�• • , �.. co _2 .. . -. -4; .i - (830) (TYP -12) Hat 'f r• SI _MOW a /W 2 .. 1 --14 DROP •• - fit ustRs --. ) • �--- 30 HGH . 14r IfiGH t - • • _ yam f j1-•, . ___ .•._ •ma r • - - i ,, .4... 1. :- _ - - _._. • • 8•. • • "--4 {TYP) t I. s : • ' .... : sirs. :'- ..:i -... _. =• . :.* :':� -: ! _ ' - «.. _ ... - i".. 7 - : - :_"_k r,S SHOWN CD- 41